Trimble RealWorks User Guide

User's Guide

Trimble RealWorks

9.0

Printed on 26 November, 2014

Contents

Welcome 15

What's New in Trimble RealWorks 19

Installing Trimble RealWorks

System Requirements

Trimble RealWorks

Trimble Scan Explorer

Trimble Scan Explorer - Web Viewer

About Graphics Cards

Enforce the Use of the High Performance Graphics Card

Check the Version Number of the OpenGL Library

About Open Source Libraries and Licenses

Download Trimble RealWorks

Download Trimble Update NetWork License Utility

Install Trimble RealWorks

Trimble RealWorks Plant Tables

Storage Tank Application

Update Trimble RealWorks

Modify, Repair and Remove Trimble RealWorks

License Files

Oil, Gas & Chemical License Files

HASP License Files

Contact Trimble

Getting Started with Trimble RealWorks 61

Start Trimble RealWorks

Open Your First Project

Get Familiar With the Working Environment

User Interface

Start Page

Menu Bar

63

64

65

66

67

67

Toolbars 68

Windows 68

31

46

47

48

48

42

43

44

45

51

60

36

39

40

41

33

33

33

34

35

ii Contents

Tools and Commands

Customize the User Interface

Close Trimble RealWorks

Performing Basic Operations

Supported Formats in RealWorks

Trimble 3D Scanning Files

RealWorks Files

TZF Files

TZS Files

Trimble Survey Project Files

JobXML, JOB and RAW Files

ASCII Files

Trimble TX5 and Other FLS Files

Surveying Network ASCII Files

SIMA ASCII Files

AutoCAD Files

IXF Files

RIEGL Scan Project Files

Z+F Scan Files

CMF Files

LAS and LAZ Files

E57 Files

PTX Files

PTS Files

DotProduct Files

Open a Project File

Import a Project File

Import FLS Files

Connect to a Mobile Device

Open Trimble Scan Explorer

Open Trimble RealColor

Open Trimble SketchUp

Import an Image Into a Project

Performing Operations on TZF Scans

Post-Process TZF Scans

Re-Project TZF Scans

Create Sampled Scans

Modify the Path for Input TZF Scan Files

Create Thumbnails

Generate Point Color-Coding by Height

Copy Original TZF Scan Files into Project

Create Station Images from TZF Scan Color

Merge Several Projects In One

Scans Tree

Models Tree

Targets Tree

79

90

94

95

148

149

150

152

153

154

155

157

161

163

164

165

166

168

168

169

170

140

140

141

143

144

146

118

121

124

125

127

128

130

133

134

135

139

97

97

98

99

103

105

112

115

Images Tree

Save the Merged Project

Save Projects

Save a Project

Save a Project As

Undo an Operation

Redo an Operation

Close Projects

Close the Selected Project

Close all Projects

Capture the Screen

Set Preferences

Viewer Preferences

HD Display Preferences

Navigation Preferences

General Preferences

Units Preferences

Print Preference

Improvement Program Preferences

Organization of Data

Project Data

Scans Tree

Targets Tree

Models Tree

Images Tree

Project Cloud

Get all Points

Get Remaining Points

Active Group

Group and Object Nodes

In the WorkSpace Window

In the List Window

Exploring Data 205

Expand and Shrink the Project Tree

Locate an Item in the Project Tree

Find an Item in the Project Tree

Explore in the 3D View

Explore in the Images Tree

Visualizing Data

Hide all Items

Hide all Except those Selected

207

208

209

210

211

212

Point Cloud 212

Geometry 215

216

217

191

193

194

195

196

197

198

199

200

201

202

202

202

Contents

171

173

178

178

178

179

180

181

181

181

182

183

184

185

186

187

188

188

189

iv Contents

Image 217

Station 221

Inspection Map

TZF Scan

231

233

ColorBar 237

Rendering Data 250

Render a Point Cloud

Render a Geometry

Change the Color of a Point Cloud

Change the Color of a Geometry

Render a Point Cloud With Gray-Scale Intensity With Color

Define a Cloud Rendering Setting

Color a Point Cloud Coded by Elevation

Add a Lighting Direction

Navigating Through Data

Customize the Mouse Buttons

Set the Head Up Option

Set a Displacement Mode

Set a Projection Mode

Align to a View

Align to a Standard View

251

253

255

256

257

259

263

265

267

267

268

269

284

285

289

Editing Data

Drag and Drop an Item

Cut and Paste an Item

Copy and Paste an Item

Delete an Item

Create a New Group Node

Change a Color

From the Property Window

From the Menu Bar

Change a Name

Merge Point Clouds

Pick an Item

Use the Standard Picking Mode

Use the Highest Point Picking Mode

Use the Lowest Point Picking Mode

Managing the Loading and HD Rendering of Points

Load Data

Process Data

Display Points in HD

HD Display Mode Inside a Tool

HD Display Mode Outside a Tool

291

301

302

303

304

304

309

311

293

294

296

298

299

300

300

313

315

316

318

319

321

Basic Tools

Measurement Tool

Open the Tool

Distance Measurements

Angular Measurements

Point Measurement

Orientation Measurements

Refine a Measurement

Save a Measurement

Segmentation Tool

Open the Tool

Draw a Fence

Keep In (or Out)

Create the Segmentation Results

Sampling Tool

Open the Tool

Choose a Sampling Method

Frame Creation Tool

Open the Tool

Select a Reference Frame

Build a Frame without Constraints

Build a Frame with Constraints

Create the Built Frame

Clipping Box Extraction Tool

Open the Tool

Pick a Clipping Box Position

About the Clipping Box

Check the Current Loaded Points

Extract Points from a Specific Area

Close the Tool

Shift a Project

Convert a Geometry to a Mesh

Create a Merged Mesh

Generate Key Plans

Generate a key Plan from TZF Scans

Generate a Key Plan from the Current View

Tools in the Registration Module

Auto-Extract Targets and Register

Open the Tool

Target Types

Scan Creation

Reference Station

Register Stations

Contents

323

387

388

389

390

400

401

404

405

406

407

408

411

412

360

360

372

373

374

374

380

386

350

352

353

354

357

359

360

325

326

327

338

345

345

350

413

415

416

418

419

420

421

vi Contents

Auto-Register Using Planes (Target-Less)

Open the Tool

Reference Station

Register Stations

Registration Report

Save in RTF Format

Options 431

Target-Based Registration Tool

Open the Tool

Select a Reference Station

Auto-Pair Targets

Edit Targets

Adjust Stations

Check the Adjustment

Save the Adjustment Result

Refine Registration Using Scans

Open the Tool

433

434

435

437

439

440

444

452

422

423

425

426

429

431

Choose a Reference Station

Select a Subset of Stations for the Refinement

Refine the Registration

View the Registration Report

Target Analyzer Tool

Open the Tool

Select a Station

Select a TZF Scan

Focus on Targets

Create/Edit Targets

Update the Network

Apply the Result

Cloud-Based Registration Tool

Open the Tool

Select the Reference Cloud and the Moving Cloud

Pick Three Pairs of Points

Refine Automatically the Registration

Refine Interactively the Registration

Check the Quality of the Registration

Overlap the Reference Cloud and the Moving Cloud

Save the Registration Result

Orientation Tool

Open the Tool

Define the Horizontal Axis by Picking Two Points

Automatic Axis Definition

Rotate Counterclockwise 90°

Pick the Origin

Apply Transformation

Close the Tool

Georeferencing Tool

Open the Tool

Select a Station

455

456

457

458

460

462

464

465

466

467

468

470

496

497

498

498

499

502

504

505

509

511

512

513

514

515

516

516

517

517

518

519

520

521

Assign Coordinates to Targets

Assign Coordinates to Picked Points

Save the Result

Bundle Adjustment

Name-Based Bundle Adjustment

Station Registration Parameters

Import from TZF Files

Export to TZF Files

Export to RMX Files

Register Stations With Imported RMX Files

Modify Stations

Force Leved

Modify the Instrument Height

Set Over a Known Point

Remove a Known Point

Force Unleved

Modify Target Matching

Match an item With Another Item

Match Targets

Un-match a Target

Rename a Target

Create Points

Create a Topo Point

Create a Point Cloud from Topo Points

Create 3D Points

Create a Registration Report (Target-Based)

Create a Registration Report (Scan-Based)

Tools in the OfficeSurvey Module

Cutting Plane Tool

Open the Tool

Define the Orientation of a Plane

Define the Position of a Plane

Define a Slice

Preview a Single Slice

Preview a Multiple Slice

Build Polylines

Save the Cutting Result(s)

Contouring Tool

Open the Tool

Define an Elevation Range

Calculate the Contours

Define the Principal Contours

Display the Contours

Create the Contours

Manipulate a Label

Contents

522

524

526

527

528

530

531

532

533

534

535

535

536

538

540

541

542

542

543

545

546

547

547

548

549

551

552

555

572

573

573

574

577

580

581

582

583

557

558

559

564

567

568

569

571

viii Contents

2D-EasyLine Tool

Open the Tool

Model Automatically Polylines

Model Manually Polylines

Edit Polylines

Saving Results

Mesh Creation Tool

Open the Tool

Select a Projection Mode

Preview a Mesh

Create a Mesh

Mesh Editing Tool

Open the Tool

Select an Element

Fence an Area

Edit a Mesh

Map With a Texture

Apply the Operation

Ortho-Projection Tool

Open the Tool

Define a Projection Plane

Modify a Projection Plane

Check a Projection Plane

Define a Zone of Interest

Set a Resolution

Choose a Rendering Option

Preview an Ortho-Image

Print an Ortho-Image

Split an Ortho-Image

Create an Ortho-Image

Multi-Ortho-Projection Tool

Open the Tool

Define a Polyline


Define the Image Parameters

Preview a Single Ortho-Image

Create Ortho-Images

Image Rectification Tool

Open the Tool

Choose a Station

Define a Projection Plane


Set an Image Resolution

Preview a Rectified Image

Split a Rectified Image

Create a Rectified Image

Polyline Drawing Tool

Open the Tool

Define a 3D Plane

637

639

640

641

642

642

643

613

619

622

623

624

625

629

634

599

600

605

606

607

608

609

612

584

584

587

589

590

598

599

658

659

660

664

668

669

670

671

644

644

644

647

651

654

656

658

672

672

673

Draw a Polyline

Select a Polyline

Edit a Polyline

Delete a Polyline

Move a Polyline

Auto-Duplicate a Polyline

Manually Duplicate a Polyline

Create a Polyline

Catenary Drawing Tool

Open the Tool

Pick Three Points

Create a Power Line

Image Matching Tool

Open the Tool

Select an Image

Select Markers

Modify Markers

Save Markers

Match an Image

Color Points

Apply the Matching

Volume Calculation Tool

Open the Tool

Define a Plane

Defining a Grid Resolution

Preview a Volume

Edit a Volume

Save a Volume in the Database

Profile/Cross-Section Tool

Open the Tool

Select a Method

The "From Path" Mode

The "From Segments" Method

Compute Cross-Sections

Display the Cross-Sections

Edit the Cross-Sections

Create the Profile and the Cross-Sections

Feature Set Tool

Open the Tool

Feature Code Libraries

Feature Codes

Feature Points

Set a Display Mode

Create a Feature Set

2D-Polyline Inspection Tool

Open the Tool

Select a Model for Inspection

Set a Thickness

View the 2D Inspection Result

Contents

675

683

684

688

689

694

697

698

699

699

700

701

702

702

703

705

710

714

714

719

719

720

720

738

739

739

747

752

757

758

758

759

759

759

761

763

768

768

769

769

770

770

771

721

728

729

732

737

738

x Contents

Filter the 2D Inspection Result

Save the 2D Inspection Result

Twin Surface Inspection Tool

Open the Tool

Define a Projection Surface

Determine a Resolution

Preview the Inspection

Inspection Maps

Filter the Inspection Result

Check the Inspection

Save the Inspection

Surface to Model Inspection Tool

Open the Tool

Define a Projection

Determine a Resolution

Preview the Inspection

Inspection Maps

Check the Inspection

Save the Inspection

Inspection Map Analyzer Tool

Open the Tool

Select "Points & Polylines"

Select "Sections & Shifts"

Select "Volumes & Surfaces" 839

Iso-Curves 850

Colored Meshes

Print Inspection Maps

Profile Matcher Tool

Open the Tool

Define a Cutting Plane

Define a Profile

Reverse the Profile

Create the Profile

EasyProfile Tool

788

789

790

790

791

794

795

796

803

804

805

806

808

815

856

859

860

861

863

865

870

871

872

Open the Tool

Select an Existing Profile

Set the Section Size

Modify Built Elements

Create Profiles

Fitting Tool

Open the Tool

Fence a Set of Points

Fit With a Geometry

Create a Fitted Geometry

3D Inspection Tool

Open the Tool

Preview a 3D Inspection Cloud

Filter a 3D Inspection Cloud

Create a 3D Inspection Cloud

772

773

774

775

776

782

783

784

788

872

873

874

875

878

879

879

880

881

883

884

884

885

886

887

3D Inspection Analyzer Tool

Open the Tool

Extract Clouds From 3D Inspection Clouds

Auto-Split a 3D Inspection Cloud in a Cluster of Clouds

Create the Extracted Cloud(s)

Contents

888

888

889

891

892

Tools in the Modeling Module 893

Modeling Tools

Cloud-Based Modeler Tool

Geometry Creator Tool

Geometry Modifier Tool

Intersect Tool

Duplicator Tool

Plane Bounding Tool

Change a Pipe Diameter

Export a Geometry to SketchUp

Manage SteelWorks Catalogs

SteelWorks Creator Tool

EasyPipe Tool

Export Pipe Center Lines

1105

Sub-Tools 1107

Plant Tools 1147

1148

1149

1159

1173

895

896

940

987

1053

1068

1085

1104

Media Tools

Video Creator

Open the Tool

Define a Navigation Path

Browse Keyframes

Define Video Parameters

Create a Video

Capture the Screen in High Resolution

Storage Tank Tools

Vertical Tank Calibration Tool

Open the Tool

Define the Height of the Dipping Plate

Define the Parameters of the Body

Define the Parameters of the Sump

Define the Thickness for Outside Scans

Preview the Results

Create the Results

Export the Results

1177

1179

1179

1180

1201

1202

1203

1205

1207

1209

1209

1210

1212

1213

1214

1215

1217

1218

xii Contents

Horizontal Tank Calibration Tool

Open the Tool

Define the Interval Between Two Consecutive Sections

Define the Parameters of the Sump

Define the Thickness for Outside Scans

Preview the Results

Create the Results

1219

1219

Define the Dipping Plate 1219

Define the Body Parameters 1220

1221

1221

1222

1222

1223

Export the Results

Tank Calibration Check Tool

Open the Tool

Filter all Sections

Select a Section to Edit

Edit a Section

Apply the Modifications

Vertical Tank Inspection Tool

Open the Tool

Clean the Selected Point Cloud

Fit the Selected Point Cloud With a Model

Define a Grid

Check the Verticality of a Tank

Check the Roundness of a Tank

Create a Report

Save the Inspection Results

1230

1231

1233

1234

1250

1255

1260

1262

1224

1225

1225

1225

1226

1227

1229

1230

Advanced Features

Set as Home Frame

Equalize Point Cloud Luminance

Equalize Point Cloud Color

Equalize Image Color

Color Points Using Station Images

Delete a Geometry

Exporting Data

Export a Selection as a File

Google Earth (KMZ) Format

BSF Format

PDMS Macro Format

E57 Format

LAS Format

LAZ format

AutoCAD PCG format (AutoDesk Revit MEP)

Alias/WaveFront (OBJ) Format

MicroStation (DGN) Format

1263

1265

1266

1267

1268

1270

1271

1273

1279

1280

1284

1284

1285

1285

1287

1287

1288

1289

Pointools Format

AutoCAD (DXF) Format

ASCII Format

LandXML Format

Solids for AutoCAD

Export With Advanced Features

Export Object Properties

Export Images

Export Ortho-Images

Export Measurements

Export Feature Sets

Export TZF Images

Convert to BSF Format File

Convert to E57/PTX/PTS Format File

Export Inspection Maps

Collaborate and Share Data

Publish a Project

Define the Layout of a Publication

Include Media in a Publication

Add Links in a Publication

Reduce Data Size

Enable Data Extraction

View Published Data

License Agreements

Contents

1309

1310

1318

1321

1334

1335

1336

1338

1340

1342

1342

1343

1290

1291

1292

1293

1294

1300

1303

1304

1305

1306

1308

1347

Legal Notices 1353

Index 1355

15

Welcome

The RealWorks family of products is composed of RealWorks Viewer ,

RealWorks Base , RealWorks Advanced , RealWorks Advanced-Modeler ,

RealWorks Advanced-Plant and RealWorks Advanced-Tank.

RealWorks Viewer

This is a software tool for visualizing and exploring as-built data acquired by laser scanning technologies. In general, such a data set contains a 3D point cloud and optionally a collection of 2D images. This software tool allows you to load as many point clouds as needed. Each point of a point cloud can contain not only its 3D coordinates, but also other attributes such as intensity and surface normal. You can visualize a point cloud in 3D, rotate, pan or zoom in/out in order to explore it in detail. Visualization can be enhanced in different ways: points shaded by intensity, by color or by its normal, according to a view, etc. You can also compare a 3D point cloud with 2D images (if available).

When images are registered with the 3D point cloud, you can visualize both data sets from the point of view from which the images were captured.

Features also available in RealWorks Viewer are:

Registration report and station visualization,

Sampling Tool ,

Segmentation Tool ,

Frame Creation Tool and set as Home Frame ,

Measurement Tool ,

Cutting Plane Tool ,

Tip: RealWorks Viewer is free. You can download it from the Trimble website.

You only need to fill the form that will come after clicking the link to download.

Note: You cannot save with RealWorks Viewer .

Note: RealWorks Viewer requires an RWP project file and its associated RWP folder. For more options relating to collaborating and sharing, see the Publisher function in certain modules.

RealWorks

16 Trimble RealWorks 9.0 User's Guide

This software tool provides you with a set of tools for processing 3D point clouds and 2D images in order to obtain the necessary information for your applications (or projects). Generally, this processing can be divided into three modes: Registration , OfficeSurvey™ and Modeling .

In , you can register scans with respect to other scans and/or with respect to a set of survey points. The registration method is either target-based or cloud-based. When some targets have been used, you can first check and modify them. Then the Target-Based Registration Tool automatically registers them simultaneously. The results are validated through registration errors, which can be saved in a report. You can also use the Geo-Referencing Tool to put the scanned data into a known coordinate system.

In ™, you can extract different types of 2D drawings

(polylines, contours, cross-sections, profiles, etc.) from the point clouds.

These extracted results can then be exported into CAD systems including, but not limited to, AutoCAD® and MicroStation®. You can select and match 2D images to the point clouds; generate one (or multi) orthoimage(s) or collect survey points as Total Stations can do. You can generate triangular meshes from the point clouds and if required, carry out further editing of the result(s). You can determine the volume of a point cloud (or a mesh), the volume between two point clouds (or two meshes) or the volume between a point cloud and a mesh. If the volume information is not enough, you can compare two surfaces between each other (two point clouds or meshes together, a point cloud with a mesh or a point cloud/mesh with a model) and generate an inspection map. Since the metric information is still in the inspection map, you can extract measurements like surfaces, volumes, points, drawings like polylines, sections, shifts, colored meshes, iso-curves, etc. You can match a profile

(2D curve, cross-section, polyline, etc.) at a specific point and in a given direction in a 3D scene; easily extract profiles along curbs, pavements, rail lines, cuttings, natural features, etc. or fit a set of points with a geometry which can be of planar, spherical or cylinder shape.

In , you can create a geometry of following types: Sphere , Plane ,

Cylinder , etc. The creation can be based on a point cloud selection (or not). The created geometry can be then duplicated, modified, moved, etc.

A sub-module including tools for modeling pipes and structural steelworks

(with the notion of catalogs) has been added.

All RealWorks products can support a huge amount of points. The user is able to precisely control which points are loaded into memory and thus which are available for editing with all the regular tools. All RealWorks products include tools for managing Trimble FX data; importing TZS scans, automatically creating station(s) on import with link to TZS; creating scans, extracting targets, registering the created stations, creating sampled scans with spatial resolution, converting to Trimble LASERGen format.

Welcome

19

What's New in Trimble RealWorks

This chapter lists all the new features, and the improvements that are in each version of RealWorks .


In RealWorks 9.0

The button is removed from the WorkSpace window and in the List

Window.

Measurement Tool : Add a new way to measure an orientation by picking three points.

Add to ability to change the diameter of pipe(s).

Markers

TSIP program added in Preferences .

Information about the graphic card in use in the About dialog.

Information about the OpenGL version number in the About dialog.

The extraction feature is removed from the Clipping Box Extraction Tool when the tool is as a sub-tool.

Export TZF Scans as JPG Images with color and/or intensity layer(s).

The appears in place of the 3D View . It comes up after you launch the software. From this page, you can have access to different useful links.

The extraction of corners ability is added to the Target Analyze Tool .

Warns about warranty expiration or close to expiration.

Automatic rotation center mode

Ability to pick the highest (or lowest) point on a region around the position of the mouse.

Ability to manually enter a value when rotating a geometry in the

Geometry Modifier Tool .

Ability to change the center of the manipulator in the Cloud-Based

Registration Tool .

Ability to change the width of all polylines.

Ability to compute power line from scan data.

Ability to draw a freehand selection.

Add a POSITIVE/NEGATIVE colorization mode in the inspection map.

Add reverse button to change the increment direction in inspection map analyzer.

Change slices name definition to take into account the distance to the first slice.

Export sections in Autocad (DWG/DXF)

Automatic or manual inversion of axes in a difference plot when inspecting a map resulting from a cylindrical projection.

Color Coded by Elevation sampling luminance

Add the ability to assign the buttons of a mouse for navigating or manipulating objects in the 3D View .

In , the user can create matched images from colored TZF Scans and use them for texturing purposes.

Import of RSP project files from Riegl 's RiSCAM PRO TM

Import Z+F scan files (with .zfs extension).

Ability to refine the registration of stations based on its point clouds instead of TZF Scans .

What's New in Trimble RealWorks

Adapt the refine method based on TZF Scans or on point clouds) according to the selection of stations.

In case of a refinement based on point clouds, a report will be generated like for the TZF method. the mode, the user is able to do a full turn (180°) with a mouse move that is still on the 3D View . the mode, zoom in and zoom out are on what the user is focused one.

Ability to calibrate and check a horizontal storage tank.

Ability to export entities, of geometry type, created within RealWorks toward SketchUp Pro .

Drawing

Ability to apply filters to ZFS format files.

Ability to inspection a vertical tank to check for deformations.

The HD Display is a new rendering motor in which is implemented a camera-based dynamic display loading. It enables to display more points than what the user loads.

Preferences to allocate the VRAM and RAM sizes for displaying point clouds in HD

PD format file from DotProduct

EasyPipe Tool: the way the first cylinder will be extracted changed. Two point pickings are required instead of one.


In RealWorks 8.1.1

New Tools:

RealWorks does support RWP format files bigger than 4 GB.

Version Faro Scene Import ( SDK ) included in the installer of RealWorks

8.1.0 is updated to 5.2.5.36203.

RealWorks does import the LAS and LAZ format files, from version 1.0 to

1.4.

RealWorks does export to a LAS / LAZ format file, in version 1.2.

RealWorks does export to a POD format file, a Bentley format file for point cloud.

Import E57 format file with gridded and non-gridded data.

Luminance blending added to all uniform color modes.

The allows you to visually control on a specific area the result of a registration.

New option to recompute the registration report once TZF Scans are registered together.

RealColor , a new solution for easily and efficiently colorizing TZF Scans .

Enhancement of Existing Tools: the , the Ctrl + A key combination has been added to select all items at once. In addition to this shortcut, a set of subtools has been added to manager selection '(or multi-selection).

In , only stations and scans of the selected cloud are displayed (in the dialog), instead of all from the project.

In , you are able to select interconnected stations from different groups for registration purpose.

New shortcut keys added for navigation and cloud rendering/hiding purposes. the tool, all Microsoft codecs (Microsoft RLE, Microsoft

YUV and Microsoft Video 1) are removed from the RealWorks 8.1 release.



Enhancement of Existing Tools:

The feature is not available in RealWorks Viewer .

The colors information are preserved when converting a colored TZF Scan to a PTX format file.

Fls scan, acquired with the dual-axis compensator On (compensated), is converted as a leveled TZF Scan .

Extended range density is a new level of scan which comes with an upgrade of the Trimble TX8 instrument. This level enables to acquire 3D data from 120 meters to 340 meters.

When you open several TZF Scans directly in RealWorks , in a multi-scan situation, the priority to set a TZF Scan as a Main Scan depends first on its

Type (a Full Scan has a higher priority than an Area Scan ) and then on its

Density ( Level 3 has the higher priority and Extended the lower).


New Tools:

Post-Processing TZF Scan(s): Data in the TZF Scan(s) must be postprocessed to enhance the contrast, improve the luminance and correct the noise effect issue. If needed, the TZF format file(s) can be compressed in order to reduce its size.

Re-Project TZF Scans .

Stations can contain more than on TZF Scans ,

When merging projects with TZF Scan files within, you can choose between copying TZF Scan files into the RWI folder of the merged project and keeping the link to the original TZF Scan files.

Ability to copy original TZF scan files into the project folder (RWI).

230 millimeter diameter for fitting sphere by constraints has been added.

Direct import of FLS scan files from SD cards, including color.

Version of Faro Scene Import (SDK) included in the installer of RealWorks

8.0.2 is updated to 5.1.6.




A station can now contain several TZF scans within, with one set as Main

Scan .

The ten last opened files are listed at the bottom of the File menu. As a shortcut, each of them can open by selecting it from this menu.

Generate Key Plan from TZF Scans : The feature is now called Generate

Default Key Plan (Top View) . The option used to compute the Key Plan is not based on the Elevation information but on the Cloud Rendering option chosen within RealWorks .

Target-Based Registration Tool :

Targets matched together and target groups are renamed. Instead of keeping their default name or TargetX (when they are extracted) and mTargetX where X is an order, they are renamed as XXX . XXX starts at 001 and is incremented by one.

Stations that are not selected as the input of the Target Based

Registration Tool are now removed from the Registration Details dialog.

Target Analyzer Tool :

The Re-fit and Fit buttons are replaced by an icon.

Flat Target icon has been changed in the Fitting Tool .

RealWorks no longer needs to disable the Aero function in Windows .

Graphics Card : 1GB,or higher 3D Open GL 3.2

Sub-Project Manager and Partial Loading Manager are both removed from

RealWorks 8.0 as the notion of Sub-Project and Partial Loading Manager do not exist anymore. A Point Loading Manager system has been added.

TZF Scans can be exported to E57 format as regular grid data sets.

PTX format file with several scans in the same station: A TZF Scan is created for each scan in the same station in the RealWorks project.

Features removed from RealWorks 8.0:

Erase Points from the Edit menu,

Reduce Number of Points When Moving from the

Preferences / Viewer dialog.

Project files saved in a version older than 5.0 are not supported anymore.

The file formats listed below are removed from the Open dialog:

PPF Trimble proprietary PointScape project file format,

DCP Trimble proprietary PocketScape project file format,

SOI Trimble proprietary format for scanned files.


RealWorks Plant as licensing module removed

New Tools:

Auto Register using Planes (Target Less)

Refine Registration Using TZF Scans projects.

Rename targets that are matched manually together.

Import (or export) Station Registration Parameters from (or to) TZF files.


Compatible

RealWorks Viewer , the items below have been removed:

Export Selection and Advanced Export features,

Save and Save As features,

TZF Scans features, features.



Enhancement of Existing Tools: the feature, the user can choose and set a station as Reference Station . the , targets are matched automatically.

The By-hand method has been removed.

Scan/Target Creator Tool : Polygonal Selection by adding (or subtracting, or intersecting) has been removed, TZF scans can be open directly from the Scan Target Creator Tool , and the load percentage for scans is now

20 million points.

The has been removed from 7.2

The feature has been removed. opening format file, the conversion to the TZF format is now obligatory. Declining the conversion will close the current open project.

Import Riegl file format (3dd) has been removed.

TZF scans cannot be open in a 2D Viewer .

Discontinuity Display rendering removed from the 3D View toolbar.

Export as Point Cloud for AutoCAD (PTC) feature has been removed from 7.2.

New Tools:

Generate Key Plan from TZF Scans ,

Generate Key Plan from Displayed Cloud .

Active

Able to open Trimble TX5 files (with fls or IQscan extensions).



New Features in Existing Tools:

RealWorks supports now a new type of file called Trimble Scan File which gathers two kinds of formats: TZS and TZF .

Filtering by zone is enabled when creating sampled scans from TZF / TZS scans or when converting from TZF/TZS scan files to BSF .


Conversion of proprietary scanner data files: TZS , FLS , iQscan and PTX to TZF .

New naming convention for ortho-images when splitting them into several pieces.

In , the user can now fit a set of points with a Vertical

Cylinder or a Horizontal Plane .

New Tools:

Storage Tank Tool ,

Storage Tank Check Tool .



New Features in Existing Tools: the , the user can now draw a Circular Selection . the , the user can set an axial entity's axis as X (or

Y or Y ) Axis of the frame to create.

In , some additional measurement methods have been added.

In , the user can create a Point Target by picking a point from a loaded TZS format file.

The user can use the Find Best Extrusion facility in the 3D Plane Tool to fit a plane in order to calculate an Extrusion in the Cloud Based Modeler Too l or 2D Section in SteelWorks Tool

Etc.

Enhancement of Existing Tools: the , a histogram has been added to the

From and To sliders.

The options change when importing an ASCII format file into a current open project. the , the user can apply two new constraints to a

Segment : Pick Two Planes and Pick Axial Geometry . the , the user can apply a new constraint to a 3D

Point : Pick Two Axial Entities .

Etc.

New Tools:

The user can display the 3D position and the name of each station in the

3D View .

And if required, display the Network Visual(s) of a single (or all stations).

The user can color the point cloud using station-based images.

A new licensing system has been implemented: HASP

The user can open a Trimble TSPX format file, a common project format file between RealWorks and Trimble Business Center .

Etc.


New Tools:

The user can now convert TZS formats files to PTX (or PTS) format files.



New Features in Existing Tools: the Tool , the user can now edit point cloud(s) thanks to a Point Cloud Manager . the , the Spherical Target extraction is not limited to spheres for which the radius is equal to 38.10 mm. the , three new types of measurements have been added. The user can now measure a distance in a horizontal plane, along a vertical axis or a clearance distance.

The user is able to configure the mouse buttons for Zoom In or Zoom Out .

The user is able to open or drag and drop TZS format files within

RealWorks . the (or Horizontal Slices ) feature, the user can choose the unit of measurement to represent values.

New Tools:

The .

Import of Trimble CMF format files.

Rendering cloud issued from TZS format files according to the height of points along the Z (or Elevation ) axis.

Automatic extraction of Spherical and Black and White Flat Targets and register the stations they issued from.

The user can create a plane containing the vertical axis by picking two 3D points.

He (or she) can also make vertical an axial geometry or horizontal a plane with two new tools in the Geometry Modifier Tool .

Etc.

C H A P T E R 1

Installing Trimble RealWorks

In this chapter, the user will find information about system requirements, program installation, activation and how to contact Trimble .

33

System Requirements

Trimble RealWorks

To run Trimble RealWorks , the system requirements are as shown.

Operating System : Microsoft® Windows® Seven® (64-bit OS) and 8 (64bit OS) and 8.1

Processor : 2GHz or higher

RAM : minimum 16 - 32 GB recommended

Graphics card : 1GB,or higher 3D OpenGL 3.2

Mouse : Three buttons with wheel

SSD drive recommended

Microsoft .Net Framework 4.5

SketchUp 2014, 2015 (x86) and 2015 (x64) from Trimble

Note: Always update graphics card drivers before using Trimble 3D Spatial

Imaging office software.

Note: Trimble 3D Spatial Imaging office software is designed to provide superior data processing and editing performance. To ensure the best possible software use experience, and an optimum productivity/cost-of-equipment ratio,

Trimble highly recommends that users acquire the most powerful hardware configuration available at the time of purchase of the computer equipment on which the software is intended to be used.

Trimble Scan Explorer

Here are the minimum and recommended hardware requirements for Trimble

Scan Explorer .

Operating System : Microsoft® Windows® Seven® 64-bit and 8 (64-bit OS)


RAM : minimum 8 GB - Recommended 16 GB

Graphics card : 1GB,or higher 3D Open GL


Web Browser : Internet Explorer 8.0 or later


SketchUp 2014, 2015 (x86) and 2015 (x64) from Trimble


Trimble Scan Explorer - Web Viewer

Here are the minimum and recommended hardware requirements for Trimble

Scan Explorer - Web Viewer .

Operating System : Microsoft® Windows® Seven® 64-bit and 8 (64-bit OS)


RAM : minimum 8 GB - Recommended 16 GB

Graphics card : 1GB,or higher 3D Open GL


Web Browser : Internet Explorer 8.0 or later (64 bits)


Microsoft Visual C++ 2012 Redistributable - x86

Installing Trimble RealWorks

About Graphics Cards

You are able to know how many graphics cards there are in your computer and which one is in use with the software by selecting About from the Help menu.


Enforce the Use of the High

Performance Graphics Card

If your computer has two graphics cards: an integrated graphics card with low performance and a dedicated graphics card with a high performance processor. Please enforce the use of the high performance processor graphics card with your software.

Note: The given procedure is based a NVIDIA graphics card, please refer to the documentation that comes with your graphics card because the procedure may vary from one manufacturer to another.

To Enforce the Use of the High Performance Graphics Card:

1. Right-click your .

2. Choose from the pop-up menu. the open, choose Manage 3D Settings from the Select a Task panel.

4. From panel, first click on the Global Settings tab.

Installing Trimble RealWorks the drop-down list, choose High

Performance NVIDIA processor .

6. Click on the Program Settings tab.

7. Click on the Select a program to customiz e pull-down arrow.

Trimblerealworks.exe

from the list.


9. If required, click on the " Select the preferred graphics processor for this program " pull-down arrow.

10. Again, choose " High Preform NVIDIA Processor " from the list.

11. In the " Specify the settings for this program " panel, select " Prefer

Maximum Performance " from the " Power Management Mode " line.


12. Click Apply .

Note: If " Trimblerealworks.exe

" is not in the list, you can add it manually by clicking on the " Add " button.

Check the Version Number of the

OpenGL Library

You are able to check if your graphics card is compliant (or not) with OpenGL

3.2

by selecting About from the Help menu. If your graphics card is not compliant, please, update your graphics card's driver to get the latest version of OpenGL . Otherwise an error message appears.


About Open Source Libraries and Licenses

Your software program uses open source libraries and therefore must comply with their respective licenses. In order to comply with the licenses, Your software program must display various copyrights and licenses. All can be found while installing the program software in the L icense Agreement window or in the About RealWorks dialog once the software is installed.


Download Trimble RealWorks

You need to download from the Trimble 3D Laser Scanning http://www.trimble.com/3d-laser-scanning/realworks.aspx?dtID=overview& website.

To Download Trimble RealWorks:

1. In panel, click on Support/Downloads . the window open, click on Downloads . the panel expanded, click on the Download Trimble

RealWorks 9.0

link.

4. Once the download completed, click .


Download Trimble Update NetWork License

Utility

You need to install the Trimble Update Network License Utility to be able to configure a HARP® network key with a multi-user license. The utility can be downloaded from the Trimble 3D Laser Scanning http://www.trimble.com/3dlaser-scanning/realworks.aspx?dtID=overview& website.

To Download Trimble Update Network License Utility: the panel, click on Support/Downloads . the window open, click on Downloads . the panel expanded, click on the Update NetWork

License Utility link.

4. Once the download completed, click .


Install Trimble RealWorks

This section explains how to install RealWorks on a standalone computer.

Before you install RealWorks ; close all Windows programs, and ensure that your computer has sufficient operating system requirements and memory capabilities (for more information, see the System Requirements section).

Make sure that you have local or domain administration rights.

To Install Trimble RealWorks:

1. Turn on your computer and start Microsoft Windows . the package from the Trimble website.

3. Double-click on the package icon to launch the install Wizard. the dialog, press Next . The

System Information and Current Program Version dialog appears. System information and the current program version are listed.

5. Click . The License Agreement dialog appears.

6. Read carefully the terms of the license agreement.

7. If you do not accept the terms, check the "I do not accept the terms of the license agreement" option and the install procedure will close.

8. If you accept all the terms, check the "I accept the terms of the license agreement" option and click Next . The Choose Destination Location dialog opens.

9. In dialog, choose Next to accept the default install directory C:\Program Files\Trimble\ Trimble RealWorks 9.0

.

10. If you wish to install in a different directory, choose the Change button.

After you have chosen the install directory, press Next . The Setup Type dialog appears.

11. In the dialog, choose the type of Setup you prefer. Complete will install the program with all features. Custom will require you to choose the options to install. By default, Complete is selected. You have choice between two license types per software product: Trimble OG&C 's license file or HASP license file.

If you have a HASP license file, keep the Complete option and click

Next . The Select Program Folder dialog appears.

If you have a Trimble OG&C 's license file, choose the Custom option and click Next . The Select Features dialog opens. the , Program DLLs and Help Files options checked. the option. c) Click . The Select Program Folder dialog appears.


12. You should select a program folder inside which Setup will add program icons. You can keep the given program folder, type a new one in the

Program Folder field or select an existing one from the Existing Folders field.

13. Press . The Ready to Install the Program dialog appears.

14. Press . The Setup Status dialog opens and files are installed. The

Setup Type dialog appears.

15. Select the type(s) of file you wish Trimble RealWorks to take in charge.

Four types are available: NEU and ASC are an ASCII format file extension, JXL is an extension of text files exported from Trimble Survey

Controller™, Survey Manager™ or Survey Pro™ software. TZS is an extension of files from Trimble's LASERGen. TSPX is a Trimble Survey

Project file.

16. Click Next . The InstallShield Wizard Complete dialog appears. You have successfully installed RealWorks on your computer.

17. Click Finish to complete the installation*.

Note: (*) Sometimes, you may need to restart your computer.

Caution: Please exit Trimble RealWorks if there is already a version of

RealWorks installed on your computer and if a session is open. This avoids the

Setup of a new version of RealWorks to interfere with the current version.

Trimble RealWorks Plant Tables

Trimble RealWorks includes some catalog files. These files are automatically installed during the installation of the software when you choose Complete as

Setup Type . If you do not want them, you need to first choose Custom as

Setup Type , and then un-check the RealWorks Plant Tables option in the

Select Features page.

Note: These catalog files are necessary in the case you want to model point clouds with constraints in tools like the SteelWorks Creator Tool.


Storage Tank Application

The Storage Tank Application is an option which is automatically installed when choosing Complete as Setup Type . If you do not want this option, you need to first choose Custom as Setup Type , and then un-check the Storage

Tank Application option in the Select Features page.


Update Trimble RealWorks

This section explains how to update RealWorks on a standalone computer.

The update only applies when you move from one version (of RealWorks ) to the higher.

To Update Trimble RealWorks:

1. Turn on your computer and start Microsoft Windows . the from the Trimble website.

3. Double-click on the package icon to launch the install Wizard. the program does not start automatically, run it from the Start menu as described in the previous section. the dialog, press Next .

6. The dialog appears and system information and the current program version are listed. Press Next . The Ready to Install the

Program dialog opens.

Install . The Setup Status dialog appears.

8. Once the update done, you are prompted to either view the Help file or to launch RealWorks by checking the option.

9. Click .


Modify, Repair and Remove Trimble

RealWorks

This section explains how to modify, repair and remove Trimble RealWorks from a standalone computer. Modification, repair and removal (of Trimble

RealWorks ) apply only when you want to make a change of an option in an existing installation, or simply to uninstall Trimble RealWorks .

To Modify, Repair and Remove Trimble RealWorks:

1. Turn on your computer and start Microsoft Windows .

2. Download from the Trimble website.

3. Double-click on the package icon to launch the install Wizard.

4. If program does not start automatically, run it from the Start menu as described in the previous section.

5. At dialog, press Next .

6. The dialog appears and system information and the current program version are listed. Press Next . The Modify, Repair or

Remove the Program dialog opens.

7. Choose any of the following options:

Select and click Next . You can add new components in your program or select currently installed components to remove.

Select and click Next . All program components installed in the previous setup will be re-installed.

Select and click Next . All installed program components will be removed.

Modify has been selected, the Select Features dialog appears. a) Un-check the components to clear and click Next . b) Or check the components to install and click Next .

Finish to end the maintenance.

Remove has been selected, the Confirm Uninstall dialog appears; click

Finish to end the uninstall procedure.

Tip: You can also use the Add/Remove tool via your Windows® control panel.

Note : Updating, when carried out frequently, may generate residual files on your hard disk. To minimize such eventualities, we recommend that you completely remove Trimble RealWorks from your hard disk and perform a new installation procedure.


License Files

There are at least two license types the user can use with RealWorks : OG&C and HASP .

Oil, Gas & Chemical License Files

A Trimble RealWorks Oil, Gas and Chemical license file can be of two types: a local license or a server license. Before being able to use Trimble RealWorks

9.0

with such a license file, first choose Custom in the Setup Type dialog and then check the Trimble OGC&C License option when installing the software.

Once done, register the software.

Caution: You are not able to use the Advanced Tank version of RealWorks with an OGC license. To use this version (of RealWorks ), you must change your OGC license to a HASP license.


Register for a Trimble RealWorks Oil, Gas & Chemical

License File

To Register for a Trimble RealWorks Oil, Gas & Chemical License File :

1. Open . The following error message RealWorks license check: no license found " or " License not Valid. Check the license key or server " appears.

2. Close the message by clicking OK . The Trimble Power, Process and Plant

- Client License Configuration Tool dialog appears with the Configuration tab open by-default.

3. Click on the Create Registration tab to open it.

4. Complete the form by entering the necessary information.

5. Click to send the completed form.

6. If required, click Save to save the completed form as a backup.

7. Click on the Close button. The Trimble Power, Process and Plant - Client

License Configuration Tool dialog closes.

Tip : The IP Address of your computer is displayed in the System Information tab.


Enter a Trimble Oil, Gas and Chemical License File

To Enter a Trimble Oil, Gas and Chemical License File:

Start and then select Trimble PPP License from your desktop. The

Trimble Power, Process and Plant - Client License Configuration Tool dialog appears with the Configuration tab opens by-default.

2. If you have a network license, do as described below: the option. The Local License File field and the Browse button both become dimmed. The Server Hostname field is enabled. b) Enter a server name in the Server Hostname field. c) If required, click Ping in the Server Diagnostics dialog to diagnose the server.

3. If you have a local license, do as described below: the option checked. b) Click . The Open dialog opens with the " license files (*.lic) " set as default in the Files of Type field. c) Navigate to the drive/folder to locate the license file. d) Click on the license file to select it. Its name appears in the File

Name field.

Open . The license file name appears as well as its path in the

Local License File field. the

Tool dialog, click Save .

5. Click .


Swap a Local License for a Network License and Vice

Versa

To Swap a Local License for a Network License and Vice Versa:

1. Open . the menu, select License . The Trimble Power, Process and

Plant - Client License Configuration Tool dialog opens.

3. Do as described in the " Enter a Trimble Power, Process and Plant License

File " topic.

Save and Close .

HASP License Files

A HASP license file can be either a single-user license file or a network license file installed on your organization's network. To be able to use a HASP license file, you need to check the Complete option in the Setup Type dialog when installing the software.

Note: The License Manager allows you to view and manage the licensing information.


Locate a HASP License File

To Locate a HASP License File:

RealWorks , select License from the Help menu. The License Manage r dialog opens.

2. Click on the Search Type pull down arrow.

3. Choose one of the following items.

Automatic : This is the default search option. This allows searching for a license by first checking whether a HASP hardware key is connected to a USB port on your computer. If not found, it checks whether a "Detachable License" is installed on your computer. If not found, it checks whether a multi-user license is available on a HASP network key. Optionally, you can specify a network server in the

License Server drop-down list; otherwise, all network servers are searched.

Local Hardware: This option allows searching for a license installed on a HASP hardware key connected to a USB port on your computer.

Local Software: This option allows searching for a "Detachable

License" when using a multi-user license installed on your computer.


Local Automatic: This option enables to search for a license by first checking whether a HASP hardware key is connected to a USB port on your computer. If not found, it checks whether a checked-out instance of a multi-user license is installed on your computer.

Network: This option enables to search for a multi-user license on a

HASP network key installed on the server specified in the License

Server drop-down list. If the correct server is not already included in the list, select the Search Network option from the License Server drop down list to locate it.

4. Click button. The License Manage r dialog closes.

Use a Single-User License

A Single-User License is a HASP hardware key the user has to plug into a

USB port of his computer.

Upgrade a Single-User License

You can update your current license if you need to add more features or extend your warranty period.

To Upgrade a Single-User License: your hardware USB key into a USB port of your computer.

2. Ensure that no other HASP hardware USB keys are connected and

RealWorks is running.

RealWorks , select License from the Help menu. The License Manage r dialog opens.

4. Check that the key ID displayed in the Features list matches the key ID for this upgrade.

5. Click button. The Upgrade License dialog opens.

6. Enter the 19-digit code. the button. The Upgrade License dialog closes.

Note: You need to have an Internet connection on your computer. It is required to check your key ID.

Use a Multi-User License

A Multi-User License is a HASP network license key. Generally speaking, it is a 19-digit code the user gets when buying such license.


Detach a Multi-User License

To be able to use a HASP network license key, the user needs to be connected to his organization network. But if required, he can detach it from the network and attach it to his machine for a limited period of time allowing by this way the software running without a network connection.

Check for a License Checkout Support

You need to check if your HASP network key (multi-user license) is installed on your network and is configured to support a license checkout.

To Check for a License Checkout Support:

1. In , select License from the Help menu. The License Manager dialog opens. the panel, you may check:

The feature(s) licensed by your key ID,

For each feature, the ability to be checked-out (or not).

Undetachable license Detachable license the button. The License Manager dialog closes.


Configure a Computer to Allow License Checkout

To Configure a Computer to Allow License Checkout:

RealWorks , select License from the Help menu. The License Manager dialog opens.

2. In dialog, click the HASP Admin Control Center link located in the lower-left corner of the dialog. The Sentinel Admin Control

Center page is displayed in a browser window. the panel, select Configuration . The Configuration for Sentinel

License Manager on "Computer_Name" appears.

4. Select tab. the option. the button.


Check-out a Multi-User License

To Check-out a Multi-User License:

RealWorks , select License from the Help menu. The License Manager dialog opens.

2. Click button. The Check Out License dialog opens.

3. Enter the number of days.

4. Or first, click on the Expiration pull down arrow.

5. And then, select an expiration date from the calendar. the button. The Check Out License dialog closes. the button. The License Manager dialog closes.

Note: The Check Out option must be selected on the host machine from which the license will be detached.


Update a Multi-User License

To Update a Multi-User License:

1. Click button on the taskbar and then All Programs / Trimble /

Trimble RealWorks 9.0

/ Network License Update . The Update Network

License dialog opens.

Or

2. Click on the NetWork License Update icon on your desktop. The Update

Network License dialog opens.

3. Enter the 19-digit code. the button.

Note:

You should download the Trimble Update Network License Utility from the

Trimble 3D Laser Scanning website and install it on your computer.

You need to have an Internet connection to proceed to the update.


Check for the Warranty Expiration Date

The software you bought comes with a warranty. The terms of the warranty are in the License Agreement which can be found when you install the software.

The date of expiration of the warranty is displayed in the License Manager dialog as shown below.

RealWorks notifies the user when the license file is close to expiration date or when the license file is expired.

The License File is Close to the Expiration Date

When the Warranty Expiration date is close to the specified date, a warning message, with the number of days before the Warranty Expiration day, is displayed on the bottom left corner of your computer as shown below.

Tip: Click on the Trimble icon. This opens the License Manager dialog. By this way, you can update your license.


The License File is Expired

When you start the software with a license file for which the date of warranty exceeds the specified date, an expiration message is then displayed on the bottom left corner of your computer as shown below. And

Tip: Click on the Trimble icon. This opens the License Manager dialog. By this way, you can update your license.


Contact Trimble

For information regarding this (or other) Trimble software product(s), please visit the Trimble website at www.trimble.com.

For contacting Trimble support: please refer to list below.

For [email protected]

For : [email protected]

C H A P T E R 2

Getting Started with Trimble

RealWorks

This chapter guides you through the steps you will take after installing the software on your computer, from the startup of the software, through the tour of the user interface in order to be familiar with it, to the opening of your first project.

63

Start Trimble RealWorks

From your desktop, double-click the Trimble RealWorks icon to start the software. At each time you start the software, a message opens and prompts you to participate to the Trimble Solution Improvement Program (TSIP) . When you click on the Trimble icon to learn more, the Preferences / Improvement

Program dialog opens. The message will disappear from the next startup (of the software) once you have chosen an option from the Improvement dialog.

A Start Page also opens. From the Start Page , you can get started working with the software, access to different links like checking for updates, etc.


Open Your First Project

With the user interface opened, you can start loading your first project in

RealWorks . There are three manners. The first manner is to select Open from the File menu. The second manner is to click on the Open an Existing Project link in the Start Page . The last manner is to drag and drop a project file in

RealWorks .

Caution: A warning appears in the case you try to open a project from the link in the Start Page , with a tool (or feature) that is in use.

Note: Refer to the Performing Basic Operations chapter for more information about the different file formats that RealWorks can handle.

Getting Started with Trimble RealWorks

Get Familiar With the Working Environment

Trimble RealWorks includes three modules ( OfficeSurvey™ , Registration and

Modeling *). Each module corresponds to a processing mode. We are not going to develop here each of the processing modes, but note that the working environment changes according to the chosen module.

Note: (*) The Modeling processing mode is not present in RealWorks (Base) and Advanced .


User Interface

When you start a RealWorks session, you can see the main window with its working sub-window components and the Start Page (not illustrated). After you open a project, these components will activate so you can start working with them. You can customize the settings of the different components inside the main window. By default, a RealWorks session looks like the following example.

1 - Menu bar

2 - Toolbars

3 - Window - WorkSpace

4 - Window - 3D View

5 - Window - List

6 - Status bar

7 - Window - Property

8 - Window - Selection List (not illustrated)

9 - Start Page (not illustrated)

Note: You start RealWorks for the first time, the Head Always Up (Z Axis) option is by default selected. Its representation is displayed at bottom right corner of the 3D View .


Start Page

The Start Page , included in the software, displays when you start the software for the first time. This page will appear each time you start the software again until the option in the Preferences / General dialog remains checked. This page includes many useful links.

Links in the Start Page

Open an existing project

Check for updates

License Manager

This links opens the Open dialog.

This links brings you the Trimble Technical Support page, from which you can check for new updates.

This link brings you to the HASP license management system.

Register Trimble RealWorks This link opens the Trimble RealWorks Product Registration web page.

Trimble RealWorks Support

Video demos on YouTube

Trimble RealWorks News

Online Help (F1)

Release Notes

This link brings you to the Trimble Global Support & Service web page.

This link brings you to the official channel of RealWorks on

YouTube.

This link opens a panel inside which you can find all new news about Trimble RealWorks.

This links opens the online help file.

This links brings you the Trimble Technical Support page, from which you can release notes, documentation, etc.

Menu Bar

RealWorks provides you with a set of tools and commands. The menu bar, always open and displayed on the top of the user interface, contains all available tools and commands that you can use. This bar is composed of main menus that you have to drop-down in order to reach the tool (or command) you wish to use. For some tools (or commands), you may need to go to the submenu to reach them.

Some main menus will be automatically added (or deleted) according to the processing modes you are actively using. Many tools and commands can also be reached from the toolbars or the pop-up menus.


Toolbars

The RealWorks user interface is composed of different toolbars. Each of them has specific uses. By default, all toolbars are not open when you start

RealWorks . Those that are opened are displayed either horizontally under the menu bar or vertically beside the WorkSpace window. You can move each toolbar to any location within the user interface, open or close them.

Windows

RealWorks main window has several components, which are described hereafter.

Start Page

The Start Page disappears after you load a project in RealWorks , but you still have access to it by selecting Start Page from the Windows menu.

Tip: You can use the Ctrl + F4 key combination to close the Start Page .


WorkSpace

The WorkSpace window (always opened when the user interface appears) is the one located under the toolbars and comprises a set of tabs. This window is used for organizing data hierarchically in a tree called Project Tree . This main tree is subdivided into sub-trees called Scans , Targets , Models and Images .

Each of them is used for organizing certain types of data from a loaded project.

To display a sub-tree, click the corresponding tab. Note that only one tab can be displayed at any given moment. The Images tab and the Models tab appear respectively two and three times - one in each processing module

( OfficeSurvey ™, Registration and Modeling *) for the Images tab and only in the Registration and Modeling * processing modules for the Models tab. You can move this window to any location within the user interface, or resize it.

The WorkSpace window in Registration The WorkSpace window in OfficeSurvey™ and

Modeling*

Note: (*) The Modeling processing mode is not present in RealWorks (Base) and Advanced .

Note: As a rule, the Cross button has been removed from the top right corner of the WorkSpace window. You are not able to close the window with this button but you can still close it through the Windows menu. There is an exception to the rule. It is when the WorkSpace window is tabbed with the List window (as illustrated below).

Caution: When the WorkSpace window is un-docked, you can use the Alt and

F4 combination to close it. First ensure that the WorkSpace window is selected, otherwise, you close RealWorks and you lose all of your changes.


List

This window, always opened when you start RealWorks , is located under the

WorkSpace window. It is used to display the content of a selected group of the

Project Tree . When a RealWorks session begins, this window has the name

List . Once you load a project and select a group of the Project Tree under the displayed tab, this window will rename itself according to the contents of the displayed tab. Each object node shown in this window is identified by its icon, its name and its other properties. The List window contains a toolbar called

Database below the title bar. You can move the List window to any location in the user interface, or resize it.

The Database toolbar

Note: Because the number of points for a point cloud is often large and the symbol ( Digit Grouping Symbol ) used for grouping the digits makes in that number unreadable; you now can customize this symbol by first opening the

Regional and Language Options in the Control Panel (of Windows® ) and then selecting Customize and Digit Grouping Symbol . This change will be memorized and used for the next session of RealWorks and will affect the display of the numbers of points in that window.

Caution : The notion of Number of Loaded Points in the List window has been removed in RealWorks 8.0

.

Note: As a rule, the Cross button has been removed from the top right corner of the List window. You are not able to close the window with this button but you can still close it through the Windows menu. There is an exception to the rule. It is when the Lis window is tabbed with the WorkSpace window (as illustrated below).


Caution: When the List window is un-docked, you can use the Alt and F4 combination to close it. First ensure that the Lis window is selected, otherwise, you close RealWorks and you lose all of your changes.


Property

This window is used to list property information of a selected object and is divided into two columns. The left one lists the titles of each property and the right one shows property values (either fixed or modifiable). Properties shown in gray are fixed and those in black are modifiable. Properties are classified by category such as General , Content , Geometry , etc.

You can shrink each category of properties by hiding its content. To do this, click on the Shrink button. By default, the Property window is not displayed in the user interface. You have to open it by using the command from the main

Window menu or from the pop-up menu after selecting an object. You can move this window to any location in the user interface, or close, reduce and restore it.

1 - Title column 2 - Attribute column 3 - Modifiable attributes

Note: Because the number of points for a point cloud is often large and the symbol ( Digit Grouping Symbol ) used for grouping the digits makes in that number unreadable; you now can customize this symbol by first opening the

Regional and Language Options in the Control Panel (of Windows® ) and then selecting Customize and Digit Grouping Symbol . This change will be memorized and used for the next session of RealWorks and will affect the display of the numbers of points in the Property window.

Tip: You can select and copy any value from the Property window by using the

Ctrl + C keys.

Caution : The notion of Number of Loaded Points in the Property window has been removed in RealWorks 8.0

.


Selection List

The Selection List window is used to list all selections done from the Project

Tree or from the 3D View . By default, the Selection List window is not displayed within the user interface. You have to open it by using the command from the Window menu. You can move this window to any location in the user interface, or close it.

1 - Number of items selected 2 - Clear selection 3 - Close button

Caution : The notion of Number of Loaded Points in the Selection List window has been removed in RealWorks 8.0

.


Station Maker List

The Station Maker List window is used to show the display status of a station marker in the 3D View . By default, the Selection List window is not displayed within the user interface. You have to open it by using the Display Station

Markers command from the 3D View / Rendering menu. You can move this window to any location in the user interface, or close it.

Note: Please, refer to the section related to the Specific Station Marker(s) of a station (or set of stations).


3D View

The 3D View is always open at the right side of the user interface under the toolbars. You can move, reduce and restore it in the same way as for the other windows of RealWorks but you cannot close it. This window is mainly used for displaying (or hiding) the 3D representation of a selection from the Project

Tree . An orthonormal Reference Frame and a scale are displayed respectively at the bottom right and bottom left corners of this window. By default, the window background is blue with a gradient effect. You can customize it to suit your preference.

1 - 3D View

2 - Scale

3 - Reference frame

4 - 2D View

5 - Size of the 2D grid

6 - View manager

7 - 2D grid

8 - Point loading manager

9 - Navigation constrain tools


View Manager

RealWorks includes a View Manager which enables to navigate through the different aspects that may have the 3D View when you use a certain type of tools. The 3D View can be split in two or three sub-views. Each sub-view can be a 3D View , a 3D View locked in 2D or graphs. The View Manager appears as a toolbar at the bottom right corner of the 3D View and is composed of two sets of icons.

In the sub-view mode (two horizontal sub-views, two vertical sub-views or three sub-views), the sub-view with a yellow edge is the active sub-view. In the one view mode, the view in full is always the active view.

Tip: Almost all the icons can be reached from the toolbar at the bottom right corner of the 3D View or by selecting Layout from the 3D View menu.

Change the Display Configuration of Sub-Views

The first set of icons is detailed in the table below. It enables to change the configuration to full view, or to two sub-views, or to three sub-views.

This icon Enables

To expand the selected sub-view to full view.

Make Full

To tile two sub-views horizontally

Split Horizontally

To tile two sub-views vertically

Split Vertically

To tile into three sub-views

Split 3 Views

Two Sub-View Configuration

In that configuration, only Make Full , Split Horizontally and Split Vertically are available. When a sub-view has been selected and expanded in full, the

Display Main View and Display Sub-View 1 icons become enabled.

Three Sub-View Configuration

In that configuration, all are available: Make Full , Split Horizontally , Split

Vertically and Split 3 Views are available. When a sub-view has been selected and expanded in full, the Display Main View , Display Sub-View 1 and Display

Sub-View 2 icons become enabled.


Display (or Hide) a Sub-View in Full

The second set is composed of the icons described in the table below. It enables to hide or to expand in full a sub-view. It also enables to restore the default layer.

This icon Enables

To display the main 3D View in full

Display Main View

To display the first planar sub-view in full

Display Sub-View 1

To display the second planar sub-view in full.

Display Sub-View 2

To restore the default layout.

Restore Default Layout

To hide the current view.

Hide View

Note:

The icon can only be selected from the pop-up menu (or from the 3D View / Layout menu).

A sub-view, once expanded in full, cannot be hidden. That's why the Hide

View icon is dimmed.

2D Grid

In the 2D View mode, there is by default a 2D Grid superposed on the current sub-view. This grid helps the user to have a metric scale of objects displayed within the sub-view.

Note: The 2D View mode only appears with the use of some tools, like e.g. the

Cutting Plane Tool , where data (resulting from the use of this category of tools) needs to be represented in 2D.

Hide (or Show) the 2D Grid

To Hide (or Show) the 2D Grid:

1. From menu, select 2D Grid . A sub-menu drops down.

2. Select from the sub-menu to hide the 2D grid. select from the sub-menu to display the 2D grid.

Tip: You can right-click in the sub-view and select Hide 2D Grid (if the 2D Grid is displayed) or Show 3D Grid (if the 2D Grid is hidden).

Note:

Hiding from the current sub-view will display the scale.

Whatever the view ( 3D View or current sub-view) you select, you should be in Isometric to be able to display the scale.


Change a Size

There are seven pre-defined and square sizes: 0.1x0.1

, 1x1 , 5x5 , 10x10 ,

50x50 , 100x100 and 1000x1000 . All are expressed in the current unit of measurement. The current size is displayed at the bottom left corner of the sub-view.

To Change a Size: the menu, select 2D Grid . A sub-menu drops down.

2. Select a pre-defined size from the sub-menu.

Tip: You can right-click anywhere in a sub-view and select 2D Grid from the pop-up menu. A sub-menu drops down from which you can select a pre-fined size.

Customize a Size

You can define a size which be either square (the same resolution in

Horizontal and in Vertical) or not.

To Customize a Size: the menu, select 2D Grid . A sub-menu drops down.

2. Select from the sub-menu. The 2D Grid Size dialog opens.

3. Input a distance value in the Horizontal Size field.

4. Input a distance value in the Vertical Size field.

5. Click . The 2D Grid Size dialog closes.

Tip: You can right-click anywhere in a sub-view and select Customize from the pop-up menu.

Navigation Constraint Tools

When you manipulate a scene in the 3D View , you can apply a set of constraints like e.g. rotating it horizontally. All available constraints are split into two categories: temporary constraints or permanent constraints.

Note: We will not discuss in detail these two constraint modes here. For more information, see the Displacement Modes section.


Tools and Commands

Commands are actions which can apply to the selected object(s) or to a whole set of displayed objects, while tools are a set of actions logically organized together to fulfill a function of the software. All tools and commands can be found in the menu bar, and most of them can also be found in various toolbars.

In the next topics, we will discuss in more detail the organization of the tools and commands in the menu bar and the toolbars.

Toolbars

Icons are the graphic representation of tools and commands in the toolbars.

They are organized into different toolbars according to their similarity in terms of function.

Main

Under the Main toolbar, you can find the following list of icons:

Open

Connect to Mobile Device

Open Scan Explorer

Open SketchUp

Save

Print

Undo

Redo


Database

Under the Database toolbar, you can find the following list of icons:

Locate

Go Up To Parent

Thumbnails

Icons

Details

Display

Under the Display toolbar, you can find the following list of icons:

Display Cloud

Display Geometry

Hide Cloud

Hide Geometry

Hide All

Lighting Direction


3D View

Under the 3D View toolbar, you can find the following list of icons:

White Color

Cloud Color

Station Color

Scan Color

Grey Scaled Intensity

Color Coded Intensity

Color Coded by Elevation

Cloud Rendering Settings

True Color

Wireframe

Hidden Lines

Surface

Textured

Point Size > 1 Pixel

Point Size > 2 Pixels




Normal Shading

Perspective

Isometric

Examiner

Walkthrough

Station-Based

Display Station Makers

Display Station Maker Labels

Station Maker Window

Change Cloud Color

Change Shape Color


View Alignment

Under the View Alignment toolbar, you can find the following list of icons:

Zoom On Selection

Center On Point

Zoom All

Center of Rotation Defined by Cursor Position

Zoom In

Zoom Out

Front

Back

Left

Right

Top

Bottom

Front of Selected Object

Back of Selected Object

Left of Selected Object

Right of Selected Object

Top of Selected Object

Bottom of Selected Object

Go to Shooting Position


Tools [in Registration]

Here is a list of icons that you can find in the Tools toolbar when you are in the

Registration mode:

Auto-Extract Targets and Register

Auto-register using Planes (Target-Less)

Target-Based Registration Tool

Refine Registration Using Scans

Cloud-Based Registration Tool

Georeferencing Tool

Target Analyzer Tool

Orientation Tool

Generate Key Plan From Current View

Registration Report (Target-Based)

.Clipping Box Extraction Tool

Measurement Tool


Tools [in OfficeSurvey]


OfficeSurvey ™ mode:

Show Manipulator Tool

Segmentation Tool

Sampling Tool

.


Cutting Plane Tool

Contouring Tool

Profile/Cross-Section Tool

EasyProfile Tool

2D-EasyLine™ Tool


Catenary Drawing Tool

2D-Polyline Inspection Tool

Volume Calculation Tool

Twin Surface Inspection Tool

Surface To Model Inspection Tool

Inspection Map Analyzer Tool

Fitting Tool

Mesh Creation Tool

Mesh Editing Tool

Ortho-Projection Tool

Multi-Ortho-Projection Tool

Image Rectification Tool

Feature Set Tool

Measurement Tool

Image Matching Tool

Profile Matcher Tool

3D Inspection Tool

3D Inspection Analyzer


Tools [in Modeling]


Modeling module:

Segmentation Tool

Sampling Tool

.


Measurement Tool

Cloud-Based Modeler Tool

Geometry Creator Tool

Geometry Modifier Tool

Intersect Tool

Duplicator Tool

Plane Bounding Tool

Window

Here is a list of icons that you can find in the Window toolbar:

Tree Window

List Window

Property Window

Selection List Window

Station Maker Window

Cascade

Tile Vertically

Tile Horizontally

Close All Windows

Working Frame Tool

Here is a list of icons that you can find in the Working Frame Tool toolbar which only appears when you select the related command:

Frame Creation Tool


Menu Bar

The menu bar is a series of aligned menu titles. This series changes depending on the processing mode you are in. You drop down a menu by clicking on its title, and then you can select a command.

File : This menu is a standard menu that contains Open , Close , and other file related commands. This menu also contains tools for loading Trimble

FX controller files, converting TZS to BSF, etc. It is available in the

Registration mode.

Edit : This menu gives access to object editing operations such as cut, copy and paste, undo, redo, find, etc. and access to advanced functions and preferences.

Tools : This menu contains common tools that you can use no matter which processing mode you are in.

Plant *: This menu contains tools for modeling pipes and structural steelworks.

OfficeSurvey : This menu contains all available tools related to the

OfficeSurvey ™ mode.

Registration : This menu contains all available tools related to the

Registration mode.

Modeling *: This menu contains all available tools related to the Modeling module.

Media Tools : This menu contains tools for computing video and capturing snapshots.

Display : This menu gives access to object display and hide functions in the 3D View window.

3D View : This menu gives access to different visualization parameters

(rendering, view, etc.) in the 3D View window.

Window : This menu allows user to organize the user interface.

Help : This menu gives access to online help.

Note: (*) The Plant and Modeling menus are not present in RealWorks Base .


Shortcut Keys

You can use shortcuts to carry out the following common tasks in RealWorks .

Press:

CTRL + 0

CTRL + S

CTRL + Z

CTRL + Y

CTRL + X

CTRL + C

CTRL + V

Del.

CTRL + F

CTRL + M

To:

Open a file

Save a project

Undo the last action

Redo the last action

Cut the selected object

Copy the selected object

Paste the selected object

Delete the selected object

Access to the Find function

Merge two selected clouds

Cloud Renderings

You can use the following shortcut keys when applying Cloud Rendering options to clouds.

Press:

1

2

3

4

To:

Render cloud(s) in white color

Render cloud(s) in Cloud color

Render cloud(s) in Station color

Render cloud(s) in Scan color

5

6

7

8

Render cloud(s) in Grey Scaled Intensity

Render cloud(s) in Color Coded Intensity

Render cloud(s) in True color

Render cloud(s) in Color Coded by Elevation

Note: You need to first pick anywhere in the 3D View or perform a selection in the 3D View .


Standard Views

You can use the following shortcut keys when changing the Standard View .

Press:

Ctrl + 5

Ctrl + 0

Ctrl + 8

Ctrl + 2

To:

Bring the standard view to Front

Bring the standard view to Back

Bring the standard view to Top

Bring the standard view to Bottom

Ctrl + 6 Bring the standard view to Right

Ctrl + 4 Bring the standard view to Left


Station Markers and Station Marker Labels

You can use the following shortcut keys for displaying (or hiding) all station markers and station station Labels.

Press:

J

K

To:

Display (or hide) station markers

Display (or hide) station marker labels


Gray-Scale Intensity With Color Rendering

You can use the following shortcut key for applying a Gray-Scale Intensity with

Color overlay to clouds in the 3D View .

Press:

B

To:

Apply a gray-scale intensity with color overlay



View Manager

You can use the following shortcut keys when the View Manager toolbar opens at the bottom of the 3D View .

Press:

F11

CTRL + F11

SHIFT + F11

To:

Set the active sub-view in full mode

Replace the current view by the next one (only available in full mode)

Hide all open windows except the 3D View window or display them if hidden

Picking Parameters

You can use the following shortcut keys when the Picking Parameters toolbar appeared to pick with constraints in the 3D View (in XYZ Coordinate System ).

Press:

Shift + X

Shift + Y

To:

Lock the X coordinate

Lock the Y coordinate shift + Z Lock the Z coordinate

You can use the following shortcut keys when the Picking Parameters toolbar appeared to pick with constraints in a 2D View (in Cartesian System ).

Press:

Shift + H

Shift + V

To:

Lock the H coordinate

Lock the V coordinate

You can use the following shortcut keys when the Picking Parameters toolbar appeared to pick with constraints in a 2D View (in Polar System ).

Press:

Shift + A

Shift + D

To:

Lock the Angle coordinate

Lock the Distance coordinate

Segmentation Tool

You can use the following shortcut keys with the Segmentation Tool .

Press:

I

O

P

To:

Keep In points inside the defined fence

Keep out points outside the defined fence

Create fenced points as cloud

Esc.

Space Bar

Double Click

Cancel the defined fence

Or

Leave the Segmentation Tool

End fence

End fence


Clipping Box Extraction Tool

You can use the following shortcut keys with the Clipping Box Extraction Tool .

Press: To:

R Rotate

T Pan

Page Up

Page Down

Move the Clipping Box Up (1) (2)

Move the Clipping Box Down (1) (2)

Move the Clipping Box Right (1)

Move the Clipping Box Left (1)

Move the Clipping Box Back (1)

Move the Clipping Box Forward (1)

Leave the Box Extraction Tool Esc.

Note:

(1) These keys are only available in the Pan mode. Be sure that NUM

LOCK is unpressed (or is Off).

(2) Along the axis which is the closest to the vertical.

Customize the User Interface

By default, all windows except the Property and Selection List windows are open within the user interface. Toolbars are also open and are displayed either horizontally under the menu bar or vertically along the left side of the 3D View .

Windows

You can display (or hide) any window as required. Note that you cannot close the 3D View.

You can only reduce (or resize) it.

Display a Window

To Display a Window:

1. Select from the menu bar.

2. Select a window (to display) from the drop-down menu.

Tip: You can right-click anywhere on any open toolbar and select a window (to display) from the pop-up menu by checking it.


Hide a Window

To Hide a Window:

Window from the menu bar.

2. Select a window (to hide) from the drop-down menu.

Tip:

You can also click on the Close button or right-click on the Title Bar (of a Floating window) and select Hide from the pop-up menu.

You can right-click anywhere on any open toolbar and select a window (to hide) from the pop-up menu by unchecking it.

Note: An open window has its icon highlighted in the drop-down menu.

Undock a Window

To Undock a Window:

1. Move the pointer somewhere over an area of the window (to undock). A good place to point is the title bar.

2. Press and hold the mouse button while you drag the window to a suitable location in your working environment.

3. Release the mouse button to drop the window to its new location. It will remain in this new place until you move it again (or close it).

Tip: A window, once moved from its Docking position, becomes Floating . You can check its status by right-clicking on the Title Bar .


Dock a Window

To Dock a Window:

1. Move the pointer somewhere over an area of the window (to dock). A good place to point is the Title Bar .

2. Press and hold the mouse button while you drag the window. A diamond guide appears.

1 - Guide Diamond

2 - Four arrows pointing toward the four sides of the editing panel

3 - Four additional arrows pointing toward the four edges of the user interface

3. When the window reaches the location to dock, move the pointer over the corresponding portion of the guide diamond. The desired area is then shaded.

4. Release the mouse button to drop the window to its new location. It will remain in this new place until you move it again (or close) it.

Tip: You can also right-click on the Title Bar of an undocked window and select

Docking from the pop-up menu. The window is then re-docked to its initial position.

Toolbars

You can display (or hide) any toolbar as required.


Display a Toolbar

To Display a Toolbar:

1. In menu, select Toolbars .

2. Select a toolbar (to display) from the drop-down submenu.

Tip: You can right-click anywhere on any open toolbar and select a toolbar (to display) from the pop-up menu.

Hide a Toolbar

To Hide a Toolbar: the menu, select Toolbars .

2. Select a toolbar (to hide) from the drop-down submenu.

Tip: You can right-click anywhere on any open toolbar and select a toolbar (to hide) from the pop-up menu.

Move a Toolbar

To Move a Toolbar:

1. Move the pointer somewhere over an area of the toolbar that does not display a button (or drop-down list). A good place to point is the title bar.

2. Press and hold the mouse button while you drag the toolbar to a suitable location in your window.

3. Release the mouse button to drop the toolbar to its new location. It will remain in this new place until you move it again or close it.


Close Trimble RealWorks

The way to close Trimble RealWorks is similar to other softwares, by selecting

Exit from the File menu or by clicking interface.

on the top right corner of the user

C H A P T E R 3

Performing Basic Operations

This chapter is dedicated to all basic operations, like e.g. the opening and the importation of project files into RealWorks .

97

Supported Formats in RealWorks

RealWorks supports a numerous of file formats. There are those that are

Trimble's (software) proprietary formats, those coming from Trimble's instruments (or from competitors), those generating from a third-party software, etc.

Trimble 3D Scanning Files

A Trimble 3D Scanning File is a file with one of the following extensions: *.rwp,

*.raw, *.jxl, *.asc, *.neu

and *.tzf.

Among all these file formats, some can be imported into an existing project and others cannot. A file of the following extension rwp cannot be imported. Only those of asc, neu and tzf extensions or those coming from the Trimble Survey Controller ™, Survey Manager ™ or

Survey Pro ™ software (JobXML and related) can be imported.

Below are listed all the extensions and the application from which each extension is from.

RWP Trimble proprietary RealWorks project file format.

ASC a well-known ASCII coordinates files.

NEU a Neutral file format identical to ASC .

TZF Trimble Scan File format file,

Etc.

Note: There is no direct entry for a file with the RAW extension in the " Type of

File " field in the Open dialog. You need to choose Trimble 3D scanning File as format if you have a file with one of the extensions.


RealWorks Files

RWP is a proprietary format of Trimble. It is a project file format. The RWI folder is a folder linked to the RWP format file. It contains all data files of a project ( RWC and RWV for versions of RealWorks before 8.0 and RWCX and

RWV for RealWorks 8.0). RWC and RWCX are cloud format files. RWV is an image format file.

A project file saved in a version of RealWorks older than 5.0 is not supported anymore in 8.0. When you try to open such a file, an error message appears.

When you open a project saved in a version of RealWorks older than 8.0, all the project files are converted to the 8.0 format. The conversion takes a certain amount of time and is temporary.

If you decide to save the project under the same name (after converting), the conversion becomes definitive and cannot be cancelled. The project will be not accessible with older versions of RealWorks . The conversion (of all project files to 8.0 format) is only required one time. The next time you want to open the project, no conversion is required and the loading of the project is accelerated.

If you decide to not save the project, the conversion is not applied and is lost (if you close RealWorks ). The next time you open the project in 8.0, the conversion is required again.

Note: A project will be open even if the cloud format files ( RWCX ) are missing.

Only an error message will appears in that case.

Caution: There is a limit to the size of a TRW format file when you try to open it with RealWorks 8.0. This limit, related to its size, is of 4 GB. If your file size is bigger, you are able to open, not with RealWorks version 8.0, but only from

8.1. If you try to do so, the error message below appears.

Performing Basic Operations

TZF Files

TZF is a proprietary format of Trimble. A file with such a format is essentially a

Trimble Scan File .

A project and a station* will be created and rooted under the Project Tree .

The project is named ProjectX where X is its order. The station takes the name of the TZF format file.

A is also created and put under the station.

The project is not saved. The user has to save it manually.

Once saved, a project file and a folder are created. Both are named according to the name given by the user, with a RWP extension for the first and a RWI extension for the second. The RWI folder is empty of content.

Note: The processing mode will automatically switch to Registration . The

Scans Tree is selected by default.

Tip: A TZF format file can be either opened as a single project or imported into an existing project.

Note: (*) A Leveled Station is created and rooted in the Scans Tree for each

TZF format file tagged as Leveled , once open (or imported) into RealWorks .

You can preview a TZF format file as a Thumbnail in Windows Explorer . You need to first enable the Thumbnail Preview in Windows Explorer and then to set the icon view size to Medium Icons , Large Icons or Extra Large Icons .

Some new information has been added to TZF format files, in RealWorks 8.0.

This information, related to the instrument itself and to the scanning settings, like Starting / Final Temperature (Internal) (in Celsius and Fahrenheit ),

Atmospheric Correction PPM (P arts P er M illion ) , Grid Steps , Scanner Leveling and etc. appear when you display the properties of a TZF Scan (only if the

Property window is open).


Caution: The Extended range density is a level which only appears with an optional upgrade (of the TX8 instrument). For more information about the

Extended feature, please refer to the Trimble TX8 user manual.


When a set of TZF files belonging to the same station is open through the File /

Open command, a project and a station are created. A TZF Scan is created per TZF file. All TZF Scans are put under the (same) station and only one is by default a Main Scan.

Note: If you drag and drop a set of TZF files into RealWorks , you will get the same result: a project with a station and a set of TZF Scans (one per TZF file).

All TZF Scans are placed under the station.


There is a tip to differentiate a native TZF Scan (coming from a Trimble TX8 instrument) and those converted from other (or competitor) format files. In the first case, the name of the instrument is displayed in the Instrument Name line.

[See A].

[A]

In the last case, the text "Converted from *.* file" appears in the Instrument

Name line. See [B].

[B]


TZS Files

A TZS format file is a Trimble Scan File . For each TZS format file, a warning dialog appears and prompts you to proceed to the conversion to the TZF format (or not).

Note:

The processing mode will automatically switch to Registration . The Scans

Tree is selected by default.

TZS format file can be either opened as a single project or imported into an existing project.

Caution: You cannot open TZF format files in RealWorks 7.0 or lower.

Refuse to Convert to the TZF Format

To Refuse to Convert to the TZF Format:

In the warning dialog, click No . If there is an open project, the project will close. If there is no open project, nothing happens (no project is created).


Convert to the TZF Format

To Convert to TZF Format:

1. In the warning dialog, click Yes . An Information dialog appears.

2. Click . The Save dialog opens. The default folder is the folder where the TZS format file is.

3. Keep the default folder.

4. Or navigate to a drive/folder where you want to store the project.

5. Keep the default name which is ProjectX .

6. Or input a name in the File Name field. The RWP extension is automatically added.

7. Click . The conversion is then performed.

Once completed, a project and a station are created and rooted under the

Project Tree . The project has the name given by the user. The station has the name of the TZS format file.

A TZF Scan is created is under the station.

A project file and a folder are created. Both are named according to the name given by the user, with a RWP extension for the first and a RWI extension for the second. Under the RWI folder, a scan file with the TZF extension is also created.


Trimble Survey Project Files

A Trimble Survey Project , once created and saved in Trimble Business Center

(2.5 and above), is composed of a TSPX format file, a SDF format file, two

VSE format files and a folder which contains the JXL format file, images and

TSF format files. Such project is shared by Trimble Business Center and

RealWorks . This lets the user to combine the survey capabilities of Trimble

Business Center with the manipulation capabilities of RealWorks for processing scanned data and then manipulating them.

Once a TSPX format file has been open in RealWorks , a RealWorks project file

(with RWP as extension) and RWI folder are created and are added to the previous list of files.

Note:

Any modification done within RealWorks is not taken back into Trimble

Business Center .

Only can be open in RealWorks at once.

Warning: Do not modify the items which compose a Trimble Survey Project . If you decide to move the project to another location on your hard disk, move the directory that includes all the files, not only the TSPX format file.


Stations

In Trimble Business Center , each station has a station node representation in the Project Explorer panel. The representation matches the survey instrument type and is followed by the point ID and an "S" number in parenthesis that uniquely identifies the station.

In RealWorks , the Observation information is not read. As a result, each station has a " Blue Folder " representation in the Project Tree . The blue color means that the station is "Leveled" but not setup over a Known Point .


Scans

In Trimble Business Center , all scans ( Trimble Scanner Files ( TSF )) are put as a list after the imported data file node under the Imported Files node in Project

Explorer panel.

In RealWorks , each scan resulting from the measurement from a single station point of view is stored under that station in the Scans Tree .


Points

In Trimble Business Center , each point in the project as a node representation and all are put under the Points node in the Project Explorer panel.

Observations to and from the point are listed as observation nodes beneath it.

In RealWorks , each station contains all the measurements made from that station in the field. All points are set as unmatched and put under the

Unmatched folder in the Targets Tree . A point resulting from the measurement from a single station is read as a Survey Point and is stored under that station.

A point resulting from the measurement of a set of stations is read as a

TopoPoint and stored under the TopoStation System folder.


Note: Key-in points, GNSS points, etc. are also read as TopoPoints and stored under the TopoStation System folder.

Tip: You can display (or hide) the Topo Point (or Survey Point )'s 3D Labels by selecting Rendering / Display 3D Labels from the 3D View menu. The Display

3D Labels feature once selected has a check mark on its side.


Images

In Trimble Business Center , images taken from a station point of view are stored under that station in the Project Explorer panel.

In RealWorks , images taken from a station point of view are stored as

" Matched Images " under that station in the Scans Tree and in a list in the

Images Tree .



JobXML, JOB and RAW Files

A JobXML file (with *.jxl extension) is a text file exported from Trimble Survey

Controller™, Survey Manager™ or Survey Pro™ software in an XML based format. Some dependency files may be related to the JobXML file (such as scan files with TSF extension (*.tsf stands for Trimble Scanning File) and

JPEG images (*.jpg extension)).

A JOB file (with *.job extension) is a binary file format. It can be a Trimble

Survey Controller job file or a Trimble Access job file. In the first case, if

Trimble Data Transfer © is installed on your computer, you can open a Survey

Controller™ JOB . If Trimble Data Transfer © is not detected on your computer, you cannot open it as the " Job Files (*.job)" file of type line in the Open dialog is not available. In the second case, you need to have Trimble General Survey

(Office Survey) installed on your computer. Trimble Data Transfer and Trimble

General Survey , both contain a converter. RAW file (with *.raw extension) is a

SurveyPro™ native ASCII (o TXT ) file format.

Objects in the JobXML (or Job or RAW ) format file are opened (or imported) within the Scans Tree as follows:

Points surveyed from one station setup are imported as standard survey points within each station,,

GPS points and keyed-in points are imported as topo-points within the

TopoStation System folder,

Each station of the Instrument is opened (or imported) as leveled station,

Registered scans using the scanning capabilities of the Instrument are put under their respective station,

Images taken from the Instrument are registered under the respective station if the stationing is carried out when shooting the images. Images are put with no link to the station under the Images Tree if stationing has not been carried out when shooting the images.


1 - Leveled stations 2 - Images and scans 3 - Surveyed points opened or imported topopoints

A warning message appears when:

Points are surveyed with no altitude. These points are then opened (or imported) with altitude 0 in RealWorks ,

Z is equal to zero for points with no altitude

Linked images/scans are missing from the reading folder. When opening

(or importing) a JobXML (Job , Raw ) format file, it refers to external files that contain scanning data and images respectively with the TSF (Trimble

Scanning File) extension and the JPG extension. These files are supposed to be in the same folder than the JobXML (or Job ) file. Missing

TSF files are shown as null size scans and Missing images as broken link images.


1 - Missing TSF file opened (or imported) as null size scan

2 - Missing image file opened (or imported) as broken link image

Some object fields are missing,

Images have been taken around zenith. These images are opened (or imported) in the Images Tree as “Unmatched” images (through they are still linked to their shooting station).

Images taken around zenith are registered as "Matched"

Tip: You can display (or hide) the Topo Point (or Survey Point )'s 3D Labels by selecting Rendering / Display 3D Labels from the 3D View menu. The Display



ASCII Files

An ASCII format file may have ASC , NEU or XYZ as extension. There are in general two sections in such a file. The first section is called Header in which specific information about the nature of the file is stored. The second section is a list of 3D Points . Each line contains a point represented by its X, Y, and Z coordinates plus, optionally, other attributes such as intensity or color.

Tip: An ASCII format file can be either opened as single project or imported into an existing one.

Note:

A file to open (or to import) containing some corrupted lines will be ignored.

The processing mode will automatically switch to OfficeSurvey . The

Models Tree is selected by default.


With Wizard

This opens a Wizard which allows the user to choose the parameters to fit the

ASCII format file to open.

To Open With the Wizard:

1. In dialog, keep the Open Wizard for ASCII Files option checked.

2. Click . The Neutral Point Import dialog opens.

This dialog is composed of six parts: five for adjusting the parameters to import the data and one for visualization.

Header

Separator

Units

Select

Content

Data Type

Preview

You can ignore the first lines of an ASCII file by selecting the number of lines to skip. These lines can be headers, comments or X,Y,Z coordinates that you do not want to keep.

Separator between attributes of a point can be a Comma, Tabulation or other.

You have the choice between the Metric system and US/British system for the values of X, Y, Z coordinates.

This part enables to display (or to not display) the information about the Intensity, the Color and the Normal of loaded points.

If the Intensity option has been chosen, the user can customize the intensity range. This means that intensity values larger than the value in the Max Intensity field were replaced by 255 and those that are between 0 and the Max Intensity value are mapped to the values from 0 to 255.

According to the option (or combination of options) chosen in the Select Content panel, this part identifies fourteen different combinations of the attributes of a point. When the user chooses:

§ No option, only the "Single Coordinates X,Y,Z" option is available.

§ Intensity, the Max Intensity field and the "Coordinates and Intensity" option become enabled.

§ Color, the "Coordinates and Color" option is enabled.

§ Normal, the "Coordinates and Normal" option is enabled.

§ Intensity and Color, the "Coordinates, Intensity and Color" and "Coordinates,

Color and Intensity" options are available.

§ Intensity and Normal, the "Coordinates, Normal and Intensity" and "Coordinates,

Intensity and Normal" options are available.

§ Color and Normal, the "Coordinates, Color and Normal" and "Coordinates,

Normal" and "Color3 options are available.

§ Intensity, Color and Normal, the "Coordinates, Intensity, Color and Normal",

"Coordinates, Intensity, Normal and Color", "Coordinates, Color, Normal and

Intensity", "Coordinates, Color, Intensity and Normal", "Coordinates, Normal,

Intensity, and Color" and "Coordinates, Normal, Color and Intensity" are all available.

If you select one of the options when you load an ASCII file without Intensity,

Color or Normal RealWorks indicates that the Intensity, Color or Normal cannot be found and displays this error with three question marks between two brackets.

Only the first thirty points are listed in the Preview panel.


3. Choose the parameters to fit the file to open.

4. Click . The Neutral Point Import dialog closes.

Tip: You can use the shortcut key Ctrl + O or click Open in the Main toolbar to pop-up the Open dialog.

Note: (*) We assume that there is no project opened. If there is one opened, the Add to Project option is enabled and default checked. You can then import such a file into the already opened project.

Without Wizard

When you load an ASCII format without the Wizard , RealWorks attempts to determine which separator is used and the different attributes of a point.

To Open Without the Wizard: the dialog, uncheck the Open Wizard for ASCII Files option.

2. Click . The Open dialog closes.

Note: An ASCII format file, when dragged and dropped into an open session of

RealWorks , is loaded without the Wizard .


Trimble TX5 and Other FLS Files

RealWorks supports the Trimble TX5 file format originating from the Trimble

TX5 3D scanning system. Such a format, with the *.fls extension, is stored on a

SD card (used with the Trimble TX5 3D scanner for storing data).

Files and folders on a Trimble TX5 Scanner 's SD card are structured as shown below. The FARO-LS format file is a signature file used to identity a SD card as a Trimble TX5 Scanner 's SD card . The Scans folder is a folder where all acquired scans are stored in.

An acquired scan is composed of a set of files and folders. All are put in a FLS folder under the Scans folder as illustrated below. The file to open is mainly the

FLS file in the FLS folder.

From a Trimble TX5 Scanner 's SD card, the opening through the File / Open menu is restricted to one FLS format file at a time. The Import FLS Files feature avoids such restriction. Multiple selection of FLS files (or of FLS folder) is now permitted.

In addition to the FLS format, RealWorks also supports the iQscan format.


Open a FLS Format File

To Open a FLS Format File: the menu, select Open . The Open dialog opens.

2. Select from the File of

Type field.

3. Do one of the following: a) Navigate to the Trimble TX5 ' SD card. the file from the SD card / Scans / FLS folder. Its name appears in the File Name field.

Or c) Navigate to a drive/folder where all the FLS files are located. d) Select FLS file (or a set of FLS files). Its name (or all names) appears (or appear) in the File Name field.

Open . The Open dialog closes.

Note: If there is one (or more) project(s) open in RealWorks , the Add to Project option is enabled. You can then choose a project to import the FLS file in from the drop-down list.

Tip: You can also drag and drop a FLS file into RealWorks . This method is limited to one FLS file at a time.

Caution: Do not rename the extension ( FLS ) of the folder which contains the

FLS format file to open. Otherwise, an error dialog opens and warns you that the FLS format file has been removed (or deleted) from its previous location.

Note : A scan, acquired with colors, generates a colored file in the FLS format.

The TZF Scan, that results, is colored. You may see a colored preview in the

Property window (only if it is open) when displaying the TZF Scan 's properties.

Note: A scan, acquired with the dual-axis compensator On (compensated), is flagged as a leveled Fls format file. The TZF Scan , that results, appears blue

(leveled) in RealWorks . Those for which the dual-axis compensator is Off

(none compensated) remain yellow.


Open an IQscan Format File

To Open an IQscan Format File: the menu, select Open . The Open dialog opens.

2. Select from the File of

Type field.

3. Navigate to the drive/folder where the IQscan file is located.

4. Click on the file to select it. Its name appears in the File Name field.


Note: If there is one (or more) project(s) open in RealWorks , the Add to Project option is enabled. You can then choose a project to import the IQscan file in from the drop-down list.

Tip: You can also drag and drop several IQScan files into RealWorks .

For each file, a dialog appears and informs you that you need to first create and save a project into the Trimble RWP format.

A project and a station are created and rooted under the Project Tree . You have to a give a name to the project while the station takes the file name.

TZF Scan is also created and put under the station.





Surveying Network ASCII Files

One of the key features of RealWorks is its ability to open (or import) surveyed data produced by other data collectors such as Total Stations, Field Stations, etc. Each such file will be opened (or imported) alone as a topographic station with points converted to topopoints (or as a station like other scanning stations in the selected project with points converted to 3D points).

A file with the CRD extension is a coordinate file with five data fields (Point number, Northing, Easting, Elevation and Description) in binary form. A file with the CR5 extension is also a coordinate file but owned by TDS. A file with the

TXT extension is an ASCII text file. Each line of the text file can contain any combination of Point number, Northing, Easting, Elevation and Description. All point information should be on one line with the values separated by a comma, space or other delineateers. All these parameters can be customized during the loading phase in RealWorks .

The Surveying Network Import dialog which appears after selecting a file to open is composed of six parts: five for adjusting the parameters to import the data and one for visualization. When you load a surveying network file,

RealWorks attempts to determine which separator is used and the different attributes of a point. But you can customize these parameters:

Import:

Header:

Separator:

Units:

File Format:

You can import as topopoints or as 3D points.

You can ignore the first lines of a Surveying Network ASCII format file by selecting the number of lines to skip. These lines can be headers, comments, or X, Y, Z coordinates that you don't want to keep. The number of lines that you can skip is limited to 12. You can do the same for Column char and

Comment line char.

Separator between attributes of a point can be a semicolon, comma, tabulation or other.

You have the choice between several units: Millimeter, Meter, U.S. Survey

Foot and International Foot. The U.S. Survey Foot, defined by the National

Bureau of Standards NBS, corresponds to a value of 1200/3937m (or

0.3048006096m). The International Foot corresponds to a value of 0.3048m.

You can choose between two types of contents:

§ Point Number, X, Y, Z, Description,

§ Point Number, Northing, Easting, Elevation, Description.

Note: The Open Wizard for ASCII Files option in the Open dialog becomes active and is default-checked if the file to be imported has a TXT extension; and remains inactive (grayed out) for files with CRD and CR5 extensions.

Tip: You can display (or hide) the Topo Point (or 3D Point )'s 3D Labels by selecting Rendering / Display 3D Labels from the 3D View menu. The Display



Open a Surveying Network ASCII Format File

If there is no project opened, you can only open a Surveying Network ASCII format file as a Topographic Station , the Add to Project and In a Station (Fill with GeomPoints) options respectively in the Open and Surveying Network

Import dialogs are dimmed.

To Open a Surveying Network ASCII Format File:

1. In dialog, customize the opening the parameters to fit the survey network file to open.

OK . The Surveying Network Import dialog closes.

1 - A topographic station 2 - A set of TopoPoints

Note: The processing mode will automatically swap to Registration . The Scans

Tree is by default selected.


Import a Surveying Network ASCII Format File

If there is an opened project, you can choose between importing a Surveying

Network ASCII format file in a station as unmatched 3D Points inside or as a

Topographic Station with unmatched TopoPoints inside.

To Import a Surveying Network ASCII Format File: the dialog, do one of the following:

Add the surveying network file as a station filled with topopoints. the option. the Surveying Network ASCII format file to open.

OK . The Surveying Network Import dialog closes.

Add the surveying network file as 3D points in a station. the option. b) Click on the In a Station (Fill with GeomPoints) pull down arrow. c) Choose a station from the drop down list. the Surveying Network ASCII format file to open. e) Click . The Surveying Network Import dialog closes.

A set of 3D Points

Note:


The processing mode will automatically swap to Registration . The Scans

Tree is by default selected.

When importing a Surveying Network ASCII format file, you need to have at least a station within your project. Otherwise the In a Station (Fill with

GeomPoints) option is dimmed.

SIMA ASCII Files

RealWorks supports SIMA ASCII format files (Japanese survey file format). A file in such format (with sim extension) can be opened (or imported) in

RealWorks . If no project is open, the Add to Project option in the Open dialog is grayed out and you are restricted to opening. If there is an opened project, the Add to Project option is enabled and default checked. Each file will be opened (or imported) as a topographic station and each point converted to an unmatched Topopoint.

Note: RealWorks will swap for the Registration processing mode after opening such a file.

Tip: You can display (or hide) the Topo Point 's 3D Labels by selecting

Rendering / Display 3D Labels from the 3D View menu. The Display 3D Labels feature once selected has a check mark on its side.


AutoCAD Files

RealWorks can open drawings in DXF (Drawing eXchange Format) or DWG

(DraWinG) file format. The DXF file format is an ASCII file format which describes CAD data defined by AutoDesk. This file format facilitates the exchange of CAD data between two different programs. The DWG file format is the binary file format from AutoCAD and AutoCAD LT.

To Open a DXF (or DWG) Format File: the menu, select Open . The Open dialog appears.

2. Select from the File of Type field.

3. Navigate to the drive/folder where the DXF (or DWG) format file is located.

4. Click on the DXF (or DWG) format file's name to select it.

5. Click . The DXF File Import (or DXF File Import ) dialog opens.

6. Click on the DXF Unit of Length (or DXF Unit of Length ) pull down arrow.

7. Specify a unit of measurement to apply from the drop down list.

8. Choose and Merge Each 3D Point of the Same Layer into a Cloud .

9. Or check both options.

10. Click OK . The DXF File Import (or DXF File Import ) dialog closes.

Caution: A warning message appears if the DWG (or DXF ) format file to open

(or import) contains entities with no equivalent in RealWorks . These entities will not be opened (or imported) in RealWorks .

Note: If there is no project open, you can only open a DWG ( DXF ) format file.

The Add to Project option in the Open dialog is dimmed.


A set of model groups is created and put under a project rooted under the

Models Tree . Each model group contains all 3D faces (or 3D points) of the same layer - each opened as a mesh of two triangles (see A1) (or as a 3D point object (see B1 and B2)).

A1 - A mesh has been created for each 3D face A2 - A mesh has been created for all 3D faces of the same layer

B1 - The Project Cloud is empty of points B2 - Each 3D point is opened as an object of

3D point

There are two options in the DXF File Import (or DWG File Import ) dialog. The first when checked allows merging of all 3D Faces of the same layer into a mesh (see A2) and the second all 3D Points into a Cloud (see B3 and B4)).


B3 - The Project Cloud contains points B4 - All 3D points of the same layer are opened and merged as a unique point cloud

Note: For all 3D Points of the same layer, a station is created and rooted under the Scans Tree .

IXF Files

A file of IXF format (Optech’s laser scanning systems - ILRIS - data format) with ixf extension can be opened (or imported) in RealWorks . If no project is open, the Add to Project option in the Open dialog is grayed out and you are restricted to opening. If there is an opened project, the Add to Project option is enabled and default checked. Each file will be opened (or imported) as station(s) put in the Scans Tree and as points put in the current Project Cloud in the Models Tree .


RIEGL Scan Project Files

A file with the .rsp extension is a project file coming from the RiIEGL 's RiSCAN

PRO TM software. This file is a text file using an XML structure. It does not contain scan data, but just links to the scan files. All of the scan files are stored in a folder with the .rdb extension. It is named after the name of the project file.

RiSCAN PRO TM is the companion software for all Terrestrial 3D Laser Scanner

Systems from RIEGL . RealWorks does support the coloring, georefencing, registration, etc. information that are in the .rsp format file. A RiIEGL 's RiSCAN

PRO TM project file has the structure illustrated below.

1 - A Riegl's RiSCAN PRO format file

2 - Scan file folder

3 - Scan file

4 - Points file

In RealWorks , if no project is open, the Add to Project option in the Open dialog is grayed out and you are restricted to opening a project file. If there is an open project, the Add to Project option is enabled and checked by default.

Each scan file will be converted to a TZF Scan and put under a station. All are rooted in the Scans Tree as illustrated below.



Z+F Scan Files

Data acquired by a Z+F 3D laser scanner can contain colors (or not) depending on how it has been acquired. For a given data set, there are three types of files that come out of the scanner: ZFPRJ for project file, ZFS for scan files and ZFI image container.

If the data has been acquired with no information of colors, only the ZFS format files are required. They can be opened (or imported) directly into RealWorks . If the data has been acquired with colors taken by a Z+F camera (integrated or external), the three types of files have to be processed in the Z+F LaserControl software which provides in return panoramic images, in PGN or JPEG format.

The colors information are then stored in the panoramic images. If the data has been acquired with colors taken by an external digital camera on a nodal point adapter, the images that come out the camera have to be processed in a 3rd party software (PtGui , Autopano Giga).

In the last case, the panoramic images need to be:

Be located in the same directory of each scan file ( ZFS ).

Have the same name as the scan file ( ZFS ) followed by "Underscore and color".

Have the same dimensions (in pixels) as the scan file ( ZFS ).

In RealWorks , if no project is open, the Add to Project option in the Open dialog is grayed out and you are restricted to opening a scan file. If there is an opened project, the Add to Project option is enabled and checked by default.

Each scan file ( ZFS ) will be opened (or imported) as a TZF Scan put in a station in the Scans Tree .


Z+F Import Filters

The Z+F Import Filters dialog opens when you load a ZFS format file into

RealWorks . From this dialog, you can choose a set of filters to apply to points in order to keep those required, and filter out those that are noisy or badly acquired, etc.


Filter by Intensity

This filter, when it is chosen, discards pixels that are below the Min. value and above the Max. value in terms of Intensity . These two values are defined in percentage by the user. The default values depend on the type of the scanner.

Filter by Range

This filter, when it is chosen, discards pixels which are not in the defined range.

The filter is not active when the Min.

and the Max.

values are equal to zero.

Filter Edge Points

This filter, when it is chosen, removes pixels, which are on edges of objects and therefore not valid. On edges you have mixed range values, these range values are often between the foreground and the background (but also possible in front or behind objects).

Filter Bottom

This filter, when it is chosen, removes pixels from the bottom of the instrument

(Nadir) up to a user given angle.

Remove Isolated Points

This filter, when it is chosen, removes pixels which have no valid neighbor.

Remove Bad Lines

This filter, when it is chosen, deletes the first scan lines of recording, marked by the scanner as “bad” due to laser warm-up procedure at the early beginning of the scan (first few scan-lines).

Remove Scan Outer Boundary

This filter masks pixels at the outer borders of the scan. The first and last line and the first and the last pixel of each line are filtered.

Remove Points at Range Discontinuities

This filter detects jumps in range and filter out pixels.

Remove Lines at Tilt Discontinuities

This filter, when it is chosen, removes lines which show too big tilt changes.


CMF Files

A CMF format file is a file provided by a Trimble CPW 8000 (or Trimble CX) instrument. For each CMF format file, a project will be created and rooted under the Project Tree . Inside the project, all points of the CMF format file will be put a scan under a station named by the CMF format file.

1 - The created station named by the file name 2 - All points are put in a scan

A RealWorks project file and a folder, respectively with the RWP and RWI extensions, are created. A set of RWCX format files (one per scan) and a set of RWV format files (one per image and when available) are created under the

RWI folder.

Note:

CMF format file can be either opened as a single project or imported into an existing project.

The library does not need to be installed apart as it is included in the

RealWorks installer.


LAS and LAZ Files

The LAS file format is a public file format for the interchange of 3-dimensional point cloud data between data users. It is binary-based. The LAS format has several versions: 1.0, 1.1, 1.2, 1.3 and 1.4. RealWorks is able to import files from all of those versions.

The LAZ format is a compressed version of the LAS format. Everything that is in a LAS file is also a LAZ file. The difference is that the LAZ format offers a compression rate which is 5 to 20 times greater than the LAS format, thus providing smaller files.

Note: LAZ files share the same version numbers as LAS files. RealWorks is also able to import LAZ files from all of those versions.

Points in LAS / LAZ files can have intensity and/or color information. They can also have none of them. RealWorks behaves as described below:

If color is present without intensity, color is used to create intensity value.

If intensity is present without color, a gray scale is applied to color.

If color and intensity are present, both attributes are applied to color and intensity.

If no color and no intensity are present, all points are rendered in white, in color and in intensity mode.

Note: LAS / LAZ format from 1.0 to 1.3 support at most 4 billion of points.

LAS / LAZ 1.4 does support virtually infinite point cloud size (over 4 billion of points), however the current version of RealWorks does not support importing

LAS / LAZ files with more than 4 billion points.


E57 Files

The E57 format is a file format specified by the ASTM (American Society for

Testing and Materials), an international standards organization. It is compact and vendor-neutral. It was developed for storing data (Point Clouds, images and metadata) produced by 3D imaging systems such as laser scanners. Such format enables data interoperability among 3D imaging hardware and software systems and is not dependent on proprietary formats for storing and exchanging data.

The E57 format supports two types of data: Gridded Data and Non-Gridded

Data. Gridded data is a data which is aligned in regular arrays. An E57 format file can have an individual scan or several scans within.


Gridded Data

An E57 format file with gridded data can be open as a project or be imported into an existing one. In the first case, an information dialog is displayed. This dialog prompts you to create and save the project into the Trimble RWP format.

A project and a station are created and rooted under the Project Tree . The project is named according to the given name. The station takes the name of the E57 format file.

In case of a multi-scans file, there are as many stations as there are scans within the E57 file.

A is created and put under the station.


A project file and a project folder are created, both named according to the given name, with the respective RWP extension and the RWI extension. the folder, a scan file with the TZF extension is also created.

In case of a multi-scans file, there are as many TZF Scan files as there are scans within the E57 file.

Caution: The default mode is OfficeSurvey . You have to switch to Registration to see the result(s).

Note: The conversion (of a E57 format file with gridded data) to a TZF Scan file can fail. If this case occurs, the file is then considered as a non-gridded file.

Note: The project will be automatically saved at the end of the conversion(s).

The color information in a E57 format file are preserved when converting (the

E57 format file) to a TZF Scan .


Non-Gridded Data

An E57 format file with non-gridded data can either be opened as a new project or imported into an existing project.

A project is created and rooted under the Project Tree . The project follows the naming convention of ProjectX where X is its order.

Non-gridded data are imported as a Cloud . All of its points are put in the

Project Cloud .

A station and a scan are created in the Scans Tree .

A project file and a project folder are created, both named according to the given name, with the respective RWP extension and the RWI extension. the folder, a RealWorks scan file with the RWCX extension is also created.

Note: The project will not be saved. You have to save it manually.


PTX Files

PTX is a file extension for laser scanning files. It is ASCII based. If there is no project, an information dialog appears for each PTX format file. This dialog informs the user that he needs to first create and save a project into the

Trimble RWP format.

A project and a station will be created and rooted under the Project Tree .

The user has to a give a name to the project while the station takes the

PTX format file name.

A is also created and put under the station.


Note:

The processing mode will automatically switch to Registration . The Scans

Tree is selected by default.

PTX format file can be either opened as a single project or imported into an existing project.

The project created within RealWorks is saved in the database.

PTX format files may contain several scans in the same station. RealWorks converts all the scans and creates TZF Scans , one per scan, in the same station in the RealWorks project. The colors information in a PTX format file are preserved when converting (the PTX format file) to a TZF Scan .


PTS Files

PTS is a file extension for laser scanning files. It is ASCII based. A project and a station will be created and rooted under the Project Tree . The project is named ProjectX where X is its order. The station has as name the PTS format file name. Under the station, a scan named ScanX where X is its order is created.

Note:

The processing mode will automatically switch to OfficeSurvey . The

Models Tree is selected by default.

The created project is not saved in the database; the user has to save it manually, otherwise it will be lost.

Once the project is saved, a RealWorks project file and a folder are created.

Both are named according to the name given by the user, with a RWP extension for the first and a RWI extension for the second. Under the RWI folder, a scan file with the RWCX extension is also created.

Note: There is no direct entry of PTS format in the Open dialog. To be able to open a file of such format in RealWorks , you need to choose All Files as File of

Type . Note also that after clicking Open , the Neutral Point Import dialog opens.

DotProduct Files

DP is an extension for highly compressed files provided by a DPI-7 System from the DOT Product company. One file contains several registered frames and RealWorks import them all at once in one single scan.


Open a Project File

A project file can be opened by using the Open dialog or using the Recent

Files in the File menu. The ten last opened files are listed at the bottom of the

File menu. As a shortcut, you can open any of them just by selecting it in this menu.

To Open a Project File: the menu, select Open . The Open dialog opens with the Add to Project option dimmed.

2. Select a file type from the File of Type field.

3. Navigate to the drive/folder where the file is located.



Tip: You can use the shortcut key Ctrl + O (or click Open in the Main toolbar) to pop-up the Open dialog.

You can also drag and drop to open a project file into RealWorks . If RealWorks is not already open, this operation will open it. Only one project file can be dragged and dropped at a time. If it is already open, you can drag and drop a set (of project files).

If no project is open in RealWorks , there is no difference in the result between opening of a set of project files (through the File / Open menu) and dragging and dropping a set of files into RealWorks . In both cases, a project and a set of stations* are created. For each project file, a scan is created and put under its related station*.

If there is a project already open in RealWorks , the result is the same. But in the first case, you can decide to open the project files into the open project (or not). In the second case, you can only open the project files into a new project.

Note:

For files of certain types, you cannot drag and drop a set of projects into

RealWorks when there is no opened session.

Projects are ranked by alphabetic order in the Project Tree in the

WorkSpace . They are ranked from their opening order in the List window.

You can abort the opening of a project by pressing Esc .

When you open a project previously saved in RealWorks format or in

PointScape format or in JobXML format for which images are missing, a warning message appears and all missing images are listed.

Note: (*) Except for TZF format files.


Note: You can also open a project by selecting from Open an Existing Project from the Start Page . When you try to do so within a tool that is already open, a warning appears and prompts you to close the tool prior to loading a new project.


Import a Project File

A project file can be imported into an existing project by using the Open dialog.

To Import a Project File: the menu, select Open . The Open dialog opens with the Add to Project option dimmed*.

2. Select a type of file from the File of Type field.

3. Navigate to the drive/folder where the file is located.

4. Click on the file to select it. Its name appears in the File Name field. the option checked.

6. If there are several projects, click on the pull-down arrow.

7. Choose a project from the drop-down list.


Tip: You can use the shortcut key Ctrl + O (or click Open in the Main toolbar) to pop-up the Open dialog.


Import FLS Files

To Import FLS Files:

1. From menu, select Import FLS Files . The Import FLS Files dialog opens. All drives (of your computer) are by default listed (when the dialog opens for the first time).

2. Navigate to the Scans folder where all the FLS files are located. the folder. The Import button becomes enabled.

4. Do one of the following:

Click . The Import FLS Files dialog closes. All FLS files from the Scans folder are imported.

Or the folders to import one by one. click . The Import FLS Files dialog closes.

Note:

If there is one (or more) project(s) open in RealWorks , the Add to Project option is enabled. You can then choose a project to import (the FLS files) in from the drop-down list.

Open button becomes enabled if the selection (from the Import FLS

Files dialog) is a drive (or a folder). It swaps from Open to Import when you select a FLS folder (or a FLS file).

The path to the FLS folders (or FLS files) to import in the dialog is persistent. This means that it remains unchanged till you change it.


A dialog appears and informs you that you need to first create and save a project into the Trimble RWP format.

A project and a set of stations (one per file) are created and rooted under the Project Tree . You have to give a name for the project while each station is named according to the file name.

A (one per file) is also created and put under its related station.

A project file and a folder are created. Both are named according to the name given by the user, with a RWP extension for the first and a RWI extension for the second. Under the RWI folder, a set of scan files with the

TZF extension is also created.



Caution: Do not rename the extension ( FLS ) of the folder which contains the

FLS format file to open. Otherwise, an error dialog opens and warns you that the FLS format file has been removed (or deleted) from its previous location.

Note : When a scan has been acquired with color, the FLS file that results is colored. The TZF Scan, created by opening (or importing) such FLS file, is colored too. You may see the color information by displaying the TZF Scan 's properties (only if the Property window is open).

Tip: When importing FLS format files into an existing project, the project is automatically saved once the import completed.

Caution: The Import FLS Files feature is not available in RealWorks Viewer .


Connect to a Mobile Device

A fast way to open (or import) a file from a Trimble data collector such as a

Recon™, TCU™ or TSC2™ in RealWorks is to connect and synchronize the

Trimble data collector with a desktop computer (or laptop). Only a file of RAW

(from the Trimble Survey Pro™), JOB (from the Survey Controller™ software) and JobXML (from the Trimble Survey Controller™, Survey Manager™ or

Survey Pro™ software) extensions can be opened (or imported) in that way.

Microsoft® ActiveSync® is a software program that comes with your data collector when you purchase it. This program allows you to synchronize the information on your data collector with the information on your desktop computer (or laptop). Synchronization is done by comparing data between these two computers and updates both of them with the most recent information. ActiveSync® is already integrated into the operating system on your data collector. However, you must install ActiveSync® on your desktop computer (or laptop). You can install the software from the CD that was shipped with your data collector or you can download the current version of

ActiveSync® from the Microsoft® website.

To Connect to a Mobile Device:

1. Connect a Trimble data collector to your desktop computer (or laptop). For more details, please refer to the documentation that comes with your data collector.

2. Power the Trimble data collector On.

If there is no project open, the Connection to Mobile Device dialog opens and the Add to Project option is grayed out. You are restricted to opening a file. a) Navigate to the drive/folder where the file is located. b) Click on the file to select it. The Open button becomes active. c) Click on the Open button.

If there is one or more projects open in RealWorks : the menu, select Connect to Mobile Device . The

Connection to Mobile Device dialog opens and the Add to

Project option is available and default checked. b) Navigate the Drive / folder where the file is located. c) Click on the file to select it. The Open button becomes active. d) Keep option checked. e) Click on the pull down arrow and choose a project from the drop down list. f) Click on the Open button.


Tip: Instead of selecting Connect to Mobile Device from the File menu, you can also click on it related icon in the Main toolbar.

Note: The path to the file to open (or import) as well as the dialog box size are persistent. This means that they remain unchanged till the user changes them.


Open Trimble Scan Explorer

Trimble Scan Explorer is a plug-in hosted in RealWorks . It is a navigator dedicated to handling and navigating large databases from which the user can extract and send data to RealWorks or to a specific file format. The Scan

Explorer feature is available with the following types of license: Base ,

Advanced , Advanced Modeler , Advanced Plant and Advanced Tank .

To Open Trimble Scan Explorer:

1. Select either a project or a station (or set of stations). the menu, select Open Scan Explorer .

Tip: You can also select Open Scan Explorer from the Main toolbar.

Warning: A message appears if one (or more) TZF format file(s) is (or are) missing in the project (loaded through RealWorks or if the project is not compatible with Scan Explorer .

Note: For more information related to the use of Trimble Scan Explorer , refer please to its documentation.

Note: the format file(s) has (have) not been yet processed, the Processing

TZF Scans dialog opens and prompts you to proceed to do so. leveled will be automatically re-projected during the Post-

Processing step.

Note: Within Scan Explorer , the Create Entities in RealWorks and Create

Entities in SketchUp features are available with the Advanced Modeler ,

Advanced Plant and Advanced Tank licenses.


Open Trimble RealColor

Trimble RealColor is a solution for easily and efficiently coloring TZF Scans .

The RealColor feature is available with the following types of license: Base ,

Advanced , Advanced Modeler , Advanced Plant and Advanced Tank .

To Open Trimble RealColor:

1. Select either a project or a station (or set of stations). the menu, select Open RealColor .

Warning: A message is displayed if one (or more) TZF format file(s) is (or are) missing in the project (loaded through RealWorks or if the project is not compatible with Trimble RealColor .



Processing step.

Note: For more information related to Trimble RealColor , refer please to its

FAQ.


Open Trimble SketchUp

The Open SketchUp feature is available with the Advanced , Advanced

Modeler , Advanced Plant and Advanced Tank versions of RealWorks.

This feature is enabled only if SketchUp Pro 20014 (or 2015 ) is installed on your computer . Otherwise, it remains dimmed. The feature, when selected, starts

SketchUp and allows you exporting an existing geometry, either from

RealWorks to SketchUp (by selecting the Export to SketchUp feature) or with

Trimble Scan Explorer opened nearby (by selecting Create Entities in

SketchUp ).

To Open Trimble SketchUp:

1. Select either a project or a station (or set of stations). the menu, select Open SketchUp .

If the selected project is unsaved, a dialog opens and prompts you to save it.

If there are some TZF Scans in the selected project, you can Open

Trimble Scan Explorer and use the Create Entities in SketchUp feature for extracting and sending entities to SketchUp .

Note: For more information related to the Create Entities in SketchUp feature, please refer to the Trimble Scan Explorer for RealWorks documentation.

To Close Trimble SketchUp:

Sketchup closes by itself when you close RealWorks . If a change has been done in the project, you will be asked to save the project, in RealWorks. If some entities have been exported towards SketchUp , you will be asked to save the project, in SketchUp.

If the connection between RealWorks and SketchUp is lost for any reason, a warning dialog opens. First close the dialog and then select Reconnect to

RealWorks from Plugins menu, in SketchUp as illustrated below.


If the connection with RealWorks is broken, a dialog opens and prompts you to first leave SketchUp and then restart it from RealWorks .

Caution: If there is no open project in RealWorks , the Open SketchUp feature remains grayed-out.


Import an Image Into a Project

Image files in JPEG , BMP (only of 24-bit depth) and TIF formats can be imported into an existing project. An imported image is rooted under the

Images Tree . If you attempt to import an image of a format other than those mentioned above, an error message appears

To Import an Image Into a Project:

1. Select a project from the Project Tree .

2. In menu, select Import Image . The Import Image dialog opens.

3. Select the right image type from the File of Type field.

4. Navigate to the drive/folder where the image file is located.

5. Click on the file to select it.

6. Click .

Note: Only RGB TIF files can be imported into RealWorks . If you attempt to import a TIF format image of a color space other than RGB , an error message appears

Note: You need to have a project loaded in RealWorks . Otherwise, the Import

Image feature remains dimmed.


Performing Operations on TZF Scans

For a better usage in RealWorks , TZF Scans depending on their origin (issued directly from Trimble TX8 3D scanner or converted from another format) may require to improve their quality with post-processing or re-projection operations. Other operations described in this chapter allow extracting 3D or image information.

Data coming from a Trimble FX instrument is stored in a C3D format file. Such data (in C3D format) once processed (in the Trimble FX Controller software) is saved as a Trimble Scan File (with TZS file extension). Files with such extension should now be converted to the TZF format, otherwise you cannot open them.

The table below lists the type of tool the user can use according to the license

(of RealWorks ) he has.


Post-Process TZF Scans

A TZF Scan , before being able to be used as the input of a tool, must be postprocessed. A post-processing procedure is an operation applied on the data in order to improve the contrast and the luminance and to correct the noise effect.

This operation must only be done once (per TZF Scan ) and there is no undo.

In addition to the post-processing operation, the user can compress the TZF

Scan file(s) by reducing its size about by half. If you decline to post-process a

TZF Scan , you cannot then work with that TZF Scan .

Caution: An error message appears if the TZF Scan(s) to process is (or are) read-only.

Note: Your graphic card must be Open CL 1.1

compatible (or higher) and the driver up to date. Otherwise a warning (in the Processing TZF Scans dialog) appears and post-processing TZF Scan (s) may take a long time.


Re-Project TZF Scans

A TZF Scan issued from a Trimble TX8 3D scanner may have an issue due to a shift between the real angles and the theoretical grid. In other word, there is a significant shift between a pixel on the 2.5 Preview image and the 3D Point that is behind. The Re-Project TZF Scans feature enables to correct this mismatch by re-projecting each 3D Point onto its related pixel.

To Re-Project TZF Scans:

1. Select TZF Scan (or a station or a project with TZF Scan files within). the menu, select TZF Scans / Re-Project TZF Scans .

A progress bar appears at the bottom left corner of the user interface.

TZF Scans are processed one after the other (in the case a station

(with several TZF Scans or a project has been selected).

Note: When you perform an operation on a station, its leveling status is first checked. If the station is Leveled , all its TZF Scans are automatically reprojected. If the station is Unleved , the user has to re-project all the TZF Scans manually as described above.

You can manually set a leveled station (with TZF Scans within) to unleveled.

This change (in the station leveling status) has no impact on the TZF Scans themselves. The leveling information is still present in the TZF Scans . The TZF

Scans are automatically re-projected.


Note: The Re-Project TZF Scans feature is only available in the Registration mode.

Note: If the TZF format file(s) has (have) not been yet processed, the

Processing TZF Scans dialog opens and prompts you to proceed to do so.


Create Sampled Scans

The Create Sampled Scans feature allows the user to create a series of

Sampled Scans in batch processing mode without having to interact. But if required, the user can also create a series of Sampled Scans , but one by one.

To Create Sampled Scans:

1. Select either a project or a station (or set of stations) or a TZF Scan (or a set of TZF Scans ). the menu, select TZF Scans / Create Sampled Scans . The

Sampled Scan Creation dialog appears.

3. Sample to the scan data.

4. And if required, filter the scan data.

5. Click . The Sampled Scan Creation dialog closes. new is named as follows:

Sample - A where A is the Step value set in Sampling By Step ,

Sample - A where A the Distance value set in Spatial

Sampling ,

Adaptative Sample - A where A the Flat Zone Resolution value set in Adaptive Sampling ,

You can add as many Sampled Scans as needed under a given station. If a project has been selected, Sampled Scans (one per station) are created in batch processing mode. If a station has been selected, only a Sampled Scan is created and under the selected station.


Warning: All Sampled Scans cannot overall four billions points.

Tip: When you create from several TZF Scans within a station, all Sampled

Scans (in that station) do not have the same color. Each has its own color.

Note:

If the selected project has not been yet saved in the database, you are then prompted to do so. We advise you to save the project under the same folder as the TZF format files. the folder, a scan file (with RWCX extension) is created per sampled scan named as follows ProjectName_StationX_ScanY.



Processing step.

Tip: You can also right-click on a TZF Scan and select Create Sampled Scans from the pop-up menu.

Sample the Scan Data

There are three sampling methods ( Sampling by Step, Spatial Sampling and

Adaptive Sample ) that you can use in order to reduce the number of points in the scan data.

The sampling will be applied to the entirety of the scan data. The number of estimated points will be updated according to the defined parameter except when using the Spatial Sampling or the Adaptative Sampling . It is in that case

" Undefined ". Note that the use of the Filter by Range has no effect on the number of estimated points.

Apply a Sampling by Step

In the Sampling by Step method, one point will be taken into account at each defined Step vertically and horizontally in the 2D image data.

To Apply a Sampling by Step:

1. Click on the Sampling pull-down arrow.

2. Choose from the drop-down list.

3. Enter a value in the Step (In Pixels) field.

4. Or use the Up (or Down ) button to choose a value.


Apply a Spatial Sampling

The Spatial Sampling method allows you to obtain a point cloud with a homogeneous spatial density that you have to define.

To Apply a Spatial Sampling:


Spatial Sampling from the drop-down list.

3. Enter a value in the Resolution field.


Apply an Adaptative Sampling

This method enables to adaptively sample a TZF Scan using the local context, in order to extract a scan with high point density in high contrast areas (e.g. edges) and low point density in flat, low varying areas (e.g. walls, floors). You have to define a resolution which allows you to control the density of points in flat regions, and all the points in high information areas are kept.

To Apply an Adaptative Sampling:


Adaptative Sampling from the drop-down list.

3. Enter a value in the Flat Zone Resolution field.


Filter the Scan Data

There are two filters ( Filter by Range and Filter by Zone ) that you can use in order to reduce the number of points in the scan data. Note that the use of the

Filter by Range has no effect on the number of estimated points.


Filter by Range

The By Range allows you to define a distance (from the center of the FX instrument) beyond which no point will be taken into account. This filter is only applied to the scan data.

To Filter by Range:

1. Check option. The Max Distance field becomes editable.

2. Enter a value in the Max Distance field.


Filter by Zone

The By Zone option allows filtering by defining a bounding box. The Min Point and Max Point are the two extremities of a bounding box diagonal.

To Filter by Zone: the option. The Min Point and Max Point fields become editable.

2. Enter a 3D coordinates in the Min Point field.

3. Enter a 3D coordinates in the Max Point field.


Modify the Path for Input TZF Scan

Files

Displacing a lone (or a set of) TZF format file(s) from its folder will break the correspondence with the station(s) created within RealWorks . You can no longer add new scans to the project*. The Modify Path For TZF Input File(s) command allows you to restore that correspondence by changing the path to the TZF format files.

To Modify the Path for the Input TZF Scan Files:

1. First create new stations (in batch processing mode or in interactive mode)**.

2. Then select either the Project , or the " New Group " or a station .

3. From menu, select TZF Scans / Modify Path For Input TZF Scan

Files . The Select New File Folder dialog opens. The default folder is the one storing the opened project.

4. Navigate to the new location of TZF files stored in the In field.

5. Select the folder and click OK . The Select New File Folder dialog closes and the Information dialog below appears.

OK to close the information.

Note:

You may see the path to a TZF format file by displaying its related station's properties (see Input Data Path Name line).

(*) Trying to add new scans without changing the path to the TZF format files will open a dialog which prompts you to continue with the remaining stations or not.


Note: When opening a project with TZF station(s) created out of RealWorks , the correspondence(s) (from the TZF station(s) to the TZF format file(s)) will be automatically updated only if the TZF format file(s) is (or are) in the RWI folder

(of the Project ).


Create Thumbnails

The Create Thumbnails feature allows you to create Thumbnails in batch processing mode or not. In the batch processing mode, the user interaction is not required and a set of Thumbnails is created (one per TZF file). Out of the batch processing mode, the user interaction is required and one Thumbnail is created for a given TZF file. A Thumbnail is a preview of a TZF file within

RealWorks .

To Create Thumbnails:

1. Select a project or a station (or set of stations). the menu, select TZF Scans / Create Thumbnails . each format file, a Thumbnail is created. created is put under its related station in the Scans

Tree and as a list in the Images Tree .

Each thumbnail has the following name: Thumbnail_ its related TZF file Name .

Note: If the selected project has not been yet saved in the database, you are then prompted to do so. We advise you to save the project under the same folder as the TZF format files.

By default, a Thumbnail is not shown in the 3D View . You need to toggle the

On / Off icon to On to display it as a thumbnail in the 3D View . You can then drag and drop the thumbnail to any location within the 3D View . To hide the thumbnail; you have choice between toggling Off the On / Off icon and clicking on the Close button at the top right corner.


Note:

If format file(s) has (have) not been yet processed, the Processing

TZF Scans dialog opens and prompts you to proceed to do so.

All will be automatically re-projected during the Post-

Processing step.

Generate Point Color-Coding by

Height

This feature will apply a rendering to point clouds according to the height of each point along the Z (or EI ) axis. This rendering will be applied to both loaded and unloaded points.

To Generate Point Color-Coding by Height:

1. Select a project (or a set of projects). the menu, select TZF Scans / Generate Point Color-Coding by

Height . A dialog opens warning you that the operation is definitive and may take a long time.

3. Click to continue.

4. Click to abort.

Note: The Rendering option will automatically swap to True Color .


Copy Original TZF Scan Files into

Project

There are two cases in which TZF format files are not present in the project folder ( RWI ). The first case is when a project has been created directly from

TZF format files. The second case is when projects (with TZF format files in the

RWI folder) have been merged together and these TZF format files have not been copied into the RWI folder of the merged project. In both cases, the link to the original TZF format files is preserved. This feature enables to copy the original TZF format files into the RWI folder.

To Copy Original TZF Scan Files Into Project:

1. Select a project from the Project Tree . the File / TZF Scans menu, select Copy Original TZF Scan Files Into

Project .

Caution: A TZF Scan , for which the link to the TZF format file is broken, has the following representation . You cannot copy such TZF format files into the RWI folder.


Create Station Images from TZF Scan

Color

This feature enables you to view panoramic images issued from colorized TZF

Scans in the Station-Based mode and use them for texturing a mesh. See

Trimble RealColor to know how to colorize TZF Scans .

To Create Station Images from TZF Scan Color:

1. Select a project, a set of stations containing colored TZF Scans , or a set of colorized TZF Scans . the / TZF Scans menu, select Create Station Images from TZF

Scan Color .

For each TZF Scan , a set of six matched images is created, one for each face of a cube map centered on the station location.

Each matched image is named after the name of the TZF scan followed by information related to its orientation ( Front , Back , etc.).

All created images are put under a folder named according to the station name.

Each matched image has a size which is determined by the level of the used

TZF Scan as specified below:

Level 1 : 3105 x 3105

Level 2 : 6211 x 6211


Level 3 : 1243 x 1243

Extended : 9317 x 9317

3. If required, switch to the Station-Based mode by selecting the 3D View /

Mode menu .

Note: When you select a station with several TZF Scans , only the Main Scan will be considered in the creation process.


Merge Several Projects In One

You can merge several projects into a single project. After merging, a new project with the name Merge Project is created.

To Merge Several Projects In One:

1. Select at least two projects from the Project Tree .

2. In menu, select Merge Projects from the drop-down menu.

For each project that has been modified and not yet saved, a dialog appears and prompts you to save it.

If you choose No , projects (to merge) will be then closed and unsaved.

In the other hand, the merged project will take all changes (from the projects (to merge) into account.

Caution: There is no undo once projects are merged together other than to not save the merged project.

Scans Tree

Stations from different projects are merged under the same project and are renamed according to the project they belong to.

1 - Stations from two different projects under the

WorkSpace window

2 - Stations under the merged project


Models Tree

Objects (Group, Cloud, etc.) from different projects are merged under the same project and are renamed according to the project they belong to.

1 - Objects from two different projects under the

WorkSpace node

2 - Merged project

3 - Objects under the merged project

Note: The Project Cloud of the merged project is the sum of all Project Clouds .


Targets Tree

Unmatched entities are merged under the same group (called Unmatched ) and matched entities (gathered in pairs) are put by order under the merged project.

Pairs sharing the same name and the same order than those in the first loaded project (first from the Project Tree ) have their number changed in order to continue the numbering*.

1 - Matched and unmatched entities from two different projects under the WorkSpace node

2 - Pairs of matched entities numbered from 001 to 010 becomes pairs of matched entities numbered from 007 to

016 in the merged project

3 - Matched and unmatched entities in the merged project

Caution: (*) Only pairs are renumbered, not the entities inside.


Images Tree

In the Images Tree , images of each tree are placed under a folder named after the old project. If all images are named IMAGEX where X is an order, all are renamed. The first image, from the first selected project and at the root of the

Image Tree , is renamed to IMAGE1 , the second IMAGE2 , and so on.

Images Tree BEFORE merging

In the example below, IMAGE3 from AtelierBatB is renamed IMAGE1 . The project to which each image belongs is indicated between brackets. If all images are different; like e.g. A, B, C, etc. All keep their name.


Images Tree AFTER merging

Note: Feature code libraries having the same name are also merged (Feature codes of same name belonging to a library having the same name are duplicated).


Save the Merged Project

A merged project is always unsaved. You have to manually it save by selecting

Save (or Save As ). Once done, a RealWorks project file and a folder, respectively with the RWP and RWI extensions, are created. A set of RWC and

RWV files for versions of RealWorks before 8.0 (or RWCX and RWV files for

RealWorks 8.0) is created. RWC and RWCX are cloud format files. RWV is an image format file.

In the RWI folder of the merged project, RWV files from the first project (in order of selection) have their name kept while those coming from the other projects are renamed in order to continue the numbering. For RWC (or RWCX ) files, their name also changes according the name given by the user and following the same numbering rule as for the RWV files.



Projects With TZF Scan Files Outside the RWI Folder

If the selected projects contain TZF Scan files but these files are out of the project folder ( RWI ), RWC and RWV files for versions of RealWorks before 8.0

(or RWCX and RWV files for RealWorks 8.0) are copied into the RWI folder of the merged project. TZF Scan files are not copied anymore into the RWI folder.

Links to the original TZF Scan files are kept.


Projects With TZF Scan Files Inside the RWI Folder

If one of the projects contains TZF Scan files in its project folder ( RWI ), the

TZF Scan Files Management dialog appears.

With the Copy TZF Scan Files into the New Project option selected, TZF Scan files which are located inside the RWI folder of the project(s) to merge are copied into the RWI folder of the merged project.

Caution: Be aware that this operation may take a long time.

With the Do Not Copy TZF Scan Files option, all TZF Scan files are not copied into the RWI folder of the merged project. Link to the original TZF Scan files is kept. Note that you can manually copy these TZF Scan files later by choosing

Copy Original TZF Scan Files into Project from the File / TZF Scans menu.



Save Projects

A project, which has not been saved, has an asterisk beside its name in the

Project Tree . You can save the project into the existing project file by using the

Save command or into a new project file by using the Save As command.

Caution: When a project has already been updated from an older version of

RealWorks to the current version, saving it under the same name will make it inaccessible under older versions of RealWorks .

Caution: You cannot save (or save as) a project in RealWorks Viewer .

Save a Project

To Save a Project:

1. Select an unsaved project from the Project Tree . the menu, select Save .

Tip: You can also use the shortcut key Ctrl + S or select Save from the Main menu.

Save a Project As

To Save a Project As.

1. Select either a saved project or an unsaved project from the Project Tree .

2. From menu, select Save As . The Save dialog opens.

3. Navigate to the drive/folder where you want to store the project.

4. Enter a name in the File Name field. The extension is added automatically.

5. Click . The Save dialog closes.

Note: The TZF Scan Files Management dialog opens if the selected project contains some TZF Scan files (within its RWI folder). You can then choose between " Copy TZF Scan Files into the New Project" and " Do Not Copy TZF

Scan Files, Keep the Link to the Originals ".


Undo an Operation

You can undo the last operation when the Undo Operation command is available. You can execute multiple-level undo, but its behavior varies depending on whether you use a command or a tool. When you use a command, the undo will delete its effects. When you are inside a tool, multiple undo will be applied to all intermediate steps of the tool, including their parameter settings and database operations. Once you exit the tool, multiple undo will take effect only on the database operations carried out by all operations of the tool.

To Undo an Operation: the menu, select Undo Operation . clicking to remove as many previous operations as necessary.

Note:

You can also use the Ctrl + Z shortcut keys or click the corresponding icon in the Main toolbar.

The stack is limited to the value defined in Preferences .


Redo an Operation

If you decide to restore the last operation (or action) you carried out in

RealWorks , you can easily do so by using the Redo Operation command.

When the Redo Operation command is unavailable (dimmed), it means that you cannot redo the last operation (or action).

To Redo an Operation: the menu, select Redo Operation . clicking to redo as many previous actions as necessary.

Note: You can also use the Ctrl + Y shortcut keys or click the corresponding icon in the Main toolbar.


Close Projects

You can either close a selected project (or all projects). When the project(s) is

(or are) not saved, a warning will be issued. You will be prompted to save (or not to save it (or them)). Note that there is one warning per open project and

Close All does not require selection.

Close the Selected Project

To Close the Selected Project:

1. Select a project from the Project Tree . the menu, select Close .

Close all Projects

To Close All Projects: the menu, select Close All .


Capture the Screen

This command allows you to dump the screen of the 3D View into a BMP image file.

To Capture the Screen: the menu, select Capture Screen . The Save File dialog opens.

2. Type a name for the image file. RealWorks assigns automatically the

.BMP extension to this file.

3. Specify the location you want to store this file by navigating through the drive/folder.

Save . The Save File dialog closes.


Set Preferences

Preferences allow you to customize the behavior and aspects of RealWorks .

These preferences are grouped under seven tabs. Preferences are persistent in RealWorks , i.e. the setting changes will be memorized and used for the following RealWorks sessions.

To Set Preferences: the menu, select Preferences . The Preferences dialog opens.

Or

2. First right-click in the 3D View (except on a displayed object and not within an open tool in).

3. And then, select Preferences from the pop-up menu.


Viewer Preferences

The preferences in the Viewer tab are described in the table below and allow you to control the behavior and the aspect of the 3D View .

This Option

Display Coordinate

Frame

Display Scale In

Orthographic Mode

Enables

To specify the choice between displaying and hiding the coordinate frame in the 3D View.

To specify the choice between displaying and hiding the scale in the 3D

View.

Polyline Width (Pixel) To specify the width of all polylines in the software.

Background Color To change the background color of the 3D View window. The default color is dark gray when you first start RealWorks. You can change it to the color you prefer. In addition to this, you can apply a gradient effect to this background color.

Highlight Color

Info Box Opacity

Rendering by

Elevation, Interval

Rendering by

Elevation, Origin

To change the color of the bounding box of selected objects. The default color is yellow.

To define the transparency of the information box using a slider.

To define the height of a color chart when applying the Color Coded by

Elevation rendering to displayed point clouds.

To define the starting point of a color chart relative to the world coordinate system when applying the Color Coded by Elevation rendering to displayed point clouds.

To Set a Preference for the Viewer:

1. Click on the Viewer tab (if required). The Viewer dialog appears.

2. Set a preference.

3. Click . The setting(s) will be applied and the Preferences dialog remains open.

4. Click . The setting(s) will be applied and the Preferences dialog closes.

Define the Width of All Polylines

This option lets the user to define the width of all polylines in the software. The default value is 2 pixels. The minimum value and the maximum value are respectively 1 pixel and 10 pixels. The option, once chosen, is not applied to the polylines that are being constructed but to those that are already created in the database.


Define the Rendering by Elevation Interval

This preference enables to define the height of a color chart when applying the

Color Coded by Elevation rendering to a displayed point cloud. The default value is to 10 meters.

Define the Rendering by Elevation Origin

This preference enables to define the starting point of a color chart relative to the world coordinate system when applying the Color Coded by Elevation rendering to a displayed point cloud.

HD Display Preferences

The preferences in the HD Display tab are described in the table below. They enable to allocate a size to the VRAM and RAM . HD stands for High Definition,

RAM for Random Access Memory (volatile memory for the CPU ) and VRAM for Video Random Access Memory (volatile memory of the graphical card).

VRAM will be used for displaying points in HD mode. RAM is a cache memory for displaying points in HD mode

This Option Enables

Auto

Advanced

To automatically set the VRAM and RAM sizes to respectively 1 GB and

2 GB.

The user to define a size to allocate to the VRAM or RAM.

To Set a Preference for the HD Mode:

1. Click on the HD Display tab. The HD Display dialog appears.

2. Set a parameter for a preference item.

3. Click . The setting will be applied and the Preferences dialog remains open.

OK . The setting will be applied and the Preferences dialog closes.

The Advanced option has be chosen if you are an advanced user of

RealWorks because you need to adapt the VRAM and RAM values to the specifications of your computer. Both allocated VRAM and RAM sizes should be smaller than the physical RAM size. The allocated RAM size should be larger than or equal to the allocated VRAM size. Higher values will optimize the display performance of RealWorks but will also slow it down.


Navigation Preferences

The preferences in the Navigation tab are described in the table below and are dedicated to the navigation options in the 3D View .

This Option

Head Always Up (Z

Axis)

Enables

When you move a 3D scene (rotate, zoom or pan) in the 3D View, you may lose its orientation in relation to the coordinate frame. This option allows you to keep the 3D scene with its Z direction always up (relative to the active coordinate frame).

To invert the motion for zoom in (or out) in all viewers (3D or 2D). Reverse Mouse for

Zoom

Auto-Spin

Mouse Buttons -

Rotate

A scene to turn around itself with a speed defined by the last mouse movement.

To assign a mouse button for Rotate.

Mouse Buttons - Pan To assign a mouse button for Pan.

To Set a Preference for the Navigation:

1. Click on the General tab. The General dialog appears.



4. Click . The setting will be applied and the Preferences dialog closes.


General Preferences

The preferences in the General tab are described in the table below.

This Option

Stack Size For

Undo/Redo

Location

Capacity

Coordinate System

Orientation Measure

System

Enables

To specify the number of levels for undo/redo operations. You can choose between 1 and 50.

RealWorks creates a temporary backup file for each opened project.

This option allows you to specify a location to which this backup file will be stored. By default, the backup folder is Windows/Temp.

This field indicates the capacity of the selected folder.

To choice between Cartesian Coordinate System and Geographic

Coordinate System.

To choose between two systems for the orientation measurements.

Language Settings*

Start Page

To select a language. The setting will only take effect next time the application is launched.

To display the Start Page when you start the software, only if the option has been checked. The setting will only take effect next time the software is launched.

To Set a General Preference:

1. Click on the General tab. The General dialog appears.



4. Click . The setting will be applied and the Preferences dialog closes.

Note: (*) A warning dialog opens and warns that you need to restart

RealWorks when changing the language setting. Otherwise the new language setting will not be taken effect.


Units Preferences

The preferences in the Units tab are described in the table below and allow you to set the unit system to use in your project.

This Option

Decimal Places

Display Value With

Unit Tag(s)

Enables

To specify the number of digits after the decimal point.

To display digital values with unit tag(s).

Unit System To select the unit system between the Metric System and the US/British

System for Length, Diameter, Angle, Area and Volume. Use the dropdown to choose one form the list.

To Set a Units Preference:

1. Click on the Units tab. The Units dialog appears.

2. Set a preference.

3. Click . The setting will be taken into account and the Preferences dialog still opens.

4. Click . The setting will be taken into account and the Preferences dialog closes.

Print Preference

To Set a Print Preference:

1. Click on the Print tab. The Print dialog appears.

2. Click below the User Defined Logo option. The Import User

Defined Logo dialog opens.

3. In field, navigate to the folder where the BMP format file is.


Apply . The setting will be applied and the Preferences dialog remains open.

OK . The setting will be applied and the Preferences dialog closes.


Improvement Program Preferences

The Trimble Solution Improvement Program (TSIP) is implemented by Trimble to help us improve the quality, reliability, and performance of our software products. If you select to participate in the program, the software will collect anonymous information about your hardware configuration and how you use the software. Periodically, a file containing the collected information will be sent to Trimble to help us identity trends and usage patterns.

No information will be collected that can be used to identity or contact you. You can select not to participate in TSIP at any time.

Warning: You will be prompted to restart the software if you change the improvement state.

Participate in TSIP

To Participate in TSIP:

1. Click on the Improvement Program tab. The Trimble Solution Improvement

Program dialog appears.

2. Click on " The Read More About Trimble Solution Improvement Program

Online ' link.

3. Carefully read the information that is displayed.

4. Check the " Yes, I Want to Participate in the Program " option.

5. Click .

Not Participate in TSIP

To Not Participate in TSIP:

1. Click on the Improvement Program tab. The Trimble Solution Improvement

Program dialog appears.

2. Click on " The Read More About Trimble Solution Improvement Program

Online ' link.

3. Carefully read the information that is displayed.

4. Check the " No, I Do Not Want to Participate in the Program " option.

OK .

C H A P T E R 4

Organization of Data

A project contains original scanned data and images, and all objects created from the scanned data. In order to make such data visible to users, we organize them into a Project Tree under WorkSpace .

193

Project Data

Each Project Tree is composed of four sub-trees called Scans , Models ,

Targets and Images . At any given time, only one of them is displayed.

When a project is loaded into RealWorks , it is immediately inserted under the

WorkSpace as a named project. Under the project, you can find two types of node called Group node and Object node. An object node is always a leaf node, while a group node could be either an internal or a leaf node. The organization and manipulation of the group and the object nodes in the

WorkSpace window and the List window are similar to those of the respective

File and List windows of Microsoft Windows Explorer.


Scans Tree

The Scans Tree is the first sub-tree of the Project Tree . It is only available in the Registration processing mode. You can display it by selecting its related tab from the WorkSpace window. This tree is used for organizing scanning results called Stations , Scans , or Images . It may have as many levels as a project requires. Scans and Images are always the leaves of the tree, while stations are internal nodes. It is important to note that the content of a Station

( Scans or Images ) cannot be moved to other stations, nor can their position be changed inside a station. This is to preserve the scanning order.

Caution: Images from the Scans Tree cannot be deleted and scans from which all points have been deleted are erased.

Organization of Data

Targets Tree

The Targets Tree is the second sub-tree of the Project Tree in the Registration processing mode. You can display it by selecting its related tab from the

WorkSpace window. It is used for organizing the registration entities ( Targets ,

Survey Points , Topo Points , etc.) matched or not.

Note: Refer to the Registration section for more details on the exact definition of the registration entities and how they are organized and used.


Models Tree

The Models Tree is the first sub-tree of the Project Tree ; it is available in both the OfficeSurvey ™ and Modeling processing modes. You can display it by selecting its related tab from the WorkSpace window. This sub-tree is used for organizing models of a scene. The organization can be logical, spatial or discipline-based (or simply a combination thereof), depending on the purposes of a project.

The Models Tree may have as many levels as a project requires. You can create, re-organize, delete, browse, search, locate or visualize objects in this sub-tree. Each object node of this sub-tree may contain a point cloud, a geometry or both. We call them the two representations of this object. By default, only one representation is displayed:

A cloud object is displayed by its cloud representation,

A shape object is displayed by its geometric representation,

By default, an object with both representations is displayed by its geometric shape representation. The user must explicitly ask to display its cloud representation.

For a project saved in a version of RealWorks older than 8.0, there is at least one Sub-project attached at the root of the Models Tree and only one is active at a time (the one in bold). After saving an old project in 8.0, all Sub-projects are replaced by groups named "From "Sub-Project" name".

1 - The Models Tree in projects older than 8.0. 2 - The Models Tree in projects saved in 8.0.

Note: A project created and saved directly in 8.0 has no notion of groups

(coming from Sub-Projects conversion).


Images Tree

The Images Tree is the fourth and last sub-tree of the Project Tree . You can display it by selecting its related tab from the WorkSpace window whatever the processing mode - OfficeSurvey ™, Registration and Modeling - you are in.

This tree is used to organize (or browse) images taken by a laser scanner’s onboard video camera (or other digital cameras). For example, you can group together a set of images and use them for texturing a part of the scene.

Note: You can view an image (or group of images) as thumbnail(s) in the List window either by selecting first Database Browsing , then Thumbnails from the

Window menu or by clicking on its corresponding icon in the Database toolbar.


Project Cloud

A Project Cloud is a cloud node attached to the Models Tree in either the

OfficeSurvey processing mode or the Modeling processing mode. The aim of the Project Cloud is to allow you to quickly find all points (or all unused points) of the project.

Note: The contents of the Project Cloud are automatically displayed in the 3D

View after getting all points or getting remaining points.

Before 8.0, each Sub-project of a project has its own Project Cloud . Only points belonging to the Project Cloud of the active Sub-Project are loaded.

After saving (a project) in 8.0, the Project Cloud of each Sub-project is converted to a Cloud with the same number of points. This Cloud has as name

"F rom "Sub-Project" name Cloud ".

The newly saved project has a unique Project Cloud with the same number of points as the Project Cloud of the active Sub-Project of the old project.


Get all Points

When you load a project for the first time, the Project Cloud of the project is empty. You have to load it with points. You have the choice of getting all points or only unused ones. Once the Project Cloud is loaded with all points, you can see the number of points in the corresponding attribute column.

To Get all Points:

1. Load first a project in RealWorks .

2. Select a project under the WorkSpace .

3. Select in the List window. the menu, select Get All Points .

Tip: You can also select the Project Cloud from the Project Tree , right-click to display the pop-up menu and then select Get All Points .

Note: When you create a new project by importing TZF format file(s) (acquired by a Trimble TX8 3D scanner or from e.g. a TZS format file(s) conversion), you may notice the number of points in the Project Cloud is equal to zero. This number remains in this state until you perform your first extraction (of points) from the TZF Scan( s).


Get Remaining Points

After you have segmented points of a project and organized them into different groups, there may remain some non-segmented and/or un-organized points. At various moments, you may need to find/display these points. Once the Project

Cloud is loaded with all unused points, you can see the number of points in the corresponding attribute column.

To Get Remaining Points:

1. Load first a project in RealWorks .

2. Select a project under the WorkSpace .

3. Select in the List window. the menu, select Get Remaining Points .

Tip: You can also select a Project Cloud from the Project Tree , right-click to display the pop-up menu and then select Get Remaining Points .


Active Group

An Active Group is a group that you have selected. Note that an active group can only be a project, a station, a group of models or a group of images.

Selecting an active group can be done in the Project Tree or in the List window. By default, all new created objects will be put under this active group.


Group and Object Nodes

The user will find information related to the identification of Grou p and Object nodes in the WorkSpace and List windows.

In the WorkSpace Window

Each item of data displayed in the WorkSpace window is identified by its icon, name and order in the Project Tree . Below is a list of icons appearing in the four sub-trees.

WorkSpace

Project

Project, Opened

Unmatched target folder

Matched target folder

Station

Group of objects

In the List Window

Each item of data displayed in the List window is identified by its icon, name, attributes and order in the Project Tree . Lists given hereafter are not exhaustive and are given only as a guide.


Scans Tab

Here is a list of icons that you can find in this window when you select the

Scans tab.

Station, Unleveled

Station, Leveled

Station, Leveled and Setup

Scan

Image

Etc.

Models Tab


Models tab:

Project cloud

Group of models

Model as cloud

Model of box shape

Model of cylinder shape

Model of fitted cylinder shape

Model of plane shape

Model of fitted plane shape

Model of circular torus shape

Model of fitted circular torus shape

Model of sphere shape

Model of regular cone shape

Model of fitted Polyline

Model of fitted composite curve

Model of fitted mesh

Model of point-to-point distance measure

Model of angular measure

Model of 3D point measure

Etc.


Images Tab


Images tab:

Image, Imported

Image, Matched

Image, OrthoPhoto

Targets Tab


Targets tab:

Target, Spherical

Target, Trimble Flat

Target, Fitted Sphere

Etc.

C H A P T E R 5

Exploring Data

Exploration in RealWorks involves the comprehension of a complex scene from a loaded project by using all available information, whether it is a point cloud, a model, a set of images or a combination thereof. Exploration can be done via the Project Tree in order to understand how a scene is structured. It can also be done by examining ( Examiner mode) or by walking through

( Walkthrough mode) a scene displayed in the 3D View or by viewing a scene from the instrument positions ( Station-Based mode).

207

Expand and Shrink the Project Tree

You can explore the Project Tree in the WorkSpace window in order to determine how the data is structured. You can click on the Expand (or

Shrink ) icon located at the left side of each group of nodes to expand (or reduce) the Project Tree until you reach the level that contains the information you want. You can also use the scroll bar to go up (or down) the Project Tree .

Exploration in this tree is similar to Microsoft Windows Explorer.


Locate an Item in the Project Tree

Locating an item in the Project Tree is done by using the Locate command.

You can locate any item in the Project Tree by clicking on it (or double-clicking) in the 3D View . Like the Find command, the name of the found item will be highlighted in the List window and its properties will appear in the Property window if it is opened. The father of the found item becomes the Active Group in the Project Tree .

To Locate an Item in the Project Tree:

1. Select an item from the 3D View .

2. In menu, select Locate .

Exploring Data

Find an Item in the Project Tree

Finding an item in the Project Tree is done with the Find command. You can find any item by its complete or partial name. When an item is found, the path from the Project Tree root to this object will be expanded (if it is not already the case); its direct father group will become the Active Group . The name of this found item will be highlighted in the List window, and its representation, if displayed in the 3D View , will also be highlighted. If the Property window is opened, the properties of this found item will be shown.

To Find an Item in the Project Tree:

1. From , select Find . The Find dialog box opens.

Match Case : This option allows you to find an object with its name case-matched to what was entered in the Find field.

Direction : This option is to specify the searching direction in the

Project Tree . Down direction is the default setting.

2. Enter a name/or a partial name in the Find What field.

3. Select an option that corresponds to your needs.

Find Next . The next found object becomes the selected one.

5. Click again if the found objects are more than one.

Note: You can also right-click anywhere in the 3D View to display the pop-up menu and select Find or use the short-cut key Ctrl + F .


Explore in the 3D View

Data exploration in the 3D View consists mainly of using the navigation commands such as Rotate , Pan , Zoom , etc. to examine the contents of displayed scene/objects.

Exploring Data

Explore in the Images Tree

As explained in the data organization chapter, the Images Tree contains only images which can be taken by an on-board camera in a 3D scanner or come from any 2D cameras. You can browse a set of images; compare each of them with a 3D scene in order to have a better perception and understanding, etc.


Visualizing Data

The visualization of objects in the 3D View is like taking a photograph of a virtual scene with a camera. The steps may typically be the ones given below and each will be discussed separately.

You specify the rendering parameters for displaying objects.

You choose camera characteristics; for example, the projection modes.

You then select objects to display.

Finally, you choose the point of view from which you want to shoot your photo. This is equivalent to choosing the viewing camera's position and its aiming orientation.

Point Cloud

A point cloud is a set of 3D points. Each 3D point can contain not only its 3D coordinates, but also other attributes such as Intensity and Surface Normal .

Exploring Data

Display a Point Cloud

To display objects, you should first select them either from the WorkSpace window or the List window. Once objects are selected, you have the following options to display them. If the selected objects are group nodes, you can either use the command Display Cloud from the Display menu or its corresponding icon in the Display toolbar. You can also use the drag-and-drop function to drop the selected objects in the 3D View . If the selected objects are object nodes (or scan nodes), you can either use the same methods as above or directly toggle the On or Off icon beside the name of these selected objects in the List window. It is important to note that if the selected objects have both the cloud and the geometry representations, only the later one will be displayed when you use this box.

To Display a Point Cloud:

1. Select an object with cloud property from the Project Tree . the menu, select Display Cloud .

You have two ways to check if a cloud is displayed (or not) in the 3D View . The first way is to use the Display Cloud icon in the Display toolbar. It becomes active when you select a cloud which is not displayed in the 3D View . It becomes inactive when the selected cloud is already displayed. The second way is to use the List window. A displayed cloud is turned-on .

Note:

You can also right-click in the WorkSpace (or List ) window to get the popup menu from which you can choose the Display Cloud command.

If you select a group node and display it, all leaf nodes under this group node will be displayed. This avoids having to display them one by one.


Hide a Point Cloud

Hiding an object with cloud property consists of removing its representation from the 3D View . For hiding an object, you have to select it either from the

WorkSpace window or the List window or directly from the 3D View . If the selected object is a group node, you can either use the command Hide Cloud from the Display menu or its corresponding icon in the Display toolbar. If the selected object is a scan node, you can either use the same methods as above or directly toggle the On or Off icon beside the name of these selected objects in the List window.

To Hide a Point Cloud:

1. Select an object with cloud property from the Project Tree . the menu, select Hide Cloud .

Note: You can also right-click on a cloud in the Project Tree (or in the 3D View ) so as to display the pop-up menu and select Hide Cloud .

Exploring Data

Geometry

Display a Geometry

To display objects, you should first select them either from the WorkSpace window or the List window. Once objects are selected, you have the following options to display them. If the selected objects are group nodes, you can either use the command Display Geometry from the Display menu or its corresponding icon in the Display toolbar. You can also use the drag-and-drop function to drop the selected objects in the 3D View . If the selected objects are object nodes (or scan nodes), you can either use the same methods as above or directly toggle the On or Off icon beside the name of these selected objects in the List window. It is important to note that if the selected objects have both the cloud and the geometry representations, only the later one will be displayed when you use this box.

To Display a Geometry:

1. Select an object with geometric property from the Project Tree . the menu, select Display Geometry .

You have two ways to check if a geometry is displayed or not in the 3D View .

The first way is to use the Display Geometry icon in the Display toolbar. It becomes active when you select a geometry which is not displayed in the 3D

View and inactive when the geometry is displayed in the 3D view . The second way is to use the List window. A displayed geometry is turned-on .

Note:

You can also right-click in the WorkSpace (or List ) window to get the popup menu from which you can choose the Display Geometry command.

If you select a group node and display it, all leaf nodes under this group node will be displayed. This avoids having to display them one by one.


Hide a Geometry

Hiding an object with geometric property consists of removing its representation from the 3D View . For hiding an object, you have to select it either from the WorkSpace window or the List window or directly from the 3D

View . If the selected object is a group node, you can either use the command

Hide Geometry from the Display menu or its corresponding icon in the Display toolbar. If the selected object is an object node, you can either use the same methods as above or directly toggle the On or Off icon beside the name of these selected objects in the List window.

To Hide a Geometry:

1. Select an object with geometric property from the Project Tree . the menu, select Hide Geometry .

Note: You can also right-click on an object with geometric property in the

Project Tree (or in the 3D View ) to display the pop-up menu and select Hide

Geometry .

Hide all Items

This command enables to hide all displayed objects at once in the 3D View , no matter the objects could be.

To Hide All Items: the menu, select Hide All . click in the Display toolbar.

Note: You can also right-click anywhere in the 3D View in order to display the pop-up menu and select Hide All .

Exploring Data

Hide all Except those Selected

You can hide other objects than the one you have selected. To do this, you can use the command Hide Other from the Display menu or the corresponding icon in the Display toolbar. You can also evoke this command from the rightclick pop-up menu.

To Hide all Except those Selected:

1. Select an object from the Project Tree . the menu, select Hide Other .

Note: This command is not available when selecting a project.

Image

You can display an image in two ways either as a thumbnail in the 3D View or in a separated 2D window beside the 3D View . In the first case, you can only display an image once at a time. You can use a tip to check if an image is displayed or not; it consists of using the List window. An image when displayed has an On -bulb icon at its left side. In the second case, you can open as many images as required and no tip is available.

Note: An image (selected from the Images Tree ) has its thumbnail displayed in the Property window (if open).


Display an Image

Displaying an image consists of opening it as a thumbnail within the 3D View .

You can only display one image at once

To Display an Image:

1. Select an image from the Images Tree .

2. Do one of the following: the window, toggle the On / Off icon beside the image name to

On . the menu, select Display Image .

Right-click on an image in the Images Tree and select Display Image from the pop-up menu.

Resize : Place the mouse cursor anywhere on the thumbnail image frame. Stretch or shrink the frame by dragging.

Change location : Place the mouse cursor over the Drag & Drop icon on the thumbnail image. Drag and drop the thumbnail image to a suitable location in the 3D view .

Zoom : Click in the thumbnail image and zoom it In or Out using the mouse wheel (if existed).

Exploring Data

Hide an Image

The command enables to close an image that is open as a thumbnail in the 3D

View . You can only hide one image at once.

To Hide an Image:

1. Select an image opened as a thumbnail. the menu, select Hide Image .

Tip:

You can also right-click on an image in the List window and select Hide

Image from the pop-up menu.

Select an image from the List window and toggle the On / Off icon to Off .

Move your cursor over the thumbnail image and click the Close icon.


Open an Image

Once an image is open in a separated window, you can zoom an area of this image In or Out using the Zoom In and Zoom Out commands, zoom the whole image In or Out using the mouse wheel or by defining a zoom factor. If the image is zoomed In more than the 2D window can display, you can pan it in any direction in order to view the hidden areas.

To Open an Image:


2. Do one of the following: the menu, select Open Image . the window, double-click on its name. the window, right-click on its name and select Open Image from the pop-up menu.

3. To close the image window, click on the Close its frame.

icon on the border of

Note: You cannot perform a distance measurement on an image that is open in a separate window; the Measurement Tool icon is dimmed.

Exploring Data

Station

You can display the position, name and properties of a station (or of all stations) within a project.

Tip: You can use a shortcut key to hide (or display) all station Positions and all station Labels . Both are detailed in the Shortcut Keys section.

Display (or Hide) all Station Markers

You can display (or hide) all station markers, in one time, in the 3D View regardless of the navigation mode ( Examiner , Walkthrough or Station-Based ) you are using.


Display all Station Markers

To Display all Station Markers:

1. From menu, select Rendering . A sub-menu drops down.

2. Select . The Display Station Marker Labels and

Station Maker List icons become enabled. All station markers (shown as follows ) are displayed in the 3D View .

Tip: You can also select Display Station Markers from the 3D View toolbar.

Tip: You can jump from one station to another by double-clicking on the station marker icon in the 3D View . The navigation mode will be automatically switched to the Station Based navigation mode.

Note: If the Station Maker List window was open before choosing Display

Station Markers , it will be open after.

Hide all Station Markers

To Hide all Station Markers:


2. Select . The Display Station Marker Labels and

Station Maker List icons become dimmed. All station markers (shown as follows ) are removed from the 3D View .

Note: If the Station Maker List window was closed before choosing Display

Station Markers , it will stay closed after.

Exploring Data

Display (or Hide) all Station Marker Labels

For a given station, a label is its name in text displayed in the 3D View , next to its station marker.

Display all Station Marker Labels

To Display all Station Marker Labels:

1. In menu, select Rendering . A sub-menu drops down.

2. Select .

Tip: You can also select Display Station Marker Labels from the 3D View toolbar.

Note: You need to display first all the station markers.

Hide all Station Marker Labels

To Hide all Station Marker Labels: the menu, select Rendering . A sub-menu drops down.

2. Select .


Display (or Hide) Specific Station Makers

You can display (or hide) the position and the label of a specific station (or a set of stations) in the 3D View , regardless of the navigation mode (Examiner ,

Walkthrough or Station-Based ) you are using.

Exploring Data

Hide Specific Station Marker(s)

To Hide Specific Station Marker(s):


2. Select . The Display Station Marker Labels icon and the Station Maker List icon become enabled. the icon. The Station Maker List window opens.

By default, all stations (or groups) from the project are checked.

If required, use Clear Selection to hide all station markers at once.

If required, use Expand All (or Expand ) to expand all groups

(or a unique group) from the tree.

If required, use Collapse All (or Collapse ) to collapse all groups (or a unique group) from the tree.

Select a unique station from the tree.

Or select several stations (from the tree) by using the Ctrl (or Shift ) key combined with the left clicking.

Uncheck the station(s) for which you want to hide the station marker(s).

Note: Hiding the station maker of a specific station also hides its label (if the label has been previously displayed).

Note: The J and K shortcut keys, respectively for Display Station Makers and

Display Station Maker Labels , cannot be used with the Station Maker List window open.


Display Specific Station Maker(s)

To Display Specific Station Marker(s):


2. Select . The Display Station Marker Labels icon and the Station Maker List icon become enabled.

3. Click on the Station Maker List Window icon. The Station Maker List window opens.

If required, use Select All to display all station positions.

If required, use Expand All (or Expand ) to expand all groups

(or a unique group) from the tree.

If required, use Collapse All (or Collapse ) to collapse all groups (or a unique group) from the tree.

Select a unique station from the tree.

Or select several stations (from the tree) by using the Ctrl (or Shift ) key combined with the left clicking.

Check the station(s) for which you want to display the station marker(s).

Note: Displaying the station marker of a specific station also displays its label

(if the label has been previously displayed).

Display (or Hide) the Network Visuals of a Station

The Network Visuals in the 3D View is similar to a set of vectors, each vector connecting the station marker of a station (or a point on the ground (if that station has a height)) to a registration target (or to its point on the ground (if the target has a height)).

Note: The user should be in the Registration processing mode.

Exploring Data

Display the Network Visuals of a Station

To Display the Network Visuals of a Station:

1. First display the station markers of the stations. the , right-click on a 3D position.

3. Select from the popmenu.

Or the processing mode, select a single (or a set of) station(s) from the List window.

5. Right-click to display the pop-menu.

6. Select .

Or the processing mode, select a single (or a set of) station(s) from the List window. the menu, select Display/Hide Network Visuals (Selected

Station) .

Note: For the steps from 4 to 6 and 7 to 8, you cannot view the network visuals if the station marker(s) of the station(s) is (or are) not displayed.


Hide the Network Visuals of a station

To Hide the Network Visuals of a Station:

1. In , right-click on the same station marker.

2. Select from the popmenu.

Or

3. In processing mode, select the same lonely (or set of) station(s) from the List window.


Display/Hide Network Visuals (Selected Station) .

Or

6. In processing mode, select the same lonely (or a set of) station(s) from the List window.

7. From menu, select Display/Hide Network Visuals (Selected

Station) .

Note: (*) You cannot get the pop-up menu when selecting a set of stations.

Exploring Data

Display (or Hide) the Network Visuals of all Stations

This feature is similar to the Display/Hide Network Visuals (Selected Station) feature but it is applied to all stations of the project. The user can be in any processing mode: Registration , OfficeSurvey or Modeling .

In the OfficeSurvey (or Modeling ) processing mode, both the station markers and the Network Visuals are shown.

In the Registration processing mode, each station is shown by its station marker, its height (if existed), the registration targets that are inside as well as their height (if existed).

Note: No station selection is required.


Display the Network Visuals of all Stations

To Display the Network Visuals of all Stations:

1. In processing mode, first display all the station markers. the , right-click on a station marker.

3. Select from the pop-menu.

Or

4. In processing mode, select a single (or a set of) station(s) from the List window.


Display/Hide Network Visuals (All Stations) .

Or

7. In (or OfficeSurvey or Modeling ) processing mode, select

Display/Hide Network Visuals (All Stations) from the Display menu.

Note: For the steps from 4 to 6 and 7, you cannot view the network visuals if the station markers of the stations are not displayed.

Hide the Network Visuals of all Stations

To Hide the Network Visuals of all Stations: the , right-click on any 3D position.

2. Select from the pop-menu.

Or

3. In processing mode, select any single (or set of) station(s) from the List window.


5. Select .

Or the (or OfficeSurvey or Modeling ) processing mode, select

Display/Hide Network Visuals (All Stations) from the Display menu.

Exploring Data

Inspection Map

An inspection map results from the comparison between two surfaces

(cloud/cloud, cloud/mesh, mesh/mesh and cloud (or mesh)/primitive, etc.). An inspection map may have three shapes: Plane , Cylinder and Tunnel ; this depends on the surfaces selected for comparing and the projection type applied to that comparison. Each inspection map has two directions ( Vertical and Horizontal ) shown by its own red-and-green-axis frame and a color bar associated to it.

To view which shape has an inspection map, display its properties in the

Property window and check for the Projection Type ( Planar for a plane, Tunnel for a tunnel and Cylinder for a cylinder).

If the loaded project contained an inspection map, you can display it in the 3D

View or open it in an independent window.

Caution: An inspection map is of geometry type. You can delete it by selecting from the pop-up menu either Delete or Delete Geometry .


Open an Inspection Map

To Open an Inspection Map:

1. Select an inspection map from the Project Tree . the menu, select Open Inspection Map .

The selected inspection map is open in a specific window, beside the

3D View . This window is called by the name of the inspection map.

The same window is called Map Preview when you are inside a comparison (or inspection) tool.

You can zoom the map In or Out . If it is bigger than the window can show, you can pan it in any direction.

You can manage the ColorBar that is associated to the map, created a new one, etc. Refer to the ColorBars section for more information.

Tip: You can also right-click on an inspection map in the Models Tree to display the pop-up menu and select Open Inspection Map .

Close an Inspection Map

To Close an Inspection Map:

Click on the Cross button at the top right corner of the window.

Display an Inspection Map

To Display an Inspection Map in the 3D View: the window, toggle the bulb icon beside an inspection map to On to display it in the 3D View .

Hide an Inspection Map

To Hide an Inspection Map in the 3D View: the window, toggle the bulb icon beside an inspection map to Off to hide it in the 3D View .

Exploring Data

TZF Scan

A TZF Scan is 2D Map Data , linked to a TZF format file which can come from a

TZS , Faro, etc. format file conversion or from a Trimble TX8 3D Scanner . In the first case, there is only one TZF Scan per station. It is by default a Main

Scan . In the second case, a station can contain more than one TZF Scan and each can be either a Full Scan * or an Area Scan , with a Density ( Level 1 , Level

2, Level 3 or Extended ). The parameters of each Density are detailed in the table below.

Level Spacing** (in millimeters)

At a Distance of (in meters)

Number of

Points (in

Millions of points)

Duration (in minutes)

1 22.6

2 11.3

3 5.7

Extended 7.4 300 312.5 14

In a set of scans, if there is a unique Full Scan , this Full Scan is by default the

Main Scan . If there are two Full Scans , the highest in Density is by default the

Main Scan . If these Full Scans are equal in Density , the last (acquired) is by default the Main Scan .

Note:

(*) Full Scan is a 360°x158° scan.

The parameter is the distance between two consecutive laser spots.

The Extended range density is a feature that comes with an option upgrade of the Trimble TX8 3D Scanner .

When you open several TZF Scans directly in RealWorks , in a multi-scan situation, the priority to set a TZF Scan as a Main Scan depends first on its

Type (a Full Scan has a higher priority than an Area Scan ) and then on its

Density ( Level 3 has the higher priority and Extended the lower).


Display a TZF Scan

You can display a TZF Scan as a thumbnail within the 3D View . You can only display one TZF Scan at a time.

To Display a TZF Scan:

1. Right-click TZF Scan in the Scans Tree .

2. Select from the pop-up menu. Below are the operations you can perform on a displayed TZF Scan .

Resize : Place the mouse cursor anywhere on the thumbnail frame.

Stretch (or shrink) the frame by dragging.

Change location : Place the mouse cursor over the Drag & Drop icon. Drag and drop the thumbnail image to a suitable location in the

3D view .

Zoom : Click in the thumbnail image and zoom in or out using the mouse wheel (if existed). The thumbnail, once zoomed in, can be moved in any direction.

Tip: You can also select Display Image from the Display menu.

Tip: You can toggle the bulb from to

Hide a TZF Scan

Hiding a TZF Scan consists of closing its thumbnail displayed within the 3D

View .

To Display a TZF Scan: on TZF Scan in the Scans Tree .

2. Select from the pop-up menu.

Tip: You can also select Hide Image from the Display menu.

Tip: You can toggle the bulb from to or click on the Close button.

Exploring Data

Set a TZF Scan as a Main Scan

You can set manually a TZF Scan as a Main Scan .

To Set a TZF Scan as a Main Scan: on TZF Scan from the Scans Tree .


Note:

The feature remains dimmed when selecting a Main

Scan .

The icon of the selected TZF Scan changes from to .

Visualize a TZF Scan Preview

A TZF Scan , once selected as an input of a tool like e.g. the Target Analyzer

Tool , is displayed as 2D Preview Image in a specific window. You can zoom In or Out an area of the 2D Preview Image using the Zoom In and Zoom Out commands, zoom the whole image In or Out using the mouse wheel or select a zoom factor from the drop-down list. If the image is zoomed In more than the

2D Viewer can display, you can pan it in any direction in order to view the hidden areas.


Visualize the Extracted Targets Within a TZF Scan

Preview

All Spherical Targets , Black and White Flat Targets or Point Targets extracted from a TZF Scan by using e.g. the Auto-Extract Targets and Register feature, once created, are displayed within the TZF Scan as illustrated below.

A Target selected from the List window is highlighted in the TZF Scan (once open) as shown below.

Exploring Data

ColorBar

A ColorBar is a scale of elevation values and each color corresponds to a range of elevation values. It is always linked to an inspection map (or 3D inspection cloud). You can create, edit, delete, rearrange, import or export a

ColorBar inside a comparison (or inspection) tool like e.g. the Twin Surface

Inspection Tool * or outside a tool after you have opened an inspection map**.

Note:

(*) This tool is not present in RealWorks (Base) and Advanced .

(**) Outside a comparison (or an inspection), only an inspection map can be opened in an independent window. A 3D inspection cloud cannot.

Hide/Show a ColorBar

You can hide the current ColorBar and display it again. Doing this will remove the red-and-green-axis frame and the scale from the " Inspection Map's Name " window.

To Hide/Show a ColorBar:

1. First open an inspection map if you are outside a comparison (or inspection) tool.

2. Click to hide the current color bar. again to display the current color bar.

Note: First open an inspection map in an independent window, if not already done.


Edit a ColorBar

The Edit ColorBar feature lets you to edit the default (or current) ColorBar , delete (or export) a ColorBar other than the default one, to import an existing

ColorBar into the project or to have access to the Advanced Options for creating a new ColorBar or editing an existing one.

To Edit a ColorBar: the icon. The ColorBar dialog opens.


Define regular intervals.

Keep positive values only.

Import a ColorBar.

Switch to an Existing ColorBar.

Delete an Existing ColorBar.

Export an Existing ColorBar.

3. Use Advanced Options for creating a new ColorBar or editing an existing

ColorBar .

OK . The ColorBar closes.


Exploring Data

Define Regular Intervals

To Define Regular Intervals: the icon. The ColorBar dialog opens.

2. If required, check the Regular Intervals option.

3. Enter a value in the field below the option.

4. Validate by pressing Enter .

The levels are then computed based on the input value, as illustrated below.

The number of levels can be checked by clicking Edit in the

Advanced Options panel.

OK . The ColorBar dialog closes.

Caution: You are not allowed to enter Zero or a negative value.

Tip: You can also display the properties of an inspection map in the Property window and check the Regular Intervals value in the ColorBar line as illustrated below.


Exploring Data

Keep Positive Values Only

To Keep Positive Values Only: the icon. The ColorBar dialog opens.

2. If required, check the Regular Intervals option.

3. Enter a value in the field below the option.

4. Check option.


The levels are then computed based on the input value.

The number of levels can be checked by clicking Edit in the

Advanced Options panel.

Only levels above Zero are kept, as illustrated below.

6. Click . The ColorBar dialog closes.


Import a ColorBar

You can use any TXT editor ( WordPad for example) to create a ColorBar file and import it into your current project. This file should contain a series of RGB

(Red Green Blue) and interval value pairs. The ColorBar once imported will be automatically applied to the opened (selected) inspection map (or 3D inspection cloud).

To Import a ColorBar:

1. Click . The ColorBar dialog opens.

2. Click . The Import ColorBar "Name of the Project" dialog opens.

3. Find a location in your disk where the color bar file is stored in the Look In field.

4. Click on the ColorBar file name to select it.

Open . The Import ColorBar "Name of the Project" dialog closes.


Switch to an Existing ColorBar

To Switch to an Existing ColorBar: the icon. The ColorBar dialog opens. the option.

3. Click on the pull-down arrow.



The inspection map is now displayed according to the chosen

ColorBar .

You can come back to the default ColorBar rendering by clicking

Switch to Default ColorBar .

Exploring Data

Delete an Existing ColorBar

The Delete feature is available only if there is another ColorBar other than the default one.

To Delete an Existing ColorBar:

1. Click . The ColorBar dialog opens. the option. the list.

4. Select ColorBar from the list.

5. Click . If there are several ColorBars in your project, the one that comes after will be applied to the inspection map (or to the 3D inspection cloud).

OK . The ColorBar dialog closes.

Tip: It is not necessary to check the Existing ColorBar option. You can directly click Delete. This will by-default select the option and delete the current

ColorBar .

Tip: It is not necessary to check the Existing ColorBar option. You can dropdown the Existing ColorBar list. This will select the option by default.

Export an Existing ColorBar

The Export feature is available only if there is another ColorBar other than the default one. A ColorBar, when exported, is a TXT format file. This file, when opened, contains a series of RGB (Red Green Blue) and interval value pairs.

To Export an Existing ColorBar:

1. Click . The ColorBar dialog opens. the option.

3. Select ColorBar from the drop-down list.

4. Click . The Export ColorBar dialog box opens.

5. Enter a name in the File Name field.

6. Find a location in your disk in the Look In field.

7. Click . The Export ColorBar dialog box closes.



Advanced Options

The Advanced Options feature lets the user to create a new ColorBar or edit a

ColorBar other than the default one by defining its intervals which can be regular or by choosing a color for each level.

To Edit With Advanced Options: the icon. The ColorBar dialog opens.

2. Click . The ColorBar Editing dialog opens. new is created with a default name ( COLOR_BAR ) (or with the name of one that has been chose from the Existing ColorBar list).

The values in the Step - 1 field belong to the default ColorBar

( or to one that has been chose from the Existing ColorBar list).

The color of each Level is the level color of the default ColorBar ( or of one that has been chose from the Existing ColorBar list).

1 - Option for only keeping positive values

2 - Field for defining the intervals which can be regular or not

3 - The number of levels in the current ColorBar or in a ColorBar to come


4 - The name of the current ColorBar or of a

ColorBar to come

5 - Field for defining the color of a level

6 - The pull down arrow

7 - The color palette

Exploring Data

Define the intervals.

Define the color of a level.

Create a new ColorBar.

Edit an existing ColorBar.

Define the Intervals

In this step, the user can define ether Regular Intervals or Irregular Steps .

To Define the Intervals:

1. In , delete all the values that are in the field, below the Positive

Values Only option.

2. Enter several values in the field.


The input values must ranked from negative to positive, from lower to higher.

Each value must be separated by a semicolon, a comma, etc.

The number of levels is then updated according to the input values.

All of the levels are also updated in Step 2 .

Define the Color of a Level

To Define the Color of a Level:

1. In , click on a pull-down arrow next to a level. A Color palette appears.

2. Choose an existing color from the palette.

3. Or to define your own color.

4. Click . The ColorBar palette closes.


Create a New ColorBar

You can create as many ColorBars as required. Only one can be linked to an inspection map (or to a 3D inspection cloud) at once. By default, a ColorBar is automatically created after you perform an inspection and save the result as a map. When you save your project, all of the created Color Bar (s) will be automatically saved. You cannot see it (or them) in the Project Tree . You need to open the related inspection map for this.

To Create a New ColorBar:

1. Keep the default name which is " COLOR_BAR ".

2. Or enter a new name in the Name field.

3. If required, check the Positive Values Only option.

4. Define the intervals.

5. Define the color of a level.

6. Click . The ColorBar Editing dialog closes.

Note : If two ColorBars share the same name; the second (according to the order of creation) is renamed with an increment number between brackets.

Tip: To create a ColorBar based on an existing one; click the Existing ColorBar pull-down arrow in the ColorBar Editing dialog and select one from the dropdown list.

Edit an Existing ColorBar

To Edit an Existing ColorBar:

1. First, choose a ColorBar from the Existing ColorBar list.

Exploring Data the dialog, do one of the following:

If required, check the Keep Positive Values Only option.

Define the intervals.

Define the color of a level.

Save . The ColorBar Editing dialog closes.


Switch to the Cut/Fill ColorBar

The Switch to Cut/Fill ColorBar feature lets the user to display an inspection map with only two levels of information. All negative parts (of an inspection map) are rendered in blue and those that are positive are rendered in red.

An inspection map displayed with the default ColorBar

An inspection map displayed with the Sign-Based ColorBar

You can come back to the default ColorBar rendering by clicking Switch to

Default ColorBar .


Exploring Data

Switch to the Default ColorBar

The Switch to Default ColorBar feature lets you to display an inspection map, with the default ColorBar which is the one that comes with the inspection map after it has been created.


Rendering Data

A rendering defines how an object is going to be displayed. For example, a geometry can be displayed in Wireframe or shaded surface. We introduce the different options available for different object representations. A rendering will be applied to all objects of the same type displayed in the 3D View . This means that you cannot specify different renderings for different displayed objects of the same type. For example, you cannot display a Geometry Object

A in Wire-Frame , and the Geometry Object B in Surface .

Exploring Data

Render a Point Cloud

There are several rendering options that you can apply to a displayed point cloud. The White Color option enables to render all displayed points with white color. The Cloud Color option enables to render displayed points with the color of the clouds they belong to. The Station Color option enables to render displayed points with the color of the stations they belong to. The Scan

Color option enables to render displayed points with the color of the scans they belong to. The Grey Scaled Intensity option enables to render displayed points using the gray scale defined by their intensity. The Color

Coded Intensity option enables to render displayed points using the color encoded intensity. The True Color option enables to render displayed points using their color. You can choose these options from either the menu bar or the corresponding icons in the 3D View toolbar.

There are three special modification options for displaying points. The Normal

Shading option shades each displayed point by using its normal information. The Point Size option changes the point size when displaying the point clouds. The Discontinuity Display optio n* displays the discontinuity of a point cloud (where available).

To Render a Point Cloud:

1. Select an object with cloud property from the Project Tree and display it.


3. Select a rendering from the drop-down sub-menu.

For point clouds, you can combine the Normal Shading rendering with any of the renderings named above (except for Point Size and Discontinuity Display ) in order to have a relief (or depth) display. In (A), the White Color rendering is applied to the point cloud in selection. The Normal Shading information is added to the White Color rendering in (B) and to the True Color rendering in

(C). When such a combination is applied, you can use the Lighting Direction tool to modify the light source position. Note that such a combination reduces by half the time required to display points.


Tip: You can right-click anywhere in the 3D View (except on a displayed object) and select Rendering from the pop-up menu. A sub-menu drops down.

Select then a rendering option.

Tip: In the 3D View toolbar, you can click on the Cloud Rendering pull-down arrow on and choose an option from the drop-down menu.

Note: The Discontinuity Display rendering is only present in the 3D View /

Rendering menu.

Tip: You can use a set of shortcut keys to swap from a Rendering option to another. All are detailed in the Shortcut Keys section.

Tip: You are able to customize the brightness and the contrast of points by using the Cloud Rendering Settings feature.

Exploring Data

Render a Geometry

There are four renderings that you can apply to a displayed geometry.

Wireframe enables to render a selected geometry in wire-frame. Hidden

Lines enables to render a selected geometry in wire-frame with hidden lines removed. Surface is to render a selected geometry as a smooth shaded surface. Textured renders a selected geometry as a texture mapped surface if such a mapping exists.

To Render a Geometry

1. Select a geometry from the Project Tree and display it.


3. Select a rendering from the drop-down sub-menu.

The Normal Shading rendering - when applied to a mesh displayed in

Wireframe or Hide Lines - produces no effect. The same rendering when applied to a mesh displayed in Surface adds a smooth rendering (one color per triangle with gradient effect) and when not applied gives a flat rendering (one color per triangle with no gradient effect). The Normal Shading rendering - when applied to a textured mesh - adds a relief (depth) effect. In (A), the

Surface rendering is applied to the mesh in display. The Normal Shading information is added to the Surface rendering in (B). When such a combination is applied, you can use the Lighting Direction tool - see next topic - to modify the light source position. Note that such a combination reduces by half the time required for displaying the mesh.


Tip:

You can right-click anywhere in the 3D View (except on displayed objects) and select Rendering from to the pop-up menu. A sub-menu drops down.

Select then a rendering option.

In toolbar, you can click on the Geometry Rendering pulldown arrow on and choose an option from the drop-down menu.

Exploring Data

Change the Color of a Point Cloud

To Change the Color of a Point Cloud:

1. Select and display a point cloud from the Project Tree . the rendering option.

3. Do one of the following: the toolbar, click the Change Cloud Color pull-down arrow.

2. Choose a color from the color palette.

3. Or define your own color by clicking Other .

Or the window open, click in the Color of Cloud line.




Change the Color of a Geometry

To Change the Color of a Geometry:

1. Select and display a geometry from the Project Tree .

2. Set e.g. the Surface rendering option.

3. Do one of the following: the toolbar, click the Change Geometry Color pulldown arrow.



Or the window open, click in the Color of Geometry line.



Caution: You cannot change the color of all types of geometry. There are some restrictions. An inspection map is also a geometry. You cannot change its color.

Exploring Data

Render a Point Cloud With Gray-Scale

Intensity With Color

This feature lets the user to add the intensity information on point clouds* which are displayed in the 3D View, only when one of the following renderings,

Cloud Color , Station Color or Scan Color , has been applied.

To Render a Point Cloud With Gray-Scale Intensity With Color:

1. Select an object with cloud property from the Project Tree and display it.


3. Select from the drop-down sub-menu.

Or

4. Right anywhere in the 3D View to display the pop-up menu.

Rendering / Gray-Scale Intensity With Color from the pop-up menu.

Point clouds with the Gray-Scale Intensity With Color feature applied.

Point clouds with the Gray-Scale Intensity With Color feature not applied.


Tip: You can use the B shortcut key.

Note: The Gray-Scale Intensity With Color feature, once applied, becomes persistent. It remains in this state until you ask it to change.

Note:

(*) Except for 2D slices created within the Cutting Plane Tool, Contouring

Tool, Profile/Cross-Section Tool.

(*) Except also for inspection clouds displayed with its inspected color

( Cloud Color rendering) and working cloud created with the Tank

Calibration Tool.

Exploring Data

Define a Cloud Rendering Setting

This feature enables to adjust the brightness and the contrast of points in a point cloud. It is useful in the case of a point cloud acquired with e.g. an insufficient dynamic (low contrast or not enough bright). The adjustment is only applied to the display of the data in the 3D View . It does not affect the raw information in the data file. In addition to the feature above, you can blend the

Luminance information with the RGB information.

To Define a Cloud Rendering Setting:

1. First, display a point cloud in the 3D View . the menu, select Rendering . A sub-menu drops down. the icon from the drop-down submenu. The Cloud Rendering Settings dialog opens.

By default, the Contrast slider and the Brightness slider are both at halfway.

Blending (True Color) slider is at the right end ( True Color ).

All of the parameters, once adjusted, become persistent. They remain unchanged until you reset them by clicking Default .

Tip: You can also select the Cloud Rendering Settings

Tools toolbar.

icon from the


Adjust the Intensity Contrast and Brightness

You can manually adjust the contrast and brightness on the intensity of points.

This adjustment is done by modifying the intensity values during the display of the data. The raw information in the data file is not modified.

To Adjust the Intensity Contrast and Brightness: the menu, select Rendering . A sub-menu drops down.

2. Select a rendering mode from the drop-down list.

If , Station Color, Scan Color and Color Coded by

Elevation has been chosen, you need to apply the Gray-Scale

Intensity With Color rendering too.

If or Color Coded Intensity has been chosen, the Gray-Scale Intensity With Color rendering is not required.

If has been chosen, the adjustment will have any effect.

You have to fist blend the intensity and color information.

3. In dialog, move the Contrast (or Brightness ) slider.

OK . The Cloud Rendering Settings dialog closes.

Exploring Data

Blend the Intensity and Color Information

With a point cloud rendered with the True Color mode, you can blend the

Intensity information with the Color information, thanks to a slider. By default, the cursor is at the right end ( True Color) . You need to first choose the True

Color rendering. Otherwise, the Blending (True Color) option remains grayedout.

The cursor at the True Color end:

The point cloud is displayed with only the Color information.

The cursor at halfway between Intensity and True Color:

The point cloud is displayed with both the Intensity and Color information. You can adjust the Contrast and Brightness parameters as described in the previous topic.


The cursor at the Intensity end:

The point cloud is displayed with only the Intensity information.

Exploring Data

Color a Point Cloud Coded by

Elevation

This feature enables to render a point cloud with the height information encoded in the point color. This helps to visualize instantaneously the height of points in the scene. This feature is useful to highlight e.g. in a building each floor separately, repeating the color bar at each level.

To Color a Point Cloud Based on the Elevation Information:

1. Display a point cloud in the 3D View .

2. If required, bring the view to Front ( Z-Axis up).

3. If required, open the Measurement Tool and choose Point Measurement

.

4. If required, measure the position of a point by picking it. This point will be the Rendering by Elevation Origin .

5. If required, measure the position of another point by picking it.

6. Measure the difference along the Z-Axis between the two picked points.

This gap will be the Rendering by Elevation Interval . the menu, select Preferences . The Preferences dialog opens. the tab, input the Z coordinate of the first picked point in the

Rendering by Elevation / Origin field.

9. Input the gap value along the Z-Axis between the two picked points in the

Rendering by Elevation / Interval field.


10. Click OK . The Preferences dialog closes.

11. From the 3D View menu, select the Rendering / Color Coded by Elevation

icon.

A color bar for a level

Caution: This feature does not require any selection. It is applied to all objects, mainly point clouds, displayed in the 3D View .

Tip: For the steps from 3 to 6, you can also use the Distance Measurement

Along Vertical Axis feature.

Note: The current active frame determines the elevation direction. If required, use the Frame Creation Tool to change the elevation direction.

Note: You can input a negative value as a Rendering Elevation Origin.

Tip: You can apply the Gray-Scale Intensity With Color rendering to a point cloud that is displayed with the Color Coded by Elevation rendering.

Note: The default value for the Interval is 10m.

Tip: You can use the shortcut key 8.

Exploring Data

Add a Lighting Direction

The Lighting Direction feature lets you produce infinity of lighting effects on complex objects. You can change the spotlight’s direction or use pre-defined light effects - five are available. Note that lighting effect modifications will be applied to the current (active) 3D View .

To Add a Lighting Direction:

1. If required, display objects in the 3D View . the menu, select Lighting Direction . The Lighting Direction dialog opens.


Change the spotlight’s direction at will. a) Place the mouse cursor over the handle. b) Drag the handle. The spotlight direction changes and the handle color switches from grey to yellow. c) Drop the handle when you have the desired light effect. The handle returns again to its previous color.

Change the spotlight’s direction using pre-defined light effects.

Click to light from the top left position.

Click to light from the down right position.

Click to light from the top right position.

Click to light from the down left position.

Click to return to the default position.

Note: Instead of selecting Lighting Direction from the menu bar, you can also click on its icon in the Display toolbar.


Caution: This feature does only apply a lighting effect to a geometry.

Exploring Data

Navigating Through Data

In the last session, we mentioned that the visualization of objects in the 3D

View is like taking a photograph with a camera. A photograph is a static view of the scene being visualized. If we can modify the camera position continuously, we can obtain the so-called object animation effects. We call this the navigation of the scene. Here, the modification of the camera position will be executed interactively by the user. In RealWorks , there are mainly three different ways for navigating through a 3D scene: Examiner , Walkthrough and

Station-Based .

Customize the Mouse Buttons

The navigation inside a scene or the manipulation of objects in the 3D View is done by using a mouse. When you launch the application for the first time, the default assignment for the left button is Rotate , while the middle button is dedicated for Pan . You are able to change these assignments in the

Preferences / Navigation dialog.


Set the Head Up Option

The Head Always Up (Z Axis) option enables, in the case you manipulate a 3D complex scene in the 3D View , to not lose its orientation in relation to the coordinate frame. The Z direction of the 3D scene is then in a plane perpendicular to the screen, as illustrated below.

When you start the software for the first time after you install it, the Head

Always Up (Z Axis) option is by default selected. You can deselect the option in the Preferences / Navigation dialog.

Exploring Data

Set a Displacement Mode

To Set a Displacement Mode:

1. From menu, select Mode . A submenu drops down. among , Walkthrough and Station-Based from the submenu.

Tip: You can right-click anywhere in the 3D View (except on a displayed object) and select Mode from the pop-up menu. A sub-menu drops down. Then select Examiner , or Walkthrough or Station-Based .

Tip: You can click on the Displacement Mode pull-down arrow on the 3D View toolbar and choose among Examiner , Walkthrough or Station-Based from the drop-down menu.

Examiner

The Examiner mode is the base mode of the software, that is, it is the default navigation mode when you start the software. In this mode, you turn the camera around an object. These operations are actually obtained by moving the scene with a mouse. In the 3D View , the navigation can be:

Free. We call this mode the Standard Navigation .

Under a temporary constraint.

Under a permanent constraint.

Note: If the Head Always Up (Z Axis) option has been checked in the

Preferences dialog, Its representation is displayed at the bottom right corner of the 3D View .

Note: In Examiner , you can be in any projection mode ( Perspective or

Isometric ).

Navigate without Constraints

You can perform the operations listed hereafter when you navigate in the

Examine r mode, with no constraint.


Rotate Around the Center of the Screen

To Rotate Around the Center of the Screen:

1. Press the left button of the mouse. The cursor takes the following shape

.

2. Drag the mouse in a direction while holding the left button pressed to rotate in that direction and around the center of the screen*.

To Rotate an Object of 360° With a Single Displacement of the Mouse:

1. Position the cursor on the left side of the 3D View .


.

3. Drag the mouse to the opposite side of the 3D View . the option and the Center of

Rotation Defined by Cursor Position feature are not selected, the

3D scene rotates of 180°. the option is unchecked and the Center of

Rotation Defined by Cursor Position feature is selected, the 3D scene rotates of more than one full turn. The number of turns is defined by the height of the 3D View , as illustrated below.

Exploring Data the option and the Center of Rotation

Defined by Cursor Position feature are both selected, the 3D scene rotates of more than one full turn. The number of turns is defined by the height of the 3D View , as illustrated below.

Note: (*) You can change the center of rotation using the Center on Point feature.

Note: (*) You can change the center of rotation using the Automatic Rotation

Center Mode feature.

Pan in a Direction

To Pan in a Direction:

1. Press the middle button of the mouse. The mouse takes the following shape .

2. Drag the mouse in a direction while holding the button pressed to pan in that direction.


Zoom In (or Out)

In the Examiner mode, the Zoom In and Zoom Out features behave differently depending on the combination of keys you use. The first behavior, called Zoom

(Distance), is like moving a camera forward or backward through a scene to simulate the Zoom In or Zoom Out effect. The second behavior, called Zoom

(Angle), is like taking a picture from a fixed position (of the camera), the Zoom

In and Zoom Out effects are then obtained by magnifying or reducing the camera angle.

Note: When you zoom in (or out), the focus is done from the position of the cursor, instead of from the center of the screen.

Zoom (Distance)

To Zoom In (or Out):

1. Press the left and middle buttons together. The mouse takes the following shape .

2. Drag the mouse forward while holding both pressed to Zoom Out . The

"camera" moves backward, and the scene is reduced.

3. Drag the mouse backward while holding both pressed to Zoom In . The

"camera" moves forward, and the scene is enlarged.

4. Or use the mouse wheel.

Tip: You can reverse the mouse for zooming in the Preferences dialog.

Zoom (Angle)


1. First press the Ctrl key and the left and middle buttons together. The mouse takes the following shape .

2. Drag the mouse forward while holding both pressed to Zoom Out . The

"camera" does not move. Its angle is enlarged, the scene is zoomed out.

3. Drag the mouse backward while holding both pressed to Zoom In . The

"camera" does not move. Its angle is reduced, the scene is zoomed in.

4. Or press the Ctrl key and use the mouse wheel.

Tip: You can reverse the mouse for zooming in the Preferences dialog.

Exploring Data

Navigate Under Temporary Constraints

You can navigate under a temporary constraint according to three directions:

Horizontal , Vertical and Perpendicular-to-the-Screen . By this way, you can switch easily from a free navigation (in the Standard Navigation) to a constrained navigation.

The illustration below shows where you need to place the cursor in the 3D

View to activate a temporary constraint. There are eight areas in the 3D View , illustrated by the letters A, B and C.


Rotate Around the Horizontal Direction Constraint

To Rotate Around a Vertical Axis Constraint:

1. Place the cursor anywhere along the right (or left) side of the 3D View, (A areas in the 3D View ).

2. Click on the left button of your mouse.

3. Move your mouse from up to down and in reverse to rotate a scene constrained under the horizontal direction.

Pan Along the Vertical Direction Constraint

To Pan Along the Vertical Direction Constraint:

1. Place the cursor anywhere along the right (or left) side of the 3D View , (A areas in the 3D View ).

2. Click on the middle button of your mouse.

3. Move your mouse from top to bottom and in reverse to pan a scene constrained under the vertical direction.

Exploring Data

Rotate Around the Vertical Direction Constraint

To Rotate Around the Vertical Direction Constraint:

1. Place the cursor anywhere along the top of the 3D View , (B areas in the

3D View ).

2. Click on the left button of your mouse.

3. Move your mouse from right to left and in reverse to rotate a scene constrained under the vertical direction.

Pan Along the Horizontal Direction Constraint

To Pan Along the Horizontal Direction Constraint:

1. Place the cursor anywhere along the top of the 3D View .

2. Click on the middle button of your mouse.

3. Move your mouse from right to left and in reverse to pan a scene constrained under the horizontal direction.


Rotate With Constraint Around an Axis Perpendicular to the

Screen

To Rotate With Constraint Around an Axis Perpendicular to the Screen:

1. Place the cursor anywhere at one of the four corners of the 3D View , (C areas in the 3D View ).

2. Click on the left button of your mouse and move it clockwise and anticlockwise and in reverse to rotate a scene constrained under an axis perpendicular to the screen.

Note: You cannot rotate a scene constrained under an axis perpendicular to the screen if the Head Always Up (Z Axis) option is checked in the Preferences dialog.

Exploring Data

Navigate Under Permanent Constraints

A constraint can also be permanent (for all navigation purposes). There are five types at all: Horizontal Pan , Vertical Pan , Horizontal Rotation , Vertical

Rotation and Screen Rotation . All of these constraints can be accessed through the 3D View / Mode menu.

But you can right-click on a constraint mode icon at the right side of the status bar. This displays a pop-up menu from which you can select a type of constraint.

You can also right-click anywhere in the 3D View (except on a displayed object) and select Mode from the pop-up menu. A sub-menu drops down.

Select then a constraint mode.

Tip: You can use the Alt key to slow down all navigations in the 3D View , free or permanent constraint.

Note: To get the Standard Navigation mode back, you can double-click on the constraint mode icon at the right side of the status bar.


Pan Along a Horizontal Axis Constraint

To Pan Along a Horizontal Axis Constraint:

1. From menu, select Mode . A submenu drops down.

2. Select from the submenu.

3. Press on the middle button of your mouse and move it from left to right and in reverse to pan the displayed scene constrained under the horizontal axis.

Pan Along a Vertical Axis Constraint

To Pan Along a Vertical Axis Constraint:



3. Press on the middle button of your mouse and move it from top to bottom and in reverse to translate the displayed scene constrained under the vertical axis.

Exploring Data

Rotate Around a Horizontal Axis Constraint

To Rotate Around a Horizontal Axis Constraint:

1. From , select Mode . A submenu drops down.


3. Press on the left button of your mouse and move it from top to bottom and in reverse to rotate the displayed scene constrained under the horizontal axis.

Rotate Around a Vertical Axis Constraint

To Rotate Around a Vertical Axis Constraint: the menu, select Mode . A submenu drops down.


3. Press on the left button of your mouse and move it from left to right and in reverse to rotate the displayed scene constrained under the vertical axis.


Rotate With Constraint Around an Axis Perpendicular to the

Screen

To Rotate With Constraint Around an Axis Perpendicular to the Screen.



3. Press on the left button of your mouse and move it clockwise and anticlockwise to rotate the displayed scene constrained under an axis perpendicular to the screen.

Caution: The Screen Rotation feature is grayed-out if the Head Always Up (Z

Axis) option has been checked in the Preferences / Navigation dialog.

Walkthrough

In Walkthrough , you use the mouse movement to simulate a walking through of the displayed scene. You cannot apply a constraint of any kind (either temporary or permanent) in this navigation mode.

Note: If the Head Always Up (Z axis) option has been checked in the

Preferences dialog, is displayed in the bottom right corner of the 3D View .

Tip: If Isometri c is the current projection mode, choosing Walkthrough will automatically swap the projection mode to Perspective .

Tilt (or Rotate) "Look at" a Direction

To Tilt (or Rotate) "Look at" a Direction:


.

2. Drag the mouse while holding the button pressed.

Exploring Data

Pan in a Direction

To Pan in a Direction:

1. Press the middle button of the mouse. The cursor takes the following shape .

2. Drag the mouse in a direction while holding the button pressed to pan in the opposite direction.

Walkthrough a Scene (or Objects)

To Walkthrough a Scene (or Objects):

1. Press the left and middle buttons together. The cursor takes the following shape .

2. Drag the mouse forward* while holding both pressed to Walk Inside a scene (objects).

3. Drag the mouse backward* while holding both pressed to Walk Out Of a scene (or objects).


Tip: (*) You can reverse the mouse for zoom in the Preferences dialog.

Station-Based

In Station-Based , a scene is viewed from the viewpoint of one of the stations, i.e., the instrument location for this station, and you can jump from one station to another (if there is more than one). You cannot apply a constraint of any kind (either temporary or permanent) in this navigation mode.

Tip: If the current projection mode is Isometric , and if you choose Station-

Based , the projection will automatically switch to Perspective .


Browse Through Stations

You can view a scene from the instrument viewpoint. In this particular viewing mode, the Head Always Up (Z Axis) preference and the Perspective projection mode are both set.

Note that navigating through a scene in such mode is restricted to rotating and zooming (in or out). You cannot apply temporary (or permanent) constraints while navigating through a scene. Below are an illustration and a description of items of that mode.

1 - Images of the current station

2 - Point cloud(s) of the current station

3 - First Station

4 - Previous Station

5 - The current station

To Browse Through Stations:

6 - Next Station

7 - Last Station

8 - Display/Hide Station Images

9 - Other station(s) with their station marker

1. Display objects in the 3D View (if not present). the menu, select Mode . A submenu drops down.


The scene is viewed from the first station viewpoint (the first in the Project

Tree ) with overlapped images in the background (see the upper illustration).

You can use the AutoSpin feature in Preferences to endlessly turn a scene around the station position.


To go to the first (or last) station, click the First Station (or Last )

Station button.

Exploring Data

To go to the next (previous) station, click the Next (or Previous )

Station button.

Click the current station button and choose another station from the drop-down list. The current station is grayed out and has a check mark at its side.

Double-click on a station marker .

5. If required, hide the images by clicking the Display/Hide Station Images button.

Note: To leave the Station-Based mode, choose between Examiner and

Walkthrough from either the 3D View > Mode menu or the pop-up menu.

Tip:

In , if you select a station from the Project Tree , right-click and select Station-Based Mode from the pop-up menu; the selected scene will be viewed from the selected station viewpoint. If no station has been selected, the scene will be viewed from the first station viewpoint.

The button takes the following shape (or

when images are hidden (or displayed).

You can also select a station from the Station Navigation > Edit menu.

Navigate Within a Station

To Rotate Around the Viewpoint of the Current Station:


.

2. Drag the mouse in a Direction while holding the button pressed to rotate in that Direction and around the viewpoint of the current station.


1. Press the left and middle buttons together. The mouse takes the following shape .

2. Drag the mouse Forward * while holding both pressed to Zoom Out .

3. Drag the mouse Backward * while holding both pressed to Zoom In .


Note: (*) You can reverse the mouse for zoom in Preferences .


Set a Projection Mode

There are two projection modes. In Isometric , the distance from the viewing camera origin to displayed objects has no impact on how large an object appears. In Perspective , the most unmistakable characteristic is foreshortening

- the further an object from the viewing camera, the smaller it appears in the final screen image.

Set the Perspective Mode

To Set the Perspective Mode: the menu, select Mode . A sub-menu drops down.

2. Select from the drop-down submenu.

Tip:

You can right-click anywhere in the 3D View (except on a displayed object) and select Mode / Perspective from the pop-up menu.

You can also click on the Projection Mode pull-down arrow in the 3D View toolbar and choose Perspective from the list.

Note: In the Perspective mode, you can use any of the displacement modes

(Walkthrough, or Examiner or Station-Based).

Exploring Data

Set the Isometric Mode

To Set the Isometric Mode:

1. In menu, select Mode . A sub-menu drops down.

2. Select from the drop-down submenu.

Note: The scale at the left down corner of the 3D View is only available in

Isometric .

Tip: You can right-click anywhere in the 3D View (except on a displayed object) and select Mode / I sometric from the pop-up menu.

Tip: You can also click on the Projection Mode pull-down arrow in the 3D View toolbar and choose Isometric from the list.

Note: In the Isometric mode, you can only use the Examiner mode. If you choose Isometric, the displacement mode will automatically swap to Examiner .

Align to a View

At any time during the navigation in all the navigation modes ( Examiner ,

Walkthrough and Station-Based ), you can re-align your view frustum by using the following functions: Zoom In , Zoom Out , Zoom on Selection , Zoom All ,

Center on Point, Go to Shooting Position and Automatic Rotation Center Mode .


Zoom In (or Out)

The Zoom In feature enables to fit a fenced zone into the whole 3D View while the Zoom Out feature enables to fit the whole the 3D View into a fenced zone.


1. In menu, select View Alignment . A submenu drops down.


Select .

Select .

3. Draw a fence in the 3D View window.

Note: Before drawing a fence, pressing Esc will leave the Zoom In or Zoom

Out tool.

Tip: You can use the mouse buttons Left + Right to zoom in and out.

Zoom all

The Zoom All feature enables to fit the whole displayed scene into the 3D View

(except in Station-Based , where the field of view is limited).

To Zoom All: the menu, select View Alignment . A submenu drops down.

2. Select from the sub-menu.

Tip:

You can right-click anywhere in the 3D View (except on displayed) and select View Alignment from the pop-up menu. A sub-menu drops down.

Select then Zoom All .

You can use the short-cut key Home instead of selecting the Zoom All command.

Exploring Data

Zoom on Selection

The Zoom on Selection feature enables to fit an object (or a set of objects) in selection into the 3D View .

To Zoom on Selection:

1. Select an object either in the 3D View or from the Project Tree . the menu, select View Alignment . A submenu drops down.

3. Select from the sub-menu.

Tip: You can right-click on an object (cloud or geometry) in the 3D View and select Zoom On Selection from the pop-up menu and

Center on Point

The Center on Point feature enables to locate a center of rotation onto a selected point (in the Examiner mode) or to merely view towards this point (in the Station-Based or Walkthrough mode).

To Center on Point:

1. In menu, select View Alignmen t. A submenu drops down.

2. Select from the sub-menu. The Picking Parameters toolbar appears and the cursor becomes as follows .

3. Pick a point on displayed objects.

Note: Before picking a point, press Esc will leave the Center on Point tool.

Tip: You can use the X key on your keyboard as a shortcut.


Go to a Shooting Position

This feature allows you to align your viewing frustum from the shooting position of an image as registered to the 3D data. It is not accessible if the selected image has no 3D data correspondence.

To Go to a Shooting Position:


2. Display (or open) the image if required. the menu, select View Alignment . A submenu drops down.

4. Select from the drop-down menu.

The first screen capture shows an image thumbnail with a displayed cloud

The second image shows the view alignment after the Go to Shooting Position command is executed

Tip:

You can right-click on an image and select Go to Shooting Position from the drop-down menu.

You can click on the Go to Shooting Position icon on the View Alignment toolbar.

Note: The Go to Shooting Position feature is only available in Examiner (or

Walkthrough ) mode.

Exploring Data

Set the Center of Rotation by Picking a Point

In the Examiner mode, the rotation is by default done around the center of the screen. With the Center of Rotation Defined by Cursor Position, the rotation is done at the position you picked in the 3D View .

To Set the Center of Rotation by Picking a Point: the icon in the

View Alignment toolbar. select from the 3D View

/ View Alignment menu.

3. Pick a point anywhere in the 3D View . The position of the picked point will be then the center of the rotation.

4. Pick another point. The position of this new picked point will be the center of the rotation, and so on.

Tip: You can also use the Q shortcut key instead to activate / deactivate this feature.

Align to a Standard View

There are twelve pre-programmed standard viewing positions. Six of them

( Top , Back , Right , Left , Front and Back ) are defined as shown below where X ,

Y , Z represent the three axes of the Active Frame .

View View Direction

Looking parallel to - Z-axis, + Y-axis bottom to top, + X-axis left to right

Top

Looking parallel to + Z-axis, + Y-axis top to bottom, + X-axis left to right

Bottom

Looking parallel to + Y-axis, + Z-axis bottom to top, + X-axis left to right

Front

Looking parallel to - Y-axis, + Z-axis bottom to top, + X-axis right to left

Back

Looking parallel to + X-axis, + Z-axis bottom to top, + Y-axis right to left

Left

Looking parallel to - X-axis, + Z-axis bottom to top, + Y-axis left to right

Right

The six others ( Top of the Selected Object , Bottom of the Selected

Object , Right of the Selected Object , Left of the Selected Object ,

Front of the Selected Object and Back of the Selected Object ) correspond to the top, bottom, right, left, front and back face of an entity which should be selected and of geometry property.


Align to a Global View

To Align to a Global View:

1. In menu, select Standard Views . A submenu drops down.

2. Select one of the six options from the submenu.

Note: No selection is required to apply a standard view.

Tip:

You can use the corresponding icon in the View Alignment toolbar.

You can right-click anywhere in the 3D View (except on displayed objects) and select Standard Views from the pop-up menu. A sub-menu drops down from which you can select a view.

Tip: You can use shortcut keys to swap from a Standard View to another. All are detailed in the Shortcut Keys section.

Align to a Local View

To Align to a Local View:

1. Select and display an object with geometry property in the 3D View . the menu, select Standard Views . A submenu drops down.

3. Select one of the six options from the submenu.

Tip:

You can use the corresponding icon in the View Alignment toolbar.

You can right-click anywhere in the 3D View (except on displayed objects) and select Standard Views from the pop-up menu. A sub-menu drops down from which you can select a view.

C H A P T E R 6

Editing Data

We have introduced a point cloud loading tool for supporting huge amount of points. The user is able to precisely control which points are loaded into memory and thus available for all the regular tools.

293

Drag and Drop an Item

The Drag & Drop functionality provides shortcut methods for performing common tasks. You can use the drag and drop functionality to modify the organization of the Project Tree according to conditions).

In the Scans Tree:

From: To:

Project Group

In the Models Tree:

From: To:

Project Group

Project Cloud No No

In the Images Tree:

From: To:

Project Group

(1) In a group with the same level or in a sub-level group

To Drag and Drop an Item:

1. Select a group (or object node(s)) that you want to drag and drop.

2. Press and hold the left mouse button while you drag the object to its destination.

3. Release the mouse button to drop the object.

Note: The cursor changes to when you try to drag and drop an item for which the operation cannot be performed.


Cut and Paste an Item

You can use the Cut / Paste functionality to delete or re-organize the Project

Tree according to conditions. It is important to note that you cannot apply these operations to a scan or to an image; and these operations should be used inside a project. Copying a group node will duplicate its contents.

In the Scans Tree:

From: To:

Project Group

In the Models Tree:

From: To:

Project Group

Project Cloud No No

In the Images Tree:

From: To:

Project Group

Editing Data


To Cut an Item:

1. Select an object (or a group of objects) from the Models Tree . the menu, select Cut from the menu bar.

3. Navigate through the Models Tree to select a new location. the menu, select Paste . The selected object (or group of objects) is moved.

Note:

You undo or redo the Cut operations you have previously performed.

You can also pick an object directly in the 3D View and select a command from the pop-up menu.

Tip: You can use the following shortcut-keys instead of selecting commands from the menu bar ( Ctrl + X for Cut and Ctrl + V for Paste ).

Note: The Cut command from the Edit menu remains grayed out when you select an item for which the cut cannot be performed.


Copy and Paste an Item

You can use the Copy / Paste functionality to delete or re-organize the Project

Tree according to conditions. It is important to note that you cannot apply this operation to a scan or to an image; and this operation should be used inside a project. Copying a group node will duplicate its contents.

In the Scans Tree:

From: To:

Project Group

In the Models Tree:

From: To:

Project Group

Project Cloud No No

In the Images Tree:

From: To:

Project Group

Editing Data


To Copy an Item:

1. Select an object (or a group of objects) from the Models Tree . the menu, select Copy .

3. Navigate through the Models Tree to select a new location. the menu, select Paste . The selected object (or group of objects) is duplicated.

A copied object has as name Copy of "Name_Of_The_Object_To_Copy".

Note:

You undo or redo the Copy operations you have previously performed.

You can also pick an object directly in the 3D View and select a command from the pop-up menu.

Tip: You can use the following shortcut-keys instead of selecting commands from the menu bar ( Ctrl + C for Copy and Ctrl + V for Paste ).

Note: The Copy command from the Edit menu remains grayed out when you select an item for which the copy cannot be performed.


Delete an Item

This command can be used to delete objects from the RealWorks database. It is important to note that you cannot delete a station, a scan or an image in the

Scans Tree , the unmatched target group in the Targets Tree and the Project

Cloud in the Models Tree .

To Delete an Item:

1. Select an object (or a group of objects) from the Models Tree .

2. In menu, select Delete .

3. Click .

Note: You can also use the Del key instead of selecting the Delete command from the menu bar.

Editing Data

Create a New Group Node

This command allows you to create a new group. You can do this in all four sub-trees.

To Create a New Group Node:

1. Select a project/group object from the Project Tree .

2. In menu, select New Group . The new group will be created under the selected project/group.

Tip: You can also choose the New Group command from the pop-up menu in the WorkSpace window.


Change a Color

You can change the color of a selected item in two different ways.

From the Property Window

To Change an Item's Color in the Property Window:

1. Select an item from the Project Tree .

2. Right-click to display the pop-up menu.

3. Select from the pop-up menu. The Property window opens.

4. If the item has only a point cloud representation, click in the Color of Cloud field. Its color becomes editable and a pull-down arrow button appears.

5. If the item has only a geometry representation, click in the Color of

Geometry field. Its color becomes editable and a pull-down arrow button appears.

6. If the item has both representations*, click in either the Color of Cloud or

Color of Geometry field.

7. Click on the pull-down arrow button. A color palette appears.


Choose a color from the color palette.

Or define a color: a) Click . The Colors dialog opens. b) Define a color.

OK .

Note: (*) Fitted item

Editing Data

From the Menu Bar

To Change an Item's Color from the Menu Bar:

1. Select an object from the Project Tree .

2. If the item has only a point cloud representation, click on the Change

Cloud Color pull-down arrow in the 3D View toolbar. A color palette appears.

3. If the item has only a geometry representation, click on the Change

Geometry Color pull-down arrow in the 3D View toolbar. A color palette appears.

4. If the item has both representations*, click on either the Change Cloud

Color or Change Geometry Color pull-down arrow. A color palette appears.


Choose a color in the color palette.

Define a color: a) Click . The Colors dialog opens. b) Define a color.

OK .

Note: (*) Fitted item


Change a Name

You can change the name of an object in two places: either in the

WorkSpace / List window, or in the Property window. You can rename all objects except the project node itself, the Project Cloud and unmatched targets.

To Rename in the Property Window:

1. Select an object from the Project Tree and right-click to display the pop-up menu.

2. Select from the pop-up menu. The Property window opens.

3. Click in the Name field. The selected object name becomes editable.

4. Enter a new name.

5. Press .

To Rename in the WorkSpace Window:

1. Select an object from the Project Tree .

2. Left-click twice on the name of the found object.

3. Enter a new name.

Enter .

Note: You can also select an object and use the F2 key to rename it.

Editing Data

Merge Point Clouds

Merging cloud objects consists of creating a new cloud from the selected clouds and deleting them at the same time. It is important to note that you can only merge objects containing only the cloud representation. If one of the selected objects contains a geometry representation, a warning will be issued to user. If user decides to continue, the geometric shape of the selected object will be lost. You cannot merge the scans. The selected clouds for merging must belong to the same project. When you select clouds from two different groups, the merged cloud will be put under the group which contains the last selected cloud.

To Merge Point Clouds:

1. Select cloud objects from the Project Tree .

2. From menu, select Merge Clouds .

Note: You can also use the following short-cut key Ctrl + M instead of selecting

Merge Clouds from the menu bar.


Pick an Item

There is no command for opening the Picking Parameters toolbar. It comes up with some tools where pickings are required like Polyline Drawing Tool,

Measurement Tool , or Geometry Creator Tool *, etc. There are three picking modes: Standard , Lowest Cloud Picking and Highest Cloud Picking.

Standard is the picking mode which comes up by default when the toolbar opens.

Note: (*) This tool is not present in Trimble RealWorks (Base) and Advanced .

Use the Standard Picking Mode

In the Standard Picking mode, the Picking Parameters toolbar is composed of three fields ( X , Y and Z coordinates)* and a button ( Lock on Primitive Center ) in the 3D constraint mode and of two fields ( Angle and Distance called Polar coordinates or Distance and Distance called Cartesian coordinates ) in the 2D constraint mode.

Note: (*) In the X , Y Z Coordinate System or North , East and Elevation in the

North , East , Elevation Coordinate System.

Editing Data

Pick in the 3D Constraint Mode

In the 3D Constraint Mode , you can lock in the active coordinate frame a coordinate, a couple of coordinates, all coordinates at once or the center of a primitive. When only one coordinate is locked, the picking is constrained on a plane. When two coordinates are locked, the picking is constrained on a line.

And three locked coordinates define the position of a point. All fields are blank before you pick a point.

1 - Buttons 2 - Fields in which the user can enter values

3 - Lock on Primitive Center

Note: The unit of measurement is set by default to Meters; you do not have to enter “m” and you can change it when necessary (see Preferences ).

Tip: In the X , Y , Z Coordinate System , instead of clicking the X (or Y or Z ) button, you can also use its related shortcut SHIFT + X (or Y or Z ).

Caution: No shortcut is available when you are in the North , East , Elevation

Coordinate System .


Constrain Picking on a Plane

To Constrain Picking on a Plane:

1. Enter a coordinate in any of the three fields. Its related button is automatically pressed-on.

X* is locked in this example

2. Pick one point on the displayed object. Picking is locked in the X* coordinate.

Note: (*) In the X , Y , Z Coordinate System .

Constrain Picking on a Line

To Constrain Picking on a Line:

1. Enter a coordinate in any of the three fields. Its related button is automatically pressed-on.

2. Enter another coordinate in any of the two remaining fields. Its related button is automatically pressed-on.

X* and Y* are locked in this example

3. Pick one point on the displayed object. Picking is locked in the X and Y coordinates.


Editing Data

Constrain Picking on a Point

To Constrain Picking on a Point:

1. Enter a coordinate in each of the three fields. Its related button is automatically pressed-on.

2. Go to the 3D View and pick one point. Picking is locked in that position.

Lock on Primitive

To Lock on a Primitive Center:

1. Click .

2. Go to the 3D View and pick on a primitive. Wherever you pick on the primitive, you are locked on its center and its 3D coordinates are displayed in the X *, Y * and Z * fields.


Pick in the 2D Constraint Mode

In the 2D constraint mode, you can use Cartesian ( H and V distances both in mm*) or Polar ( Angle and Distance respectively in degrees** and in mm**).

The Cartesian and Polar constraint picking modes come automatically when you have to 2D-pick. In each mode, you can constrain one or both items. To tilt from one constraint mode to the other, click on the Switch to Polar or Cartesian button or on the pull-down arrow and chose the constraint mode you need.

Note that you can do this at any time before and while picking points.

Note:

(*) The unit of measurement for H (or V ) in Cartesian is set by-default in

Millimeter. You can change it in Preferences \ Units .

(**) The unit of measurement for the Angle (or Distance ) in Polar is set bydefault in Degree (or Meter). You can change it in Preferences \ Units .


Use Cartesian

Before you pick a first point, both fields ( H and V ) are grayed out. After you pick your first point; this point is assumed as the origin - with 0 and 0 as H and

V coordinates - for the next point to come. This next point is itself assumed as the origin for the third point to come and so on.

1 - Clickable buttons 2 - Editable fields

Tip: Instead of clicking on the H and V buttons; you can also use its related shortcuts key H and V .

Use Polar

Before you pick a first point, both fields ( Angle and Distance ) are grayed out.

After you pick your first point; the Angle and Distance fields are empty of value.

When you pick the next point; the Angle field remains empty of value and the

Distance field is filled with a value that corresponds to the distance from the first point to this second point. When you try to pick a third point, the Angle field is filled with the second point/first point and second point/third point angle value.

1 - Clickable buttons 2 - Editable fields

Tip: Instead of clicking on the Angle (or Distance) button; you can also use its related shortcut keys Shift + A (or D ).

Editing Data

Use the Highest Point Picking Mode

You can pick the highest point on a region of the screen around the position of your cursor with regard to the Z axis of the current frame. You are able to choose a size (in pixels) around the position of your cursor. The illustration below shows the principle in the XYZ coordinate system.

To Pick the Highest Point:

1. Bring the view to Top by selecting from the 3D View / Standard Views menu.

2. Open a tool where pickings are required, like e.g. the Measurement Tool .

The Picking Parameters toolbar opens.

3. Drop-down the first pull-down arrow and choose Highest Point Picking from the list.

4. Drop-down the second pull-down arrow and choose the numbers of pixels from the list. The number of pixels ranges from 5 Pixels to 20 Pixels .

5. Hover the cursor over a point.


A square marker appears at the end of the cursor.

Its 3D coordinates are displayed the X , Y and Z fields.

Tip: To avoid you from losing the Top view of the scene, we advise you to lock the scene in the Screen Rotation position. By this way, when you manipulate the scene and the Top view is always kept.

Tip: You can define another Z axis direction by using the Frame Creation Tool .

Editing Data

Use the Lowest Point Picking Mode

You can know the lowest point on a region on the screen around the position of your cursor with regard to the Z axis (or Elevation axis). You are able to choose a size (in pixels) around the position of your cursor. The illustration below shows the principle in the XYZ coordinate system.

To Pick the Lowest Point:

1. Bring the view to Top by selecting from the 3D View / Standard Views menu.

2. Open a tool where pickings are required, like e.g. the Measurement Tool .

The Picking Parameters toolbar opens.

3. Drop-down the first pull-down arrow and choose Lowest Point Picking from the list.

4. Drop-down the second pull-down arrow and choose the numbers of pixels from the list. The number of pixels ranges from 5 Pixels to 20 Pixels .


5. Hover the cursor over a point.

A square marker appears at the end of the cursor.

Its 3D coordinates are displayed the X , Y and Z fields.

Tip: To avoid you from losing the Top view of the scene, we advise you to lock the scene in the Screen Rotation position. By this way, when you manipulate the scene and the Top view is always kept.

C H A P T E R 7

Managing the Loading and HD

Rendering of Points

We have introduced a Point Loading Manager for supporting huge amount of points. The user is able to precisely control which points are loaded into memory and thus available for all the regular tools.

315

Load Data

We distinguish two types of data: data loaded on disk and data loaded in RAM.

The way the user is able to load (or unload) points in RAM can be done through a field in the status bar. At any time, the user can enter a value between 1 and 2000 (in Millions of Points) in the field and press Enter .


Process Data

Some tools can work on disk, i.e., on the full data, independently of what is loaded in the RAM (see [A]). Others work directly on the data loaded in the

RAM (see [B]).

In [A], the number of points used by the Scan-

Based Sampling is equal to the whole data set.

In [B], the number of points used by the

Intensity-Based Sampling is equal to what is loaded in the RAM.

Here is a list of tools for which the need is to work on the full data, i.e., on disk.

Segmentation Tool: As a stand-alone tool, as a sub-tool in other tools and all tools working in a similar way ( Cloud-based Modeler , SteelWorks and

EasyPipe ).

Scan-Based Sampling and Random Sampling methods from the Sampling

Tool (as a stand-alone tool and as a sub-tool in other tools).

Exports of point cloud data,

Generate Point Color-Coding by Height,

Color Points Using Station Images,

Coloring in Image Matching Tool.

In all the other tools, the deliverable will be produced with what is loaded in

RAM.

Managing the Loading and HD Rendering of Points

You can define the amount of points to use with a tool. A dialog appears in the case the loading of requested points is not yet complete. You are then prompted between waiting until the loading is complete and computing now the amount of already loaded points.

Note: If you decide to compute now, your setting will be changed to the current load.


Display Points in HD

The HD Display is a new rendering motor in which is implemented a camera-based dynamic display loading. It enables to dissociate the loading of points from its display. By this way, you are able to display more points than what you load.


HD Display Mode Inside a Tool

The Loading Value field and the HD Display mode will appear when you enter a tool. With the Loading Value field, you can have a feedback on the current loading value and you can change it if required. Note that the loading value defines the number of points the algorithms are working on. The Loading Value field and the HD Display mode will disappear when you close the tool. The default value is 25 million points and any new value, once set, is persistent

(same persistency for all tools).

In the picture below, the HD Display has not been chosen. The display will be limited to the loading value as long as you are in the tool.

If you activate the HD Display mode by clicking the HD button, you may have some HD feedback to see more details. This is useful for picking a precise point, visually checking, identifying an area of interest, etc.


Note: The new display technology used a VRAM memory. You can define the maximum VRAM and the cache RAM you want to allocate to this session in

Preferences / HD Display .

The behavior of the HD Display mode depends on the type of tool you are using.

Inside a Main Tool:

In most of the main tools, the Loading Value field and the HD Display mode both appear except in Polyline Drawing Tool , or in Feature Set Tool . You can change the loading, and hence change between HD and Not HD .

The Segmentation Tool is an exception. The HD Display mode is by default forced to HD . When you leave the tool, the HD Display mode will take the last state before entering the tool.


Inside a Sub-Tool:

If you enter a sub-tool with the HD Display mode chosen, you will stay in that mode. If you are in the Not HD Display mode, you will stay in that mode.

When you close a sub-tool, the HD Display and Not HD Display mode should remain the same. If you switch to the HD Display (or Not HD Display ) mode in a sub-tool, you should stay in the state when you are back to the parent tool.

The Segmentation Tool is an exception. The HD Display mode will always be activated when entering the Segmentation Tool . When you close it, the HD

Display / Not HD Display will be the last state before entering the tool.

HD Display Mode Outside a Tool

Outside a tool, the HD Display mode is not available. The Loading Value field is useless, as the display (of points) does not depend on it anymore.

C H A P T E R 8

Basic Tools

Tools in RealWorks can be classified into two categories: basic tools and highlevel tools. The basic tools can be used alone or be open inside a high-level tool to perform basic operations in the three following processing modes,

Registration *, OfficeSurvey and Modeling **, i.e., preparing data for high-level tools. In such cases, you cannot save the result. In general, the basic tools are represented by toolbars containing the operations arranged as icons or dialogs.

Note:

(*) Registration , only the Measurement Tool , Clipping Box Extraction

Tool , Shift Project , Generate Key Plan from TZF Scans and Generate Key

Plan from Current View are available.

The processing mode is not present in RealWorks (Base) and Advanced .

The Tools menu is present in all RealWorks products but the contents (of tools) differ from a license to another. The table below listed the contents the user can have according to the license (of RealWorks ) he has.

325

Measurement Tool

This tool allows you to make point-to-point distance measurements, angular measurements, point-to-scanning position measurements, orientation measurements, etc. You can try as many measurements as you wish and for those you need later on, you can create them as persistent objects in the database. The created measurement objects will be put under the current active group. Measurements are based on pickings which can be free (or constrained).


Open the Tool

A measurement determines the distance two between picked points, calculates the angle from three picked points, shows the XYZ coordinates of a picked point and gives the orientation of a picked point on a sloping surface, etc. It is important to note that picking for the measurement will always function on objects, that is, either on points or on geometric shapes. You can still navigate in the 3D View while performing a measurement but you cannot select an object.

To Open the Tool:

1. Display an object (point cloud, mesh or geometry) in the 3D View . the menu, select Measurement Tool . The Measurement

Tool and Picking Parameters toolbars open.

In the OfficeSurvey (or Modeling ) mode, if you use the tool in the 3D View , the toolbar looks as shown below:

If you use it in a 2D View , the toolbar looks as shown below:

In the Registration mode and if you use the tool as a main tool, the toolbar looks as shown below:

If you use it as a sub-tool, the toolbar looks as shown below:

Basic Tools

The toolbar is composed of a set of icons. They are grouped by category: 1 -

Distance Measurements , 2 - Angular Measurements , 3 - Point Measurement , 4

- Orientation Measurements , 5 - Create (dimmed) and 6 - Close . The measurement type which comes first is the one selected during the last use of that tool. While you are in this tool, an information box will appear on the top right corner of the 3D View , and the mouse's cursor will change its shape to that of a ruler. When you are on a 3D point, a circle surrounding this point appears at the end of the ruler.

Note: Each type of measurement can be activated via its corresponding icon in the Measurement Tool toolbar or by selecting its related command from the pop-up menu.

Distance Measurements

To perform a distance measurement, choose the appropriate type of measurement by clicking on the associated icon. In each case, you should pick two points except for the Vertical Clearance Measurement (Upward) or the

Vertical Clearance Measurement (Downward) where just one point is required.

There are eight icons dedicated to distance measurements: 1 - Distance

Measurement , 2 - Distance Measurement In Horizontal Plane , 3 - Distance

Measurement Along Vertical Axis , 4 - Vertical Clearance Measurement

(Upward) , 5 - Vertical Clearance Measurement (Downward) , 6 - ' Point to Fitted

Plane' Distance Measurement , 7 - Fitted Cylinder Diameter Measurement , 8 -

' Point to Geometry' Distance Measurement .


Measure a Distance

To Measure a Distance: the icon.

2. Pick one point on the displayed object. This point is the first measurement point (A).

3. Navigate in the 3D View and pick another point on the displayed object to assign the second measurement point (B).

Once the second point is picked, the distance measurement and its projections along the X, Y, Z axes are displayed in the 3D View . At the same time, the information box will display the measurement result in text. Each time you start a new measurement, this information box updates automatically the information inside.

Length : Distance from the two picked points

Delta X : Delta distance between the two points along the X axis

Delta Y : Delta distance between the two points along the Y axis

Delta Z : Delta distance between the two points along the Z axis

Note: Press Esc (or select another measurement type) to undo the distance measurement.

Basic Tools

Measure a Distance in a Horizontal Plane

To Measure a Distance in a Horizontal Plane: the icon.

2. Pick a point on the selected object. This point is the first measurement point (A).

3. Navigate in the 3D View and pick another point on the selected object to assign the second measurement point (B).

The measurement is performed between point (A) and the projection of point

(B) in the XY plane. The result and its projections along the X, Y, Z axes are displayed in the 3D View . At the same time, the information box will display the measurement result in text. Each time you start a new measurement, this information box updates the information inside automatically.

Length : Distance from point (A) to the projection of point (B) in the XY plane






Basic Tools

Measure a Distance Along a Vertical Axis

To Measure a Distance Along a Vertical Axis: the icon.

2. Pick a point on the selected object. This point is the first measurement point (A).

3. Navigate in the 3D View and pick another point on the selected object to assign the second measurement point (B).

The measurement is performed between point (A) and the projection of point

(B) along the Z axis. The result is displayed in the 3D View . At the same time, the information box will display the measurement result in text. Each time you start a new measurement, this information box updates the information inside automatically.

Length : Distance from point (A) to the projection of point (B) along the Z axis






Measure a Vertical Clearance Distance (Upward)

A Vertical Clearance is the minimum unobstructed vertical space between two points along the Z-Axis . The Vertical Clearance Measurement (Upward) is dedicated to indoor (or outdoor) measurements where the user needs to know the unobstructed distance between two points (from e.g. the ground to the ceiling).

To Measure a Vertical Clearance Distance (Upward): the icon.

2. Pick a point on the selected object.

The distance measurement is displayed in the 3D View . At the same time, the information box will display the measurement result in text. Each time you start a new measurement, this information box updates the information inside automatically.

Length : Vertical clearance distance





Caution: The Vertical Clearance Measurement (Upward) method is not available a 2D View .

Basic Tools

Measure a Vertical Clearance Distance (Downward)

A Vertical Clearance is the minimum unobstructed vertical space between two points along the Z-Axis . The Vertical Clearance Measurement (Downward) is dedicated to indoor (or outdoor) measurements where the user needs to know the unobstructed distance between two points (from e.g. the ceiling to the ground).

To Measure a Vertical Clearance Distance (Downward): the icon.

2. Pick a point on the selected object.

The distance measurement is displayed in the 3D View . At the same time, the information box will display the measurement result in text. Each time you start a new measurement, this information box updates the information inside automatically.

Length : Vertical clearance distance





Caution: The Vertical Clearance Measurement (Downward) method is not available a 2D View .


Measure a Distance to a Fitted Plane

This method enables to measure a distance from three picked points. The two first points are used to fit a set of points with a (circular) plane. The first point which should be picked on a set of points defines its center. The second point

(with the first one) defines its diameter. The distance from the third picked point to its projection on the fitted plane is then measured.

To Measure a Distance to a Fitted Plane: the icon.

2. Pick a point on the displayed object.

3. Move your mouse. A sphere whose diameter is formed by the first picked point and the cursor position appears. This sphere is used as bounds for fitting a circular plane.

4. Pick a new point not necessary on the displayed object. A fitted circular plane appears.

5. Pick another new point, now on the displayed object.

Basic Tools

Note:

The fitted (circular) plane will not to be created in the RealWorks database once the measurement has been validated.

The 'Point-to-Fitted Plane' Distance Measurement feature is not present in the toolbar when using the Measurement Tool as a sub-tool in the Cloud-

Based Registration Tool .

Caution: The 'Point to Fitted Plane' Distance Measurement method is not available a 2D View .


Measure a Fitted Cylinder Diameter

This method enables from a point picked on a set of points to first fit this set of points with a cylinder and then to measure its diameter. This method of measurement cannot be applied to sagging pipes.

To Measure a Fitted Cylinder Diameter:

1. Click on the Fitted Cylinder Diameter Measurement icon.

2. Pick a point on the displayed object.

3. Move your mouse. A sphere whose diameter is formed by the first picked point and the cursor position appears. This sphere is used as bounds for the cylinder fitting.

4. Pick a new point not necessary on the displayed object.

The set of points in the neighborhood of the first picked point is fitted with a cylinder and its diameter is measured and displayed.

Note: The fitted cylinder will not be created in the RealWorks database once the measurement has been validated.

Basic Tools

Caution: The Fitted Cylinder Diameter Measurement method is not available a

2D View .

Measure a Point-to-Geometry Distance

This method measures the shortest distance between a 3D point and a geometry.

To Measure a Point-to-Geometry Distance:

1. Click the ' Point to Geometry' Distance Measurement icon.

2. Pick a geometry. The cursor takes the shape shown below.

3. Move your cursor. The shortest distance from the picked geometry to your cursor position is displayed in the information box at the top right corner of the 3D View .

4. Pick a 3D point on the displayed object.

Note: The 'Point to Geometry' Distance Measurement feature is not present in the toolbar when using the Measurement Tool as a sub-tool in the Cloud-



Angular Measurements

To perform an angular measurement, choose the appropriate type of measurement by clicking on the associated icon.

There are five icons dedicated to angular measurements: 1 - Angular

Measurement , 2 - Horizontal Angular Measurement , 3 - Slope Angle

Measurement , 4 - Geometry Slope Angle Measurement , 5 - Angle Between

Geometries Measurement .

Basic Tools

Measure an Angle

To Measure an Angle:

1. Click on the Angular Measurement icon.

2. Pick a point. This point will be the vertex of the angle to measure (A).

3. Navigate through the scene and pick a new point. This point will form with the first point the first segment of the angle to measure (B).

4. Navigate through the scene and pick a new point. This point will form with the first point the second segment of the angle to measure (C).

Once the third point is picked, the angular measurement will be displayed in the 3D View . At the same time, the information box will display the measurement result in text. Each time you start a new measurement this information box will update automatically the information inside.

Note: The three picked points should be on the displayed object.


Measure a Horizontal Angle

To Measure a Horizontal Angle: the icon.

2. Pick a point [A]. This point will be set as the vertex of an angle to measure.

3. Navigate through the scene and pick a new point [B]. This point will form with the first point the first segment of the angle.

4. Navigate through the scene and pick a new point [C]. This point will form with the first point the second segment of the angle.

Basic Tools

The angular measurement will not be performed between the vertex [A] and points [B] and [C] but between the vertex [A] and the projections of point [B] and point [C] in the XY plane. The result is displayed in the 3D View . At the same time, the information box will display the measurement result in text.

Each time you start a new measurement, this information box updates the information inside automatically.

Note: The three picked points should be on the displayed object.

Caution: The Horizontal Angular Measurement method is not available a 2D

View .


Measure a Slope Angle

To Measure a Slope Angle: the icon.

2. Pick a point [A]. This point will be set as the vertex of the angle to measure.

3. Navigate through the scene and pick a new point [B]. This point will form with the first point the first segment of the angle to measure.

The angular measurement will be performed between the vertex [A], the point

[B] and the projection of point [B] in the XY plane. The result is displayed in the

3D View . At the same time, the information box will display the measurement result in text. Each time you start a new measurement, this information box updates the information inside automatically.

Caution: The Slope Angular Measurement method is not available a 2D View .

Basic Tools

Measure a Geometry Slope Angle

To Measure a Geometry Slope Angle: the icon.

2. Pick an axial geometry. Its center will be set as the vertex of the angle to measure. Its axis will be the first segment of the angle to measure.

The angular measurement will be performed between the vertex, the geometry's axis and the projection of the geometry's axis in the XY plane. The result is displayed in the 3D View . At the same time, the information box will display the measurement result in text. Each time you start a new measurement, this information box updates automatically the information inside.

Caution: The Geometry Slope Angle Measurement method is not available a

2D View .


Measure a Between-Geometry Angle

To Measure a Between-Geometry Angle:

1. Click the ' Angle Between Geometries' Measurement icon.

2. Pick an axial geometry.

3. Pick another axial geometry.

The angular measurement will be performed between the two axes of the picked geometries. The result is displayed in the 3D View . At the same time, the information box will display the measurement result in text. Each time you start a new measurement, this information box updates automatically the information inside.

Note: A warning message appears if the axes (of the geometries) are not secant.

Caution: The ' Angle Between Geometries' Measurement method is not available a 2D View .

Basic Tools

Point Measurement

To perform a point measurement, there is only one method.

Measure a 3D Point

For a point-to-scanning position measurement, you need just one point.

To Measure a 3D Point:

1. Click on the Point Measurement icon.

2. Pick one point on the displayed object to measure its 3D position.

A measured point is displayed with a label showing its coordinates. At the same time, the information box will display the measurement in text. Each time you start a new measurement, this information box will update automatically the information inside.

Note: Press Esc (or select another type) to undo the measurement.

Tip: You can remove a measured point’s label by first selecting Rendering , then Display 3D Labels from the 3D View menu.

Orientation Measurements

To perform an orientation measurement, choose the appropriate type of measurement by clicking on the associated icon.

There are two icons dedicated to orientation measurements: 1 - Orientation

Measurement and 2 - Orientation Measurement Using Three Points .


Measure an Orientation

This method lets you know the orientation of a given point on a sloping surface.

An orientation is expressed in the form of two angles. The measurement is as follows. A plane (of circular shape) is extracted from the point. Two angles are then calculated. The first angle called Elevation is formed by the extracted plane and the YX plane of the active coordinate frame. The second angle called North is formed by the extracted plane and the ZX plane of the active coordinate frame.

To Measure an Orientation:

1. Click on the Orientation Measurement icon.

2. Pick a point on the displayed object (A).

3. Navigate through the 3D scene. A sphere whose diameter is formed by the first picked point and the cursor position appears. This sphere is used as bounds for the plane extraction.

4. Pick a new point on the displayed object (B).

1 - The first picked point

2 - The second picked point

3 - A plane of circular shape

Basic Tools

Once the second point is picked, the orientation measurement result will be shown in the 3D View . At the same time, the information box will display the measurement results in text. Each time you start a new measurement this information box will update automatically the information inside.

Tip: Press Esc.

(or select an another type) to undo the measurement.

Note:

Because a measurement is based on point pickings, you cannot perform an orientation measurement on an object of geometry type.

You can reverse the orientation of a measurement. To do this, right-click anywhere in the 3D View to display the pop-up menu and select Reverse

Orientation Measurement .

Tip: You can switch the orientation measurement’s notation from

North / Elevation to Elevation / North and vice versa in the Preferences dialog.

Note: The Orientation Measurement feature is not present in the toolbar when using the Measurement Tool as a sub-tool in the Cloud-Based Registration

Tool .

Caution: The Orientation Measurement method is not available in a 2D View or in 3D locked in 2D.


Measure an Orientation Using Three Points

This method also lets you to know the orientation of a sloping surface. As with the previous method, the same angles will be calculated: Elevation and North .

In this method, there is no extraction of plane but you have to define one by picking three points which should not be collinear. The measurement is set at the center of the so-defined plane.

To Measure an Orientation Using Three Points:

1. Click on the Orientation Measurement Using Three Points icon.

2. Pick three none-collinear points.

If the three picked points are collinear, an error dialog opens.

After picking the two first points, a temporary plane (of triangular shape) is displayed. As long as you move the cursor over a point of the displayed object, the temporary plane shape changes.

Once the third point is picked, the orientation measurement result will be shown in the 3D View . At the same time, the information box will display the measurement results in text. Each time you start a new measurement this information box will update automatically the information inside.

Basic Tools

Tip: Press Esc.

(or select an another method) to undo the measurement.

Note:

You can perform an orientation measurement on an object of geometry type.

You can reverse the orientation of a measurement. To do this, right-click anywhere in the 3D View to display the pop-up menu and select Reverse

Orientation Measurement .

Tip: You can switch the orientation measurement’s notation from

North / Elevation to Elevation / North and vice versa in the Preferences dialog.

Note: The Orientation Measurement Using Three Points feature is present in the toolbar when using the Measurement Tool as a sub-tool in the Cloud-


Caution: The Orientation Measurement Using Three Points method is not available in a 2D View or in 3D locked in 2D.


Refine a Measurement

You can refine the measurement you have just performed by modifying the picked points except for the point-to-scanning position measurement. For the orientation measurement, you can enlarge/reduce the sphere diameter (or move its center). For the point-to-point distance measurement, you can move each end in order to extend (or shorten) its length. For the angular measurement, you can move each of the ends to change its angle, etc.

To Refine a Measurement:

1. Place the mouse cursor upon an already picked point.

2. Drag and drop it to a new location on the displayed object.

Tip: Before starting a measurement, press Esc (or click Close Tool in the toolbar) to close the Measurement Tool . When a measurement is in progress, press Esc to cancel it and start a new one.

Save a Measurement

You can save the measurement you have just performed as a persistent object in the RealWorks database. For each saved measurement, a geometric object is created and put under the active group in the Models Tree . You can save as many measurements as you need without leaving this tool. You can also export a measurement result as a report in Excel format (*.CSV files).

To Save a Measurement:

1. Click . The measurement is saved in the database.

2. Start a new measurement (if required).

3. Click .

Tip:

Press (or select Close Tool from the pop-up menu) to leave the tool.

Press (or select Create from the pop-up menu) to save the result.

Note: You should close first the Measurement Tool before exporting a result in

Excel file format. Otherwise, the Exportation Measurements command is deactivated.

Basic Tools

Caution: In Registration , you are not able to save a measurement. The Create icon is always grayed-out.


Segmentation Tool

This tool allows you to segment a point cloud object into several point subclouds. By using this tool, you can structure a complex scene into its logical component parts, and work subsequently on each part. It is important to note that an object containing both the point cloud and geometry representations cannot be segmented. In order to do this, you have to use the Sampling Tool to create a new point cloud without geometry and then perform the segmentation on the newly created point cloud. In order to enable this tool, you should select one or several point cloud objects.

Note: The Segmentation Tool , as a standalone version, is only available in

OfficeSurvey and Modeling . When using it as a sub-tool, it is available anywhere.

Basic Tools

Open the Tool

To Open the Tool:

1. Select a point cloud (or more*) from the Project Tree . the menu, select Segmentation Tool . The Segmentation Tool toolbar appears.

1 - Polygonal Selection (Freehand With Ctrl

Key)

2 - Rectangular Selection

3 - Circular Selection

4 - In (I)

5 - Out (O)

6 - Create (P)

7 - Display Unpartitioned Points

8 - Close Tool

An information box appears at the top right corner of the 3D View and displays the sum total of points included in the selected object. The mouse cursor shape changes; the arrow becomes a pointer. You can still navigate ( Zoom ,

Pan and Rotation ) through the 3D scene, select or hide objects (or groups) or change the active group before you start drawing a fence. Once you start drawing, these commands become unavailable except Pan . Note that all displayed objects are hidden except those selected. After opening the tool, the default selection tool is the last used one.

Caution: (*) You can select several point clouds as input of the tool but one of them should not be the Project Cloud .

Note: You can select the Project Cloud alone as input of the tool.


Draw a Fence

A fence may have three shapes ( Polygonal , Rectangular and Circular ) and is composed of segments/circular arcs and vertices. A fence is used as segmentation boundaries and drawing one is done by picking the 3D View .

Once the first vertex of a fence is picked, you can no longer move the scene.

Tip: You can use the Esc key to cancel the fence that you are drawing.

Note:

If you select Close Tool (or New Fence from the pop-up menu) while you have not finished drawing, your fence will be cancelled.

To start a new fence, you need to cancel the current one by selecting New

Fence from the pop-up menu.

Even if the pop-up menu is displayed, the fence still snaps to the mouse cursor. You have to terminate the fence to free it. When selecting In (or

Out ), RealWorks will close automatically your fence and points inside (or outside) this fence will be kept.

Draw a Fence (Polygon Only)

To Draw a Fence (Polygon Only): the icon.

2. Click anywhere to draw the first vertex of a Polygonal Fence .

3. Click anywhere to draw the second vertex. The two vertices are linked by a segment.

4. Continue to define other vertices. The Polygonal Fence is always closed in such a way that the start vertex is always linked to the last one.

5. Right-click in the 3D View to display the pop-up menu.

6. Select to terminate the Polygonal Fence .

Note: To end a fence, you can double-click (or press on the Space Bar ).

Tip: You can select Polygonal Selection from the pop-up menu.

Basic Tools

Draw a Fence (Lasso Only)

To Draw a Fence (Lasso Only): the icon.

2. Press and hold the Ctrl key.

3. Pick anywhere to start the first vertex of a Polygonal Fence and drag the cursor.

4. When you finish, release the Ctrl key and the mouse button. The

Polygonal Fence is always closed.


6. Select to terminate the Polygonal Fence .



Draw a Fence (Polygon and Lasso)

To Draw a Fence (Polygon and Lasso): the icon.

2. Pick anywhere to start the first vertex of a Polygonal Fence .

3. Pick anywhere to set the second vertex. The two vertices are linked by a straight line.

4. Press and hold the Ctrl key and then drag the cursor.

5. When you finish, release the Ctrl key and the mouse button.

6. Continue to define other vertices. The Polygonal Fence is always closed in such a way that the start vertex is always linked to the last one.


End Fence to terminate the Polygonal Fence .




Draw a Rectangular Fence

To Draw a Rectangular Fence: the icon.

2. Click anywhere to draw the first corner of a Rectangular Fence .

3. Click anywhere to draw the second and opposite corner. The Rectangular

Fence is drawn.

Tip: You can select Rectangular Selection from the pop-up menu.

Draw a Circular Fence

To Draw a Circular Fence: the icon.

2. Pick a point to start the first point of a Circular Fence 's diameter.

3. Pick another point to set the second point of the diameter.

Tip: You can select Circular Selection from the pop-up menu.

Basic Tools

Keep In (or Out)

Once you have finished defining a fence, you can now segment the selected point cloud(s) by keeping either the points inside (or outside) of the fence. Note that any segmented cloud is not permanently created in the database. You should use the Create command to perform this operation. This also means that you can turn around the so-segmented cloud, and continue to perform fencing and segmentation.

To Keep In (or Out): the icon. Points inside the fence are kept. Points outside the fence are unkept. This doesn't mean that they are not deleted from the initial cloud but just hidden in the 3D View . The number of points inside the fence is shown in the information box. You can also use the short-cut key I to do this. If the fence does not contain any points, selecting In will not take any points into account.

2. Or click the Out icon. Points outside the fence are kept while those that are inside are unkept. The number of remaining points is shown in the information box. You can also use the short-cut key O to do this. If the fence does not contain any points, selecting Out will not take any points into account.

3. Click if you want to work with the same cloud.


A - Polygonal fence B - Points inside the polygonal fence are kept

C - Points outside the polygonal fence are kept

Tip: You can also select In (or Out ) from the pop-up menu.

Note: After keeping points in (or out) the fence, you can rotate the scene to do the selection from another point of view. Such combination allows you to do a

3D point selection (like to segment the cloud with a 3D polyhedron which is the intersection of the extrusion of these 2D fenced polygons).

Basic Tools

Create the Segmentation Results

Create enables to create a new cloud and puts it in the current group behind other objects. Create In creates a new cloud and put it under the model group you have to choose from the drop-down pop-up submenu. The Create In feature can only be selected from the pop-up menu. It only appears if there is at least a group in the Models Tree .

To Create the Segmentation Result:

1. Right-click anywhere in the 3D View to display the pop-up menu.

2. Select one of the two available creation modes ( Create or Create In ).

3. Select .

A cloud named OBJECTX is created in the Models Tree .

Tip: Instead of selecting Create from the pop-up menu, you can also press the P key on your keyboard.

Note:

Selecting (or Create In ) without closing the fence will close it automatically and a new cloud object will be created from all points inside

(or outside) this fence.

The feature is always enabled after entering the tool even if there is no drawn fence. This way, you can create a new cloud. It is based on all points of the selected cloud.

Caution: You cannot save your result(s) when using the Segmentation Tool as a sub-tool. The Create button is dimmed.

Note: A dialog appears and asks if you really want to close the tool without saving the result in the database (after a fencing only).


Sampling Tool

The Sampling Tool enables to create a sub-point cloud from a selected point cloud. There are at all six methods: Spatial Sampling , Random Sampling ,

Scan-Based Sampling , Intensity-Based Sampling , Discontinuity-Based

Sampling and Topography-Based Sampling . The initial point cloud remains unchanged after sampling. You can combine these six different methods to sample the selected point cloud, that is; you can use the result from one method as the input to another method and continue until you are satisfied with the result. Or you can create several sub-point clouds within an opened session.

Open the Tool

To Open the Tool:

1. Select an object (like a point cloud) from the Project Tree . the menu, select Sampling Tool . The Sampling dialog opens.

The sampling method which appears first is the one that you have selected during the last opened session.

Spatial Sampling , Intensity-Based Sampling , Discontinuity-

Based Sampling and T opography-based Sampling methods work on what is loaded only in the RAM.

The and Random Sampling methods work on disk', i.e., on the full data, independently of what is loaded in the

RAM.

Tip: To leave the Sampling Tool , you can select Close from the pop-up menu.

Caution: You are prevented from changing the number of loaded points inside the Sampling Tool . The Point Loading Manager is grayed out.

Choose a Sampling Method

Inside each sampling method, you can use the Segmentation Tool to select a data subset for performing a sampling. When used in such condition, you cannot save the result. The Create command is deactivated.

Basic Tools

Spatial Sampling

Point clouds obtained by scanning from different positions and at different distances are often not uniform in terms of point density. This method enables to obtain a point cloud with a homogeneous density (that the user has to define).

To Sample Spatially:

1. In dialog, click the pull down arrow.

2. Choose from the drop-down list. The Spatial Sampling dialog appears.

1 - Density of points expressed in terms of a distance between points

2 - Non editable fields

This dialog displays two numbers: Initial and Remaining . The Initial number is the total number of points before sampling. The Remaining number corresponds to the number of points after sampling. The unit of measurement is set by default in millimeters; but you can change it when necessary in

Preferences .

3. Enter a value in the Distance Between Points field.

Preview to view the result before saving it.

5. Click and Close .

A sub-point cloud whose name is " Sample - "Distance Between Points" Value " is created under the current project in the Models Tree .

Note: A negative value input the Distance Between Points field is automatically converted to positive.


Random Sampling

This method consists in sampling a point cloud by using a percentage ratio defined by the user, which will determine the amount of points that will be kept in the initial point cloud. These points will be randomly selected from the original point cloud.

To Sample Randomly:

1. In dialog box, click the pull down arrow.

2. Select . The Random Sampling dialog appears.

1 - Slider

2 - Pre-defined (or user-defined) values

3 - Non editable field

4 - Editable field

In this method, there is no Preview . There are four ways to define the percentage ratio. The first is to use a slider. The second is to select a predetermined value among those pre-defined ( 25 , 50 , 75 and 100% ). The third is to enter a rate value manually and the fourth is to enter the number of points in the Remaining field. Each time you define a new ratio, the sampling will be performed dynamically, and the results (the number of points and the final cloud - respectively in the dialog and in the 3D View) are displayed in real time.

3. Define a percentage ratio.

Create to save the result.

5. Click .

A sub-point cloud whose name is " Sample - "Rate in Percent" Value " is created under the current project in the Models Tree .

Note: When entering a value in the Rate or Remaining field, do not forget to press Enter .

Basic Tools

Scan-Based Sampling

On certain occasions, you need to create a sub-point cloud including all points belonging to certain stations or scans. You can use this method to achieve this.

After selecting the method, the selected point cloud will be automatically rendered according to the Scan Color .

To Sample Based on Scan(s):


2. Select . The Scan-Based Sampling dialog appears.

A sub-window including the Scans Tree appears in the dialog. By default, all elements (stations and scans) in this tree are On . You can turn Off a station, a scan or a set of scans from this tree. The total number of points will be changed accordingly and the point cloud displayed in the 3D View will be updated.

If required, use the Expand All (or Collapse All ) icon to expand (or shrink) the Scans Tree in the dialog.

If required, use to select all items from the dialog, to clear the selection and to revert the selection.

" On " items are shown in the 3D View and will be considered in the final result


" Off " items (white points) are hidden in the 3D View and won't be taken into account in the final result

Off some of the stations (or scans).

4. Click to save the result.

5. Click to leave the tool.

A sub-point cloud whose name is " By Scan (X) " is created under the current project in the Models Tree . X is its order.

Tip:

You can select several stations (or scans or a mix of them) (from the

Scan-Based Sampling dialog) by using the Ctrl (or Shift ) key combined with the left clicking.

To select all items (scans and/or stations) at once (from the Scan-Based

Sampling dialog), select first an item and use then the Ctrl + A key combination.

In this sub-tool, only stations and scans from the selected cloud are displayed in the dialog, instead of all of the stations and scans of the project.

Basic Tools

Intensity-Based Sampling

This method can be used for sampling the selected point cloud according to the intensity associated with each point. In RealWorks , the intensity value ranges from 0 to 255 . After selecting the Intensity Based Sampling method, the selected point cloud will be rendered in Gray Scale Intensity .

To Sample Based on Intensity(ies):


2. Select . The Intensity-Based Sampling dialog appears.

1 - Select Point Intensity

2 - Filtering range

3 - Vertical bars

4 - Unkept points (in red)

5 - Kept points (in grey)

6 - Show/Hide points that are out of the defined range

A histogram window appears in the dialog. You can then use the two vertical bars, which are shown as arrows at the bottom of the histogram in the figure above, to define an intensity range so that all points with intensity within this range will be kept. All points outside of this intensity range (called Unwanted

Points ) will be un-kept and shown in red in the histogram and in the 3D View

(only if the Display Unwanted Points option is checked). To manipulate the two vertical bars, you can either directly use the cursor to move them, or use the picking mechanism (button on top of the histogram) to select an intensity level from the displayed points.



Sample according to point intensity. a) Click . b) Pick one point in the 3D View .

Sample according to a range of intensity. a) Place the mouse cursor over a vertical bar. b) Drag and drop the vertical bar when the intensity value you need is reached. c) Do the same operations for the other vertical bar.

Create and Close .

A sub-point cloud whose name is " By Intensity (X) " is created under the current project in the Models Tree . X is its order.

Note:

If the selected cloud contains points with no intensity information, these points will not be taken into account.

If you switch from Gray Scaled Intensity to Color Code Intensity ; the selected Point Cloud is then rendered with a range of colors - from red to blue with intermediate colors like orange, yellow and green. Points with intensity of 0 are rendered in red; those with intensity of 128 are in yellow and those with 255 are in blue.

Basic Tools

Discontinuity-Based Sampling

You may encounter discontinuities in a point cloud in three cases. First is when some points of the cloud have opposite or different normal direction than the rest. We call this discontinuity Edge . Second is when all the cloud points have the same normal direction but some of them are separated by irregular distance. We call this discontinuity Gap . The third case can be everything except Edges and Gaps .

When loading a file of ASCII format, Edges and Gaps are un-generated. You can use the Edge Detection Tool to generate them. After selecting the

Discontinuity-Based Sampling method, the selected point cloud will be automatically rendered in Discontinuity Display .

To Sample Based on Discontinuities: the dialog box, click the pull down arrow.

2. Select . The Discontinuity-Based Sampling dialog appears.

1 - Display/Hide discontinuity options 2 - Launch the Edge Detection Tool

When selecting this method, the three discontinuity options are all checked.

The Keep Edge option (when unchecked) enables the removal of Edge discontinuities from the point cloud. The Keep Gap option (when unchecked) enables the removal of Gap discontinuities from the point cloud. The Keep

Others option (when unchecked) enables removal of all discontinuities except

Edges and Gaps .

3. If required, detect edges.

4. Click and Close . A sub-point cloud will be created in the database.

A sub-point cloud whose name is " By Discontinuity (X) " is created under the current project in the Models Tree . X is its order.


Detect Edges

The Edge Detection is based on a grid method. You should first define a projection surface (mainly a plane) and then set its grid resolution. The grid resolution is square - the same in both of the projection plane directions (length and width).

To Detect Edges:

1. Click . The Edge Detection dialog opens.

1 - Set From Frame

2 - Fit

3 - Pick Axis From Object

4 - Plane Perpendicular to Screen

6 - Edit Parameters

7 - Plane Parallel to Screen View

8 - Projection Plane Resolution

9 - Discontinuity display options

5 - Pick 3 Points on Plane

2. Do one of the following to define a projection plane:

Select a frame’s axis (1).

Fit an extracted set of points with a plane (1).

Find a perpendicular view plane from an extracted set of points (1).

Pick an object’s axis (1)(2).

Pick a plane perpendicular to the screen (1)(2).

Pick three points (1)(2).

Edit the project plane’s parameters. a) Click . The 3D Plane Editing dialog opens. b) Click on the pull down arrow. c) Choose and Point + Point .

Basic Tools d) If has been chosen, enter a direction in the

Normal field and give a position in the Point field. e) If has been chosen, enter a position in each of the

Point fields. f) Click . The 3D Plane Editing dialog closes.

Set the plane parallel to the screen view.


4. Click .

5. Click .

Applying the results after previewing them creates them in the database and closes the Edge Detection dialog. Note that clicking Apply without previewing the results cancels the generated discontinuities and clicking Cancel opens an information box which prompts you to cancel or confirm the action you attempt to do.

Note:

For more information related to (1), see Step 2 of the Cutting Plane Tool .

When selecting (2), the Picking Parameters toolbar appears, it's up to you to do a free picking or a constrained picking.


Topography-Based Sampling

The idea behind this method is to separate valid points from invalid points inside a given point cloud. Because invalid points are more or less important according to where they are on the point cloud, you need to be able to work separately on them. This kind of situation occurs when the point cloud is a scene presentation with threes, bushes and the like. In such a case, invalid points are trees, bushes, etc. and valid points are the ground.

To Sample Based on Topography(ies):


2. Select . The Topography-Based Sampling dialog appears.

1 - Show/hide invalid points

2 - Set valid points as reference cloud

3 - Resolution of the square-grid method

4 - Point distance selection

5 - Delete invalid points from the reference cloud

First, you should define a point cloud as reference. This means that this point cloud remains unchanged whatever the operations you apply to it except when deleting points or when replacing it by a new one. You can reload it as often as required. If the point cloud you select comes from another sampling method or results from a segmentation, the Only Wanted button is active. This means that you can set this point cloud as a reference.

The Topography-Based Sampling method is based on a grid method and the resolution is square by default - the same in both of the projection surface (XY plane of the active coordinate frame) directions. Points of the selected cloud outside the square-grid tolerance will be not taken into account. And those nearby of faraway from the square-grid boundary can be gradually ignored using a slider.

3. Fence an area on the reference cloud using the Segmentation Tool .

Basic Tools

4. Enter a value in the Horizontal Radius field and press Enter .

5. Slide the cursor to a position between + and -.

The result from the square-grid projection and the distance selection is a set of invalid points (called Unwanted Points ). These points will be un-kept and shown in red in the 3D View - only if the Display Unwanted Points (Red) option is checked.

Erase Unwanted . Invalid points will be deleted from the reference cloud.

7. Click . The reference cloud is reloaded with invalid points less.

8. Repeat the steps from 3 to 7 on another area of the reference cloud.

9. Click to save the result and click Close .

A sub-point cloud whose name is " By Topography " is created under the current project in the Models Tree . X is its order.


Frame Creation Tool

RealWorks enables to create any number of frames. Each of them may be selected and set as Active Frame . When a frame is designated as the Active

Frame , all coordinates will be represented relative to this frame. This allows the user to perform its modeling or to take measurements in any arbitrary default frame and to represent them in a frame that better describes the data. The

Frame Creation Tool provides you with several methods to create such frames and almost all of them are mainly based on pickings; which can be constrained or free.

Basic Tools

Open the Tool

To Open the Tool:

1. If needed, select an object (point cloud or geometry) from the Project Tree . the menu, select Frame Creation Tool . The Frame Creation dialog opens as well as the Picking Parameters toolbar.

Inside the Frame Creation Tool , we distinguish two groups of methods to build a frame: " Without Constraints " and " With Constraints ". Below is a detailed description of the Frame Creation Tool .

1 - Field for selecting a reference frame for parameters

2 - Set Axial Geometry Axis as X/Y/Z Axis*

3 - Pick X/Y/Z Axis*

4 - Pick Local Frame of Object

5 - Pick Origin

6 - Fit X/Y/Z Axis*

7 - Reset the defined parameters


A temporary frame in yellow appears in the middle of the scene. If the default origin is too far from the displayed scene; RealWorks will prompt you to set it so that it matches the scene’s center.

Tip: You can open the Frame Creation Tool by clicking its related icon in the

Active Frame toolbar.


Select a Reference Frame

If the project you load contains more than one frame, you can choose one as the Reference Frame in which you can specify the coordinates of a new frame to come. Otherwise, the Reference Frame for Parameters field is dimmed and the reference frame will be the default frame ( Home ).

To Select a Reference Frame:

1. Click the pull down arrow in Step 1 .

2. Select a frame from the drop-down list.

Build a Frame without Constraints

To build a frame, you can define each of its items by specifying the coordinates, by picking points (seven are required if you wish to construct the whole frame using this method, two per axis and one for the origin), by fitting an axis with a plane, by picking points (origin and two directions) or by picking an object's local frame. For a given frame, you can mix these sub-methods

(except for picking three points). Note that the coordinates for the three axes will be automatically normalized.

Basic Tools

Specify Coordinates

In the By-Specifying-Coordinates method, neither selection nor display is required. The default units of measurement for the Origin are set to millimeters and you do not have to enter “mm” after each value. Note that the coordinates for the three axes will be automatically normalized.

To Specify Coordinates:

1. Enter a 3D point position in the Origin field.

2. Enter a direction in the X-Axis field*.

3. Enter a direction in the Y-Axis field*.

4. Enter a direction in the Z-Axis field*.

Reset (if required).

Caution: If you create a frame which is not orthogonal, a warning message appears.

Note: In the X , Y , Z Coordinate System .

Pick Points

The By-Picking-Points method is based not on selection but on display. Display can be done before (or after) opening the Frame Creation Tool and should be either of point cloud type or of mesh type. Pick Origin requires one point to be picked whereas Pick Axis requires two points to be picked.

To Pick Points: the icon.

2. Pick one point (free or constrained). the ( , or ) icon.

4. Pick two points (free or constrained). The two points give a direction for the axis.

5. Repeat the steps from 3 to 4 for the two other axes.

Reset to cancel the parameters (if required).


Fit an Axis

The By-Fitting-an-Axis method is based not on selection but on display.

Display can be done before (or after) opening the Frame Creation Tool and should be of point cloud type; otherwise the three Fit Axis icons are dimmed.

To Fit an Axis: the icon. The Fitting Tool toolbar appears.

2. Fence an area on the displayed point cloud.

3. Choose to keep points inside the fence. choose to keep points outside the fence.

5. Click . A plane is extracted from kept points and its normal gives the direction of the axis.

1 - The Fitting Tool toolbar

2 - The drawn fence

3 - A plane extracted from points inside the drawn fence

6. Click to cancel the parameters (if required).

Note: The dimmed Create Fitted Geometry icon in the Fitting Tool toolbar means that you cannot save the result in the database.

Tip:

Instead of selecting Close Fence from the pop-up menu, you can also double-click or press on the Space Bar of your keyboard to close the fence.

Basic Tools

Instead of clicking on an icon in the Fitting Tool toolbar, you can also select its related command from the pop-up menu or use its related shortcut key: I for In , O for Out .


Pick Three Points

To construct a frame by picking three points, you have the following options:

Pick 3 Points (Origin, X direction*, Y direction*) , Pick 3 Points (Origin, Y direction*, Z direction*) and Pick 3 Points (Origin, Z direction*, X direction*)

. Once three points are picked, a right-angled frame will be created.

To Pick Three Points:

1. Click pull down arrow.

2. Choose a picking mode from the drop-down list.

3. Pick three points on the displayed object.

1 - The first picked point 2 - The second picked point

The first picked point will be the origin of the frame you wish to create.

The second picked point will form with the first one a first vector.

The third picked point will form with the first one the second vector.

Reset to cancel the parameters of the new frame (if required).

Note:

You can select Cancel Picking from the pop-up menu or press Esc to cancel the frame in progress. the Y , Z Coordinate System .

Basic Tools

Pick an Object's Local Frame

You can construct a new frame such that it becomes the local frame of the selected object.

To Pick an Object's Local Frame: the icon. the window, click on the Models tab.

3. Right-click on the selected object.


5. Pick a point (free or constrained).

1 - The top picture shows a picked object 2 - Its associated local frame now becomes the constructed frame and is shown in yellow

6. Click to cancel the parameters (if required).

Note: Picking another object will cancel the frame you have just constructed.


Set an Axial Entity Axis as Axis

To Set an Axial Entity Axis as Axis:

1. Click e.g. the Set Axial Geometry Axis as X-Axis icon.

2. In , pick an entity with an axial direction.

The values in the X-Axis field are updated with the values of the picked entity's axis direction.

Build a Frame with Constraints

You can build a frame under constraint either by locking one of its components

- for e.g. its origin or axis - or by rotating around an axis. No more than two components can be locked at once; it’s always a pair formed by the origin and an axis. You cannot lock two axes together.

Lock the Origin

To Lock the Origin:

1. Define an origin and click Lock Origin .

Basic Tools

1 - The Lock Origin is activated

2 - The Pick Origin is unavailable

3 - The Origin field is grayed out

4 - The Pick Local Frame of Object is unavailable

2. Use the three-point pick mode.

3. Or use the Select Axial Entity Axis as Axis mode.

4. Or use the Pick Axis mode.

5. Or use the Fit Axis mode.

Reset to cancel the parameters (if required).

Use the Three Point Pick Mode

To Use the Pick Three Points Mode

1. Click pull down arrow.

2. Choose a picking mode from the drop-down list.

3. Pick two points on the displayed object.

If no origin has been defined, the default origin will be the origin of the active frame. The first picked point will form a first vector with the default origin and the second picked point will form the second vector with the default origin.

Once two points are picked, a right-angled frame will be created.


Use the Pick Axis Mode

To Use the Pick Axis Mode:

1. Click e.g. on the Pick X-Axis* button.

2. Pick two points on the displayed object.



Use the Fit Axis Mode

To Use the Fit Axis Mode:

1. Click e.g. on the Fit X-Axis * button.

2. Define an axis by fitting a set of points.



Lock an Axis

To Lock an Axis:

1. Define e.g. the X-axis* and click Lock X-Axis* .

Basic Tools

1 - The Lock X-Axis* is selected

2 - The Take Axial Geometry Axis as X-Axis*,

Pick X-Axis* and Fit X-Axis* are dimmed

3 - The X-Axis* field is dimmed

4 - The Lock Y-Axis* and Lock Z-Axis* are deactivated


6 - The Change 3 Points Pick mode is unavailable

2. Define an origin.

3. Define two other axes.

Reset if required.

Note:

If you open the Turn Around dialog, you may see the unlocked axes dimmed ( Y * and Z * in this example) and the locked axis (X)* checked by default.

(*) In the X , Y , Z Coordinate System .


Lock the Origin and an Axis

To Lock the Origin and an Axis:

1. Define an origin and click Lock Origin .

2. Define e.g. the X-axis* and click Lock X-Axis *.

1 - The Lock Origin is selected

2 - The Lock X-Axis* is selected

3 - The Pick Origin and the Origin field are unavailable

4 - The Take Axial Geometry Axis as X-Axis*,

Pick X-Axis* and Fit X-Axis* are dimmed

5 - The X-Axis* field is unavailable

6 - The Lock Y-Axis* and Lock Z-Axis* are deactivated


8 - The Change 3 Points Pick Mode is unavailable

3. Define two other axes.

Reset (if required).

Note:

If you open the Turn Around dialog, you may see the unlocked axes dimmed ( Y * and Z * in the example) and the locked axis (X)* checked by default.


Rotate Around an Axis

To Rotate Around an Axis:

Turn Around Axis . The Turn Around dialog opens.

Basic Tools

1 - Lock Axis 2 - Turn Around Axis

2. Select an axis around which you want to rotate around by checking it.

3. Specify an angle. The default unit of measurement is set to degrees; you do not need to enter “°”. You can change the default unit of measurement in Preferences .

4. Click . You may see the yellow frame in the 3D View turns around the selected axis of the specified angle. again . The yellow frame turns again around the selected axis and of the specified angle.

6. Click . The Turn Around dialog closes.

Note: You can combine the Lock Axis feature with the Turn Around Axis feature. In that case, the locked axis is only the available axis in the Turn

Around dialog; the other axes are dimmed.


Create the Built Frame

Once you have built a frame, you can create it in the database. You can use the Set As Active Frame option to set it as an active frame. If you leave the

Frame Creation Tool without creating the newly built frame, a dialog opens and prompts you to create (or not) the frame.

To Create the Built Frame:

1. Check option (if required).

2. Click . A new frame whose name is OBJECTX where X is its order is created in the Models Tree .

3. Click . The Frame Creation dialog closes.

Note: Press Esc (or select Close Tool from the pop-up menu) to leave the

Frame Creation Tool .

Tip: Instead of clicking Create , you can also select Create Frame from the pop-up menu.

Basic Tools

Clipping Box Extraction Tool

The Clipping Box Extraction Tool , when used a main tool, combines two features. With the first feature, you can create small sections for evaluating the registration results, drawing polylines or just getting a clearer view of a specific area. With the second feature, you can extract full density of points from the selection area. You can be in any processing mode ( OfficeSurvey , Registration or Modeling ) to use the Clipping Box Extraction Tool .

The Clipping Box Extraction Tool can also be used a sub-tool within some main tools. The extraction (of points) feature is not available. The tool takes then the name of Box Clipping Tool . The following list identifies all the tools inside which the Clipping Box Extraction Tool can be used as a sub-tool.

OfficeSurvey tools: Polyline Drawing Tool , Catenary Drawing Tool and

Fitting Tool .

Registration tools: Target-Based Registration Tool , Target Analyzer Tool and Georeferencing Tool . tools: , Sampling Tool and F rame Creation

Tool .


Open the Tool

To Open the Tool: the menu, select Clipping Box Extraction Tool . The cursor becomes as follows .

The Clipping Box Extraction Tool toolbar opens when opening the tool as a main tool.

1 - Modify Shape

2 - Hide/Show Outbound Clouds and

Geometries

3 - Center Box Position on Picked Point

The Box Clipping Tool toolbar opens when opening the tool as a sub-tool.

2. Pick a Clipping Box position.

Note: No selection is required to activate the tool. It is based on what is displayed in the 3D View .

Note: If an object has been selected as input of the tool and has been displayed in the 3D View . The Bounding Box that highlights the object disappears (after entering into the tool). This avoids to have the Bounding Box interfered with the Clipping Box .

Basic Tools

Pick a Clipping Box Position

To Pick a Clipping Box Position:

1. Pick a point on displayed clouds and/or geometries*.

A is displayed centered on the picked point which is set to the center of the screen.

The and Rotate icons become enabled

The icon becomes enabled and selected.

1 - Pan

2 - Rotate

3 - Show Clipping Box


Clip a specific area and check displayed points on that area.

Clip a specific area, extract points from TZF Scans and check extracted points on that area.

Note: (*) To leave the picking mode, you can select Center on Point from the pop-up menu.

Caution: The extraction of points feature is not available when you use the

Clipping Box Extraction Tool as a sub-tool.


About the Clipping Box

A Clipping Box is a three-dimensional figure with six square faces. It is used to isolate a region of clouds and/or geometries.

Change the Clipping Box Position

To Change the Clipping Box Position: the . The cursor changes to show the following .

2. Pick a point on displayed clouds and/or geometries.

The is then centered on the picked point.

Note: To leave the picking mode, you can select Center on Point from the popup menu.

Basic Tools

Hide the Clipping Box

To Hide the Clipping Box: the icon.

The , with the current manipulator, is removed from the

3D View .

Show the Clipping Box icon becomes unselected.

Display the Clipping Box

To Display the Clipping Box: the icon.

The , with a manipulator ( Size , Pan or Rotate ), is displayed in the 3D View .

Show the Clipping Box icon is highlighted in yellow.


Modify the Clipping Box Shape

To Modify the Clipping Box Shape: the icon. The Size manipulator with six Handles appears, one on each of the Clipping Box face.

2. Pick to select it. It turns to yellow.

3. Drag and drop he Handle to increase (or reduce) the Clipping Box ' size

( Width , Height or Depth ).

Basic Tools

Tip: You can also select Modify Shape from the right click contextual menu.

Note: You can undo (or redo) a scaling of the Clipping Box (by selecting Undo

(or Redo ) from the Edit menu).


Pan the Clipping Box

To Pan the Clipping Box: the icon. The Pan manipulator, which is composed of three

Axis Handles and three Plane Handles , appears. It has as its origin the center of the Clipping Box .


Pan the Clipping Box in a plane.

Pan Clipping Box along a direction.

Tip: You can also select Pan from the right-click contextual menu or use its associated shortcut key ( T ).

Note: It is advantageous to display the Unbound Cloud and/or all of the Station

Positions of the project. By doing this, you can be know exactly where you are within the rest of the cloud and/or within all of the stations.

Tip:

You can use the following keys ( , , , , Page Up , Page Down ) on your numeric keypad to move the Clipping Box .

You can combine the use of the above keys with the Ctrl key to speed up the movement of the Clipping Box .

Note: You can undo (or redo) a translation of the Clipping Box (by selecting

Undo (or Redo ) from the Edit menu).

Basic Tools

Along a Direction

To Pan the Clipping Box Along a Direction:

1. Pick to select it. It turns yellow. A direction in yellow aligned with the Axis Handle appears.

2. Drag along the direction to move the Clipping Box in that direction.

The cloud inside the Clipping Box is automatically updated.

3. Drop .


In a Plane

To Pan the Clipping Box in a Plane:

1. Pick to select it. A larger yellow Plane Handle is displayed. the in any direction on the plane to move the Clipping

Box in that direction.

The cloud inside the Clipping Box is automatically updated. the .

Basic Tools

Rotate the Clipping Box

To Rotate the Clipping Box: the icon. The Rotate manipulator, which is composed of three Ring Handles (red, light blue and green), is displayed. This manipulator has the Clipping Box center as its origin.

2. Pick Ring Handle to select it. It turns to yellow. An axis, passing through the center of the ring and perpendicular to it, appears. This axis has the color of the selected ring.

3. Drag to rotate the Clipping Box around the axis.

The cloud inside the Clipping Box is automatically updated.


4. Drop .

Tip: You can also select Rotate from the pop-up menu or use its related shortcut key ( R ).

Note: You can undo (or redo) a rotation of the Clipping Box (by selecting Undo

(or Redo ) from the Edit menu).

Basic Tools

Unbound Clouds and Geometries

Unbound Clouds and Geometries are all clouds and geometries outside the

Clipping Box .

Display the Unbound Clouds and/or Geometries

To Display the Unbound Clouds and/or Geometries: the icon.

Clouds and/or geometries outside the Clipping Box are displayed in the 3D View .

Hide/Show Outbound Clouds and Geometries icon is highlighted in yellow.


Hide the Unbound Clouds and/or Geometries

To Hide the Unbound Clouds and/or Geometries: the icon.

Clouds and/or geometries outside the Clipping Box are hidden in the

3D View .

Hide/Show Outbound Clouds and Geometries icon becomes unselected.

Check the Current Loaded Points

The primary aim of this tool is to let the user to isolate a specific area of the points that are displayed in the 3D View .

To Check the Current Loaded Points:

1. If required, set the Clipping Box to a position where you want to check loaded points*:

2. If required, pan the Clipping Box.

3. If required, rotate the Clipping Box.

4. If required, hide the Clipping Box.

5. Check the quality of the registration based displayed points.

6. Close the tool.

Note: (*) It is advantageous to display the Unbound Cloud and/or all of the

Station Positions of the project. This allows you to easily know exactly where you are within the rest of the cloud and/or within all of the stations.

Basic Tools

Extract Points from a Specific Area

The Clipping Box Extraction Tool also allows the user to extract and analyze points on a specific area at a user selectable density. The extraction is done by sampling TZF Scans . The Spatial Sampling filter has to be used if the user wishes to get a set of points with a uniform density. The Sampling by Step filter is required for getting a fast overview of all of the scans.

To Extract Points from a Specific Area:

1. If required, set the Clipping Box to a position where you want to extract more points*:

2. If required, pan the Clipping Box.

3. If required, rotate the Clipping Box.

4. Choose among Sampling by Step, Spatial Sampling and Adaptative

Sampling .

5. Create scans from TZF Scans.

6. Close the tool.

Note: (*) It is advantageous to display the Unbound Cloud and/or all of the

Station Positions of the project. This allows you to easily know exactly where you are within the rest of the cloud and/or within all of the stations.

Note: When you clip a large region on a pure TZF Scan (with points that are extracted), and apply either the Sampling By Step or the Spatial Sampling , a dialog opens and prompts to first save the project.

Apply a Sampling By Step

In the Sampling by Step method, one point will be taken into account at each defined Step vertically and horizontally in the 2D image data.

To Apply a Sampling by Step:

1. Click on the first pull-down arrow.


3. Enter a value in the Step field.

Note: A Step value is a value in pixels and it is always positive.


Apply a Spatial Sampling


To Apply a Spatial Sampling:



3. Enter a value in the Distance field.

Note: A Distance value must always be positive.

Apply an Adaptative Sampling

This method enables to adaptively sample a TZF Scan using the local context, in order to extract a scan with high point density in high contrast areas (e.g. edges) and low point density in flat, low varying areas (e.g. walls, floors). You have to define a resolution which allows you to control the density of points in flat regions, and all the points in high information areas are kept.

To Apply an Adaptative Sampling:


Adaptative Sampling from the drop-down list.


Note: A Distance value must always be positive.

Basic Tools

Create Scans from TZF Scans

To Create Scans from TZF Scans

Extract Points from TZF Scans in the toolbar. select from the pop-up menu.

The extraction is then launched. RealWorks goes through all of the

TZF Scans in the project, from the first to the last. You can see the extraction status of each in the status bar.

For inside the Clipping Box , points are extracted and the process for each can take some time.

At the end of the extraction: the , a cloud is created. the , a scan is created for each TZF Scan (that is inside the Clipping Box ).

In , points inside the Clipping Box are more dense.

Note: Be aware that the extraction can take time in case there are a lot of TZF

Scans inside the Clipping Box and/or if the (sampling) parameter is too small.

Caution: If there is no TZF Scan inside the Clipping Box , the extraction (of points) is also launched. No point will be extracted.

Note: The project is automatically saved at the end of the extraction.


Cancel the Extraction

You can cancel an extraction in progress by pressing Esc . By doing this, no cloud and no scans are created.

Close the Tool

To Close the Tool:

Do one of the following:

Click in the toolbar.

Select from the pop-up menu.

Or Esc.

Basic Tools

Shift a Project

You can manually apply a shift to a project. It is not necessary to select it for that. Any item in the Project Tree can be used. This tool can be used in any processing mode ( OfficeSurvey , Registration or Modeling ).

To Shift a Project:

1. Select an item from the Project Tree . the menu, select Shift Project . The Shift Project dialog opens.

3. Enter the coordinates of a vector in the Define Vector Shift field.

4. Click . The Shift Project dialog closes.

For a station, the scanner origin changes,

For an image, its camera position changes,

For a geometry, its center changes,

Etc.

Note: You can undo the operation.


Convert a Geometry to a Mesh

The Convert to Mesh feature allows conversion a geometric entity like a cube, sphere, cylinder, cone, extruded model or plane (with holes or not) to a triangulated mesh. The created mesh is refined using parameters. This allows the application of texture to models.

To Convert a Geometry to a Mesh:

1. Select a geometric object* from the Models Tree .

2. In menu, select Convert to Mesh . The Convert to Mesh dialog opens.

3. Enter a value in the Average Triangle Edge Length field.

The refinement consists of splitting the vertices for which the length is greater than the value set in the above field.

4. Click Create . The Convert to Mesh dialog closes.

A group whose name is " Mesh - "Average Triangle Edge Length" value " is created under the current project in the Models Tree . A converted mesh whose name is OBJECTX is created and put under that group. X is its order.

Tip: (*) You can also select a mesh as an input. In this case, a new refined mesh is created and the selected mesh remains unchanged. You can compare the properties of both. The number of vertices and the number of triangles are changed consequently.

Basic Tools

Create a Merged Mesh

You can merge several meshes into a new one. A mesh can be either a fitted mesh (with points inside) or a pure mesh (no points inside).

To Create a Merged Mesh:

1. Select at least two meshes from the Project Tree .

2. From menu, select Create a Merged Mesh .

A merged mesh whose name is OBJECTX is created under the current project in the Models Tree . X is its order. This mesh has no point cloud representation inside.


Generate Key Plans

What is a Key Plan ?. From Trimble Scan Explorer 's point of view, it is purely a

2D view (of the whole project or of a station (or set of stations)) with a set of triangles superimposed. Each triangle symbolizes a station's position. See [A].

From RealWorks 's point of view, a Key Plan is a Preview and a set of split

Ortho-images . All are put under a folder named Key Plan under the Images

Tree . See [C]. A Key Plan is mainly computed within RealWorks * and loaded in

Trimble Scan Explorer . The computation can done either from a unique (or a set of) TZF scan(s) or from a point cloud displayed in the 3D View . For both methods, the user interaction is restricted to selecting the input. No parameters are required as they are automatically set.

One of the parameters is the Projection Plane , which is a plane on which points are projected. It is characterized by a projection direction (Normal ) and a

Position . The way this Projection Plane is set by default depends on the chosen method and on what is displayed in the 3D View or not. The Projection

Plane is a Top View when generating a Key Plan from TZF scans, and the focal plane when generating from the displayed point cloud.

Another parameter is an Area Of Interest which is used for computing a Key

Plan . By default, the size of the 3D View is considered as the Area of Interest .

It is up to you to size the 3D view to a dimension to compute a Key Plan to that size (only for the Generate Key Plan From Current View feature).

For the Generate Key Plan from TZF Scans feature, the option to render the computed Key Plan is based on the Elevation information. The Elevation value is calculated for each point based on its distance to the Projection Plane .

Points that are far away from the Projection Plane are rendered Red . Those that are closer are rendered Blue .

[A]

Basic Tools

For the Generate Key Plan From Current View feature, the option to render the computed Key Plan is not based on the Elevation information but on the Cloud

Rendering options ( White Color , Cloud Color , Station Color , Scan Color , Gray

Scaled Intensity , Color Coded Intensity , Color Coded by Elevation and True

Color ). Points are rendered according to the chosen option.

[B]

The Preview is an Ortho-Image of low resolution which is about 0.1 megapixel.

The Ortho-Image , which is split into a set of small pieces of Ortho-Image , is of high resolution which cannot exceed 10 megapixels. Each split Ortho-Image is named as follows ImageX_Line Index_Colum Index . It has a size (W x H) in pixels which is about 500 x 500 pixels.


[C]

Note:

(*) You should save your RealWorks project to be able to load the newly computed Key Plan in Trimble Scan Explorer .

A file with the RWV extension is created per Ortho-Image . All RWV format files are put under the RWI folder.

Tip: All Key Plans are created in the root of the Images Tree and have the same name: Key Plan . Only its order indicated between brackets allows differentiating one Key Plan from another Key Plan . To make this distinction clearer and more obvious, we advise you to manually rename all Key Plans (in the Name line of the Property window).

Basic Tools

Generate a key Plan from TZF Scans

This method uses the Top view (of the project) as a Projection Plane regardless of what is displayed in the 3D View . Its Normal is parallel to the Z-

Axis of the project's current frame. Its Position is the Origin or barycenter of the

Projection Plan .

To Generate a Key Plan From TZF Scans:

1. Select either a project (1) or a station (2) or a TZF Scan (3) . the menu, select Generate Key Plan From TZF Scans.

Note:

When selecting a project with some TZF format files inside, it is not necessary to be within a specific processing mode.

The Generate Key Plan From TZF Scans feature is dimmed when there is no TZF scan in the project.

You can be either in Isometric or Perspective Projection Mode .

Note:

(1) All TZF Scans (of the project) are used for computing Key Plan .

(2) All TZF Scans (of the station) are used for computing Key Plan .

(3) Only that TZF Scan is used for computing Key Plan .

Note: A filter is applied on the X , Y and Z directions when generating a Key

Plan from TZF Scans in order to remove parasite points.


Generate a Key Plan from the Current

View

This method uses the current camera view as the Projection Plane.

Its Normal direction is perpendicular to the screen plane. Its Position is the Origin or barycenter of the Projection Plan .

To Generate a Key plan from the Current View:

1. Display a point cloud in the 3D View .

2. Rotate the scene to specify the point of view from which you want to create a Key Plan.

3. From menu, select Generate Key Plan From Current View .

Note: This feature is dimmed if there is no point cloud displayed in the 3D

View .

Caution: You need to display only clouds from a single project. Otherwise an error message appears.

If you are in the Perspective projection mode, a warning dialog opens and warns you that the project mode has to be changed to Isometric to be able to process to the Key Plan generation.

If you change No , the process is then aborted. If you choose Yes , the projection mode changes then during the operation and takes back its state once finished.

C H A P T E R 9

Tools in the Registration Module

When you load a file (of the following formats (SIMA and TXT with

Topopoints)) that was never saved in the RealWorks format; the Registration processing mode is set by default. When you load a file, saved in the

RealWorks format and in the Registration processing mode, that file will be opened with that processing mode. When you are out of this processing mode and you need to use it, you have to click on the pull-down arrow in the Tools toolbar and choose Registration . You may meet the following message “The

Survey Configuration load state will be kept in the Registration configuration.

Do you want to save the previous Registration configuration load state?”.

The Registration module includes a broad range of tools. Some are basic tools, like e.g. the Auto-Extract and Register Targets and Target Analyzer features.

By using them, you can quickly register a project and analyze the results.

Some are advanced tools, like e.g. the Auto-Register Using Planes (Target-

Less) , Refine Registration , etc. feature. By using them, you can register the scan data quickly and automatically without having to place targets, and refine the registration.

The Registration processing mode is present in all RealWorks products. In

RealWorks Viewer , only the Registration Report (Target-Based) and

Registration Report (Scan-Based) features are present.

415

Auto-Extract Targets and Register

The Auto-Extract Targets and Register feature allows the extraction of targets from TZF Scans , to match those in common and to register the stations the extracted targets belong to.


Open the Tool

To Open the Tool:

1. Select a station (or a set of stations or a project (1) created from TZF format file(s) (2) ) from the Scans Tree . the menu, select Auto-Extract Targets and Register .

If a station (or set of stations) has (or have) been selected, the Auto-

Extract Targets and Register dialog opens.

If a project has been selected, a dialog opens and prompts you to process with all stations (or not). Click Yes . The dialog closes and the

Auto-Extract Targets and Register dialog appears.

3. Choose Target Type .

4. Create sampled scans.

5. Choose a Reference Station.

OK . The Auto-Extract Targets and Register dialog closes.

Note:

(1) With a unique station (or a set of stations (or a set of groups)).

Otherwise, if the input is a project with only a unique group, the tool is grayed-out.

If the input is a group (with a station (or a set of stations)), the tool is grayed-out.

If there is no TZF format file in one of the selected stations, a dialog opens and asks you if you wish to continue with the remaining station(s). Choosing "No" will leave the tool.

If there is no TZF format file inside the whole selection, a warning message appears with the text "No TZF Scan found in selected stations".

Tools in the Registration Module

Note: (2) If the TZF format file(s) has (have) not been yet processed, the


A warning message appears in the Auto-Extract Targets and Register dialog when one of the selected stations has a Level 3 Scan within.

Note: You need to have at least one Target Type checked to enable the OK button. Otherwise, it remains dimmed.

Note: All leveled TZF Scans will be automatically re-projected during the Post-

Processing step.


Target Types

You can extract two types of target: Spherical Target or Black and White Flat

Target .

To Choose a Target Type

1. Check both options: Spherical Target and Black and White Flat Target .

2. Or only check one type.

Spherical Target has been checked, the Diameter field becomes enabled.

4. Input a value in the Diameter field according to the type of sphere you used during data acquisition.

5. Or click on the Diameter pull-down arrow.

6. And choose a value from the drop-down list.

There are five predefined diameters: 76.20 mm, 100 mm, 139 mm,

200 mm and 230 mm.

Tip: The current unit of measurement is in Millimeters . You do not need to enter "mm".

Note: Extracted targets are created in the database as Spherical Targets (or

Black and White Flat Targets ) with Unmatched status. All of them are gathered in the Unmatched folder under the Project node in the Project Tree and each one is put under its related station. An extracted target is named TargetX where X is an order, whatever its type.

Caution: The minimum distance between two targets should be 200 mm between two centers. The threshold is the same for Spherical Targets as for

Black and White Targets .

Note: For targets of spherical type, you need to know their exact diameter. If you enter a diameter (in the dialog) that is different from the diameter of the scanned targets, nothing (or a very small number of targets) will be extracted from the TZF Scans .


Scan Creation

You can create a Scan based on the Preview of a TZF Scan (by getting points from the Preview and computing Normals on them). A Scan is always named

Preview . The number of points for each is about two million points.

To Create a Sampled Scan: the option checked.

Note:

If several stations have been selected as input, a set of Scans (one per station) is created in batch mode, one after the other. You can interrupt each of them by pressing Esc . the option has been checked, you will be prompted to save the current project in the RealWorks database, if it is not yet saved. If the option has been kept unchecked, no prompt appears.

Tip: When you create from several TZF Scans within a station, all Scans (in that station) have not the same color. Each has its own color.


Reference Station

You have to choose a station from the project (or from the set of stations) and set it as a Reference Station . This means that the chosen station will be used as a reference (station remaining unchanged) and the other stations as stations to register with.

To Choose a Reference Station:

1. Click on the Reference Station pull-down arrow.

2. Choose a station from the drop-down list.

Note:

If a single station has been selected as input, no registration will occur.

If a project has been selected as input, the first station (of the project) is by default the Reference Station .

Note: If a set of stations has been selected as input, the first selected station is by default the Reference Station . The order (of selection) is preserved.

Caution: After clicking OK in the Auto-Extract and Register dialog, if the station selected as Reference Station is not a Leveled Station , an error message appears and prompts you to change the selection. Close the Error message. The Leveled Station is automatically set as Reference Station in the dialog.

Caution: After clicking OK in the Auto-Extract and Register dialog, an error message appears if the input (of the tool) contains a Topographic Station and the station has not been chosen as Reference Station . Close the Error message. The Topographic Station is automatically set as Reference Station in the dialog.


Register Stations

To Register Stations: the dialog, click OK .

If there are enough targets inside each station (and at least three in common between two stations), the auto-pairing of targets will be performed and the

Target-Based Registration dialog opens.

If the auto-pairing of targets succeeds, you may see the number of paired targets in the Station List of the Target-Based Registration dialog. For a given station, the Number of Targets is shown as X / Y . Y is the sum of targets and X is the sum of matched targets. The Adjust button in Step 3 of the Target-Based

Registration dialog is dimmed (because stations are registered). The

Registration Details dialog opens automatically with the Station View set by default.

1 - Reference Station (in bold)

2 - Matched targets in a station

3 - Total of targets (matched and unmatched) in a station

If there are not enough targets inside each station and/or if there are no common targets between stations, the auto-pairing of targets will fail and the

Adjust button in Step 3 of the Target-Based Registration dialog is enabled. The

Registration Details dialog is not open.

Note: The Target-Based Registration dialog will not open if the input is a single station.


Auto-Register Using Planes (Target-Less)

The Auto-Register Using Planes (Target-Less) feature automatically registers leveled scans of structured environments, i.e. that contain a significant amount of predominantly flat walls. It automatically extracts all the main planes (walls, ground, ceiling, etc.), matches them automatically between scans and uses them to register the scans.

Warning: Make sure the amount of memory (RAM) is enough when you launch the Auto-Register Using Planes (Target Less) feature on a huge dataset. You need about 90 Mb per TZF Scan .


Open the Tool

To Open the Tool:

1. Select at least two stations, a group (or set of groups) (1) , or a project (2) created from TZF format file(s) from the Scans Tree . the menu, select Auto-Register Using Planes (Target-

Less) . The Auto-Register Using Planes (Target-Less) dialog is displayed.

The (or Reference Group ) is in bold.

None of the stations (or groups) is selected. By default, all of the stations (or groups) are checked.

If required, use to select (CHECKED) all of the stations (or groups) from the tree.

If required, use to unselect (UNCHECKED) all of the stations (or groups) from the tree.

In the case of groups only, all of them are collapsed by default.

If required, use (or ) to expand all groups (or a unique group) from the tree.

If required, use (or ) to collapse all groups (or a unique group) from the tree.

Select a station from the tree. It is highlighted. If there is a unique

TZF Scan within (the selected station), its preview is displayed in the dialog as shown below. If there are several TZF Scans within, the preview of the Main TZF Scan is displayed.


You can select several stations (from the tree) by using the Ctrl (or

Shift ) key combined with the left clicking. No preview is displayed.

Check all of the stations you need for your registration and uncheck those are not necessary.

Note:

(1) With at least two stations inside a group. Otherwise, if there is only a unique station in a group, the tool is grayed-out.

(2) With several stations, a unique group or a set of groups. Otherwise, if the project has only a unique station within, the tool is grayed-out.

If the input does not contain at least two valid stations (with TZF Scan within), a warning dialog is displayed and the Auto-Extract Targets and Register tool is not launched anymore.

Tip: If stations are gathered into a group, start by auto-registering first the stations within the group together. Then once the stations within the group(s) have been registered, auto-register all groups together.


Note: If there is no TZF format file in one of the selected stations, the station is automatically removed from the auto-registration process.

Reference Station

The Reference Station is the one whose position and orientation remain unchanged through the Auto-Register Using Planes (Target-Less) process. If a project (or a set of stations) has been selected as input, the first station from the set of stations (or from the project) is the default Reference Station . If a leveled station has been chosen as input, this station is by default Reference

Station .

To Choose a Reference Station:

1. Click on the Selection List pull-down arrow.

2. Choose a station from the drop-down list.

If a project has been selected as input, all stations (of the project) are in the Selection List .

If a set of stations has been selected as input, only the selected stations (of the set) are in the Selection List .

Note: If a set of stations has been selected as input, the first selected station is by default the Reference Station . The order (or selection) is preserved.

Caution: After clicking OK in the Auto-Extract and Register dialog, if the station selected as Reference Station is not a Leveled Station , an error message appears and prompts you to change the selection. Close the Error message. The Leveled Station is automatically set as Reference Station in the dialog.

Tip: RealWorks can differentiate a station from a group (of stations). A group is flagged as " (Group)" in the Auto-Register Using Planes (Target-Less) dialog.


Register Stations

To Register Stations:

1. In dialog, click Start .

Stations are then registered together*.

2. If stations can be registered together, the Registration Report dialog opens. the dialog, do one of the following:

Click . The Registration Report dialog opens.

Or

Click . The Registration Report dialog closes. An Auto-

Registered Group is created and rooted under the Scans Tree .

An Auto-Registered Group is a group gathering the stations selected for the

Auto-Register Using Planes (Target-Less) purpose. We distinguish two different groups, one called Reference and the other Secondary . Basically an

Auto-Registered Group (Reference) is a group that contains stations registered together and for which one of them is registered with a station chosen as the

Reference Station . An Auto-Registered Group (Secondary) is a group with stations registered together and any of them cannot be registered with the

Reference Station . An Auto-Registered Group (Reference) can contain a subgroup which is also an Auto-Registered Group (Reference) . This occurs when both share the same Reference Station .

Stations that cannot be registered with the others are put under a folder named

" Non-Registered Stations ".


1 - Group with registered stations among which one of them is a Reference Station

2 - Group with stations for the registration with the Reference Station failed

3 - Group containing all stations that cannot be registered with others

And/or

If the Generate a Preview Scan option has been checked, the

Registration Report dialog remains open. Sampled scans are then created. Again in the Registration Report dialog, click OK . The

Registration Report dialog closes.


B - Common parts of the clouds are superimposed

A - Common parts of the clouds are not yet superimposed

4. If stations cannot be registered together, an error dialog opens and suggests you to try the Cloud-Based Registration Tool.

Note: (*) The user can abort the registration (of stations) in progress by clicking Esc.

A dialog opens and prompts you to abort or not.

Note: Stations with several TZF Scans within, for which the registration with the Reference Station fails, are put all together under the "Non-Registered

Stations" folder.


Registration Report

The Registration Report dialog lists for each station (of the selection) the following information:

How many station(s) each of them is registered with and the name of each.

The deviation in a pair registered stations in the current unit of measurement.

The purpose of the Auto-Register Using Planes (Target-Less) feature is to register stations based on planes (paired together). The accuracy of two stations registered together is given by the Cloud-to-Cloud Error . This error is an average distance between paired planes (of one station) and the point cloud (of the other station). The Cloud-to-Cloud Error in a pair (of registered stations) is the same from one direction to the other (e.g. from Station_A to

Station_B or from Station_B to Station_A).

1 - Cloud-to-Cloud Error from Station_A to

Station_B

2 - Cloud-to-Cloud Error from Station_B to

Station_A

The amount of Coincident Points per pair (of registered stations) is in percentage. The percentage in a pair (of registered stations) is the same from one direction to the other (e.g. from Station_A to Station_B or from

Station_B to Station_A).


1 - Common points from Station_A to Station_B 2 - Common points from Station_B to Station_A

Note: An Overall Cloud-to-Cloud Error (from all the station errors) is displayed at the bottom left corner of the Registration Report dialog. This Overall Cloudto-Cloud Error allows weighting of each station error with respect to their overlap percentage.

A new column, named Confidence , has been added in the Registration Report dialog. This Confidence, applied to a pair of stations, is expressed in percentage. It is the ratio between Coincident Points and Occlusion , in terms of distance.

All Confidence rates, below 90%, have a red warning beside them. This does not mean that the results are wrong. It is an indication that the results should be analyzed more closely.


Save in RTF Format

You can save the Auto-Register Using Planes (Target-Less) result in a report in RTF format.

To Save in RTF Format:

1. In dialog, enter a name for the report file in the File

Name field.

2. Find a location where you want the report file to be stored.

3. Click . The Registration Report dialog closes.

Note: An Overall Cloud-to-Cloud Error (from all the station errors) is displayed at the beginning of the file, just before the list of stations. This Overall Cloud-to-

Cloud Error enables to weight each station error with respect to their overlap percentage.

Note: The Confidence column has been also added to the RTF report. No red warning appear next to the Confidence value.

Options

There is one option that comes after the registration (of stations). If it has been chosen, the related process is then performed, otherwise nothing occurs.


Generating Preview Scans

The Preview Scan option enables to create a Scan by first getting points, not based on a TZF Scan but from its Preview , and by computing Normals on them. A Scan is always named Preview . The number of points for each is about two million points.

To Generate Preview Scans: the option.

Note:

If several stations have been selected as input, a set of Scans (one per station) are created in batch mode, one after the other.

When you interrupt the Generate a Preview Scan step by pressing Esc , a dialog opens and prompts you to abort or not.

Note:

You may not see anything happen in the 3D View if the option is not checked.

The step is an optional step. If the Generate a

Preview Scan option has been checked, you will prompt to save the current project in the RealWorks database, if it is not yet saved. If the option has been kept unchecked, no prompt appears.

Tip: When you create from several TZF Scans within a station, all Scans (in that station) have not the same color. Each has its own color.


Target-Based Registration Tool

The Target-Based Registration Tool allows you to register a set of stations by using targets. The targets could be those obtained while scanning, those created manually during a registration, or those obtained by using traditional surveying instruments such as Total Stations . The registration is based on a least-squares adjustment method using the corresponding target observations of each station. A registration report will be created after the registration. You can check the registration quality based on this report. If any of the targets are out of error tolerance, you can un-validate them and re-perform the registration.


Open the Tool

To Open the Tool:

1. Select a station (1) , a set of stations, a set of groups or a project (2) from the

Scans Tree . the menu, select Target-Based Registration Tool .

Or an

The Target-Based Registration dialog opens as the fourth tab of the

WorkSpace window. It is sub-divided into three parts. Each corresponds to one step in the Target-Based Registration process.

Note:

(1) Among other stations. Otherwise, if the station is alone in the project, the tool is grayed.

(2) With a set of stations (or a set of groups). Otherwise, if the project has only a unique station (or group (of stations) within) the tool is grayed-out.

Note:

If the input is a group with a unique station (or a group with a set of stations) within, the tool is grayed.

If the loaded project contains some scans of spherical target type which are not already fitted, RealWorks will prompt you to automatically fit each of them with a geometry.

Caution: You cannot open the Target-Based Registration Tool if the input is only of Topographic Station type.

Note:

(1) When a single station has been selected, the whole project is then taken as the entry of the tool and the selected station becomes the Reference

Station .

(1) You can also select two stations without TZF Scan inside.

Tip: You can also select Target-Based Registration from the pop-up menu.

If you enter into the Target-Based Registration Tool with some stations that are already been registered and some not, a dialog appears and asks to register those that are not yet registered with those that are already.


Select a Reference Station

This step consists of fixing a station as a Reference Station . The other station(s) is/are used to be registered with it. If a project (or a set of stations) has been selected as input, the first station (of the project) is the default

Reference Station . If a leveled station has been chosen as input, this station is by default Reference Station . If one of the stations is a Topographic station, i.e. it contains points surveyed by using a traditional surveying instrument; this station is set by default as the Reference Station .

To Select a Reference Station:

1. Click on the pull down arrow of the Reference Station list.


2 - Stations displayed in the 3D View

3 - Stations not displayed in the 3D View

By default, all selected stations are put in the Station List window. They are listed not by the order of selection but by their order (of creation). All of them are not displayed in the 3D View . The Reference Station is in bold.

2. Select a station from the drop-down list.

3. Select and toggle the Reference Station to On . Its representation is shown in the 3D View .

4. Select and toggle another station to On . Its representation is shown in the

3D View .

Note: If there are several Topographic Stations within the project, only one is assigned as the Reference Station .

Caution: If the station selected as Reference Station is not a Leveled Station , an error message appears and prompts you to change the selection.


Caution: An error message appears if the selection (as input of the tool) contains a Topographic Station and this station has not been chosen as a

Reference Station .


Auto-Pair Targets

A target has two states: Matched or Unmatched . If there are already extracted targets within the input (of the tool) and if these targets have not yet been paired ( Unmatched ), all of them are gathered in the Unmatched folder in the

Targets Tree and per station in the Scans Tree .

If there are enough targets inside each station (and at least three in common between two stations), the auto-pairing of targets will be performed automatically.

If the auto-pairing of targets succeeds, you may see the number of paired targets in the Station List of the Target-Based Registration dialog. For a given station, the Number of Targets is shown as X / Y . Y is the sum of the targets and

X is the sum of the matched targets. The adjustment (of stations) is then performed automatically without user interaction. The Adjust button (in Step 3 of the Target-Based Registration dialog) becomes dimmed. The Registration

Details dialog opens automatically with the Station View set by default.


2 - Matched targets in a station

3 - Total of targets (matched and unmatched) in a station

If there are not enough targets inside each station and/or if there are no common targets between stations, the auto-pairing of targets will then fail and the Adjust button (in Step 3 of the Target-Based Registration dialog) is enabled. The Registration Details dialog is not open. The auto-pairing of targets can also fail even if there are not enough targets inside only in a station in common with other stations.

If the extracted targets have already paired ( Matched ), they are gathered per pairing group named XXX where XXX is its order. All pairing groups are rooted in the Targets Tree . The target pairing information is still displayed in the

Station List as illustrated above. After entering into the tool, the stations are automatically adjusted. The Adjust button in Step 3 is still enabled as the stations are automatically registered.


If there is no target within each station, the tool opens too. For each selected station, you may see the sum of targets Y and the sum of matched targets X , both equal to zero. An information box with the "Reference station is not registrable" text may appear.

Tip: In general, a station should have at least three targets inside. If one of the stations is a Topographic Station and the other a Leveled Station , two targets

(per station) are enough.

Note: A pairing group (XXX where X is its order) is shown in the 3D View with a label. The label's name is the group name and its color corresponds to the one that you can find in each of the targets matched together. Unmatched targets still remain in the Unmatched folder.

Tip: Targets, extracted by using the Auto-Extract and Register method and paired together immediately in the Target-Based Registration Tool , are renamed as well as their pairing groups. They are renamed as XXX . XXX starts at 001 and is incremented by one. See [A]. If the Auto-Extract and

Register method is not combined with the Target-Based Registration Tool , paired targets are not renamed but only their pairing groups are. See [B].


Edit Targets

For each station, you can modify targets (either of spherical type or of planar type), delete those that are incorrectly fitted, and/or create additional targets in the point cloud where such a target is identified visually as having been scanned.

To Edit Targets.

In Step 2, click Analyze . The Target Analyzer dialog opens.


Adjust Stations

Once the pairing (of targets) is performed, the adjustment (of stations) is then performed automatically without user interaction. From this point on, stations are split into two categories: "Registered" and "Unregistered". "Unregistered" stations are those for which the targets inside are e.g. not in sufficient in quantity or not in common with other stations. They are then grayed out in the

Station List and the Residual Error is equal to Zero. "Registered" stations are those for which the targets inside are in common and paired with other station(s). The Residual Error is not equal to Zero


2 - Registered station(s)

3 - Unregistered station(s)

Caution: Changing the current Reference Station to a new one will NOT reset the adjustment information. The Adjust button, in Step 3 , will stay grayed-out.

Note: After registering a Leveled Station with a Topographic Station , the Up ( Z direction) of the Leveled Station is retained.

The Overall Residual Error is the average of all station residual errors. It is displayed in Step 1 of the Target-Based Registration dialog below the Station

List . The smaller the Overall Residual Error , the more accurate the registration of the stations.


When all Selected Stations are Registered

When all of the selected stations have been successfully registered (together), the Overall Residual Error in Step 1 of the Target-Based Registration dialog, below the Station List , displays a value as illustrated below.

The Registration Details dialog automatically opens with the same Overall

Residual Error value.


When Some of the Selected Stations are Registered

When some of the selected stations have been successfully registered together, there is no value in the Overall Residual Error line in Step 1 of the

Target-Based Registration dialog.

The Registration Details dialog still opens automatically. The Residual Error is not "Overall" but only for "Registered Stations". There is a value.


When all Stations are not Registered

If all of the selected stations have not been successfully registered (together), there is no value for the Overall Residual Error in Step 1 of the Target-Based

Registration dialog.

The Registration Details dialog is not open. You have to open it manually by click the Check button. The Residual Error is also not "Overall" but only for

"Registered Stations", and there is no value.


Check the Adjustment

You can then check the quality of the adjustment. You can check the mean error for each target group (inside which you can find all matched observations of this target from different stations). You can also check the error for each target observation. To do this, you should select the corresponding line in the table, and all pertinent information will be shown in the dialog area below the table. If the error of a target is e.g. out of tolerance, you can select it and use the Unmatch button to remove it from the next registration. You can then reperform the registration.

To Check the Adjustment:

In , click on the Check button. The Registration Details dialog opens.


Registration Details

What is a Fitting Error ?. An extracted target is in fact a set of points fitted with a geometry. The accuracy of the fitting is given by this error (a distance value in the current unit of measurement). This distance is the deviation from the fitted geometry to the set of points. The shorter the distance, the more accurate the fitting.

As a target does not belong to only one station but to several stations and the fitting error (of this target) in a station differs from the fitting error in another station. The Residual Error of a target is the average of all Fitting Errors (of this target), each from a station observation.

1 - Station's Residual Error 3 - Target's Fitting Error

2 - Target's Residual Error

A Residual Error of a station is the average of Fitting Errors of all targets

(belonging to the station). The shorter the distance, the more accurate the matching of targets.

1 - Target group's Residual Error

2 - Target's Residual Error

3 - Target's Fitting Error


A Target Group is a group inside which you can find all matched observations of this target from different stations. The Residual Error in this case is the average of all Fitting Errors of this target.

From Station View

To Check the Errors from the Station View:


2. Select from the drop-down list.


Matched Station Tab

The Matched Station tab lists in a table all registered stations with targets whether matched or unmatched. By default, all are Off (undisplayed in the 3D

View ).

1 - Registered station(s) 2 - Unmatched target(s)


3 - Matched target(s)

Toggle a registered station On . All targets of this station are On and have their representation displayed in the 3D View .

Toggle a matched target On . Its representation is displayed in the 3D

View .


Unmatch a pair of matched targets. a) Select a matched target. The Unmatch button becomes active. b) Click . This target and the one(s) in the same pair are unmatched.

Unmatch all matched targets in a registered station. a) Select a registered station. The Unmatch button becomes active. b) Click . All targets from this station and the ones from the other registered stations are unmatched.

Match a matched target with.


Registered Stations

The panel below the table displays for a registered station its name, the number of station(s) it is linked to, the name of each linked station, the number of common targets and the Mean Distance (in the current unit of measurement).

Unmatched Targets

For an unmatched target, the panel displays its name and the station and group the matched target belonging to.

Matched Targets

For a matched target, the panel displays its name, the station and group it belonged to, the target(s) paired to it.

Unmatched Station Tab

The Unmatched Station tab lists all unregistered stations. They are only those that have been selected (as input) but for which the registration failed. There are some extracted target inside (if there is a TZF scan) the stations.

1 - Station selected as input of the registration 2 - Targets belonging to the unmatched station


Toggle an unmatched target On . Its representation is shown in the

3D View .

Toggle an unmatched station On . All targets inside this station have

Note: their representation displayed in the 3D View .

Match a target with.

The button is not available (dimmed) when selecting the

Unmatched Station tab.

Unmatched Station tab is not present in the Registration Details dialog if all the selected stations have been successfully registered together.


Unregistered Stations

For an unregistered station, the panel below the table displays its name and the "0 linked station(s) text".

Unmatched Targets

For an unmatched target, the panel displays its name and the station it belongs to.

Match an unmatched target with.

From Target View

To Check the Errors from the Target View:


2. Select from the drop-down list.


Matched Target Tab

The Matched Target tab lists in a table all pairs of matched targets. By default, all are Off (undisplayed in the 3D View ).

1 - Pairs of matched targets


2 - Matched targets inside a pair

Toggle a pair of matched targets On . Both targets (one from each station) are displayed in the 3D View .

Toggle a matched target On . Its representation is displayed in the 3D

View .


Unmatch a pair of matched targets. a) Select a pair of matched targets. The Unmatch button becomes active.

Unmatch . This pair of targets is unmatched.

Unmatch a matched target. a) Select a matched target. The Unmatch button becomes active. b) Click . This target and the one in the same pair are unmatched.



Unmatched Target Tab

The Unmatched Target tab lists all unmatched targets. All are put in the

Unmatched folder.

Do one of the following.

Toggle an unmatched target On . Its representation is displayed in the

3D View .

Toggle folder On . All unmatched targets inside this folder have their representation displayed in the 3D View .


Note: The Unmatch button is not available (dimmed) when selecting the

Unmatched Target tab.

Auto-Match All

The Auto-Match All feature allows you to first un-adjust stations that had previously been adjusted and then adjust them again. No selection is required.

Stations are those selected as the input of the Target-Based Registration (or

Auto-Extract Targets and Register ).

Note: The user can be in either the Station View or the Target View .

Auto-Match Station

The Auto-Match Station feature allows you to auto-adjust a selected station from the Registration Details dialog. If the selected station is already adjusted, it is then un-adjusted and adjusted again. If it is not already adjusted, it is then automatically adjusted. A selection is required. It must be done in the Station

View from either the Matched Station tab or the Unmatched Station tab.


Save the Adjustment Result

If you are satisfied with the adjustment result, you can use the Apply (or Group ) button to save this result. You can continue to perform other registrations or to quit the tool by using the Close button.

Tip: Close can also be selected from the pop-up menu.

Applying

To Apply the Adjustment:

1. Click The Target-Based Registration dialog remains open. Paired targets remain paired. Stations are adjusted.

2. Click . The Target-Based Registration dialog closes.

Tip: You can perform two undo operations, one for the adjustment (of stations) and one for the auto-pairing (of targets).


Grouping

To Apply the Adjustment and Group the stations:

Group . A dialog opens and asks you to apply all changes before grouping stations.


Click . The Target-Based Registration dialog closes. A new folder named New Group is created in the Scans Tree . All adjusted stations are put under that folder while all unadjusted stations are outside*.

Targets and target groups, instead of being named TargetX and mTargetX where X is an order, they are renamed as XXX . XXX starts at 001.

1 - Group gathering registered stations

2 - Matched target(s)

Or

3 - Unmatched target(s)

Click . A new dialog opens and asks you to apply all changes to the database. a) Click . The Target-Based Registration dialog closes. Targets remain paired. Stations are adjusted and no new folder is created.

454 Trimble RealWorks 9.0 User's Guide click . The Target-Based Registration dialog closes.

Targets are unpaired. Each target keeps its default name:

TargetX (where X is an order). Stations are not adjusted.

Note: You can perform two undo operations, one for both the grouping and the adjustment (of stations) and one for the auto-pairing (of targets).

Note: (*) Only stations registered to the Reference Station and the Reference

Station itself are grouped.

Applying and Grouping

To Apply the Adjustment and Group the Stations:

Apply. The Target-Based Registration dialog remains open. Paired targets remain paired. Stations are adjusted.

2. Click . The Target-Based Registration dialog closes. A new folder named New Group is created in the Scans Tree . All adjusted stations are put under that folder while all unadjusted stations are outside.

Note: You can perform three undo operations, one for the station grouping, one for the adjustment (of stations) and one for the auto-pairing (of targets).


Refine Registration Using Scans

This feature enables to refine position and orientation of the stations using the scan data., The stations need to be already registered, at least coarsely, for this function to work successfully. The feature can be run after any registration method ( Auto-Extract Targets and Register , Target-Based Registration , Auto-

Register Using Planes , Register Stations With Import RMX Files , Cloud-based registration). It enables to enhance the accuracy of the registration. A report is generated, showing residual errors and percentage of common points between matched stations. The report can be saved as an RTF file

When the stations are leveled, the feature keeps this constraint: the stations will remain leveled in the process.

Tip: In some cases where the scans have a high density and the overlap areas are scanned from a long distance, it may be possible to obtain an even better accuracy by setting the stations to 'unleveled'.

The stations can either contain a TZF Scan or only regular scans, e.g., as obtained by extracting points from a TZF Scan or by importing ungridded scan files. The feature uses two different algorithms to refine the registration parameters, and automatically chooses which algorithm to use depending on the stations. When the stations contain TZF Scans , the feature uses the algorithm on the TZF Scans . Otherwise, the feature uses the algorithm on the regular scans.


Open the Tool

To Open the Tool:

1. Select at least two stations or a group (or a set of groups) (1) , or a project (2) ) from the Scans Tree . the menu, select Refine Registration Using Scans .

If a set of stations has been selected, the Refine Registration Using

Scans dialog opens.

If a project has been selected, a dialog opens and prompts you to process with all stations (or not). Click Yes . The dialog closes and the

Refine Registration Using Scans dialog appears.

Note:

(1) With at least two stations inside a group. Otherwise, the feature is grayed-out.

(2) With several stations, a unique group with at least three stations or a set of groups. If the project has a unique station within, the feature is grayedout.

Warning: By principle, the Refine Registration Using Scan s feature does not refine within groups. If there are some groups in your input, a warning appears and prompts you to continue or to abort the process. If you choose Yes , the refinement will be performed between the groups, by using the proper stations in them. This is visible in the report, where only the stations from different groups will be matched.

Warning: If the input does not contain at least two valid stations, i.e.with valid

TZF Scans or regular scans , a dialog opens and the feature cannot be run.


Choose a Reference Station

The Reference Station or Reference Group is the only station or group whose position and orientation remain unchanged along the Refine Registration Using

Scans process. If a project (or a group of stations) has been selected as input, all stations (of the project) (or of the group) are in the selection list and the first station (from the list) is chosen to the reference. If there are some leveled stations, the first of them will be chosen to be the reference by default.

To Choose the Reference Station:

1. Click on the Selection List pull-down arrow.

2. Choose a station (or a group) from the drop-down list.

The selected station (or group) has its name displayed in the

Reference Station field.

It is in bold in the selection list.

Caution: If the selection contains some leveled stations and the station selected as Reference Station is not leveled, an error message appears and prompts you to change the selection. If you wish to use an unleved station as reference, you can set all the selected stations to unleved (by using

Registration / Modify Station / Force Unleved ).


Select a Subset of Stations for the

Refinement

When working with groups containing many stations, the refinement on all stations can be computationally expensive, and hence time consuming. In the dialog, you can choose a subset of stations to run the computation on.

Typically, you may want to choose the stations that have some overlap with the others groups. The refinement is then applied to the whole groups, but the computation can be much faster.

To Select a Subset of Stations for the Refinement: the icon to un-select (UNCHECKED) all the stations (or groups) in the selection list.

2. In the case of groups only, all are by default not collapsed.

3. Click the Expand All icon (or ) to expand all groups (or a unique group) in the selection list.

4. Select a station (or a group of stations) from the selection list. It is highlighted.

If the selected station has a TZF Scan within, its preview and its name are displayed in the dialog as shown below.

If there are several TZF Scans within, the preview of the Main TZF

Scan is displayed.

No preview is displayed in case the selected station has a TZF Scan for which the link to the TZF file is broken.

In case of a group, the first station (from the group) or the first leveled station (if existed) has its preview and name displayed.


If the selected station has no TZF Scan within but only regular scans, no preview and no name are displayed in the dialog.

5. Check only the stations you wish to include in the computation and leave the others unchecked.

Tip: You can select several stations (from the selection list) by using the Ctrl

(or Shift ) key with the left clicking. There is no preview in that case.


Refine the Registration

To Refine the Registration:

1. Click on the Start button.

If the selected stations contain only TZF Scans, the links to the TZF files are valid and the TZF files are not missing, the Refine

Registration Using TZF Scans method will be applied to the selection.

If the selected stations contain only regular scans, the Refine

Registration Using Extracted Scans method will be applied to the selection.

If the selected stations contain both ( TZF Scans and regular scans), and the links to the TZF files are valid and the TZF files are not missing, the Refine Registration Using TZF Scans method will be applied.

If the selected stations contain both ( TZF Scans and regular scans), and some of the TZF links are broken or some of the TZF files are missing, the dialog below opens: a) Click Yes. The Refine Registration Using Extracted Scans method will be applied. b) Or . No refinement will be applied.

If the selected stations contain both ( TZF Scans and regular scans), and some TZF links are broken or/and TZF files are missing or/and some regular scans are missing, an error message appears:


Click . No refinement will be applied.

2. If required, press Esc. to abort the refinement in progress. A dialog opens and prompts you to abort or not.


View the Registration Report

Once the refinement has been applied, a report opens. It is named Report

Registration (Using TZF Scans) if the method on TZF Scans has been applied and Report Registration (Using Extracted Scans ) if the method on the regular scans has been applied.

To View the Registration Report:

1. In dialog, verify the refinement results:

For each station (of the selection), the table shows:

The name of the station(s) it has been matched with. In the case of the algorithm on the regular scans, this consists of a single station

(pairwise refinement).

For each pair of stations, the Cloud-to-Cloud Error and Coincident

Points percentage - in the current unit - , and the Confidence level.

The Cloud-to-Cloud Error is the root mean square of the point-to-point distances on the overlapping areas. It is computed from the distances between individual points in the first scan to their corresponding scan point in the second scan. The error is symmetrical: it has the same value from Station_A to

Station_B as from Station_B to Station_A).


1 - Cloud-to-Cloud Error from Station_A to 2 - Cloud-to-Cloud Error from Station_B to

Station_B Station_A

The Coincident Points value is the amount of common points per pair (of registered stations) is in percentage. The percentage in a pair (of registered stations) is the same from one direction to the other (e.g. from Station_A to

Station_B or from Station_B to Station_A).

1 - Common points from Station_A to Station_B 2 - Common points from Station_B to Station_A

The Overall Cloud-to-Cloud Error (from all the station errors) is displayed at the bottom left corner of the Registration Report dialog. This Overall Cloud-to-

Cloud Error is the average of the errors on all the station pairs.

This Confidence value gives an idea of how reliable a pair is. it is expressed in percentage. All Confidence rates, below 90%, have a red warning beside them. This does not mean that the results are wrong. It is an indication that the results may require a closer analysis.

2. Click . The Registration Report dialog opens.

3. Click . The Registration Report dialog closes.


Target Analyzer Tool

This tool helps you to analyze a project before you register the stations that are inside. For each station, you can check if there are enough targets (either of spherical type or of planar type), modify or delete those that are incorrectly fitted, and/or create additional targets in the point cloud where such a target is identified visually as having been scanned.


Open the Tool

To Open the Tool:

1. Select a project (or a group of stations (1) or a single station (1) ) from the

Project Tree . the menu, select Target Analyzer Tool .

Or

3. In of the Target-Based Registration dialog, click Analyze .

The Target Analyzer dialog opens as the fourth (or fifth) tab of the WorkSpace window. It is composed of five parts. The first part allows you to select a station for analyzing. The second part is to check targets/surveying points and scans that are in the selected station. The third part is to repair (or correct) a given target or to create a new one. The fourth part is to update the network (2) . The fifth part is to save the result, close the tool and give access to the online help.

The number of scans and targets in the selection appear in text below the selection box.

Note:

If the input contains some scans of spherical target type which are not

Tip: already fitted, RealWorks will prompt you to automatically fit each of them with a primitive.

(1) If the TZF format files have not yet been processed, the Processing TZF

Scans dialog opens and prompts you to proceed to do so.

(2) This part is only available when launching the Target Analyzer Tool through the Target-Based Registration Tool .

When a single station has been selected, the whole project is then taken as the entry of the tool.

You can also right-select on a project (or a group of stations station (1)

(1) or a single

or a TZF Scan ) from the Project Tree and Target Analyzer Tool from the pop-up menu.


Processing step.


Select a Station

If a set of stations has been selected as the input (of the tool), no matter in which order has been selected each station, and the first from the list is the one that is displayed in Step 1 . The same rule is applied when selecting a project.

To Select a Station for Analyzing:

1. Click on the pull down arrow.

2. Select a station from the drop-down list.

3. Or (or Go to Previous Station ).

For each station, the number of scans and the number of targets are displayed as well as the Residual Error (in the current unit of measurement). If the station has not yet been registered, its Residual Error is equal to Zero. By default, the

Main Scan within the selected station is displayed in a 2D Viewer as a 2D

Preview Image .

You can zoom an area of this 2D Preview Image In or Out using the Zoom In and Zoom Out commands, zoom the whole image In or Out using the mouse wheel or by defining a zoom factor. If the image is zoomed In more than the 2D

Viewer can display, you can pan it in any direction in order to view the hidden areas.


Spherical Targets , Black and White Flat Targets or Point Targets extracted from a TZF Scan by using e.g. the Auto-Extract Targets and Register feature, once created, are displayed within the TZF Scan . You can display (or hide) all labels by clicking on the Show/Hide Labels icon.

Note: The 2D Viewer will not appear anymore when there is no TZF Scan within the input (of the tool).

Caution: If there is no TZF format file inside the selected station, a dialog opens and warns you that the TZF format file cannot be opened. It may be absent, corrupted or blocked. The 2D Viewer disappears after closing the warning dialog.

Select a TZF Scan

As a station can contain more than one TZF Scan , you can manually choose to display the one you want other than the Main Scan .

To Select a TZF Scan: the , click on the TZF Scan pull-down arrow.

2. Choose TZF Scan to display.

Tip: If a TZF Scan has been chosen (as input of the Target Analyzer Tool ), it is then displayed in the 2D Viewer instead of the Main Scan .


Focus on Targets

Targets and scans of the station selected in Step 1 are listed according to the category they belong to. A target can be either of spherical shape or of flat shape. It can also be a surveying point. Only fitted targets can be used for registration (see the Target-Based Registration Tool for full details). Fitted targets are put together in the Fitted list and this list is accessed by selecting its corresponding tab.

Similarly, unfitted targets and scans are respectively in the Not fitted and Scan lists. The first item of the Fitted list is shown in the 3D View but none is selected. The information box at the top right corner of the 3D View , which is here to display the selected item, is blank. Both the Go to Next Target and the

Go to Previous Target in the dialog are dimmed.

Properties depend on where the selected item is. If the selected item belongs to the Scan and Not Fitted lists, its name and number of points are listed in the information box. If the selected item comes from the Fitted list, you will find two other items of information ( Standard Deviation (also called RMS error) and

Scanner Distance ) in addition to its name and number of points. If the selected item is from a leveled station, you will also see the Target Height and Scanner

Up Direction information.

To Focus on a Target:

1. If the station (selected in Step 1 ) has no TZF scan inside, Step 2 looks as shown in [A].

2. If the station (selected in Step 1 ) has a TZF scan inside, Step 2 looks as shown in [B].

3. Select an item from the current list. Both the Go to Next Target and the Go to Previous Target buttons become enabled.

4. Click (or Go to Previous Target) to navigate through the list (of target). press or Up on your keyboard.

[A] [B]


A Target selected from Step 2 is highlighted in the TZF Scan and centered on the 3D View and on the 2D Viewer as shown below.

Note:

You can only view the target height in the 3D View if its absolute value is greater than zero.

You can first select any item from the current list and use Page Up and

Page Down . The first and last item of this list becomes consecutively selected and its representation is shown in the 3D View .


Create/Edit Targets

If the station selected in Step 1 contains already fitted items, you can focus on each item of the Fitted list from the first to the last. Visually compare each of the selected item’s representations (points and geometry) in the 3D View and if required check the RMS Error value in the information box. The smaller this value, the more precise the fitting. Those that are not correctly fitted can be modified or deleted. Step 3 (of the Target Analyzer dialog) appears as shown in [A], [B] and [C] when selecting respectively a spherical item, a flat target and a survey point.

[A] [B]

[C]

If already fitted items are not sufficient, you can create additional items with the

Fitting Tool . You should first select an item from one of the two lists ( Not Fitted and Scans ). If the selected item is from the Not Fitted list and is of spherical shape (or flat shape (or survey point)), the dialog appears as shown in [D], (or

[E] (or [F])).

[D] [E]

[F]

If the selected item is from the Scans list, the dialog looks as shown in [H].

From each item of the Scans list, you can extract a 3D point as in the 3D Point

Creation Tool .

[G]

Those, that are not correctly fitted and that belong to a leveled station (or from a survey instrument), can also be modified and deleted. If the selected item is from the Fitted list, you can edit its height (see [H] when selecting a flat item). If it is either from the Not Fitted list or from the Scan list, you cannot edit any height as the Target Height is grayed out (see [I] when selecting a flat item).


[H] [I]

If the station selected in Step 1 contains fitted items extracted from a TZF scan, the dialog looks as shown in [J] (for an un-leveled station) and [K] (for a leveled station).

[J] [K]

Note: Please, be aware that the Re-fit and Fit buttons are replaced by the following icon .


Fit a Geometry to Point Cloud [From Scan Items]

To Fit a Geometry to Point Cloud (From Scan Items):

1. Select a scan from the Scan list.

2. Click . The Fitting Tool toolbar appears.

3. Fence a set of points by drawing a polygon.

4. Click on the Fit Geometry to Cloud pull-down arrow.

5. Do one of the following: with . a) If required, select Spherical Target from the drop-down list. b) Click on the Diameter pull-down arrow.

AUTO to do a free fitting. d) Or key a diameter value in the Diameter field. e) Or select a diameter between 76.20 mm, 100 mm, 139 mm, 200 mm and 230 mm to perform a constrained fitting. f) In toolbar, click again Spherical Target . A

Spherical Target is fitted to the fenced points. with . a) Select from the drop-down list. the toolbar, click Flat Target again. A Flat Target is fitted to the fenced points.

6. Click .

7. Click .

Tip: You can also right-click anywhere in the 3D View and select a command from the pop-up menu.

Note: The value entered in the Diameter field will no longer be kept. If you close the Fitting Tool without creating the fitted geometry.


A set of points, once fitted, is put with its geometry in the Fitted list and under the Unmatched folder of the Targets Tree and under the active group of the

Scans Tree . Undoing the fitting removes the set of points with its primitive from the Fitted list, the Unmatched folder and the active group.

Note: Please, be aware that the Flat Target icon looks like this .

Create a 3D Points

To Create a 3D Point:

1. Select a scan from the Scan list.

2. Click icon. The Picking Parameters toolbar appears in 3D constraint mode and the cursor becomes a cross.

3. Pick a point on the point cloud displayed in the 3D View . A 3D Point whose name is Scan_ObjectX where X is its order is created. This 3D

Point which is an unmatched target is put the current station in the Scans

Tree and in the Unmatched folder in the Targets Tree .

Delete a Target

To Delete a Target:

1. Select a target from the Fitted list.

2. Click . A warning dialog appears.


To delete both the geometry and the points, click Delete Scan and

Target .

To delete only the geometry, click Delete Target Only .

To cancel, click Cancel .

Caution: The deletion is definitive. You cannot undo.


Edit the Target Height

To Edit the Target Height:

1. Select a target from the Fitted list.

2. Enter a value in the Target Height field.

3. Or keep the default value.

Enter .

Note: The selected target needs to belong to a leveled station.

Tip: Instead of editing the Target Height value from the Target Analyzer dialog, you can also do so in the Property window.


Fit a Geometry to Point Cloud [From Unfitted Items]

To Fit a Geometry to Point Cloud (From Unfitted Iems):

1. Select an unfitted item from the Not fitted list.

2. Click . The Fitting Tool toolbar appears.

3. If the selected item is of spherical type, the Fitting Tool toolbar appears as shown below.

4. If the selected item is of flat type, the Fitting Tool toolbar appears as shown below.

5. If required, fence the target by drawing a polygon.


If the target is of Spherical Target type. a) Click on the Diameter pull-down arrow.

AUTO to perform a free fitting. c) Or key a diameter value in the Diameter field. d) Or select a diameter between 76.20 mm, 100 mm, 139 mm, 200 mm and 230 mm to perform a constrained fitting. e) In toolbar, click again Spherical Target .

If the target is of Flat Target type. the toolbar, click again Flat Target

Create Fitted Geometry .

8. Click .



Note: The value entered in the Diameter field will no longer be kept if you close the Fitting Tool without creating the fitted geometry.

A target scan, once fitted, is removed from the Not Fitted list and put in the

Fitted list and under the Unmatched folder in the Targets Tree . Undoing the fitting replaces the target scan again in the Not Fitted list and removes it from the Unmatched folder.


Re-Fit a Geometry to Point Cloud [From Fitted Items]

To Re-Fit a Geometry to Point Cloud (From Fitted Items):

1. Select a fitted item from the Fitted list.

2. Click Fit . The Fitting Tool toolbar appears. The geometry representation of the selected item is then hidden.

3. If the selected item is of spherical type, the Fitting Tool toolbar appears as shown below.

4. If the selected item is of flat type, the Fitting Tool toolbar appears as shown below.

5. If required, fence the target by drawing a polygon*.


If the target is of Spherical Target type. a) Click on the Diameter pull-down arrow. b) Select to perform a free fitting. c) Or enter a diameter value in the Diameter field. d) Or select a diameter between 76.20 mm, 100 mm, 139 mm, 200 mm and 230 mm to perform a constrained fitting. the toolbar, click Spherical Target again.

If the target is of Flat Target type. the toolbar, click Flat Target again.

7. Click .

8. Click .


Note:


The value entered in the Diameter field will no longer be kept if you close the Fitting Tool without creating the fitted geometry.

(*) If some points have been removed from the point cloud when fencing, the Residual Error of the fitted item changes as well as the RMS , Standard

Deviation and Number of Points .

Please, be aware that the Flat Target icon looks like this .


Modify the Target Position

You can adjust the extracted target (of flat type) so that it fits exactly the points of the scanned target. A Manipulator (with two axis handles and a plane) appears. You can adjust the fitted geometry by moving it with to the manipulator. You can pan the fitted geometry along a direction or in the plane.

To Modify the Target Position:

1. Select a fitted item (of flat type) from the Fitted list.

2. Click . A Manipulator

(with two axis handles and a plane) appears.

3. Click on a handle; it turns to yellow. The direction along which you can displace the geometry is highlighted in yellow and the one along which you cannot displace it is in magenta.

4. Move the fitted geometry along that direction.

5. Click on the translucent plane. It turns to yellow. The plane in which you can displace the fitted geometry turns to yellow.

6. Move the created target in that plane.


Extract Targets

The Extract feature allows the user to extract Spherical Targets, Black and

White Flat Targets, Point Targets and Point Targets (Corner) from TZF scans and use the extracted targets to register the stations they belong to.

To Extract Targets:

Step 1 , select a station from the station list.

2. In , click Extract . The Target Creator Tool dialog opens.

Note: The extract method, which appears in the Target Creator Tool , is the last used one.

Extract a Spherical Target

To Extract a Spherical Target:

1. If required click on the pull-down arrow.

Spherical Target as object type. The Target Creator Tool Toolbar appears as shown below.

Note: There are five predefined diameters: 76.20 mm, 100 mm, 139 mm, 200 mm and 230 mm.


Auto-Extract a Spherical Target

To Auto-Extract a Spherical Target:

1. Click on the Auto-Extract Target button.

2. Pick a point in the Input Data 2D Viewer .

If the target extraction succeeds; points of the created scan with a fitted geometry are displayed in the 3D View and the Fitting Tool toolbar opens as shown below. A scan (named TargetX ) is created and put under the current station.

An information box at the top right corner of the 3D View displays the number of points in the created scan as well as the Standard Deviation information

(except when the extraction fails). The Delete Las t button in the dialog becomes enabled.

Note: An error dialog opens when RealWorks cannot find a Spherical Target close to the picked point.


Fence an Area

You need to define an area from which a target will be created. This area is to be defined on the 2D image data in the 2D viewer.

To Fence an Area: the icon.

2. Pan (or zoom In or Out ) the 2D image data (if needed).

3. Draw a polygonal fence by picking and double-click to close the polygon.



(except when the extraction fails). If the area contains no points; nothing occurs.

Tip:

Instead of double-clicking, press on the Space Bar of your keyboard.

Press (or select New Fence or Close Polygon Tool from the pop-up menu) to undo the polygonal fence in progress.


Create the Fitted Geometry

To Create the Fitted Geometry: the toolbar, click the Create Fitted Geometry icon [A].

Or the toolbar, first click the Spherical Target icon.

And then, click the Create Fitted Geometry icon [B].

The created scan, whose name is TargetX , is of Spherical Target type. It is displayed in the Input Data 2D Viewer and 3D View . The Fitting Tool toolbar closes on its own. This Spherical Target is assigned as " Unmatched " and put in the Unmatched folder in the Targets Tree .

In the [A] method, the Spherical Target diameter is not constrained but results from the fencing of points (or auto-extracting). In the [B] method, the Spherical

Target diameter is constrained to the value in the Diameter field in the dialog

(or Diameter field in the Fitting Tool toolbar).

Properties of a scan (of Spherical Target type)

Properties of a scan (of Spherical Target type) fitted with a geometry

Note: A dialog appears if the user decides to close the Fitting Tool without creating the fitted geometry.


Extract a Black and White Flat Target

To Extract a Black and White Flat Target:


2. Choose as object type. The Target Creator

Tool Toolbar looks as shown below.

Note: In the 3D View , the extracted points are displayed with a size in pixels.

The size will automatically switch to 3 Pixels if it is lower than this value. The size will remain unchanged if it is equal or greater than 3 Pixels , the size will not change. This change is kept after you close the Target Creator Tool toolbar and leave the Target Analyzer Tool .


Auto-Extract a Black and White Flat Target

To Auto-Extract a Black and White Flat Target: the icon.




(except when the extraction fails).

Note: An error dialog opens when RealWorks cannot find a Black and White

Flat Target close to the picked point.


Fence an Area


To Fence an Area: the icon.


3. Draw a polygonal fence by picking and double-click to end.




Tip:


Press (or select New Fence or Close Polygon Tool from the pop-up menu) to undo the polygonal fence in progress.



To Create the Fitted Geometry: the toolbar, click the Create Fitted Geometry icon.

Or the toolbar, first click the Flat Target icon.

And then, click the Create Fitted Geometry icon.

The created scan, whose name is TargetX , is of Flat Target type. It is displayed in the Input Data 2D Viewer and 3D View . The Fitting Tool toolbar closes on its own. This Flat Target is assigned as " Unmatched " and put in the

Unmatched folder in the Targets Tree .

Properties of a scan (of Black and White Flat Target type)

Properties of a scan (of Black and White Flat Target type) fitted with a geometry



Extract a Point Target

To Extract Point Targets:


2. Choose as object type. The Target Creator Tool Toolbar looks as shown below.




Auto-Extract a Point Target

To Auto-Extract a Point Target: the icon.



An information box at the top right corner of the 3D View displays the number of points in the created scan as well as the Standard Deviation information.

The Delete Las t button in the dialog becomes enabled.

Note: An error dialog opens when RealWorks cannot find a Point Target close to the picked point.




The created scan, whose name is TargetX , is of Survey Point type. It is displayed in the Input Data 2D Viewer and in the 3D View . The Fitting Tool toolbar closes on its own. This Survey Point is assigned as " Unmatched " and put in the Unmatched folder in the Targets Tree .

Properties of a scan (of Point Target type)

Properties of a scan (of Point Target type) fitted with a geometry



Extract a Point Target (Corner)

To Extract Point Targets (Corner):


2. Choose as object type. The Target Creator Tool

Toolbar looks as shown below.




Auto-Extract a Point Target (Corner)

To Auto-Extract a Black and White Flat Target: the icon.


If the target extraction succeeds; points of the created scan with a fitted geometry and a manipulator are displayed in the 3D View.

The Fitting Tool toolbar opens as shown below. A scan (named TargetX ) is created and put under the current station.

If required, use the manipulator to modify the position of the target.



An error dialog opens when a Point Target cannot be found closed to the picked point.


We advise you to pick a point on a corner. The extraction (of a target) can fail if you pick a point on a flat surface. If that case occurs, only a point cloud is extracted and the Fitting Tool toolbar which opens looks as shown below.


Fence an Area


To Fence an Zone: the icon.



If the target extraction succeeds; points of the created scan with a fitted geometry and a manipulator are displayed in the 3D View.

The Fitting Tool toolbar opens as shown below. A scan (named TargetX ) is created and put under the current station.

If required, use the manipulator to modify the position of the target.



Tip:


Esc (or select New Fence or Close Polygon Tool from the pop-up menu) to undo the polygonal fence in progress.


Modify the Position of the Target

A manipulator is composed of three secant axis handles . T his manipulator is set at the position of the target. In addition to the three axis handles, the user can find three plane handles.

Use the manipulator to move the target along a direction. Click on an axis

Handle; it turns to yellow. The direction along which you can displace the target is highlighted in yellow and those along which you cannot displace the target are in mauve. Move the target along that direction.

Use the manipulator to pan the target in a plane. Click on a plane handle. It turns to yellow. A plane in yellow appears. Pan the target in that plane.

Note: In the Input Data 2D Viewer , you may not see the position of the target changed. This only occurs after you create the target in the database.




The created scan, whose name is TargetX , is of Survey Point type. It is displayed in the Input Data 2D Viewer and in the 3D View . The Fitting Tool toolbar closes on its own. This Survey Point is assigned as " Unmatched " and put in the Unmatched folder in the Targets Tree .

Properties of a scan (of Point Target type)

Properties of a scan (of Point Target type) fitted with a geometry


Update the Network

This step, which only appears when using the Target Analyzer Tool within the

Target-Based Registration Tool , allows the user to redo the adjustment of the stations after modifying the extracted targets e.g. refitting, deleting, etc.


Apply the Result

Once you are satisfied with the result, you can select another station and perform the same operations. When all selected stations are analyzed, you can save all results by using the Apply button. You can then evoke the Target-

Based Registration Tool for registering stations together.

Note: The Projection Mode in use by default (in the Target Analyzer Tool ) is

Perspective . If you are in Isometric (before entering the tool), the projection mode automatically switches to Perspective . Once the tool is closed, the projection mode is restored.


Cloud-Based Registration Tool

The purpose of this tool is to register two selected scanning stations (or two station groups). The basic idea behind this tool is that user should pick three corresponding point pairs from both the point clouds to initialize the registration. Then the software can refine this registration by using the common parts of the two point clouds. The registration error will be shown as an average distance between the two point clouds. User can also check the registration results visually by using the Cutting Plane Tool . The Cloud-Based

Registration Tool is available only in the Registration mode. In order to use this tool, you should select at least a set of two stations from the Scans Tree .

Open the Tool

You should select two objects from a single project in the Scans Tree . You have the choice between three combinations: two groups of stations, two stations or one group of stations and one station. You cannot select two projects.

To Open the Tool:

1. Select two different stations from the Scans Tree . the menu, select Cloud-Based Registration Tool .

The Cloud-Based Registration dialog opens.

Tip:

Cloud-Based Registration Tool icon can also be selected from the

Tools toolbar.

The input (of the selection) can be also a single group (with stations inside).


Select the Reference Cloud and the

Moving Cloud

The first selected station becomes a Reference Cloud . Its name is highlighted in the Reference Cloud field. The second selected station is a Moving Cloud .

Its name is displayed in the Moving Cloud field. The Number of Points of each are displayed in the dialog. The Reference Cloud (or Moving Cloud ) has a specific representation which can be seen when you drop down the Reference

Cloud (or Moving Cloud ) list.

2 - The Moving Cloud 1 - The Reference Cloud

The 3D View is split into two sub-views. The left sub-view displays the

Reference Cloud in red and the right sub-view the Moving Cloud in green. Only one sub-view can be active at once; it's the one with a yellow frame. As the default layout is two sub-viewers; you can use the View Manager to display in one full view window or to switch from one sub-view to another.


Because the refinement of the registration is based on the common parts of the two selected stations (or groups), you can use the Segmentation Tool to preselect these common parts or the Sampling Tool to simplify the clouds for registration refinement. The Create command for these two tools is disabled.

This means that you cannot save the result.

For either the Reference Cloud or the Moving Cloud , click the

Segmentation (or Sampling ) icon.

Inside each sub-view, select Sampling Reference Points ( or Sampling

Moving Points ) from the pop-up menu.

Note:

The fact of sampling (or segmenting) the Reference Cloud (or Moving

Cloud ) updates the Number of Points (of the Reference Cloud (or Moving

Cloud )).

When a group of stations has been selected as input, all scans of the group are displayed. The Number of Points is the sum of all points of all scans.

Caution: The number of points for the Reference Cloud (or for the Moving

Cloud ), in the case of a group (or a station) with a large amount of points, depends on the loading state defined in the status bar. Refer to the Point

Loading Manager chapter for more information.


To Select the Reference Cloud and the Moving Cloud:

1. Click on the Reference Cloud pull-down arrow.

2. Select a station from the Reference Cloud list.

3. Click on the Moving Cloud pull-down arrow

4. Select a station from the Moving Cloud list.

Note: The 3 Points button in Step 2 of Cloud-Based Registration dialog is enabled after opening the Cloud-Based Registration Tool . This means that you can start selecting points for the registration instead of sampling (or segmenting).


Pick Three Pairs of Points

The picking of points mode is set by default. You can go to pick three pairs of corresponding points from the clouds of both stations. Each pair of points should be picked on a similar position of the scene. Once the three pairs of points are selected, an initial registration is calculated and the clouds of two stations are superimposed.

To Pick Three pairs of Points:

1. Select a sub-view by clicking inside.

2. Pick a series of three points.

3. Select the other sub-view by clicking inside.

4. Pick another series of three points.

Or

5. Select a sub-view by clicking inside.

6. Pick a point.

7. Go to the other sub-view.

8. Pick a point.

9. Go back to the first sub-view and pick another point.

10. Repeat the steps until you reach three points on each displayed cloud.

1 - The Reference Cloud

2 - The first picked point in both clouds

3 - The Moving Cloud

4 - The second picked point in both clouds


A point once picked in the Reference Cloud (or Moving Cloud ) is indicated by a yellow square with a number inside. This number increases one-by-one from

One to Three each time you progress in your selection. You cannot exceed three. Once three pairs of points are selected, an initial registration is calculated and the clouds of the two selected stations (or group of stations) are superimposed. The two sub-views merge into one and the 3 Points button becomes enabled. This means that you are no longer in the selection mode.

You have to click again on the button if you want to perform a new selection. In each sub-view, you can navigate (like Zoom , Rotate , etc.) while you select points. Just click inside (except on displayed object(s)) to select it and a yellow frame appears. Otherwise, you select a registration point.

You cannot select an object which is displayed in each sub-view.

Note: To split the 3D View into three sub-views (the top right and left subviews display the Reference Cloud and Moving Cloud and the third sub-view displays the registration result), select Restore Default Layout from the pop-up menu.

Note: Once the registration of the two stations done, you can still carry out a sampling on each of them (or a segmentation on both). To do it, select one of the available commands: Segmentation , Sampling Reference Points , Sampling

Moving Points , Reloading Reference and Reloading Moving Points from the pop-up menu.


Note: To cancel the registration that you have carried and start a new one, click again 3 Points or select Undo from the pop-up menu. In the latter case, the 3D View remains in the one view mode.

Caution: To help you to easily pick points, you can lock each sub-view from rotating by selecting Screen Rotation from the 3D View / Mode menu. Be aware that the view merged from the two sub-views is not locked any more.

Refine Automatically the Registration

You can now refine the initial registration, if necessary. The refinement uses an iterative method. So you can perform several iterations to improve the results.

To Refine Automatically the Registration: the button to refine the result.

2. If required, click again Refine until you obtain the best registration result.


Refine Interactively the Registration

You can use either the Interactive Pan feature or the Interactive Rotation feature to refine the registration of the Moving Cloud with the Reference Cloud .

Both features let you to adjust manually the position and/or the orientation of the Moving Cloud with the Reference Cloud .

1 - Interactive Pan

2 - Interactive Rotation

3 - Change Manipulator Center

Tip: You can choose Interactive Pan or Interactive Rotation or Change

Manipulator Center from the pop-up menu.


Pan the Moving Cloud

To Pan the Moving Cloud: the icon.

A appears, not in the global coordinate system but in the local coordinate system of the Moving Cloud . It has as center the center of the Moving Cloud .

This manipulator has three secant Axis Handles , each with its own color (red, green and blue). In addition to the handles, you can find three Plane Handles .

At the same time, the Change Manipulator Center icon becomes enabled.

2. Pick It turns to yellow. The direction along which you can displace the Moving Cloud is highlighted in yellow. Those for which you cannot are in mauve. the along that direction.

4. Pick Plane Handle . It turns to yellow. The plane in which you can displace the Moving Cloud is highlighted in yellow. the in that plane.

Directions of Pan

Tip: You can deselect the Interactive Pan by pressing Esc .


Rotate the Moving Cloud

To Rotate the Moving Cloud: the icon.

A appears, not in the global coordinate system but in the local coordinate system of the Moving Cloud . It has as center the center of the Moving Cloud . manipulator has three Ring Handles, each with its own color

(red, green and blue). You can rotate the Moving Cloud around an axis passing through the center of a ring and perpendicular to it.

At the same time, the Change Manipulator Center icon becomes enabled.

2. Pick It turns to yellow. The axis around which the

Moving Cloud can be rotated is dotted and is in green.

3. Move around that axis.

2 - Axis of rotation 1 - Selected ring

4. For stations from a leveled instrument or from an instrument that is leveled and setup over a known point - respectively of blue color and green color in the Scans Tree - you can only rotate them around the Z-axis of the active coordinate frame; this is to preserve the leveling information on the stations.


A Manipulator with one ring

Tip: You can deselect the Interactive Rotation by pressing Esc .

Change the Manipulator Center Location

The default position of a Manipulator , when it appears, is the center of the

Moving Cloud .

To Change the Manipulator Center Location:

1. Click Change Manipulator Center Location . icon. The cursor becomes as cross. This means that you are in the picking mode*.

2. Pick a point on the displayed clouds.

Tip: You can use the C short-cut instead of selecting Change Manipulator

Center Location .

Note: (*) To leave the picking mode, you can either press Esc.

or click again the Change Manipulator Center Location icon.

Tip: You can set the center of a manipulator to a station position by picking on its related triangle.


Check the Quality of the Registration

You can either visually check the quality of the registration in the 3D View because each station (or group of stations) still remains with each own color* or control the errors displayed in the dialog.

Note: (*) Clouds are always rendered in Red and Green , regardless of the

Rendering option(s).

Check the Registration Error

A registration error is displayed in the dialog. This error, when it comes from the pickings of points, is called 3 Point Error . It is the average distance error of the three pairs of points.

The registration error, in the case of a refinement, is called Refine Error . It is the average distance error of the points present in the common parts of the two clouds. The number of common points is between brackets.

The 3 Point Error (or the Refine Error ) is expressed in the unit of measurement defined in the Preferences dialog.


Measure the Gap Between the Reference Cloud and the

Moving Cloud

You have to use the Cutting Plane Tool and the Measurement Tool for visually check the result.

To Measure the Gap Between the Reference Cloud and the Moving Cloud: the opens.

2. In , define a cutting plane.

button. The Cutting Plane dialog

2 - The Reference Cloud (red)

3 - The Moving Cloud (green)

1 - The gap between the Reference Cloud and the Moving Cloud

3. Move the slider from Up to Down and vice versa until you have the best cutting plane position.

4. In the planar view (the one under the 3D View ), check visually the gap between the Reference Cloud and the Moving Cloud . the icon in the Tools toolbar. The Measurement

Tool toolbar opens.

6. Measure the gap between the Reference Cloud and the Moving Cloud by picking one point from each cloud.

Close Tool in the Measurement Tool toolbar.

8. Click in the Cutting Plane dialog.


Overlap the Reference Cloud and the

Moving Cloud

Once you are satisfied with the registration result, you can overlap the selected stations using the common parts, by clicking .


Save the Registration Result

You can save the registration result either by using the Apply (or Group ) button. In the latter case, both stations will be put into a group which is automatically created under the current active folder of the Scans Tree .

To Save the Registration Result:

1. Click to validate the registration in the database.

2. Click to validate the registration and set the two objects in a new group.

Close .

Note: You can continue to register other stations without quitting the tool. If you use the Group command to put the stations just registered together, you can use it to register with another station. In this way, you can structure the

Scans Tree in such a way that it reflects the history of your registration procedure.


Orientation Tool

The Orientation Tool provides the user with tools to easily orientate a 3D scene after it has been locally registered. It is assumed that, in most cases, the instrument (used to acquire the 3D scene data) is leveled, and the Z axis is correct. The Orientation Tool then allows orienting the scene in 2D in order to re-define the X and Y axis.


Open the Tool

To Open the Tool:

1. Perform a display in the 3D View . the n menu, select Orientation Tool . The Orientation

Tool toolbar appears.

The 3D scene is locked in a 2D plane in the Top view (in the XY plane) with a 2D grid superimposed (if not hidden previously).

A temporary yellow frame appears:

If only one station is displayed in the 3D View , the origin of the yellow frame is the origin of the station.

If several stations are displayed in the 3D View , the origin of the yellow frame is the origin of the last station (from the project).

If several stations (with a TZF scan in each) are registered and displayed in the 3D View , the origin of the yellow frame matches the origin of the Reference Station .

Tip:

To close the Orientation Tool , press Esc .

Tools present in the Orientation Tool toolbar can also be reached from the pop-up menu.

Caution: You can enter in the tool without displaying anything. But this has no sense because most of the tools (in the Orientation Tool ) are based on picking on object(s) displayed in the 3D View . The Automatic Axis Definition icon in the

Orientation Tool toolbar is dimmed.

Note: There is no way to unlock the 3D scene from the 2D lock. Once in that

2D lock position, you can only Pan in the YZ plane, Zoom In (or Out ) along the

Z axis or Rotate around the Z axis.

Caution: Frame transformations cannot be applied to projects linked to remote datasets (those extracted from Scan Explorer ) (or to remote projects). When you attempt to perform such operations, an error dialog appears.


Define the Horizontal Axis by Picking

Two Points

To Define the Horizontal Axis by Picking Two Points:

1. Click . The cursor changes as follows *. The Picking Parameters toolbar appears in the

2D constraint mode. The yellow frame disappears from the 3D View .

2. Pick a 3D point in the 3D View .

3. Pick another 3D point in the 3D View .

The two picked points define an axis.

The 3D scene is then rotated (in the XY plane and around the Z axis of the current frame) so that this axis becomes horizontal.

The yellow frame reappears in the 3D View . It remains unchanged in position but not in orientation. Its X axis is then parallel to the picked axis.


Note:

(*) To leave the picking mode, press Esc .

Picking should not be necessary on the displayed object.

Automatic Axis Definition

The Automatic Axis Definition feature allows the user to find the correct orientation based on the Normal X , Normal Y and Normal Z information that are in the displayed point cloud.

To Automatically Define Axis:

Click .

Rotate Counterclockwise 90°

To Rotate Counterclockwise 90°:

Click . The whole 3D scene is then rotated of 90° counterclockwise. The yellow frame remains unchanged in position and in orientation.


Pick the Origin

The Pick Origin feature allows the user to associate a picked point with a

Known Point .

To Pick the Origin:

1. Click . The cursor changes as follows *. The Picking

Parameters toolbar appears in the 3D constraint mode

2. Pick a 3D point in the 3D View . The Define Origin dialog opens. The 3D coordinates of the picked point are displayed in the Picked 3D Point field.

The values in this field are not editable.

3. Input coordinates in the New Coordinates field.

4. Click . The Define Origin dialog closes. The origin of the yellow frame is then moved to the picked point.

Note:

(*) To leave the picking mode, press Esc .

Picking should be the on displayed cloud. You may hear a warning sound when picking an empty point.

Tip: You can select the 3D coordinates that appear in the Picked 3D Point field

(after picking a point).

Apply Transformation

To Apply Transformation:

1. Click . press . A dialog opens and prompts you to apply the transformation the Home Frame .

Yes . All coordinates of the current project are then modified. click to not apply.


Close the Tool

To Close the Tool:

1. Click . press . A dialog opens and prompts you to save the new orientation or not.

Yes to apply.

4. Or No to not apply.


Georeferencing Tool

Georeferencing describes the process of locating an object in "real world" coordinates. For example, you can georeference your house by determining its latitude and longitude coordinates. In RealWorks , the objective of this tool is to allow you to georeference a station (or a group of stations or a project) to a known coordinate system. To do this, you have to assign for some targets (or points) of the station (or group of stations) the corresponding known coordinates. Once you assign at least three pairs, a least squares fitting method will be used to calculate the best transformation. You can also import a control network surveyed by traditional surveying instruments, and use these control points to assign coordinates. If you apply this procedure station by station, this amounts to performing registration sequentially (in contrast to

Target-Based Registration where the least squares adjustment is applied simultaneously to all selected stations).

Caution: The Georeferencing Tool does only move point clouds. Geometries, created in OfficeSurvey (or Modeling ), are not moved anymore.


Open the Tool

To open the Georeferencing Tool , you need to select a station (or a group of stations or a project); no matter if the selection contains or not targets.

To Open the Tool:

1. Import a survey network file including measured points into your project, if required.

2. Select a station (or a project) from the Scans Tree and display it if required. the menu, select Georeferencing Tool . The

Georeferencing dialog opens.

This dialog box opens as the fourth tab of the WorkSpace window and is composed of four parts. Each of them corresponds to one step in the georeferencing procedure.

If the input is a lonely station, that station is by-default selected. All targets (if existed) of this station are listed in the Target List window.

If the input is a group of stations, the station selected by-default is the first by selection order. All targets (if existed) of this station are listed in the Target List window.

If the input is a project, that project is by-default selected. All targets

(if existed) of this project are listed in the Target List window.

1 - The selected station 2 - The Target List window 3 - Targets in the selected station

Note: A measured point may have two states: Matched or Unmatched . All measured points when unmatched are gathered into a folder named

Unmatched and rooted under the Project node in the Targets Tree . This folder can be reached by selecting the Targets tab.

Tip: The Georeferencing Tool can also be selected from the pop-up menu.


Select a Station

You should first select a station for which you want to georeference. Once it is selected, all targets (if existed) of this station are listed in the Target List window.

To Select a Station:

1. Click on the Select Station pull-down arrow.

2. Select a station from the Select Station list. This station is displayed in the

3D View and all targets that are inside are listed in the Target List window.

Note: Multi-selection is forbidden.

You cannot drop-down the list and select a station from if a project has been selected (as input of the tool). All targets from the project are listed in the

Target List window as illustrated below.


Assign Coordinates to Targets

If there are targets, you can select and assign one of them with known coordinates. You have two methods. If there is a control network imported, you can choose the corresponding one and use it to assign the coordinates.

Otherwise, you can key-in the coordinates in the text field. A target, once assigned with known coordinates, will be removed from the Target List window and put in a list under the By Target and By Picking buttons. Similarly, it will be displayed and numbered in the 3D View .

To Assign Coordinates to Targets:

1. Select a target in the Target List window. The By Target button becomes active.

2. Click on the By Target button. The Coordinates Assigning dialog opens.

1 - Name of the selected target 2 - Coordinates of the selected 3 - The Manual Edit method

(not editable) target (not editable) 4 - Topo points

This dialog is composed of three parts. For a target selected (from the

Georeferencing dialog or from the 3D View ), its name and coordinates appear in the first part of the dialog and you cannot modify them. The second part enables to assign coordinates to the selected target. You can either edit the coordinates by hand or select a measured point and assign its coordinates.

You can then validate the operation in the third part.


Edit known coordinates by hand.

Tools in the Registration Module a) The in the Topo Point field is set by default. If not, select it. b) Enter a known coordinate in the X field*. c) Enter a known coordinate in the Y field*. d) Enter a known coordinate in the Z field*.

Select known coordinates from the survey network file. a) Click on the Topo Point pull-down arrow. b) Select a Topo point from the list.

4. Keep the default name TopoPoint 1 .

5. Or enter a new name in the Name field

6. Click . The Coordinates Assigning dialog opens.

Note:

You can mix the two ways of assigning coordinates ( By Picking and By

Target ) in a single georeferencing operation without leaving the tool.


Tip: For assigning known coordinates to a target, you can select it from the

Target List window or pick on it in the 3D View . A selected target is highlighted in the 3D View .


Assign Coordinates to Picked Points

If there are no targets, the By Target button in the Georeferencing dialog is unavailable; you can then assign known coordinates to points picked in the 3D

View . You have two methods for assigning the coordinates. If there is a control network imported, you can choose the corresponding one and use it to assign the coordinates. Otherwise, you can key-in the coordinates in the text field.

To Assign Coordinates to Picked Points: the dialog, click on the By Picking button.

2. Pick one point on the displayed object(s). The Coordinates Assigning dialog opens.

1 - The picked point's default 2 - The picked point's 3 - The Manual Edit method name coordinates (not editable) 4 - Topo points

This dialog is composed of three parts. For a point picked in the 3D scene, a name by default PickPoint1 and its coordinates appear in the first part of the dialog. You can rename this picked point but you cannot modify its coordinates. The second part enables to assign know coordinates to the picked point. You can either edit the coordinates by hand or select a measured point and assign its coordinates. You can then validate the operation in the third part.

3. Keep the default name PickPoint 1 .



Edit known coordinates by hand.

Tools in the Registration Module a) Manual Edit in the Topo Point field is set by default. If not, select it. b) Enter a known coordinate in the X field. c) Enter a known coordinate in the Y field. d) Enter a known coordinate in the Z field.

Select known coordinates from the survey network file. a) Click on the Topo Point pull-down arrow. b) Select a Topo point from the list.

6. Keep the default name TopoPoint 1 .


OK .

Note:

If you have selected a station, you can only pick points of this station.

You can leave the picking mode by selecting Exit Picking Mode from the pop-up menu.

You can mix the two ways of assigning coordinates ( By Picking and By

Target ) in a single georeferencing operation without leaving the tool.


Tip: You can remove the Topo point labels from the 3D View by first selecting

Rendering , then Display 3D Labels from the 3D View menu.


Save the Result

Once at least three known coordinates have been assigned to targets or picked points, a least-squares fitting method will be automatically applied to calculate a best transformation. You can select and delete an already assigned target (or picked point). An assigned target when deleted will be removed from the list below the By Target and By Picking buttons and put again in the Target

List window for a new assignment. The error for each target (or picked point) will be expressed in terms of distance. You can un-check targets (or picked points) having the greatest error; the fitting method will be applied each time you check or un-check targets (or picked points). You can visualize errors in the 3D View by clicking Display Errors .

To Save the Result:

Display Errors .

The error is expressed in millimeters

Apply .

3. Click .

Note:

A measured point (from the survey network file) once assigned is set as matched.

Leaving without applying the georeferencing will display an error message which prompts to abort or continue the operation.

Tip: You can quit the Georeferencing Tool by pressing Esc or by selecting

Close from the pop-up menu.


Bundle Adjustment

In this tool, all targets of the entire project are matched without user intervention. This tool shares the same dialog as the Target-Based

Registration Tool .

To Bundle Adjust:

1. Select a project from the Project Tree . the menu, select Bundle Adjustment . The Target-Based

Registration dialog opens as well as the Registration Details dialog.

In the Target-Based Registration dialog, targets are automatically matched.

The Adjust button in Step 3 of the Target-Based Registration is grayed-out. In the Registration Details dialog, the Station View is set by default. Each target is automatically paired with other targets.

In the Targets Tree , targets matched together are put in a folder named mTARGET and rooted under the Project node.

3. Click . The Target-Based Registration dialog closes. All the changes are applied to the database. click . An information box appears and prompts user to apply the changes in the database or not.


Name-Based Bundle Adjustment

The Name-Based Bundle Adjustment feature first un-matches any already matched target* and then matches all targets of the whole project by associating them by name. This feature shares the same dialog as the Target-


To Bundle Adjust by Name:


2. In menu, select Name-Based Bundle Adjustment . The

Target-Based Registration dialog opens as well as the Registration Details dialog.

Targets are automatically matched by their name. The Adjust button in Step 3 of the Target-Based Registration is grayed-out. In the Registration Details dialog, the Station View is set by default.

3. Switch to the Target View . Targets that are paired by their name are put in a folder named by the target name.

Apply . The Target-Based Registration dialog closes. All the changes are applied to the database.

5. Or . An information box appears and prompts user to apply the changes in the database or not.

Note: When you select a project for which any target can be matched by name, you will be automatically direct to the basic Target-Based Registration

Tool.


Tip: (*) You can also select a project for which no target has been matched.

Note: Targets that are matched together are not renamed.


Station Registration Parameters

A TZF format file holds registration parameters which are Vector of Translation ,

Axis of Rotation and Angle of Rotation . On first import of TZF format files, in the case of a new project e.g., RealWorks creates new stations and automatically initialize them with the registration parameters of the TZF format files. These registration parameters will no longer to be read (or written) anymore after the initialization even if they are changed in the meantime. The only way these parameters can be read (or written) is by performing an explicit import (or export).


Import from TZF Files

The Import Station Registration Parameters from TZF Files feature, when selected (from the Registration menu), allows the reading of registration information from TZF format files and applying them to the station they belong to, as illustrated below

Note:

No selection is required but you need to have at least a project loaded in

RealWorks .

If the project contains a station that is not valid (with no TZF Scan(s) within), a dialog opens and asks you to proceed with the remaining station(s). Choosing No will interrupt the import process.


Export to TZF Files

The Export Station Registration Parameters to TZF Files feature, when selected (from the Registration menu), allows the writing of the registration information of a station into all its related TZF format files, as illustrated below.

Note: You need to have at least a project loaded in RealWorks and you need to perform a selection from the project to enable this feature, whatever the selection.


Export to RMX Files

This feature lets you export the Station Registration Parameters that have been applied to stations (empty or not) in batch (or interactive) processing mode. The registration parameters ( Vector of Translation , Axis of Rotation and

Angle of Rotation ) are stored in a file of RMX format which is an ASCII format file. One RMX format file will be created for each station. The RMX format file has the same name as the registered station.

To Export Station Registration Parameters to RMX Files:

1. First apply transformation to stations (if required)*.

2. Then select either a project (or a station (or a set of stations)).

3. From menu, select Export Station Registration

Parameters to RMX Files . The Select New File Folder dialog opens.

4. Navigate to the drive/folder where you want to store the RMX format files in the In field.

Open . The Select New File Folder dialog closes.

Below is an example of what a RMX format file looks like.

Note: (*) If any transformation has been applied to stations; the registration parameters ( Vector of Translation , Axis of Rotation and Angle of Rotation ) are equal to zero.


Register Stations With Imported RMX Files

This feature allows you to import and apply registration parameters to stations

(empty or not) in batch (or interactive) processing mode. The registration parameters ( Vector of Translation , Axis of Rotation and Angle of Rotation )* are stored in a file of RMX format which is an ASCII format file. You need to have one RMX format file per station. The RMX format file has the same name than the station to register.

To Register Stations With Imported RMX Files:

1. Select a project or a station (or a set of stations).

2. From menu, select Register Stations With Imported RMX

Files . The Select New File Folder dialog opens.

3. Navigate to the drive/folder where the RMX format files are stored in the In field.

4. Select and open the folder by double-clicking on it**.

The format files will be processed one after the one.

For a given RMX format file, if RealWorks finds a related station; the registration parameters will be applied to the station. If the RMX format file has no corresponding station; the warning dialog below appears. Click OK . The registration parameters won't be applied.

Note:

(*) 3D coordinates in millimeters.

(**) Otherwise the above warning dialog appears.


Modify Stations

The " Modify Stations " menu gathers the operations the user can apply to stations.

Force Leved

A station for which the leveling information is missing because the instrument had not been initially leveled can be forced leveled.

To Force Leveled:

1. Select an un-leveled station from the Scans Tree .

2. In menu, select Modify Station / Force Leveled .

In the Scans Tree , the selected item switches from to .

In the Property window, the " Scanner Leveling " state switches from " False " to

" True ". The " Instrument Height " and " Projected Instrument Position " appear with respectively 0.00 m as distance value for the first and 0,0,0 as coordinates for the second.


Note: You are not allow to change the leveling property of a set of stations.


Modify the Instrument Height

To Modify the Instrument Height:

1. Select a leveled station from the Scans Tree . the menu, select Modify Station / Modify Instrument Height .

The Modify Station Height dialog opens.

3. Enter a distance value in the Station Heigh t field.

4. Click . The Modify Station Height dialog closes.

In the Property window, the current value of the " Instrument Height " line changes. In the example below, the keyed-in value 1.50 m is displayed instead of 0.

The new set value is added to the Z coordinate of all items (point, geometry, scanner origin, etc.) of the selected station.

Tip: You can also select and right-click on a leveled station in the Project Tree and select Modify Instrument Height from the pop-up menu.

Caution: You can undo the operation.

Note: If some targets of the selected station have been previously paired with targets of other stations, a warning message appears and warns you that a

Bundle Adjustment of the project is now necessary to adjust corresponding stations.


Tip: If the selected station has several TZF Scans within, you can select a unique TZF Scan and set an Instrument Height to it. This parameter is then applied to the station the TZF Scan belongs to.


Set Over a Known Point

Setting-up a station over a Known Point consists of associating both together.

A Known Point can be a fitted target (sphere or flat target), a Survey Point or a

Topo Point . It must belong to a different station than the selected one.

To Setup Over a Known Point:

1. Select a leveled station from the Scans Tree .

2. In menu, select Modify Station / Set Over Known Point .

The Set Over Known Point dialog opens.

3. Expand if required.

1 - A leveled station* 2 - Registration items the dialog, the Project Tree gathers all registration items except those belonging to the selected station.

5. Select an item. The OK button becomes enabled.

6. Click . The Set Over Known Point dialog closes.

In the Scans Tree , the station item switches from * to .

In the Property window, the " Over a Known Point " line appears. The selected item's name appears in that line. The " Projected Instrument Position " and

" Scanner Origin " lines are updated respectively with the selected item's 3D coordinates and the selected item's 3D coordinates plus the Instrument Height value for the Z value.

Tools in the Registration Module the , a matched folder is created with the selected station and the known point inside.


Note:

If some targets of the selected station have been previously paired with targets of other stations, a warning message appears and warns you that a Bundle Adjustment of the project is now necessary to adjust corresponding stations.

(*) It is not necessary to have a leveled station as input.

Caution: The Set Over Known Point feature is dimmed if there is no target inside the other station.


Remove a Known Point

Removing a Known Point from a station consists of dissociating one from the other; this doesn't require any parameter and no dialog appears. You can change the current Known Point of a station; first remove it and then associate a new Known Point .

To Remove a Known Point:

1. Select a station setup over a known point from the Scans Tree . the menu, select Remove Known Point .

In the Scans Tree , the selected station switches from to .

In the Property window , the " Over a Known Point " line disappears. Note that the coordinates in the " Projected Instrument Position " and " Scanner Origin " lines remain unchanged.



Force Unleved

To Force Unleved:

1. Select a leveled (or setup over a known point) station from the Scans

Tree . the menu, select Force Leveled .

In the Scans Tree , the selected item switches from (or ) to .

In the Property window, the " Scanner Leveling " state switches from " True " to

" False ". For a leveled station, the " Instrument Height " and " Projected

Instrument Position " information are lost. For a setup over a known point station, the " Instrument Height ", " Over a Known Point " and " Projected

Instrument Position " information are lost.



Modify Target Matching

The " Modify Target Matching " menu gathers the operations the user can apply to targets.

Match an item With Another Item

Matching a pair of targets consists of pairing one with the other. The Match

With command can be reached from the Registration menu or within e.g. the

Target-Based Registration Tool in the Registration Details dialog after autopairing of targets. You can select an unmatched item (or matched item) as input of that tool.

To Match an Item with Another Item:

1. Select a registration item (matched or not) from the Project Tree . the menu, select Modify Target Matching / Match With .

The Match With dialog opens. the dialog, expand the Project Tree if required.

In the Match With dialog, the Project Tree gathers all unmatched registration items except those belonging to the selected station.

4. Select an unmatched item from the Match With dialog. The OK button becomes active.

If the selected item is not yet matched, both are matched together and put under a matched folder in the Targets Tree .

If the selected item is already matched, both are also matched together but no matched folder is created in the Targets Tree . The item selected for matching (in the Match With dialog) is put under the existing matched folder (the one inside which reside the selected item and its pair).

Tip: You can also right-click on an unmatched item from the Project Tree and select Match With from the pop-up menu.


Match Targets

You can manually pair an unmatched target with another unmatched target.

Both must not reside under the same station. You can also pair two different stations. Both need to be leveled and setup over a Known Point .

Note:

You can undo the operation. the (or Shift ) key combined with the left-click for multi-select items.

Match Targets

To Match Targets:

1. Select an unmatched target from a station in the Project Tree .

2. Select another unmatched target from a different station in the Project

Tree .

3. In menu, select Modify Target Matching / Match Targets .

Targets (once paired) are put under a matched folder in the Scans Tree .


Match Stations

To Match Stations:

1. Select two stations (leveled and setup over a known point) from the Scans

Tree . the menu, select Modify Target Matching / Match

Targets . A dialog opens and prompts you to accept the removal of a target

(or not).

Yes to accept.

Note:

You can undo the operation.

Use (or Shift ) key combined with the left-click for multi-select items.


Un-match a Target

Un-matching a pair of matched targets consists of dissociating one from the other. Selecting a matched target will unmatch the pair that it belongs to.

Selecting a station will unmatch all pairs of matched targets that are inside.

To Un-match a Target: the dialog*, select a matched entity from a station in the Station View (or from a pair in the Target View ). The Match Wit h and

Unmatch buttons become enabled.

2. Click on the Unmatch button.

Or

3. Select a matched entity from a pair. the menu, select Modify Target Matching / Unmatch

Target .

Tip: You can also right-click on a matched item from the Project Tree and select Un-match Target from the pop-up menu.


Rename a Target

Auto-Pairing Targets: Targets and target groups are renamed. Instead of being named TargetX and mTargetX where X is an order, they are renamed as XXX .

XXX starts at 001 and is incremented by one. Manual-Pairing Targets: Targets keep their default name and target groups are renamed as described above.

The Rename Targets feature allows renaming of targets in case the manual method has been used.

To Rename Targets:

1. Select a target group from the Targets Tree . the menu, select Modify Target Matching / Rename

Targets . Targets are renamed according to the target group name they belong to.

Tip: You can also right-click on a target group and select Rename Targets from the pop-up menu.


Create Points

The " Create Points " menu gathers the operations related to the creation of points.

Create a Topo Point

To Create a Topo Point:

1. Select anything from the Project Tree . the menu, select Create Points / Create Topo Point . The

Create New Topo Point dialog opens.

3. Keep the default name TopoPoint .

4. Or enter a new name in the Topo Point Name field.

If the given name does not exist, jump to the next step.

If the given name already exists, a dialog appears and prompts to set a new name instead. Click Yes to use the new name.

5. Enter new coordinates in the Coordinates field.

6. Click . The Create New Topo Point dialog closes.

An unmatched Topo Point is created and placed under a station (named

TopoStation System ) in the Scans Tree . This Topo Point is shown in the 3D

View .


Tip: You can display (or hide) the Topo Point 's 3D Labels by selecting



Create a Point Cloud from Topo Points

To Create a Point Cloud from Topo Points:

1. Select (or a set of TopoPpoints ) from the Scans Tree . the menu, select Create Points / Create Point Cloud from

Topo Points .

Each Topo Point is converted to a 3D coordinate point. In the Scans Tree , all are gathered in a scan named TopoStationCloud which is placed under a leveled station (blue color) named FromTopoStation . This scan is displayed in the 3D View . In the Models Tree , a new point cloud (named FromTopoStation ) is created.

Note:

You cannot undo the operation.

By default, the Project Cloud does not contain the newly created point cloud.


Create 3D Points

You can convert any registration entity (matched or unmatched) to a 3D coordinate point. A registration entity can be a Spherical Target , a Flat Target , a Survey Point coming from a survey network file, an imported Topo Point or a

Topo Point created within a RealWorks tool such as the Georeferencing Tool or a target obtained by geometry fitting. The idea of this feature is to convert the barycentre of a registration entity to a 3D Point . This barycentre is the averaged center position when selecting a set of matched targets.

Create a 3D Point From a Target

To Create a 3D Point from a Target:

1. From , select a set of matched (or unmatched) entities from a station.

2. From menu, select Create Points / Create 3D Points From

Targets . An information box opens.

OK . The information box closes.

A group named Target_Point (x) is created and rooted under the current project in the Models Tree ; where X is its creation order. This group gathers the entities that are converted to 3D Points . There is a Target_Point group per conversion. Each 3D Point has the name of the entity it is issued from.

Note: A selection is always from the Scans Tree . When you select an unmatched entity from the Unmatched folder (or a matched entity from a pair) in the Targets Tree , only the From Matched Targets command is available. For both a warning message appears and warns that the selection is not valid.

Tip: You can display (or hide) the 3D Point 's 3D Labels by selecting



Creating 3D Points From Matched Targets

To Convert a Pair of Matched Entities to a 3D Point:

1. From , select at least a pair of matched entities. the menu, select Create Points / Create 3D Points From

Matched Targets . An information box opens.

OK . The information box closes.

A group of AverageCenter_mTarget is created and rooted under the current project in the Models Tree.

This group contains the average barycenter of the matched entities. Each 3D Point has the name of the pair (of matched entities) it is issued from.

Note:

There is no Undo .

Create 3D Points From Matched Targets command is available even if you select a single matched entity from a pair. But a warning message appears and warns you that the selection is not valid. No 3D Point is then created in the Models Tree .

Tip: You can display (or hide) the 3D Point 's 3D Labels by selecting



Create a Registration Report (Target-Based)

The Registration Report (Target-Based) feature lets the user to create a report after on a registration (based on paring of targets) in an RTF (Rich Text

Format) file. The RTF specification is a method of encoding formatted text and graphics for easy transfer between applications. Currently, users depend on special translation software to move word-processing documents between different MS-DOS®, Windows, OS/2, Macintosh, and Power Macintosh applications. The RTF specification provides a format for text and graphics interchange that can be used with different output devices, operating environments, and operating systems. This feature is only available in

Registration . You can only create one report per project. If several projects exist under the Project Tree , the report concerns the project which contains the active group. For a given project, if any registration has been performed, the report is empty of information.

To Create a Registration Report (Target-Based):


2. From menu, select Registration Report (Target-Based) .

The Registration Report (Target-Based) dialog opens.

3. Navigate to the drive/folder where you want the report file to be stored in the Look In field.

4. Enter a name in the File Name field. The extension RTF is added automatically.

Save .

Note: The results in the report are spilt into two categories: By Stations and By

Targets .


Create a Registration Report (Scan-Based)

This feature lets you to recompute the Registration Report once TZF Scans are registered together. Within the feature, no extraction (of points) is permitted, only a recomputation of the Registration Report is done if a new selection of the Reference Station (or Group ) is requested. This feature has the same input requirements as Auto-Register Using Planes (Target-Less) .

To Create a Registration Report (TZF-Based):

1. Select at least two stations, a group (or set of groups), or a project with

TZF Scan within from the Scans Tree .

2. From menu, select Registration Report (Scan-Based) .

The Registration Report Using TZF Scans dialog opens.

The (or Reference Group ) is in bold.

None of the stations (or groups) is selected. By default, all of the stations (or groups) are checked.

If required, use to select (CHECKED) all of the stations (or groups) from the tree.

If required, use to unselect (UNCHECKED) all of the stations (or groups) from the tree.

In the case of groups only, all of them are collapsed by default.

If required, use (or ) to expand all groups (or a unique group) from the tree.

If required, use (or ) to collapse all groups (or a unique group) from the tree.

Select a station from the tree. It is highlighted. If there is a unique

TZF Scan within (the selected station), its preview is displayed in the dialog as shown below. If there are several TZF Scans within, the preview of the Main TZF Scan is displayed.


You can select several stations (from the tree) by using the Ctrl (or

Shift ) key combined with the left clicking. No preview is displayed.

Check all of the stations you need for your registration and uncheck those are not necessary.

3. If required, drop-down the Reference Station list.

4. Choose a station (or group) as Reference Station .

5. Click .

C H A P T E R 1 0

Tools in the OfficeSurvey Module

When you load a file of any format - except SIMA and TXT with topopoints - that had never been previously saved in the RealWorks format; the

OfficeSurvey ™ processing mode is set by default. When you load a file - saved in the RealWorks format and in the OfficeSurvey ™ processing mode; that file will be opened with that processing mode set. When you are out of this processing mode and you need to be in it; you have to click on the pull-down arrow in the Tools toolbar and choose OfficeSurvey ™.

The OfficeSurvey processing mode is present in all RealWorks products. Tools in the OfficeSurvey menu* differ from a license to another. The table below lists the contents the user can have according to the license (of RealWorks ) he has.

Note: (*) In RealWorks Viewer , there is no OfficeSurvey menu.

557

Cutting Plane Tool

The Cutting Plane Tool enables to cut a selected entity (point cloud or mesh) with a plane whose position and orientation need to be defined by the user.

The result of this cut is a sectioned point cloud or a polyline. This tool can be used alone as a main tool or inside a main tool as a sub-tool. In the latter case, it is mainly used as a visual quality checking tool and no results can be created.


Open the Tool

To open the tool, you should first select either a point cloud or a mesh. If a point cloud is selected, you can clean it by removing for example parasite points or reduce it by sampling or by fencing an area. These can be done thanks to the two following sub-tools ( Sampling and Segmentation ). If a mesh is selected, these two sub-tools are unavailable.

To Open the Tool:

1. Select an object (point cloud or mesh) from the Project Tree .

2. From menu, select Cutting Plane Tool . The Cutting

Plane dialog opens.

This dialog opens as the third tab of the WorkSpace window and is composed of four parts. The first part ( Define Cutting Plane ) contains tools for defining a plane. The second part ( Define Slice ) allows you to set a thickness for the plane defined in the previous step and to choose between Single Slice and

Multi Slice . The third part ( Control ) is to preview the result(s). The last step is to save the result(s).

1 - A plane

2 - The slider

3 - The selection required to open the tool

4 - The bounding box

A planar view with a 2D grid that you can customize opens below the 3D View .

A plane perpendicular to the screen and a slider appear in the 3D View . This plane runs across a point that corresponds to the centre of the selection

(required to open the tool). This point sets the altitude ( Offset ) of that plane. In this case, it is 0 mm*. The bounding box that highlights the selection delineates the size of that plane.

Tools in the OfficeSurvey Module

3. From now, you should define a plane. First, you should set its orientation.

Then you can define its position.

Note: (*) The current unit of measurement is in Millimeter. You can change it in the Preferences dialog.

Define the Orientation of a Plane

There are four methods for precisely defining the orientation of a plane. The first method is to select an axis (from the active frame) so that the initial plane becomes perpendicular to it. The second method is by picking an object’s local frame. The third method is to specify the coordinates of its normal vector. The fourth method is to edit parameters.

There are three methods for visually defining the orientation of a plane. The first method is to pick two points. The initial plane will pass through the line defined by these two points and perpendicular to the screen plane. The second method is to pick three points. The initial plane will pass through the plane drawn by these three points. The third method is to define a plane. The initial plane will be parallel to the defined plane.

1 - Select From Frame

2 - Fit


4 - Plane Perpendicular to

Screen

5 - Pick Three Points on Plane

6 - Edit Parameters

Set Coordinates

To Set Coordinates:

Enter the coordinates of a plane’s normal vector in the Normal field.


Select a Frame Axis

This method consists of selecting an axis from the active frame as Normal direction. The initial plane will be moved so that its Normal will be parallel to the selected axis. Its position in the 3D scene will be kept and its Offset

(altitude) will be reset.

To Select a Frame Axis:

1. Click on the Set from Frame pull down arrow. among , Y Axis and Z Axis (in the X , Y and Z

Coordinate System ).

3. Or choose among North Axis , East Axis and Elevation Axis (in the North , East and Elevation Coordinate System ).

Pick an Object Local Frame

This method consists of picking an object's local frame. The initial plane will be moved so that its Normal will be parallel to the picked local frame. Its position in the 3D scene and its Offset (altitude) will be set by the picked point.

To Pick an Object Local Frame: the icon. The initial cutting plane disappears from the 3D View . the window, click on the Models tab.

3. Right-click on the selection to display the pop-up menu.

4. Select .

Note: Pressing Esc while the picking is in progress will cancel the selected point(s) and makes appeared the last defined plane.



This method consists of picking three points. The initial plane will be moved so that it will pass through the three picked points. Its position in the 3D scene and its Offset (altitude) will be the barycentre of the three picked points.

To Pick Three Points: the icon. The Picking Parameters toolbar appears.

2. Pick three points (free or constrained). Picking is always on the displayed object.

1 - Picked points 2 - The cutting plane passes through the picked points



Pick Two Points

This method consists of picking two points. The initial plane will be moved so that it will pass through the two picked points and perpendicular to the screen.

To Pick Two Points: the icon.

2. Pick two points. No need to pick on the displayed object.


Fit With a Geometry

To Fit With a Geometry:

1. Click on the Fit pull-down arrow.

2. Choose one of the following:

Select . The Fitting Tool toolbar appears as well as an information window at the top right corner of the 3D View .



Fit a Plane

1 - In (i)

2 - Out (o)

3 - Display Un-partitioned Points

To Fit a Plane:

4 - Plane

5 - Create Fitted Geometry

6 - Close Tool (Escape)

1. Fence a set of points for which you want to fit with a plane.

2. Click icon. Kept points are fitted with a plane.

Note: It is not necessary to fence a set of points; fitting a plane can be applied to the entire point cloud.

Finding the Best Cross Plane

1 - In (i)

2 - Out (o)


To Find the Best Cross Plane:

4 - Plane Normal



1. Fence a set of points with which you want to fit a plane.

2. Click icon. Kept points give the projection plane’s normal direction.

Note: It is not necessary to fence a set of points; finding the best cross plane can be applied to the entire point cloud.


Edit Parameters

To Edit Parameters: the icon. The 3D Plane Editing dialog opens.

2. Click on the pull down arrow and do one of the following:

Chose to define a normal and a position. a) Enter a direction in the Normal field. b) Enter a point position in the Point field.

Chose to define two points. Points(To) - Point (From) defines a normal and Point (From) gives a position. a) Enter a point position in the Point (To) field. b) Enter a point position in the Point (From) field.

OK . The 3D Plane Editing dialog closes.

Define the Position of a Plane

There are three methods for defining a plane's position. The first method is to define this position by one point. You can either pick this point in the displayed scene or key in its coordinates. We call this method By Offset . The second method is to define this position by two points. This can be used, for example, to find the center plane of two parallel walls of a building. We call this method

By Interpolation . You can either pick the points in the displayed cloud or give their exact coordinates. Then you can use the Ratio field to define the position of the cutting plane precisely between these two points. Ration 0 will put the position coincident with the first point, and Ratio 1 with the second point. The third method is to use the slider at the left side of the 3D View to move the plane. This can be used to visually define the position of a plane and is often used for visual checking of registration quality.


By Offset

To Define a Position By Offset:

1. Check option.

2. Enter a point position in the Point field. click . The Picking Parameters toolbar appears in 3D constraint mode.

4. Pick one point in the 3D scene.

The cutting plane passes through that point.

Offset value is set to 0.00*.

Note:

(*) In the current unit of measurement. You can change it in Preferences .

Moving the slider Up (or Down ) will increase (or decrease) the Offset value.


By Interpolation

To Define a Position By Interpolation:

1. Check option.

2. Enter a point position in the Point 1 field.

3. Or click the Pick First Point icon. The Picking Parameters toolbar appears in 3D constraint mode and the cursor becomes as shown below.

4. Pick a point in the 3D scene.

The initial plane will pass through Point 1 .

Ratio value is equal to 0.

5. Enter another point position in the Point 2 field.

6. Or click the Pick Second Point icon. The Picking Parameters toolbar appears in 3D constraint mode and the cursor becomes as shown below.

7. Pick another point in the 3D scene.

The initial plane will pass through Point 2 .

Ratio value is equal to 1.

8. Define the exact position of the plane by entering a value between 0 and 1 in the Ratio field.


Define a Slice

After defining a plane, you now need to decide whether to perform a Single

Slice or Multiple Slice cutting. In the case of a Single Slice , the cutting will be along the defined plane. You will then choose the thickness of the slice in order to cut the point clouds. In the case of a Multiple Slice , you also need to define the interval between two slices. The slices will be propagated from the position of the defined plane in two directions with the given interval. The number of slices indicated at the bottom of the dialog is calculated in such a way that slices will span the whole range of the point cloud along the normal direction of the defined plane.

Define a Single Slice

To Define a Single Slice:

1. Check option.

2. Enter a value in the Thickness field.

3. Or use the Up and Down buttons to select a value.

Define a Multiple Slice

To Define a Multiple Slice: the option.


3. Enter a value in the Interval field.


Note: The Thickness value cannot exceed the Interval value. It can only be the same.


Preview a Single Slice

If the Single Slice option has been chosen, the Preview button remains inactive. The top window displays the selected object (point cloud or mesh) with the defined plane. The planar view displays in real time the cutting result.

There is by default a 2D Grid superposed on the displayed sliced cloud; you can choose to change the grid size or to hide it by using the corresponding items from the pop-up menu. Note that the View Manager toolbar appears at the bottom of the 3D View . You can use the icons to change the configuration of the two sub-views.

1 - The 3D View

2 - The Planar View

3 - The point cloud

4 - A point cloud slice

Note: If the selected object is a mesh, the cutting result will be a polyline.

Otherwise the result will be a cloud slice.


Preview a Multiple Slice

If the Multiple Slice option has been chosen, the Preview button switches from inactive to active and the planar view becomes empty of contents (see [A]).

Clicking Preview will display the cutting results in the 3D View and will remove the defined plane representation from it. The active slice, the one in pink in the

3D View , is shown in the planar view (see [B]). The Control tools (see Step 3 of the Cutting Plane dialog) become active. In the planar view, there is by default a 2D Grid superposed on the displayed sliced cloud; you can choose to change the grid size or to hide it by using the corresponding items in the popup menu. Note that the View Manager toolbar appears at the bottom of the 3D

View . You can use the icons in this toolbar to change the configuration of the two sub-views.

[A]

1 - 3D view

2 - Planar view

3 - Point Cloud


[B]

1 - The 3D View

2 - The Planar view

3 - A set of point cloud slices

4 - The Active point cloud slice

Note: If the selected object is a mesh, the cutting results will be polylines.

Otherwise the results will be cloud slices.


Build Polylines

To Build a Polyline from a Single Slice:

2D-EasyLine . The 2D-EasyLine dialog opens.

2. Build a polyline from the slice.

3. Click . The 2D-EasyLine dialog closes.

To Build Polylines from a Multiple Slice:

1. To select a slice, do one of the following:

Pick a slice in the 3D View .

Use tools as follows:

Click to view the one after the active slice.

1 - Display First Slice 3 - Display Next Slice

2 - Display Last Slice 4 - Display Previous Slice

Click to view the one before the active slice.

Display First Slice to view the first slice.

Click to view the last slice.

Key in a number and press Enter .

2. Click on the 2D-EasyLine button. The 2D-EasyLine dialog opens.

3. Build a polyline from the slice.

Apply . The 2D-EasyLine dialog closes.

Note:

Instead of clicking Display Next Slice or ( Display Previous Slice ), you can also use the Up (or Down ) key on your keyboard.

You can multi-select cloud slices (or polylines) in the 3D View using the

Ctrl + A shortcut keys, open the 2D-EasyLine ™ Tool and build polylines based on the selected cloud slices or polylines.

The is not available in RealWorks Viewer .


Save the Cutting Result(s)

If you are satisfied with the cutting result(s), you can create it (or them) in the database. When selecting Single Slice , only an object will be created. When selecting Multiple Slice , a folder* will be created in which each slice result

(including sliced cloud and the polyline if it exists) will be created as an object.

You can create as many cutting planes as you need without leaving the Cutting

Plane Tool .

To Save the Cutting Result(s):

Create .

2. Click .

Note:

Close can also be selected from the pop-up menu. the without saving the result(s) will make appeared a warning message.

(*) The folder default name is Cross-Cut-Interval -XX-Th YY . XX is the

Interval value and YY the Thickness value.


Contouring Tool

The purpose of the Contouring Tool is to create iso-contours from 2.5 point cloud(s) or mesh(es) along the Z Axis (or Elevation Axis ) of the active coordinate frame. The output of this tool will be a set of contours, each of which is represented by a polyline lying on the plane situated at the corresponding elevation.

Open the Tool

To Open the Tool:

1. Select an object (point cloud or mesh) from the Project Tree . the menu, select Contouring Tool . The Contouring dialog opens.

This dialog opens as the third tab of the WorkSpace window and is composed of several parts. The first part contains two sub-tools ( Segmentation and

Sampling )*. If the input is a point cloud, you can clean it by removing parasite points (or reduce its size by simplifying it). The way that point cloud is rendered changes. Its Rendering swaps to White Color . If the input is a mesh, both subtools are grayed-out and Its Rendering remains unchanged. The second part enables to define an elevation range. The third part enables to set a tolerance for contour decimation. The fourth part is to define principal contours and the last part lets you to display and save the contour creation results.

Note:

You can leave the Contouring Tool by pressing Esc or by right-clicking anywhere in the 3D View to display the pop-up menu and select Close .

(*) The results issued from the use of both sub-tools cannot be saved. The

Create command is deactivated.


Define an Elevation Range

A default elevation range is setup so that the High Elevation and Low Elevation correspond to the top and bottom of the bounding box that highlights the selected object. This elevation range is represented by a graduated vertical bar. A Cutting Plane perpendicular to the Z (or Elevation ) Axis of the active coordinate frame runs across the Low Elevation of the default Elevation Range and its size (only width) is given by the bounding box size (only width).

1 - High Elevation

2- Low Elevation

3 - Bounding box

4 - Bounding box's width

5 - Cutting Plane

6 - Bottom of the bounding box

7 - Elevation Range

8 - Top of the bounding box


Set the Low and High Elevation Values

To Set the Low and High Elevation Values:

1. Enter a value in the From field and press Enter .

1 - Low Elevation 3 - Icons for resetting the initial value

2 - High Elevation

2. Enter a value in the Top field and press Enter .

3. If required, get back the initial Low (or High ) Elevation value by clicking the

Reload Initial Low Elevation (or Reload Initial High Elevation ) icon.


Pick the Low and High Elevations

To Pick the Low and High Elevations: the icon. The Picking Parameters toolbar appears. The Cutting Plane and the graduated vertical bar are removed from the 3D View .

2. Pick a point on displayed object in the 3D View. It’s up to the user to pick a point (freely or with constraint).

1 - Pick Low Elevation

2 - Pick High Elevation

3 - Reload Initial Elevation

3. Repeat the two upper steps for the High Elevation .

4. If required, get back the initial Low (or High ) Elevation value by clicking the

Reload Initial Low Elevation (or Reload Initial High Elevation ) icon.

Define an Interval Value

To Define an Interval Value:

1. Enter a value in the Interval field and press Enter .



Calculate the Contours

This step enables to set a value for the Tolerance parameter, preview the contouring result and if required hide the input data.

1 - Contour decimation tolerance

2 - The Hide / Display option

3 - Preview the contouring results

Define the Tolerance Parameter

The Tolerance value is used to decimate contours. The polyline of each contour will be decimated in such a way that the vertices of the original polyline will be inside the defined tolerance range.

To Define the Tolerance Parameter:

1. Enter a value in the Tolerance field.



Preview the Contours

After defining an elevation range and the decimation tolerance, you can use the Preview button to visualize the contouring result. At this moment, the 3D

View will be split into two sub-windows: one for visualizing the data with the contours superposed in 3D and another for displaying each contour in a planar view.

To Preview Contours:

Click . The results are shown in two sub-windows.

1 - Top view 4 - Contours

2 - Graduated scale

3 - Bottom view

5 - Active Contour

In the top window, each contour is displayed with a color. A graduated scale at the left side gives the altitude information for a given color. An information box at the right top corner displays the active (selected) contour's properties: Order and Elevation. In bottom view, there is by default a 2D Grid superposed (if not hidden previously) on the displayed contour. You can choose to change the 2D

Grid 's size or to hide it by using the corresponding items from the pop-up menu. An information box at the right top corner displays in addition to the properties listed above the Fitted Polyline 's size. A View Manager toolbar appears at the bottom of the 3D View . You can use the icons in this toolbar to change the configuration of the 2D sub-views.


Hide/Display the Input Data

If the input data (required to open the Contouring Tool ) is a point cloud, you can remove its representation from the 3D View by clearing the Display Cloud option. If the input data is a mesh, this option will become Display Mesh . You can clear the option to hide the mesh representation.


Define the Principal Contours

You can choose and assign some of the contours as principal contours. The remained contours are then considered as intermediate contours.

To Define the Principal Contours:

1. Check option. The First and Skip fields become enabled as well as the Pick Principal Contour icon. A label appears next to each contour.

1 - The Define Principal Contours option

2 - Define the first principal contour by entering a number

3 - Define the number of contours to skip

4 - Pick Principal Contour

2. Enter a value in the First field and press Enter .

3. Or click the Pick Principal Contour icon. The Picking Parameters toolbar appears.

4. Go to the top view and pick a contour - using the constraint or not.

1 - Intermediate contours have no label 2 - Each principal contour is shown with a label

5. Enter a value in the Skip field and press Enter .


Display the Contours

The first contour is the active one. It is displayed in the bottom view and appeared in pink in the top view.

1 - Display First Contour

2 - Display Previous Contour

3 - Contour in selection (Active)

4 - Display Next Contour

5 - Display Last Contour

If the active contour is other than the first contour, you can use the Up and

Down keys of your keyboard (or the Display Previous Contour and Display

Next Contour buttons in the Step 4 of the Contouring dialog) to display the next and the previous contour in the bottom view. Be sure to first select the top view to be able to use the Up and Down keys. It should have a yellow frame.

Clicking the Display First Contour and Display Last Contour buttons will set the first and last contour as active (selected). You can key in a contour’s order in

Step 4 to select it. Do not forget to validate by pressing the Enter key.

Tip: You can visualize several contours in the bottom view. Please, select the ones you need from the top view by combining the use of Ctrl key with leftclicking; or multi-select all using the Ctrl + A shortcut keys.


Create the Contours

Once you are satisfied with the contouring results, you can use the Create button to create them in the database. A folder named "Cross-Map" is created and put under the current active folder, in which all contours are put. The

Interval parameter is appended to the folder name. Each contour is named by combining a default name string "Cross-Map" with the elevation information and of Fitted Polyline type.

You can create as many contours as required without leaving the Contouring

Tool . If you decide to leave this tool without creating any contours, a message appears and prompts you to confirm, undo or cancel the action you are going to perform.

To Create the Contours:

1. Click .

2. Click .

Note: You can leave the Contouring Tool by pressing Esc or by right-clicking anywhere in any window and select Close from the pop-up menu.


Manipulate a Label

Each principal contour has a label which contains the length information in text.

You can move that label to any location in the 3D View . Note that you should first create the contours in the database and leave the Contouring Tool to be able to manipulate the labels.

To Manipulate a Label:

1. Select from the 3D View by picking it. the menu, select Show Manipulators . A white square appears beside the selected principal contour's label.

3. Pick on the white square. It becomes yellow.

4. Drag and drop the square from its current position to a new one. The label will move consequently.

1 - A Principal Contour 2 - Directions for moving the label

5. From menu, select again Show Manipulators to leave this tool.

Note: Instead of selecting Show Manipulators from the OfficeSurvey menu, you can also click its corresponding icon in the Tools toolbar.


2D-EasyLine Tool

This tool allows you to create polylines from point cloud's slice(s) that result(s) from the use of the Cutting Plane Tool or from planar polylines. The resulting polylines can contain only segments or a combination of segments and circular arcs. The 2D-EasyLine Tool can be used as a standalone tool or as a sub-tool inside the Cutting Plane Tool .

Open the Tool

The behavior of the 2D-EasyLine Tool depends upon the input data.

If the input data is a pure point cloud slice, Step 1 of the 2D-EasyLine dialog looks as shown in [A]. You can use either the automatic procedure or the manual procedure ( Step 2 in the 2D-EasyLine dialog) for modeling polylines.

[A] When a Point Cloud Slice is Selected: the dialog, select a point cloud slice.

2. Click on the 2D-EasyLine button.

Or

3. Select a point cloud slice from the Models Tree . the menu, select 2D-EasyLine Tool .

Both the number of segments and the number of arcs are equal to zero.

The sub-tools ( Sampling and Segmentation ) as well as the Display

Cloud option and the Preview button are enabled.


If the input data is a planar polyline (without points inside), Step 1 of the 2D-

EasyLine dialog looks as shown in [B]. You can only edit the planar polyline

( Step 2 in the 2D-EasyLine dialog).

[B] When a Planar Polyline is Selected:

1. Select a planar polyline (with no points inside) from the Models Tree . the menu, select 2D-EasyLine Tool . The 2D-

EasyLine dialog opens as shown below.

The number of segments and the number of arcs inside the planar polyline are shown in text in Step 2 .

The sub-tools ( Sampling and Segmentation ) as well as the polyline computation parameter ( Threshold ) and the Preview button are all dimmed.


If the input data is a planar and fitted polyline (with points inside), Step 1 of the

2D-EasyLine dialog looks as shown in [C]. You can choose between the two procedures for modeling new polylines or use the editing tools to modify the planar and fitted polyline.

[C] When a Planar and Fitted Polyline is Selected:

1. Select a planar and fitted polyline (with points inside) from the Models

Tree . the menu, select 2D-EasyLine Tool . The 2D-

EasyLine dialog opens as shown below.

The number of segments and the number of arcs inside the planar polyline are shown in text in Step 2 .

The sub-tools ( Sampling and Segmentation ) as well as the polyline computation parameter ( Threshold ), the Preview button and the two displayed options ( Display Cloud and Displayed Polyline ) are all enabled.

The selection required to open the tool - planar polyline (fitted or not) or point cloud slice - is displayed in a planar view (2D) with the 2D grid in superimposition. This means that the planar polyline (fitted or not) or the point cloud slice is locked in 2D; you can navigate through it (like performing a zoom, panning or rotation). You can use the View Manager toolbar to show the 3D sub-view and the planar view at the same time, or to switch between them. In the planar view, you can use the pop-up menu to modify the size of the 2D grid or to hide it.


Model Automatically Polylines

The automatic modeling procedure uses an algorithm which approximates points of the selected cloud slice (or fitted polyline) with segments. The

Threshold parameter will be used so that points of the selected cloud (or fitted polyline) which are inside the Threshold will be taken into account for the automatic modeling procedure. You can change the modeling parameter and use Preview where several attempts are required*.

To Model Automatically Polylines:

1. Enter a value in the Threshold field and press Enter .

2. Or select a value using the Up (or Down ) button.

3. Click on the Preview button.

If the input data is a pure slice cloud, new polylines are modeled according to the value set in Threshold and are displayed in the 3D

View . You have choice between the two display options ( Display

Cloud and Display Polyline ) and the Reload Initial Cloud - Polyline is grayed out.

The Reload Initial Cloud - Polyline is dimmed

Note: The other editing tools in Step 2 in the 2D-EasyLine dialog become enabled.


If the input data is a fitted polyline, new polylines are modeled according to the value set in Threshold and are displayed in the 3D

View . You have choice between the two display options ( Display

Cloud and Display Polyline ) and the Reload Initial Cloud - Polyline becomes enabled.

The Reload Initial Cloud - Polyline is enabled

Note: Reload Initial Cloud - Polyline cancels the computed polyline(s) and reloads the initial polyline.

For both, the number of segments and the number of arcs will be updated according to the Threshold value. (*) If the Threshold value is too high, new polylines cannot be built. The number of segments and the number of arcs fall to zero. The Step 1 becomes as shown below and only points are displayed in the 3D View .

Both the Reload Initial Cloud - Polyline and the Display Polyline are dimmed


Model Manually Polylines

You can use the Polyline Drawing Tool to model by hand polylines. You can model polylines with only segments or a combination of segments and circular arcs. If the input is a planar polyline (fitted or not), the Step 2 looks as shown in

[A]. If the input is a pure slice cloud, it is as shown in [B].

[A] [B]


To Model Manually Polylines:

1. Click . The Drawing Tool and Picking

Parameters (in 2D constraint mode) toolbars appear.

2. Pick a series of points (on displayed points or not) to draw a polyline.

After modeling by hand a polyline, the number of segments and the number of arcs that are inside are shown in text.

If the input is a planar polyline (fitted or not), Reload Initial Cloud -

Polyline becomes enabled. Click on it to reload the initial polyline.

If the input is a pure slice cloud, the other editing tools become enabled.

Note: The Create button in the Drawing Tool toolbar is dimmed. To validate the polyline, choose Close Tool from the toolbar or from the pop-up menu.


Edit Polylines

You can edit the modeled polyline. The edition can be done manually or thanks to filters. If you want to use the by-hand method; choose the Polyline Drawing

Too l to move or add vertices, delete a segment, etc. (see the Polyline Drawing

Tool ) or use the Edit Polyline tools to define which parts of the modeled (or selected) polyline you want to keep. If you want to use the by-filter method, any selection is required and you can apply filters like simplification, smoothing, filling holes, etc.

1 - Polyline Drawing Tool

2 - Change Selection Mode

3 - Reverse Selection

4 - Smooth

5 - Filtering methods

6 - Filtering parameter

7 - Filtering option

8 - Simply button

9 - Number of segments/arcs in the selected/modeled polyline(s) before edition


Select Items

We describe hereafter the different selection modes that you can use for editing polyline(s). There are four modes in all. Before selecting items from the displayed polyline(s), only two modes can be used: Standard Selection and

Multi Selection . Once a first selection is made, the two other modes become enabled: Partial Deselection and Partial Reselection .

Items in the polyline(s) are mainly arcs and segments. The information box at the top right-corner of the 3D View displays in text the number of arcs and the number of segments in the selection. The 2D-EasyLine dialog displays the total number of arcs and segments in the polyline(s). The numbers in the information box will be updated automatically each time you add or subtract items from the polyline(s).

To Select Items: item(s).

2. Add new selected item(s) to previous one(s).

Once a first selection is made, the two other selection modes - Partial

Deselection and Partial Reselection - in Change Selection Mode become active as well as Change Deletion Mode .

3. Subtract new selected item(s) from previous one(s).

4. Intersect new selected item(s) with previous one(s).

Clicking Reverse Selection will set unselected items as selected and those are selected as unselected. If any polygonal fence has been drawn, clicking

Reverse Selection will then select the whole polyline in the 3D View .

Note:

The polygonal fence should contain at least one item (segment or arc) in its entirety so that this item can be selected.

You can undo a selection by using the Undo command.

Selecting from the pop-menu (or pressing Esc ) will undo the polygonal fence in progress.

Selecting from the pop-menu will clear the polygonal fence from the polyline(s).

Tip:

Instead of double-clicking to close the polygonal fence, you can also right click anywhere in the 3D View window and select End Fence from the pop-up menu.

You can select Clear Selection from the pop-up menu to cancel the selection.


Standard Selection Mode

To Select:

1. Click on the Change Selection Mode pull down arrow.

2. Choose .

3. Draw a polygonal fence.

1 - Polygon in the Standard Selection mode 2 - Selected items (in red)

Multi-Select

To Multi-Select:


2. Select .

3. Draw a series of polygonal fence.

1 - Initial selection 2 - Polygon in the Multi

Selection mode

3 - Newly selected items are added to previous selected items

Tip: In the Standard Selection Mode , hold the Ctrl (or Shift ) key pressed and pick a point to define the first vertex of a polygonal fence.


Partial Deselect

To Partial Deselect:


2. Select .


If the polygonal fence contains some of the previously selected items. These items are deselected and the others remain selected.

If the polygonal fence contains any of the previously selected items.

No subtraction will be performed.

1 - Initial selections (in red) 2 - Polygon in the Partial

Deselection mode

3 - Newly selected items are removed from previous selected items

Tip: In the Standard Selection Mode , hold the Alt key pressed and pick a point to define the first vertex of a polygonal fence.


Partial Reselection Mode

To Partial Reselect:


2. Select .


If the polygonal fence contains some of the previously selected items; then common items remain selected and the others are unselected.

If the polygonal fence contains any of the previously selected items.

No intersection will be performed.

1 - Initial selections (in red) 2 - Polygon in the Partial

Reselection mode

3 - Only common items between new and old selected items are kept

Tip: In the Standard Selection Mode , hold the Ctrl + Alt keys pressed and pick a point to define the first vertex of a polygonal fence.

Delete Items

You can now continue editing the selected/modeled polyline(s) using the available filters. Filters can be separated into two categories. The first category contains filters for which you do not need to set parameters. These filters are:

Delete Selection , Delete Selection Filling Holes and Smooth .


Delete Items

To Delete Items:

1. Perform a selection as described previously.

2. Click on the Change Deletion Mode pull down arrow.

3. Select from the drop down list.

Segments and arcs inside the selection are deleted.

If the input is a slice cloud, Reload Initial Cloud - Polyline remains dimmed.

If the input is a polyline (fitted or not), Reload Initial Cloud - Polyline becomes enabled. Click on it to reload the initial polyline.

Note: You can also right-click anywhere in the 3D View window to display the pop-up menu and select Delete Selection .


Delete Items and Prevent from Hole Creation

To Delete Items and Prevent from Hole Creation:

1. Perform a selection as described previously.

2. Click on the Change Deletion Mode pull down arrow.

3. Select from the drop down list.

Segments and arcs inside the selection are deleted and the extremities are connected together.



1 - Selected items (in red) 2 - Selected items are deleted 3 - Selected items are deleted and extremities are connected

Tip: You can also right-click anywhere in the 3D View to display the pop-up menu and select Delete Selection Filling Holes .


Apply Filters

The second category contains filters for which parameters and options should be set. These filters are Simplification and Fill Line Breaks . The purpose of the

Simplification filter is to simplify the selected/modeled polyline(s) by segments.

The Tolerance parameter will be used in this filter so that the original points or the polyline vertices will be inside this tolerance with respect to the final approximated polyline(s). You can choose the Use Arcs option; the filter will use both segments and arcs to approximate the original polyline(s). The purpose of the Fill Lines Breaks filter is to fill gaps on the selected/modeled polyline(s) with segments. The Gap parameter will be used in this filter so that gaps whose size is smaller than this parameter will be filled by segments. Note that the default unit of measurement is set to millimeters; you do not need to enter “mm” after the value. You can change the default unit of measurement in

Preferences .

Note:

No selection is required for both the Simplification filter and the Fill Line

Breaks filter.

If a selection has been done, both the Simplification filter and the Fill Line

Breaks filter are applied to the selection.

Simplify the Modeled Polyline

To Simplify the Modeled Polyline:

1. Drop down the selection list and select Simplification .

2. Enter a value in the Tolerance field and press Enter .

3. Or select a value using the Up (or Down ) button. the option if needed.

5. Click on the Simplify button.

Segments and arcs displayed in the 3D View are simplified.




Fill Line Breaks

To Fill Line Breaks:

1. Drop down the selection list and select Fill Line Breaks .

2. Enter a value in the Gap field and press Enter .

3. Or select a value using the Up (or Down ) button.

4. Click on the Fill button.

Line breaks are filled with segment lines.



1 - Gap size 2 - Filtering parameters 3 - Gaps filled with segment

Saving Results

After checking the modeled results, you can use the Apply button to create them in the RealWorks . Each modeled polyline will be created as a polyline.

Note that if the original is also a polyline, then it will be replaced by the new one.

To Save the Results:

1. Click .

2. Click .

Note: Close can also be selected from the pop-up menu.


Mesh Creation Tool

The purpose of this tool is to create a triangulated mesh from the selected point cloud(s) which, in this case, must have no geometry. Such a mesh can be used for further editing, texture mapping, and ortho-projection image creation or as input for the Cutting Plane Tool . You can also export it to other software in DXF (or DGN) format.

The Mesh Creation Tool uses a 2D triangulation method applying a projection of the 3D points onto a 2D surface. There are several ways to define this projection surface. Note that you can select several point clouds to use this tool. In this case, the tool will create a mesh for each selected point cloud.

Open the Tool

To Open the Tool:

1. Select a point cloud from the Project Tree . the menu, select Mesh Creation Tool . The Mesh

Creation dialog opens.

This dialog opens as the third tab of the WorkSpace window and is composed of four parts. The first one enables to edit a point cloud previously selected and is composed of the Sampling and Segmentation tools. The selected point cloud is called Working Cloud and its total number of points is displayed in this dialog. The second part of this dialog allows you to select a projection mode.

The third and last parts enable previewing and building meshes.

Frequently, the selected cloud contains many points, you may need to decimate them before doing the triangulation. You may also decide to generate a mesh on just a part of the selected cloud. To do this, you can use the

Segmentation and the Sampling sub-tools.

Note: Sampling and Segmentation can be selected either from the pop-up menu or from the dialog.


Select a Projection Mode

A projection surface can be a 2D/3D plane or a 3D cylinder. There are three ways for determining a projection plane. The first way (called Plane-based

Projection ) consists of defining a 3D plane as in the Cutting Plane Tool . The second way (called Screen-View-Based Projection ) consists of using the current camera position. In that case, the projection plane (in 2D) will be the screen plane. The third way (called Station-Based Projection ) consists of using the scanning position linked to each station. In that case, the projection plane

(in 2D) is the scanning grid surface, which, depending on the scanner, will be a plane or a spherical or cylindrical surface. And there is only one way to define a projection cylinder.

To Select a Projection Mode:

1. Drop down the Select Projection Mode list in the Mesh Creation dialog box.

2. Select a projection mode from the drop-down list.

3. Do any of the following:

Define a projection plane,

Define a projection cylinder,

Define a 2D projection based on the current view,

Define a 2D projection based on the scanning direction,

Define no projection plane.

Note: There is another method for computing meshes from the selected point cloud. This method (called No Projection ) is based to any projection surface.

Satisfactory results may be obtained where the selected point cloud is relatively free of spikes and peaks on its surface.


Define a Projection Based on a Plane

After selecting Plane-Based Projection , a projection plane perpendicular to the

Y Axis * of the active coordinate frame appears in the 3D View . You can change its direction as you’re used to do in the Cutting Plane Tool or by manual-editing. In all cases, the bounding box that highlights the selection

(point cloud) delimits the height of the projection plane and you cannot exceed it.

1 - Set From Frame

2 - Fit


4 - Plane Perpendicular to

Screen

To Define a Projection Plane:


6 - Edit Parameters

1. Select a frame’s axis (1).

2. Or fit an extracted set of points with a plane (1).

3. Or find a perpendicular view plane from an extracted set of points (1).

4. Or pick an object’s axis (1).

5. Or pick a plane perpendicular to the screen (1).

6. Or pick three points (1)(2).

7. Or edit the project plane’s parameters. a) Click . The 3D Plane Editing dialog opens. b) Click on the pull down arrow and choose between Normal + Point and Point + Point . c) If has been chosen, enter a direction in the Normal field and give a position in the Point field. d) If has been chosen, enter a position in the Point (From) and Point (To) fields. e) Click . The 3D Plane Editing dialog closes.

Note:

For more information related to (1), see Step 2 of the Cutting Plane Tool .

When selecting (2), the Picking Parameters toolbar appears, it’s up to you to do a free picking or a constrained picking.



Define a Projection Based a Cylinder

After selecting Cylinder-Based Projection , a projection cylinder with an axis parallel to the Y Axis * of the active coordinate frame appears in the 3D View .

You can change the projection cylinder’s direction according to the two other axes ( X * and Z *). If the selection (point cloud) that you performed in Step 1 contains an entity, you can pick on it so that its axis becomes the new axis of the projection cylinder. You can also pick points on your selection to define a projection cylinder or edit one manually. In all cases, the bounding box that highlights the selection (point cloud) delimits the height of the projection cylinder and you cannot exceed it.

1 - Set From Frame

2 - Draw Circle

3 - Draw Cylinder



5 - Edit Parameters









Pick an Axis From an Object

To Pick an Axis From an Object:

1. Click . The initial projection disappears from the

3D View .

2. Click on the Models tab.


4. Select .

5. Click one point.

Draw a Circle

To Draw a Circle:

1. Click . The Picking Parameters toolbar appears.

2. Pick two free points or two constrained points.

Note: Picking can be done anywhere - on the selection (point cloud or mesh) or not. These two points determine the projection cylinder’s diameter and its direction is perpendicular to the screen view.

Draw a Cylinder

To Draw a Cylinder:


2. Pick three free points or three constrained points.

Note: Picking should be on the selection (point cloud or mesh) for the two first points and anywhere the third point (on selection or not). The first and second picked points give the projection cylinder’s direction and the second and third picked points determine its diameter.


Edit Parameters

To Edit Parameters:

1. Click . The Cylinder Editing dialog opens. between and Point + Direction + Radius .

3. If has been selected: a) Enter a point’s position in the Point1 field. b) Enter another point’s position in the Point2 field. c) Enter a value in the Radius fields.

4. If has been selected: a) Enter a point position the Point field. b) Define a direction in the Direction field. c) Enter a value in Radius field.

5. Click .

Define a Projection Based on the Screen View

This method uses the current viewing direction to define a 2D projection.

Define a Projection Based the Station

This method uses the scanning direction to define a 2D projection.

Define no Projection

By choosing this method, the user can compute a mesh on more complex geometries.


Preview a Mesh

Before previewing a mesh, the Number of Vertices and Number of Triangles in the dialog are both equal to zero.

To Preview a Mesh:

1. Check option. This will display the edges of triangles for easier verification of the result.

2. If needed, uncheck the Display Points option. The input representation is removed from the 3D View .

3. If needed, check the Remove Discontinuities option. This will remove the triangles around surface discontinuities (spikes, peaks etc.).

4. Click on the Preview Meshes button. The triangulation procedure will be performed.

On completion, the triangular mesh will be displayed in the 3D View .

Number of Vertices and Number of Triangles in the final mesh are shown in the dialog.

You can cancel the mesh and compute a new one. The Number of

Vertices and Number of Triangles will then be updated automatically.

Note:

Remove Discontinuities option is not available in the No Projection method.

Display Edges , Display Points and Remove Discontinuities options can be checked either before or after previewing the meshes.

Tip: Preview Meshes can also be selected from the pop-up menu.


Create a Mesh

By clicking on the Create button, the previewed mesh will be created in the

RealWorks database. If you select several point clouds, the corresponding meshes will be created in association with each other. You cannot create a mesh without performing a preview. RealWorks will forbid you to do so by inhibiting the Create button.

To Create a Mesh:

Click . The Mesh Creation dialog closes on its own.

If the input is a Cloud , a Fitted Mesh named ObjectX is created based on the Cloud in the Models tree.

If the input is the Project Cloud , the result, a separate object containing the created mesh and points of the Project Cloud , is named ObjectX .

Tip: Create and Close can also be selected from the pop-up menu.


Mesh Editing Tool

We have explained in the previous section how to compute a mesh from a point cloud using the Mesh Creation Tool . Here, we are going to describe a set of tools which can be used in complement of the previous one in order to improve the quality of the mesh computation. The Mesh Editing Tool allows you to edit a mesh: you can delete its vertices, edges or triangles, smooth or refine it, remove noisy peaks, extract a part from it in order to create a new mesh or to texture map or invert normal.


Open the Tool

To Open the Tool:

1. Select a mesh from the Models Tree . the menu, select Mesh Editing Tool .

The dialog opens. It displays two numbers: "Displayed

Triangles" and "Selected Triangles".

"Displayed Triangles" is the number of triangles inside the selected mesh, displayed in the 3D View.

"Selected Triangles" is the number of triangles once a selection has been performed on the selected mesh (displayed in red in the 3D

View ).

Before any selection, only the Change Selection Mode , Select Areas and Reverse Selection icons are available, the number of "Displayed

Triangles" matches the number of triangle inside the selected mesh and the number of "Selected Triangles" is equal to zero.

1 - Change Selection Mode

2 - Select Areas

3 - Reverse Selection

4 - The number of triangles in the selected mesh

5 - The number of triangles in the selected area(s)

6 - Show Edges

Tip: You can also click on the Mesh Editing Tool icon in the Tools toolbar.

Note: If you click on the Reverse Selection icon without performing any selection, the whole mesh displayed in the 3D View will be selected.


Select an Element

You can select each element that composes a mesh. Please, use the Select

Elements icon to pick an element, no matter the element could be. Or use the Select Vertices , Select Edges and Select Triangles icons to respectively pick a vertex, an edge and a triangle.

Pick an Element

To Pick an Element: the option (if required).

2. Drop down the Change Selection Mode list.

3. Choose .

4. Pick an element from the selected mesh. The picked element becomes yellow (or red).

5. Click . All non-selected elements are selected and appear in red.

Note:

The and Keep Unselected icons remain dimmed (for either a vertex or an edge) and become enabled (for a triangle).

To add a new element to the previous selection, first press Ctrl and then pick. Otherwise, the previous selection will be cancelled.

The number of "Selected Triangles" remains unchanged (for either a vertex or an edge) and is updated (for a triangle).

Tip: The Select Element icon can also be selected from the pop-up menu.


Pick a Vertex

To Pick a Vertex:



3. Choose . A vertex symbol appears next to the cursor.

4. Pick a vertex from the selected mesh. The picked vertex becomes yellow.

5. Click . All non-selected items are selected and appear in red.

Note:

The and Keep Unselected icons remain dimmed.

To add a new vertex to the previous selection, first press Ctrl and then pick. Otherwise, the previous selection will be cancelled.

The number of "Selected Triangles" remains unchanged.

Pick an Edge

To Pick an Edge:



3. Choose . An edge symbol appears next to cursor.

4. Pick an edge from the selected mesh. The picked edge becomes yellow.

5. Click . All non-selected items are selected.

Note:

The and Keep Unselected icons remain dimmed.

To add a new edge to the previous selection, first press Ctrl and then pick.

Otherwise, the previous selection will be cancelled.

The number of "Selected Triangles" remains unchanged.


Pick a Triangle

To Pick a Triangle:



3. Choose . A triangle symbol appears next to the cursor.

4. Pick a triangle from the selected mesh. The picked triangle becomes red.

5. Click . All non-selected items are selected and appear in red.

Note:

The and Keep Unselected icons become enabled.

To add a new triangle to the previous selection, first press Ctrl and then pick. Otherwise, the previous selection will be cancelled.

The number of "Selected Triangles" is updated according to the number of triangles that has been selected.


Fence an Area

You can select by fencing an area on the selected mesh as with the

Segmentation of a Point Cloud .

To Fence an Area:

1. Click on the Select Areas icon.

2. Pick several points to draw a polygonal fence.

3. Double-click to close the polygonal fence. The Keep Selected and Keep

Unselected icons become enabled. The "Selected Triangles" number is updated to match the number of triangles inside the polygonal fence.

4. Click . Triangles inside the fence are kept. The

"Displayed Triangles" number is updated to match the "Selected

Triangles" number which becomes then zero.

Click . Triangles outside the fence are kept. The

"Displayed Triangles" number is updated to match the opposite "Selected

Triangles" number which becomes then zero.

6. Click to reverse the selection.

Tip:

You can press Space Bar to close the fence instead of double-clicking.

You can click left + Ctrl to multi-select or click left + Shift to remove from the selection.

Note: Picking can be done out of the displayed mesh. The Keep Selected (or

Keep Unselected ) command is similar to the In (or Out ) operation in the

Segmentation Tool .

The Reload All command becomes active after choosing Keep Selected or

Keep Unselected . You can then reload all triangles of the selected mesh.


Edit a Mesh

There are several tools for editing the selection previously displayed. You can delete, refine, smooth, remove peaks, extract to new mesh, invert normal on triangles or flip selected edges. Note that the Refine , Smooth , Remove Peaks and Invert Triangle Normal features do not require a selection on the mesh

(see [A1]). Each of them (when selected) will be applied to the whole mesh.

After selecting a triangle or a set of triangles, vertices and edges, Delete and

Extract to New Mesh become active in addition to the four tools named above

(see [A2]). Each of them (when selected) will be applied to the selection done in Step 1 (vertices, edges, triangles or an area of the mesh).

[A1] [A2]

1 - Refine

2 - Smooth

3 - Remove Peaks

4 - Invert Triangle Normals

5 - Delete

6 - Extract to New Mesh

The Show Models in List Window lists polylines in the project (see [A3]). After selecting one, the Enhance Mesh With Break Lines Using Polyline(s) icon becomes enabled (see [A4]).

[A3] [A4]

1 - Show Models in List Window 2 - Enhance Mesh With Break Lines Using

Polyline(s)

After selecting a vertex (or an edge), Step 2 of the Mesh Editing dialog becomes as below in [B1] (or [B2]).

[B1] [B2]


2 - Flip Selected Edges 1 - Delete

Smooth a Mesh

The Smooth feature enables to apply a median filtering to the vertices of the selected triangles.

To Smooth a Mesh:

1. In dialog, click Smooth .

2. Or select the command from the pop-up menu.

Refine a Mesh

The Refine feature consists of swapping or splitting edges.

To Refine a Mesh:

1. In dialog, click Refine .


Remove Peaks from a Mesh

The Remove Peaks feature enables to remove certain noisy peaks in the displayed mesh.

To Remove Peaks From a Mesh:

1. In dialog, click Remove Peaks .



Reverse Triangles

To Reverse Triangles:

1. In dialog, click Invert Triangle Normal .


Note: The Invert Triangle Normal will be applied to the whole mesh in display whatever the selection you made.

Delete an Element from a Mesh

To Delete an Item from a Mesh: the dialog, click Delete .


Deleting a vertex will delete all triangles of the displayed mesh having that vertex in common.

Deleting an edge will delete all triangles of the displayed mesh having that edge in common.

Deleting a triangle will only delete that triangle.

In all cases, the "Displayed Triangles" number in the Mesh Editing dialog is then updated.

Tip: Instead of selecting Delete , you can use the related short-cut key Del .


Extract to a New Mesh

The Extract to New Mesh feature enables to create a new mesh from the selection done in Step 1 . By performing this operation, you can segment a mesh into different sub-meshes. This feature can be applied to a single triangle

(or a set of triangles).

To Extract to a New Mesh:

1. In dialog, click Extract To New Mesh .


When you extract the selection to a new mesh, the "Display Triangles" number in the Mesh Editing dialog is updated.

Tip: Instead of selecting the Extract to New Mesh icon, you can use the related short-cut key P .


Enhance a Mesh With Break Lines Using Polyline(s)

The Enhance Mesh With Break Lines Using Polyline(s) feature does not require a selection; it will be applied to the mesh displayed in the 3D View . This allows you to integrate a polyline into a mesh.

To Enhance a Mesh with Break Lines using Polyline(s): the icon. Polylines are listed in the List window and none is displayed in the 3D View .

2. Select the appropriate polyline from the List window. The Enhance Mesh

With Break Lines Using Polyline(s) button becomes enabled.

3. Toggle the selected Polyline 's On / Off icon On (if required).

It is displayed in the 3D View. the icon.

The new mesh contains new edges that correspond to the Polyline . All the vertices of the previous mesh are preserved during this operation.

Note: Several polylines may be selected at the same time.

Tip: The Enhance Mesh With Break Lines Using Polyline(s) icon can also be selected from the pop-up menu.


Flip an Edge

When an edge is shared by two triangles, you can use the Flip Selected Edges tool for swapping it so that it is still shared by these two triangles but from the two other vertices.

To Flip an Edge:

1. Select an edge (or a set of edges) from the displayed m esh.

2. Click on the Flip Selected Edges icon.



Map With a Texture

This step (in option) consists of using a matched image to texture map the selection done on the displayed mesh. If any selection has been performed, the texture mapping will be applied to the entire mesh. If a selection (or the entire mesh) has already been textured, you can choose to overwrite or remove the existing texture. Texture mapping can be done by recomputing

(splitting) the edges to fit the image boundaries.

1 - The selected image shown as a thumbnail

2 - Show Images in List View

3 - Remove Existing Texture

4 - Apply Texture

5 - Overwrite Existing Texture

6 - Project Image Borders

Note:

Unmatched images cannot be used for texture mapping. This is why selecting one will not show it as a thumbnail in Step 3 and the Apply

Texture button is dimmed.

Several matched images may be selected at the same time and applied as textures.


Apply a New Texture

Within the Map Texture step, you now have the ability to texture a mesh using the images that you previously used for coloring a TZF Scan in Trimble

RealColor . You do not need to switch to Registration , create matched images from colored TZF scans and switch back to OfficeSurvey in order to use the images for texturing.

To Apply a New Texture:

1. Select an area from the selected mesh or the whole mesh. the icon.

1. If there are some images in your project, all of them are listed in the

List window and none is displayed.

2. Jump to step 3.

Or

3. If there is no image in your project, a dialog opens. It first warns you that no matched image has been found and then prompts you to create some.

4. Click . The dialog closes.

If there is a non-colored TZF Scan in your project, nothing occurs. Skip the

Map Textur e step.

If there is a colored TZF Scan in your project, the Create Station Images from

TZF Scan Color process is then launched.

Once the process has completed, a set of six matched images is created, one for each face of a cube centered on the station location. All matched images are put under a folder named according to the station.

5. Jump to step 3.

Or


6. If there is no TZF Scan , a warning appears. Click OK . The dialog closes. the e step.

3. Select a matched image from the List window. It is shown as a thumbnail in Step 3 .

4. Toggle the selected image's On / Off icon On.

It is displayed in an independent window in the 3D View.

The displayed mesh is aligned with the camera's point of view. the button. the option is not checked, only the selected triangles that lie entirely inside the image will be textured. the option is checked, the selected triangles that lie entirely inside the image will be textured in the same way, but the triangles that intersect the selected image boundaries will also be split. In this way, the whole image is used for texturing the selected triangles. Note that the shape of the mesh does not change during this operation.

Remove an Existing Texture

To Remove an Existing Texture:

1. Select an area (or the entirety) of the mesh where a texture removal is required.

2. Click on the Remove Existing Texture icon.


Overwrite an Existing Texture

To Overwrite an Existing Texture:

1. Select an area (or the entirety) of the mesh where a texture overwriting is required. the icon. Matched images are listed in the

List window and none is displayed.

3. Select the appropriate image from the List window. It is shown as a thumbnail in Step 3 .

4. Toggle the selected image's On / Off icon On. It is displayed in an independent window in the 3D View. The displayed mesh is aligned with the camera's point of view.

5. Check option.

6. Click .

Apply the Operation

Till now, all operations applied to the selected mesh(es) are just temporarily stored. To make them permanent, you have to apply the operations. You can then quit the tool.

To Apply the Operation:

Apply .

2. Click .


Note: Leaving the Mesh Editing Tool without applying all changes in the database will make appear a message.


Ortho-Projection Tool

Conventional and perspective photographs taken by any 2D camera show distortions caused by the camera angle and the topography itself. These phenomena can be noticed particularly on aerial photographs. Non-uninformed scale on this kind of photographs prevents from direct measurement, like on a map. These disadvantages can be cancelled by ortho-rectification. This means that such photographs are computer-deformed.

The Ortho-Projection Tool allows you to create ortho-images from the selected point cloud or textured mesh. You can either export the ortho-images to CAD software, such as AutoCAD® or MicroStation® for further processing or drafting operations, or you can perform 2D measurements directly within

RealWorks . The basic principle behind this tool is to choose a Projection Plane on which the ortho-image will be created, and choose the right information that you want to store in this image, and then create it. All the metric information will be stored in this image, i.e. measurements made on this photo will be accurate.


Open the Tool

If a point cloud has been selected, you can work it to delimit an area for the

Ortho-Projection calculations, to render it cleaner without parasite points or to simplify it. Use the two following sub-tools ( Sampling and Segmentation ) for doing these operations.

To Open the Tool:

1. Select a point cloud (or mesh) from the Project Tree . the menu, select Ortho-Projection Tool . T he Ortho-

Projection Tool dialog opens.

This dialog opens as the third tab of the Workspace window and is composed of four parts. Each part corresponds to one step in the ortho-projection computation. The first step (called Define Projection Plane ) is to define, orientate and check a Projection Plane . The second part (called Define Zone of

Interest ) is to draw a Zone of Interest on the previous Projection Plane . The third part (called Define Image Resolution ) is to specify parameters and rendering to apply. The fourth part is to preview and create ortho-images.

Tip: You can also click on the Ortho-Projection Tool icon in the Tools toolbar.

Note: The two sub-tools ( Segmentation and Sampling ) are not available if the input is a mesh.


Define a Projection Plane

You can define a Projection Plane by three points on an objector by using the current viewing/camera position. The Projection Plane that results from these two methods are not similar in terms of size. In the first method, the three picked points delineate the size of the Projection Plane . In the second method, the bounding box that highlights the input (point cloud or m esh) delineates the size of the Projection Plane .

A Projection Plane is characterized by a projection direction called View , two orientations Right and Up (also called X *and Y * directions) which define an orthogonal frame, a position which is its position in the 3D scene and two dimensions that correspond to its length and width. The View direction is the

Normal of that Projection Plane . You can also define a Projection Plane by getting the parameters of an existing ortho-image.

1 - Define Projection Plane by Picking 3 Points

2 - Define Projection Plane by Screen View

3 - Define Corners of Zone of Interest

4 - Define Projection Plane from Existing Ortho-

Image

Note: (*) In the X , Y , Z Coordinate Frame .


Picking Three Points

You can pick three points to define a Projection Plane . The accuracy of such

Projection Plane 's orientation will be influenced by the points you pick. It is recommended to pick these points in such way that they are distributed across the area on which you want to calculate the ortho-projection.


1. Click on the Define Projection Plane by Picking 3 Points icon. The

Picking Parameters toolbar appears.

2. Pick three points (free or constrained) on displayed objects.

1 - Three picked points 2 - The defined projection plane (in yellow)

A number located beside the mouse's pointer guides you in picking points. This number starts from One and ends by Three . When two points are picked, they are linked by a red segment. When three points are reached, they are linked two-by-two by a red segment and form in that way a triangle. A Projection

Plane is then computed. No need of defining its Normal ; it will be automatically calculated. You can cancel this plane whenever you want and start a new one.

To do it, start again the previous procedure.

Note:

You can also select Cancel Picking (or Close ) from the pop-menu. can , Rotate , Zoom (in or out) and Zoom with constant ratio in the

3D View while defining a Projection Plane .

In the picking mode, pressing Esc cancels the selection of points in progress. Out of the picking mode, pressing Esc closes the Ortho-

Projection Tool .


Using the Current Camera View

In certain applications, you may need to visually choose a projection plane.

The Define Projection Plane by Screen View tool allows this. You first need to rotate the 3D scene to find the right viewing direction, and use the current screen plane as the Projection Plane .

To Use the Current Camera View:

1. Turn the scene to find the right viewing direction. the icon.

Setting Corners

Another method for defining a Projection Plane consists of setting its corner values. This operation has no influence upon the View direction and the Right and Up orientations ( X and Y directions).

To Set Corners:

1. Click icon. The Vertical

Rectangle Corner Coordinates dialog opens.

2. Enter a point position in the Top Left Corner field.

3. Enter a point position in the Bottom Right Corner field.

OK .

Tip: You can also select the Set Projection Plane Corners icon from the popup menu.


Using Existing Parameters

Sometimes, you may need to use the parameters of an existing ortho-image to calculate your own ortho-image. You can use the method below to recover the

Projection Plane from that of an existing ortho-image by getting its directions

( View , X * and Y *), its position in the 3D scene and its Resolution and Size. An option allows you to preview that ortho-image in 3D View .

To Use Existing Parameters:

1. Click . The Set Parameters of Projection Plane dialog opens.

1 - An existing ortho-image in your project or the current Projection Plane

2 - Parameters of the existing ortho-image

3 - Resolution and Size are not yet defined

2. Click on the Select Source Plane pull-down arrow.

3. Select an existing ortho-image from the drop-down list

4. Modify the parameters (if necessary). the option (if required).

6. Click . The Set Parameters of Projection Plane dialog closes.

Note:

You can use the C short-cut (or select Set Camera Parameters (C) from the pop-up menu) to set or edit parameters.

(*) In the X , Y , Z Coordinate Frame .


Modify a Projection Plane

After defining a Projection Plane , the other icons in the Step 1 panel become active.

1 - Define Horizontal by Picking Two Points

2 - Rotate Counterclockwise 90°

3 - Rotate 90° around Vertical Axis

4 - Define Projection Plane Position by Picking

Point

5 - Buttons for selecting a canonical view


Defining the Horizontal

The Define Horizontal By Picking 2 Points feature enables to align the horizontal orientation of a Projection Plane to the displayed data by picking two points. It means that for a given Projection Plane , you keep unchanged its

Normal ( View direction) and you adjust its Right and Up orientations (horizontal and vertical).

To Set the Horizontal of a Projection Plane:


2. Pick a free or constrained point on the selected object to start the first point of the X direction.

3. Pick then the second point (free or constrained) to end this X direction.

1 - The first and second picked points 2 - The projection plane is aligned to the defined horizontal


After clicking Define Horizontal By Picking 2 Points , a 2D Grid appears upon the 3D scene. You can hide it or change its size. The mouse cursor shape changes. The arrow becomes a pointer. A number beside this pointer guides you in selecting points. It starts from One that corresponds to the first point of the X direction and ends by Two . Once the two points reached, a red segment links them and the new Projection Plane will be then generated. No need of defining a Normal direction. It keeps the former one. You can cancel it whenever you want and start a new one. To do it, start again the previous procedure.

Note: In the picking mode, pressing Esc or selecting Cancel Picking (Esc) from the pop-up menu cancels the selection of points in progress and closes Define

Horizontal by Picking 2 Points .


Setting a Position

You can also modify the position of a Projection Plane by picking a point on the displayed scene (point cloud or mesh). This is important if you want to use the elevation information for calculating the ortho-projection.

To Set a Position: the icon. The

Picking Parameters (in 3D constraint mode) toolbar opens.

2. Pick a point (free or constrained) anywhere on the selected object.

1 - A point picked on the displayed cloud 2 - The projection plane moves from its current position to its new position

Note:

Modifying ’s position will not modify its orientation.

Press (or select Cancel Picking (Esc) from the pop-up menu) to close the Define Projection Plane Position by Picking Point tool.


Changing Dimensions

You can resize the previous Projection Plane . This operation has not an influence upon the View direction and the Right and Up orientations ( X * and Y * directions). The resized Projection Plane keeps the same parameters than before except the dimensions. You can do this either by dragging & dropping a corner for example in the 3D View or by entering coordinates in a dialog.

To Change Dimensions:

1. Place the mouse cursor upon any handle of a Projection Plane . A green square appears.

1 - The handle before the drag & drop operation 2 - The handle during the drag & drop operation

2. If a corner handle is selected, drag it to increase or reduce the Projection

Plane size. During this operation, the green square becomes yellow.

3. If a middle handle is selected, drag it to increase or reduce the Projection

Plane width (or length). During this operation, the green square becomes yellow.



Check a Projection Plane

In the example of a house, in order to have a complete facade drawing, you need to calculate ortho-images for both the front and side views. You can rotate the Projection Plane or the scene to calculate a series of ortho-images in different orientations. You can use a canonical view to control the projection definition, rotate left the scene ( Half Pi rotation) or rotate the scene around the screen vertical axis. Six canonical views are available: Front View , Back View ,

Left View , Right View , Top View and Bottom View . You can edit and validate the current Projection Plane 's parameters. This enables an accurate definition and control of the Projection Plane 's vectors and depth.

View from a Projection Plane' Side

The user can view the displayed scene from each of the Projection Plane ' side.

To View from a Projection Plane' Side:

1. Click on the canonical view pull down arrow. among , Back View , Left View , Right View , Top View and Bottom View .

Note:

You need to first define a Projection Plane . Otherwise, all views are dimmed.

You can swap from a view to another not by clicking on the button as are used to do in the View Alignment toolbar but by clicking on the pull down arrow. Because clicking on that button will always bring you to the Front

View of the Projection Plane which is the view required to compute an ortho-image.


Rotate Counterclockwise 90°

The Rotate Counterclockwise 90° feature rotates left both the displayed scene and the Projection Plane .

To Rotate Left Both the Scene and the Projection Plane:

1. Set to see its front view (by choosing Front View ). the icon. The displayed scene and the Projection Plane are rotated left.

3. Click again the Rotate Counterclockwise 90° icon. The displayed scene and the Projection Plane are rotated left again, and so on.

Both the Projection Plane and the 3D scene are rotated left


Rotate 90° Around Vertical Axis

To Rotate the Projection Plane 90° Around the Vertical Axis:

1. Bring in Front view.

2. Define the region on which you want to calculate the ortho-image and save the result.

3. Click to turn the active projection plane to the side view.

4. Modify the region definition and calculate the second ortho-image and save the result.

The projection plane remains fixed while the 3D scene rotates 90° around its vertical axis


Edit Parameters

To Edit Parameters:

Parameters . The Set Parameters of Projection Plane dialog opens. the option (if required).

3. Enter new values in the View Direction field.

4. Enter new values in the X Direction field.

5. Enter new values in the Y Direction field.

6. Enter a new value in the Point Position field.

7. Click .

Tip: You can also use the short-cut key C to edit parameters (or select Set

Camera Parameters from the pop-up menu).

Define a Zone of Interest

You need to define a region (called Zone of Interest ) on the previous Projection

Plane from which the ortho-projection will be computed. For this, you have to draw a rectangular frame. In that drawing mode, you are locked in the

Projection Plane 's plane with a 2D-grid in superimposition and the Projection

Plane is hidden.

Before clicking on the Draw button, the Area in the Step 2 panel is "Undefined".

After clicking on the Draw button, the entire Projection Plane is set as a Zone of Interest and its dimensions appears in the Area field. After drawing a rectangular frame, the Area values are updated to match the drawn frame' size.


Draw a Zone of Interest

To Define a Zone of Interest:

Draw . The cursor will take the shapes as shown below.

2. Draw a rectangular frame by picking two points.

1 - The cursor shape of the first point to pick 2 - The cursor shape of the second point to pick

3 - The Zone of Interest size

A 2D Grid appears upon the locked scene. You can hide it or change its size.

The mouse cursor shape changes. The arrow becomes a pointer with a number beside; this guides you in selecting points. This number starts from

One (first corner of a rectangular frame) and ends by Two (opposite corner).

You can cancel the rectangular frame whenever you want and start a new one.

Note:

Esc (or select Cancel Rectangle (Esc) from the pop-up menu) to undo the selection of points in progress (once the first has been picked).

Movements are constrained to the Projection Plane 's plane and are restricted to Pan and Zoom . Rotate is not allowed.


Resize a Zone of Interest

To Resize a Zone of Interest:

1. Pick in the previous rectangular frame.

2. Move the cursor over a handle in green.

3. Drag-and-drop the handle to resize the rectangular frame.

Note: The Area values are updated to match the resized frame's dimensions.

Set a Resolution

You can define an ortho-image’s resolution by giving the PPI (Pixels Per Inch), specifying the number of pixels in the X * and Y * directions or giving the pixel size. The pixel size is equal to 1 (if the unit of measurements is Inch) or to 25.4

(if the unit of measurement is millimeters) divided by the image resolution (in

PPI). The image size (in pixels) is obtained by dividing the interest zone size by the pixel size.

To Set a Resolution:

1. Click . The Set Image Resolution of Ortho-Image dialog opens.


Enter a value (in PPI) in the Image Resolution (PPI) field.

Enter two values (in pixels) in the Image Size (WxH) field.

Enter a value (in the current unit of measurement) in the Pixel Size field.

3. Click .

Tip: You can use the short-cut key R or select Set Image Resolution (R) from the pop-up menu to open the Set Image Resolution of Ortho-Image dialog.



Choose a Rendering Option

You can choose an option to render the computed ortho-images(s). There are five options for a point cloud input: Using Depth (the elevation value is calculated for each point based on its distance to the defined area. The calculated elevation value will be discretized in 8 bits to create the orthoprojection images), Using Normal Shading (the normal of each point will be used in shading calculation to create the ortho-projection images), Using Grey

Scaled Intensity (the (grey) intensity value of each point will be used to create the ortho-projection images), Using Color Scaled Intensity (the (color) intensity value of each point will be used to create the ortho-projection images) and

Using True Color (the color associated with each point will be used to create the ortho-projection images). There is only on option for a mesh input:

Textured Meshes .

To Choose a Rendering Option:

1. Click on pull down arrow below the Density .

2. Select a rendering option from the drop down list.


Preview an Ortho-Image

You can now use the Preview button to calculate the ortho-image. When completed, the calculated image will be shown in the 2D Image viewer. You can change the current parameters and perform a new preview. You can do this as many times as required until you have the right result.

To Preview an Ortho-Image:

Click . The computed image is shown in a 2D Image viewer.

3 - Zoom factor

4 - Measurement Tool

1 - Zoom In

2 - Zoom Out

Before previewing the ortho-image, clicking Close leaves the Ortho-Projection

Tool and the position of the ortho-image is lost. After previewing the orthoimage, clicking Close opens a dialog which prompts you to abort or continue the operation. In this 2D Image viewer, you can zoom-in (or zoom-out). You can zoom in three ways. The first one is to magnify (or reduce) an area of the ortho-image using Zoom In and Zoom Out . The second way is to magnify (or reduce) the ortho-image using the mouse wheel (if existed). The third is to select a zoom factor from the drop-down list.

If the ortho-image is bigger than the 2D Image viewer can show, you can pan it on left-click in any direction. You can also make a 2D-distance measurement.

Because the metric information is stored in the calculated ortho-image, the measurement is accurate. You can create the measurement in the database by using the corresponding command in the pop-up menu. Note that once it is created, the measurement will be shown in the 3D View .


Tip:

You can select Preview Ortho-Image from the pop-up menu.

The color of the background on an Ortho-Image is the same as the one in the 3D View . You can change it in Preferences \ Viewer . This change will be then applied whatever the Rendering option you choose.

Print an Ortho-Image

You can print the preview of an ortho-image.

To Print an Ortho-Image:

1. Right-click in the 2D Image view.

2. Select from the pop-up menu. The Print Setup dialog opens.

3. Define Printer .

4. Choose Paper ' Size and Source . an between Portrait and Landscape .

6. Add some comments in the Legend panel. an between As Is and Reverse Colors .

8. Click .

Tip: You can also select Print from the menu bar or clicking its icon in the Main toolbar.

Split an Ortho-Image

When an ortho-image is too wide (or long), you can split it into a set of orthoimages of smaller size. You can split an ortho-image along a direction ( Width

(or Height )) or along two directions ( Width + Height ).

To Split an Ortho-Image:

1. Enter a number in the W (or H ) field.

2. Or use the Up (or Down ) button to select a number in the W (or H ) field.

Note: Each split ortho-image is named as follows: ImageX_Line Index_Colum

Iindex.


Create an Ortho-Image

You can save the result in the database. An ortho-image whose name is

"Image" is created and put under the current active group of the Images Tree .

You can create several ortho-images without leaving the tool.

To Create an Ortho-Image:

1. Click .

2. Click .

Tip: You can also select Create Ortho-Image (or Close ) from the pop-up menu.

You should first hide the 2D Image viewer.

Note: You do not need to first preview an ortho-image to create it in the database.


Multi-Ortho-Projection Tool

This tool allows you to create multi-ortho-projection images from the selected point cloud(s) or mesh(es). You can either export the ortho-projection images to CAD software, such as AutoCAD® or MicroStation® for further processing or drafting operations, or you can perform 2D measurements directly within

RealWorks . The basic principle behind this tool is to use a polyline to create multi-projection planes on which the ortho-projection images will be created, and choose the right information that you want to use in the ortho-projection, and then create the images either one-by-one or all at once. All the metric information will be stored in this image, i.e. measurements made on this photo will be accurate.

Open the Tool

To Open the Tool:

1. Select a point cloud (or mesh) from the Project Tree . the menu, select Multi-Ortho-Projection Tool . The

Multi-Ortho-Projection dialog opens.

If a point cloud has been selected, you can work on it to delimit an area for the multi-ortho-projection computation, to render it cleaner without parasite points or to simplify it (see the Sampling and Segmentation Tools ). If a mesh has been selected, the two upper sub-tools are unavailable. The results of applying these sub-tools will not save into the database; they are used only for calculation purposes.

Tip: You can click on the Multi-Ortho-Projection Tool icon in the Tools toolbar.

Define a Polyline

A polyline can be either a line of continuous segments which can be closed (or not). It can also be composed of one or several non-continuous segments but it cannot be formed by arcs.


Select a Polyline

If there is a polyline within the project, it is displayed in the Define Polyline field.

The "Number of Segments" is not then equal to zero. The selected point cloud

(or mesh) and the Projection Planes obtained by extruding each segment of this selected polyline along the Z* direction are displayed in the 3D View .

1 - Field for selecting an existing Polyline

To Select a Polyline:

2 - Number of segments in the selected (or drawn) Polyline

1. Click on the Define Polyline pull down arrow.

2. Select a polyline from the drop down list.

Note:

A polyline which is composed of arcs will not appear in the selection list.



Draw a Polyline

If no polyline is available. The Define Polyline combo box is grayed out and the

"Number of Segments" is equal to zero. You have to create at least one in the database. The selected point cloud (or mesh) is shown with a 2D Grid in superimpose (if not hidden previously) in the 3D View . The scene is constrained in the XY * plane of the active coordinate frame, brought to the Top view and movements while picking points are restricted to Rotate (around the

Z * axis), Zoom (along the Z * axis), and Pan (in the XY * plane).

Create New 2D Polyline

To Draw a Polyline: the icon. The Drawing Tool and Picking

Parameters (in 2D constraint mode) toolbars appear in the 3D View . The mouse cursor shape changes to a pencil.

2. Draw a polyline by picking several points.

3. Click . The last picked point ends the line.

4. Click . The drawn Polyline appears in the Define Polyline field and its "Number of Segments" is updated.

Tip: You can select each of the Drawing Tool features from the pop-up menu.

Note:


In toolbar, the Change Mode to Arc , Draw Circle by

Defining the Center and Radius and Draw Circle by Defining the Diameter icons are enabled and let the user to draw such kind of polyline but any will be into account.



After defining a polyline, a series of Projection Planes runs along that polyline.

For a given Projection Plane , its width corresponds to the length of a segment and its height to the height of the bounding box that highlights the input (point cloud or mesh) along the Z axis of the active coordinate frame.

1 - A Polyline

2 - The active Projection Plane (in red)

3 - The height of the active Projection Plane

4 - The width of the active Projection Plane

You can modify all the Projection Plane heights at once by changing the

Maximal Altitude (or Minimal Altitude ) value or each Projection Plane height individually. The Maximal (or Minimal ) Altitude default value will be the Maximal

(or Minimal ) Altitude value of the active Projection Plane . The maximal value must be higher than the minimal value.

1 - Top Align all Planes

2 - Bottom Align all Planes

3 - Start Editing Table

4 - Inverse Normal of All

Planes

To Define a Zone of Interest:

5 - The Display / Hide option


1. Top align all Projection Plane s.

2. Or bottom align all Projection Planes .

3. Or Edit all Projection Planes .

4. Or invert the Normal of all Projection Planes .

Note:

Instead of clicking a button in the Multi-Ortho-Projection dialog, you can also select its equivalent from the pop-up menu.

You undo the change you have done and redo it again by selecting Undo and Redo .

You can also select a Projection Plane in the 3D View by picking it.

Enlarge (or reduce) the selected Projection Plane' s heigh t by dragging and dropping the two horizontal edges.

Top Align all Planes

To Top Align all Planes:

1. Click . The Maximal Altitude dialog opens.

2. Enter a new value in the Maximal Altitude field.

3. Or use the Up and Down buttons* to select a value.

4. Click . All Projection Planes are aligned to the top.

Note: (*) The value will be incremented (or decremented) of 5 millimeters. If the unit of measurement in use is too big, the user won't see the increment (or decrement).


Bottom Align all Planes

To Bottom Align all Planes:

1. Click . The Minimum Altitude dialog opens.

2. Enter a new value in the Minimum Altitude field.

3. Or use the Up and Down buttons* to select a value.

OK . All Projection Planes are aligned to the bottom.

Note: The value will be incremented (or decremented) of 5 millimeters. If the unit of measurement in use is too big, the user won't see the increment (or decrement).


Edit Planes

To Edit Planes:

1. Click . The Multi-Ortho-Image Area Parameters dialog opens.

Each area in the Area column corresponds to a unique Projection

Plane .

The length of an area in the Length column is the gap between its

Minimum Altitude and its Maximum Altitude along the Z direction.

2. Select an area* from the dialog by picking a line.

3. Click on a value in either the Minimal Altitude or Maximum Altitude . The value becomes editable.

4. Enter a new value and press Enter . The Projection Plane which corresponds to the selected area has its Minimal Altitude (or Maximum

Altitude) changed as well as its height.

5. Click on the Close button at the top right corner of the dialog box.

1 - The Auto-hide button

2 - The Close button

3 - Only the Maximum Altitude of the selected

Projection Plane is modified


The Auto Hide feature allows displaying more information using less screen space by hiding (or showing) the Multi-Ortho-Image Area Parameters dialog.

When you press the Auto Hide button, the Multi-Ortho-Image Area Parameters dialog will hide away. Move the mouse pointer over the Multi-Ortho-Image Area

Parameters title bar, it will slide out and will become visible. If you want the

Multi-Ortho-Image Area Parameters dialog to stay visible after it has slidden out, just press the Auto Hide button.

Tip: (*) You may see the Projection Plane corresponding to the selected area appears in Step 4 - Preview Single Image as well as its Size , Minimum Altitude and Maximum Value .

Hide/Display the Input

You can also display/hide the input: point cloud or mesh.

To Hide/Display the Input:

1. Un-check to hide the input from the 3D View .

2. And check to display it again.

Define the Image Parameters

You should define the parameters used for generating the ortho-images.

To Define the Image Parameters:

1. Define Resolution .

2. Choose Density to apply. the parameter.

Set a Resolution

The user should define a Resolution to apply to the active Projection Plane . A

Resolution is by default square.

To Set a Resolution:

1. Enter a value in the Resolution field. the and Down to select a value.


Set a Density

The Density expressed in terms of PPI (Pixels Per Inch) is automatically computed according the current value of the Resolution .

Choose a Rendering Option

You can choose an option to render the computed ortho-images(s). There are five options for a point cloud input: Using Depth (the elevation value is calculated for each point based on its distance to the defined area. The calculated elevation value will be discretized in 8 bits to create the orthoprojection images), Using Normal Shading (the normal of each point will be used in shading calculation to create the ortho-projection images), Using Grey

Scaled Intensity (the (grey) intensity value of each point will be used to create the ortho-projection images), Using Color Scaled Intensity (the (color) intensity value of each point will be used to create the ortho-projection images) and

Using True Color (the color associated with each point will be used to create the ortho-projection images). There is only on option for a mesh input:

Textured Meshes .

To Choose a Rendering Option:

1. Click on pull down arrow below the Density .

2. Select a rendering option from the drop down list.


Define the Depth Parameter

You also should select the Define Depth option in order to define the distances

Front and Back all rectangular areas.

To Define the Depth Parameter:

1. Check option. The Front and Back fields become editable.

1 - Distance Front and Back all Projection

Planes

2 - Reload Front Depth

3 - Reload Back Depth

2. Enter a value in the Front field. The Reload Front Depth icon becomes enabled.

3. Enter a value in the Back field. The Reload Back Depth icon becomes enabled.

4. If required, load the initial value by pressing Reload Front Depth .

5. If required, load the initial value by pressing Reload Back Depth .


Preview a Single Ortho-Image

To Preview a Single Ortho-Image:

1. Select .

2. Click . The computed ortho-image is shown in a 2D Image view and the Preview button becomes inactive.

1 - Image Zoom In

2 - Image Zoom Out


4 - An ortho-image computed from the active

Projection Plane

5 - The Active Projection Plane

In this view, you can zoom or make a 2D distance measurement. You can zoom according three ways. The first way is to magnify (or reduce) an area of the ortho-projection image using Zoom In and Zoom Out . The second way is to magnify (or reduce) the whole ortho-projection image using the mouse's wheel

(if existed). The last way is to select a rate from the drop-down list. another (if required). again .

Note: You cannot go down under 10% when zooming out.


Tip: The color of the background on an Ortho-Image is the same as the one in the 3D View . You can change it in Preferences \ Viewer . This change will be then applied whatever the Rendering option you choose.

Select a Projection Plane

An active Projection Plane is the one which appears in the Preview Single

Image field and is shown in red in the 3D View .

1 - Display First Ortho-image

2 - Display Previous Ortho-image

3 - Field for entering a Projection Plane order

To Select a Projection Plane:

4 - Display Next Ortho-image

5 - Display Last Ortho-image

Click (or Next ) Ortho-image to set the previous (or next)

Projection Plane as active.

Click (or Last ) Ortho-image to set the first (or last) Projection

Plane as active.

Key in a Projection Plane 's order in the Preview Single Image field to

Tip: select it. Do not need to validate by pressing the Enter key. the (or End ) button of your keyboard instead of Display First (or

Last ) Ortho-image . the (or Down ) arrow of the keyboard instead of Display Previous

(or Next ) Ortho-image .

Note:

The active (current) Projection Plane 's parameters like its Size , Maximum

Altitude and Minimum Altitude are displayed in Step 4 of the Multi-Ortho-

Projection dialog.

Display Previous Ortho-image, Display Next Ortho-image, Display

First Ortho-image and Display Last Ortho-image buttons are dimmed if there is only one segment in the defined polyline.


View from a Projection Plane' Side

The user can view the displayed scene from each of the active Projection

Plane ' side.

To View from a Projection Plane' Side:

1. Select .

2. Click on the canonical view pull down arrow.

3. Choose , Back View , Left View , Right View , Top View and Bottom View .

Print an Ortho-Image

You can print the preview of an ortho-image.

To Print an Ortho-Image:

1. Right-click in the 2D Image view.


3. Define Printer .

4. Choose Paper ' Size and Source . an between Portrait and Landscape .

6. Add some comments in the Legend panel.

7. Set between As Is and Reverse Colors .

8. Click .

Tip: You can also select Print from the menu bar or clicking its icon in the Main toolbar.

Create Ortho-Images

You can create an ortho-image at a time or all at once in the database. Each ortho-image is named as follows: Cross-Object-Polyline's name-Segment's order. You can export each of them as a TIFF format file or via the DXF format to AutoCAD®. Note that you can create several series of ortho-images without quitting the tool.


Create a Single Ortho-Image

A single ortho-image is created and put under the current active group of the

Images Tree .

To Create a Single Ortho-Image:

1. First preview a single ortho-image.

2. Click .

3. Click .

Create all Ortho-Images

A set of ortho-images is created and put in a folder under the current active group of the Images Tree . This folder is named as follows: Multi-Ortho-

Polyline's name

To Create all Ortho-Images:

1. Click .

2. Click .


Image Rectification Tool

This tool allows the creation of images rectified from perspective distortion by projecting station images onto a given 3D plane.

Open the Tool

To Open the Tool: the menu, select Image Rectification Tool . The

Image Rectification dialog opens.

This dialog opens as the third tab of the WorkSpace window. The navigation mode swaps to Station-Based .

Tip: You can also click on the Image Rectification Tool icon in the Tools toolbar.


Choose a Station

You need to select a station with at least an image inside.

To Choose a Station:


1 - Station(s) under the current project 2 - Number of images under the selected station

2. Choose a station with images from the drop-down list.

3. Or use the navigation buttons ( Go to First Station , Go to Previous Station ,

Go to Next Station and Go to Last Station ) in the 3D View .

4. Or click inside the station number's field and select a station from the drop-down list.

1 - Go to First Station

2 - Go to Previous Station

3 - The current station

4 - Go to Next Station

5 - Go to Last Station


Define a Projection Plane

There are two methods for defining a projection plane. The first one is by picking points and the second one is using the parameters of an already created rectified-image.

Pick Points

In the Station-Based mode, there are five tools for defining a projection plane; all are detailed below. In the Examiner (or Walkthrough ) mode, only two are available ( Define Plane by Picking Three 3D Points and Define Vertical Plane by Picking Two 3D Points ); the others are disabled. You can swap from the

Station-Based mode to the Examiner (or Walkthrough ) mode and vice versa;

Switching to the Examiner mode is typically useful for checking a plane that has been defined in the Station-Based mode.

1 - Define Vertical Plane by Picking Two Screen

Points and One 3D Point

2 - Define Horizontal Plane by Picking Two

Screen Points and One 3D Point

3 - Define Plane by Picking Three Screen

Points and One 3D Point

4 - Define Plane by Picking Three 3D Points

5 - Define Vertical Plane by Picking Two 3D

Points

6 - Define Plane Position by Picking on 3D

Point

To Pick Points:

1. Define a 3D plane in the Examiner/Walkthrough/Station-Based mode.

2. Or define a 3D plane in the Station-Based mode.

Note: You can define a projection plane even if the selected station does not contain any image.


Define a 3D plane in the Examiner/Walkthrough/Station-Based Mode

To Define a Plane by Picking Three 3D Points:

1. Click . The Picking

Parameters toolbar appears in 3D constraint mode.

2. Pick three points (free or constrained) in the 3D View .

To Define a Vertical Plane by Picking Two 3D Points:



2. Pick two points (free or constrained) in the 3 D View .

Define a Plane in the Station-Based Mode

There are ten methods available in the Station-Based mode for defining a 3D plane. Three are specific to that mode: two are based on two screen points and a 3D point and one on three screen points and a 3D point. The other methods are already described in the Examiner (or Walkthrough ) mode.

Load Existing Rectified Image Parameters

If there are some rectified images in your project, the From button in the Step 2

- Define Projection Plane is active. You can select a rectified image and use its parameters for computing a new one.

To Load Existing Rectified Image Parameters:

1. Click on the From button. The Copy From Existing Rectified Image dialog opens. All rectified images inside the project are listed.

2. Select a rectified image from the Project Tree . The OK button becomes active.

OK . The Copy From Existing Rectified Image dialog closes.

The rectified image parameters appear in Step 3 and Step 4 of the Image

Rectification dialog. Its projection plane is shown in the 3D View window.


Modify a Projection Plane's Size

You can resize the previous projection plane. The resized projection plane keeps the same parameters as before except the dimensions. You can do this by dragging & dropping a corner in the 3D View window.

To Modify a Projection Plane's Size:

1. Place the mouse cursor upon any handle of a projection plane. A green square appears.

2. If a corner handle is selected, drag it to increase (or reduce) the projection plane size. During this operation, the green square becomes yellow.

1 - Handle before the drag & drop operation 2 - Handle during the drag & drop operation

3. If a middle handle is selected, drag it to increase (or reduce) the projection plane width (or length). During this operation, the green square becomes yellow.


1 - Handle before the drag & drop operation 2 - Handle during the drag & drop operation

Modify the Position of the Projection Plane

To Modify the Position of the Projection Plane:



2. Pick a point (free or constrained) on the displayed point cloud in the 3D

View .



The objective of this step is to define a region (called Zone of Interest ) on the previous projection plane onto which the station images will be projected. For this, you have to draw a rectangular frame. In the drawing mode, the 3D scene is locked. Before drawing a zone of interest, the entire projection plane is set as zone of interest and its size is shown in text in Step 3 of the Image

Rectification dialog.

Note:

The size of the zone of interest is in the current unit of measurement (the one set in Preferences ).

If no projection plane has been defined in Step 1 , the grayed-out Area

Undefined message appears in the dialog and the Draw button remains dimmed.


Draw a Zone of Interest

To Draw a Zone of Interest:

Draw . The cursor will take the shapes as shown below and the projection plane is hidden.

2. Draw a rectangular frame by picking two points.

1 - Cursor shape of the first point to be picked

2 - Cursor shape of the second point to be picked

3 - Size of the interest zone


The mouse cursor shape changes. The arrow becomes a pointer to indicate that you are in the picking mode. A number beside this pointer guides you step-by-step in the point's selection. It starts from One that corresponds to the first point of the X* direction and ends by Two . Once the two points are reached, the interest zone is generated. You can cancel it whenever you want and start a new one.

Note:

Pressing cancels the selection of points in progress and leaves the drawing mode.


Modify a Zone of Interest

To Modify a Zone of Interest:

1. Move the cursor over a handle in green.


2. Drag-and-drop the handle to resize the rectangular frame.


Set an Image Resolution

You can define the rectified image's resolution by giving the PPI (Pixels Per

Inch), specifying the number of pixels in the X and Y directions or giving the pixel size. The pixel size is equal to 1 (if the unit of measurements is Inch) or to

25.4 (if the unit of measurement is millimeters) divided by the image resolution

(in PPI). The image size (in pixels) is obtained by dividing the interest zone size by the pixel size.

To Set an Image Resolution:

1. Enter a value in the Pixel Size field. The image size (WxH) is updated according the new value.

2. Or . The Set Image Resolution dialog opens.


Enter a value (in PPI) in the Image Resolution (PPI) field.

Enter two values (in pixels) in the Image Size (WxH) field.

Enter a value (in the current unit of measurement) in the Pixel Size field.

OK . The Set Image Resolution dialog closes.

Tip: You can use the short-cut key R (or select Set Image Resolution (R) from the pop-up menu) to open the Set Image Resolution dialog.


Preview a Rectified Image

You need to have at least one image inside the selected station to be able to preview the rectified image. Otherwise, the Preview button remains dimmed even if a projection plane and a zone of interest have been defined.

To Preview a Rectified Image:

Click . The computed image is shown in a 2D Image viewer called

Image Preview of Image Rectification Tool .

1 - Image Zoom In

2 - Image Zoom Out


Before previewing the rectified-image, clicking Close leaves the Image

Rectification Tool and the position of the rectified-image is lost. After previewing the rectified-image, clicking Close opens a dialog which prompts you to abort or continue the operation. In this 2D Image viewer, you can zoomin (or zoom-out). You can zoom in three ways. The first one is to magnify (or reduce) an area of the rectified-image using Image Zoom In and Image Zoom

Out . The second way is to magnify (or reduce) the rectified-image using the mouse wheel (if existed). The third is to select a zoom factor from the dropdown list. If the rectified-image is bigger than the 2D Image viewer can show, you can pan it on left-click in any direction.

Tip: You can select Preview Rectified Image from the pop-up menu.


You can also make a 2D-distance measurement. As the metric information is stored in the calculated rectified-image, the measurement is accurate.

To Make a Measurement:

Measurement Tool .

2. Pick two points on the rectified-image. The measurement distance is shown in text in the 2D Image viewer.

Create Measurement from the pop-up menu.


Tip: You can also use the Esc key instead of selecting Close Tool from the pop-up menu.

Note: Pressing Esc without saving the measured distance will cancel that distance.

To Print the Rectified-Image:

1. Right-click in the rectified-image.

Print from the pop-up menu.

Tip: You can also select Print from the File menu (or click on the Print button in the Main toolbar).

Split a Rectified Image

For rectified images of large size, you can split them into rectified images of small size. Splitting can be done along a rectified image's width, along its height or in both directions.

To Split a Rectified Image:

1. Enter a number in W (or H ) field.

2. Or use the Up (or Down ) button to select a number in the W (or H ) field.


Create a Rectified Image

You can now create the rectified image in the database. The created image will be put under the current active group of the Images Tree . Note that the newly created image has “ortho-image” as type. You can create several rectified images without quitting the tool.

To Create a Rectified Image:

Create .

2. Click .

Tip:

You can also right-click in the 3D View and select Create Rectified Image from the pop-up menu.

Once the zone of interest has been defined (3D rectangle), defining a new plane will merely modify the position and orientation of the zone of interest. In particular, the size of the rectangle is kept. This can prove useful when producing a series of rectified images of a facade (to keep the height and vertical position of the rectangle).

Note: You do not need to first preview a rectified image to create it in the database.


Polyline Drawing Tool

This tool allows you to create quickly a polyline drawing by successively picking on the displayed object(s) or not. The final result is a polyline which you can export as a 3D polyline in DXF (or DGN) format, or as a 2D polyline in DXF format for coplanar polyline. You can use the Polyline Drawing Tool in both the

3D View and the planar view (as used in the 2D-EasyLine Tool ). In the latter case, the created polyline is a planar one. You can use this to carry out inspections.

Open the Tool

To Open the Tool:

1. Select and display an object (point cloud or geometry) in the 3D View .

2. From the OfficeSurvey menu, select Polyline Drawing Tool *. The

Drawing Tool toolbar opens. It looks as shown in [A] in the Examiner (or

Walkthrough ) mode and as shown in [B] in the Station-Based mode.

[A]

[B]

1 - Start 3D Plane Tool

2 - Lock in 2D

3- Selection Mode

4 - Change Mode

5 - Selection Mode

6 - Close Tool

3. Or if you are in a main tool like e.g. the 2D-EasyLine Tool , click on the

Polyline Drawing Tool button.

Tip: (*) You can also click the Polyline Drawing Tool icon in the Tools toolbar.

Note: No selection is necessary to access the tool. Anything that is displayed in the 3D View , whether selected or not, can be picked.


Define a 3D Plane

You can use the 3D Plane Tool to define a plane and draw polylines on it. The

Drawing Tool toolbar looks as shown in [A] and [B] when you are respectively in the Examiner / Walkthrough and Station-Based mode.

[A]

[B]


To Draw in a 3D Plane:

2 - Shown/Hide Plane 3 - Lock in 2D the icon. The 3D Plane Tool toolbar and a 3D plane both appear. the (or Walkthrough ) mode: a) Define and validate a 3D plane. The Show/Hide Plane icon becomes enabled and the Lock in 2D icon is set by default. The scene is locked on the defined 3D plane with a 2D grid superimposed (if not hidden previously) and the Picking

Parameters toolbar appears in the 2D constraint mode. b) Click icon to display the defined plane. the mode: a) Define and validate a 3D Plane. The Show/Hide Plane and Lock in 2D icons both become respectively enabled and set by default. the icon to hide the defined plane (if required). the to move the 3D plane.

2. Draw a polyline in that plane.

Tip: You can also select the Start 3D Plane Tool icon from the pop-up menu.


Note:

In , you can swap from a navigation mode

( Examiner / Walkthrough / Station-Based ) to another as often as required.

In mode, the Lock in 2D icon remains unavailable before defining a 3D plane.

If a 3D plane has been selected as input of the Polyline Drawing Tool , the

3D scene will be locked on that plane with a 2D grid superimposed (if not hidden previously).


Draw a Polyline

The basic tool to draw a polyline is the action of picking which can be free or constrained. The Polyline Drawing Tool , split into three modes ( Polyline ,

Rectangle and Circle ), behaves differently according to the input data that you select for using it. In the Chain mode, if the input data is an object like pure 3D point cloud or geometry, you use this tool in the 3D View and you can only draw segments (that’s why Change Mode to Arc is dimmed). If the input data is an object like a slice of point cloud (see the Cutting Plane Tool ) or a fitted

Polyline (see the Contouring Tool or Profile/Cross-Sections Tool ), you use this tool locked in the planar view and you can draw only segments or a combination of segments and circular arcs. In the Rectangle and Circle modes, the input data can only be of 2D type.

Before RealWorks 9.0:

When you start drawing a polyline, if the cursor is over another polyline, the first node will exactly start at the middle of a segment (or arc), as illustrated below.

In RealWorks 9.0:

When you start drawing a polyline, if the cursor is over another polyline, the start node will exactly on the existing polyline at the cursor position, as illustrated below. The behavior is the same with the end of the polyline.



Draw a Chain of Segments and/or Arcs

If you are in 3D, the Drawing Tool toolbar opens as shown below and the

Picking Parameters toolbar (in the 3D constraint mode) appears. The Change

Mode to Arc , Draw Circle and Draw Rectangle icons are unavailable.

In 3D:


2 - Lock in 2D

3 - Selection Mode

4 - Change Mode

5 - Select Polyline

6 - Close Tool

If you are in 2D, the Drawing Tool toolbar looks as shown here below and the

Picking Parameters toolbar in the 2D constraint mode (H/V or Angle/Distance) appears. The Change Mode to Arc , Draw Circle and Draw Rectangle icons are available.

In 2D:

1 - Selection Mode 2 - Change Mode

To Draw in the Chain Mode:

3 - Close Tool

1. Pick a point to start the first node of a polyline.

2. Navigate through the 3D scene and pick another point. A segment links these two points.

3. Click on the Change Mode pull-down arrow.

Change Mode to Arc (C) from the drop-down list.

5. Navigate through the 3D scene and pick another point. The newly picked point is linked to the previous picked point by an arc.


Change Mode to Line (l) from the drop-down list

8. Navigate through the 3D scene and pick another point. The newly picked point is linked to the previous picked point by a segment.

Note:


The steps from 3 to 7 are only available in 2D and pickings can be done anywhere in the planar view, on cloud point/geometry or not.

In 3D, pickings should be done on displayed object(s) and can be constrained on a cloud point using the Ctrl key with the left-click. This means that you cannot pick anywhere except on the point.

1 - Line drawing mode 2 - Arc drawing mode

Tip: You can switch from the line drawing mode to the arc drawing mode and conversely as often as you wish just by pressing respectively the L and C keys on your keyboard, by clicking on the Change Mode button in the Drawing Tool toolbar or by selecting its related command from the pop-up menu.

9. Continue in picking in order to define the other nodes of the polyline.


11. Select to terminate the polyline. The start node is not linked to the last selected node.

12. Select to end and close the polyline. The start node is linked to the last selected node.


A - The first selected node B - End Line: The start node is not linked to the last selected node

C - Close Line: The start node is linked to the last selected node

Note:

Pressing while you are picking points will end and validate (but not create) the polyline in progress.

Each time you validate a polyline by double-clicking or by using the End

Line and Close Line commands; you can continue to draw other polylines.

These polylines will not be connected.

Tip: You can double-click to end drawing. In this case, the drawn polyline is always an open one.


Draw a Rectangle

To draw a polyline in the Rectangle mode when the input is of 3D data type, first click the Lock in 2D icon to lock the 3D View in 2D (or after defining a 3D plane using the 3D Plane Tool , the Draw Rectangle icon becomes enabled).

The scene is then locked in 2D with a 2D grid superimposed (if not hidden previously) and the picking mode switches from 3D constraint to 2D constraint.

Clicking again the Lock in 2D icon frees the scene from 2D lock and 2D constraint picking mode. If the input is of 2D data type; you do not need to lock the scene in 2D because it is (by definition) locked in 2D plane.

In 3D:

1 - Lock in 2D

In 2D:

2 - Draw Rectangle

Draw Rectangle

To Draw a Rectangle:

1. Click on the Draw Rectangle pull-down arrow.

2. Choose from the drop down list.

3. Pick a point. A node appears. This sets up the first corner of a rectangle.

4. Move your cursor to setup the opposite corner. The node disappears and a rectangle in dotted appears. Its shape changes as long as you move the cursor.

5. Pick a point. A rectangle is then drawn.

Or

6. Click on the Draw Rectangle pull-down arrow.

Draw Rectangle by Defining 3 Points from the drop down list.

8. Pick a point. A node appears. This sets up the first end of a rectangle’ side.


9. Move your cursor to setup the opposite end. The node disappears and a segment in dotted appears. Its shape changes as long as you move the cursor.

10. Pick a point. The segment in dotted becomes continuous and another node appears.

11. Move your cursor to setup the opposite end. The node disappears. Three other sides in dotted and perpendicular to the first side appear. Their length changes as long as you move the cursor.

12. Pick a point. A rectangle is then drawn.

Note: You can switch from the 2-point drawing mode to the 3-point drawing mode and conversely as often as you wish just by clicking on the Draw

Rectangle icon.

Tip: You can also select Lock in 2D , Draw Rectangle by Defining 2 Points and

Draw Rectangle by Defining 3 Points from the pop-up menu.


Draw a Circle

To draw a polyline in the Circle mode when the input is of 3D data type, first click the Lock in 2D icon to lock the 3D View in 2D (or after defining a 3D plane using the 3D Plane Tool , the Draw Circle icon becomes enabled). The scene is locked in 2D with a 2D grid superimposed (if has not been hidden previously) and the picking switches from 3D constraint mode to 2D constraint mode.

Clicking again the Lock in 2D icon frees the scene from 2D lock and 2D constraint picking mode. If the input is of 2D data type; you do not need to lock the scene in 2D because it is by definition locked in 2D plane.

In 3D:

2 - Draw Circle 1 - Lock in 2D

In 2D:

Draw Circle

To Draw a Circle:

1. Click on the Draw Circle pull-down arrow.

Draw Circle by Defining the Center and the Radius from the dropdown list.

3. Pick a point. It will be the center of a circle to come.

4. Navigate through the 3D scene and pick another point. These two points will form the radius of a circle.

Or

5. Click on the Draw Circle pull-down arrow.

6. Choose .

7. Pick a point to start the first point of a circle’s diameter.

8. Navigate through the 3D scene and pick another point to set the second point of the diameter.


Note: You can switch from the center-and-radius drawing mode to the diameter drawing mode and conversely as often as you wish just by clicking on the Draw Circle button.

Tip: You can also select Lock in 2D , Draw Circle by Defining the Center and the Radius and Draw Circle by Defining the Diameter from the pop-up menu.

Select a Polyline

When the input contains already created polylines (or after drawing and creating some), you can set one of them as selected by picking. Note that this is only available in 3D (or 3D locked in 2D).


1. Click . The cursor becomes as

2. Pick a polyline. A polyline (in green) appears over the picked polyline.

If a 2D polyline has been picked, the scene is locked in a 2D plane that contains the picked polyline (the Lock in 2D in the Drawing

Polyline toolbar is default set and dimmed) with a 2D grid superimposed (if not hidden previously). The Picking Parameters toolbar appears in the 2D constraint mode.

If a 3D polyline has been picked, the scene remains unlocked and the Picking Parameters toolbar remains in the 3D constraint mode.

Note:

Esc to leave the picking mode.

If required, hide all objects displayed in the 3D View ; this can help you in picking a polyline.

If you are in 3D locked in 2D, after choosing Select Polyline and before picking a polyline, the 3D scene is free from the 2D lock and after picking a polyline the 3D scene comes back to the 2D lock state.

Tip: You can also check Select Polyline from the pop-up menu.


Edit a Polyline

Before creating a polyline, you can delete the whole of it or modify it by deleting, moving and inserting nodes or by continuing it. When you place the cursor over a segment of a polyline, you may see the following symbols:

( Nodes ), ( Middle Nodes ) and ( Middle Nodes to Insert ). When you place the cursor over an arc of a polyline; only ( Nodes ) are available.


Delete a Node

To Delete a Node:

1. Place the cursor over a node. A solid square appears upon the node.

2. Right-click to display the pop-up menu and select Delete Node .

1 - The selected node on the polyline

Note:

2 - The selected node is removed from the polyline

3 - The selected node is moved the (or End ) node of a chain of segments will remove the

First (or Last ) segment from that chain. Deleting a Conjunction node will delete the segment on both side of that node.

Deleting a node at the end of a lonely segment won't delete that segment.

You cannot delete a node of a lonely arc.


Move a Node

To Move a Node:

1. Place the cursor over a node. A solid square appears upon the node.

2. Drag the node to a position. The green square turns to yellow. If the node belongs to a segment; that segment becomes dotted. If it belongs to an arc, the arc shape does not change.

3. Drop the node to that position. Note that in the case of drawing in the 3D

View , the new position should be on displayed objects.

Note:

Moving a node at the end of a segment (or arc) will only move that node.

Moving a node at the middle of a segment will move the whole segment.

Picking a point anywhere on a segment except on the end and middle nodes or on an arc except on the end nodes will transform that point to a node.

Insert a Node

To Insert a Node:

1. Place the cursor anywhere on a segment (except at the end/middle nodes) or on an arc (except at the end nodes). A hollow square appears upon the segment at the cursor position.

2. Right-click to display the pop-up menu and select Insert Middle Node . A new Middle Node is inserted not at the picking position but at the middle of the segment (or arc).

1 - Two opposite ends 2 - A node is inserted between the two ends


Continue a Polyline

To Continue a Polyline:

1. Place the cursor over the end (or start) node of a polyline or anywhere over the last segment of a polyline.

2. Right-click to display the pop-up menu and select Continue . A dotted line appears between the cursor and the selected node if end (or start) node has been chosen or between the cursor and the last node if the last segment has been chosen.

3. Left-click anywhere in the 3D View to continue the polyline.

1 - Selected node on the polyline 2 - A segment is added after the selected vertex

Note: You cannot continue in drawing a closed polyline.


Delete a Polyline

In 3D (or 2D), after drawing a polyline, the Create , Delete Polyline and Delete

All icons become enabled. Note that the Delete Polyline icon is not present on the toolbar but can only be reached from the pop-up menu.

In 3D:

In 2D:

1 - Delete All 2 - Create

Delete a Single Polyline

If there is a lonely polyline that has been drawn, this polyline will be deleted. If there are several polylines, the last polyline will be deleted.

To Delete a Single Polyline:

1. Right-click anywhere in the 3D View .


Note: You can also delete a polyline while drawing it (or after validating it).

Tip: To delete a polyline that is already created, please use the Undo button. It is not necessary to close the Polyline Drawing Tool for that.


Delete all Polylines

To Delete all Polylines:

Click .

Note: You can also delete a polyline that is set as selected (using the Select

Polyline command).

Move a Polyline

After drawing a polyline (or setting an already created one as selected), you can use the displacement mode to Pan or Rotate the polyline within the displayed scene. The displacement mode which comes first is the one chosen during the last use of that tool.

In 3D:

In 2D:

1 - Change Move Mode 2 - Selection Mode

Tip: You can choose the Selection Mode from the pop-up menu.

Note: Moving an already created polyline (which is set as selected) will not displace it but only the selection (the green polyline which appears over the created polyline).


Pan a Polyline

After choosing Pan , a Manipulator in a plane parallel to the screen view appears. If there is a polyline selected, (or when there are several polylines drawn), the Manipulator has as origin the selected (or last drawn) polyline’s center. You can move the selected (or last drawn) polyline along a direction at once or anywhere in the Manipulator ’s plane.

To Pan a Polyline:

1. Click on the Change Move Mode pull-down arrow.

Pan from drop-down list. A Manipulator appears. It is composed of two Axis-Handles and one Plane-Handle .

3. If you are in 3D, rotate lightly so that the plane - inside which the

Manipulator is - is unparalleled to the screen view.

4. Pick to select it; it turns to yellow. The direction along which you can move the selected polyline is highlighted in yellow. Those

(two in all) for which you cannot move the selected polyline are in mauve.

Move the selected polyline along that direction.


1 - Manipulator (with three handles)

2 - Allowed direction (in yellow) 3 - Forbidden directions (in mauve)

5. Or pick on the Plane-Handle . The two Axis-Handles remain with their own color and the two directions along which you can move the selected polyline are highlighted in yellow. The forbidden direction - normal to the plane - is in mauve. Move the selected polyline in that plane.

6. If you are in 2D, you can only move the selected polyline along a direction.

You may only see one forbidden direction in mauve. If you move the selected polyline in a plane, you may not see any forbidden direction.

Tip: You can also select first Change Move Mode from the pop-up menu and then Pan .


Rotate a Polyline

After choosing Rotate , a Manipulator of ring shape (in deep blue) with two extended diagonals (in light blue and mauve) appears in a plane parallel to the screen view. If there is a polyline selected (or when there are several polylines drawn), the Manipulator has as origin the selected (or last drawn) polyline’s center. You can rotate the selected (or last drawn) polyline around an axis perpendicular to the ring’s plane.

To Rotate a Polyline:


2. Choose from the drop-down list. A Manipulator appears. It is of ring shape with two extended and perpendicular diagonals.

3. If you are in 3D, rotate lightly so that the plane - inside which the two extended diagonals are - is unparalleled to the screen view. You may see the direction - around which you can rotate the selected polyline - in dashes.

4. Pick the ring; it turns to yellow. The direction around which you can rotate the selected polyline tilts to deep blue. Rotate the selected polyline around that direction.


2 - Axe of rotation (in deep blue) 1 - Ring Manipulator

5. If you are in 2D, do the same procedures than step 4. You may not see any forbidden direction.

Tip: You can also right-click to display the pop-up menu and select first

Change Move Mode and then Rotation .


Auto-Duplicate a Polyline

In the Station-Based mode, you can duplicate a polyline in two directions

( Horizontal or Vertical ). The polyline needs to be a 2D polyline or a 3D coplanar polyline (all nodes in the same plane).

1 - Auto-Duplicate Horizontally (Image-Based) 2 - Auto-Duplicate Vertically (Image-Based)

Tip: You need to have matched images within your station(s).


Auto-Duplicate Horizontally a Polyline

To Auto-Duplicate Horizontally a Polyline:

1. Set a polyline as selected.

2. Or draw a new 3D coplanar polyline.

Auto-Duplicate Horizontally (Image-Based) to duplicate the selected

(or drawn) polyline horizontally.

Auto-Duplicated Vertically (Image-Based) to duplicate the selected

(or drawn) polyline vertically.

Tip: You can also select a part of an already duplicated polyline using the

Selection Mode and duplicate it horizontally.


Auto-Duplicate Vertically a Polyline

To Auto-Duplicate Vertically a Polyline:

1. Set a polyline as selected.

2. Or draw a new 3D coplanar polyline.

Auto-Duplicate Horizontally (Image-Based) to duplicate the selected

(or drawn) polyline horizontally.

Auto-Duplicated Vertically (Image-Based) to duplicate the selected

(or drawn) polyline vertically.

Tip: You can also select a part of an already duplicated polyline using the

Selection Mode and duplicate it vertically.


Manually Duplicate a Polyline

You can manually duplicate a polyline in any navigation mode ( Examiner ,

Walkthrough or Station-Based ). The duplication direction is the one given by the manipulator which appears when using the Selection Mode .

To Manually Duplicate a Polyline:

1. Select a drawn polyline using the Selection Mode *. The Change Move

Mode becomes enabled. The selected polyline color swaps from green to yellow and a manipulator (with two handles (Green and Red)) appears over it.

2. Select from the pop-up menu. You cannot see the duplicated polyline because it is upon the original polyline.

3. If required, click on the Change Move Mode pull-down arrow. between and Rotate .

5. Move the duplicated polyline in consequence. The duplicated polyline becomes selected (yellow) and the original polyline unselected (green).

Note:

You can also use the following short-cut key Ctrl + D .

(*) If your polyline has been already created in the RealWorks database, first set it using the Select Polyline command.


Create a Polyline

Once you are satisfied with the drawn polyline(s), you can create it (or them) in the database. The newly created object will be put in the current active folder under the Models Tree .

To Create a Polyline:

1. Click .

2. Click .

Note: If you draw several unconnected polylines, they will be created into the same polyline.

Tip:

You can also select Create from the pop-menu or press Enter .

You can also select Close Tool from the pop-menu or press Esc .


Catenary Drawing Tool

The Catenary Drawing Tool enables you to create a model of a power line (or several in a row) from scan data.

Open the Tool

This tool, which requires no selection as input, is based on what is displayed in the 3D View .

To Open the Open:

1. Display a point cloud in the 3D View . the menu, select Catenary Drawing .



This step consists in picking three points, no matter the order of the points.

Two of the points need to be the locations where the power line ends, typically, where it reaches the poles.


1. If required, click the Pick Three Points icon. The cursor becomes as follows . A yellow cross appears at the picked position.

2. Pick a point on the displayed point cloud. The cursor becomes as follows

. A yellow cross appears at the picked position.

3. Pick another point on the displayed point cloud. The cursor becomes as follows .

4. Pick the last point on the displayed point cloud. A power line is extracted from the point cloud and the Create icon becomes enabled.

Note: Pressing Esc., while you are picking points, cancels the points.

Note: An error message appears in the case no power line can be computed from the picked points, for instance if the points are not on a hanging catenary shape. You are then prompted to pick new points.


Create a Power Line

To Create a Power Line:

Click . A planar Polyline , named Object , is created in the database.

Tip : You can change the width of the created polyline in Preferences / Viewer .


Image Matching Tool

The Image Matching Tool allows you to match an imported image to a displayed 3D scene, or in other words, to find the camera position from which the image is shot. The basic principle behind this tool is to select at least four pairs of markers (points or segments or a combination thereof); each of them should be selected on the same physical objects. For example, you can select a point from the 3D scene, and another one in the 2D image, both correspond to the corner of a room. We call these two points a pair of markers. Then

RealWorks will use these selected markers to calculate a best registration (or a best camera position) so that when you view from this camera position and along its axis, the image and the 3D scene will superposed. Once the image is matched to the 3D scene, you can use it to color the scanned points, to texture the meshed model, or just to enhance understanding of the scene.

Open the Tool

To Open the Tool:

1. Select a point cloud (or mesh) from the Models Tree .

2. Select an image (or more) from the Images Tree . the menu, select I mage Matching Tool . The Image

Matching dialog opens as well as the Picking Parameters (in 3D constraint mode) toolbar.

This dialog opened as the third tab of the WorkSpace window is separated into four parts. The first part enables to select an image that will be used as reference for matching. The second part contains tools to select and edit markers. The third part enables to preview the matching, view stored and matched images and match under constraint. The last part enables to validate the matching and color points. The selected image is shown as a thumbnail in the left top corner of the 3D View . If more than one image are selected, the first in the selection list is the one that is shown in the 3D View .

Note: The Image Matching icon is not present in the Tools toolbar.


Select an Image

You should select an image from the Select Image combo box for matching.

Only unmatched and already matched images are listed in that combo box.

To Select an Image:

1. Click on the Select Image pull-down arrow.

2. Select an image from the drop-down list.

1 - Field for selecting an image 2 - Hide/Show Image 3 - Maximize/Minimize Image

Tip: Inside the Image Matching Tool , you can go back to the Models Tree tab to display or hide objects for marker selection purposes.

Hide (or Show) a Thumbnail

To Hide (or Show) a Thumbnail:

1. Click on the Hide/Show Image icon to hide the thumbnail.

2. And click again on the Hide/Show Image icon to display the thumbnail.

Tip:

The icon can also be selected from the pop-up menu.

You can also click anywhere in the 3D View and use the short-cut key V .


Maximize (or Minimize) a Thumbnail

To Maximize (or Minimize) a Thumbnail:

1. Click on the Maximize/Minimize Image icon to make full the thumbnail.

2. And click again on the Maximize/Minimize Image icon to restore the thumbnail size.

Tip:

Maximize/Minimize Image icon can also be selected from the pop-up menu.

You can also click anywhere in the 3D View and use the short-cut key M .

Extend (or Stretch) a Thumbnail

You can drag and drop a vertical (or horizontal) edge of the thumbnail image to extend it in width (or length).

Move a Thumbnail

Place your cursor over the symbol and drag and drop the thumbnail image to a location within the 3D View .


Select Markers

For a given image, if a matching has been already performed, you can view the stored matching. If any matching has been performed and when no information about the shooting position are available, you can start matching by selecting at least four pairs of markers. Before selecting, each pair is set as "Undef" in the Pairs column of the marker list and "?" in the Defined In column.

1 - Check box

To Select Markers:

1. Pick a pair of makers.

2. Or Load a set of maker pairs.

2 - List of markers

Note:

Press twice the Esc button to close the Image Matching Tool .

In the marker list table, each selected marker pair will be shown. You can see in the second column whether the pair is completely defined, or if it is just partially defined.


Pick Markers

You should pick at least four pairs of markers. Each pair may be either a 3D

Point/2D Point pair or a 3D Line/2D Line pair. The order of these pairs has no influence on the final calculation. So you can pick them whenever you find a corresponding marker pair (no matter its type) in both 3D View and 2D View

(for image). Movements are restricted in the 3D View to Pan , Zoom and Rotate while picking markers.

1 - Add Point Marker

To Pick Markers:

2 - Add Line Marker

1. Pick a pair of points.

2. Or pick a pair of lines.

3. Or pick a combination of point pairs and line pairs.

Note:

Pressing (or once on Esc ) while the picking is in progress cancels the selected markers.

A pair of points is always put at the first position in the marker list when you select a combination of points and lines.


Pick a Pair of Points

To Pick a Pair of Points:

1. Select an image that will be used as a reference image for matching.

2. Navigate in the 3D scene so that the displayed scene aligns approximately with the chosen image. the icon. You are now in the picking mode.

4. Pick a point marker on the reference image.

This point is shown by a red square with One as order.

In the marker list, "Undef" becomes "Point#1" in the Pairs column and "?" swaps to "[2D]/ " in the Define In column.

5. Pick a point marker on the 3D scene.

This point is shown by a yellow P with One as order.

In the marker list, "[2D]/ " in the Define In column becomes

"[2D]/[3D]".

A check mark beside this pair means that it is taken into account for the matching.

6. Repeat the steps from 4 to 5 for the three other pairs of point markers.

2 - 3D Point marker 1 - 2D Point marker

Note:

Point markers can be selected by pair (one from a view and one from the other view) as described above or continuously (four from a view and four the other view).


When you select a pair from the list, its related point marker P on the object becomes green (the number label remains in yellow) and the red square in the reference image becomes pink (the number remains unchanged).


Pick a Pair of Lines

To Pick a Pair of Lines:

1. Select an image from the selection list that will be used as a reference image for matching.

2. Click on the Add Line Marker icon. You are now in the picking mode.

3. Pick in the 3D scene to set at least four line markers (if any point has been set).

4. Pick in the reference image to set at least four line markers (if any point has been set).

2 - 3D Line marker 1 - 2D Line marker

The mouse cursor shape changes. The arrow becomes a pointer with two numbers beside. The first number is a line order and the second to the picked point order. A point once picked on the selected object is shown by a yellow L with a number besides indicating a line marker order. Two points from the same rank once picked are linked by a color segment which is named Line # X .

X is the line marker rank. A point once picked on the reference image is shown by a pink square marker with a number besides indicating a line marker order and a line is drawn through this point to the current mouse cursor position. Two points from the same rank once picked are linked by a color segment which named Line # X . X is the matching line rank. When a pair of line markers from the same rank (one in the reference image and one in the cloud) is defined, this pair is named L ine # X and is put in a list. X is the pair rank. A check mark besides a pair of line markers means that this pair is taken into account for matching. Un-select a check mark if you don't want to take into account a pair.

When you select a pair from the list, its related line markers are lengthened.


Load Markers

You can import an image that has been already matched, load and use its parameters for matching new images. Usually, such parameters are stored in a

TXT (or ASCII) format file.

To Load Markers:


Load Marker Pairs From File . The Open dialog box opens.

3. Select a file type (*.txt or *.asc) from the drop-down list in the File of Type field.

4. Navigate to the drive/folder where the file to loaded is in the Look In field.

5. Select the file. Its name appears in the File Name field.

6. Click .

Tip: You can also use the short-cut key L instead of selecting Load Marker

Pairs From File from the pop-up menu.

Modify Markers

Once four pairs of markers ( Points or Lines ) are set, you can delete those that are not correctly set for matching, re-order a part (or the whole) of them, modify their location in each view or reset them all. Four tools, available for editing the marker features, are described hereafter.

1 - Move Marker

2 - Delete Marker

3 - Reset all Markers

4 - Re-order Markers


Move a Point (or Line)

To Move a Point (or Line):

1. Click on the Move Markers icon. The cursor shape changes as shown in the illustration below.

2. Move the cursor over any marker in either the 2D image or the 3D View .

The marker will be highlighted in pink in the 2D image and in green in the

3D View .

3. Drag and drop the marker to a new position. Its corresponding marker in the other view will not be moved too.

1 - The cursor shape in the displacement mode 2 - The marker is in green when highlighted in the 3D View


Delete a Point (or Line)

To Delete a Point (or Line): the icon. The cursor shape changes as shown in the illustration below.

2. Move the cursor over any marker either in the image or in the 3D scene.

The marker will be highlighted.

3. Click on the marker to delete it. Its corresponding marker in the other view will is also deleted.

The cursor shape in the deletion mode

When you place the mouse cursor upon a point (P), its color tilts from red to pink in the reference image and from yellow to green in the point cloud (or mesh). This means that the point (P) is selected and can be deleted. Deleting a point (P) will remove it from both the reference image and the point cloud (or mesh). A point (P) once deleted is replaced by one which is just after it and the pairs list is automatically updated. Once all markers deleted, you go back automatically to the selection mode. When you delete a line (L), you delete by the same way the line (L) in the other view.

Tip: You select a pair of markers from the marker list table and press the Del key to delete it.


Reset all Points (or Lines)

To Reset all Points (or Lines): the icon. A question box opens.

2. Click to delete the current set of point/line markers.

3. Click to abort the operation.

Tip: The Reset All Markers icon can also be selected from the pop-up menu.

Reorder Points (or Lines)

To Reorder Points (or Lines): the icon. The cursor shape changes as shown in the illustration below.

2. Move the cursor over any marker in either the 2D Image or the 3D View.

3. Pick the marker. Its order* is reversed with that of the first marker. The order of its corresponding marker in the other view does not change.

Cursor shape in the reordering mode

Note: (*) Only if it is not the first in the selection order.


Save Markers

You can save the selected marker pairs into a text file and reload it later on to continue your image matching work.

To Save Markers:

1. Right-click anywhere in the 3D View to display the pop-up menu. the command. The Save As (or Open) dialog box opens.

3. Select a file type (*.txt or *.asc) from the drop-down list in the File of Type field.

4. Navigate to the drive/folder where you want the file to save is in the Look

In field.

5. Enter a file name in the File Name field. The selected extension will be added automatically.

6. Click .

Tip: You can also use the short-cut key S instead of selecting Save Marker

Pairs To File from the pop-up menu.

Match an Image

With an unmatched image, once four pairs of markers have been selected, the

Preview button becomes enabled. You can proceed to a preview. With an already matched image, you can view the stored matching.


Preview an Image Matching

You can now preview the matching. The image will be projected into the 3D

View . It is displayed in the background and blended with the 3D scene. You can use the slider to change the blending parameter in order to check the coincidence of the image with the 3D data. The markers set on the displayed scene appear on the reference image, this enables the user to visually compare them with those set on the reference image.

To Preview an Image Matching:

Step 3 of the Image Matching dialog, click Preview .

1 - Slider 2 - Image in background 3 - Point Cloud

2. If required, extend the thumbnail image and compare the markers.


Gap between markers set on the reference image and on the displayed scene

3. If required, click Hide . The image in background will be removed from the

3D View .

Tip:

Instead of using the slider, you can click anywhere in the 3D View and use the Up and Down keys of your keyboard.

You can click anywhere in the 3D View and use the short-cut key A to set the blending parameter to 0 (slider in Low position) or to 1 (slider in Top position).

Note: You can hide the image by right-clicking anywhere in the 3D View and selecting Projected Image .

Improve an Image Matching

Where necessary, you can improve the matching by adding more markers, deselecting some from the calculation (by using the check box in the marker list), or modifying the position of certain markers, and then re-perform the preview.


Adjust an Image Matching

You can also manually adjust the 3D scene over the projected image by small movements. To do this, you can use either the free or the constrained movements. Free movements consist of using basic navigation tools ( Zoom ,

Pan and Rotate ) for moving the 3D scene while constrained movements require the use of constraint tools.

To Adjust an Image Matching:

1. Constrain to a pair of markers.

2. Or constrain to two pairs of markers.

Note: Because you need to adjust the 3D scene to cover the projected image by small movements in all directions, the Head Always Up (Z axis) option in

Preferences if checked is then disabled.

Constrain to a Pair a Markers

You can select either a 3D Point/2D Point pair or a 3D Line/2D Line pair as constraint.

To Constrain to a Pair of Markers:

1. Select a pair of markers from the marker list which you consider offer the best coincidence first icon becomes active. Click on it.

3. Go to the 3D View , and move the scene. You can see that the movement is constrained in such a way that the selected marker pair will always be coincident.

Tip: To unset a pair of markers as constraint, click again on the Constrained to

Marker Pair icon.


Constrain to Two Pairs of Markers

If the first constraint is a 3D Point/2D Point pair, you can add a new constraint which should be necessary a 3D Point/2D Point pair. You may see in the third column (called Constraint ) of the marker list table if a pair is selected as constraint (or not). The first constrained pair is shown as follows

. The second constrained pair is shown as follows

To Constrain to Two Pairs of Markers:

.

1. Select another pair of markers from marker list. The second Constrained to Marker Pair icon becomes enabled.

2. Click on the Constrained to Marker Pair icon.

3. Go to the 3D View , and move the scene. You can see that the movement is constrained in such a way that both the selected pairs will always be coincident.

Tip: To unset a pair of markers as constraint, click again on the Constrained to

Marker Pair icon.

Project an Image Matching

If the selected image is already matched, the Project button in Step 3 of the

Image Matching dialog becomes enabled. Clicking on it allows you to view the matching.


Color Points

You can now use the Coloring button to color the displayed cloud(s) with the currently matched image. It is important to note that this coloring operation has no Undo . After the coloring, the color attributes of the points can be changed again if you use this function with another image.

1 - Colored points 2 - Uncolored points remain in white

Note: The Coloring operation may take a long time for huge datasets.

Apply the Matching

If you are satisfied with the matching result, you can use the Apply button to save it to the database. It is important to note that this operation has no Undo .

The selected image becomes matched.

To Apply the Matching:

1. Click .

2. Click .


Volume Calculation Tool

The Volume Calculation Tool enables to compute the volume between a point cloud and a plane, between two point clouds, between a point cloud and a mesh or between two meshes. The volume computation is based on a grid method and the result is represented in the 3D View by a graph of vertical color lines with scale. You can choose in the Preferences dialog the units to represent the computed volumes.

Open the Tool

You need to select one or two surfaces from a project. You cannot exceed three.

To Open the Tool:

1. Select one or two surfaces from the Project Tree .

2. From the OfficeSurvey menu, select Volume Calculation Tool . The

Volume Calculation dialog opens.

This dialog opens as the third tab of the WorkSpace window and is composed of six parts. The first part contains two sub-tools ( Segmentation and Sampling ).

The second part enables to define a plane. The third part lets you to set its resolution. The fourth part enables to preview the volume computation result, display (or hide) the selected surface(s), check the computed volume(s) to keep and edit a report. The fifth part is to edit the computed volume(s). The sixth part is to save the volume computation result, and close the tool.

If one surface has been selected, this surface will be automatically displayed in the 3D View with its own color. If two surfaces have selected, the first (by selection order) will be set as Reference Surface and displayed in Red and the second as Comparative surface and in Green .

Note:

If the selected surface is a mesh, these two sub-tools ( Segmentation and

Sampling ) are unavailable.

If the input contains a point cloud and a mesh; the mesh will be by default

Reference Surface and will not able to change to the Comparison Surface .


Define a Plane

A plane perpendicular to the Z -axis of the active coordinate frame appears.

To Define a Plane:

1. Define a direction for the Normal .

2. Set for the plane. the .


Define the Normal Direction

It is up to the user to orientate the initial plane. There are several tools available for this purpose.

1 - Set From Frame

2 - Fit


4 - Plan Perpendicular to

Screen

5 - Pick 3 points on Plane

6 - Edit Parameters

To Define the Normal Direction:


Select one of the frame’s axes.

7 - Plane Parallel to Screen

View

8 - Field for defining a direction

Fit an extracted set of points with a plane.

Find a perpendicular view plane from an extracted set of points.

Pick one of the object’s axes.

Pick a plane perpendicular to the screen.

Pick three points (1).


Note: After selecting (1), the Picking Parameters toolbar appears. You can pick free or constrained points.











1. Click on the Fit pull-down arrow.

2. Choose one of the following:



Fit a Plane

1 - In (i)

2 - Out (o)


To Fit a Plane:

4 - Plane



1. Fence a set of points for which you want to fit with a plane.

2. Click icon. Kept points are fitted with a plane.

Note: It is not necessary to fence a set of points; fitting a plane can be applied to the entire point cloud.


Finding the Best Cross Plane

1 - In (i)

2 - Out (o)


To Find the Best Cross Plane:

4 - Plane Normal



1. Fence a set of points with which you want to fit a plane.

2. Click icon. Kept points give the projection plane’s normal direction.

Note: It is not necessary to fence a set of points; finding the best cross plane can be applied to the entire point cloud.

Pick an Object Local Frame

This method consists of picking an object's local frame. The initial plane will be moved so that its Normal will be parallel to the picked local frame. Its position in the 3D scene and its Offset (altitude) will be set by the picked point.

To Pick an Object Local Frame: the icon. The initial cutting plane disappears from the 3D View .

2. In window, click on the Models tab.


Display Geometry .

5. Click



Pick Two Points

This method consists of picking two points. The initial plane will be moved so that it will pass through the two picked points and perpendicular to the screen.

To Pick Two Points: the icon.




This method consists of picking three points. The initial plane will be moved so that it will pass through the three picked points. Its position in the 3D scene and its Offset (altitude) will be the barycentre of the three picked points.

To Pick Three Points: the icon. The Picking Parameters toolbar appears.

2. Pick three points (free or constrained). Picking is always on the displayed object.

1 - Picked points 2 - The cutting plane passes through the picked points



Edit Parameters

To Edit Parameters: the icon. The 3D Plane Editing dialog opens.

2. Click on the pull down arrow and do one of the following:

Chose to define a normal and a position. a) Enter a direction in the Normal field. b) Enter a point position in the Point field.

Chose to define two points. Points(To) - Point (From) defines a normal and Point (From) gives a position. a) Enter a point position in the Point (To) field. b) Enter a point position in the Point (From) field.

OK . The 3D Plane Editing dialog closes.

Plane Parallel to the Screen View

To Set a Plane Parallel to the Screen:

Click .


Define a Position

Once the initial plane is well oriented, you have to define its position in the 3D space .

To Define a Position:

1. Enter a 3D position in the Point field.

2. Or first click on the Pick Point icon. The Picking Parameters toolbar appears in 3D constraint mode.

3. And then, pick a point in the 3D scene.

The initial plane passes through that point.

Offset value is set to 0.00.

The initial plane in the 3D View is hidden and the Volume Calculation dialog appears in grey. This means that the options and commands from this dialog are unavailable. The dialog comes back to its initial state when you have picked a point.

Note: The picking must be done on the selected surface (point cloud or mesh).


Define an Offset Value

Once the initial plane's position has been defined, you have to set its position along its normal. By default, its current position corresponds to Offset 0 .

Setting a positive value will move the plane Up along its normal while a negative value will move it Down .

To Define an Offset Value:

1. Enter a value in the Offse t field.


1 - A plane's Normal direction 2 - Positive offsets 3 - Negative offsets

Defining a Grid Resolution

This step consists of defining a grid resolution which is square - the same in both of the defined plane directions ( Length and Width ).

To Define a Grid Resolution:




Preview a Volume

You can perform a preview to visualize the result before saving it in the database. You can change the parameters as many times as you please and perform a preview without leaving this tool. There are two display options (one per surface). If one surface has been selected as input, only one display option is available. See (A1). If two surfaces have been selected as input, the two display options are all available. You can reverse this comparison order by clicking on the Swap Reference / Comparison Surfaces icon. The Reference

Surface becomes a surface to inspect and its color swaps to green. The

Comparison Surface becomes a Reference Surface and its color turns to red.

See (B1).

1 - Display/Hide the selected surface(s)

To Preview the Computed Volume(s):

2 - Swap Reference/Comparison Surfaces

Swap Reference/Comparison Surfaces if required.

2. Click on the Preview button.

If one surface (point cloud or mesh) has been selected, the volume computation is done between this surface and the plane defined in Step 1 . Two volumes are computed if the plane cuts the selected surface in two. The

Positive (Cut) volume is the part (of the selected surface) above the plane while the Negative (Fill) volume is the part below. The sum of both is the volume computation result. A unique volume is computed if the plane does not cut the selected surface.


1 - The projection plane

2 - Part of the surface above the plane

3 - Part of the surface below the plane

4 - The Color scale

5 - Positive part of the volume

6 - Negative part of the volume

If two surfaces (point cloud(s) or mesh(es)) have been selected, the volume computation is done between both of them.

1 - The projection plane

2 - The Reference Surface in red

3 - The Comparison Surface in green

4 - The color scale

5 - Negative part of the volume

6 - Positive part of the volume

A volume is represented in the 3D View by a graph of vertical color lines. You can estimate the height of each point (if a point cloud is selected) or of vertex

(if a mesh is selected) compared to the defined plane using the graduated color scale on the left of the 3D View .


Note:

Swap Reference / Comparison Surfaces icon is not present when a single surface has been selected.

After , if the projection resolution set in Step 1 is too small; the following message # Volume size is very high; Computation may take a long time. Do you want to continue?

# appears. Close the message and set a bigger projection resolution.

Check a Volume to Keep

Once a preview has been performed, the Preview button becomes disabled and the Check Volume to Keep options become enabled. See (A2) and (B2).

2 - Check Volume to Keep options 1 - Edit and export the volume result(s)

To Check a Volume to Keep: the option. The positive representation of the volume is hidden.

2. Or clear the Negative (Fill) option. The negative representation of the volume is hidden.

Note: You cannot have the Positive (Cut) and Negative (Fill) options both unchecked. You need to have at least one checked.


Save a Volume in a Report

Once you are satisfied with the previewed volume(s), you can create a report and export to RTF format.

To Save a Volume in a Report:

Report . The Volume Calculation Report dialog opens.

2. Click . The Export Volume Calculation Report dialog opens.


4. Specify a drive/folder where to store the file.

Save . The report is opened as an rtf file in the Microsoft Word application.

6. Print the report as required.

Edit a Volume

The volume previously computed may have irregularities like holes or peaks, you can then edit it by keeping (or removing) the part you want (or do not want), completing holes, smoothing or filtering according to two given elevations. The cursor is in the segmentation mode and only the Range Based

Filtering feature is available. This means that it is up to the user to filter the computed volume or to fence an area for editing.

Range Based Filtering


Filter From an Elevation Range

You can filter the computed volume according a range of elevation values.

Note that this filter cannot be applied to a part of the volume.

To Filter From an Elevation Range:

1. Click icon. The Range Based Filtering dialog opens.

2. Enter a value in the Minimum Value field.

3. Enter a value in the Maximum Value field.

OK .

Parts of the volume out of the defined range are not taken into account


Fence an Area

If you start by fencing an area on the volume, the Fill Holes and Smooth Cells icons become enabled and the Range Based Filtering icon swaps from enabled to disabled.

1 - Keep Cells

2 - Empty Cells

To Fence an Area:

1. Fence an area on the volume.

3 - Fill Holes

4 - Smooth Cells


End Fence from the pop-up menu. the icon.

5. Or click the Empty Cells icon.

Tip:

You can also right-click in the 3D View to display the pop-up menu and select the command you want to use.

Instead of selecting Keep Cells (or Empty Cells ), you can also use the related short-cut key I (or O ).

Instead of selecting End Fence from the pop-up menu, you can also double-click.

Note:

Once a fence has been drawn, the user can no longer manipulate the volume.

To start a new fence, please cancel the current one by selecting New

Fence from the pop-up menu or by pressing Esc .

Fill Holes

To Fill Holes:

1. Fence an area on the computed volume.

2. Click on the Fill Holes icon.


1 - A hole 2 - The hole is filled up

Tip: The Fill Holes icon can also be selected from the pop-up menu.

Note: The Positive (Cut) (or Negative (Fill) ) value is then updated.


Smooth Cells

To Smooth Cells:

1. Fence an area on the computed volume.

2. Click on the Smooth Cells icon.

1 - A set of peaks 2 - The set of peaks are smoothed down

Tip: The Smooth Cells icon can also be selected from the pop-up menu.

Note: The Positive (Cut) (or Negative (Fill) ) value is then updated.


Save a Volume in the Database

You can save the computed volume as a permanent object in the database, perform a screen printouts or export to the DXF file format. For each saved result, a volume object is created and is put under the Active Group in the

Models Tree .

To Save a Volume in the Database:

Create .

2. Click .

Note:

Close can also be selected from the pop-up menu. the without saving the result will make appeared a warning message.


Profile/Cross-Section Tool

This tool is of particular use in civil engineering applications such as tunnel, bridge or road inspections. It is used for generating profiles and cross-sections from a point cloud (or from a set of point clouds) or from a mesh. A profile is a cut along a given polyline (also called Path ). Cross sections are cuts performed perpendicularly to a given path.

Open the Tool

If a point cloud has been selected, the step consists of working on it in order to delimit an area for the profile and cross section calculation, or to render the point cloud cleaner without parasite points or to simplify it. For these operations you can use two sub-tools: Sampling and Segmentation . Each of them, when used in such condition, prevents you from saving the result, the Create command is deactivated. If a mesh has been selected, the two upper sub-tools are unavailable.

To Open the Tool:

1. Select a point cloud (or mesh) from the Project Tree . the menu, select Profile/Cross Section Tool . The

Profile/Cross Section dialog opens.

This dialog opens as the third tab of the WorkSpace window and is composed of five parts. The first part contains two sub-tools: Segmentation and Sampling .

The second part allows you to define the 2D cutting position. The third part is to set section parameters. The fourth part is assigned for calculating and displaying sections. The fifth and last part is to save the created sections in the database, close the tool and give access to the online help. The selected point cloud is displayed in white in the 3D View , and the others are hidden.

Tip: You can also select a couple of point cloud (or mesh) and fitted polyline

(or set of segments) as input of the Profile/Cross Section Tool.


Select a Method

There are two methods for computing a set of cross-sections: From Segments and From Path . If the loaded project does not contain any set of segments, the button From Segments stays dimmed. If there are some*, the button becomes enabled. The button From Path is always enabled even if there is no fitted polyline in the loaded project. Before selecting a method, the No Path Selected and No Bounds texts are displayed and the number of cross-sections is equal to 0.

To Select a Method: the dialog, do one of the following: the button. The Cut Positions from Segments dialog opens. the button. The Cut Positions on Path dialog opens.

Tip:

If the input is a couple of point cloud (or mesh) and fitted polyline, the No

Bounds text remains displayed. The fitted polyline name appears in the

Path line. The number of cross-sections is calculated based on the default value of the Interval parameter.

If the input is a couple of point cloud (or mesh) and set of segments, the

No Path Selected and No Bounds texts remain displayed. The number of cross-sections is equal to the number of segments.

Note: (*) The user does not need to select them.

The "From Path" Mode

In this method, cross-sections are similar and regular along a given path.

"Similar" means that all cross-sections are identical in terms of thickness and length. "Regular" means that all are equidistant i.e. the interval between two consecutive cross-sections is the same in all cases. A path can either be one that is in the project or one you draw. Paths are polylines.


Select a Path

If there is at least one path (polyline) in the loaded project. You can select it for calculating the cross-sections. In that case, the selected point cloud (or mesh) and the current path (polyline) - the one listed in the selection box - with its projection (if existing) in the XY* plane are displayed in the 3D View .

To Select a Path:


2. Select a path (polyline) from the drop down list.

1 - Combo box for selecting an existing path

2 - Radio buttons for choosing between

Horizontal Path or Use 3D Path

3 - Draw and Create Path in Database

4 - Field for setting the Starting value on the path

If the Use Horizontal Path option has been checked, cross-sections will be computed from the path projection in the XY plane. If the Use 3D Path option has been checked, cross-sections will be computed perpendicularly from the path in 3D (not projected in the XY plane). The Starting on a path is like its origin; its default-value is equal to zero but you can set it to a value that meets your need.


1 - A path 2 - Horizontal path (path projected in the XY plane)

3. Enter a value in the Starting field.

3 - 3D path (path not projected in the XY plane)

4. Select a path.

5. Or draw a path.

Note:

The selected path (polyline) has to be regular (one chain with at least three points).

(*) In the X , Y , Z Coordinate System.


Draw a Path

If any path (polyline) exists in your project, the combo box is grayed out. You have to create at least one in the database. In that case, only the selected scene (point cloud or mesh) is shown in the 3D View . The scene is constrained in the XY* plane of the active coordinate frame and movements while picking points are restricted to navigation movements. You can rotate the complete scene around the Z* axis, zoom (in or out) along this same axis and pan in the

XY* plane.

To Draw a Path: the icon. The Drawing Tool toolbar appears. The scene is locked in a 2D plane in the Top view with a

2D grid superimposed (if not hidden previously). The Picking Parameters toolbar appears in the 2D constraint mode. The mouse cursor changes to a pencil.

2. Pick at least two points (free or constrained).

End Line . The last picked point ends the line. click . The start and end picked points are linked with a segment in order to form a closed line.

5. Click . The drawn line is saved and created in the database as a polyline.

Note:

If the 2D Grid had been hidden in a previous case, it will also be hidden when you activate the Polyline Drawing Tool .

(*) In the X , Y , Z Coordinate System.


Start and End Positions

You need to define a portion from the selected or created path (polyline) - more exactly a portion from its projection on the XY* plane of the active coordinate frame (if Use Horizontal Path has been checked) or the path in 3D (if Use 3D

Path has been checked) - for which you want to calculate cross sections. You need to define the Start and End points along the path (polyline). If the Starting value in Step 1 is equal to zero; the Start and End points are set to the beginning and the end of the path (polyline). If this value is different from zero; the Start and End positions on the path are shifted of that value.

1 - Set the Start/End position by inputting a value

2 - Reverse the path direction

3 - Reload the initial Start/End position

4 - Pick the Start/End position

5 - An estimation of the number of sections


Define the Start Position and the Start Position

To Define the Start Position and the End Position:

1. Enter a distance value in the Start field and press Enter .

2. Enter a distance value in the End field and press Enter .

Here below are two screen-captures showing the Start and End positions when the Use Horizontal Path option has been chosen.

1 - The Start position on the horizontal

(projected) path

2 - The Start position modified on the horizontal

(projected) path

3 - The End position on the horizontal

(projected) path

4 - Pick to modify the Start position on the horizontal (projected) path

Here below are two screen-captures showing the Start and End positions when the Use 3D Path option has been chosen.


1 - The Start position on the 3D path 3 - The End position on the 3D path

2 - The Start position modified on the 3D path 4 - Pick to modify the Start position on the 3D path

3. Click icon (if required). the icon (if required).

Pick the Start Position and the End Position

To Pick the Start position and the End Position:

1. Click icon. The mouse cursor shape changes to a pointer.

2. Pick a point along the path (polyline). The picked point becomes the Start point.

3. Repeat the two above steps form the End position. the icon (if required). the icon (if required).


Reverse the Start Position and the End Position

The Start and End positions gives a direction to the path. That’s why the Start value must be positive and smaller than the End value. You can change the path’s direction by reversing the Start and End positions.

Set the Interval Parameter

Cross-sections will be calculated between the Start and End positions along the path (polyline). The distance between two consecutive cross-sections is defined in the Interval field. The estimated number of cross-sections is given in the dialog box. Each time you change the Start (or End ) position or the Interval parameter, this number is updated.

To Set the Interval Parameter:

1. Enter a new value in the Interval field and press Enter .


Note: The given number of cross-sections is an estimation. If a cross-section contains no points, it will not be created in the database even if the Create command is selected.

Define a Width

The Interval between two consecutive cross-sections is not enough to define them along the path (polyline). You also need to define their width by bounding them from each side. The left and right boundaries that delineate the width of each cross-section can be equal or different one from each other. The Width of a cross-section on a given position on the path (polyline) is the width of the point cloud.

To Define a Width: the option. The Left and Right fields become editable.

2. Enter a new value in the Left field.

3. Enter a new value in the Right field.


Apply the Cutting Positions

Once you have finished in defining the cut positions (path, positions on path, step length and cross section width) on the selected point cloud (or mesh), you can use the Apply button. Note that after leaving the From Path method, the name of the selected (or drawn) path (polyline) as well as the number of crosssections are displayed in text in the Profile/Cross-Section dialog. If the Use

Fixed Width option has been selected, the With Bounds text appears.

The "From Segments" Method

Cross-sections that result from this method are all different and irregular along a given path. “Different” because they are not all identical in terms of thickness and length. “Irregular” because all are not equidistant. Such cross-sections can be obtained with a set of segments. Segments can come from a DXF

(AutoCAD®) file that you import into your project. A path can either be one that is in the project or one you draw. Paths are polylines.


Select a Group of Segments

To Select a Group of Segments:

1. In dialog, click on the pull-down button.

2. Select a group from the drop-down list.

1 - A combo box for selecting a group of 3 - The number of segments in the selected segments

2 - The selected segments (in yellow) group

4 - The selected segments projected in the XY plane (in red)

The number of segments in the selected group appears below the selection list. Each segment (in yellow) and its projection (in red) in the XY* plane of the active coordinate frame are shown in the 3D View . Note that the segments in yellow are in 3D while those in red are in 2D.



Define a Path

As in the From Path method, a path (if available in your project) allows you to generate a profile and to set the cross sectioning direction ( Start and End positions). Note that a path is not necessary for generating cross-sections; that why this step (in the From Segments method) is optional. A path becomes necessary if you wish to order all cross-sections and to have the position of each of them along the profile (distance from the Start position to the current

(active) cross-section). If no path exists in your project, you can use the Draw and Create Path in Database tool to draw one.

Tip: You can use a path that comes from the From Path method in the From

Segments method, and conversely.


Select a Path

To Select a Path:

1. Check option. The Select Path field becomes active.

2. Click on the Select Path pull-down arrow.

3. Select a path (polyline). The path (polyline) representation appears in the

3D View .

1 - A box for selecting an existing path

2 - The Define Path option

3 - A path

4 - The path projected in the XY plane

5 - The Draw and Create Path in Database Tool

The selected path (in yellow) and its projection in the XY* plan (in red) are displayed in the 3D View window.



Draw a Path

To Define a Path: the icon. The Drawing Tool toolbar appears. The scene is locked in a 2D plane in the Top view with a

2D grid superimposed (if not hidden previously). The Picking Parameters toolbar appears in the 2D constraint mode.

2. Draw and create a path.

The drawn path (in yellow) and its projection in the XY* plan (in red) are displayed in the 3D View .


Use the Width of the Segment

You can constrain the point cloud’s sectioning with the segment’s width by using the Use Segment Width option. In [A], this option is unused - each selected segment and its projection have differing widths. In [B], this option is used - each segment and its projection have identical widths.

Apply the Cutting Positions

Once you have finished in defining the cut positions on the selected point cloud

(or mesh), you can use the Apply button. After leaving the From Segments method, the number of cross-sections is displayed in text in the Profile/Cross-

Section dialog box. If a path has been selected, its name is displayed. And if the Use Segment’s Width option has been selected, With Bounds text appears.


Compute Cross-Sections

The Compute Sections panel remains dimmed if any selection of a set of segments (or of a fitted polyline) has been performed after

Set a Thickness

The distance between two consecutive cross-sections defined in the previous step is not a sufficient parameter for computing the whole cross-sections. You must also define a value which will be used as a cutting thickness along the profile.

To Set a Thickness:

1. Enter a new value in the Thickness field.

2. Or use the Up (or Down ) button to select a value.

Note: The Thickness field is enabled only if there is a fitted polyline (or set of segments) selected.

Set a Tolerance

Tolerance is a parameter used for approximating the model (profile) to the reality (cloud). The smaller this parameter is, the closer the approximation will be. Tolerance zero means that the corresponding profile or cross-sections pass through all sectioned points.

To Set a Tolerance:

1. Enter a new value in the Tolerance field.

2. Or use the Up (or Down ) button to select a value.

Note: The Tolerance field is enabled only if there is a fitted polyline (or set of segments) selected.


Preview the Profile and the Cross-Sections

You have to preview the results before saving in the RealWorks database or change the parameters and perform a new preview as many times as you please.

To Preview the Profile and the Cross-Sections:

1. Click . The 3D View splits into three sub-windows.

1 - The active cross-section (in fuchsia)

2 - The Step length

3 - The profile (in red)

The top left sub-window displays the active (or selected) cross-section as a linear graph. The sub-window in the top right corner displays the profile as a linear graph. The third sub-window displays all generated cross-sections with the path and the profile. The active cross-section is in fuchsia. You can organize these three sub-windows as you please using the commands of the toolbar at the bottom of the user interface.


When selecting the From Path method, for a given cross-section, an information box located at the top right corner of the third sub-window lists information such as its order, the cloud size (number of points that it contains) if a point cloud has been selected, the polyline size, its distance from the Start position and its 3D position not on the path but on the path projected in the XY* plane if Use Horizontal Path has been checked and on the 3D path if Use 3D

Path has been checked. The slope angle is obtained by intercepting the path

(horizontal or 3D) with the horizontal plane. For this reason the Z coordinate and the Slope angle value are equal to 0 when computing cross-sections from a projected path.

1 - The selected path

2 - 3D coordinates of the current cross-section position on the horizontal (or 3D) path

3 - Horizontal path (path projected in the XY* plane)

4 - 3D path (path modeled from the path in selection)

When selecting the From Segments method - in (A) no path has been selected, the active (selected) cross-section’s position is unknown while its order is known. In (B) a path has been selected, the same cross-section’s position is in text in the information box and its order differs from the one in (A).


3 - The active cross-section order

4 - The active cross-section position

1 - The active cross-section

2 - The Start position

2. If a point cloud has been selected, un-check the Display Cloud option to remove the point cloud representation from the 3D View , if required.

3. If a mesh has been selected, un-check the Display Mesh option to remove the mesh representation from the 3D View , if required.


Print a Profile (or Cross-Sections)

To Print a Profile (or Cross-Sections):

1. Click inside a graph to select it.

2. From menu, select Print from the menu bar. The Print Setup dialog opens.

3. Set the print parameters (if required).

4. Click . The Print Setup dialog closes.

Tip: You can also right-click inside a graph for which you want to perform a print-out. The pop-up menu drops down. Then select Print .


Scale the Profile and the Cross-Sections

For a given linear graph, you can zoom it in/out, pan it or change its scale.

Note that Zooming In / Out will change the linear graph scale. Changing a linear graph scale can be done by using the mouse wheel or by selecting the Scales command from the pop-up menu.

To Manipulate the Profile and Cross-Sections:



Drag and drop the graph (with the left button) to a new location to pan it.

Use the mouse scroll wheel to zoom in/out.

Or use the left and middle buttons.

Note: The Zoom is centered on the current mouse location.

To Scale the Profile and Cross-Sections:


2. Right-click and select Scales from the pop-up menu. The Plot Scale dialog opens with the Automatic Scaling option checked by default. the option to choose the manual scaling. Both the Horizontal Scale and the Vertical Scale fields become active.

4. Click on the Horizontal Scale (or Vertical Scale ) pull-down arrow.

5. Choose a scale for the Horizontal Scale (or Vertical Scale ) list.

OK . The Plot Scale dialog closes.


Display the Cross-Sections

To Display Cross-Sections:

1. Use the buttons illustrated below to navigate through the cross-sections.

2. Or pick a cross-section in the 3D View .

3. Or enter a cross-section order in the field and press Enter .

1 - Display First Section

2 - Display Previous Section

3 - Field for entering a value

4 - Display Next Section

5 - Display Last Section

If the selected cross-section is empty (see [A]), the 2D-EasyLine button remains grayed out.

If the selected cross-section contains points and fitted polyline (see

[B]), the 2D-EasyLine button becomes enabled.

[A] [B]

Tip: Instead of clicking Display Next Section or ( Display Previous Section ), you can also use the Up (or Down ) key on your keyboard.

Note: The Display Sections panel becomes enabled only if a preview of crosssections has been performed.


Edit the Cross-Sections

You can select and edit a cross-section using the 2D-EasyLine Tool . The selected cross-section needs to have points inside and fit with a polyline.

Create the Profile and the Cross-

Sections

When saving the result in the database, a group named Cross-Sec-Thick

"Thickness value"-Tol "Tolerance value" is created and rooted under the

Models Tree . This group contains the calculated cross sections and the selected (or drawn) path.

These results are fitted polylines and can be exported via DXF/DGN formats to

AutoCAD® and MicroStation®.

To Save the Profile and Cross-Sections:

1. Click .

2. Click Close .

Note:

Close can also be selected from the pop-up menu.

Instead of selecting Close , click inside a sub-view and press Esc . the without leaving the results will make appeared a warning message.


Feature Set Tool

This tool allows you to collect a set of surveying points/chains from a scanned point cloud in a way that simulates regular surveying methods. The use of this tool consists of two parts: one is for defining (or importing) the feature code; another is for collecting surveying points/chains and attaching them to the selected feature code.

Open the Tool

If the loaded project contains no Feature Code Library , a default library named

LIB_1 will be created. You can rename or delete it.

To Open the Tool:

1. Select a project from the Project Tree . the menu, select Feature Set Tool . The Feature Set

Creation dialog opens as well as the Picking Parameters toolbar.

The Feature Set Creation dialog opens as the third tab of the WorkSpace window and is composed of three parts. The first part is for collecting points.

The second part is to define feature code. The third and last part allows you to save the results, close the tool and obtain access to the online help.

Feature Code Libraries

You can add a new Feature Code Library in your current project by creating one or by importing one that originates from surveying applications. If the new library is empty of feature codes, a warning message appears and it will be deleted. A new library is always named LIB plus X corresponding to its order of creation.


Add a Feature Code Library

You can add a new Feature Code Library in your current project by creating one. If the new library is empty of feature codes, a warning message appears and it will be deleted. A new library is always named

FEATURE_CODE_LIBRARY plus X corresponding to its order of creation.

To Add a Feature Code Library: the . The Feature Code Library Editing dialog opens.

2. Click . A new feature code library is added.

3. Click .

Import a Feature Code Library

You can import a Feature Code Library that originates from surveying applications.

To Import a Feature Code Library: the icon. The Feature Code Library

Editing dialog opens.

2. Click Import . The Import Feature Code Library dialog box opens.

3. Navigate through your hard disk to locate the library to be imported and select it.

Open .

Rename a Feature Code Library

To Rename a Feature Code Library: the icon. The Feature Code Library

Editing box opens.

2. Click . The feature code library name becomes editable.

3. Enter a new name and press Enter .

4. Click .


Delete a Feature Code Library

If the loaded project contains a Feature Code Library that you don't want anymore; you can delete it. If the Feature Code Library you delete is the last in your project, a warning message appears and a default Feature Code Library is created.

To Delete a Feature Code Library: the icon. The Feature Code Library

Editing box opens.

2. Drop down the Library list and select a feature code library.

Delete . The selected feature code library is deleted.

4. Click .

Export a Feature Code Library

A library once filled with Feature Codes can be exported to a TXT format file so that it can be used for other RealWorks projects.

To Export a Feature Code Library: the icon. The Feature Code Library

Editing box opens.

2. Click . The Export Feature Code Library opens.

3. Enter a new name in the File Name field or keep the default one.

4. Specify a location on your hard disk in which to store the library in the

Look In field.

Save .

Feature Codes

A Feature Code is a system for codifying Feature Points . A Feature Code should reflect the Feature Points you intend to collect.


Define a Feature Code

To Define a Feature Code:

Edit Feature Code Library . The Feature Code Library Editing dialog opens.

1 - Already defined feature codes 2 - Field for defining feature codes

2. Select Feature Code Library from the list.

3. Or use the default one (no selection is required).

4. Click in the Feature Code panel below the PC Feature Code .

5. Define a new Feature Code .

6. Press on your keyboard.

7. Click .

Tip: Instead of defining Feature Codes , you can import into your project a library which already contains a set of Feature Codes .

Delete a Feature Code

Deleting a library will similarly delete the Feature Codes (if available) that are inside.


Feature Points

A Feature Point is composed of attributes like its name ( Prefix + Index ), its 3D coordinates, its Feature Code and optionally, a Description . The user can either pick or define a Feature Point .

1 - The Prefix of a Feature

Point

2 - The coordinates of a

Feature Point

3 - The order of a Feature

Point

Pick a Feature Point

A Feature Point can be collected either by free (or constrained) picking a point.

In that case, the mouse cursor’s shape changes to a pencil.

To Pick a Feature Point:

1. Pick Feature Point on the displayed scene in the 3D View . Its 3D coordinates are displayed in the Point field.

2. If required, enter a name in the Prefix field.

3. Click on the Feature Code Library pull down arrow.

4. Select a library from the Feature Code Library list.

5. Click on the Feature Code pull down arrow.

6. Select a code from the Feature Code list.

7. Continue in collecting other Feature Points .

Note: An empty point will be not taken into account.

Edit a Feature Point

You can edit a Feature Point previously defined. Just pick on it in the 3D View .

Its features are displayed in the Prefix , Index and Point fields. You can then modify them as you please.


Modify Feature Points

You can delete the last collected Feature Point by undoing the operation or by removing it from your selection using the Delete Point command. You can insert or add a Feature Point to your collection once the selection is completed.

Delete a Feature Point

To Delete a Feature Point:

1. Pick on an already picked point in the 3D View .

2. Right-click in order to display the pop-up menu.


Note: Instead of selecting Delete Point from the pop-up menu, you can also use the Del key on your keyboard.


Insert a Feature Point

You can insert a Feature Point between two Feature Points only if they are linked by a Continuous (or Dash-Line ) Segment .

To Insert a Feature Point:

1. Place the cursor over a position between two Feature Points .

2. Click to insert a Feature Point at this position.

1 - The cursor' shape when placing it between two connected feature points

2 - The last collected feature point has a red label

3 - The inserted feature point


Add a Feature Point

To Add a Feature Point:

1. Place the cursor over a point on the displayed object. An empty point is not taken into account.

2. Click to add a Feature Point at this position.

1 - The last collected Feature Point has a red label

2 - A Feature Point has been added at this position


Move a Feature Point

To Move a Feature Point:

1. Place the cursor over a Feature Point . A green square appears. the from its current position. The green square becomes red and remains over the selected Feature Point ’s position.

3. And drop the Feature Point to a new position. A yellow square appears under the cursor while moving it.

1 - The selected Feature Point current position 2 - The cursor' shape while dragging and dropping the selected Feature Point

3 - The selected Feature Point new position


Set a Display Mode

A Feature Point when collected may have two statuses: isolated points simply called points or connected points called chains. If points are connected, you can close the chain by checking the Closed Feature Set option.

1 - Close a set of feature points 2 - Field for selecting display mode

To Set a Display Mode:

1. Click on the Set Display Mode pull down arrow.

3 - The number of feature points


Select to set collected points as isolated points.

Select to connect collected points with plain line segments.

Select to connect collected points with dotted line segments.

Create a Feature Set

A Feature Set is created in the database for each collection of Feature Points saved in the database. The user can create as many Feature Sets as required without leaving the tool. A Feature Set has OBJECTX as name and is rooted in the Models Tree . You can export a Feature Set to an ASCII format file.

To Create a Feature Set:

Create .

2. Click .

Note: You can also right-click anywhere in the 3D View to display the pop-up menu and select Close .


2D-Polyline Inspection Tool

This tool enables to compare a model to a point cloud. A model can come from an imported DXF (or DWG) file or results from cross-sectioning. An imported model must be already georeferenced with the point cloud. In both cases, a model is a 2D polyline which should be composed of at least three non-aligned points.

Open the Tool

If your project you load has no 2D polyline, to activate the 2D-Polyline

Inspection Tool you need to import or create at least one. Otherwise, an error message will appear. If your project contains more than one 2D polyline, you can launch the tool and select one for inspection. A 2D polyline should be formed by at least three non-aligned points.

To Open the Tool:

1. Select one point cloud (or more) from the Project Tree .

2. From menu, select Open . The Open dialog opens.

3. Select from the File Of Type field. the option (if needed). the field, navigate to the drive/folder where the .dxf file is located.

6. Double-click on the file to select it. The DXF File Import dialog opens.

7. Select the DXF length unit and click OK .

8. From menu, select 2D-Polyline Inspection Tool . The

2D-Polyline Inspection dialog opens.

This dialog opens as the third tab of the WorkSpace window and is composed of four parts: The first part contains two sub-tools: Segmentation and

Sampling . The second part allows you to select a model and to set a thickness.

The third part is to perform the inspection. The fourth and last part is to save the inspection result in the RealWorks database, close the tool and obtain access to the online help. The selected cloud is displayed in white in the 3D

View .


Select a Model for Inspection

Inspecting in 2D means by plane. A virtual plane drawn by the non-aligned points of the selected model cuts the selected point cloud. The thickness you set corresponds to the thickness of this plane and it should be higher than 0.

The 2D inspection is done by comparing the selected model to the points that are in this plane. All available models in your project are stored in the selection list in the 2D-Polyline Inspection dialog, except those with less than three points and you can select one of them by dropping down this list. If you select a set of models before opening the 2D-Polyline Inspection Tool , these models will be unselected except one which is the first in the selection list.

To Select a Model for Inspection:

1. Click on the Select Model and Thickness pull down arrow.

1 - Field for selecting a model 2 - Field for setting a thickness

2. Select a model from the drop down list.

Set a Thickness

To Set a Thickness:


Enter on your keyboard.



View the 2D Inspection Result

The 2D inspection is automatically performed once a model is selected, even if you have not set a thickness. RealWorks will set a thickness by default. The inspection result can be viewed in the 3D View window and in a graph at the bottom of the 2D-Polyline Inspection dialog (see A). The selected (active) model and points resulting from the inspection are displayed in the 3D View .

Each distance, which separates a point from the model, is shown with a color

(see B). Two options are available: you can lock the result to 2D and display or hide the selected point cloud. A color scale at the left side of the 3D View gives an idea of distance for a given color.

[A]

1 - The inspection graph

2 - The selected model

3 - The inspection between the model and the cloud at this position

[B]

4 - Sliders for filtering points based on a given distance

5 - The color scale giving the distance information


In this picture, the selected point cloud, the In this picture, only points resulting from the selected model and the inspection result are displayed in the 3D View window. inspection with the selected model are displayed

Note: In the 2D locked position, you can display the 2D grid. To do this, you can either right-click anywhere in the 3D View to display the pop-up menu and select Show 2D Grid or select the 2D Grid / Show 2D Grid command from the

3D View menu bar.

Filter the 2D Inspection Result

Two sliders (one at each end of the inspection graph) allow you to filter points according to a given distance. The Right end corresponds to the maximum distance from the model while the Left end corresponds to the minimum distance from the model. Filtering is done by moving one of the two sliders.

To Filter the 2D Inspection Result:

1. Place your cursor over a slider. It becomes red.

2. Drag the cursor from its current position (maximum or minimum distance).

3. Drop the cursor until it comes closed to the distance you attempt to reach.

The filtering will be done between this range of distances.

1 - The model's position

2 - The filtering result

3 - The minimum distance from the model

4 - The maximum distance from the model

5 - The filtering range

Note: In the 2D locked position or not, you can print the inspection result. To do this, you can either right-click anywhere in the 3D View to display the popup menu and select Print or select the Print command from the File menu bar.


Save the 2D Inspection Result

The inspection results are summarized in the Step 3 of the 2D-Polyline

Inspection dialog. You may find four major information: the maximum distance from the model, the minimum distance from the model, the positive area and the negative area. If more than one 2D polyline are available in your project, you can select a new one and set a new thickness; the inspection is automatically updated. Once the inspection is done, you can the result in

RealWorks database.

To Save the 2D Inspection Result:

1. Click .

2. Click .

Note: Instead of clicking Close in the dialog, you can also right-click anywhere in the 3D View to display the pop-up menu and then select Close or press twice Esc .


Twin Surface Inspection Tool

The Twin Surface Inspection Tool enables to compare two surfaces together.

These surfaces should be similar as much as possible or not so different one from the other. You can compare together two point clouds, a point cloud and a mesh or two meshes. The surface inspection is based on a grid method and the result is an Inspection Map . You can choose in the Preferences dialog the units required to represent this map.


Open the Tool

You should select two surfaces from a project in order to be able to activate the

Twin Surface Inspection Tool . The first selected surface will be a reference surface (called Reference ) and the second selected surface will be a surface to inspect (called Comparison ).

To Open the Tool:

1. Select two surfaces from the Project Tree . the menu, select Twin Surface Inspection Tool . The

Twin Surface Inspection dialog opens

This dialog opens as the third tab of the WorkSpace window and is composed of six parts. The first part contains two sub-tools: Segmentation and Sampling .

If point clouds have been selected, you can use these two sub-tools to delineate an area for the inspection, to render them cleaner (i.e. reduce parasite points) or to simplify them. The second part allows you to define a projection surface. The third part allows you to set the projection surface’s resolution. The fourth part allows you to preview the inspection result, display

(or hide) the selected point cloud(s)/mesh(es). The fifth part is to edit the inspection result. The sixth part is to save the inspection result, close the tool and give access to the online help.

Before opening the Twin Surface Inspection Tool , each selected surface is shown with its own color in the 3D View . After you open the tool, the reference surface (the first selected) will appear in red and the second surface (the second selected) in green. If the selection contains a point could and a mesh as surfaces; the mesh will be by default a reference surface (in red) and will not be able to be changed to a comparison surface (in green). The information box (at the top right corner of the 3D View ) lists the name of the reference surface and of the comparison surface*.

Tip: You can also click Twin Surface Inspection Tool in the Tools toolbar.

Note: If the Project Cloud has been selected as input, it is by default the

Reference Surface . Its name does not appear in the information box.


Define a Projection Surface

A projection surface can be a 3D Plane , a 3D Cylinder or a 3D Tunnel .

To Define a Projection Surface: the dialog, click the pull-down arrow. among , Cylinder-Based Projection (on page 778) and Tunnel-Based Projection .

Note: The projection type which comes first is the one you have selected during the last use of that tool.


Plane-Based Projection

If the two selected surfaces are of plane shape, choose the Plane-Based

Projection method. Step1 of the Twin Surface Inspection dialog becomes as shown below.

A projection plane with a normal direction parallel to the Z axis* of the active coordinate frame appears in the 3D View . A slider at the left side of the 3D

View allows you to move the projection plane from the top to the bottom and vice versa. The way of defining a 3D plane is the same as in the Cutting Plane

Tool .

1 - Slider

2 - The Reference Surface

3 - A projection surface

4 - The comparison Surface

Note: (*) In the X , Y and Z Coordinate System .


Cylinder-Based Projection

If the two selected surfaces are of cylinder shape, choose the Cylinder-Based

Projection method. Step1 of the Twin Surface Inspection dialog becomes as shown below.

A projection cylinder with an axis parallel to the Z axis* of the active coordinate frame appears in the 3D View . You can change the projection cylinder axis direction according to the two other axes (X* and Y*). If the selection (only point cloud) that you performed in Step 1 contains an entity, you can pick on it so that its axis becomes the new axis of the projection cylinder. You can also pick points on your selection (point cloud or mesh) to define a projection cylinder or edit one manually. In all cases, the bounding box that highlights the selection (point cloud or mesh) delineates the height of the projection cylinder.

You cannot exceed it.

1 - Projection surface

2 - Reference Surface (in red)

3 - Comparison Surface (in green)



Set From Frame

To Define a Projection Cylinder by Selecting a Frame Axis:


Coordinate System ),


Draw a Circle

To Pick Two Points to Define a Projection Cylinder:

1. Click . The Picking Parameters toolbar appears in 3D constraint mode below the 3D View window.

2. Pick one free (or constrained) point. After picking this point, the Picking

Parameters toolbar switches to the Cartesian System constraint.

3. It's up to you to use this constraint or to pick a free point.

Note: Picking can be done anywhere on the selection (point cloud or mesh) or not. These two points determine the projection cylinder's diameter and its direction is perpendicular to the screen view.

Draw a Cylinder

To pick three points to define a projection cylinder:

1. Click . The Picking Parameters toolbar appears in the 3D constrain mode.

2. Pick three points (free or constrained).

Note: Picking should be on the selection (point cloud or mesh) for the two first points and anywhere for the third point (on selection or not). The first and second picked points give the projection cylinder's direction and the second and third picked points determine its diameter.


Pick an Axis from an Object

To Pick an Axis from an Object: the icon. The initial projection disappears from the 3D View .

2. Click on the Models tab.


4. Select .

5. Click one point.

Edit Parameters

To Edit Manually a Cylinder:

1. Click . The Cylinder Editing dialog opens.

2. Click the pull down arrow and do one of the following:

Define a projection cylinder with two points and a radius. a) Select . b) Enter a point’s position in the Point1 field. c) Enter another point’s position in the Point2 field. d) Enter a value in the Radius fields.

Define a projection cylinder with one point, on direction and a radius. a) Select . b) Enter a point position the Point field. c) Define a direction in the Direction field. d) Enter a value in Radius field.

3. Click . The Cylinder Editing dialog closes.


Tunnel-Based Projection

If the two selected surfaces are of tunnel shape, choose the Tunnel-Based

Projection method. If your project contains a 3D Path and a 2D Shape

(respectively a 3D polyline and a 2D polyline), the name of each with the length information is displayed. If there is more than one path or shape, you can dropdown the selection list for each and select another 3D Path or 2D Shape . See

[A]. If your project contains no 3D Path and no 2D Shape ; the length of both the 3D Path and the 2D Shape is equal to 0. See [B].

A projection tunnel of the 3D polyline’s length and of the 2D polyline’s shape appears with the reference and comparison surfaces respectively in red and green.

1 - Reference Surface (green)

2 - Comparison Surface (red)

3 - Projection surface


You can inspect the Comparison Surface (in green) with the Reference

Surface (in red) along or perpendicular to the 3D Path by checking

Perpendicular or along the 3D path and in the Z axis* direction (of the active coordinate) by checking Vertical .


Determine a Resolution

The same resolution will apply to both directions and will differ according to the projection surface you have defined in Step 2 . If the projection surface is a 3D plane, the resolution directions will be the width and length directions of that plane. If the projection surface is a 3D cylinder, the resolution directions will be the axis direction of this cylinder and the direction of its circumference when you unfold it. If the projection surface is a 3D tunnel, the resolution directions will be the 3D Path and 2D Shape directions.

Determine a Resolution in the Plane/Cylinder-Based

Projection

To Determine a Resolution in the Plane/Cylinder-Based Projection:



Determine a Resolution in the Tunnel-Based Projection

To Determine a Resolution in the Tunnel-Based Projection:

1. Enter a value in the Along 3D Path field.

2. Enter a value in the Along 2D Shape field.



Preview the Inspection

Once you have finished defining the projection surface and setting its resolution, you can preview the result before saving it in the database. You can change the parameters (projection surface and resolution) as many times as you please and perform a preview without leaving this tool. By default, an object selected for activating the tool is automatically displayed in the 3D View .

To hide it, you have to un-check the display option. And to display it again, you should re-check the option. There are two display options (one for each selected object).

To Preview the Inspection:

1. Un-check option, if needed. the option, if needed. the .

If the two surfaces are of the same type ( Point Cloud (or Mesh ) for both), the Swap Surfaces icon is available. Click the Swap

Surfaces icon. The Reference Surface becomes a surface to inspect

( Comparison ) and the Comparison Surface swaps for Reference .

If the two surfaces are from different type ( Point cloud for one and

Mesh for the other), the Swap Surfaces icon is then unavailable

4. Click again the Preview .


Inspection Maps

The inspection result is a map. It is shown in a specific window, called Map

Preview . It is opened beside the 3D View . This map is a 2D image inside which each pixel is colored according to the difference (expressed in terms of elevation) between the two surfaces. A ColorBar located at the right side of the inspection map is a scale of elevation values and each color corresponds to a range of elevation values.

1 - The scale and the origin of the inspection map

2 - The reference surface (red)

3 - The comparison surface (green)

4 - The inspection map


1- Zoom tools

2 - Hide/Show ColorBar

3 - Edit ColorBar

4 - Switch to Default Color

5 - Switch to Sign-Based ColorBar

6 - The scale and the origin of the inspection map

7 - An inspection map

8 - A ColorBar

In the Map Preview window, you can zoom the inspection map In or Out . You can do this in three ways. The first one is to magnify (or reduce) an area of the inspection map using Image Zoom In and Image Zoom Out . The second way is to magnify (or reduce) the inspection map using the mouse wheel (if present). The last way is to select a rate from the drop-down list. If the inspection map is larger than the Map Preview window can show, you can pan it on left-click in four directions: Up , Down , Right and Left . In the 3D View , the inspection map is shown in superposition with the two selected surfaces and the projection surface. A frame (red and green) corresponding to the inspection map’s origin appears in both the 3D View and the Map Preview window.

Tip: Please, refer to the ColorBars section for more information about how to use the features.


Print an Inspection Map

To print an inspection map, click inside the Map Preview window and do one of the following:

To Print an Inspection Map:

Print in the Main toolbar, select from the File menu select from the pop-up menu.

Edit an Inspection Map

The inspection map computed previously may have irregularities like holes or spades, you can then edit it in order to keep or to remove the part you want, to complete the holes or to smooth the map. In edition mode, the mouse cursor will change its shape and picking is always inside the inspection map. Before you draw a polygonal fence, only the Draw Polygon To Edit tool can be used

(see [A]). After you draw and validate a polygonal fence, the other tools become active (see [B]).

1 - Draw Polygon to Edit

2 - Keep Cells

3 - Empty Cells

4 - Fill Holes

5 - Smooth Cells


Fence an Area

To Fence an Area:

1. Click .

2. Fence an area on the inspection map.

3. Right-click in the 3D View window.


Note:

To cancel the current polygonal fence, you can press Esc or select New


To leave the Draw Polygon to Edit tool, click again the Draw Polygon to

Edit , select Close Polygon Tool from the pop-up menu or press Esc .

Tip:

Instead of selecting End Fence from the pop-up menu, you can either double-click or press on the Space Bar .

You can also select Keep Cells (or Empty Cells ) from the pop-up menu or use their related short-cut key I (or O ).

Filter an Area

To Filter an Area:

1. Click , if the fenced area contains holes. click , if the fenced area contains spikes for example.

Note:

You can also select Fill Holes (or Smooth Cells ) from the pop-up menu or use their related short-cut key F (or S ).

An inspection map, once created, becomes un-editable.


Filter the Inspection Result

Do one of the following if you wish to filter the inspection map between a set of intervals: edit the current ColorBar and change its interval values to those you need to use for filtering; or create a new ColorBar and set the interval values required for filtering. The elevation differences which are out of this range of intervals will disappear from the inspection map.

To Filter the Inspection Result:

1. Click . The ColorBar dialog opens.

2. Click . The ColorBar Editing dialog opens.

1 - Option for setting only positive values of intervals

2 - Number of levels in the current ColorBar

3 - Field for defining intervals by setting values

3. Click in the interval value field and key in new values. The number of levels is displayed below. the option (if required).

5. Click in an interval line. A pull down arrow appears

6. Click on the pull down arrow. A color palette appears.

7. Choose an existing color or click Other to define yours.

8. Click .

Check the Inspection

The map gives you a global vision of the inspection between both selected surfaces. You can move your cursor over a point on the inspection map in order to have the difference of elevations between these two surfaces at this point. The difference of elevations appears in text beneath the Map Inspection window.


Save the Inspection

In this last step, you can save the inspection result as a permanent object in the database, perform a screen printout or go further in analyzing the result thanks to the Inspection Map Analyzer Tool . For each inspection map you save, a geometric object is created and is put under the active group in the

Models Tree . The ColorBar (s) that is (or are) related to it will be saved too. As any geometric object in RealWorks , you can display its representation in the

3D View by double-clicking it in the Project Tree or by selecting the Open

Inspection Map command from the Display menu. A ColorBar has no representation in the Project Tree .

Note:

To leave the Twin Surface Inspection Tool , you can press Esc or select

Close from the pop-up menu.

Leaving without saving the inspection result will open an information box which prompts you to confirm, undo or cancel the operation you attempt to execute.


Surface to Model Inspection Tool

This tool allows you to compare a surface with a model of plane, cylinder or tunnel shape. The surface and the model should be fairly similar in the sense that the tool is designed to be used in "before and after" situations. You can select a point cloud or a mesh for comparison. The surface inspection is based on a grid method and the result is an Inspection Map . You can choose in the

Preferences dialog box the units required to represent this map.

Open the Tool

You need to select a surface (point cloud or mesh) and a model from a project in order to be able to open the Surface to Model Inspection Tool . A model

(when of plane and cylinder shape) can now be created using e.g. the

Geometry Creator Tool in the Modeling processing mode. A model of tunnel shape is computed from a 2D Shape and a 3D Path within the Surface to

Model Inspection Tool ; both are polylines respectively in 2D and 3D. These polylines can be created using e.g. the Polyline Drawing Tool. You can also import a model either from 3Dipsos (a Trimble software application) or by loading a DXF/DWG format file. The selected model will be a reference surface and the point cloud (or mesh) will be a surface to inspect.

To Open the Tool:

1. Select one of these two sets (surface and model of plane/cylinder shape or surface and 2D polyline and 3D polyline) from the Project Tree . the menu, select Surface to Model Inspection Tool .

The Surface to Model Inspection dialog opens.

This dialog opens as the third tab of the WorkSpace window and is composed of five parts. The first part contains two sub-tools: Segmentation and Sampling .

The second part allows you to set a projection surface (3D plane, 3D cylinder or 3D tunnel) resolution. The third part allows previewing the inspection result, display (or hide) the selected point cloud/mesh or model. The fourth part is to edit or to analyze the inspection result. The fifth part is to save the inspection result, close the tool and give access to the online help.

Tip: You can also click Surface to Model Inspection Tool in the Tools toolbar.


Define a Projection

A projection model will be automatically set after opening the Surface to Model

Inspection Tool . The surface to inspect (point cloud or mesh) remains with its own color and the reference surface (model) is shown in yellow.

Plane-Based Projection

If the Model is a plane, the projection should be based on a 3D plane, with the same direction ( Normal ) and whose dimensions ( Width and Length ) are delineated by the highlighting box.

1 - Model of Plane shape 2 - Cloud


Cylinder-Based Projection

If the Model is a cylinder, the projection should be based on a 3D cylinder, with the same size ( Diameter and Length ).

1 - Point cloud 2 - Model of Cylinder shape


Tunnel-Based Projection

If a 2D Shape and 3D Path (respectively a 2D polyline and a 3D polyline) have been selected, the projection is based on a 3D Tunnel of the 3D polyline’s length and of the 2D polyline’s shape. The 2D Shape and 3D Path name with the length information are displayed in Step 1 . You can inspect the

Comparison Surface (point cloud or mesh) with the Reference Surface (model) along or perpendicular to the 3D Path by checking Perpendicular or along the

3D path and in the Z axis direction (of the active coordinate) by checking

Vertical .

1 - Information related to the 3D path and 2D shape

2 - Comparison direction

3 - Cloud

4 - 2D shape (in green)

5 - 3D Path (in yellow)

6 - Model of inspection (Tunnel in yellow)

Note: The step Define Projection is only available when selecting a 2D shape and a 3D path.


Determine a Resolution

A same resolution will be applied to both directions of the projection surface except when a 2D Shape and a 3D Path have been selected - see [A] and [B].

These directions will differ according to the projection model set in Step 1 . If the projection model is a 3D Cylinder , the projection directions are equal to the axis direction of the 3D Cylinder and to the direction along the 3D Cylinder ’s circumference. If the projection model is a 3D Plane , the projection directions correspond to the width and length directions of the 3D Plane . If the projection surface is a 3D Tunnel , the resolution directions will be the 3D Path and 2D

Shape directions.

Determine a Resolution in the Plane/Cylinder-Based

Projection

To Determine a Resolution in the Plane/Cylinder-Based Projection:



Determine a Resolution in the Tunnel-Based Projection

To Determine a Resolution in the Tunnel-Based Projection:

1. Enter a value in the Along 3D Path field.

2. Enter a value in the Along 2D Shape field.



Preview the Inspection

Once you have finished defining the projection surface resolution, you can perform a preview to visualize the result before saving it in the RealWorks database. You can change the parameter as many times as you please and perform a preview without leaving this tool. By default, an object selected for activating the tool is automatically displayed in the 3D View . To hide it, you have to un-check the display option. And to display it again, you should recheck the option. There are two display options (one for each object selected).

If the selected object is a point cloud, the display option will take the name of

Display Cloud . If the selected object is a mesh, the display option will take the name of Display Mesh . The second display option’s name is always Display

Model .

To Preview the Inspection: the (or Display Mesh ) option, if needed. the option, if needed.

3. Click .

Note: You do not necessary need to validate the value you key in the

Resolution field. Clicking the Preview button will validate the value by its own.


Inspection Maps

The inspection is done by comparing the Model with the selected Surface . The inspection result is a map shown in a specific window (called Map Preview ) which opens above the 3D View . This map is a 2D image inside which pixels are colored according to the difference (expressed in terms of elevation) between the Surface and the Model . A ColorBar located at the right side of the inspection map is a scale of elevation values and each color corresponds to an elevation value.

In the Map Preview , you can zoom the inspection map In (or Out ) in three ways. The first one is to magnify (or reduce) an area of the inspection map by using Image Zoom In and Image Zoom Out . The second way is to magnify (or reduce) the inspection map using the mouse wheel (if present).

The last way is to select a rate from the drop-down list. If the inspection map is larger than the Map Preview window can display, you can pan it on left-click in four directions: Up , Down , Right and Left . You can also hide/show the current

ColorBar or edit a new one.

In the 3D View , the inspection map is shown in superposition with the two selected items ( Surface and Model). A frame (of red and green colors) corresponding to the origin of the inspection map (also called Orientation ) appears in both the 3D View and the Map Preview .

Plane Shape


1 - The origin of an inspection map


3 - The selected point cloud

1 - Zoom features

2 - Features related to the ColorBar


3 - The difference in elevations at the cursor position


5 - A ColorBar



Cylinder Shape





1 - Zoom features





5 - A ColorBar



Tunnel Shape





1 - Zoom features





5 - A ColorBar



Print an Inspection Map

To print an inspection map, click inside the Map Preview window and do one of the following:


Print in the Main toolbar, select from the File menu select from the pop-up menu.

Edit an Inspection Map

The inspection map computed previously may have irregularities like holes or spades, you can then edit it in order to keep or to remove the part you want, to complete the holes or to smooth the map. In edition mode, the mouse cursor will change its shape and picking is always inside the inspection map. Before you draw a polygonal fence, only the Draw Polygon To Edit tool can be used

(see [A]). After you draw and validate a polygonal fence, the other tools become active (see [B]).

1 - Draw Polygon to Edit

2 - Keep Cells

3 - Empty Cells

4 - Fill Holes

5 - Smooth Cells


Fence an Area

To Fence an Area:

1. Click .

2. Fence an area on the inspection map.

3. Right-click in the 3D View window.


Note:

To cancel the current polygonal fence, you can press Esc or select New


To leave the Draw Polygon to Edit tool, click again the Draw Polygon to

Edit , select Close Polygon Tool from the pop-up menu or press Esc .

Tip:

Instead of selecting End Fence from the pop-up menu, you can either double-click or press on the Space Bar .

You can also select Keep Cells (or Empty Cells ) from the pop-up menu or use their related short-cut key I (or O ).

Filter an Area

To Filter an Area:

1. Click , if the fenced area contains holes. click , if the fenced area contains spikes for example.

Note:

You can also select Fill Holes (or Smooth Cells ) from the pop-up menu or use their related short-cut key F (or S ).

An inspection map, once created, becomes un-editable.

Check the Inspection

The map gives you a global vision of the inspection between the selected surface and the model. You can move your cursor over a point on the inspection map in order to have the difference of elevations between both the surface and the model at this point. The difference of elevations appears in text beneath the Map Inspection .


Save the Inspection

In this last step, you can save the inspection result as a permanent object in the database, perform a screen printout or go further in analyzing the result thanks to the Inspection Map Analyzer Tool . For each inspection map you save, a geometric object is created and is put under the active group in the

Models Tree . The ColorBar (s) that is (or are) related to it will be saved too. As any geometric object in RealWorks , you can display its representation in the

3D View by double-clicking it in the Project Tree or by selecting the Open

Inspection Map command from the Display menu. A ColorBar has no representation in the Project Tree .

Note:

To leave the Surface to Model Inspection Tool , you can press Esc or select Close from the pop-up menu.

Leaving Tool without saving the inspection result will open an information box which prompts you to confirm, undo or cancel the operation you attempt to execute.


Inspection Map Analyzer Tool

This tool allows you to extract five categories of information ( Points &

Polylines , Sections & Shifts , Volumes & Surfaces , Iso-curves and Colored

Meshes ) from an inspection map and each category corresponds to a sub-tool.


Open the Tool

You can open the Inspection Map Analyzer Tool either from the main menu after selecting an existing inspection map from the Project Tree or inside the

Twin Surface Inspection (or Surface to Model Inspection ) Tool after inspecting.

To Open the Tool:

1. Select an inspection map from the Project Tree . the menu, select Inspection Map Analyzer Tool . The

Inspection Map Analyzer dialog opens.

This dialog opens as the third tab of the WorkSpace window. Depending on the sub-tool you select, the Inspection Map Analyzer dialog changes appearance.

The selected inspection map is displayed in the Inspection Map Analyzer

Viewer [A] with two sliders (horizontal and vertical).

Vertical slider (in this example)

The Section Viewer [B] shows the extraction result(s) in 3D and optionally the inspection map if the Display 3D Map option is checked. The Lock in 2D option

(when not dimmed and if checked) locks the extractions result(s) in 2D

(constrained in the XZ* plane of the active frame) with a 2D Grid in superposition. You can hide and display again the 2D Grid . When the Lock in

2D option is checked, you can only pan the results(s) in the YZ* plane, zoom

(in or out) or rotate around the X* axis. Un-checking Lock in 2D will hide the 2D

Grid and will free the result(s) from the 3D locked constraint.


The way the two viewers ( Inspection Map Analyzer and Section ) will be represented depends on the sub-tool you select. You can rearrange the viewers as you please using the View Manager tools

Note:

Esc will close the Inspection Map Analyzer Tool .

Clicking in the Inspection Map Analyzer dialog (or selecting Close from the pop-up menu in the viewers) will not close the current sub-tool but will close the main tool.



Select "Points & Polylines"

Because the metric information is still stored in an inspection map, you can get the 3D position of a point as in the Feature Set Tool (surveying point) or as in the Measurement Tool (measured point) or simply define an area of interest by drawing a polyline.

To Select "Points & Polylines":

1. In dialog, click on the pull down arrow.

2. Select . The Inspection Map Analyzer dialog appears as shown.

1 - Pick Point 2 - Draw Polyline 3 - Close Polyline (or Open

Polyline)

The Inspection Map Analyzer and Section Viewers are both opened. In the

Section Viewer , the inspection map is by default hidden and the navigation is locked in 2D. In the Inspection Map Analyzer Viewer , the horizontal and vertical sliders are shown and only one is active.

3. If required, check the Display 3D Map option to view the inspection map in the Section Viewer .

4. If required, uncheck the Lock in 2D option to free the navigation from 2D lock in the Section Viewer .

5. In , choose between Pick on Reference Surface and Pick on

Comparative Surface .


Tip: You can use the Up / Down (or Right / Left ) arrows of your keyboard to vertically (or horizontally) move the slider with constant step. This step corresponds to one pixel on the inspection map (not one pixel on the screen).

To do this, you should first click inside the Inspection Map Analyzer Viewer to select it.


Pick Points

Picking should always be done inside the Inspection Map Analyzer Viewer and anywhere over the color area of the inspection map (except on black area).

To Pick a Point:

1. Pan (or zoom) the inspection map in or out (if required). the icon. The two sliders disappear from the Inspection

Map Analyzer Viewer .

3. Pick a point on the inspection map in the Inspection Map Analyzer Viewer .

The picked point is shown in the Inspection Map Analyzer Viewer [A] and in the

Section Viewer [B]. Its 3D position (XYZ coordinates) is displayed in text in the

Section viewer. Starting a new picking will cancel the current one.

Picked point in the Inspection Map Analyzer Viewer


Picked point in the Section Viewer

Tip:

You can also select Quit Point Creation Mode from the pop-up menu or press on the Esc key.

You can remove the picked point labels from the 3D View by first selecting

Rendering , then Display 3D Labels from the 3D View menu.


Draw Polylines

Picking should be done on the colored areas of the inspection map.

To Draw a Polyline: the icon. The two sliders disappear from the

Inspection Map Analyzer Viewer and the Close Polyline icon becomes active*.

2. Pick a series of points on the inspection map in the Inspection Map

Analyzer Viewer .

3. Right-click and select Close Polyline from the pop-up menu. The start point is connected to the end point. Close Polyline becomes Open

Polyline.

4. Right-click again and select Open Polyline from the pop-up menu. The start point is disconnected to the end point. Open Polyline becomes Close

Polyline.

5. Double-click to end the polyline.

The drawn polyline appears in both of the two viewers ( Inspection Map

Analyzer and Section ).

Drawn polyline in the Inspection Map Analyzer Viewer


Drawn polyline in the Section Viewer

6. If required, right-click in the Inspection Map Analyzer viewer and select

New Polyline from the pop-up menu. The drawn polyline is cancelled. You can then start a new polyline.

Note:

You can neither draw a circle arc nor a series of discontinuous polylines.

The icon may define two creation modes. Not-clicked-on

Close Polyline icon sets the open polyline creation mode. Clicked-on

Close Polyline icon sets the close polyline creation mode.

You cannot combine the Pick Point and Draw Polyline features together.

Tip:

You can also select Draw Polyline , Close Polyline , Open Polyline and End

Polyline from the pop-up menu. once will cancel the current polyline. Pressing twice Esc will cancel the current polyline and leave the polyline tool.


Save the Results

You can create the extracted result(s) in the database and start a new point picking (or polyline drawing) without leaving the tool. An object of 3D Point (or

Polyline ) type is created and rooted in the Models Tree . Before saving a point

(or polyline), add comments to it. After saving a point (or polyline), you can edit its related comments. To do this, display the created object properties and go to the Label line for edition.

To Save the Results:

1. For each picked point (or drawn polyline), you can add comments.

2. Click to save the result.

Note: Be sure to first save the picked point (or drawn polyline) before leaving the Point Creation (or Draw Polyline ) Tool . Otherwise, it will be cancelled.


Select "Sections & Shifts"

Because the metric information is still stored in an inspection map, you can extract some profiles and some cross-sections from it as in the Profile/Cross-

Section Tool or inspect along a given path as in the 2D-Polyline Inspection

Tool .

To Select "Sections & Shifts":



The viewer and the Section viewer both open. The Section viewer is split in two sub-viewers. The top subviewer displays a section, or a couple of sections, or a shift depending on the option(s) ( Comparison Section , Reference Section , or 1D Inspection ) chosen in Step 2 . The bottom sub-viewer displays the difference plot between a couple of sections.

A section is a profile resulting from the slicing over a surface on an inspection map. A slice over a reference surface, in red, is called

Reference Section.

A slice over a comparison surface, in green, is called Comparison Section .

The shift between a couple of Reference Section and Comparison

Sectio n, at a given position, is called 1D Inspection .

1 - Reference Section (Red)

2 - Comparison Section (Green)

3 - 1D Inspection

816 Trimble RealWorks 9.0 User's Guide the viewer, the selected inspection map is by default hidden. The navigation is locked in 2D. the viewer, the horizontal slider and the vertical slider are shown and only one is active a time.

Define a Section Position

You need to define a direction and a position over the selected inspection map.

The direction is given by the displacement direction of a slider and the position by its position. You have at all two sliders ( Vertical and Horizontal ) and only one can be activated a time. The active slider is in blue.

1 - Set Horizontal Slider

2 - Set Vertical Slider

3 - Set Slider Position

4 - Set Slider Point Position

Caution: The Set Horizontal Slider is grayed out when the selected inspection map is a Tunnel .

Choose a Slider

To Choose a Slider:

1. Click icon to choose the horizontal direction. click icon to choose the vertical direction.

3. Or position the cursor over the end of a slider and click on it.

Note: To hide (or display) the active slider, select Hide Slider (or Display

Slider ) from the pop-up menu in the Inspection Map Viewe r.


Set a Slider to a Position by Drag and Drop

To Set a Slider Position by Drag & Drop:

1. In viewer, position the cursor over one of the two ends of a slider, as illustrated below.

2. If has been chosen, drag and drop it from Up to

Down and reversely until it meets the position required. The slicing will be done in this direction and at this position. the has been chosen, drag and drop it from Right to Left and reversely until it meets the position required. The slicing will be done in this direction and at this position.

Note: The Set Horizontal Slider is grayed out when the selected inspection map is a Tunnel .

Tip: You can move the two sliders in four directions ( Right , Left , Up and Down ) using the arrow keys of your keyboard. In that case, the displacement is done with a constant interval. The interval value is the one you set in the Interval field in Step 3 .


Set a Slider to a Position by Picking

To Set a Slider to a Position by Picking:

1. Choose a slider's direction. the icon. The two sliders disappear from the

Inspection Map Analyzer viewer. The cursor changes its default shape to a pointer.

3. Pick a point on the displayed inspection map.

If the inspection map is a Plane (or a Cylinder ); the chosen slider moves to the picked position in the chosen direction.

If the inspection map is a Tunnel ; the Vertical Slider moves horizontally to the picked position.

Tip: You can also right-click anywhere in the Inspection Map Analyzer viewer to display the pop-up menu and select Set Slider Position .

Tip: Instead of choosing Set Slider Position , you can also double-click in the inspection map.


Set a Slider Position by Defining Values

To Set a Slider Position by Defining Values: the icon. The Slider Position Definition dialog opens.


If the inspection map is a Plane (or a Cylinder ); choose between

Horizontal Slider and Vertical Slider .

If the inspection map is a Tunnel ; only Vertical Slider can be chosen.

3. Enter a 3D position in the Point field.

If the 3D position is out of the inspection map. A warning message in red is displayed in the Slider Position Definition dialog as shown below.

4. Click . The Slider Position Definition dialog closes.

If has been chosen, the horizontal slider becomes active and it jumps vertically to the defined position.

If has been chosen, the vertical slider becomes active and it jumps horizontally to the defined position.


Choose a Type of Object to Extract

You can now choose the type of object you want to extract from the selected inspection map. By default, all types are selected.

To Choose a Type of Object to Extract:

1. Keep all options checked.

2. Or/and clear the Reference Section option. The section in red is hidden.

3. Or/and clear the Comparison Section option. The section in green is hidden.

4. Or/and clear the 1D Inspection option. The shift is hidden.

1 - Reference Section

2 - Inspection map

3 - Comparison Section

4 - 1D Inspection


Navigate Through the Sections

You can slice the selected inspection map with a constant interval along a defined direction and at a defined position. The result is a set of Reference

Sections ; and/or Comparison Sections , and/or 1D Inspections . Only a couple of sections ( Reference and Comparison ) can be active at a time, it's the couple in fussing.

To Navigate Through the Sections:

1. In , check the Multi-Slices option.

1 - Multi-Slices option 2 - Slicing interval

3 - Choose Type of Unit

2. If the selected map is based on a Plane or on a Tunnel , go to step 5.

3. If the selected map is based on a Cylinder , click on the Choose Type of

Unit pull-down arrow*.


Select from the drop-down list. The unit of measurement in the Interval field will change according the unit of measurement set in Preferences / Units / Unit System / Length .

Use Angular Unit from the drop-down list. The unit of measurement in the Interval field will change according the unit of measurement set in Preferences / Units / Unit System / Angle .

5. Enter a value in the Interval field.

6. Click (or ) to set a value.

Next (or Previous ).


1 - Reference Section (in red)

2 - Comparison Section (in green)

3 - Shift (also called 1D inspection)

4 - Constant step used for slicing

5 - The active sections

In the Inspection Map Analyzer viewer, the Next (or Previous ) button moves the horizontal slider from Down to Up (or the vertical slider from Right to Left ).

The displacement is performed with a constant step which corresponds to the value in the Interval field. In the Section viewer, the Next (or Previous ) button sets the next (or previous) section(s) (and/or shift) as active.

8. If needed, check the Reverse Directions option.

In the Inspection Map Analyzer viewer, the Next (or Previous ) button moves the horizontal slider from Up to Down (or the vertical slider from Left to Right ).

In the Section viewer, the Next (or Previous ) button sets the previous (or next) section(s) (and/or shift) as active.

Tip: Instead of clicking Next (or Previous ), you can use the Up and Down (or the Left and Right) Arrows on your keyboard.

Caution: (*) Only if the Horizontal Slider has been set.

Note: The 2D Lock option is unchecked of its own in case the Multi-Slices has been chosen.


View the Difference Plot

The Plot viewer displays the difference plot between a couple of sections. You can zoom it in/out, pan it, or change its scale or print it.


In case of an inspection map, resulting from a cylindrical projection, to avoid having the axis of the difference plot inverted compared to the slicing direction, we automatically compare the axis of the cylinder with the Z-Axis , as illustrated below.

In case of a vertical cylinder and if the angle between its vector and the Z-Axis is less than 45°, the difference plot is displayed vertically along the slicing direction.

In case of a horizontal cylinder and if the angle between its vector and the Z-

Axis is less than 45°, the difference plot is displayed horizontally along the slicing direction.

In other cases, you can invert the axes manually by selecting Swap Axes .

To Manipulate a plot:


2. Drag and drop the graph (with the left button) to a new location to pan it.

3. Or use the mouse scroll wheel to zoom in/out.

4. Or use the left and middle buttons.


Note : Zoom In or Zoom Out will change the linear graph scale.

Note: The Zoom is centered on the current mouse location.

Print a Plot

To Print a Plot:

1. Right-click inside a graph.


3. Define the properties of your Printer . the of the Paper .

5. Add title, reference, etc. in the Legend panel. an between Portrait and Landscape .

7. Choose Scale between Auto Scale and Fixed Scale .

8. Click .. The Print Setup dialog closes.

Scale a Plot

To Scale the Plot:


2. Select from the pop-up menu. The Plot Scale dialog opens.


2. Or click on the Horizontal Scale (or Vertical Scale ) pull-down arrow.

3. Choose a scale from the drop-down list.

OK . The Plot Scale dialog closes.


Swap the Axes

To Swap the Axes:



Export Sections

You are able to export a set of sections to the AutoCAD DXF (or DWG ) format.

Note: For all of the exports described in the following topics, the Amplification

Factor value is by default set to 3.


Horizontal Slices from a Plane Map

To Export Horizontal Slices From a Plane Map: the has been chosen, click Export.

The Export

Inspection Map Horizontal Slices dialog opens.

1. Choose from a version of the DWG (or DXF ) format from the File of

Type field.

2. Locate a drive/folder to store the file in the Look In field.

3. Enter a name in the File Name field and click Save . The Horizontal

Slices Export Parameters dialog opens. the option has not been checked, the Vertical

Interval field is grayed-out, as illustrated below. the option has been checked, the Vertical Interval field is grayed-out with the Interval value, as illustrated below.

1. Input a distance value in the Horizontal Interval field.

2. Set a number in Amplification Factor field.

3. If required, input a name in the Reference Surface Title field.

4. If required, input a name in the Comparison Surface Title field.


5. Click . The Horizontal Slices Export Parameters dialog closes.

A unique Horizontal Slice will be then exported to the chosen format.

Or

A set of Horizontal Slices will be then exported to the chosen format. All result from slicing the map horizontally along the Horizontal Slider , with the Vertical

Interval as constant step.

Note: Out of the Inspection Map Analyzer Tool , you can only export a set of

Horizontal Slices .


Vertical Slices from a Plane Map

To Export Vertical Slices From a Plane Map: the has been chosen, click Export.

The Export

Inspection Map Vertical Slices dialog opens.


Type field.


3. Enter a name in the File Name field and click Save . The Vertical

Slices Export Parameters dialog opens. the option has not been checked, the Horizontal

Interval field is grayed-out, as illustrated below. the option has been checked, the Horizontal

Interval field is grayed-out with the Interval value, as illustrated below.

1. Input a distance value in the Vertical Interval field.





5. Click . The Horizontal Slices Export Parameters dialog closes.

A unique Vertical Slice will be then exported to the chosen format.

Or

A set of Vertical Sections will be then exported to the chosen format. All result from slicing the map horizontally along the Vertical Slider , with the Horizontal



Vertical Slices .


Horizontal Slices from a Cylinder Map

To Export Horizontal Slices from a Cylinder Map: the has been chosen, click Export.

The Export

Inspection Map Horizontal Slices dialog opens.


Type field.






1. Input a distance value in the Horizontal Interval field.





Export . The Horizontal Slices Export Parameters dialog closes

A unique Horizontal Slice will be then exported to the chosen format.

Or

A set of Horizontal Slices will be then exported to the chosen format. All result from slicing the map horizontally along the Vertical Slider , with the Vertical



Horizontal Slices .


Vertical Slices from a Cylinder Map

To Export from an Inspection Map of Cylinder Shape: the has been chosen, click Export.

The Export



Type field.











5. Click . The Vertical Slices Export Parameters dialog closes

A unique Vertical Slice will be then exported to the chosen format.

Or

A set of Vertical Slices will be then exported to the chosen format. All result from slicing the map horizontally along the Horizontal Slider , with the Vertical



Horizontal Slices .

Horizontal Slices from a Tunnel Map

Inside the Inspection Map Analyzer Tool , you are not able to export Horizontal

Slices from an inspection map of tunnel shape. But you can do this out of the tool by selecting the Export Inspection Map Horizontal Slices from the File /

Advanced Exports menu.


Vertical Slices from a Tunnel Map

To Export from an Inspection Map of Tunnel Shape:

The is by default chosen, click Export.

The Export



Type field.











5. Click . The Vertical Slices Export Parameters dialog closes

A unique Vertical Section will be then exported to the chosen format.

Or

A set of Vertical Slices will be then exported to the chosen format. All result from slicing the map horizontally along the Vertical Slider , with the Horizontal


Caution: Outside the Inspection Map Analyzer Tool , you are not allowed to export vertical slices from a single Section .

Create Sections and 1D Inspections

To Create Sections and 1D Inspections:

1. If an option has been checked in Step 2 , click Create .

2. If at least two options have checked in Step 2 , click Create All .

If the option is Reference Section (or Comparison Section ), a polyline named OBJECT is created under the current project, in the Models

Tree .

If the option is 1D Inspection , a 1D Inspection named OBJECT is created under the current project, in the Models Tree .

Close . The Inspection Map Analyzer dialog closes.


Create Multi-Sections and Multi-1D Inspections

To Create Multi-Sections and Multi-1D Inspections:

1. If (or Comparison Section ) option has been checked in Step 2 , click Create All .

A set of polylines is created. All are put in a folder, named Cross-

MapData-Ref-Sec (or Cross-MapData-Comp-Sec ), followed by the

Interval value.

Each polyline is named Cross-MapData-First , with a numbering at the beginning and a position (in term of distance or angle*) at the end, as illustrated below.

The order of the numbering is given by the direction of the slider chosen in Step 1 .

The active section(s) is set at position Zero .

The active section the option has been checked in Step 2 , click Create All .

A set of 1D Inspections is created. All are put in a folder, named

Cross-MapData-Insp-Sec , followed by the Interval value

1D Inspection is named Cross-MapData-Insp , with a numbering at the beginning and a position (in term of distance or angle*) at the end, as illustrated below.

The rule for numbering and positioning the created sections is also applied to the created 1D inspections.


The active section the option has been chosen in Step 3 , the numbering order is inverted and the position of the active section(s) (and/or 1D

Inspection) changes.

4. Click . The Inspection Map Analyzer dialog closes.

Caution: (*) For a cylindrical inspection map ( Tunnel ), the cross map data lines are numbered with the following order: from 0° to +360°. All are put in a folder, whose name is followed by the Interval value in degrees.


Select "Volumes & Surfaces"

Because the metric information is still stored in the inspection map, you can extract the volume and surface information (respectively in cubic meters and in square meters) from it as in the Volume Calculation Tool . You can do this by fencing a specific area or a series of areas. You can also filter according to a color defined by picking, from a range of colors by specifying values or using surface (or altitude) values. In selection, the mouse pointer changes depending on the mode you are using. In Volumes & Surfaces , only the Inspection Map

Analyzer viewer* is opened and the horizontal and vertical sliders are hidden**.

To Select Volumes & Surfaces:


2. Select . The Volumes & Surfaces dialog appears.

1 - Polygonal Selection

2 - Color Range Selection

3 - Define Color Range

4 - Select By Using Surface Values

5 - Altitude Filter

6 - Select Whole Inspection Map Area

3. Select the whole map by clicking Select Whole Inspection Map Area .

4. Or fence an area,

5. Or pick a color,

6. Or define a color range,

7. Or use surface values,

8. Or filter altitudes.

Note:

You can right-click anywhere in the Inspection Map Analyzer viewer to display the pop-up menu and select the command you wish to use.

Click in the Inspection Map Analyzer viewer to swap to the Inspection Map Analyzer and Section viewers' display.

** To make one of the two sliders appeared, select Display Slider from the pop-up menu.

To be able to view the 2D lock (or the inspection map) when checking the

Lock 2D (or Display 3D Map ) option in the dialog, please first restore the default layout ( Inspection and Section viewers).


Fence an Area

Fencing an area is always done by picking anywhere (colored and black areas) on the inspection map. If no area has been fenced, the whole inspection map will be selected by default.

To Fence an Area:

1. Click .

2. Pan or zoom the inspection map in or out (if required).


1 - Polygonal fence 2 - Selected area 3 - Unselected area

Tip: Pressing Esc or selecting New Fence or Close Polygon Tool from the popup menu will undo the polygonal fence in progress.

4. Click on the pull down arrow of the Polygonal Selection list.

5. Select .

6. Fence another area. This newly fenced area is added to the previous one.


1 - Fencing of addition shape 2 - The newly defined area is added to the old one

Tip: Instead of selecting Add By Polygonal Selection , you can also use its related shortcut key Ctrl . You should do this before ending the polygon.


8. Select .

9. Draw another polygonal fence. Areas in common are subtracted.

1 - Fencing of subtraction shape 2 - Areas in common are removed

Tip: Instead of selecting Subtract By Polygonal Selection , you can also use its related shortcut key Shift . You should do this before ending the polygon.


11. Select .

12. Draw another polygonal fence. Areas in common are kept.


1 - Fencing of intersection shape 2 - Areas in common are kept

Tip: Instead of selecting Intersect With Polygonal Selection , you can also use its related shortcut key Shift + Ctrl .

Note: If there is no common area, all fenced areas will be cancelled.

Tip: To leave the polygon selection mode, you can select Close Polygon Tool from the pop-up menu, click on any icon in the Volumes & Sections dialog.


Pick a Color

To Pick a Color:

1. Picking should always be done inside the Inspection Map Analyzer viewer and anywhere over the colored areas of the map.


3. Click .

4. Pick a pixel on the inspection map. The map is filtered according to the picked point color; the areas of this map sharing the same color than the picked point are kept.

1 - Cursor shape when selecting Select Color 2 - Filtering color

Range 3 - Unfiltered colors are darken

5. Click on the pull down arrow of the Color Range Selection list.

6. Click .

7. Pick another pixel on the inspection map. The map is filtered according to the newly picked color.

1 - Cursor shape when selecting Add Color

Range Selection

2 - New filtering color

Tip: Instead of selecting Add Color Range Selection , you can also use its related shortcut key Ctrl . You should do this before picking another pixel.



9. Select .

10. Pick another pixel on the inspection map. The areas of the map having the same color than the picked point are subtracted from the selection.

Cursor shape when selecting Subtract Color Range Selection

Tip: Instead of selecting Subtract Color Range Selection , you can also use its related shortcut key Shift . You should do this before picking another pixel.


12. Select .

13. Pick another pixel on the inspection map. The areas of the map having the color in common are kept. Those not having the same color are unkept.

Cursor shape when selecting Color Range Selection

Tip: Instead of selecting Intersect Color Range Selection , you can also use its related shortcut key Shift + Ctrl .

Note: If there is no pixel area, all picked pixels will be cancelled.

Tip: To leave the selection by color range mode, you can select Quit Selection by Color Range from the pop-up menu, click on any icon in the Volumes &

Sections dialog.


Define a Color Range

To Define a Color Range:


2. Click . The Color Range Definition dialog opens.


Filter according to one bound. between and Keep Below . b) Enter a value in the Bound 1 field.

1 - Bound value 2 - The elevation differences above or below the bound value are kept and the others are darkened

Filter between two bounds. a) Select or Keep Outside . b) Enter a value in the Bound 1 and Bound 2 fields.


The elevation difference inside or outside the bound values are kept and the others are darkened

4. Click .


Use the Surface Values

The shift between two surfaces on an inspection map along a given direction and at a defined position can be viewed in the Section viewer when selecting

1D Inspection in Sections & Shifts . This shift is a surface of its own. That’s why; the purpose of this new feature in RealWorks is to allow the user to filter an inspection map according to a surface value or between two values.

To Use the Surface Values:

1. Click . The By Surface Selection dialog opens.

This dialog opens as the third tab of the WorkSpace window in place of the

Inspection Map Analyzer dialog. In Select by Using Surface Values , only the

Inspection Map Analyzer viewer is opened and the horizontal and vertical sliders appear again.

1 - Allows setting a section direction 2 - Allows filtering above/below a value or inside/outside two values

2. Do one of the following: the option. The horizontal slider becomes active. the option. The vertical slider becomes active.

3. Do any of the following:


Select surfaces with values above a bounded value. the option. b) Enter a value in the Bound 1 field.

Select surfaces with values below a bounded value. the option. b) Enter a value in the Bound 1 field.

Select surfaces with values between two bounded values. the option. b) Enter a value in the Bound 1 field. c) Enter a value in the Bound 2 field.

Select surfaces with values outside two bounded values. the option. b) Enter a value in the Bound 1 field. c) Enter a value in the Bound 2 field.

Preview . Shifts between surfaces are extracted.

1 - Surfaces inside two bounds

2 - Section direction

3 - Surfaces out of bound tolerance are 4 - selected and darkened

Surfaces outside two bounds

5. Check the results in Step 2 .

Apply .

Tip: You can also choose Select by Using Surface Values from the pop-up menu.


Filter the Altitudes

The new RealWorks feature allows you to filter an inspection map based on a given altitude or between two defined altitudes. The inspection map needs to be of Cylinder shape.

To Filter an Altitude:

1. Click . The Altitude Filtering dialog opens.


Filter according to one bound. between and Keep Below . b) Enter a value in the Bound 1 field.

Filter between two bounds. a) Select or Keep Outside . b) Enter a value in the Bound 1 and Bound 2 fields.

OK . The Altitude Filtering dialog closes.

Report the Volume and Surface Information

The extraction results are listed in text in the Volumes & Surfaces dialog. You can save these results in a report file in rft format. Note that you cannot save the results as permanent objects in the RealWorks database as in the Volume

Calculation , Twin Surface Inspection and Surface to Model Inspection tools.

To Report the Volume and Surface Information:

1. Click . The Volume Calculation Report dialog opens.

2. Click . Another Volume Calculation Report dialog opens.

3. Enter a name for the report file in the File Name field.

4. Find a location where you want the report file to be stored.

5. Click .


Iso-Curves

You can extract and create Iso-Curves (of polyline type) from an inspection map. Iso-Curves are computed from a position (called Reference ) with a certain spacing (called Interval ).


Extract Iso-Curves

In Iso-Curves , the Inspection Map Analyzer and Section viewers are opened.

The horizontal and vertical sliders are hidden in the Inspection Map Analyzer viewer and the Section viewer is empty of contents*.

To Extract Iso-Curves: the dialog, click on the pull down arrow.

2. Select . The Iso-Curves dialog appears. The inspection map is by default not displayed in the Section viewer.

3. If required, check the Display 3D Map option to view the inspection map.

1 - ColorBar

2 - Interval

3 - Reference

4 - Select Reference by

Picking

Enter a value in the Reference field.

5 - Number of estimated

Iso-Curves with the default

Reference and Interval values

4. To define the Reference , do one of the following:

Click (or ) to set a value.

Select Reference by Picking and pick one point on the inspection map.

5. To define the Interval , do one of the following:

Enter a value in the Interval field.

Click (or ) to set a value.

Preview .


The first computed Iso-Curve will be the Reference Iso-Curve ; this means that it will have height the value set in the Reference field. The other Iso-Curves will then be computed from the Reference Iso-Curve by propagation in two directions (up and down) with the defined Interval. The active Iso-Curve (not necessarily the Reference Iso-Curve but the first in the computation’s order) is of fuchsia color in the Section viewer and is colored according to its value in the ColorBar in the Inspection Map Analyzer viewer. For a given active Iso-

Curve , the information window at the top right corner of the Section viewer shows in text its order, shift and size (of the polyline).

1 - Active iso-curve

Note:

2 - Information window

Computing a huge quantity of Iso-Curves may take a very long time. In that case, an information dialog appears and prompts you to continue or abort the operation.

* To make one of the two sliders appeared, select Display Slider from the pop-up menu.

To be able to view the iso-curves in the Section viewer, hide the inspection map in the 3D View by un-checking the Display 3D Map option.


Browse Iso-Curves

The active Iso-Curve is the first in the computation’s order. It is of fuchsia color in the Section viewer and is colored according to its value in the ColorBar in the Inspection Map Analyzer viewer.

To Browse Iso-Curves:

1. Click (or Display Previous Iso-Curve ) to set the next (or previous) iso-curve as active. click (or Display Last Iso-Curve ) to set the first (or last) iso-curve as active.

3. Or key in an iso-curve’s number and press Enter .

4. Or pick an iso-curve in the Inspection Map Analyzer viewer.

Note:

You can set several iso-curves as actives. To do this, multi-select the ones you need in the Section viewer by combining the use of Ctrl with clicking.

You can use the Up (or Down ) Arrow key instead of Display Next Iso-

Curve (or Display Previous Iso-Curve ).


Define Principal Iso-Curves

After previewing the result, you can choose and assign some of the Iso-Curves as principals. The remained Iso-Curves are then considered as intermediate

Iso-Curves . Each principal Iso-Curve has a label which contains its height information in text.

To Define Principal Iso-Curves:

1. Check option.

1 - Defines the first principal

Iso-Curve by entering a number

2 - Defines the number of Iso-

Curves to skip

3 - Select First Principal Iso-

Curve by Picking

2. To define the First value, do one of the following:

Enter a number in the First field.

Or ) to set a number.

Or Iso-Curve in the Section viewer.

3. To define the Skip value, do one of the following:

Enter a number in the Skip field.

Or ) to set a number.


2 - Intermediate Iso-Curves 1 - Principal Iso-Curves

Create Iso-Curves

Iso-Curves are created in the RealWorks database as 3D polylines in a set

(named Cross-MapData-IsoCurves XX where XX is the Interval value) under the current (active) project. You can export them to the AutoCAD application.

To Create Iso-Curves:

1. Click .

2. Click .

Note:

Close can also be selected from the pop-up menu. the Iso-Curves sub-tool without saving the result will make appeared a warning message.


Colored Meshes

You can extract and create a Colored Mesh not based on the point clouds, meshes or model (prerequisites for doing the inspection) but directly from a surface ( Reference or Comparison ) of an inspection map. A Colored Mesh is built by using both the grid information and the color information found in the inspection map. The grid information is used for computing vertices while the color information is required for coloring.


Extract Colored Meshes

In Colored Mesh , the Inspection Map Analyzer and Section viewers are opened and the horizontal and vertical sliders are hidden*.

To Extract Colored Meshes:


2. Select . The Colored Mesh dialog appears. The inspection map is by default not displayed in the Section viewer.

3. If required, check the Display 3D Map option to view the inspection map.

4. Do one of the following: the option. the option.

5. Click . A colored mesh is then extracted.

2 - Inspection map 1 - Colored mesh

Note:

After , the number of vertex and the number of triangles related to the computed mesh are shown in the Colored Mesh dialog.

* To make one of the two sliders appeared, select Display Slider from the pop-up menu.


Create Colored Meshes

To Create Colored Meshes:

Create .

2. Click .

Note:

Close can also be selected from the pop-up menu.

Leaving sub-tool without saving the result will make appeared a warning message.


Print Inspection Maps


1. Right-click inside the Inspection Map Analyzer view.


3. Choose a printer from the Printer panel.

4. Choose a size and a source from the Paper panel.

5. Define an orientation for the paper by checking either Portrait or

Landscape .

6. Fill in comments in the Legend panel.

7. Choose and Fixed Scale .

8. If has been chosen, click on the pull-down arrow and select a scale from the list.

9. Click . A preview of the inspection map appears.

10. In the preview mode, do one of the following:

Click to print the inspection map.

Click to magnify the inspection map.

Click to reduce the inspection map (after zooming in).

Click (if there is more than one page).

Click (if the current page is other than the first page).

Click (if there is more than one page).

Press to leave the preview mode.

11. Click OK . The Print Setup dialog closes.

Tip:

You can also click Print in the Main toolbar or select Print from the File menu.

You can also select a printer from the network (or set the current printer's properties) by clicking on the Network (or Properties ) button in the Print

Setup dialog.


Profile Matcher Tool

The idea behind this tool is to allow the user to match or position a profile (2D curve, cross-section, polyline, etc.) at a specific point and in a given direction in a 3D scene. We mean by “matching a profile” not just to move it from its current position to a new one in a 3D scene but also to create this profile in the

RealWorks database. This tool is useful when you import a profile from a CAD application, and you wish to position it within a 3D scene in RealWorks , or when you use the EasyProfile ™ Too l or when you wish to duplicate a profile's pattern in different locations in a 3D scene.


Open the Tool

You need to have at least one profile and a point cloud or mesh selected in your current project to be able to activate the tool. You can activate it from the

EasyProfile ™ Tool or by selecting its related command from the menu bar.

To Open the Tool:

1. Select both a point cloud/mesh and a profile from the Project Tree . the menu, select Profile Matcher Tool . The Profile

Matcher dialog opens.

This dialog opens as the third tab of the WorkSpace window and is composed of four parts. Each part corresponds to one step in the matching process. The

3D View splits into two horizontal viewers. The top viewer (a 3D viewer) displays in 3D the selected point cloud or mesh and the selected profile as well as a 3D-plane. The selected profile is in the 3D-plane. This means that both have the same position and orientation in the 3D scene. The lower viewer (a

3D-locked viewer) displays in 2D (locked in the XY* plane of the active coordinate frame) the selected profile and a set of points with a 2D-grid in superimposition. This set results from slicing the selected point cloud.

1 - The 3D View

2 - A 3D plane

3 - The 3D-locked view


5 - The selected point cloud slicing

6 - The profile


Note:

Picking Parameters toolbar opens in the distance constrain mode below the 3D View .



Define a Cutting Plane

In this step, we are going to define and use a 3D-plane to change the selected profile’s position and orientation. The method for defining a 3D-plane (mostly the same as in the Cutting Plane Tool ) is based on picking which can be free or constrained.

1 - Set From Frame

2 - Fit

3 - Pick Axis from Object

4 - Plane Perpendicular to Screen


To Define a Cutting Plane:

6 - Plane Parallel to Screen View

7 - Pick First Point

8 - Display and Hide options

9 - Restore the profile's initial position


Select a frame’s axis (1).

Fit an extracted set of points with a plane (1).

Find a perpendicular view plane from an extracted set of points (1).

Pick an object’s axis (1).

Pick a plane perpendicular to the screen (1).

Pick three points (1) (2).


Define a position and set a direction: a) Enter a direction in the Normal field. click . The Picking Parameters toolbar appears. c) Pick on point (free or constrained) in the 3D View .

864 Trimble RealWorks 9.0 User's Guide d) Enter a position in the Point field.

2. If required and if a point cloud has been selected, un-check Display Cloud .

3. If required and if a mesh has been selected, un-check Display Mesh .

4. If required, un-check Display Plane .

5. If required, click Restore .

The Restore button remains unavailable as long as any 3D-plane has been validated. After validating a 3D-plane, a profile of the same shape as the selected one (the one required to activate the tool) is created. This profile is in the validated 3D-plane. Any transformation has been applied to the selected profile; it remains unchanged in position and direction. Clicking Restore will undo the new 3D-plane as well as the new profile.

2 - The new 3D plane with new profile 1 - The initial 3D plane with the selected profile inside

Note: For more information related to (1), see Step 2 of the Cutting Plane Tool .

For (2), see the Picking Parameters .


Define a Profile

You can arrange the newly defined profile in the 3D-plane by rotating, panning, scaling up and down or reversing it. The Thickness field is not unavailable

(grayed out) if a mesh has been selected in Step 1 . The Thickness value

(cannot be equal to zero) is used for slicing the selected point cloud from each side of the 3D plane.

1 - Flip profile on the plane

2 - Interactive mode (in plane)

3 - Reset the displacement made in plane

Set a Thickness

To Set a Thickness:




Move the Profile

To Move the Profile:

1. Click . The Profile Matcher information window appears at the top right corner of the 3D-locked viewer. This window displays the profile's current scale factor.


Rotate the profile in the 3D plane.

Pan the profile in the 3D plane.

Scale the profile in the XY plane.

Scale the profile up and down using the mouse wheel.

3. If required, click Reset .

Tip: You can also right-click in the 3D-locked viewer and select Start

Interactive Mode or Quit Interactive Mode from the pop-up menu.


Rotate the Profile

To Rotate the Profile:

1. In the 3D-locked viewer, hold the left button pressed.

2. Rotate the profile in the 3D plane.

2 - Before rotating the profile 3 - After rotating the profile 1 - The mouse shape in Rotate mode

Tip: You can also click in the 3D-locked viewer and use the m or M key to activate or deactivate the Interactive Mode .


Pan the Profile

To Pan the Profile:

1. In the 3D-locked viewer, hold the middle button pressed.

2. Move the mouse in any direction to pan the profile.

2 - The Profile before panning 3 - The Profile after panning 1 - The mouse in Pan mode

Tip: You can also click in the 3D-locked viewer and use the <Arrow> keys to pan the profile Up , Down , Right and Left .


Scale the Profile

To Scale the Profile:

1. In the 3D-locked viewer, hold the left and middle buttons pressed.

2. Move the mouse forward to scale down the profile.

3. Move the mouse backward to scale up the profile.

1 - The profile before scaling down

2 - The profile after scaling down

3 - The mouse shape in Scale mode

4 - The scale factor before scaling down

5 - The scale factor after scaling down

Tip: You can also click in the 3D-locked viewer and use the + and – keys to scale the profile Up and Down .


Reverse the Profile

To Reverse the Profile:

Click .

2 - After reversing the profile 1 - Before reversing the profile

Tip: You can also right-click in the 3D-locked viewer and select Flip Polyline on

Plane from the pop-up menu.


Create the Profile

When you are satisfied with the newly defined profile's position, orientation and scale in the 3D scene, you can create it as a persistent object in the

RealWorks database. The object is of polyline type and has the same shape as the selected one (the one required to activate the tool). You can create as many profiles as you need without leaving the tool.

To Create the Profile:

1. Click .

2. Click .


EasyProfile Tool

The idea behind this new feature is to allow you to easily extract profiles along curbs, pavements, rail lines, cuttings, natural features etc. Profiles are determined by tracking a pre-determined section. A section can be of segment and circle arc based shape. This tool requires a point cloud selection to be able to be activated.

Open the Tool

A section can be of segment and/or circle arc shape. A section shape is defined based on a 2D-curve (profile). If the project you load contains at least one 2D-curve (profile), you can then select it for defining a section shape. In that case, both the Profile Matcher and Cutting Plane buttons in Step 1 of the

EasyProfile ™ dialog are available. This means that you can position the existing 2D-curve (profile) within a 3D scene or create a new one. If any 2Dcurve (profile) is available, only the Cutting Plane button is available. You should then define one. Note that a 2D-curve (profile) - mainly composed of several segments and curve parts, connected or not - can be one imported from AutoCAD or can be previously generated within RealWorks .

To Open the Tool:

1. Select an object with cloud property from the Project Tree . the menu, select EasyProfile Tool . The EasyProfile dialog opens.

This dialog opens as the third tab of the WorkSpace window and is composed of three parts. Each part corresponds to one step in the EasyProfile procedure.

1 - Start Profile Matcher 2 - Start Cutting Plane 3 - The 2D-curve (profile) in selection

Caution: You can select several point clouds as input of the tool but one of them should not be the Project Cloud .


Select an Existing Profile

To Select an Existing Profile:


2. Select an existing 2D-curve (profile) from the drop-down list.

1 - 2D-curve (profile) in white 2 - Section size (in red) 3 - Preview the tracking result


Set the Section Size

After defining a section shape, you need to define its size. Profile tracking will start from the defined section shape with the specified step size value (that we call Element ) and will consist of building and propagating in both directions a series of consecutive constrained Elements (all based on the first Element and all ball-jointed at a pivot point). The tracking will stop of its own when the fitting error between the current (last) Element and its points is too large or the number of points in the immediate neighborhood is too small.

To Set the Section Size:

1. Enter a value* in the Step Size field.


3. Click .

Points inside each Element (shown in yellow) can be hidden by un-checking the Display Used Points option. Those outside the Elements can be also hidden by un-checking the Display Remaining Points option. Once the tracking ends, profiles are then computed from the sequence of built Elements and the start button becomes dimmed.

1 - First Elements (in red) with profile (in white) 2 - Propagation of consecutive Elements

Note: The Delete Elements and Pick to Continue buttons are not available before clicking Start .


Caution: You cannot enter a value equal to zero or negative in the Step Size field.

Modify Built Elements

If the last Elements are not correctly fitted, you may decide to delete them. You do this by picking an Element in the 3D View . Those that are after the picked

Element are deleted. You can decide to jump to a position by picking a point on the selected point cloud. Once a point has been picked, the tracking propagation will start by its own from that point onwards. The side on which the new sequence is appended to the previous sequence is chosen automatically.


Delete Sections

To Delete Sections:

1. Click . The mouse cursor becomes as shown below. an in the 3D View window.

1 - The picked Element 2 - The picked Element and those follow are deleted

Note:

You can undo the deletion by selecting Undo Delete Elements from the pop-up menu or by using the following short-cut Ctrl + Z .

You cannot delete the first Element ; the one which contains the selected

2D-curve and is used for tracking.


Continue Tracking

To Continue Tracking:

1. Click . The mouse cursor becomes as shown below.

2. If required, change the Step Size value.

3. Pick one point on the working cloud.

1 - The picked point 2 - The old sequence is appended to the new sequence

3 - Propagation of another sequence of Elements from the picked point

Note: You can undo continuing tracking by selecting Undo Continue from the pop-up menu or by using the following short-cut Ctrl + Z .


Create Profiles

Once you are satisfied with the tracking result, you can save it in the database.

A new folder is created and rooted under the current project. This folder contains all computed profiles and a cloud. A profile is always named Prof-xxx where xxx is its order. The cloud - always named EasyProf-Cloud - contains points inside the fitted Elements used for tracking profiles.

To Create Profiles:

1. Click .

2. Click .


Fitting Tool

This tool is used for fitting a geometry to a set of points. The geometry can be a plane, a sphere or a cylinder. Creating a plane (or a cylinder) can be useful when you need to compare a surface to a geometric model in the Surface-to-

Model Inspection Tool .

Open the Tool

To Open the Tool:

1. Select and display one point cloud (or more*) from the Project Tree . the menu, select Fitting Tool . The Fitting Tool toolbar appears as well as an information window at the top right corner of the 3D View .

2 - Close Tool (Escape) 1 - Fit Geometry to Cloud (f)

The information window displays the total number of points in the selected point cloud ( Right Number ) and the number of points after defining a region for fitting ( Left Number ). Before fencing, the Right Number and the Left Number are both equal.

Tip: You can also click on the Fitting Tool icon in the Tools toolbar.

Note: You can fit the whole selected point cloud without fencing as Fit

Geometry to Cloud is active. If no fence has been defined, a geometry also appears when clicking Sphere , Cylinder , Vertical Cylinder , Plane or Horizontal

Plane . In this case, the geometry fits all points of the selected point cloud and the two numbers of points in the information window remain unchanged.

Caution: (*) You can select several point clouds as input of the tool but one of them should not be the Project Cloud .


Fence a Set of Points

To Fence a Set of Points:

1. Navigate through the 3D scene to find a set of points for which you want to fit with a geometry.

2. Fence this set of points by drawing a polygonal fence.


4. Select from the pop-up menu. The In and Out icons become active.

1 - In (i) 2 - Out (o)

5. Select to keep points inside the fence.

6. Select to keep points outside the fence.

The number of points in the selected point cloud will be diminished from the amount of points used for fitting (in the information window and in the 3D View ).

Tip:

You can also select In (or Out ) from the pop-up menu or use the related short-cut key I (or O ).

Instead of selecting End Fence from the pop-up menu, press the Space

Bar .

Note:

Pressing will undo a closed fence (validated) or a fence in progress

(still to be validated).

After fencing, the Display Un-partitioned Points becomes enabled. Clicking on it will reload all points of the selected point cloud.

Display Un-partitioned Points




1. Click on the Fit Geometry to Cloud pull down arrow.

2. Choose a geometry type from the drop-down list. If Cylinder (or Plane ) has been chosen, the Fitting Tool toolbar looks as shown below.

Cylinder, Vertical Cylinder, Plane or Horizontal Plane .

A or Horizontal Plane appears so that it fits all points inside the fence.

Vertical Cylinder has been chosen, the Cylinder has a direction of axis parallel to the Z-Axis .

Horizontal Plane has been chosen, the Plane has a normal direction parallel to the Z-Axis .

Sphere has been chosen, the Fitting Tool toolbar looks as shown below.

The Diameter field becomes enabled.

5. Click on the Diameter pull down arrow. between 76.20 mm , 100 mm , 139 mm , 200 mm and 230 mm .

7. Or give a diameter value*.

8. Click .

If has been chosen, a Sphere appears so that it fits all points inside the fence.


If , 100 mm , 139 mm , 200 mm and 230 mm (or a userdefined value) has been chosen, a Sphere whose diameter is constrained by the chosen (or defined) value appears.

Tip:

You can fit points directly inside a drawn fence without using In (or Out ).

You can use the F short-cut key instead of clicking the Fit Geometry to

Cloud icon. The geometry type used for fitting will be the current one.

Note:

After fitting, the Display Unpartitioned Points icon becomes unavailable.

Pressing will undo the geometry fitting as well as the drawn fence.

The fitted geometry disappears from the 3D View .

The information window at the top right corner of the 3D View displays the

RMS Deviation value after fitting with a Cylinder , Vertical Cylinder , Plane ,

Horizontal Plane or Sphere .

(*) The value will not be kept anymore if no fitting has been performed.


Create a Fitted Geometry

If you are satisfied with the fitting result; you can save it as a persistent object in the database. The Created Fitted Geometry icon enables to create a fitted entity under the current group behind other objects. The Create In feature also creates a fitted entity and puts it under the model group you have to choose from the drop-down pop-up submenu.

To Create a Fitted Geometry:

1. Click .

A is then created and rooted in the Models Tree under the current project and shown in the 3D View .

Close Tool .

Note: selected recovers its total number of points (in the information window and in the 3D View ). the , be sure to create the newly fitted geometry in the database; otherwise it will be lost.

Pressing will close the Fitting Tool but will not cancel the created geometry.

The feature can only be selected from the pop-up menu. It is available only if there is at least one group of models under the selection

(required to open the Fitting Tool ). Otherwise, it won't appear in the popup menu.

Tip: Instead of clicking on a button in the Fitting Tool toolbar, you can also select its corresponding command from the pop-up menu.


3D Inspection Tool

The main function of the tool is to calculate the distance between each point of the compared cloud to a reference surface. The result is a colored cloud where colors stand for a distance (e.g. blue for the closest points and red for furthest points, according to a predefined ColorBar ).

Open the Tool

To open the Tool:

1. Select two items from the Project Tree . the menu, select 3D Inspection Tool . The 3D

Inspection dialog opens.

This dialog opens as the third tab of the WorkSpace window. The first item (by order of selection) is called Reference and is displayed in red in the 3D View .

The second item (by order of selection) called Comparison is green. You can display (or hide) each of them in the 3D View by checking (or un-checking) the

Display Reference (or Display Comparison ).

You use the Segmentation (or Sampling ) sub-tool for defining a region (or for reducing the number of points) on each of the two selected items (keep checked either Display Reference or Display Comparison ) or on both of them

(keep both checked). Reload Points will reload points of the item for which the display option has been checked.

The Min. Distance and the Max. Distance are both set as " Undefined " in Step

1 .

Tip: The 3D Inspection Tool can also be selected from the pop-up menu.


Preview a 3D Inspection Cloud

To Preview a 3D Inspection Cloud:

Preview .

The inspection is done by comparing the Reference with the

Comparison . The result is a 3D inspection cloud inside which points are colored according to the difference (expressed in terms of elevation) between the Reference and the Comparison . A ColorBar located at the right side of the 3D inspection cloud is a scale of elevation values and each color corresponds to an elevation value.

The and the Max. Distance become enabled and display in text the values.

The becomes dimmed and Step 2 is enabled.

1 - The ColorBar 2 - The 3D inspection cloud

2. If required, click Swap Surfaces .

The becomes a surface to inspect ( Comparison ) and the

Comparison swaps for Reference .

Preview becomes enabled again.

Note: Reload Points will reload the Comparison .


Filter a 3D Inspection Cloud

The Min. Distance and Max Distance values of the computed 3D inspection cloud are by-default set as the From and To values in S tep 2 in the 3D

Inspection dialog. The From and To values both define a filtering range. This means that points (of the computed 3D inspection cloud) out of the defined range will not be taken into account.

To Filter a 3D Inspection Cloud:

1. Enter a distance value in the From field and press Enter .

2. Enter a distance value in the To field and press Enter .

The 3D inspection cloud will be updated according to the defined range as well as its related ColorBar .

The 3D inspection cloud before filtering

The 3D inspection cloud after filtering

Note:

The unit of measurement for From (or To ) is set to Meter , you do not need to enter "m" after the value. You can change the unit of measurement in

Preferences .


The value should be less than the To value and reversely.

Tip: You can undo the filtering by selecting e.g. Undo from the Edit menu.

Doing that will reload the computed 3D inspection cloud as well as its related

ColorBar .

Create a 3D Inspection Cloud

To Create a 3D Inspection Cloud:

Click . The 3D Inspection dialog closes.

An object of 3D Inspection Cloud type named Inspection is created and rooted under the Models Tree . This object is by-default selected so that you can launch directly the 3D Inspection Analyzer Tool ; and the two items required for the comparison are both unselected.

You can select a folder from the Project Tree under which you want to put the created 3D Inspection Cloud . You only need to do that before clicking Create .


Note: If required, select the Cloud Color rendering from the 3D View >

Rendering menu to be able to view the 3D inspection cloud with color information.


3D Inspection Analyzer Tool

The 3D Inspection Analyzer Tool enables to filter a 3D inspection cloud by keeping points between two defined values or to extract connected cloud(s) as individual component(s). This tool can only be used as a standalone tool after selecting a computed 3D inspection cloud.

Open the Tool

To Open the Tool:

1. Select a 3D inspection cloud from the Project Tree . the menu, select 3D Inspection Analyzer Tool .

The 3D Inspection Analyzer dialog opens as the third tab of the WorkSpace window. The selected 3D inspection cloud is by-default displayed in the 3D

View . The number of points inside the 3D inspection cloud is displayed in Step

1 - Extract Cloud by Range in the 3D Inspection Analyzer dialog.

3. Edit ,

4. Or extract a cloud from the 3D inspection cloud,

5. Or auto-Split a 3D inspection cloud in a cluster of clouds.

6. Or hide (or display) the 3D inspection cloud by checking (or un-checking) the Display Inspection Cloud option.

Tip: The 3D Inspection Analyzer Tool can also be selected from the Tools toolbar.


Extract Clouds From 3D Inspection

Clouds

Extracting a cloud from a 3D inspection cloud consists in defining a range

( From and To values). Inspected points inside the defined range will be then kept.

To Extract a Cloud From a 3D Inspection Cloud:

1. Do one of the following: the value as follows:

Drag and drop the From slider.

Or key a value in the From filed and press Enter .

Or use the Up (or Down ) button. the value as follows:

Drag and drop the To slider.

Or key a value in the From filed and press Enter .

Or use the Up (or Down ) button.


1 - The "To" slider and the "To" value in the 4 - Points of the 3D inspection cloud below the

ColorBar

2 - The "From" slider and the "From" value in the ColorBar

3 - The 3D inspection cloud

"To" value

5 - Points of the 3D inspection cloud above the

"From" value

The 3D inspection cloud's Number of Points (see Step 1 ) as well as its aspect and the color associated to it (see 3D View ) will be then updated. Kept points are those in the defined range; they remain with their own color. The unkept points are those out of the defined range. All are colored in black when they are above the From value, and in white when below the To value. The Reload

Points becomes enabled.

Extract . Unkept points are removed from the 3D View .

3. If required, define a new range. The Extract button becomes again enabled.

4. If required, click Reload Points . The 3D inspection cloud takes its initial state (number of points and distances From and To ) as well as the

ColorBar even if you have done several extractions.

Note:

The unit of measurement for From (or To ) is set to Meter , you do not need to enter "m" after the value. You can change the unit of measurement in

Preferences .

From value cannot be greater than the To value, and reversely.

The button becomes dimmed.

The option when checked (or unchecked) enables to display (or hide) the cloud in display in the 3D View . This cloud can be the initial 3D inspection cloud or an extracted cloud.


Auto-Split a 3D Inspection Cloud in a

Cluster of Clouds

This step is an option. You can split the selected 3D inspection cloud or a cloud extracted from it. If the selected 3D inspection cloud is composed of connected components, this step can help you in splitting these connected components into individual components. Sometimes, you need to first remove connected part(s) from the 3D inspection cloud by extracting (see Step 1 ). No parameter is required.

To Auto-Split a 3D Inspection Cloud in a Cluster of Clouds:

1. Click on the Split to Clusters button. A dialog displaying the number of components found appears.

OK . The dialog closes.

Each component is a Cloud and each has its own color and displayed in the 3D View .

Split to Clusters button becomes dimmed.


The 3D inspection cloud (filtered or not) is hidden. The Display

Inspection Cloud option is unchecked by its own.

Tip: If required, apply the Cloud Color rendering to be able to view each spilt component with its own color.

Note: You can split a 3D inspection cloud without extracting a cloud from it. To do that, bypass the Step 1 in the 3D Inspection Analyzer dialog.

Create the Extracted Cloud(s)

To Create the Extracted Cloud(s):

1. Click . The 3D Inspection Analyzer dialog remains open.

If the 3D inspection cloud has not been split but only filtered, a lonely cloud named as follows Insp3D-Cloud From value - To value is created.

If the 3D inspection cloud has been split; each component is created as a Cloud . Each has its own color and all are put under a folder called Extracted Clouds .

2. If required, use the extracted cloud as input for a new extraction (or splitting).

3. Click . The 3D Inspection Analyzer dialog closes.


C H A P T E R 1 1

Tools in the Modeling Module

When you load a file saved in the RealWorks format and in the Modeling processing mode, that file will be opened with that processing mode set. When you are outside this processing mode and you need to use it, you have to click on the pull-down arrow in the Tools toolbar and choose Modeling . Tools, in the

Modeling module, are splitted into two categories: Main Tool and Sub-Tool .

The Modeling module is only present in RealWorks Advanced Modeler,

Advanced Plant and Advanced Tank , as illustrated below. Note that the Export

Pipe Center Lines feature is not present in the Advanced Modeler version.

895

Modeling Tools

Main tools enable to model diverse shapes to represent the as-built environment using simple CAD compliant geometrics. They can be reached from the Modeling menu or from the Tools toolbar.


Cloud-Based Modeler Tool

The Cloud-Based Modeler Too l allows you to model geometries of the following shapes: Plane , Sphere , Cylinder , etc. Modeling can only be cloudbased. In this case, a selection as input data ( Project Cloud or pure point cloud) is required and the modeling is done by fitting points.

Open the Tool

An object having the point cloud and geometry representations cannot be selected as entry for the Cloud-Based Modeler Tool ; you need to first delete the geometry representation from that object. The selection can be multiple.

To Open the Tool:

1. Select one point cloud* (or more*) from the Project Tree . the menu, select Cloud-Based Modeler Tool . The

Cloud-Based Modeler dialog opens.

This dialog opens as the third tab of the WorkSpac e window. The

Segmentation Tool is set by default and its toolbar appears. The input point cloud is called Cloud Data . The information box at the top right corner of the

3D View displays the RMS Deviate and Number of Points information (both are initially " Undefined ") for the Cloud-Based Modeler Tool and the Number of

Points information for the Segmentation Tool . The RMS (Root Mean Square)

Deviate corresponds to the standard deviation between points used for fitting and the fitted geometry.

Tip: You can also click Cloud-Based Modeler Tool in the Tools toolbar.

Note: (*) If the selected point cloud is On before starting the tool, it automatically tilts to Off . We advise you to maintain it Off .

Caution: (**) You can select several point clouds as input of the tool but one of them should not be the Project Cloud .

Tools in the Modeling Module

Select a New Cloud Data

The Set New Cloud Data is for swapping the default Cloud Data (not necessary the one selected before starting the Cloud-Based Modeler Tool ) for another one. You cannot choose and set a subset of the default Cloud Data as the new Cloud Data ; you need to choose a different point cloud.

To Select a New Cloud Data:

1. Select Project Tree .

2. Display the selected point cloud in the 3D View .

3. If required, hide the default Cloud Data (by clicking in the Cloud-Based

Modeler dialog). the icon. The cursor becomes as shown below and the information box related to the Segmentation Tool disappears from the 3D View .

5. Pick a point on the selected point cloud. It becomes the new Cloud Data .

The Segmentation information box appears again with the new cloud data number of points.


1 - The initial Cloud Data

2 - The newly selected Point Cloud

3 - The cursor in the Set New Cloud Data mode

4 - The new Cloud Data

Note: (*)The Hide Cloud icon becomes Display Cloud after clicking on it.


Define a Set of Points on the Cloud Data

Frequently, the Cloud Data contains many points; you need to decimate them before doing the fitting. You may also decide to fit a geometry just on a part of it. To do these, you can use the Segmentation and the Sampling sub-tools.

1 - The Segmentation Tool 2 - The Sampling Tool

After segmenting/sampling the Cloud Data , Keep Only Displayed Cloud in

Cloud Data and Delete Displayed Cloud from Cloud Data (respectively for keeping/deleting points in/from the current Cloud Data (after decimating/fencing) and Reload Points become active.

1 - Reload Points 2 - Keep Only Displayed Cloud in Cloud Data

3 - Delete Displayed cloud from

Cloud Data

Keep Only the Displayed Cloud

To Keep Only the Displayed Cloud:

1. Draw a fence on the Cloud Data . the (or Out )* icon to keep points inside (or outside) the fence.

3. Or sample the Cloud Data . the icon. Points displayed in the 3D View inside are kept.

Note:

Reload Points is only for reloading points of the current Cloud Data after sampling or segmenting.

(*) You can skip the step of keeping In (or Out ). In that case, points inside the fence are kept.

Tip: Outside the segmentation mode, you can select the Segmentation Tool from the pop-up menu or use its related short-cut key ( S ).


Delete the Displayed Cloud

To Delete the Displayed Cloud:


3. Or sample the Cloud Data . the icon. Points displayed in the 3D View are unkept (removed from the Cloud Data .

Note:


(*) You can skip the step of keeping In (or Out ). In that case, points inside the fence are unkept.


Choose a Geometry Type

There are ten geometry types and one construction method ( Extrusion ). When the Cloud-Based Modeler dialog appears, the type which comes first is the one you have selected during the previous use of that tool. To change the geometry type, click an icon in the Cloud-Based Modeler dialog. Extrusion is a tool for creating a three-dimensional geometry of free shape from 2D profiles.

1 - Plane

2 - Sphere

3 - Cylinder

4 - Regular Cone

5 - Box

6 - Rectangular Torus

7 - 3D Point

8 - Segment

9 - Circular Arc

10 - Circular Torus

- Extrusion

Tip: You can also select a geometry type from the pop-up menu.


Use Constraints

This optional step is for applying constraints to objects under construction.

Check the Use Constraint option to make this step appear. Constraints can be assumed as limits imposed on objects and they vary according to the geometry type selected in Step 1 . You cannot apply two constraints of the same type.

The applied constraint you find in the constraint list - see hereafter - is always the last applied one.


Plane

Three types of constraint are available (see [A]). The constraint list (with two columns Type and With ) is empty before applying a constraint. A constraint

(once applied) is put in the constraint list and each is selected by default (box checked). You can apply one constraint of the same type at once. You can mix a constraint type with another; but you have some restrictions in combining constraint types (see the table).

If you mix incompatible constraints together; a warning message appears. For those you do not want anymore, you can de-select them by un-checking their check box. To remove all created constraints, click on the Clear button. After applying constraints, the constraint list looks as shown in the table.

[A]

1 - Make Parallel

2 - Make Perpendicular

[B]

3 - Pass Through Point

4 - Constraint list

1 - Constraint type 2 - Check box

To Use a Constraint to Calculate a Plane:

3 - Entity used as constraint


1. Constrain a plane parallel/perpendicular to an entity.

2. Or constrain a plane passing through a point.

3. Un-checking a defined constraint in the constraint list will free the related constraint type for use.

Tip:

You can also select an applied constraint from the constraint list and use the Del to clear it.

All constraints can be selected from the pop-up menu.

Make Parallel

To Make Parallel: the icon. The Make Parallel toolbar opens with three tabs ( By Picking Entity , To Plane and To Direction ) inside.

Each tab corresponds to a tool (respectively 3D Picking , 3D Plane and 3D

Direction ). The By Picking Entity tab opens first, its information box takes place at the top right corner of the 3D View and the Pick Entity with Direction mode is set by default.

2. Do one of the following.

Define a plane,

Define a direction,

Pick an entity with direction.

3. Validate the defined plane (or direction).


Make Perpendicular

To Make Perpendicular: the icon. The Make Perpendicular toolbar opens with three tabs ( By Picking Entity , To Plane and To Direction ) inside.




Define a plane,

Define a direction,



Pass Through a Point

To Pass Through a Point: the icon. The 3D Point Tool toolbar and its information box at the top right corner of the 3D View .

2. Define and validate a 3D point.


Sphere

Three types of constraint are available (see [A]). The constraint list (with two columns Type and With ) is empty before applying constraints. A constraint

(when applied) is put in the constraint list and each is selected by default (box checked). You can apply one constraint of the same type at once. You can mix a constraint type with another; but you have some restrictions in combining constraint types (see the table).

If you mix incompatible constraints together; a warning message appears. For those you do not want anymore, you can de-select them by un-checking their check box. To remove all created constraints, click on the Clear button. After applying constraints, the constraint list looks as shown in [B].

[A]

1 - Lock Radius

2 - Lock Center

[B]

3 - Lock Center on Line

4 - Constraint list


To Use a Constraint to Calculate a Sphere:

1. Lock a sphere center.



2. Or lock a sphere radius.

3. Or lock a sphere center on a line.

4. Un-check a defined constraint in the constraint list to free it.

Tip:



Lock a Radius

To Lock a Radius: the icon. The 3D Radius Tool toolbar opens as well as it information box.


Pick a radial entity, two

Pick an axis and a point,

3. Validate the radius.

Lock a Center

To Lock a Center: the icon. The 3D Point Tool toolbar opens as well as it information box.


Lock a Center on a Line

To Lock a Center on a Line:

1. Click on the Lock Center on Line icon. The 3D Axis Tool toolbar opens.

2. Define and validate a 3D axis.


Cylinder

Six types of constraint are available (see [A]). The constraint list (with two columns Type and With ) is empty before applying constraints. All constraints cannot be mixed together; refer to the table below to check how a constraint is compatible with the others. If you mix incompatible constraints together; a warning message appears. After applying constraints, the constraint list looks as shown in [B].

[A]

1 - Make Parallel


3 - Pass Axis Through Point

[B]

4 - Make Secant to Cylinder

5 - Fit to Axis

6 - Lock Radius



To Apply Constraints to a Cylinder:


1. Make a cylinder parallel/perpendicular to an entity/plane/direction.

2. Or lock a cylinder radius.

3. Or pass a cylinder axis through a point.

4. Or fit a cylinder axis.

5. Or constraint secant to a cylinder.

6. Un-check a defined constraint in the constraint list to free it. click to remove all constraints from the list.

Tip:



Make Parallel





Define a plane,

Define a direction,









Define a plane,

Define a direction,



Pass an Axis Through a Point

To Pass an Axis Through a Point: the icon. The 3D Point Tool toolbar opens with the Pick Point mode is set by default.



Lock a Radius



Pick a radial entity,

Pick

Pick an axis and a point, parameters.


Fix to an Axis

To Fix to an Axis:

1. Click on the Fix to Axis icon. The 3D Axis Tool toolbar opens.



Make Secant to a Cylinder

To Make Secant to a Cylinder: the icon. The 3D Secant Tool dialog as well as its information box appears.

2. Pick a cylinder.

3. If required, check Use Same Radius to set the same radius than the picked cylinder.

4. If required, check Use Given Angle and give a secant angle.

5. If required, click Perpendicular to have a 90° secant angle.

OK .

Entity used as constraint

Note that the Make Secant to Cylinder constraint type generates four subconstraint types according to the option(s) checked. only has been checked, you have the two following constraint types: Make Axis Secant to Axis and Lock

Radius . only has been checked and the given angle value is different to 90° and 270°, you have the two following constraint types: Make Axis Secant to Axis and Lock Angle with Direction . only has been checked and the given angle value is equal to 90° and 270°, you have the two following constraint types:

Make Axis Secant to Axis and Make Perpendicular to Direction .

912 Trimble RealWorks 9.0 User's Guide only has been checked and Perpendicular pressed-on, you have the two following constraint types: Make Axis

Secant to Axis and Make Perpendicular to Direction .

If the two options have been checked with an angle other than 90° or

270°, you have the three following constraint types: Make Axis

Secant to Axis , Lock Radius and Lock Angle with Direction .

If the two options have been checked with an angle equal to 90° or


Secant to Axis , Lock Radius and Make Perpendicular to Direction .

If the two options are kept unchecked, you have the Make Axis

Secant to Axis constraint type.


Regular Cone

Three types of constraint are available (see [A]). The constraint list with (two columns Type and With ) is empty before applying constraints. All constraints cannot be mixed together; refer to the table below to check how a constraint is compatible with the others.

If you mix incompatible constraints together; a warning message appears. After applying constraints, the constraint list looks as shown in [B].

[A]

1 - Make Parallel

[B]

2 - Make Perpendicular 3 - Fit to Axis


To Apply Constraints to a Regular Cone:


1. Make a cone parallel/perpendicular to an entity/plane/direction.

2. Or fit a cone axis.



Tip:



Make Parallel





Define a plane,

Define a direction,









Define a plane,

Define a direction,



Fix to an Axis

To Fix to an Axis:




Circular Torus

Five types of constraint are available (see [A]). The constraint list (with two columns Type and With ) is empty before applying constraints. All constraints cannot be mixed together; refer to the table below to know on how a constraint is compatible with the other(s).


[A]

1 - Make Perpendicular to Direction

2 - Make Parallel to Plane

3 - Lock Center Line Radius

[B]

4 - Align to Join Two Existing Secant Cylinders of Same Radius

5 - Lock Pipe Radius


To Apply Constraints to a Circular Torus:


1. Make a circular torus parallel/perpendicular to an entity/plane/direction.

2. Or fit a circular torus axis.


3. Or lock a circular torus's center line radius.

4. Or lock a circular torus's pipe radius.

5. Align and join a circular torus to two secant cylinders of the same radius.


Note: Press Esc to leave the picking mode.

Tip:



Make Perpendicular to a Direction

To Make Perpendicular to a Direction: the n icon. The 3 D Direction Tool toolbar opens.

2. Define and validate a 3D direction.

Make Parallel to a Plane

To Make Parallel to a Plane: the icon. The 3 D Plane Tool toolbar opens.

2. Define and validate a 3D plane.

Lock a Center Line Radius

To Lock a Center Line Radius: the icon. The 3D Radius Tool toolbar opens as well as it information box.



Pick




Lock a Pipe Radius

To Lock a Pipe Radius: the icon. The 3D Radius Tool toolbar opens as well as it information box.



Pick




Align to Join to two Secant Cylinders of Same Radius

To Align to Join to two Secant Cylinders of Same Radius:

1. Click icon.

2. Pick an existing cylinder.

3. Pick another existing cylinder. The result is null if the two picked cylinders are not secant or do not have the same diameter.

Note: A warning appears if the two picked cylinder axes are parallel.


3D Point

Two types of constraint are available (see [A]). The constraint list (with two columns Type and With ) is empty before applying constraints. These two constraints cannot be mixed together; refer to the table below to check how a constraint is compatible with the others.


[A]

1 - Lock on Plane

[B]

2 - Lock to Line or Axis


To Use a Constraint to Calculate a 3D Point:


1. Lock a 3D point on a plane.

2. Or lock a 3D point on a line/axis.


Click to remove all constraints from the list.

Tip:




Lock on a Plane

To Lock on a Plane: the icon. The 3D Plane Tool toolbar opens with the

Pick Entity with Direction mode is set by default.


Lock to Line (or Axis)

To Lock on a Line (or Axis): the icon. The 3D Axis Tool toolbar opens with the Pick Axis Entity mode is set by default.



Circular Arc

Three types of constraint are available (see [A]). The constraint list (with two columns Type and With ) is empty before applying constraints. Lock on Plane ,

Make Parallel to Plane and Make Perpendicular to Direction (already evoked) will detail here. All constraints cannot be mixed together; refer to the table below to check how a constraint is compatible with the others.


[A]

1 - Lock on Plane

[B]

2 - Make Parallel to Plane 3 - Make Perpendicular to

Direction


To Apply Constraints to a Circular Arc:


1. Lock a circular arc on a plane (see the 3D Plane Tool ).

2. Or make a circular arc parallel to a plane (see the 3D Plane Tool ).


3. Or make a circular arc perpendicular to a direction (see the 3D Direction

Tool ).


5. Or to remove all constraints from the list.

Tip:



Lock on a Plane




Make Parallel to a Plane

To Make Parallel to a Plane: the icon. The 3 D Plane Tool toolbar opens.


Make Perpendicular to a Direction

To Make Perpendicular to a Direction: the n icon. The 3 D Direction Tool toolbar opens.



Segment

Three types of constraint are available (see [A]). The constraint list (with two columns Type and With ) is empty before applying constraints. All constraints cannot be mixed together; refer to the table (click to see) to know on how a constraint is compatible with the other.


[A]

1 - Make Parallel

[B]

2 - Make Perpendicular 3 - Pass Axis Through Point


To Use a Constraint to Calculate a Segment:


1. Make a segment parallel/perpendicular to an entity/plane/direction (see the 3D Picking Tool / 3D Plane Tool / 3D Direction Tool ).

2. Or pass a segment though a point (see the 3D Point Tool ).



Tip:



Make Parallel





Define a plane,

Define a direction,









Define a plane,

Define a direction,







Extrusion

This step is not in option as for the other geometry types. The Use Constraint option is checked by default and cannot be unchecked. The Drawing Tool and

Picking Parameters (in 3D constraint mode) toolbars appear and the cursor is in the drawing mode. Two types of constraint are available. The constraint list

(with two columns Type and With ) is empty before applying constraints.

1 - Make Parallel to Direction

2 - Make Perpendicular to Plane

3 - Launch 2D Drawing Tool

4 - Constraint list

Defining a Polyline

In the Drawing Tool toolbar, not only the Change Mode icon is available but also the Draw Rectangle and Draw Circle icons. This differs from the Drawing

Tool toolbar in the Polyline Drawing Tool .

To Define a Polyline:

If required, click the Start 2D Drawing Tool icon.

Note:

After defining a polyline, all drawing modes ( Line , Arc , Rectangle and

Circle ) are dimmed in the Drawing Tool toolbar.

The navigation mode is forbidden. If you are in the

Walkthrough mode, the navigation mode will swap of its own from that mode to Examiner after starting drawing.


Draw a Polyline in a Plane Parallel to the

Screen View

To Draw a Polyline in a Plane Parallel to the Screen View:

1. Choose a drawing mode among Line , Arc , Rectangle and Circle .

2. Draw a polyline. The scene is locked on a plane parallel to the screen view with a 2D grid superimposed (if not hidden previously) and the Picking

Parameters toolbar appears in the 2D constraint mode.

3. Validate the polyline. The scene is free from the 2D lock.

The Lock 2D Curve and Make Parallel to Direction constraints appear in the constraint list. The primitive to extrude will have an axis direction perpendicular to the screen view.



Draw a Polyline in a User-Defined Plane

To Draw a Polyline in a User-Defined Plane: the icon. The 3D Plane Tool toolbar appears.

2. Define and validate a 3D plane*. The scene is locked on the defined 3D plane with a 2D grid superimposed (if not hidden previously) and the

Picking Parameters toolbar appears in the 2D constraint mode.

3. Choose a drawing mode among Line , Arc , Rectangle and Circle .

4. Draw and validate a polyline. The scene is free from the 2D lock.

By default, the defined polyline is a 2D polyline in the defined 3D plane which is brought parallel to the screen view. The Lock 2D Curve and Make Parallel to

Direction constraints appear in the constraint list. The primitive to extrude will have an axis direction perpendicular to the screen view.

1 - Constraint type

Note:

2 - Check box

(*) Please, refer to the 3D Plane Tool on how to define a 3D plane.

The is only present when using the 3D

Plane Tool in the Cloud-Based Modeler Tool . It enables to find the best cutting direction.


Select a Polyline

If there is a polyline within the project (or after drawing and creating one), you can set it as selected. Only a 2D polyline and 3D coplanar polyline (all nodes are in the same plane) can be selected.

To Select a Polyline: the icon. The cursor becomes as

2. Pick a polyline. A polyline (in green) appears over the picked polyline. The scene is locked on the polyline's plane with a 2D grid superimposed (if not hidden previously) and the Picking Parameters toolbar appears in the 2D constraint mode.

3. Validate the polyline. It becomes red and the scene is free from the 2D lock.

Tip: You can also check Select Polyline from the pop-up menu.


Make Parallel to a Direction

If you wish the primitive to extrude has an axis direction parallel to a defined direction, follow the steps below:

To Make Parallel to a Direction: the icon. The 3D Direction Tool toolbar opens.

2. Define and validate a direction. The Make Parallel to Direction constraint is put in the constraint list.

3. Draw* or select a polyline (if existing).

4. Validate the defined polyline.

1 - Defined direction 2 - First Picked point in the polyline drawing mode

Note:

(*) Picking a first point in the polyline drawing mode will bring the 3D scene locked to a view perpendicular to the defined direction.

After validating the defined polyline, the Lock 2D Curve constraint is put in the constraint list under the Make Parallel to Direction constraint.

Tip: You can also select an applied constraint from the constraint list and use the Del to clear it.


Make Perpendicular to a Plane

If you wish the primitive to extrude has an axis direction parallel to the normal direction of a defined plane, follow the steps below:

To Make Perpendicular to a Plane: the icon. The 3D Plane Tool toolbar opens.

2. Define and validate a plane. The Make Perpendicular to Plane constraint is put under the constraint list.

3. Draw* or select a polyline (if existing).

4. Validate the defined polyline.

1 - A defined plane 2 - The first picked point in the polyline drawing mode

Note:

(*) Picking a first point in the polyline drawing mode will bring the 3D scene locked to a view parallel to the defined plane with a 2D Grid (if not previously hidden).

After validating the defined polyline, the Lock 2D Curve constraint is put in the constraint list under the Make Perpendicular to Plane constraint.

Tip: You can also select an applied constraint from the constraint list and use the Del to clear it.


Rectangular Torus

Only one constraint type is available (see [A]). The constraint list with (two columns Type and With ) is empty before applying a constraint. After applying a constraint, the constraint list looks as shown in [B].

[A]

Align to Join to Two Existing Secant Boxes of Same Section

[B]


To Apply Constraints to a Rectangular Torus:


1. Align to join to two existing secant boxes of same section.


3. Or to remove all constraints from the list.

Tip:

You can also select an applied constraint from the constraint list and use

Del to clear it.


Note: The user should fit (or extract) a Rectangular Torus with constraint.

Otherwise, the Fit and Extract buttons remain dimmed.


Aligning to Join Two Existing Secant Boxes of Same Section

To Align to Join to Two Existing Secant Boxes of Same Section: the icon. The cursor becomes as shown in [A].

2. Pick a first box. The cursor takes the shape shown in [B].

[A]

[B]


3. Pick another box. If the two boxes are secant and have the same section, a rectangular torus appears.

Its (also called Direction of Axis ) is parallel to the two boxes' Direction of Normal (also called Direction of Width ).

Its is equal to the angle drawn by the two boxes'

Direction of Height .

Its is equal to the two boxes' Depth .

4. If the two picked boxes are not secant; the "T his constraint cannot be activated because the two boxes are not secant " warning message appears. Click OK.

The warning message closes and the Align to Join to

Two Existing Secant Boxes of Same Section constraint is left.

5. If the two picked boxes do not have the same section, the " There is too much indetermination to activate this constraint: two boxes are identical, one of them is a cube or they have no common face " warning message appears. Click OK.



Tip:

If required, make the two boxes secant using the Make Secant to a Box

(With Same Section ) constraint in the Geometry Modifier Tool .

If required, modify manually the two boxes' parameters (like Center ,

Width , Height , Depth , Directions , etc.) in the Property window to make sure that both are secant and have the same section.


Box

Three types of constraint are available (see [A]). The constraint list with (two columns Type and With ) is empty before applying constraints. All constraints cannot be mixed together, refer to the table below to check how a constraint is compatible with the others.


[A]

1 - Define Z*

[B]

2 - Define X* 3 - Make Secant to Box (With

Same Section)


To Use a Constraint to Calculate a Box:


1. Define the vector X direction,

2. Or define the normal Z direction,

3. Or make secant to a box (with same section).


Tools in the Modeling Module click to remove all constraints from the list.

Tip:

You can also select an applied constraint from the constraint list and use

Del to clear it.


Define the Vector X Direction

To Define the Vector X Direction: the icon. The 3D Direction Tool toolbar opens with the

Pick an Entity With Direction set by-default.

2. Define a direction using available tools.

The Vector X (also called Direction of the Weight in the Property window) of the box is parallel* to the defined direction.

Note: (*) But not necessary in the same direction.

Define the Normal Z Direction

To Define the Normal Z Direction: the icon. The 3D Direction Tool toolbar opens with the

Pick an Entity With Direction set by-default.

2. Define a direction using available tools.

The Normal Z (also called Direction of the Height in the Property window) of the box is parallel** to the defined direction.

Note: (*) But not necessary in the same direction.

Make Secant to a Box (With Same Section)

To Make Secant to a Box (With Same Section): the icon.

2. Pick a box.


Calculate a Geometry

This step can come after choosing a geometry type or after constraints have been applied. You have two ways for computing a geometry: Fit and Extract .

Fit consists of adjusting the displayed/fenced point cloud with geometry.

Extract consist in picking a point on the point cloud where the geometry should lie. The resulting geometry will be fitted to a subset of the point cloud in the neighborhood around the picked point. This is a faster way of defining a geometry; no fence is necessary.

If no sampling/segmentation has been done; the displayed cloud (current cloud data) will be used for fitting or for extraction. In (A), the number of points in the fitted geometry is equal to the number of points in the current cloud data. If a sampling/segmentation has been done, the number of points in the geometry is equal to the number of points after segmenting/sampling if Fit has been chosen

(B) and different if Extract has been chosen (C). After fitting or extracting a geometry, its properties are shown in the Cloud-Based Modeler information box.

To Fit a Geometry on Points:

Click . A primitive of the type selected in Step 1 appears.

To Extract a Geometry from a Picked Point:

Extract .

2. Pick a point. A primitive of the type selected in Step 1 appears.


After fitting a geometry on points or extracting a geometry from a picked point, you can change the geometry shape by opening the Geometry Modifier Tool .

Note that modifications on the geometry will create it as persistent object in the database. If you swap from a geometry type to another, the fitted/extracted geometry will be lost; and no warning message will appear. If constraints have been applied; clicking on the Clear button will also cancel the fitted or extracted geometry.

Tip: If a sampling/segmentation has been started; you can directly fit and create a geometry in the database without doing this in two steps. Choose for that the Fit and Create command from the pop-up menu or use its related short-cut key Space bar .

Note:

Fit and Extract are dimmed if Extrusion has been selected in Step 1 and remains in this state as long as a polyline has not been drawn and validated.

The function will work well when the picked point is in a clear area on the model, i.e., where the model is only present in a large enough neighborhood around the point. When it is difficult to find a clear area, then it is better to first fence then fit

Create a Geometry

If you are satisfied with the fitted/extracted geometry, you can create it as a persistent object in the RealWorks database by using the Create button in the dialog. You can create as many geometries as required without leaving the tool. When you need to leave the tool, just click on Close .

Tip: Create and Close can be selected from the pop-up menu.


Geometry Creator Tool

The Geometry Creator Tool is for creating a geometry. Ten types are available.

You can create a geometry by editing known parameters, picking points or picking entities within displayed objects. All construction methods inside the tool are pure; they are in opposition to those based on point cloud fitting. A created geometry can be used as an entry for the other tools of RealWorks like e.g. the Surface to Model Inspection Tool where models of tunnel are required for comparison.


Open the Tool

No selection is required to open the Geometry Creator Too l. Inside each creation mode, picking a point (free or constrained) does not need to be on displayed objects. The Picking Parameters toolbar opens in the 3D constraint mode. When you swap a creation mode for another, a message appears and prompts you to save or not the current geometry (default or drawn one) except for Plane , Circular Torus , Extrusion and 3D Point .

To Open the Tool: the menu, select Geometry Creator Tool . The

Geometry Creator dialog opens.

1 - Cylinder

2 - Sphere

3 - Plane

4 - Rectangular Torus

5 - Extrusion

6 - Regular Cone

7 - Circular Torus

8 - Box

9 - Segment

10 - 3D Point

This dialog opens as the third tab of the WorkSpace window. The Plane type is set by default and the 3D Plane Tool information box appears at the top right corner of the 3D View .

Tip: You can click the Geometry Creator Tool icon in the Tools toolbar.

Note:

You can press the Esc key to leave the Geometry Creator Tool .

You can use the Geometry Modifier Tool , the Intersect Tool and the

Duplicator Tool within the Geometry Creator Tool in order to modify the geometry you are defining.


Plane

To Define a Plane: the icon. Step 2 of the Geometry Creator dialog becomes as shown in [A] in the Examiner (or Walkthrough ) mode and in [B] in

Station-Based mode.

[A] [B]


Define a 3D plane (in all navigation modes ( Examiner , Walkthrough and Station-Based )).

Define a 3D plane in the Station-Based mode. parameters.

Create .

4. Click .

A plane whose name is OBJECTX is created and put under the current Sub-

Projec t in the Models Tree . X is its order. With the Property window open, you can edit manually the plane parameters like its Center and Direction of Axis .

1 - Editable parameters 2 - Un-editable parameters


Define a Plane (in all Navigation Modes (Examiner, Walkthrough and

Station-Based))

There are three methods available in all navigation modes for interactively defining a plane's orientation and position: Pick two Screen Points, Pick Three

Points and Pick Two Points . For the first method, the plane will pass through the line defined by these two points and will be perpendicular to the screen plane. For the second method, the plane will pass through these three points.

The third method is to pick two points which define a vector. As a plane is defined by two vectors. Selecting this method will orientate the plane so that the second vectors is parallel to the Z Axis (or Elevation Axis ) of the active coordinate frame.

There are two methods for precisely defining the orientation of a plane: Axis and Pick Entity with Direction . For the first method, the plane becomes perpendicular to an axis of the active frame. For the second method, the plane's orientation will be aligned to the axis of the picked entity.

Pick an Entity With Direction

To Pick an Entity With a Direction:

Pick Entity with Direction .

2. Pick an entity with direction.

Make Perpendicular to Axis

To Make Perpendicular to an Axis:

1. Choose among X Axis , Y Axis and Z Axis (in the X , Y and Z



Pick Two Screen Points

To Pick Two Screen Points:

1. Click .

2. Pick two points on displayed objects or not.




1. Click . The Picking Parameters toolbar opens in the

3D constraint mode.

2. Pick three points (free or constrained) on displayed objects or not.

Pick Two Points

To Pick Two Points:

1. Click (in the X , Y and Z Coordinate System ).

2. Or North , East and Elevation Coordinate System ).

3. Pick two points. No need to pick on displayed objects.




Define a Vertical Plane by Picking Two Screen Points (Horizontal

Direction) and One 3D Points

To Define a Vertical Plane by Picking two Screen Points (Horizontal Direction) and one 3D Point:

1. Click on the button. The cursor becomes as shown in [A].

2. Pick a point anywhere on the screen. The cursor becomes as shown in

[B].

[A]

[B]


3. Pick another point anywhere in the 3D View (on the displayed point cloud or not). The cursor becomes as shown in [C] and the Picking Parameters toolbar appears in 3D constraint mode.

4. Pick the last point anywhere in the 3D View (only on the displayed point cloud). A vertical plane appears with the third picked point as center.

[C]

[D]

Tip: can be selected from the pop-up menu.


Define a Horizontal Plane By Picking Two Screen Points

(Horizontal Direction) and One 3D Point

To Define a Horizontal Plane by Picking Two Screen Points and one 3D Point:



[B].

[A]

[B]


3. Pick another point on the screen. These two points will define the orientation of the first axis of the horizontal plane's frame. The cursor becomes as shown in [C] and the Picking Parameters toolbar appears in

3D constraint mode.

4. Pick the last point in 3D (on a cloud point, a measured point or a geometry). This point defines the height of the vertical plane. A horizontal plane appears with the third picked point as center.

[C]

[D]



Define a Plane By Picking Three Screen Points (Horizontal and

Steepest Slope Directions) and One 3D Points

This feature enables to define a plane with any orientation.

To Define a Plane by Picking Three Screen Points (Horizontal and Steepest

Slope Directions) and one 3D Point:



[B].

[A]

[A]


3. Pick another point on the screen so that the two points represent a horizontal segment in the 3D space. These two points define the orientation of a horizontal segment drawn on the final plane. The cursor becomes as shown in [C].

4. Pick another on the screen so that the previous point and this new one represent the steepest slope direction of the final plane. The cursor becomes as shown in [D] and the Picking Parameters toolbar appears in

3D constraint mode.

[C]

[D]


5. Pick the last point in the 3D View (only on the displayed point cloud). The three first picked points - which are not collinear (not lying on the same line) - draw a 3D plane; the fourth picked point is its center.


Edit Parameters

To Edit Parameters:

1. Enter a direction in the Normal field.

2. Enter a point’s position in the Position field.


Sphere

To Define a Sphere: the icon. Pick Two Points * is set by default. The

Picking Parameters toolbar appears in the 3D constraint mode. The cursor is in the picking mode.


3. Click .

4. Click .

A Sphere whose name is OBJECTX is created and put under the current project in the Models Tree . X is its order. With the Property window open, you can edit manually the sphere parameters like its Center , Diameter , Direction of

Axis and Distance Between Extremities .

1 - Auto-computed parameters 2 - Editable parameters

Note:

3 - Un-editable parameters

The is assumed to be aligned with the Z-Axis of the active coordinate frame.

(*) In the picking mode, pressing Esc (or selecting Cancel Picking from the pop-up menu) first leaves that mode and then makes appeared a 3D

Sphere at the middle of the 3D View . This 3D Sphere has the default parameters as parameters (the ones in the dialog after choosing Sphere as Geometry Type ). If you decide to choose another Geometry Type , a dialog appears and prompts you to create the current geometry (or not).


Pick Two Points

To Pick Two Points:

1. If required, click the Pick Two Points icon. The Picking Parameters toolbar opens in the 3D constraint mode.

2. Pick a point. This point will be the first extremity of a sphere.

3. Pick another point. This point will be the second extremity of a sphere.

Edit Parameters

The value by default for the Radius is one meter. The 3D coordinates in the

Center field are the 3D position of the middle of the 3D View .

To Edit Parameters:

1. Enter another 3D coordinates in the Center field.

2. Enter a new value in the Radius field.


Cylinder

To Create a Cylinder: the icon. Pick Three Points * is selected by default.

The Picking Parameters toolbar appears in the 3D constraint mode. The cursor is in the picking mode.


Pick three points*.

Create .

4. Click .

A Cylinder whose name is OBJECTX is created and put under the current project in the Models Tree . X is its order. With the Property window open, you can edit manually the cylinder parameters like its Center , Pipe Diameter ,

Length , Direction of Axis, Direction of Bound 1 and Direction of Bound 2 .

1 - Editable parameters

Note:


The and the Direction of Bound 2 are aligned with the

Direction of Axis .

(*) In the picking mode, pressing Esc (or selecting Cancel Picking from the pop-up menu) first leaves that mode and then makes appeared a vertical

Cylinder at the middle of the 3D View . This Cylinder has as parameters the defaults (the ones in the dialog after choosing Cylinder as Geometry

Type ). If you choose another geometry type, a dialog appears and prompts you to create the current geometry (or not).




1. If required, click the Pick Three Points icon. The Picking Parameters toolbar opens in the 3D constraint mode.

2. Pick a point. This point will be the first extremity of a cylinder.

3. Pick another point. This point will be the second extremity of a cylinder.

4. Pick a third point. This point will define the pipe radius.

Edit Parameters

To Edit Parameters:


2. Choose between " Two Points and Radius " and " Point, Direction and

Length ".

If " has been chosen: a) Enter a point’s coordinates in the First Point field. b) Enter another point’s coordinates in the Last Point field. c) Enter a distance value in the Radius field.

If " has been chosen: a) Enter a direction in the Direction field. b) Give a point’s position in the Position field. c) Give a distance value in the Radius field.


Regular Cone

To Define a Regular Cone: the icon. Pick Three Points * is set by default.

The Picking Parameters toolbar appears in the 3D constraint mode. The cursor is in the picking mode.


Pick three points*.

3. Click .

4. Click .

A Regular Cone whose name is OBJECTX is created and put under the current Sub-Projec t in the Models Tree . X is its order. With the Property window open, you can edit manually the regular cone parameters like its

Center , Diameter at Base , Diameter at Top , Distance Between Extremities and

Direction of Axis .

1 - Auto-computed parameters 2 - Editable parameters

Note:


The and Direction of Axis (automatically computed based-on the other parameters) can be modified.

(*) In the picking mode, pressing Esc (or selecting Cancel Picking from the pop-up menu) first leaves that mode and then makes appeared a vertical

Regular Cone at the middle of the 3D View . This Regular Cone has as parameters the default parameters (the ones displayed in the dialog after choosing Regular Cone as Geometry Type ). If you choose another geometry type, a dialog appears and prompts you to create the current geometry (or not).




1. If required, click the Pick Three Points icon.

2. Pick a point. This point will be the base extremity of a regular cone.

3. Pick another point. This point will be the top extremity of a regular cone.

4. Pick a third point. This point will define the top radius.

The drawn regular cone parameters are displayed in the dialog.

Edit Parameters

To Edit Parameters:

1. Enter a 3D position in the First Point field.

2. Enter another 3D position in the Last Point field.

3. Give a radius for the first point in the Top Radius field.

4. Give a radius for the last point in the Base Radius field.


Circular Torus

To Define a Circular Torus: the icon.


Align to join an existing cylinder(2).

Align to join to two secant cylinders of same radius(3).

Create .

4. Click .

A Circular Torus whose name is OBJECTX is created and put under the current project in the Models Tree . X is its order. With the Property window open, you can edit manually the Circular Torus parameters like its Center , Pipe

Diameter , Center Line Diameter , Direction of Axis and Bend Angle .

1 - Editable parameters

Note:


(1) With no constraint applied, the created Circular Torus is of closed shape (the Bend Angle equal to 360 degrees).

(2) With one constraint applied, the created Circular Torus is an open regular torus, its Bend Angle is equal to 90 degrees.

(3) With two constraints applied, the created Circular Torus is an open regular torus, its Bend Angle is equal or less than 90 degrees.


Note: In the picking mode, pressing Esc (or selecting Cancel Picking from the pop-up menu) first leaves that mode and then makes appeared a Circular

Torus at the middle of the 3D View . This Circular Torus has as parameters the defaults parameters (the ones displayed in the dialog after choosing Circular

Torus as Geometry Type ). If you choose another geometry type, a dialog appears and prompts you to create the current geometry (or not).

Pick Two Points

To Pick Two Points: the icon. The Picking Parameters toolbar opens in the 3D constraint mode.

2. Pick a point. This point will be the center of a Circular Torus .

3. Pick another point. This point will define the Pipe Radius + Center Line

Radius distance.

Align to Joint to an Existing Cylinder

To Align to Join to an Existing Cylinder: the icon.



Align to Join to two Secant Cylinders of Same Radius

To Align to Join to two Secant Cylinders of Same Radius:

1. Click icon.


3. Pick another existing cylinder. The result is null if the two picked cylinders are not secant or do not have the same diameter.

Note: A warning appears if the two picked cylinder axes are parallel.

Edit Parameters

To Edit Parameters:

1. Give a direction in the Normal field.

2. Enter a 3D position in the Center field.

3. Enter a distance in the Center Line Radius field.

4. Enter a distance in the Pipe Radius field.


Box

To Create a Box: the icon. Step 2 of the Geometry Creator dialog becomes as shown in [A] in the Examiner (or Walkthrough ) modes and in [B] in the

Station-Based mode.

[A] [B]

2. the (or Walkthrough ) mode, do one of the following:

Pick an entity with direction,

Project a box on a plane,

Pick the bottom left corner of a box,

Pick four 3D points, the mode, in addition to the five construction methods above, do one of the following:

Define a horizontal face by picking one 3D point, then four screen points (two horizontal directions and depth),

Define a vertical face by picking one 3D point, the four screen points

(horizontal direction, vertical direction and depth).

5. Click .

6. Click .

A 3D Box whose name is OBJECTX is created and put under the current project in the Models Tree . X is its order. With the Property window open, you can edit manually the box parameters like its Center , Width , Depth , Height , etc.


1 - Editable parameters (in black) 2 - Un-editable parameters (in gray)

Note: In the picking mode, pressing Esc (or selecting Cancel Picking from the pop-up menu) first leaves that mode and then makes appeared a 3D Box at the middle of the 3D View . Its parameters are displayed in the dialog. If you choose another geometry type, a dialog appears and prompts you to create the current geometry (or not).

Pick an Entity With a Direction

To Pick an Entity With a Direction: the icon. The cursor becomes as shown in [A].

2. Pick an entity. A 3D Box appears [B].

[A]

[B]


It has the picked entity's Direction of Axis as Normal Z direction (also called Direction of Height in the Property window),

Its center is the same as the picked entity's.

Projecting a Box onto a Plane

To Project a Box in a Plane: the icon. The cursor becomes as shown in [A].

2. Pick a plane. The selected box is projected on the picked plane [B]. The bottom side (of the box) lies on the plane.

[A]


[B]

The Direction of Normal (of the plane) [C] and the Direction of the Height (also called the Normal Z * of the box) [D] are parallel but not necessarily in the same direction. In the example below, both are opposite.

[C] [D]



Pick the Bottom Left Corner of a Box

To Pick The Bottom Left Corner of a Box:

1. Click icon .

The cursor becomes as shown and the Picking Parameters toolbar in the 3D constraint mode opens.

2. Pick a point. A 3D Box appears. Its bottom left corner is the point you picked.

Note: Picking should be on displayed objects.


Pick Four Screen Points

To Pick Four Screen Points: the icon. The cursor becomes as shown in [A] and the Picking Parameters toolbar in 3D constraint mode opens.

2. Pick the first screen point*. The cursor takes the shape shown in [B].

3. Move your mouse. A segment in orange links the first screen point to the cursor.

[A] [B]

4. Pick the second screen point*. The cursor then takes the shape shown in

[C].

5. Move your mouse. Two other segments in orange link the first and second screen points previously picked to the cursor. The two picked points and the cursor draw a triangular plane.

6. Pick the third screen point*. The cursor then takes the shape shown in [D] and the triangular plane changes to a rectangular plane.

[C] [D]

7. Move again your mouse (from Up to Down or vice versa). A 3D Box (with an orange frame) appears.


8. Pick the fourth screen point* to complete the 3D Box.

Note: Picking should be on displayed points.

Define a Horizontal Face By Picking One 3D Point, Then Four Screen

Points (Two Horizontal Directions and Depth)

To Define a Horizontal Face by Picking One 3D Point, then Four Screen Points

(Two Horizontal Directions and Depth):

Screen Points (Two Horizontal Directions and Depth) icon. The cursor becomes as shown in [A].

2. Pick 3D Point . Picking should be on displayed points. The cursor takes then the shape shown in [B].

3. Pick the first screen point. Picking doesn't need to be on displayed points.

[A]


[B]

4. Move your mouse. The cursor then becomes as shown in [C]. A segment in orange links the first screen point to the cursor. This segment can be vertical or horizontal.

5. Pick the second screen point, not necessary on displayed points.

6. Move your mouse again. The cursor then becomes as shown in [D]. A horizontal plane (with an orange frame) appears.

7. Pick the third screen point, not necessarily on displayed points.

[C]

[D


8. Move your mouse again. The cursor then becomes as shown in [E]. A 3D

Box (with an orange frame) appears.

9. Pick the fourth screen point to complete the 3D Box .

[E]

Define a Vertical Face By Picking One 3D Point, Then Four Screen Points

(Horizontal Direction, Vertical Direction and Depth)

To Define a Vertical Face by Picking one 3D Point, then Four Screen Points

(Horizontal Direction, Vertical Direction and Depth):

1. Click

Points (Horizontal Direction, Vertical Direction and Depth) . The cursor becomes as shown in [A].

2. Pick a point. Picking should be on displayed points. The cursor then takes the shape shown in [B].

3. Pick the first screen point. Picking doesn't need to be on displayed points.

[A]


[B]

4. Move your mouse. The cursor then becomes as shown in [C]. A segment in orange links the first screen point to the cursor. This segment should not be vertical but horizontal.

5. Pick the second screen point, not necessary on displayed points.

6. Move your mouse again. The cursor then becomes as shown in [D]. A vertical plane (with an orange frame) appears.

7. Pick the third screen point, not necessarily on displayed points.

[C]

[D]


8. Move again your mouse. The cursor becomes then as shown in [E]. A 3D

Box (with an orange frame) appears.

9. Pick the fourth screen point to complete the 3D box.

[E]

Edit Parameters

To Edit Parameters:

1. Enter a point position in the Center field.

2. Enter a direction in the Normal Z field.

3. Enter a direction in the Vector X field.

4. Enter a distance value in the Depth (X) field.

5. Enter a distance value in the Width (Y) field.

6. Enter a distance value in the Height (Z) field.

Note: After updating a parameter, remember to press Enter . The current 3D

Box (the one in display in the 3D View ) will change its shape according to the updated parameter.



To Create a Rectangular Torus: the icon.


Align to join to two existing secant boxes of same section,

3. Click .

4. Click .

A rectangular torus whose name is OBJECTX is created and put under the current Sub-Projec t in the Models Tree . X is its order. With the Property window open, you can edit manually the rectangular torus parameters like its

Center , Width , Height , etc.

1 - Editable parameters (in black) 2 - Un-editable parameters (in gray)

Note: If no constraints have been applied; the created rectangular torus is of open shape (the Bend Angle is less than 360 degrees). If no constraint has been applied, the created rectangular torus is of closed shape (the Bend angle is equal to 360 degrees).





[A]

[B]













Tip:






Editing Parameters

To Edit Parameters:

1. Give a direction in the Normal field.

2. Enter a 3D position in the Center field.

3. Enter a distance in the Center Line Radius field.

4. Enter a distance in the Width field.

5. Enter a distance in the Heigh t field.

Note: The Normal 's direction is called Direction of Axis in the Property window.


Extrusion

An Extrusion is a tool for creating a three-dimensional geometry of free shape from 2D profiles.

To Create an Extruded Entity: the icon. The Drawing Tool and Picking Parameters (in

3D constraint mode) toolbars appear.

2. Draw or select a polyline.

3. Enter a distance value in the Length field.

4. Click .

5. Click .

An Extrusion whose name is OBJECTX is created and put in the Models Tree .

X is its order. With the Property window open, you can edit manually the segment parameters like its Center , Length , Direction of Axis , Direction of

Bound 1 and Direction of Bound 2 .

1 - Editable parameters 2 - Un-editable parameters


3D Point

To Define a 3D Point:

1. Click icon. A 3D Point appears at the middle of the 3D

View . Its 3D coordinates are displayed in the Position field (in the dialog) and in the information panel (in the 3D View ).


Pick a point*

Pick three secant planes*.

Pick a plane and a segment*.

Pick an entity with center*.

Project a 3D Point on a plane*.

Pick two axial entities*.

A 3D Point in yellow appears in the 3D View . Its parameter ( Center ) is updated in the dialog in the Position field.

Create .

4. Click .

A 3D Point whose name is OBJECTX is created and put under the current project in the Models Tree . X is its order. With the Property window open, you can only edit manually the 3D Point 's Center .

Note: (*) In the picking mode, pressing Esc (or selecting Cancel Picking from the pop-up menu) first leaves that mode and then makes appeared a 3D Point at the middle of the 3D View . If you choose another geometry type, a dialog appears and prompts you to create the current geometry (or not).

Pick a Point

To Pick a Point: the icon. The cursor takes the following shape , the initial 3D Point is hidden and the Picking Parameters toolbar opens in the

3D constraint mode.

2. Pick a point (free or constrained) on displayed objects (or not).


Pick Three Planes

If three planes are not parallel two-by-two (with no coplanar normals), then they will intersect (cross over) somewhere at a point.

To Pick Three Planes: the icon. The initial 3D Point is hidden in the

3D View and the cursor becomes as shown in [A].

2. Pick a plane. A red frame with a yellow background upon the picked plane appears. The cursor becomes as shown in [B].

3. Pick another plane. Another red frame with a yellow background appears upon the picked plane. The cursor becomes as shown [C].


4. Pick again another plane. A 3D Point (the intersection of the three picked planes) appears. [D]


Pick a Plane and a Segment

In this creation mode, you need to have a plane and a segment - both intersected at a point.

To Pick a Plane and a Segment: the icon. The initial 3D Point disappears from the 3D View and the cursor takes the shape shown in [A].

2. Pick a plane. A red frame with a yellow background upon the picked plane appears. The cursor takes the shape shown in [B].

3. Pick a segment. The plane and the segment intersect at a 3D Point [C].


Pick an Entity with Center

To Pick an Entity With Center:

1. Click the Pick Entity with Center icon. The cursor takes the following shape . The initial 3D Point disappears from the 3D View.

2. Pick an object of any type having a center (except point cloud, mesh, etc.).


Project a 3D Point on a Plane

To Project a 3D Point on a Plane: the icon. The initial 3D point disappears from the 3D View and the cursor takes the shape shown in [A].

2. Pick 3D Point . A yellow label with the following text “ Point to Project on

Plane ” appears over the picked point [B].

3. Pick a plane. A 3D point appears on that plane [C].


Pick Two Axial Entities

To Pick Two Axial Entities: the .

2. Pick an axial geometry in the 3D View .

3. Pick another axial geometry in the 3D View .

Note: A warning message appears if no intersection is found.

Edit Parameters

To Edit Parameters:

Enter position in the Position field.


Segment

To Define a Segment: the icon.

2. Do one of the following: two

Pick an axial geometry*,

A Segment in yellow appears in the 3D View . Its parameters ( Direction of Axis and Center ) are updated in the dialog in the Direction , Point and Length fields

(if " Point, Direction and Length " has been chosen) and in the First Point and

Last Point fields (if " Two Points " has been chosen).

3. Click .

4. Click .

A Segment whose name is OBJECTX is created and put under the current project in the Models Tree . X is its order. With the Property window open, you can edit manually the segment parameters like its Center , Direction of Axis and

Length .

Note: (*) In the picking mode, pressing Esc (or selecting Cancel Picking from the pop-up menu) first leaves that mode and then makes appeared a Segment at the middle of the 3D View. This Segment has as parameters the default parameters (the ones displayed in the dialog). If you choose another geometry type, a dialog appears and prompts you to create the current geometry (or not).

Pick Two Points

To Pick Two Points: the icon. The Picking Parameters toolbar opens in the 3D constraint mode and the cursor is in the picking mode.

2. Pick a point. This point will be the first extremity of a Segment .

3. Pick another point. This point will be the second extremity of a Segment .

Note: Pickings can be done on objects displayed in the 3D View (or not).


Pick Two Planes

If two planes are not parallel, then they will intersect (cross over) each other somewhere at a line.

To Pick Two Planes: the icon. The Picking Parameters toolbar opens in the 3D constraint mode. The cursor becomes as shown in [A].


3. Pick another plane.


Pick an Axial Geometry

To Pick an Axial Geometry:

1. Click icon.

2. Pick an axial geometry in the 3D View .

Edit Parameters

To Edit Parameters:


2. Choose between " Two Points " and " Point, Direction and Length ".

If " has been chosen: a) Enter a 3D position in the First Point field. b) Enter another 3D position in the Last Point field.

If " has been chosen: a) Enter a direction in the Direction field. b) Enter a 3D position in the Point field. c) Enter a distance value in the Length field.


Geometry Modifier Tool

Rotating or panning an object can be free (called Standard Navigation ) or constrained. Constraints can be imposed ( Screen Rotation , Vertical Pan ,

Horizontal Pan , etc.) or defined by the user. That’s the reason of the Geometry

Modifier Tool which enables to define theses constraints by using manipulators in order to have a fine control in rotating or panning objects.

No selection is required to open the Geometry Modifier Tool . Once inside the tool, you need to do a selection - only geometries except polylines and meshes, measures, etc. - in one of these three windows ( 3D View , List and

Property ) and display the selection to be able to use a manipulator. Selection can only be single. In the Modeling processing mode, you can use all the complete manipulation modes of the tool.

Open the Tool

The Geometry Modifier Tool has several aspects; this depends on the selection done not necessary before opening the tool but also inside the tool.

In the Geometry Modifier Tool , manipulations are split into three groups: using manipulators for displacement or for changing shape, using picked geometries and using constraints. Constraints vary according the entity type selected before (or after) opening the tool.

To Open the Tool: the menu, select Geometry Modifier Tool . The

Geometry Modifier Tool toolbar appears.

Tip: You can also click on the Geometry Modifier Tool icon in the Tools toolbar.


Modify a Shape

Modifying a geometry's shape means changing its dimensions with manipulators which change according to the geometry type.

Note:

You cannot modify the shape of a geometry of Plane (or 3D Point ).

You can select a geometry before or after choosing the Modify Shape command.

Modify Shape icon can be selected from the pop-up menu.


Sphere

To Modify a Sphere Shape:

1. Select and display a sphere. the icon. The selected sphere is displayed with a manipulator (with one ring and two handles).

3. Pick on the ring to select it. It turns to yellow.

4. Drag to increase (or reduce) the sphere's diameter.

5. Pick on the top handle to select it. It turns to yellow.

6. Drag to shorten the selected sphere’s axis by the top. It is like bounding the selected sphere with a plane. The result is a hemisphere.

7. Pick on the bottom handle to select it. It turns to yellow.

8. Drag to shorten the selected sphere’s axis by the bottom. It is like bounding the initial sphere with a plane. The result is a sliced sphere.



Cylinder

To Modify a Cylinder Shape:

1. Select and display a cylinder. the icon. The selected cylinder is displayed with a manipulator (with two rings and two handles).

3. Pick on a ring manipulator to select it. It turns to yellow.

4. Drag to increase or reduce the cylinder’s diameter.

5. Pick on a handle to select it. It turns to yellow.

6. Drag to shorten/lengthen the selected cylinder’s axis.


Cone

To Modify a Cone Shape:

1. Select and display a cone. the . The selected cone is displayed with a manipulator (with two rings and two handles).

3. Pick e.g. the top ring manipulator to select it. It turns to yellow.

4. Drag to increase or reduce the cone’s top diameter.

5. Pick e.g. the top handle to select it. It turns to yellow.

6. Drag to shorten the selected cone’s axis by the top.

7. Do the same for the top handle (or ring) manipulator.


Circular Torus

To Modify a Circular Torus Shape:

1. Select and display a circular torus. the icon. The selected circular torus is displayed with a manipulator (with two rings and one handle).

3. Pick the director radius ring manipulator to select it. It turns to yellow.

4. Drag to increase or reduce the selected circular torus director radius.

5. Pick the generator radius ring manipulator to select it. It turns to yellow.

6. Drag to increase or reduce the selected circular torus generator radius.

7. Pick on the handle to select it. It turns to yellow.

8. Drag to increase or reduce the selected circular torus angle.


Segment

To Modify a Segment Shape:

1. Select and display a segment. the icon. The selected segment is displayed with a manipulator (with two handles).

3. Pick one of the two handles to select it. It turns to yellow.

4. Drag to increase or reduce the selected segment’s length.


Extrusion

To Modify an Extrusion Shape:

1. Select and display an extruded entity. the icon. The extruded entity in selection is displayed with a manipulator (with two handles).

3. Pick one of the two handles to select it. It turns to yellow.

4. Drag to increase or reduce the extruded entity’s length.

Box

To Modify a Box Shape:

1. Select and display a box. the icon. The selected box is displayed with six manipulators, one on each face.

3. Pick on a manipulator to select it. It turns to yellow.

4. Drag to increase or reduce the box size ( Width , Height or Depth ).



To Modify a Rectangular Torus Shape:

1. Select and display a rectangular torus. the icon. The selected rectangular torus is displayed with manipulators (with one ring and two handles).

3. Pick ring manipulator to select it. It turns to yellow.

4. Drag to increase or reduce the selected rectangular torus Center Line

Radius .

5. Pick on a handle manipulator to select it. It turns to yellow.

6. Drag to increase or reduce the selected circular torus angle.


Move a Geometry

" Pan " a geometry means moving and positioning it at a desired location within the scene. " Rotate " a geometry means turning it around an axis or around a point.

1 - Pan Along Home Frame Axes

2 - Pan along Own Axes

3 - Rotate

Note: You can select a geometry before or after choosing one of the above displacement mode.


Pan Along an Axis of the Home Frame

To Pan Along the Home Frame Axes:

1. Select and display a geometry. the icon. A manipulator (with threeaxis handles and three-plane handles) appears. This manipulator has as origin the center of the selection.

1 - An axis handle 2 - A plane handle

3. Select an axis handle by picking it; it turns to yellow. The direction along which you can pan the selection is highlighted in yellow and those for which you cannot are in mauve.

4. Move the selection along that direction.


5. Select a plane handle by picking it. It turns to yellow. The directions (two) along which you can pan the selection are highlighted in yellow and the one for which you cannot is in mauve.

6. Move the selection in that plane.

Tip: You can also select Pan along Home Frame Axes from the pop-up menu or use the Ctrl + T short-cut key to choose this manipulation mode.

Note:

The manipulator (the three handles) has the same color as the global

(active) coordinate frame.

The manipulator will not appear if there is no selection.


Pan Along its Own Axes

To Pan Along its Own Axes:

1. Select and display a geometry. the icon. A manipulator (with three-axis handles and three-plane handles) appears. This manipulator has the selected geometry center as origin.

1 - An axis handle (x3) 2 - A plane handle (x3)

3. Select an axis handle by picking it; it turns to yellow. The direction along which you can pan the selected geometry is highlighted in yellow and those for which you cannot are in mauve.

4. Move the selected geometry along that direction.


5. Select a plane handle by picking it. It turns to yellow. The directions (two) along which you can pan the selection are highlighted in yellow and the one for which you cannot is in mauve.

6. Move the selection in that plane.

Tip: You can also select Pan along Own Axes from the pop-up menu or use the T short-cut key to choose this manipulation mode.

Note:

The manipulator (the three-axis handles) does not have the same color as the global (active) coordinate frame.

The manipulator will not appear if there is no geometry selected.


Rotate a Geometry

To Rotate a Geometry:

1. Select and display a geometry. the icon.

A manipulator (with three ring handles (red, light blue and green)) appears.

This manipulator has the selected geometry center as origin.

1 - A selected object 2 - A ring handle (X3)

The Rotation Manipulator Parameters toolbar opens.

Tip: You can also select Rotate from the pop-up menu (or use the R short-cut key).


Use the Manipulator

To Use the Manipulator:

1. Select a ring handle by picking it. It turns to yellow. An axis passing through the center of that ring handle and perpendicular to it, appears.

This axis has the color of the selected ring handle.

2. Drag the ring handle to rotate the selected geometry around the axis.


Enter Manually an Angle

To Enter Manually an Angle:

1. Input an angle in the Red field and click Validate .

The selected geometry rotates according to the input value, around an axis passing through the center of the Red ring handle and perpendicular to it.

2. Or / and enter an angle in the Green field and click Validate .

The selected geometry rotates according to the input value, around an axis passing through the center of the Green ring handle and perpendicular to it .


Or

The selected geometry rotates according to the two input values.

3. Or / and enter an angle in the Blue field and click Validate .

The selected geometry rotates according to the input value, around an axis passing through the center of the Blue ring handle and perpendicular to it.


Or

The selected geometry rotates according to the three input values.

Tip: Instead of clicking Validate , you can also press Enter .

Caution:

A value, once input in a field, will be not reset (to zero) once the transformation is applied. You have to manually reset this value to zero.

Any transformation can be applied if all of the fields are set to zero. The

Validate icon becomes dimmed.

Note: A value can be either negative or positive.

Move a Geometry by Picking Entities

You can pan (or rotate) a geometry along (or around) another geometry axis

(or point).

1 - Pick Axis From Other Geometry and Pan

2 - Pick Axis From Other Geometry and Rotate

3 - Pick Point from Other Geometry and Rotate

4 - Pick a Plane and Pan


Pick an Axis from Other Geometry, then Pan

To Pick an Axis from Other Geometry, then Pan: the icon. The cursor takes the shape shown in [C1]. This means that you are in the axis picking mode.

2. Place the cursor over an object [C1].

3. Pick the object. The cursor takes its default state (Arrow); this means that you leave the picking mode and you are in the selection mode.

4. Select another object. A position manipulator (in blue) (in the picked object’s axis and having as origin its center) appears [C2].

5. Select the position manipulator. It turns to yellow. The direction along which you can pan the second object is in yellow and those (two) for which you cannot are in mauve.

6. Drag the position manipulator to pan the second object along the first object’s axis [C3].


Tip:

You can also select Pick Axis from Other Geometry and Pan from the popup menu.

With this tool, you can pan an object along its own axis or along another object’s axis. Only objects having an axis can be picked for panning purposes.

Note: To leave the picking mode, press Esc (or select Cancel Picking from the pop-up menu).


Pick an Axis from Other Geometry, then Rotate

To Pick an Axis From Other Geometry, then Rotate: the icon. The cursor takes the shape shown in [C1]. This means that you are in the picking mode.


3. Pick the object. A manipulator (perpendicular to the picked object’s axis (in dashed yellow) and having as origin its center) appears [C2]. The cursor takes its default state (Arrow); this means that you leave the picking mode and you are in the selection mode.

4. Select an object other than the one for which you have picked the axis.

5. Select the ring handle (in deep blue) by picking it. It turns to yellow.

6. Drag the ring handle to rotate the selected object (second) around the axis of the picked object (first) [C3].


Tip:

You can also select the Pick Axis from Other Geometry and Rotate icon from the pop-up menu.

In this manipulation mode, you can rotate an object around its own axis or around another object’s axis. Only objects having an axis can be picked for rotation.



Pick a Point from Other Geometry, then Rotate

To Pick a Point From Other Geometry, Then Rotate: the icon. The cursor takes the shape shown in [C1]. This means that you are in the point picking mode.


3. Pick the object. The cursor takes its default state (Arrow); this means that you leave the picking mode and you are in the selection mode.

4. Select another object by picking it. A manipulator appears [C2]. This manipulator has three rings (red, light blue and green) and has as origin the center of the picked object.

5. Select a ring handle by picking it. It turns to yellow. An axis passing the center of that ring handle and perpendicular to it appears. This axis has the color of the selected ring handle.

6. Drag the ring handle to rotate the second object around the axis of the second object (C3).


Tip: You can also select the Pick a Point from Other Geometry, then Rotate from the pop-up menu.


Pick a Plane, and then Pan

After selecting Pick Plane and Pan , the cursor takes the shape shown in

(A). This means that you are in the plane picking mode. After picking a point, it returns to its default shape (Arrow); this means that you are in the selection mode. With this tool, you can pan an object in a plane or along a plane’s axis.

[A]

Tip: You can also select Pick Plane and Pan from the pop-up menu.


Pick and Pan a Plane

1. Place the cursor over a plane (B1).


2. Pick the plane. The cursor takes its default state (Arrow); this means that you leave the picking mode and you are in the selection mode.

3. Select the same plane by picking it. A manipulator appears (B2). This manipulator has two axis handles (red and green) and a plane handle and has as origin the center of the picked plane.

4. Select an axis handle by picking it. It turns to yellow. The direction along which you can pan the plane is highlighted in yellow and those (two) for which you cannot are in mauve.

5. Drag the axis handle to pan the plane along the direction in yellow (B3).


6. Select the plane handle by picking it. It turns to yellow. The directions

(two) along which you can pan the object are highlighted in yellow and the one for which you cannot is in mauve.

7. Drag the plane handle to pan the plane along any of the two directions

(B4).

Pick a Plane and Select Another Object

1. Place the cursor over a plane (C1).


2. Pick the plane. The cursor takes its default state (Arrow); this means that you leave the picking mode and you are in the selection mode.

3. Select another object (plane or others) by picking it. A manipulator appears (C2). This manipulator has two axis handles (red and green) and a plane handle and has as origin the center of the picked object.

4. Select an axis handle by picking it. It turns to yellow. The direction along which you can pan the object is highlighted in yellow and those for which you cannot are in mauve.

5. Drag the axis handle to pan the object along the plane direction in yellow

(C3).




7. Drag the plane handle to pan the object along any of the plane directions

C4).

Pick and Select a Plane

1. Place the cursor over the selected plane (D1).


2. Pick the plane. A manipulator appears (D2). This manipulator has two axis handles (red and green) and a plane handle and has as origin the center of the picked plane.

3. Select an axis handle by picking it. It turns to yellow. The direction along which you can pan the plane is highlighted in yellow and those (two) for which you cannot are in mauve.

4. Drag the axis handle to pan the plane along the direction in yellow (D3).




6. Drag the plane handle to pan the plane along any of the two directions

(D4).

Picking a plane and selecting another object.

1. Place the cursor over a plane (E1).


2. Pick the plane. A manipulator appears (E2). This manipulator has two axis handles (red and green) and a plane handle and has as origin the center of the picked object.

3. Select an axis handle by picking it. It turns to yellow. The direction along which you can pan the object is highlighted in yellow and those for which you cannot are in mauve.

4. Drag the axis handle to pan the object along the plane direction in yellow

(E3).




6. Drag the plane handle to pan the object along any of the plane directions

(E4).

Move a Geometry Along a User Defined Vector

You can move a geometry along a vector that you have to define by your own.

1 - Move Geometry Using 2-Point Defined

Vector

2 - Align Geometry (Z Axis) Along 2-Point

Defined Vector

Note: You need select a geometry before choosing one of the above commands. Otherwise, they are dimmed. Each of the commands can be selected from the pop-up menu.


Move a Geometry Using a 2-Point Defined Vector

After choosing the Move Geometry using 2-Point Defined Vector icon, the cursor takes the shape shown in [A] and the Picking Parameters toolbar appears in 3D constraint mode. This means that you are in the point picking mode. After picking a point, it becomes as shown in [B]. This means that you need to pick to another point. After picking, it returns to its default shape

(Arrow); this means that you are in the selection mode. With this tool, you can pan a geometry by picking two points.

[A] [B]

1 - The first and second picked points 2 - The selected object is translated from the first picked point to the second picked point

Note: You can select Cancel Picking from the pop-up menu (or use the Esc key) to leave the Move Geometry using 2-Point Defined Vector tool.


Align a Geometry (Z-Axis) Along a 2-Point-Defined Axis

After choosing the Align Geometry (Z-Axis) along 2-Point-Defined Axis icon, the cursor takes the shape shown in [A] and the Picking Parameters toolbar appears in 3D constraint mode. This means that you are in the point picking mode. After picking a point, it becomes as shown in [B]. This means that you need to pick to another point. After picking, it returns to its default shape

(Arrow); this means that you are in the selection mode. With this tool, you can align an object’s Z-axis along two picked points.

[A] [B]

Note: You can select Cancel Picking from the pop-up menu (or use the Esc key) to leave the Align Geometry (Z-Axis) along 2-Point-Defined Axis tool.


Apply Constraints

Plane

After selecting a plane (before or after opening the tool), the Geometry Modifier

Tool toolbar becomes as shown below. There are seven types of constraints.

1 - Make Vertical

2 - Make Horizontal

3 - Make Parallel


5 - Pass Through Point

6 - Pass Through Axis

To Make a Plane Parallel/Perpendicular to an Entity/Plane/Direction: the / 3D Plane Tool / 3D Direction Tool .

To Pass a Plane Through a Point: the .

To Pass a Plane Through an Axis:

Pass through Axis . The 3D Axis Tool toolbar and its information box appear.

2. Do one of the following to define an axis:

Pick an axial entity,

Pick two points (free or constrained),

Pick

Enter axis parameters.

3. Validate the defined axis.

To Make a Plane Horizontal:

1. Select a plane.

Make Horizontal . Its Direction of Normal becomes parallel to the Z

Axis (or Elevation Axis )) but not necessary in the same direction.

To Make a Plane Vertical:

1. Select a plane.


2. Click . As the selected plane is defined by two vectors.

Applying this constraint will orientate the selected plane so that one of the vectors is parallel to the Z Axis (or Elevation Axis ) of the active coordinate frame.

Tip: All constraints can be selected from the pop-up menu.

Make Vertical

To Make Vertical:

1. Select a geometry. the icon. The selected geometry is moved so that its Direction of Axis is parallel to the Z-Axis of the Home frame.

Make Horizontal

To Make Horizontal:

1. Select a geometry. the icon. The selected geometry is moved so that its Direction of Axis is perpendicular to the Z-Axis of the Home frame.


Make Parallel





Define a plane,

Define a direction,









Define a plane,

Define a direction,






Pass Through an Axis

To Pass Through an Axis: the icon. The 3D Axis Tool toolbar as well as its information box appear.



Sphere

After selecting a sphere-shaped geometry (before or after opening the tool), the Geometry Modifier Tool toolbar becomes as shown below. There are four constraint types.

1 - Lock Radius

2 - Lock Center

3 - Lock Center on a Line

4 - Pass Through a Point


Lock a Radius






Lock a Center

To Lock a Center: the icon. The 3D Point Tool toolbar opens as well as it information box.


Lock a Center on a Line

To Lock a Center on a Line:

1. Click on the Lock Center on Line icon. The 3D Axis Tool toolbar opens.






Cylinder

After selecting a cylinder-shaped geometry (before or after opening the tool), the Geometry Modifier Tool toolbar becomes as shown below. There are six constraint types.

1 - Make Vertical

2 - Make Parallel


4 - Pass Axis Through a Point

5 - Lock Radius

6 - Fit to an Axis

7 - Make Secant to a Cylinder

To Apply a Constraint to a Cylinder:

1. Make a cylinder parallel/perpendicular to an entity/plane/direction (see the

3D Picking Tool / 3D Plane Tool / 3D Direction Tool ).

2. Or lock a cylinder radius (see the 3D Radius Tool ).

3. Or pass a cylinder axis through a point (see the 3D Point Tool ).

4. Or fit a cylinder axis (see the 3D Axis Tool ).

5. Or make a cylinder secant to a cylinder (see the 3D Secant Tool )

6. Or make a cylinder vertical. Its Direction of Axis becomes then parallel to the Z Axis (or Elevation Axis ) but not necessary in the same direction.


Make Vertical

To Make Vertical:



Make Parallel





Define a plane,

Define a direction,









Define a plane,

Define a direction,







Lock a Radius




Pick



Fix to an Axis

To Fix to an Axis:




Make Secant to a Cylinder

To Make Secant to a Cylinder: the icon. The 3D Secant Tool dialog as well as its information box appears.

2. Pick a cylinder.

3. If required, check Use Same Radius to set the same radius than the picked cylinder.

4. If required, check Use Given Angle and give a secant angle.

5. If required, click Perpendicular to have a 90° secant angle.

OK .

Entity used as constraint

Note that the Make Secant to Cylinder constraint type generates four subconstraint types according to the option(s) checked. only has been checked, you have the two following constraint types: Make Axis Secant to Axis and Lock

Radius . only has been checked and the given angle value is different to 90° and 270°, you have the two following constraint types: Make Axis Secant to Axis and Lock Angle with Direction . only has been checked and the given angle value is equal to 90° and 270°, you have the two following constraint types:

Make Axis Secant to Axis and Make Perpendicular to Direction .

Tools in the Modeling Module only has been checked and Perpendicular pressed-on, you have the two following constraint types: Make Axis

Secant to Axis and Make Perpendicular to Direction .

If the two options have been checked with an angle other than 90° or


Secant to Axis , Lock Radius and Lock Angle with Direction .

If the two options have been checked with an angle equal to 90° or


Secant to Axis , Lock Radius and Make Perpendicular to Direction .

If the two options are kept unchecked, you have the Make Axis

Secant to Axis constraint type.

Regular Cone

After selecting a cone-shaped geometry (before or after opening the tool), the

Geometry Modifier Tool toolbar becomes as shown below. There are three constraint types.

1 - Make Vertical

2 - Make Parallel

To Apply a Constraint to a Cone:


4 - Fit to an Axis

1. Make a cone parallel/perpendicular to an entity/plane/direction (see the 3D

Picking Tool / 3D Plane Tool / 3D Direction Tool ).

2. Or fit a cone axis (see the 3D Axis Tool ).

3. Or make a regular cone vertical. It Direction of Axis becomes then parallel and in the same direction than the Z Axis (or Elevation Axis ).


Make Vertical

To Make Vertical:



Make Parallel





Define a plane,

Define a direction,









Define a plane,

Define a direction,



Fix to an Axis

To Fix to an Axis:




Circular Torus

After selecting a circular torus-shaped geometry (before or after opening the tool), the Geometry Modifier Tool toolbar becomes as shown below. There are seven constraint types.

1 - Make Parallel

2 - Lock Center Line Radius


6 - Fit to Axis

3 - Lock Pipe Radius

4 - Align to Join to Existing Cylinder

7 - Align to two Existing Secant Cylinders of

Same Radius


Make Parallel





Define a plane,

Define a direction,









Define a plane,

Define a direction,



Fix to an Axis

To Fix to an Axis:




Lock a Pipe Radius

To Lock a Pipe Radius: the icon. The 3D Radius Tool toolbar opens as well as it information box.



Pick



Lock a Center Line Radius

To Lock a Center Line Radius: the icon. The 3D Radius Tool toolbar opens as well as it information box.


Pick a radial entity, two

Pick an axis and a point,



Aligning to Join to an Existing Cylinder

To Align to Join to an Existing Cylinder: the icon.



Aligning to Join to Two Secant cylinders of Same Radius

To Align to Join to Two Secant Cylinders of Same Radius:

1. Click icon.

2. Pick two existing cylinders. The result is null if the two picked cylinders are not secant or do not have the same diameter.


3D Point

After selecting a 3D point (before or after opening the tool), the Geometry

Modifier Tool toolbar becomes as shown below. There are two constraint types.

1 - Lock on Plane 2 - Lock to Line or Axis


Lock on a Plane




Lock to Line (or Axis)

To Lock on a Line (or Axis): the icon. The 3D Axis Tool toolbar opens with the Pick Axis Entity mode is set by default.



Segment

After selecting a segment (before or after opening the tool), the Geometry

Modifier Tool toolbar becomes as shown below. There are four constraint types.

1 - Make Vertical

2 - Lock on Plane

3 - Make Parallel

To Apply a Constraint to a Segment:


5 - Pass Axis Through Point

1. Make a segment parallel/perpendicular to an entity/plane/direction (see the 3D Picking Tool / 3D Plane Tool / 3D Direction Tool ).

2. Or lock a segment on a plane (see the 3D Plane Tool ).

3. Or pass a segment though a point (see the 3D Point Tool ).

4. Or make a segment vertical. Its Direction of Axis becomes then parallel to the Z Axis (or Elevation Axis )).


Make Vertical

To Make Vertical:


Lock on a Plane





Make Parallel





Define a plane,

Define a direction,









Define a plane,

Define a direction,







Extrusion

After selecting an extrusion (before or after opening the tool), the Geometry

Modifier Tool toolbar becomes as shown below. There are two constraint types.

1 - Make Vertical

2 - Make Parallel to Direction

2 - Make Perpendicular to Plane

To Apply Constraint to an Extruded Entity:

1. Make an extruded entity parallel to a direction (see the 3D Direction Tool ).

2. Or make an extruded entity perpendicular to a plane (see the 3D Plane

Tool ).

3. Or make an extruded entity vertical. Its Direction of Axis becomes then parallel to the Z Axis (or Elevation Axis )).


Make Vertical

To Make Vertical:




To Apply Constraints to a Rectangular Torus:

1. Select a rectangular torus. The Geometry Modifier Tool toolbar becomes as shown below. There are three constraint types (detailed below).

Align to Join to Two Existing Secant Boxes of Same Direction

2. Align to join two existing secant boxes of same section.

3. Click . The Geometry Modifier Tool toolbar closes by its own.

Tip:

Align to Join to Two Existing Secant Boxes of Same Direction constraint can also be selected from the pop-up menu.

Selecting a rectangular-torus-shaped geometry can be done before (or after) opening the Geometry Modifier Tool .




[A]

[B]














Tip:






Box

To Apply Constraints to a Box:

1. Select a box. The Geometry Modifier Tool toolbar becomes as shown below. There are three constraint types (detailed below).

1 - Make Parallel

2 - Stick to Plane

2. Make parallel to a direction.

3. Or project a box onto a plane.

3 - Make Secant to Box (With Same Section)

4. Or make secant to a box of same section.

Close . The Geometry Modifier Tool toolbar closes on its own.

Tip:


Selecting a box-shaped geometry can be done before (or after) opening the Geometry Modifier Tool .


Making Parallel to a Direction

To Make Parallel to a Direction:

1. Click . The Make Parallel toolbar opens with the By

Picking Entity tab selected by-default. In that tab, the Pick an Entity With

Direction is set by-default.


Pick an entity using the Pick an Entity With Direction tool in the By

Picking Entity tab.

Define a plane using available tools in the To a Plane tab*.

Define a direction using available tools in the To a Direction tab*.

The Normal Z (also called the Direction of the Height in the Property window) of the box is parallel** to the Direction of Axis of the picked entity (or to the

Direction of Normal of the defined plane or to the defined direction).

Note:

(*) First click on the corresponding tab.

(**) But not necessary in the same direction.

Projecting a Box onto a Plane

To Project a Box in a Plane: the icon. The cursor becomes as shown in [A].

2. Pick a plane. The selected box is projected on the picked plane [B]. The bottom side (of the box) lies on the plane.

[A]

[B]


The Direction of Normal (of the plane) [C] and the Direction of the Height (also called the Normal Z * of the box) [D] are parallel but not necessarily in the same direction. In the example below, both are opposite.

[C] [D]



Making Secant to a Box (With Same Section)

To Make Secant to a Box (With Same Section):

1. Click .

2. Pick a box having the same section as the selected one.

3. If the picked box does not have the same section, the " There is too much indetermination to activate this constraint: two boxes are identical, one of them is a cube or they have no common face " warning message appears.

Click OK.

The warning message closes and the Make Secant to a Box

(With Same Section) constraint is left.


Intersect Tool

Intersecting an entity with another entity is similar to bound the first with the second. Mainly entities of the following shapes (circular torus, cone, cylinder, extruded geometry, plane and sphere) can be intersected. The first entity will be modified after the intersection and the second entity remains unchanged.

Intersecting a series of entities together is similar to bound together. All will be modified after intersecting. The Intersect Tool can be used alone or inside main tools like the Cloud-Based Modeler Tool .

Open the Tool

No selection is required to open the tool. Once inside the tool, a selection must be carried out. In [A], the Intersect Tool opens as a toolbar when there is no input. In [B], the tool opens with an input.

[A]

1 - Connect a Geometry Sequence

[B]

2 - Close

1 - Extend to One Other

Geometry

To Open the Tool:

2 - Extend Between Two Other

Geometries

3 - Switch to Other Side

1. Select an entity from the Project Tree if required. the menu, select Intersect Tool . The Intersect Tool toolbar appears.

Tip:

You can also click on the Intersect Tool icon in the Tools toolbar.

All commands can be selected from the pop-up menu.


Extend to One Other Geometry

To Extend to One Other Geometry:

1. Click on the " Extend to One Other Geometry " icon.

2. Pick an entity in the 3D View .

Some constraints may be observed when intersecting entities together. They are detailed hereafter.

A warning appears if no intersection has been found.

3. If required, click on the " Switch to Other Side " icon*.

Note: (*) For some entities, you are able to switch to the other side of the intersection. For others, this cannot be done as the icon remains grayed out.

Cylinder

A Cylinder can only be intersected with:

A of same radius, when it joins the Cylinder ,

A of same radius,

A with secant and same radius.

A ,.

A , when its center is on the Cylinder axis.


Cylinder With Cylinder

When intersecting two Cylinders together; both Cylinders need to have secant axes and same radius. If these prerequisites are not observed; open the

Geometry Modifier Tool (on page 987) and apply the Lock Radius and Make

Perpendicular (or Make Secant to Cylinder) constraints.

Cylinder With Sphere

When intersecting a Cylinder with a Sphere (or vice versa); the Sphere ’s center needs to be on the cylinder’s axis. If this prerequisite is not observed; open the

Geometry Modifier Tool (on page 987) and apply the constraint below:

Lock Center on Line to the Sphere when intersecting it with the Cylinder ,

Pass Axis through Point to the Cylinder when intersecting it with the

Sphere .


Cylinder With Circular Torus

When intersecting a Cylinder with a Circular Torus (or vice versa); the Cylinder needs to have the same radius as the Circular Torus . If this prerequisite is not observed; open the Geometry Modifier Tool (on page 987) and apply the Align to Join to Existing Cylinder constraint to the Torus .

Cylinder With Cone

When intersecting a Cylinder with a Cone (or vice versa); both need to have the same axis. If this prerequisite is not observed; open the Geometry Modifier

Tool (on page 987) and apply the constraint below:

Make Parallel and Fit to Axis to the Cylinder when intersecting it with the

Cone ,

Make Parallel and Fit to Axis to the Cone when intersecting it with the

Cylinder .


Sphere

A Sphere can only be intersected with:

A , when the Sphere center is on its axis,

A parallel to the Sphere existing bound (if any).

Plane

A Plane can only be intersected with:

A , when the Plane contains its axis.

A with a collinear axis,

A ,

An with a collinear axis,

A ,

A , the Plane is parallel to its existing bound (if any).

Plane With Circular Torus

When intersecting a Plane with a Circular Torus (or vice versa); the Plane needs to contain the Circular Torus axes. If this prerequisite is not observed; open the Geometry Modifier Tool (on page 987) and apply the constraint Pass

Through Axis to the Plane .


Plane With Extruded Entity

When intersecting a Plane with an Extrusion (or vice versa); both need to have collinear axes. If this prerequisite is not observed; open the Geometry Modifier

Tool (on page 987) and apply the constraint below:

Make Parallel to Direction to the Extrusion when intersecting it with the

Plane ,

Make Perpendicular to the Plane when intersecting it with the Extrusion .


Plane With Sphere

When intersecting a Plane with a Sphere ((or vice versa); the Plane needs to be parallel to the Sphere existing bound. If this prerequisite is not observed; open the Geometry Modifier Tool (on page 987) and apply the constraint below:

Pass Through Point to the Plane when intersecting it with the Sphere ,

Lock Center or Pass Through Point to the Sphere when intersecting it with the Plane .

Cone

A Cone can only be intersected with:

A with same axis,

A with same axis,

A with collinear axis.


Cone With Cone

When intersecting two Cones together; both need to have the same axis. If this prerequisite is not observed; open the Geometry Modifier Tool (on page 987) and apply the Fit to Axis constraint.

Cone With Plane

When intersecting a Cone with a Plane (or vice versa); both need to have collinear axes. If this prerequisite is not observed; open the Geometry Modifier

Tool (on page 987) and apply the Make Perpendicular constraint to either the

Cone or the Plane .


Circular Torus

A Circular Torus can only be intersected with:

A of same radius when the Circular Torus joins it.

A containing its axis.

Box

A Box can only be intersected with:

A of same section,

A not passing through the Box center.


A Rectangular Torus can only be intersected with:

A of same section when the Rectangular Torus joins it,

A containing its axis.

Extrusion

An Extrusion can only be intersected with a Plane .

3D Point

A 3D Point cannot be intersected with any entity.

Line

A Line cannot be intersected with any entity.


Extend Between Two Other Geometries

To Extend Between Two Other Geometries:

1. Click on the " Extend to One Other Geometry " icon.

2. Pick the first entity used to extend the selection in the 3D View .

3. Pick the second entity used to extend the selection in the 3D View .

Some constraints may be observed when intersecting entities together. They are detailed hereafter.

A warning appears if no intersection has been found.

4. If required, click on the Switch to Other Side icon*.

Caution: You cannot switch to the other side of an intersection when you extend an entity between two other ones.

Cylinder

A Cylinder can only be intersected with two entities of type:

A of same radius, when they join the Cylinder ,

A of same axis,

A with secant and same radius,

A .

Sphere

A Sphere can only be intersected with two Planes parallel to the Sphere existing bound (if any).

Plane

A Plane can only be intersected with two Planes .

Cone

A Cone can only be interested with two entities of type:

Cone (s) with same axis,

Cylinder (s) with same axis,

Plane (s) with collinear axis.


Circular Torus

A Circular Torus can only be intersected with two Cylinders of same radius, when the Circular Torus joins them.

Box

A Box can only be intersected with two entities of type:

Rectangular Torus of same section, when they join the Box .

Plane .


A Rectangular Torus can only be intersected with two Boxes of same section, when the Rectangular Torus joins them.

Extrusion

An Extrusion can only be intersected with two Planes .

3D Point

A 3D Point cannot be intersected with any entities.

Line

A Line cannot be intersected with any entities.

Connect to a Series of Entities

Use the " Connect to Geometry Sequence " feature to intersect a series of entities together. This is very useful for connecting a series of pipes together.

To Connect to a Series of Entities:

1. Display entities to intersect in the 3D View .

2. Click icon.

3. Pick an entity. The cursor becomes as shown below.

4. Pick another entity and so on.


Connect a Plane to a Series of Planes

You can also use the " Connect Geometry Sequence " feature to intersect a plane with a series of planes.

To Connect a Plane to a Series of Planes:

1. Display a series of planes in the 3D View . the icon.

3. Pick anywhere in the 3D View except on the displayed planes.

4. Press key. The cursor shape becomes as shown below.

5. Pick a plane to bound. It becomes selected.


6. Pick a series of planes which is going to be used as bounds.

Caution: Planes used as bounds need to be picked in order in any direction

(clockwise or anti-clockwise).


Switch to Other Side

The intersection of an entity with another entity is similar to bound the first with the second, in a given direction. The Switch to Other Side feature changes this bounding direction to the opposite as illustrated below.



Duplicator Tool

The Duplicator Tool enables to duplicate a geometry along (or around) a path defined by the user. A path can be a line, a circle or a combination of both

(called Polyline ). This tool requires a selection as input. If the input is an object from the database (already created), the tool can be used as a main tool.

When the object is being created, the tool is a sub-tool inside a main tool like e.g. the Geometry Creator Tool .

Open the Tool

To Open the Tool:

1. Select a geometry from the Project Tree . the menu, select Duplicator Tool . The Duplicator dialog opens as the third tab of the WorkSpace window.

Tip: You can also click on the Duplicator Tool icon in the Tools toolbar.

Choose a Duplication Method

There are three duplication methods: Along a Line , Around an Axis and Along a Polyline . Inside each method, you need to define a path along (or around) which the duplication will be carried out. The method which comes first is the one set during the last use of that tool.

To Choose a Duplication Method: the panel, click on the pull-down arrow. among (see "Define a Line" on page 1069), Around an Axis (see "Define a Circle" on page 1073) and Along a Polyline (see

"Define a Polyline" on page 1077) from the drop-down list.

Tip: All duplication methods can be selected from the pop-up menu. First select Choose Type of Path .


Define a Line

Before defining a path, Step 2 of the Duplicator dialog takes the appearance shown below in [A]. After defining a path, the Select Global Frame for

Manipulator icon becomes enabled; it enables to switch from a one-handle manipulator to a three-handle manipulator (see [B]).

[A] [B]

3 - Select Global Frame for Manipulator 1 - Draw Line by Defining Two Points

2 - 3D Direction Tool

To Define a Line:

1. Define a line by picking two points.

2. Or define a 3D direction.

Tip: The Select Global Frame for Manipulator can also be selected from the pop-up menu.


Draw a Line by Defining Two Points

The Draw Line by Defining Two Points icon (set by-default) enables to define a path of segment shape by picking two points. The first point is always at the center of the selected item. The second point with the first point defines a path used for duplication.

To Define Two Points:

1. Click on the Draw Line by Defining Two Points icon. The Picking


2. Pick a point (free or constrained) on displayed items. A Red Line linking the first picked point to the cursor appears. This Red Line has a label in red showing the distance from the first picked point to the cursor’s current position.

3. Pick another point (free or constrained), always on displayed items.

1 - The selected item 2 - The second picked point


1 - Manipulator 4 - Duplicated items

The distance between the two picked points sets the Step value (see Step 3 of the Duplicator dialog). The selected item is duplicated according to the parameters set in Step 3 along the defined path. The last duplicated item has a

Manipulator and an End label at its center.

Tip: The Draw Line by Defining Two Points icon can also be selected from the pop-up menu.


Define a 3D Direction

The 3D Direction Tool icon enables to define a 3D direction.

To Define a 3D Direction:

1. Click on the 3D Direction Tool icon. The 3D Direction Tool toolbar appears as well as its information box and a yellow dotted direction.

2. Define a 3D direction and validate it.

1 - The selected item 2 - The defined direction

3 - The one-handle manipulator 4 - The duplicated items


A Red Line starting from the selected item and running parallel to the defined

3D direction appears. The selected item is duplicated according to the parameters set in Step 3 along the defined path. The last duplicated item has a

Manipulator and an End label at its center.

Tip: The 3D Direction Tool can also be selected from the pop-up menu.

Define a Circle

After choosing Around an Axis , you need to indicate the displacement mode for duplication by checking either the All Parallel option or the All Rotated option.

Step 2 of the Duplicator dialog becomes as shown below.

1 - Draw Circle by Defining its Center

To Define a Circle:

2 - 3D Axis Tool

1. Draw a circle by defining its center.

2. Or define a 3D axis.

This Red Circle may have two shapes (dotted and/or continuous arc) with an arrow as duplication direction. The initial item is duplicated around that Red

Circle according to the parameters in Step 3 .

If All Parallel has been checked, all newly duplicated items have the same direction as the first one.

If All Rotated has been checked, each newly duplicated item has its own direction. The initial (selected) item still remains selected and the last duplicated item has an End label at its center.


Draw a Circle by Defining its Center

The Draw Circle by Defining its Center icon (set by-default) enables to define a circular path by its circle. This circular path has as Normal the direction perpendicular to screen view.

To Draw a Circle by Defining its Center:

1. If required, bring the scene to the Top view.

2. Click . The Picking Parameters toolbar appears in the 3D constraint mode. The cursor takes the shape shown below. A Red Circle in the screen plane appears. It has as Origin the cursor current position and passes through the initial item's center.

3. Pick a point (free or constrained) anywhere - not necessary on displayed items.

The selected item


2 - Duplicated items 1 - The two handle manipulator

Tip: The Draw Circle by Defining its Center can also be selected from the popup menu.


Define a 3D Axis

The 3D Axis Tool icon enables to define an axis which will be used the Normal direction of a circular path.

To Define a 3D Axis:

1. Click on the 3D Axis Tool icon. The 3D Axis Tool toolbar appears as well as the 3D Axis Tool information box.

2. Define a 3D axis. A Red and Dotted Segment appears.

3. Validate the 3D axis. The Red and Dotted Segment disappears. A Red

Circle appears with a Red and Green Manipulator along and in the middle of the defined axis.

3 - Duplicated items

4 - Manipulator

1 - The selected item

2 - The defined direction

Tip: The 3D Axis Tool icon can also be selected from the pop-up menu.


Define a Polyline

Before selecting (or defining) a polyline, Step 2 of the Duplicator dialog takes the appearance shown in [A]. After selecting (or defining) a polyline, Pick on the Wanted Position of the Start of the Path and Reload the Start to its Initial

Value become active (see [B]).

[A] [B]

1 - Select Polyline

2 - Create Polyline to Define Path

3 - Pick on the Wanted Position of the Start of the Path

4 - Reload the Start to its Initial Value

To Define a Polyline:

1. Select an existing polyline.

2. Or create a new polyline.

3. Enter a value distance value in the Start field. click . the and pick a point on the selected/drawn polyline. The Start position changes on the path.

6. If required, get back the Start position by clicking Reload the Start

Position .

The initial (selected) item is duplicated according to the parameters set in Step

3 along the defined path (in red). Starting a new polyline selection (or a new polyline drawing) will undo the duplication. Duplicated items except the initial

(selected) one are removed from the 3D View .


Selecting a Polyline

The Select Polyline icon enables to select a path of segment (or a combination of segment and circular arc) shape - mainly polyline - if present in your project.


1. Click . The cursor takes the shape as shown below.

2. Pick a polyline to select it.

1 - The selected item 2 - An existing polyline 3 - The duplicated items

A red path of the same shape as the polyline starting from the initial item’s center appears. The Start and End positions on the path are indicated with a label. It’s up to you to change the Start position.

Tip: The Select Polyline icon can also be selected from the pop-up menu.


Creating a Polyline

The Create Polyline to Define Path icon enables to draw and create a polyline.

To Create a Polyline:

1. Click . The Drawing and Picking


2. Draw a polyline by picking points (free or constrained).

3. Validate the polyline.

4 - The drawn polyline

5 - The duplicated items

1 - The selected item

2 - The first picked point

3 - The first second point

A red path of the same shape as the polyline starting from the initial item’s center appears. The Start and End positions on the path are indicated with a label. It’s up to you to change the Start position.

Tip: The Create Polyline to Define Path icon can also be selected from the pop-up menu.


Resize a Path

You can use the Manipulator to resize the path previously defined. If the path is a Red Circle , the Manipulator has two Axis Handles ( Red and Green ) and on

Plane Handle . You can enlarge (or reduce) the Red Circle 's diameter by displacing its center in a direction using an Axis Handle or in an arbitrary position using the Plane Handle . For both, the displacement is done on the

Red Circle 's plane.

If the path is a Red Line , the Manipulator has only one Axis Handle ( Green ).

You can extend (or shorten) the Red Line along the defined direction by using the Handle Axis . But you can also use the Select Global Frame for Manipulator which has three Axis Handles ( Green , Red and Blue ) and three Plane Handles .

In that case, you extend (or shorten) the Red Line not along the defined path but along the direction indicates by the Axis Handle or on the plane defined by a pair of Axis Handle . If the path is a Red Polyline , there is no Manipulator .

Note: If you start defining a new path; this cancels the current duplication.

Duplicated items except the selected item are removed from the 3D View .

Define Parameters

There are three sets of parameters available for duplicating items: Step &

Quantity , Step & Length and Length & Quantity . The Step parameter corresponds to the distance (or angle) between two successive items. The

Length corresponds to the distance (or angle) from the Start position to the

End position.

To Define Parameters:

1. In panel, click on the pull-down arrow. among (see "Define the "Step & Quantity"

Parameters" on page 1081), Step & Length (see "Define the "Step &

Length" Parameters" on page 1082) and Length & Quantity (see "Define the "Length & Quantity" Parameters" on page 1083).


Define the "Step & Quantity" Parameters

After choosing Step & Quantity , Step 3 of the Duplicator dialog changes its appearance according to the duplication method set in Step 1 .

Along a Line (or Along a Polyline) Around an Axis

To Define the Step & Quantity Parameters:

1. Enter a number in the Quantity field.

2. Or ) to set a value in the Quantity field.

3. If (or Along a Polyline ) has been selected, enter a distance value in the Step field.

Around an Axis has been selected, enter an angular value in the Step field. click .

6. Go to the 3D View and pick a point on the path.

Note: The Length value is automatically updated according to the value set in the Quantity (or Step ) field.


Define the "Step & Length" Parameters

After choosing Step & Length , Step 4 of the Duplicator dialog changes its appearance according to the duplication method selected in Step 1 .


To Define the Step & Length Parameters:

1. If / Along a Polyline (or Around an Axis ) has been selected, enter a distance (or angular) value in the Step field. click .


4. If / Along a Polyline (or Around an Axis ) has been selected, enter a distance (or angular) value in the Step field. click .


7. If required, click Reload the Path Length to its Initial Value .

Note: The Quantity value is automatically updated according to the value set in the Step (or Length ) field.


Define the "Length & Quantity" Parameters

After choosing Length & Quantity , Step 3 of the Duplicator dialog changes its appearance according to the duplication type selected in Step 1 .


To Define the Length & Quantity Parameters:

1. Enter a number in the Quantity field.

2. Or ) to set a value in the Quantity field.

3. If (or Along a Polyline ) has been selected, enter a distance value in the Length field.

Around an Axis has been selected, enter an angular value in the Length field. click .

6. Go to the 3D View and pick a point* on the path.

7. If required, click Reload the Path Length to Its Initial Value .

Note:

The value is automatically updated according to the value set in the

Quantity (or Length ) field.

(*) To leave the picking mode, select Cancel Picking from the pop-up menu or use Esc . Outside the picking mode, use Esc to leave the

Duplicator Tool .

Reverse the Path Direction

You can use Invert Path Direction to reverse the duplication direction. If Along a Line has been selected, the End position will be moved at the opposite end along the path. If Around an Axis has been selected, the End position remains in the same position but the duplication direction changes. If Along a Polyline has been selected, the Start and End positions are inverted.

Tip: Invert Path Direction can also be selected from the pop-up menu.


Duplicate Items

After defining a path and setting parameters, you can create the duplicated items as persistent objects in the database. All are gathered in a folder named

Duplication which is put under the active group. Each duplicated item has the name set in the Name Prefix field with an order.

If a name has been entered in the Name Prefix field, each duplicated item has the name set in the field with an order. If no name has been entered in the field, each duplicated item is named as follows: Copy of

"Selected_Entity_Name" with an order between parentheses.

Note: You can duplicate as many items as required without leaving the

Duplicator Tool .


Plane Bounding Tool

The Plane Bounding Tool is dedicated to plane modifications. We mean by this you can modify an existing plane bounds, define new ones, create holes, etc.

This tool is based on polyline drawing and editing like the Polyline Drawing

Tool . It requires a selection as input data (mainly a plane from the database

(already created)) when used alone as a main tool or is based on local objects

(not yet created in the database) when used as a sub-tool in e.g. the Cloud-

Based Modeler Tool .


Open the Tool

To Open the Tool:

1. Select a plane from the Project Tree . the menu, select Plane Bounding Tool . The Plane

Bounding Tool and Picking Parameters (in the 2D constraint picking mode) toolbars are displayed.

1 - Selection Mode 3 - Draw Rectangle 5 - Select Polyline

2 - Change Mode 4 - Draw Circle 6 - Close Tool

In the Examiner (or Walkthrough ) mode, the 3D scene is locked in 2D in the selected plane and is brought to the Top view with a 2D grid superimposed (if displayed previously). The Selection Mode and Change Mode are respectively set in the deactivate and line state. The cursor is as shown below and the selected plane is displayed with its bounds (a polyline of the same shape in dotted line and is of blue color).

1 - 2D Grid

2 - The selected plane

3 - The bounding polyline

4 - The cursor


In Station-Based mode, the 3D scene is viewed from the first station viewpoint

(the first in the Project Tree ) with overlapped images in the background (if existed).


Modify the selected plane bounds,

Select an existing polyline for bounding,

Draw a new polyline for bounding.

Tip: You can also click on the Plane Bounding Tool icon in the Tools toolbar.

Modify the Selected Plane Bounds

The selected plane is displayed with its bounds: a polyline of the selected plane’s shape in dotted line and of blue color. Editing the selected plane bounds is similar to editing a bounding polyline.

To Modify the Selected Plane Bounds:

1. Edit a bounding polyline.

2. Delete a bounding polyline.

3. Move a bounding polyline.

4. Apply the bounds.

5. Validate the bounds.


Select an Existing Polyline for Bounding

If you have a closed polyline in your project; you can use it for bounding purposes. The polyline doesn't need to be selected first but it needs to be displayed in the 3D View.

To Select a Polyline for Bounding:

1. Click . The 3D scene becomes free from the 2D lock.

The 2D Grid (if displayed) is hidden. The Picking Parameters toolbar is hidden.

2. In , pick a polyline.

If the polyline is unclosed; an error message appears. Click OK to close the error message.

If the polyline is closed; an editable polyline (in green) superimposes to it. The 3D scene is locked again in 2D. The 2D Grid is displayed.

The Picking Parameters toolbar (in 2D constraint mode) is displayed.


Edit a bounding polyline.

Move a bounding polyline.

Delete a bounding polyline.

Apply the bounds.


Note:

Press to leave the Select Polyline mode.

Selecting another polyline will cancel the current one.

Tip: You can also choose Select Polyline the pop-up menu.


Draw a New Polyline for Bounding

A bounding polyline can be composed of only segments or a combination of segments and circular arcs. It needs to be of closed shape and all of its nodes have to be on the selected plane. You can only define one bounding polyline; this differs from the Polyline Drawing Tool where you can draw a set of polylines.

To Draw a New Polyline for Bounding:


Draw a polygonal polyline.

Draw a rectangular polyline.

Draw a circular polyline.

2. Edit a bounding polyline, if required.

3. Move a bounding polyline, if required.

4. Delete a bounding polyline, if required.

5. Apply the bounds.



Draw a Polygonal Polyline

To Draw a Polygonal Polyline:

1. Pick a point to start the first node of a polyline.

2. Pick another point. A segment links these two points.


4. Choose .

5. Pick another point. The newly picked point is linked to the previous picked point by an arc.


Change Mode to Line .

8. Pick another point. The newly picked point is linked to the previous picked point by a segment.

9. Continue picking in order to define the other nodes of the polyline.


11. Select to end and close the polyline. The start node is linked to the last selected node.

Note:

Double-click to end drawing. The polyline is closed.

Picking can be free or constrained on displayed objects or not.

Tip:


You can switch from the line drawing mode to the arc drawing mode and conversely as often as you wish by pressing respectively the L and C keys on your keyboard.

Out of the picking mode, press Esc to quit the Plane Bounding Tool . Or select Close Tool from the pop- up menu.

Note: What happens if you press Esc while you are picking points. If at least three points (for segments) (or two (for an arc)) have been picked, then the polygonal polyline will be closed and validated.


Draw a Rectangular Polyline

To Draw a Rectangular Polyline:

1. Click on the Draw Rectangle pull-down arrow. between and Draw

Rectangle by Defining 3 Points .

If has been chosen: a) Pick a point. b) Pick another point. The segment, linking the new point to the previous one, defines a diagonal of a rectangle.

If has been chosen: a) Pick a point. b) Pick another point. The segment, linking the new point to the previous point, defines the first side of a rectangle. c) Pick another point. The segment, linking the new point to the previous point, defines the second side of the rectangle and is perpendicular the first one.

Note: Picking can be free or constrained on displayed objects or not.


Note: What happens if you press Esc while you are picking points. Nothing occurs. The rectangular polyline in progress is then cancelled.


Draw a Circular Polyline

To Draw a Circular Polyline:

1. Click on the Draw Circle pull-down arrow. between and Draw

Circle by Defining the Middle Point and the Radius .

If has been chosen: a) Pick a point. b) Pick another point. The segment, linking the new point to the previous one, defines a diameter of a circle.

If has been chosen: a) Pick a point. This point defines the center of a circle. b) Pick another point. These two points form the radius of the circle.

Note: Picking can be free or constrained on displayed objects or not.

Note: What happens if you press Esc while you are picking points. Nothing occurs. The circular polyline in progress is then cancelled.


Edit a Bounding Polyline

You can edit the bounding polyline of a selected plane after opening the Plane

Bounding Tool , one selected using the Select Polyline command or one defined using the drawing tools ( Draw Rectangle , Draw Circle , etc.).

Editing means to change the bounding polyline shape by moving, deleting, inserting a node, deleting the whole bounding polyline, etc. When you place the cursor over a segment of a polyline, you may see the following symbols: for nodes, for middle nodes and for middle nodes to be inserted. When the cursor is over an arc of a polyline; only for nodes are available.


Delete a Node

To Delete a Node:

1. Place the cursor over a node. A solid square appears over the node.

2. Right-click to display the pop-up menu and select Delete Node .

If the node is shared by two segments, the two segments will be deleted and replaced by a segment.

If the node is shared by two arcs; the two arcs will be deleted and replaced by a segment.

Tip: You can press Del on your keyboard instead of selecting Delete Node from the pop-up menu.

Note: Nothing occurs if you delete a node that is along a segment.


Move a Node

To Move a Node:

1. Place the cursor over a node. A solid square appears on the node.

2. Drag and drop the node to a new location. The green square turns to yellow during this operation.

If the node at the end of two segments, the node will be moved and the two segments will be extended.

If the node at the middle of a segment, the whole segment will be moved.

Tip: Picking a point anywhere on a segment except on the End and Middle nodes (or on an arc except on the End node) will transform that point to a node.


Inserting a Middle Node

To Insert a Middle Node:

1. Place the cursor anywhere on a segment (except at the End and Middle nodes) or on an arc (except at the end nodes). A hollow square appears on the segment at the cursor position.

2. Right-click to display the pop-up menu and select Insert Middle Node . A new Middle node is inserted not at the picking position but at the middle of the segment (or arc).

Delete a Bounding Polyline

You can delete a bounding polyline when the drawing is in progress or after selecting one (using Select Polyline ). You cannot delete the bounding polyline of the selected plane.

To Delete the Current Bounding Polyline:

Select from the pop-up menu.

To Delete All Bounding Polylines:

1. Click . The 3D scene becomes free from the 2D lock.

The 2D Grid (if displayed) is hidden.

2. In , pick a polyline.

3. Click .


Activate/Deactivate the Selection Mode

You need to activate the Selection Mode to be able to move a bounding polyline. The Selection Mode is applied to the last drawn (or selected) bounding polyline if one has been drawn (or selected) or to the selected plane’s bounding polyline if any has been drawn (or selected). A manipulator appears over the bounding polyline.

To Activate/ Deactivate the Selection Mode:

1. Click to active this mode. again to deactivate this mode.

Tip: The Selection Mode icon can also be selected from the pop-up menu.


Move a Bounding Polyline

You can use Pan and Rotate for moving a bounding polyline within the selected plane.

Change Move Mode

To Move a Bounding Polyline:


2. Choose and Rotate .

If has been chosen, a distance manipulator is displayed. It has as origin the current bounding polyline’s center.

Rotate has been chosen, a rotation manipulator is displayed. It has as origin the current bounding polyline’s center.

3. Move the bounding polyline within the selected plane.

Tip: You can also select Pan (or Rotate ) from the pop-up menu. Just first select Change Move Mode .

Note: After choosing Selection Mode , the Change Move Mode icon becomes enabled. The moving mode which comes first is the last used one


Apply the Bounds

In Set as External Curve , the bounding polyline previously defined is used as contouring bounds for the selected plane. Only one bounding polyline can be set as an external curve at once. In Create Hole , the bounding polyline is used as excavating bounds for the selected plane. This feature can be applied to several bounding polylines at once.

1 - Create Hole

To Apply Bounds:

2 - Set as External Curve

1. Define a bounding polyline as previously described. between and Create Hole .


1 - The defined bounding 2 - External curve set 3 - Hole created polyline

Tip: The Set as External Curve and Create Hole icons can also be selected from the pop-up menu.


Validate the Bounds

After applying bounds, the Set as External Curve , Create Hole and Delete All

Temporary icons are grayed out and the Validate Plane Modification becomes enabled as well as the Change Mode , Draw Rectangle and Draw Circle icons.

Validate Plane Modification

You can start drawing a new bounding polyline if required. Validating a modification will not create a new entity in database. You can see the number of created holes in the Property window (if opened).

Tip:

You can also select Validate Plane Modification and Close Tool from the pop-up menu.

For , you can use its related short-cut key ( Esc ).


Change a Pipe Diameter

You are able to change the diameter of one (or more) selected cylinder(s) and/or circular torus.

To Change a Pipe Diameter:

1. Select a set of cylinders and/or circular torus from the Models Tree . the menu, select Change Pipe Diameter . The Change Pipe

Diameter dialog opens. the field, input a new value.

4. Click . The Change Pipe Diameter dialog closed. The new value is then applied to all selected cylinders and/or circular torus

Note: For a circular torus, the pipe diameter cannot be larger than the center line diameter. If you input a value that leads to such a case, an error message is then displayed.

1 - Center line diameter 2 - Pipe diameter


Export a Geometry to SketchUp

You can export the following geometries, created within RealWorks , toward

SketchUp Pro : 3D point, segment, polyline, composite curve, ellipse, circular arc, plane, plane with holes, extrusion, cylinder, circular torus, rectangular torus, box, pyramid, full sphere, regular cone and eccentric cone. When you select a group (or a project), all geometries in the group (or in the project) will be exported toward SketchUp .

To Export a Geometry to SketchUp: open by clicking .

2. Select a geometry from the Models Tree (or from the 3D View ).

3. From menu, select Export to SketchUp .

Tip: You can also select Export to SketchUp from the pop-up menu.

If the selection is a group (or a project), and if there is a mesh in the group (or the project), an error message is then displayed. It warns you that the mesh in the selection cannot be exported toward SketchUp .

Caution: The Export to SketchUp feature remains grayed-out for two reasons.

First is when no session of SketchUp has been open (from RealWorks ).

Second is when you select an entity for which the feature is not enabled.

Note: An error message appears when you try to export an entity to SketchUp while its Welcome to SketchUp dialog is still open.

Note: This feature requires the installation of SketchUp Pro on your computer.

If you have SketchUp Make instead, a message appears and warns that this feature is not compatible with SketchUp Make .

1107

Sub-Tools

There are no direct entry for sub-tools. All of them can only be open within a main tool to perform basic operations such as editing or transforming an existing shape or a shape to create. There is no creation anymore


3D Picking Tool

The 3D Picking Tool is a tool for picking entities with direction. It only appears when you apply constraints to object manipulation. When using the Make

Parallel (or Make Perpendicular ) constraint, the 3D Picking Tool opens as a tab of the Make Perpendicular (or Make Parallel ) toolbar with the Pick Entity with

Direction mode set by-default (see [A]). When the Make Parallel to Plane or

Lock on Plane constraint has been applied to object manipulation; Pick Entity with Direction appears in the 3D Plane Tool opens as shown in [B]*. When the

Make Perpendicular to Direction constraint has been applied to object manipulation; the 3D Direction Tool opens as shown in [C]*.

The 3D Picking Tool information at the top right corner of the 3D View is empty of information. The Make Perpendicular (or Make Parallel ) toolbar contains three tabs detailed below. When this toolbar appears; the By Picking Entity tab comes first. All these constraints can be found in tools like Geometry Modifier ,

Cloud-Based Modeler , etc.

[A]

[B]

[C]

1 - Pick Entity With Direction

Note:

2 - Cancel

To leave the Pick Entity with Direction mode, press Esc or select Cancel

Picking from the pop-up menu.

(*) In the Examiner (or Walkthrough ) navigation mode.


Pick an Entity with Direction

To Pick an Entity with Direction:

1. Select an entity from the Project Tree (or in the 3D View ). The Make

Perpendicular (or Make Parallel ) becomes active.

Pick Entity with Direction if required.

3. Click a point on a displayed entity.

If has been chosen, the selected entity will be parallel to the picked entity.

If has been chosen, the selected entity will be perpendicular to the picked entity.

4. Click . The Make Perpendicular (or Make Parallel ) toolbar closes.

1 - The selected entity

2 - The picked entity

3 - The selected entity is parallel to the picked entity

Note: When picking a plane as constraint, the entity in selection will be parallel

(or perpendicular) not to the plane’s normal direction but to the plane itself.


Tip: You can also select Pick Entity with Direction and Cancel from the pop-up menu. For Cancel , you can press Esc .


3D Direction Tool

The 3D Direction Tool allows you to define 3D primitives of linear shape (only direction). This tool appears when applying constraints to object manipulation.

When using the Make Perpendicular or Make Parallel constraint, the 3D

Direction Tool opens as a tab of the Make Perpendicular (or Make Parallel ) toolbar with the X-axis* mode set by-default (see [A]). The Make Perpendicular

(or Make Parallel ) toolbar contains three tabs detailed below. When this toolbar appears; the By Picking Entity tab comes first.

To use the 3D Direction Tool , you need to click on the To Direction tab. A 3D direction in yellow and dotted appears. To use the tool fully, you need to have objects selected and displayed. When the Make Perpendicular to Direction constraint has been applied to object manipulation; the 3D Direction Tool opens as shown in [B]. The 3D Direction Tool information box at the top right corner of the 3D View displays the current 3D direction (default or drawn) parameters. These constraints can be found in tools like Geometry Modifier ,

Cloud-Based Modeler , etc.

[A]

[B]

1 - X*, Y and Z* Axis

2 - Pick Two Points

3 - Pick Two Planes

4 - Pick Two Screen Points

5 - Edit Parameters

6 - Validate

7 - Cancel

8 - Pick Entity With Direction

Tip: All direction definition modes can be selected from the pop-up menu or using available short-cut key ( Space Bar for Validate and Esc for Cancel ).



Define a 3D Direction Using Precise Methods

There are four methods for precisely defining the orientation of a 3D segment.

The first method is to select an axis (from the active coordinate frame) so that the initial 3D direction becomes parallel to it. The second method is by picking points on displayed objects. In general, the 3D direction’s orientation will be aligned to these two picked points. The third method is to edit parameters. The fourth method is to pick an entity with direction.

To Define a 3D Direction Perpendicular to an Axis: among , Y axis and Z axis (in the X , Y and Z

Coordinate System).

2. Or choose among North Axis , East Axis and Elevation Axis (in the North , East and Elevation Coordinate System).

To Define a 3D Direction by Picking Two Points:

1. Click . The Picking Parameters toolbar appears in 3D constraint mode and the cursor becomes as shown in [A] and the initial 3D direction disappears from the 3D View .

2. Pick a point (free or constrained) on the displayed entity. The cursor becomes as shown in [B].

3. Pick another point (free or constrained). A direction in the form of yellow dotted line appears.

To Define a 3D Direction by Editing Parameters:


1. Click . The Direction Editing dialog opens.

2. Enter a direction in the Direction field.

3. Click . The Direction Editing dialog closes.

To Define a 3D Direction by Picking an Entity with Direction:

1. Click .

2. Pick an entity with a direction in the 3D View .


Define a 3D Direction Using Visual Methods

There are two methods for visually defining a 3D segment’s orientation. The first method is to pick two points. A 3D segment will pass through the line defined by these two points. The second method is to pick two secant planes.

To Define a 3D Direction by Picking Two Points:

1. Click .


To Define a 3D Direction by Picking two Planes:

1. Click . The cursor becomes as shown in (A).

2. Pick a plane. A red frame with a yellow background appears upon the picked plane and the cursor becomes as shown in (B).

3. Pick another plane. An axis (yellow dotted line) appears.


1 - The selected geometry 2 - The first picked plane

Validate a 3D Direction

Once you are satisfied with the defined 3D direction, you can validate it by clicking Validate . Note that any persistent object will be created in the database. Be sure to first validate the result before leaving the 3D Direction

Tool ; there is no warning message prompting you to save the result or not.

Note: To leave the 3D Direction Tool , you can click Cancel in the Make

Perpendicular , Make Parallel or 3D Direction toolbar, select Cancel from the pop-up menu or press Esc .


3D Point Tool

The 3D Point Tool allows you to define a 3D primitive of Point shape. This tool can only be used as a sub tool inside main tools like Geometry Modifier , Cloud-

Based Modeler , etc. The 3D Point Tool opens with the Pick Point mode set bydefault and the cursor in the picking mode. The 3D Point information box at the top right corner of the 3D View displays the current 3D Point’s parameters -

Position. Press on the Esc key (or select Cancel Picking ) from the pop-up menu to leave the Pick Point mode. A 3D Point appears and the other modes become enabled. To use the tool fully, you need to have objects selected and displayed.

1 - Pick Point 4 - Pick Entity with Center 6 - Edit Parameters

2 - Pick Three Planes

3 - Pick Plane and Segment

5 - Project 3D Point on Plane 7 - Validate

8 - Cancel

Tip: All point definition modes can be selected from the pop-up menu or using available short-cut key ( Space Bar for Validate and Esc for Cancel ).

Pick a Point

To Pick a Point: the icon. The cursor takes the following shape , the initial 3D Point is hidden and the Picking Parameters toolbar opens in the

3D constraint mode.

2. Pick a point (free or constrained) on displayed objects (or not).


Pick Three Planes

If three planes are not parallel two-by-two (with no coplanar normals), then they will intersect (cross over) somewhere at a point.

To Pick Three Planes: the icon. The initial 3D Point is hidden in the

3D View and the cursor becomes as shown in [A].

2. Pick a plane. A red frame with a yellow background upon the picked plane appears. The cursor becomes as shown in [B].

3. Pick another plane. Another red frame with a yellow background appears upon the picked plane. The cursor becomes as shown [C].


4. Pick again another plane. A 3D Point (the intersection of the three picked planes) appears. [D]


Pick a Plane and a Segment

In this creation mode, you need to have a plane and a segment - both intersected at a point.

To Pick a Plane and a Segment: the icon. The initial 3D Point disappears from the 3D View and the cursor takes the shape shown in [A].


3. Pick a segment. The plane and the segment intersect at a 3D Point [C].


Pick an Entity with Center

To Pick an Entity With Center:

1. Click the Pick Entity with Center icon. The cursor takes the following shape . The initial 3D Point disappears from the 3D View.

2. Pick an object of any type having a center (except point cloud, mesh, etc.).


Project a 3D Point on a Plane

To Project a 3D Point on a Plane: the icon. The initial 3D point disappears from the 3D View and the cursor takes the shape shown in [A].

2. Pick 3D Point . A yellow label with the following text “ Point to Project on

Plane ” appears over the picked point [B].

3. Pick a plane. A 3D point appears on that plane [C].


Edit Parameters

To Edit Parameters:

1. Click . The initial 3D point is hidden and the Position

Editing dialog opens.

2. Enter a point’s position in that dialog.

3. Press .

Validate a 3D Point

Once you are satisfied with the defined 3D Point, you can validate it by clicking

Validate . No persistent object will be created in the database. Be sure to first validate the result before leaving tool because there is no warning message prompting you to validate the result (or not).


3D Axis Tool

The 3D Axis Tool allows you to define primitives of Segment shape (with

Direction and Position ). This tool appears when you apply constraints such as

Lock Center on Line or Fit to Axis in object manipulation. These constraints can be found in tools like e.g. Geometry Modifier and Cloud-Based Modeler .

This tool also appears when evoking the 3D Axis Tool inside the Duplicator

Tool .

In the first case, the 3D Axis Tool opens with the Pick Axial Entity mode set bydefault - the other modes are dimmed - and the cursor in the picking mode. In the second case, the Pick Axial Entity mode is not set by-default. The 3D Axis information box at the top right corner of the 3D View displays the current 3D axis parameters - Direction and Position . If the Pick Axial Entity has been set by default; press on the Esc key (or select Cancel Picking ) from the pop-up menu to leave this mode. A 3D axis (red dotted line) appears and the other modes become available. To use the tool fully, you need to have objects selected and displayed.

1 - Pick Axial Entity

2 - Pick Two Points

3 - Pick Two Planes

4 - Edit Parameters

5 - Validate

6 - Cancel

Tip: All axis definition modes can be selected from the pop-up menu or by using available short-cut keys ( Space Bar for Validate and Esc for Cancel ).

Pick an Axial Entity

To Pick an Axial Entity:

1. Click . The cursor becomes as follows and the initial 3D axis disappears from the 3D View .

2. Pick an object with a direction.


Pick Two Points

To Pick Two Points:

Pick Two Points . The initial 3D axis is hidden and the cursor takes the shape shown in (A).

2. Pick a point. After picking, it takes the shape shown in (B).

3. Pick another point.

[A] [B]

Note: Picking can be free or constrained and the Picking Parameters toolbar opens in 3D constraint mode. In this creation mode, you can have objects of any type.


Pick Two Planes

After clicking Pick Two Planes , the initial 3D axis is hidden and the cursor takes the shape shown in [A]. This means that you are in the picking mode.

After picking a plane, it takes the shape shown in [B]; this means that you need to pick a second plane. In this creation mode, you need to have secant planes.

[A] [B]

To Pick Two Planes:

1. Pick a plane. A red frame with a yellow background upon the picked plane means that it is selected.

2. Pick another plane. An axis (the intersection of the two picked planes) in red and dotted appears.

1 - The first picked plane

2 - The cursor before picking the first plane

3 - The cursor before picking the second plane


Edit Parameters

To Edit Parameters:

1. Click . The Axis Editing dialog opens and the initial 3D axis disappears from the 3D View .

2. Click on the pull-down arrow in the Axis Editing dialog.


Choose . a) Give an orientation in the Direction field. b) Enter a point position in the Position field.

Choose . a) Enter a point position in the Position 1 field. b) Enter another point position in the Position 2 field.

4. Click . The Axis Editing dialog closes.

Validate an 3D Axis

Once you are satisfied with the defined 3D axis, you can validate it by clicking

Validate . No persistent object will be created in the database. Be sure to first validate the result before leaving the 3D Axis Tool because there is no warning message prompting you to validate the result (or not).


3D Radius Tool

The 3D Radius Tool only appears when you apply constraints like Lock Radius and Lock Center Line Radius or Lock Pipe Radius respectively to spheres or cylinders and to regular torus. These constraints can be found in tools like e.g.

Geometry Modifier . The 3D Radius dialog opens with the Pick Radial Entity mode set by-default. The 3D Radius Tool information box appears at the top right corner of the 3D View . This information box displays the current entity radius value. To leave the Pick Radial Entity mode, press Esc (or select Cancel

Picking ) from the pop-up menu.

1 - Pick Radial Entity

2 - Pick Two Points on Diameter

3 - Pick Two Points on Radius

4 - Pick Axis and Point

Tip: All commands in the 3D Radius Tool dialog can be selected from the popup menu. The user should first leave the picking mode.

Edit Parameters

To Edit Parameters:

1. Choose and Diameter .

2. Enter a distance value in the corresponding field.

OK . The 3D Radius Tool dialog closes.

Pick a Radial Entity

To Pick a Radial Entity:

1. Click icon.

2. Pick an entity with a regular radius.

Radius has been checked, the entity radius is displayed.

4. If has been checked, the entity diameter is displayed.

5. Click . The 3D Radius Tool dialog closes.


Pick Two Points of a Diameter

Pick Two Points of a Diameter:

1. Click icon. The Picking Parameters toolbar appears.

2. Pick two points free or constrained on the displayed point cloud. If

Diameter is unchecked; it will be checked and the distance between these two picked is displayed in the corresponding field.


Pick Two Points of a Radius

To Pick Two points of a Radius: the icon.

2. Pick two points on displayed objects or not. If the Radius option is unchecked; it will be automatically checked and the distance between these two picked is displayed in the field.



Pick an Axis and a Point

To Pick an Axis and a Point: the icon. The cursor is as shown in [A].

2. Pick a segment. A line (in dot and yellow) appears upon the picked segment and the cursor becomes as shown in [B].

3. Pick a point.

If the Radius option has been checked; a line (in dot and red) from the picked point and perpendicular to the picked segment appears [C]. The distance of that line is displayed in the field next the Radius and Diameter options. This distance will be used as constrained radius.

If the Diameter option has been checked; the picked point will be the center of a line (in dot and red and perpendicular to the picked segment) appears [D].

The distance of that line is displayed in the field next to the Radius and

Diameter options. This distance will be used as constrained diameter.




3D Secant Tool

The 3D Secant dialog appears when you use the Make Secant to Cylinder constraint in tools like Geometry Modifier or Cloud-Based Modeler . The Pick

Cylinder to be Secant With mode is set by default. To leave this mode, press

Esc or select Cancel Picking from the pop-up menu.

The 3D Secant information box at the top right corner of the 3D View contains information related to the secant cylinder and the secant angle if Use Same

Radius and Use Given Angle are unchecked, the secant cylinder, the radius value and the secant angle if Use Same Radius is checked and the secant cylinder and the secant value if Use Given Angle is checked.

All are undefined before applying the constraint except the secant angle which has the value in the Use Given Angle field or is equal to 90 degrees if

Perpendicular is pressed-on.

1 - Pick Cylinder to be Secant With 2 - Perpendicular

Note: When you use the Make Secant to Cylinder constraint inside the

Geometry Modifier Tool ; you need to have a cylinder first selected. This condition is unnecessary in the Cloud-Based Modeler Tool .


Pick a Cylinder to be Secant With

To Pick a Cylinder to be Secant With:

1. Click (if required).

2. Do one of the following: unchecked and Use Given Angle and pick a cylinder. The selected cylinder axis is secant to the picked cylinder axis [A1].

Check and pick a cylinder. The selected cylinder and the picked cylinder have secant axes and same radius [A2].

Check and enter a value different from 90° or 270°.

The selected cylinder axis is secant to the picked cylinder axis with the given angle [B1].

Use Given Angle and enter a value equal to 90° or 270°. The selected cylinder axis is secant and perpendicular to the picked cylinder axis [2].

Check and press on Perpendicular . The selected cylinder axis is secant and perpendicular to the picked cylinder axis

[B3].

Use Same Radius and Use Given Angle with an angle other than 90° or 270°. The selected cylinder axis is secant to the picked cylinder axis with the given angle and both entities have the same radius [B4].

Use and Use Given Angle with an angle equal to 90° or 270°. The selected cylinder axis is secant and perpendicular to the picked cylinder axis both entities have the same radius [B5].

3. Click . The Make Secant Tool dialog closes.

Note:

For [A1] and [A2], you may see an axis in red and in dotted running through the cylinder used as a constraint.


For from [B1] and [B5], you may see two axes - one in red and in dotted running through the cylinder used as a constraint and one in green and in dotted which indicates the direction of the cylinder to constrain.


3D Plane Tool

The 3D Plane Tool allows you to define a 3D primitive of planar shape. In the

Modeling processing mode and whatever the navigation mode you use

( Examiner , Walkthrough or Station-Based ), this tool appears when you apply constraints to object manipulation. When using the Make Perpendicular (or

Make Parallel ) constraint, the 3D Plane Tool opens as a tab of the Make

Perpendicular (or Make Parallel ) toolbar with the X-Axis * mode set by-default

(see [A1] and [A2] respectively in the Examiner / Walkthrough and Station-Base mode).

The Make Perpendicular (or Make Parallel ) toolbar contains three tabs. When it appears; the By Picking Entity tab comes first. To use the 3D Plane Tool , you need to click on the To a Plane tab (or click on the (or ) button). A 3D plane perpendicular to the screen appears and the 3D Plane Tool information box at the top right corner of the 3D View displays the current (default or drawn) 3D plane parameters - Normal and Position .

To use the tool fully, you need to have an object selected and displayed. When the Make Parallel to Plane (or Lock on Plane ) constraint has been applied to object manipulation; the 3D Plane Tool opens as shown in [B1] and [B2]

(respectively in the Examiner/Walkthrough and Station-Base mode ). All these constraints can be found in tools like e.g. Geometry Modifier , Cloud-Based

Modeler , etc.

[A1]

1 - X Axis*

2 - Y Axis*

3 - Z Axis*

[A2]

4 - Pick Two Screen Points

5 - Pick Three Points

6 - Pick Two Points

7 - Edit Parameters

8 - Validate

9 - Cancel


1 - Define Vertical Plane by

Picking Two Screen Points and one 3D Point

2 - Define Horizontal Plane by


3 - Define Plane by Picking

Three Screen Points and one

3D Point

In the OfficeSurvey ™ processing mode, the 3D Plane Tool opens as shown in

[B1] and [B2] when navigating respectively in the Examiner/Walkthrough and

Station-Based mode.

[B1]



[B2)





3D Point







3D Point

Note: (*) X Axis , Y Axis and Z Axis in the X , Y and Z Coordinate System (or

North Axis , East Axis and Elevation Axis in the North , East and Elevation



Define a Plane in all Navigation Modes

There are three methods for precisely defining the orientation of a 3D plane.

The first method is to select an axis (from the active coordinate frame) so that the initial 3D plane becomes perpendicular to it. The second method is to edit parameters. The third method is to pick an entity with a direction so that the initial 3D plane normal becomes parallel to the picked entity direction.

1st Method: among , Y Axis and Z Axis (in the X , Y and Z



2nd Method:

1. Click . The Plane Editing dialog opens.

2. Enter a direction in the Normal field.

3. Enter a point position in the Point field.

OK . The Plane Editing dialog closes.

3rd Method:

Pick Entity with Direction .

2. Pick an entity with a direction in the 3D View .

There are three methods for visually defining the orientation of a 3D plane. The first method is to pick two points. The initial 3D plane will pass through the line defined by these two points and perpendicular to the screen plane. The second method is to pick three points. The initial 3D plane will pass through the plane drawn by these three points. The third method is to pick two points which define a vector. As a plane is defined by two vectors. Applying this constraint will orientate the selected plane so that the second vectors is parallel to the Z

Axis (or Elevation Axis ) of the active coordinate frame.

1st Method:

1. Click ick Two Screen Points .


2nd Method:


2. Pick three points (free or constrained). Picking is always on displayed objects.


1 - First picked point

3rd Method:

2 - Second picked point 3 - Third picked point

1. Click (in the X , Y and Z Coordinate System ).

2. Or North , East and Elevation Coordinate System ).


Tip: All plane definition modes can be selected from the pop-up menu or using available short-cut key ( Space Bar for Validate and Esc for Cancel ).




Define a Vertical Plane by Picking Two Screen Points (Horizontal

Direction) and One 3D Points

To Define a Vertical Plane by Picking two Screen Points (Horizontal Direction) and one 3D Point:



[B].

[A]

[B]


3. Pick another point anywhere in the 3D View (on the displayed point cloud or not). The cursor becomes as shown in [C] and the Picking Parameters toolbar appears in 3D constraint mode.

4. Pick the last point anywhere in the 3D View (only on the displayed point cloud). A vertical plane appears with the third picked point as center.

[C]

[D]



Define a Horizontal Plane By Picking Two Screen Points

(Horizontal Direction) and One 3D Point

To Define a Horizontal Plane by Picking Two Screen Points and one 3D Point:



[B].

[A]

[B]


3. Pick another point on the screen. These two points will define the orientation of the first axis of the horizontal plane's frame. The cursor becomes as shown in [C] and the Picking Parameters toolbar appears in

3D constraint mode.

4. Pick the last point in 3D (on a cloud point, a measured point or a geometry). This point defines the height of the vertical plane. A horizontal plane appears with the third picked point as center.

[C]

[D]



Define a Plane By Picking Three Screen Points (Horizontal and

Steepest Slope Directions) and One 3D Points

This feature enables to define a plane with any orientation.

To Define a Plane by Picking Three Screen Points (Horizontal and Steepest

Slope Directions) and one 3D Point:



[B].

[A]

[A]


3. Pick another point on the screen so that the two points represent a horizontal segment in the 3D space. These two points define the orientation of a horizontal segment drawn on the final plane. The cursor becomes as shown in [C].

4. Pick another on the screen so that the previous point and this new one represent the steepest slope direction of the final plane. The cursor becomes as shown in [D] and the Picking Parameters toolbar appears in

3D constraint mode.

[C]

[D]


5. Pick the last point in the 3D View (only on the displayed point cloud). The three first picked points - which are not collinear (not lying on the same line) - draw a 3D plane; the fourth picked point is its center.


Modify the Size of a Plane

You can resize the previous 3D plane. The resized 3D plane keeps the same parameters as before except the dimensions. You can do this by dragging & dropping a corner in the 3D View .

To Modify the Size of a 3D Plane:

1. Place the mouse cursor upon any handle of a 3D plane. A green square appears.

2. If a corner handle is selected, drag it to increase (or reduce) the 3D plane size. During this operation, the green square becomes yellow.

3. If a middle handle is selected, drag it to increase (or reduce) the 3D plane width (or length). During this operation, the green square becomes yellow.


Validate a Plane

Once you are satisfied with the defined 3D plane, you can validate it by clicking

Validate . Note that any persistent object will be created in the database. Be sure to first validate the result before leaving the 3D Plane Tool ; there is no warning message prompting you to save the result or not.

Note: To leave the 3D Plane Tool , you can click Cancel in the Make

Perpendicular , Make Parallel or 3D Plane Tool toolbar, select Cancel from the pop-up menu or press Esc .

1147

Plant Tools

Tools in the Plant menu, when used in combination Modeling tools, bring you the benefits of streamlined workflow to the world of engineering.


Manage SteelWorks Catalogs

A SteelWorks Catalog provides parametric definition of all components in the required size ranges, ratings and types. You can use it to create beams with constraints.

Import SteelWorks Catalogs

You can import a lone (or a set of) steelworks catalog(s) before starting the

SteelWorks Creation Tool (or within that tool).

To Import a SteelWorks Catalog:

1. From menu, select Import SteelWorks Catalog(s) . The Import

Catalog dialog opens.

2. Navigate to the drive/folder where the SteelWorks catalog file is located in the Look In field.

3. Click on the SteelWorks catalog file to select it. Its name appears in the

File Name field.

4. Click . The Import Catalog dialog closes.

Note: Importing a catalog file that is already imported will open a warning message.

Some catalog files may have been installed in X:\Program

Files\Trimble\RealWorks 9.0\Tables\SteelWorks after installing RealWorks .

These catalog files are samples. If the user decides to not install these tables, he needs to first choose the " Custom " option when installing RealWorks and then uncheck the " RealWorks Plant Tables " option in the Select Features window.

Remove SteelWorks Catalog List

You can delete all steelworks catalogs inside (or out of) the SteelWorks

Creation Tool . The Remove SteelWorks Catalog List command will remain dimmed until a catalog file is first imported.

To Remove the SteelWorks Catalog List: the menu, select Remove SteelWorks Catalog List .


SteelWorks Creator Tool

This feature allows you to model structural steelworks. Standard and specific catalogs can be used within it.

Start the Tool

To Start the Tool:

1. Select one point cloud* (or more**) from the Project Tree . the menu, select SteelWorks Creator Tool . The SteelWorks

Creator and the Drawing Tool both open, as the third tab of the

WorkSpace window for the first and as a toolbar the second. We will call the input point cloud a Cloud Data .

Note:

The toolbar appears in 3D constraint mode.

(*) If the selected point cloud is On before starting the tool, it automatically swaps to Off . We advise you to maintain it Off .


























Cloud Data





Note:









Note:




Choose a Section Type

There are five types of Sections you can create: H Section , I Section ,

U Section , L Section and T Section .

To Choose a Section Type:

In , choose a Section Type by clicking on its related icon.


Select a Catalog File

If there is a catalog file in your project; it is by default selected and its name* appears in the Catalog Files field. Note that a catalog file has SPEC as extension. " None " in the Catalog Files field means one of two things. First, there is no catalog file has been imported into your project. Second, it is because you don't want to create a beam based on a catalog.

To Select a Catalog File:

1. In , click on the Catalog Files pull-down arrow.

2. Choose a catalog file from the drop-down list.

Tip:

You can import a catalog file within the SteelWorks Creator Tool . You may not see it once imported. In that case, select it by dropping down the

Catalog Files list.

You can delete the whole catalog files within the SteelWorks Creator Tool .

Note: (*) The name you see in the Catalog Files field is not necessarily the name of the imported catalog file. This name is the one you find in #SPEC

NAME# in the catalog file.

Select a Table

The available tables* are: HEA, HEB (for H Section ), IPE, INP (for I Section ),

UNP (for U Section ), LEA (for L Section ), TEA (for T Section ). If there is no catalog file that has been imported into your project; you may see " No Table " in the Table field.

To Select a Table:

1. In , click on the Table pull-down arrow.

2. Choose a table from the drop-down list.

Note: (*) The number of Tables as well as their name or the kind of Tables may differ from one catalog to another. The Tables given above are based on the standard DIN catalog. In a catalog like the AFNOR catalog, new tables can be added (UAP, UPF, HEM tables only).


Select a Reference

If there is no catalog file that has been imported into RealWorks ; you may see

" None " in the Selected Reference field.

To Select a Reference:

Step 3 , first check the Catalog Constraint option.

2. Then click on the Selected Reference pull-down arrow.


Tip: You can select a Reference from the drop-down list without checking the

Catalogue Constraint option. It will be automatically checked.

2D Sections

The Change Mode , Draw Rectangle and Draw Circle icons are not present in the Drawing Tool toolbar. Drawings are constrained to the shape chosen in

Step 1 .

Note: The Walkthrough navigation mode is forbidden. If you are in the

Walkthrough mode, the navigation mode will swap of its own from that mode to

Examiner after starting drawing.


Define a 3D Plane

To Define a 3D Plane: the icon. The 3D Plane Tool toolbar and a

3D plane both appear.

2. Define and validate a 3D plane*. The scene is locked on the defined 3D plane (which is hidden) with a 2D grid superimposed (if not hidden previously). The Picking Parameters toolbar appears in the 2D constraint mode. The Show/Hide Plane icon becomes active and Lock in 2D is default-set. the icon to display the defined 3D plane (if required).

Note: (*) Please, refer to the 3D Plane Tool on how to define a 3D plane.

Tip:

You can also select Start 3D Plane Tool (or Show/Hide Plane) from the pop-up menu.

The is only present when using the 3D

Plane Tool in the SteelWorks Creator Tool . It enables to find the best cutting direction.

Use the Current View as 3D Plane

To Use the Current View as 3D Plane:

1. Navigate through the 3D scene to find the best view on which you want to draw a 2D section.

2. Pick a first point. The scene is locked on the current view plane with a 2D grid superimposed (if not hidden previously) and the Picking Parameters toolbar in the 2D constraint mode.


Draw a 2D Section

To Draw a 2D Section:

1. Pick a first point to select the anchor point of the 2D section.

2. Move the mouse to change the size of the 2D section. The Selected

Reference field is automatically updated. If the Catalog Constraint option has been checked; the 2D section size is constrained to the values stored in the selected table. If the option hasn't been checked, there is no constraint to the 2D section size drawing.

3. Click the second point to complete the 2D section.

4. Validate the 2D section by clicking .

5. If required, click New SteelWorks to cancel the current 2D section.

Tip: The New SteelWorks icon can also be selected from the pop-up menu.

Change the 2D Section Position and Orientation

You can change the 2D section position and orientation so that it fits exactly the working cloud.

To Change the 2D Section Position and Position:

1. Click on the Selection Mode icon. The Change Move Mode button becomes enabled with Pan as default mode.

2. A manipulator (with two secant handles and a plan) appears.

3. Click on a handle; it turns to yellow. The direction along which you can displace the 2D section is highlighted in yellow and the one along which you cannot displace it is in mauve.

4. Move the 2D section along that direction.

5. Click on the plane. It turns to yellow.

6. Move the 2D Section in any direction in that plane.


8. Choose from the drop-down list. The Manipulator changes of shape.

9. Click on the Manipulator . It turns to yellow.

10. Turn left or right the Manipulator .


Define a Length

You need to define a Length only if you don't want to create a beam based on a catalog. Otherwise, defining a Length has no effect.

To Define a Length:

1. Enter a distance value in the Length field.

2. Or use the Up (or Down ) button.

Tip: The extrusion's Length can also be modified by using the Geometry

Modifier Tool .

Create Beams

An extruded entity will be created in the RealWorks database. Each extruded entity has as name " ObjectX - Reference - Catalog " where X is its order. X always starts at One . Reference will be replaced by the Selected Reference ’s value and Catalog by the Catalog ’s name. If the Catalog Constraint option has not been checked; the extruded entity has as name " ObjectX - SteelWorks ".

To Create Beams:

1. Click in the SteelWorks Creator dialog. click in the Drawing Tool toolbar. press .

Tip: Create can also be selected from the pop-up menu.


EasyPipe Tool

The EasyPipe Tool is very easy to use because you only need a few clicks to execute the following tasks: extract a pipe path from more than one million points and model the extraction with geometric entitie(s) if needed. The procedure given hereafter guides you step-by-step through the use of this tool.

For each command, you can use its short-cut key (if available); this allows you to accelerate your work.

Open the Tool

Only an object having the point cloud representation can be selected as entry for the EasyPipe tool.

To Open the Tool:

1. Select a point Cloud* (or more**) from the Project Tree . the menu, select EasyPipe Tool . The EasyPipe dialog opens as the third tab of the WorkSpace window. We will call the input

Point Cloud a Cloud Data .

Note: (*) If the selected Point Cloud is On before starting the tool, it automatically tilts to Off . We advise you to maintain it Off .


























Cloud Data





Note:









Note:





Extract an Initial Cylinder by Picking

To Extract an Initial Cylinder by Picking:

Step 1 , click the Extract Cylinder button. The cursor takes the appearance of a cross.

2. Pick a point on the displayed set of points. The cross becomes a ruler.

3. Move the cursor to any location. A circle appears. Its center is at the position of the picked point.

4. Pick another point (not necessary on the set of points).

A first cylinder is extracted from points inside the circle. The Start button in

Step 2 becomes enabled. The Number of Elements is equal to One .


Note: An information box at the top right corner of the 3D View displays the first extracted cylinder parameters like its Diameter , the Number of Points

(used for fitting) and the Standard Deviation .

Tip: You can cancel the current cylinder and extract a new one by using the

Start button again.

Caution: The first extracted cylinder will not be saved if you close the tool by pressing Esc. ( or by selecting Close ).

Select an Initial Cylinder for Tracking

If you already have a cylinder inline with a set of points for which you want to extract a set of cylinders; you can set it as the first cylinder in the tracking process.

To Select an Initial Cylinder for Tracking:

1. First select a cylinder from the Project Tree .

2. Display the cylinder in the 3D View .

3. In , click the Pick a Cylinder button. The cursor becomes as shown below [A].

4. In , pick a cylinder. The picked cylinder becomes the first cylinder. The Start button in Step 2 becomes enabled. The Number of

Elements is equal to One [B].

[A]


[B]

Note: An information box at the top right corner of the 3D View window displays the information related to the picked cylinder like its Diameter , Number of Points and Standard Deviation .

Tip: You can also select a point cloud and a cylinder as input of the tool. The selected cylinder will be automatically considered as the first cylinder, without picking.


Start Tracking Cylinders

The cylinder tracking will consist of building and propagating in both directions a series of consecutive constrained cylinders (all based on the first cylinder and all ball-jointed at a pivot point). The tracking will stop on its own when the fitting error between the current (last) cylinder and its points is too large or when the number of points in the immediate neighborhood is insufficient to continue tracking.

To Start Tracking Cylinders:

In , click the Start button.

Note:

Start button takes the name of Pick to Continue .

The , Smooth and Model buttons become enabled. The

Number of Elements will be updated according to the fitted cylinders.


Continue in Tracking Cylinders

You can continue in extracting cylinders along a line of points. You have to do this from the first (or from the last) extracted cylinder.

To Continue in Tracking Cylinders:

1. Click button. If the fitting is too important; the extraction stops on its own and a dialog opens and prompts to continue or to abort.


3. Click to abort.


Delete the Extracted Cylinders

You can delete an alone (or a set of) extracted cylinder(s) which is not correctly fitted.

To Delete the Extracted Cylinders:

1. Click button. The mouse cursor becomes as shown below [A].

2. In , pick an extracted cylinder. The picked cylinder and those, that follow after, are deleted [B].

[A]

[B]

Tip: You can undo a deletion by selecting Undo Delete Elements from the popup menu (or by using the following short-cut Ctrl + Z ).

Note: You cannot delete the first cylinder; the one used for tracking. The cursor will stay in the picking mode until a valid cylinder will be selected.


Smooth the Extracted Cylinders

The stack of the extracted cylinders may be not aligned. You can then use the

Smooth command. It allows you to align all cylinder axes together. This is an interactive procedure. You can try as often as you want until you reach the result you need; but applying too many the Smooth command consecutively may result in removing valid elbows or deviating cylinders from the initial fitting.

Note: The Number of Elements will be updated once the extracted cylinders have been smoothed.


Model the Extracted Cylinders

The last step consists of merging the extracted cylinders, for which the axes can be aligned, into a long pipe. The extracted cylinders for which the axes cannot be aligned are replaced with an elbow.

To Model the Extracted Cylinders:

In , click on the Model button.


Create the Extracted Cylinders

Once you are satisfied with the tracking result, you can save it in the

RealWorks database. A new folder named " Branch (X) " is created and rooted under the current project. This folder contains all computed cylinders named

" ObjectY ". X and Y are respectively the folder and cylinder order.

To Create the Extracted Cylinders:

Create . You can still extract another pipe from remaining points. The

EasyPipe dialog remains open.

Close . The EasyPipe dialog closes

Note: If the extracted cylinders have not been modeled; a list of cylinders will be created in RealWorks . If the modeling has been applied, a mix of cylinders and circular torus will be created.

Tip: You can also select Close from the pop-up menu.


Export Pipe Center Lines

A Center Line is an imaginary line running through the center of a Pipe .

To Export Pipe Center Lines:

1. Select a lone (or a set of) fitted Pipe(s) from the Project Tree .

2. From menu, select Export Pipe Center Lines . The Save As dialog opens.

3. Navigate to the drive / folder where you want to store the file.

4. Keep the default name which is the project name.

5. Or input a new name in the File Name field.

6. Click on the File of Type pull down arrow.

7. Choose , Solids AutoCAD (*.dxf) and

MicroStation Files (*.dgn) .

Save .

Note: A unique format file will be exported regardless of the number of Pipes selected as input.


Export as a DWG Format File

AutoCAD's native file format, DWG, and to a lesser extent, its interchange file format, DXF, have become de facto standards for CAD data interoperability.

From 1982 to 2007, Autodesk created versions of AutoCAD which wrote no less than 18 major variants of the DXF and DWG file formats. Here below are the numerous versions of AutoCAD.

Product

AutoCAD® 2010

AutoCAD® 2009

AutoCAD® 2008

AutoCAD® 2007

AutoCAD® 2006

Version v.u.24 v.u.23.1.01 v.u.22.1.01 v.u.21.1.01 v.u.20.1.01

AutoCAD® 2005

AutoCAD® 2004

AutoCAD® 2002

AutoCAD® 2000 v.u 19.1.01 v.u 18.1.01 v.u 16.1.01 v.u 15.0.02

AutoCAD® Release 14 v.u 14.1.04


To Export as a DWG Format File:

1. In dialog, customize the option(s) below.

Version: This option allows you to choose from the various versions of AutoCAD.

Export Frame: A project may contain several coordinate frames. This option allows you to select which coordinate frame you want to apply to the exported data.

Unit: This option allows you to select the unit system you want to apply to the exported data.

2. Click . The Export as DWG File dialog closes.


Export as a DXF Format File



Product

AutoCAD® 2010

AutoCAD® 2009

AutoCAD® 2008

AutoCAD® 2007

AutoCAD® 2006


AutoCAD® 2005

AutoCAD® 2004

AutoCAD® 2002




To Export a DXF Format File:

1. In dialog, customize the option(s) below.


Export Frame : A project may contain several coordinate frames. This option allows you to select which coordinate frame you want to apply to the exported data.

Unit : This option allows you to select the unit system you want to apply to the exported data.

2. Click . The Export as DXF File dialog closes.


Export as a DGN Format File

DGN for DesiGN is a file format of Bentley MicroStation®. Exporting to this format means exporting a selection from RealWorks to the MicroStation® format. You can only export one project at a time. MicroStation® includes the notion of layers which can be used as a tool for organizing and gathering information about a drawing. These layers can be considered as an electronic version of traditional layers. In addition to the layers, this format includes the notion of working units which are the real-world units that you work with in drawing or creating your models in a DGN file. The working units are set as

Master Units (the largest units in common use in a design, such as meters) and fractional Sub Units (the smallest convenient unit to use, such as centimeters or millimeters). The Sub Units cannot be larger than Master Units .

To Export as DGN Format File: the dialog, customize the option(s) below.

Layer : This option allows you to define a number of layers. One is set by default and the option is dimmed.

Export Of : This option allows you to choose which the type of object(s) you want to export: Selected Clouds and Geometries ,

Selected Geometries and Selected Clouds . Selected Geometries is set by default and the option is dimmed.

Export Frame : A project may have several coordinate frames. This option allows you to select which coordinate frame from the dropdown list you want to apply to the exported data.

Master Unit : This option allows you to select a unit system to the

Master unit.

Sub Unit : This option allows you to select a unit system to the Sub unit.

Positional Unit : This option allows you to enter a value for the

Positional unit.

Export.

The Export as DGN File dialog closes.

C H A P T E R 1 2

Media Tools

The Media Tools menu is present in all RealWorks products, except in the

Viewer . Tools from the menu can be used when you are in OfficeSurvey (or

Modeling ), except in Registration where only the Screen Capture (High

Resolution) feature is available.

1179

Video Creator

The aim is to provide a tool that can generate videos from survey data. The video files are saved in the AVI (for Audio Video Interleave, a video format from

Microsoft) format with customizable resolution and compression level.

Open the Tool

No selection is required to enter the Video Creator Tool . Video creations are based on objects not necessary selected but displayed in the 3D View . A selection can be done within the tool and the selected objects can be of all kinds (point cloud, mesh, geometry, etc.).

To Open the Tool:

1. Display objects in the 3D View . the menu, select Video Creator . The Video Creator dialog opens.

The Video Creator dialog opens as the third tab of the WorkSpace window and is composed of three parts. The first part ( Define Navigation Path ) contains methods for creating a video. The second part (Define Video Parameters ) allows you to set parameters and preview the result. The last step is to save the result.

The 3D View spits into two 3D viewers. The top 3D viewer ( Main View ) displays the global scene. The bottom 3D viewer (called either Preview or

Video Editing and Preview ) displays the view from the current keyframe. A keyframe is like a camera in a given position. The Perspective projection mode is set by default; you cannot swap to Isometric .


Define a Navigation Path

There are three modes for creating a video: Quick Mode , Step-by-Step Mode and Path Mode . After opening the Video Creator Tool , the mode that comes first is always Quick Mode . The Quick Mode uses a predetermined path (a circle). The Step-by-Step Mode allows you to define your own path by navigating through the scene. The Path Mode uses an existing polyline (or a drawn one) to describe the video path.

To Define a Navigation Path:

Step 1 of the Video Creator dialog, click on the pull-down arrow.

2. Select a mode among Quick Mode , Step-by-Step Mode and Path Mode .

Media Tools

Quick Mode

In the Examiner navigation mode, the top 3D viewer (called Main View ) displays the global scene with a circular path (in red) and keyframes (four in all). All keyframes are directed to the center of the circular path. The bottom 3D viewer (called Preview ) displays the view of the current keyframe (in yellow).

The circular path has diameter the bounding box - that highlights the selection - diagonal. A 3D manipulator (three handles corresponding to three secant directions, each with a color (red, green and blue)) is located at the center of circular path. The View Inwards/Outwards button in Step 1 of the Video Creator dialog is enabled.

3 - The manipulator 1 - A circular path

2 - A keyframe

In the Station-Based navigation mode, the top 3D viewer displays the global scene with a keyframe. This keyframe is at the first station - in the Project Tree

- position. The bottom 3D Viewer shows the viewpoint from that keyframe. The

View Inwards/Outwards button in Step 1 of the Video Creator dialog is dimmed.


View Inwards/Outwards

You can reverse the keyframe direction so that all keyframes diverge from the center instead of converging on it.

To View Inwards/Outwards: the dialog, click the View Inwards/Outwards icon.

Or right-click in any 3D viewer and select View Inwards/Outwards from the pop-up menu.

Note: You can undo (or redo) the inversion by clicking on the Undo Operation

(or Redo Operation ) button in the Main toolbar.

Media Tools

Move the Circular Path Along a Direction

To Move the Circular Path Along a Direction:

1. Click on a handle; it turns to yellow. The direction along which you can displace the circular path (with keyframes) is highlighted in yellow and those along which you cannot displace the circular path (with keyframes) are in mauve.

2. Drag and drop to move the circular path (with keyframes) along that direction.

Note: You can undo (or redo) the displacement by clicking on the Undo

Operation (or Redo Operation ) in the Main toolbar.


Move the Circular Path in a Plane

To Move the Circular Path in a Plane:

1. Click on a plane. It turns to yellow. The plane in which you can displace the circular path (with keyframes) appears in highlighted in yellow and those you cannot displace along are in mauve.

2. Drag and drop to move the circular path (with keyframes) in that plane.



Media Tools

Resize the Circular Path

To Resize the Circular Path:

1. Click the circular path (with keyframes).

2. Drag and drop to enlarge or reduce the circular path (with keyframes) size.

Note: You can undo (or redo) the resizing by clicking on the Undo Operation

(or Redo Operation ) in the Main toolbar.


Step-by-Step Mode

In the Examiner (or Walkthrough ) navigation mode, the top 3D viewer (called

Main View ) displays the global scene with an initial keyframe. The bottom 3D viewer (taking the name of Video Editing and Preview) displays the view from that keyframe. In both 3D viewers, the Head Always Up option and the

Perspective project mode are default-set. The initial keyframe is at a position that corresponds to the current keyframe (of the previous creation mode) position with a shift. As the Heap Always Up option is default-set; you cannot navigate with permanent constraints ( Horizontal Pan , Horizontal Rotation , etc.) or temporary constraints ( Rotate constrained around a vertical axis, Pan constrained along a vertical axis, etc.) in the 3D viewers. You can only zoom

(in or out), pan and rotate.

Keyframe

In the Station-Based navigation mode, the top 3D viewer remains unchanged.

The bottom 3D viewer shows the view from the first station position with image(s) overlapped (if present). The initial keyframe is at the first station's position. The same navigation rules are applied in both 3D viewers except that you cannot pan in the bottom 3D viewer.

Media Tools

Add a Keyframe

To Add a Keyframe:

1. In the bottom 3D viewer, navigate through the scene to find the right point of view. the dialog, click the Add New Keyframe icon. A keyframe is added in the top 3D viewer (in the first station position when you are in the Station-Based mode).

3. Repeat the steps from 1 to 2 to add another keyframe.

In the Examiner navigation mode, a new keyframe is added in the top 3D viewer. A red curve path links this new keyframe to the previous keyframe.

In the Walkthrough navigation mode, a new keyframe is added in the top 3D viewer at the same position as the previous keyframe but with a different direction if you tilt or look at a direction. A red curve path links this new keyframe to the previous keyframe if you pan or walk through the scene.


In the Station-Based navigation mode, a new keyframe is added in the top 3D viewer at the same position as the previous keyframe but with a different orientation if you rotate (or zoom) or at the second station position if you jump to the second station. There is no red curve path linking this new keyframe to the initial keyframe.

Media Tools

4. Repeat the steps from 1 to 2 to add other keyframes.

Tip:

You can also click in a 3D viewer (top or bottom) and select Add New

Keyframe from the pop-up menu.

In (or Walkthrough ) navigation mode, use the View

Alignment tools like Center On Point to help you rotating around a point.

Note:

Adding a new keyframe at the same position than an existing keyframe will make rotate the camera of 360°.

You can undo (or redo) the addition of a keyframe by clicking on the Undo


You can switch from the Examiner navigation mode to the Walkthrough navigation mode and vice versa when adding new keyframes. You cannot switch to the Station-Based navigation mode if there are already keyframes. You need to delete all of them to be able to switch to this navigation mode.

Load Keyframes from a File

A keyframe file is a data file with *.dat as extension.

To Load Keyframes from a File:

1. Right-click in any 3D viewer to display the pop-up menu.

2. Select from the drop-down menu. The Load

Keyframes From dialog opens.

3. Navigate to the drive/folder where the file of keyframes is located.


5. Click .


Saving Keyframes to a File

The Save Keyframes to File command is only available after adding keyframes. A keyframe file is a data file with *.dat as extension.

To Save Keyframes to a File:

1. Right-click in any 3D viewer to display the pop-up menu.

Save Keyframes to File from the drop-down menu. The Save

Keyframes as dialog opens.

3. Navigate to the drive/folder where you want to store the keyframes file.

4. Enter a name in the File Name field. The extension is added automatically.

5. Click .

Edit Keyframes

After adding a keyframe, the Clear All Keyframes and Delete Current Keyframe icons as well as the Save Keyframes to File command become enabled.

Media Tools

Delete a Keyframe

To Delete a Keyframe:

1. In of the Video Creator dialog, click the Clear Current Keyframe icon. The current keyframe is removed from the sequence.

2. Or browse the sequence of keyframes using the navigation buttons to find the one you want to delete and click Clear Current Keyframe .

Note: You can undo (or redo) the deletion of a keyframe by clicking on the

Undo Operation (or Redo Operation ) button in the Main toolbar.

Delete all Keyframes

To Delete all Keyframes:

1. In of the Video Creator dialog, click the Clear all Keyframes icon.

2. Or right-click in a 3D viewer (top or bottom) and select Clear all Keyframes from the pop-up menu.

Note: You can undo the deletion of all keyframes.


Change a Keyframe Position and Orientation

To Change a Keyframe Position and Orientation:

1. Browse the sequence of keyframes using the navigation buttons to find the one for which you want to change its position or orientation.

2. In the bottom 3D viewer, navigate through the scene to find the right point of view.

If you are in the Examiner mode, the current keyframe position changes as well as the path's shape.

If you are in the Walkthrough mode, the current keyframe orientation changes while the path's shape remains unchanged.

Media Tools

If you are in the Station-Based mode, the current keyframe position changes.

All are at the same position.


Note: You can undo (or redo) the operation by clicking on the Undo Operation

(or Redo Operation ) button in the Main toolbar.

Media Tools

Path Mode

The top 3D viewer displays the global scene with a path (if there is a polyline in your project) and keyframes (one at each node of the polyline). The initial keyframe is at the starting node's position. The bottom 3D viewer - taking the name of Preview - displays the view from the current keyframe (in yellow). If your project has no polyline; the top 3D viewer still displays the global scene but without path. The bottom 3D viewer keeps the view from the current keyframe (of the previous creation mode). In both 3D viewers, the Head

Always Up option and the Perspective project mode are default-set. As the

Heap Always Up option is default-set; you cannot navigate with permanent constraints ( Horizontal Pan , Horizontal Rotation , etc.) or temporary constraints

( Rotate constrained around a vertical axis, Pan constrained along a vertical axis, etc.) in the 3D viewers. You can only zoom (in or out), pan and rotate.

1 - A defined path

2 - A keyframe

3 - The manipulator

Note: The navigation mode is restricted Examiner (or Walkthrough ).


Select a Path

The loaded project contains one (or several) polyline(s). You can select one as a path for generating a video. The selected polyline needs to be regular

(composed of one or several continuous segments with (or without) arcs).

To Select a Path:

1. Click on the Choose Path pull down arrow.

2. Select a polyline from the drop down list.

If the polyline is a set of continuous segments, a keyframe appears at each node.

If the polyline is a set of arcs, a keyframe appears at each node

(start, mids and end).

Note: If the selected polyline contains more than twenty-two nodes, a warning message appears and prompts you to select the polyline or not.

Media Tools

Draw and Create a Path

When there is no polyline, you have to create at least one in the database. The top 3D viewer displays the global scene locked in 2D with a 2D Grid superimposed (if not hidden previously). Movements while picking points are restricted to Rotate around the Z-Axis , Zoom ( In or Out ) along this same axis and Pan in the XY plane. The drawn polyline needs to be regular (composed of one or several continuous segments with or without arcs).

To Draw and Create a Path:

1. Click . The Drawing Tool and

Picking Parameters (in 2D constraint mode) toolbars appear. The mouse cursor shape changes to a pencil.

2. Draw a polyline by picking several points

End Line . The last picked point ends the line.

4. Click to save the drawn polyline in the database.

If the polyline is a set of continuous segments, a keyframe appears at each node.

If the polyline is a set of arcs, a keyframe appears at each node

(start, mids and end).

Tip: You can also select Create from the pop-up menu.

Note:

If the drawn polyline is composed of no continuous segments, an error dialog appears.

If the drawn polyline contains more than twenty-two nodes, a warning message appears and prompts you to select the polyline or not.

If the drawn polyline is a circle, five keyframes are generated. The first and fifth keys are in the same position. That's why only four keyframes are visible.


Set a Direction

There is a polyline in your project or after drawing one, the Direction field and the Reverse Path Direction and Smooth Curve icons all become activated.

Otherwise all are dimmed.

1 - Reverse Path Direction

2 - Smooth Curve

Note: Straight is the default direction.

3 - Keyframe directions

Media Tools

Change Keyframe Direction

To Change Keyframe Direction:

1. Click on the Direction pull-down arrow.

2. Choose an item from the drop-down list.

If the polyline is a set of segments, Straight sets the start [A] and end

[E] keyframes aligned respectively with the first [AB] and last [DE] segments and the other keyframes [C e.g.] parallel to the line passing through the previous and next keyframes.

If the polyline is a set of arcs, Straight sets each keyframe tangent to its node.

Left rotates all keyframes to the right of the Straight direction.

Right rotates all keyframes to the left the Straight direction.

Top rotates all keyframes so that they point upward.

Bottom rotates all keyframes so that they point downward.

Note: The white dotted line in the picture above is not present in the top 3D viewer but just here for illustrating the explanation.


Reverse the Path Direction

To Reverse the Path Direction:

1. In dialog, click the Reverse Path Direction icon.

2. Or right-click in a 3D viewer (top or bottom).

Reverse Path Direction from the pop-up menu.

Straight sets the opposite direction.

Left becomes Right .

Right becomes Left .

Top becomes Bottom .

Bottom becomes Top .

Tip: You can combine the Reverse Path Direction feature with the Smooth

Curve feature.

Smooth the Path

To Smooth a Path:

1. In dialog, click the Smooth Curve icon.

2. Or right-click in a 3D viewer (top or bottom).


Tip: You can combine the Smooth Curve feature with the Reverse Path

Direction feature.

Move the Path Along a Direction

To Move the Path Along a Direction:

1. Click on a handle; it turns to yellow. The direction along which you can displace the path (with keyframes) is highlighted in yellow and those along which you cannot displace the path (with keyframes) are in mauve.

2. Drag and drop to move the path (with keyframes) along that direction.



Media Tools

Move the Path in a Plane

To Move the Path in a Plane:

1. Click on a plane. It turns to yellow. The plane in which you can displace the path (with keyframes) appears in highlighted in yellow and those you cannot displace along are in mauve.

2. Drag and drop to move the path (with keyframes) in that plane.



Browse Keyframes

A sequence of keyframes defines which movement the spectator will see, whereas the position of the keyframes on the video defines the timing of the movement. An active keyframe - the one in yellow in the top 3D viewer - sets the starting point of that movement. If more than one keyframe is available and if the active keyframe is other than the first one, you can browse through the sequence as described below:

1 - Go to First Element

2 - Go to Previous Element

3 - Field for entering a keyframe order

To Browse Keyframes:

4 - Go to Next Element

5 - Go to Last Element

Click (or Go to Next Element ) to set the previous

(or next) keyframe as active.

Go to First Element (or Go to Last Element ) to set the first (or last) keyframe as active.

Key in a keyframe order in the path in the Go to Keyframe field to select it.

You do not need to validate by pressing the Enter key.

Tip:

Use (or End ) button of your keyboard instead of Got to First

Element (or Go to Last Element ).

Use (or Down ) arrow of the keyboard instead of Go to Previous

Element (or Go to Next Element ).


Define Video Parameters

To Define Video Parameters:

1. Enter a value in the Duration field.

1 - Video speed

2 - Launch the Video preview

3 - Duration

2. Click on the pull-down arrow below the Duration field.

3. Choose a value among x1 , x2 , x4 and x10 from the drop-down list.

Define a Duration

A Duration is second.

To Define a Duration:

Enter a value in the Duration field.

Preview a Video

To Preview a Video:

Play . The video is launched and the Play button becomes dimmed.

2. Press to stop the video preview.

Note: The video is previewed in the 4/3 format.

Create a Video

To Create a Video:

Create . The Save Video File dialog opens.

2. Navigate to the drive/folder where you want to store the video.


4. Click on the File of Type pull-down arrow.

5. Select a type from the drop-down list.

6. Click on the Resolution pull-down arrow.

Media Tools


Use a predetermined resolution. among , Web small (240x188) , Web large (320x240) , DVD (720x576) , HD 720p (1280x720) and HD

1080p (1920x1080) .

Customize your own resolution.

1204 Trimble RealWorks 9.0 User's Guide a) Select . The two Pixels fields become editable with 320 x

240 as default values. b) Set your own resolution.

8. Click on the Codec pull-down arrow.

9. Choose " to not compress the video. In that case, the

About and Options buttons remain dimmed.

10. Or choose a codec from the drop-down list. Both the About and Options buttons become active.

11. If required, click on the About button. A codec, for which the information is missing when clicking on the About button, will not open any dialog.

Otherwise, an information box appears.

12. Click on the Options button and configure your own options.

13. If required, check the Enable Preview option.

14. Click Save . The Save Video File dialog closes. RealWorks will then encode the video. When encoding is complete, a box with the following information - End of operation notified, Elapsed time for the encoding and location of the video in your hard drive - appears.

Note:

A warning message appears when the resolution values are invalid. You can only set a value between 100 and 2000.

Pressing stops the video encoding. A message which prompts you to cancel the operation (or not) appears. the option has been checked, you may see a keyframe in movement along the defined path and a preview of the video respectively in the top 3D viewer and bottom 3D viewer. And the preview format in the bottom 3D viewer switches from 4/3 to the resolution set in

Save Video File dialog.

Tip: The codecs from the drop-down list are those installed in your computer system. For practical purposes, we recommend you to install the (free) codec to ensure that your videos reach a wide audience.

Caution: All Microsoft codecs (Microsoft RLE, Microsoft YUV and Microsoft

Video 1) are removed from the RealWorks 8.1 release.

Media Tools

Capture the Screen in High Resolution

This command allows you to capture the screen of the 3D View window. The images are saved as high resolution image files in BMP format.

To Capture the Screen in High Resolution: the menu, select Capture Screen (High Resolution) .

The Save dialog opens.

2. Type a name for the image file. RealWorks assigns automatically the

.BMP extension to this file.

3. Specify the location where you want to store this file by navigating through the drive/folder.

4. Click .

C H A P T E R 1 3

Storage Tank Tools

Traditional methods for calibrating storage tanks employ complex, laborintensive techniques to achieve the required standardized results. The Storage

Tank module in RealWorks, is a set of tools, when used in combination with a

Trimble 3D Scanning system, enables to achieve the same standardized results with optimal accuracy, and less efforts.

The Storage Tank menu is present in all RealWorks products except in the

Viewer , Base and Plant ., as illustrated below. Note that both the Horizontal

Tank Calibration Tool and V ertical Tank Inspection Tool are only in the

Advanced Tank version.

1209

Vertical Tank Calibration Tool

The Vertical Tank Calibration Tool is a feature which enables to accurately determine the capacity (or partial capacities) of a vertical storage tank and expresses this capacity as a volume at given linear increments or height of liquid.

Open the Tool

To Open the Tool:

1. Select a point cloud (or a fitted mesh) from the Project Tree . the menu, select Vertical Tank Calibration Tool .

1 - Point cloud

2 - Bottom plane

3 - Top plane

4 - Bounding box

5 - Cross section center line

The dialog opens as the third tab of the

WorkSpace window. It is composed of several parts.

If the input is a point cloud, you can clean it by removing parasite points (or reduce its size by simplifying it). If the input is a fitted mesh, only a point Cloud is displayed.

By default, two planes and a cross-section center line are displayed.


Define the Height of the Dipping Plate

A Dipping Plate, also known by the name of Datum Plate is a level plate which defines the separation between the Sump part and the Body part in a vertical tank. Its Height can be picked in the 3D View or a value that the user has to enter, if known by the user.

3 - Thickness of the tank

4 - Body

1 - Dipping plate

2 - Sump

Caution: The Dipping Plate must be below the maximum level height of the

Body . If you enter a value (or pick a height ) that does not meet this requirement, an error dialog opens.

Input a Value

To Input a Value:

Enter a height value in the Dipping Plate Height field.

Storage Tank Tools

Pick a Height

To Pick a Height:

1. Navigate within the set of points to visually locate where the Dipping Plate is.

2. In Vertical Tank Calibration dialog, click the Segmentation icon.

The Segmentation Tool toolbar opens.

3. Isolate from the whole set of points by fencing.

4. Bring the view to Front , by selecting from the 3D View / Standard

Views menu.

1212 Trimble RealWorks 9.0 User's Guide the toolbar by clicking Close Tool . The two initial planes and the cross section center line appear again. the icon.

7. Pick a point on the Dipping Plate in the 3D View . The Bottom Plane will be then set to that point.

8. If required, reload the initial points that make up the tank by clicking the

Reload Points icon (within the Vertical Tank Calibration Tool ).

Tip: You can switch to the Station-Based mode. By this way, the tank is then visualized from its interior. This will help you to locate easily the Dipping Plate .

Please note this is only available in case the scan data has been acquired from the interior of the tank.

Define the Parameters of the Body

A Body is the part of a vertical tank above its Dipping Plate , from which

Sections will be computed. Its Maximum Height from the Dipping Plate can be either picked in the 3D View or entered by the user if known.

Input a Value

To Input a Value:

Enter a height value in the Maximum Level Height field.

Storage Tank Tools

Pick a Height

To Pick a Height:

1. Click on the Pick Maximum Level icon.

2. If required, bring the view to Front .

3. Pick a point on the set of points in the 3D View .

Define the Interval Between Two Consecutive Sections

An Interval is the distance between two consecutive Sections . It needs to be at least of 5 mm.

To Define the Interval Between Two Consecutive Sections:

1. Enter a distance value in the Interval field.

2. Or use the Up (or Down ) button to set a value.

Note: If the input value is lower than 5 millimeters, an error dialog opens.

Define the Parameters of the Sump

A Sump is the part of a tank below its Dipping Plate , from which a Volume will be computed. The computation is based on a 2D grid projection. The projection plane by default is a plane passing through the Dipping Plate . The Resolution is square, the same in both of the default projection plane directions ( Length and Width ). It needs to be at least of 10 mm.

To Define the Parameters of Parameters of the Sump:





Define the Thickness for Outside

Scans

You are able to compute the inner Volume and Sections of a tank even if the tank has been scanned, not from the inside, but from the outside. You have to enter a value that corresponds to the thickness of its wall.

To Define the Thickness for Outside Scans:



Storage Tank Tools

Preview the Results

You can now generate and visualize the Sections and the Volume of the Sump obtained from the set of points (before creating them in the database).

To Preview Results:

1. Click button. the dialog, the Display Sump and Display

Sections options become enabled. By default, the two Geometry options are checked. the , the Sump 's Volume is represented by a graph of vertical color lines and the Sections are represented by a set of closed and fitted (with points) Polylines . The information box, in the upper right corner, displays in text the values of the Sump Volume ,

Body Volume and Full Volume .

2. If required, check the Cloud options to display the point cloud in the 3D

View .

3. If required, uncheck the Geometry options to hide the computed Volume and Sections in the 3D View . the data to ensure that the entire area has been taken into account for the volume calculation. If you detect "holes" in the Sump Volume display, choose a different resolution setting. Reiterate this step until you achieve a satisfactory result.


1 - A set of point cloud slides

2 - The Volume of the Sump

3 - A set of Sections

Storage Tank Tools

Create the Results

Once you are satisfied with the results, you can save them in the database.

To Create the Results:

1. Click .

2. Click .

A group named Tank-Interval "Interval value" is created and rooted under the

Models Tree . All computed Sections and Volume are put under that group. A

Section is a Fitted Polyline and is named Section-TankX-Alt "Altitude Value" where X is its order in three digits, or more. A Volume is named: Sump-Dipping

Plate "Height value" .

Tip: You can leave the Vertical Tank Calibration Tool by pressing Esc or by selecting Close from the pop-up menu.

Note: You can create as many sets of Sections and Volume as required without having to leave the tool. If you decide to leave this tool without saving the results, a message appears and prompts you to confirm, undo or cancel the process.


Export the Results

The results can also be exported into a TXT format file. There are two columns of information inside the file. The first column contains all Section Heights

(above the Dipping Plate ). The second column lists the Area information at each Section level. The first line displays the Sump value.

To Export the Results:

Export . The Save As dialog opens.



4. Click . The Save As dialog closes.

Note: If the Storage Tank Application option has been chosen during the installation of RealWorks , two files are installed in X:\Program

Files\Trimble\ RealWorks 9.0

\Tables\Tank. The Excel sheet is a sample template that allows the importing of cross section data (from the above mentioned TXT file) generated by the Vertical Tank Calibration Tool . Formulas allow the user to apply compensations and to then create capacity tables. The

Word format file contains detailed instructions for importing and processing the cross section data.

Warning: You must export the results before closing the Vertical Tank

Calibration Tool , otherwise they will be lost.

Storage Tank Tools

Horizontal Tank Calibration Tool

The Horizontal Tank Calibration Tool is a feature which enables to accurately determine the capacity (or partial capacities) of a horizontal storage tank and expresses this capacity as a volume at given linear increments or height of liquid.

Open the Tool

To Open the Tool:

1. Select a point cloud (or a fitted mesh) from the Project Tree . the menu, select Horizontal Tank Calibration Tool

.

The Calibration dialog opens as the third tab of the

WorkSpace window. It is composed of several parts.

If the input is a point cloud, you can clean it by removing parasite points (or reduce its size by simplifying it). If the input is a fitted mes h , only a point cloud is displayed.

By default, two planes and a cross-section center line are displayed.

Define the Dipping Plate

A Dipping Plate , also known by the name of Datum Plate is a level plate which defines the separation between the Sump part and the Body part in a horizontal tank. Its Height can be picked in the 3D View or a value that the user has to enter, if known by the user.

Input a Value

To Input a Value:

Enter a height value in the Dipping Plate Height field.


Pick a Height

To Pick a Height:

1. Navigate within the set of points to visually locate where the Dipping Plate is. the Tank Calibration dialog, click the Segmentation icon.

The Segmentation Tool toolbar opens. the from the whole set of points by fencing.

4. Bring the view to Front , by selecting from the 3D View / Standard

Views menu. the toolbar by clicking Close Tool . The two initial planes and the cross section center line appear again. the icon.

7. Pick a point on the Dipping Plate in the 3D View . The bottom plane will be then set to that point.

8. If required, reload the initial points that make up the tank by clicking the

Reload Points icon (within the Horizontal Tank Calibration Tool ).

Tip: You can switch to the Station-Based mode. By this way, the tank is then visualized from its interior. This will help you to locate easily the Dipping Plate .

Please note that this solution is only available in case the scan data has been acquired from the interior of the tank.

Define the Body Parameters

A Body is the part of a horizontal tank above its Dipping Plate , from which some Sections will be computed. Its Maximum Height from the Dipping Plate can be either picked in the 3D View or entered by the user if known.

Input a Value

To Input a Value:

Enter a height value in the Maximum Level Height field.

Storage Tank Tools

Pick a Height

To Pick a Height:

1. Click on the Pick Maximum Level icon.

2. If required, bring the view to Front .

3. Pick a point on the set of points in the 3D View .

Define the Interval Between Two

Consecutive Sections

An Interval is the distance between two consecutive Sections . It needs to be at least of 5 mm.

To Define the Interval Between Two Consecutive Sections:

1. Enter a distance value in the Interval field.

2. Or use the Up (or Down ) button to set a value.


Define the Parameters of the Sump

A Sump is the part of a tank below its Dipping Plate , from which a Volume will be computed. The computation is based on a 2D grid projection. The projection plane by default is a plane passing through the Dipping Plate . The Resolution is square, the same in both of the default projection plane directions ( Length and Width ). It needs to be at least of 10 mm.

To Define the Parameters of Parameters of the Sump:





Define the Thickness for Outside

Scans

You are able to compute the inner Volume and Sections of a tank even if the tank has been scanned, not from the inside, but from the outside. You have to enter a value that corresponds to the thickness of its wall.

To Define the Thickness for Outside Scans:



Preview the Results

You can now generate and visualize the Sections and the Volume of the Sump obtained from the set of points (before creating them in the database).

To Preview Results:

1. Click button. the dialog, the Display Sump and

Display Sections options become enabled. By default, the two

Geometry options are checked. the , the Sump 's Volume is represented by a graph of vertical color lines and the Sections are represented by a set of closed and fitted (with points) polylines. The information box, in the upper right corner, displays in text the values of the Sump Volume ,

Body Volume and Full Volume .

2. If required, check the Cloud options to display the point cloud in the 3D

View .

3. If required, uncheck the Geometry options to hide the computed Volume and Sections in the 3D View . the data to ensure that the entire area has been taken into account for the volume calculation. If you detect "holes" in the Sump Volume display, choose a different resolution setting. Reiterate this step until you achieve a satisfactory result.

Storage Tank Tools

Create the Results

Once you are satisfied with the results, you can save them in the database.

To Create the Results:

1. Click .

2. Click .

A group named Tank-Interval "Interval value" is created and rooted under the

Models Tree . All computed Sections and Volume are put under that group. A

Section is a Fitted Polyline and is named Section-TankX-Alt "Altitude Value" where X is its order in three digits, or more. A Volume is named: Sump-Dipping

Plate "Height value" .

Tip: You can leave the Horizontal Tank Calibration Tool by pressing Esc or by selecting Close from the pop-up menu.

Note: You can create as many sets of sections and volume as required without having to leave the tool. If you decide to leave this tool without saving the results, a message appears and prompts you to confirm, undo or cancel the process.


Export the Results

The results can also be exported into a TXT format file. There are two columns of information inside the file. The first column contains all Section Heights

(above the Dipping Plate ). The second column lists the Area information at each Section level. The first line displays the Sump value.

To Export the Results:

Export . The Save As dialog opens.



4. Click . The Save As dialog closes.

Note: If the Storage Tank Application option has been chosen during the installation of RealWorks , two files are installed in X:\Program

Files\Trimble\ RealWorks 9.0

\Tables\Tank. The Excel sheet is a sample template that allows the importing of cross section data (from the above mentioned TXT file) generated by the Horizontal Tank Calibration Tool .

Formulas allow the user to apply compensations and to then create capacity tables. The Word format file contains detailed instructions for importing and processing the cross section data.

Warning: You must export the results before closing the Horizontal Tank

Calibration Tool , otherwise they will be lost.

Storage Tank Tools

Tank Calibration Check Tool

The Tank Calibration Check feature lets you to first check, and then if required, to modify the Sections previously extracted from either the Vertical Tank

Calibration Tool or the Horizontal Tank Calibration Tool .

Open the Tool

To Open the Tool: the (or Vertica l) Tank Calibration dialog, click the Check button. The Tank Calibration Check dialog opens in place of the Horizontal

(or Vertica l) Tank Calibration dialog. The first Section with fitted points is displayed in the 3D View with a 2D Grid superimposed (if not previously hidden).

Note: You can hide the 2D Grid or change its size by selecting its related command from the pop-up menu or from 3D View menu bar.

Note: You need to first generate a preview of Sections and Volume from the set of points; otherwise the Check button remains dimmed.

Filter all Sections

This step is optional, though recommended if you expect, or visually detect, significant differences from one section to the next. It allows you to filter by comparing sections from one to the next. The filtering setting called Tolerance corresponds to a degree of change from one section to the next at a percentage rate ranging from 0% to 10%. The sections for which the difference

(in percent) is higher than the defined rate are considered as potentially defective, and can then be edited.

To Filter all Sections: the options. The Tolerance slider and its field become enabled. the slider from Left to Right to set a value.

3. Or enter a rate in the field.

Note: The Step 1 is dimmed in case of a horizontal tank.


Select a Section to Edit

If the Step 1 has been skipped, all sections extracted from the Horizontal Tank

Calibration Tool (or Vertical Tank Calibration Tool ) are listed in Step 2 . If the

Step 1 has been executed, only the extracted sections that are considered as out of tolerance are listed here. By default, the first section from the list is the selected one and is displayed with its associated points in the 3D View .

1 - A list of Sections 2 - The order of the Sections in that list

If the selected (active) section is other than the first section, you can use the

Up and Down keys of your keyboard (or Display Previous Contour and

Display Next Contour buttons in the dialog) to display the next and the previous section in the 3D View . The Display First Contour or Display Last

Contour buttons will set the first section or last section as active (selected).

You can also key in a number in Step 2 to select it.

Tip: You can hide the slice of points that is associated with the selected section by un-checking the Display Cloud option.

Storage Tank Tools

Edit a Section

This step is dedicated to the editing of defective sections. Only one section can be edited at a time; the selected one. As a section is a fitted polyline which is composed of a set of segments, you can use the Polyline Drawing Tool to modify it manually by moving vertices. You can also delete a part and connect extremities with a segment.

1 - Polyline Drawing Tool

2 - Standard Selection Mode

3 - Delete and Connect Extremities

4 - Reload Initial Section

Tip: All features can be selected from the pop-up menu.

Modify Manually a Section

To Modify Manually a Section: the icon. The Drawing Tool and Picking


2. Place the cursor over the Section . A solid square appears if you are on a node, if you are on a middle node and if you are on a middle node to insert.

3. Drag the node to a position. The selected node turns to yellow.

4. Drop the node to that position.

5. Click .

Note: If required, reload the initial Section by clicking .

Tip: The Polyline Drawing Tool icon can also be selected from the pop-up menu.


Select Items from a Section

A section is a fitted polyline which is composed of segments.

To Select Items from a Section: the icon.


3. Double-click to end and validate the polygonal fence.

Note: To undo the previously drawn fence and start a new one, select the

Standard Selection Mode icon again.

Tip: The Standard Selection Mode icon can also be selected from the popup menu.

Storage Tank Tools

Delete and Connect Extremities

To Delete and Connect Extremities:

1. Perform a selection as described previously. the icon. Segments inside the previous selection are deleted and the extremities are connected together with a Segment .

3. If required, reload the initial Section by clicking .

Tip: The Reload Initial Section and Delete and Connection Extremities icons can be selected from the pop-up menu.

Apply the Modifications

If some modifications have been applied to the selected section, click Apply .

The Tank Calibration Check dialog will save the changes and then close.

Otherwise, click Close . This will close the Tank Calibration Check dialog too.


Vertical Tank Inspection Tool

This feature enables to inspect the verticality and the roundness of a vertical tank by comparing its point cloud to a theoretical model, at different levels

(along the tank) and at constant step (around the tank).

Open the Tool

To Open the Tool:

1. Select a point cloud from the Project Tree . the menu, select Vertical Tank Inspection Tool .

The Vertical Tank Inspection dialog opens.

The Use Constraint View , when selected, applies a constraint to the selected point cloud. This constraint locks the rotation around the

Z-Axis and around the center of the box that bounds the selected point cloud. In addition, only the closest half part of the selected point cloud is visible.

The and the Sampling Tool are sub-tools. They enable to prepare the selected point cloud, by reducing its size and/or removing undesirable points.

The enables to reload the initial state of the selected point cloud.

Storage Tank Tools

Clean the Selected Point Cloud

This step consists of cleaning the selected point cloud by automatically removing noisy or undesirable points from the tank shell. These points can be either pipes that are outside the tank, ladders, or grass growing around the base of the tank, etc. You need to first define two points, the Top and the

Bottom of tank. These two points will be then used for delimiting the cleaning.

To Clean the Selected Point Cloud: the icon. the , pick a point, on the displayed point cloud. A plane, at height of the picked point and perpendicular to the Z axis, is displayed.

The value of the picked point height is displayed in the Top field. the icon. the , pick a point on the displayed point cloud. A plane, at height of the picked point and perpendicular to the Z axis, is displayed.

The value of the picked point height is displayed in the Bottom field. the button. The selected point cloud is cleaned.


6. If some points remain after the cleaning, you can use the Segmentation

Tool to manually remove them.

7. If the selected point cloud has not been properly cleaned, you can click

Reload Points . It takes back its initial state.

Tip: If you know the Top and the Bottom of the tank, you can enter their value, respectively in the Top field and in the Bottom field, instead of picking points.

Caution: The Top value should be higher than the Bottom value.

Note: After cleaning, the Quick Clean button becomes dimmed.

Storage Tank Tools

Fit the Selected Point Cloud With a

Model

This step consists in fitting the selected point cloud, cleaned in Step 1 , with a model. You need to define two points that reference the Upper Bound and the

Lower Bound of the fitting area. The best practice is to pick two points at the base of the tank. The fitting will start then from the base and will propagate to the top. The distance between the Upper Bound and the Lower Bound must be sufficient. The fitted model, which is a cylinder, has its axis constrained by the true vertical.

To Fit the Selected Point Cloud With a Model: the icon. the , pick a point on the displayed point cloud. the icon. the , pick a point on the displayed point cloud. the button. The selected point cloud is fitted with a cylinder.

Its diameter and Its circumference, deduced from the fitting, are displayed in the information box in the 3D View .

Note: After fitting, the Fit button becomes dimmed and the Display Model option is checked by default.


Define a Grid

This step, when it is chosen, launches a sub-tool called Tank Grid Definition . It enables to define a set of horizontal lines ( Courses ) and vertical lines

( Stations ), which correspond respectively to the horizontal weld seams and the vertical weld seams on a tank (refer to the illustration below).

This step also enables to define a set of measurement rules. Both the grid and the measurement rules will be used to compute the inspection between the point cloud and the fitted cylinder.

1 - Horizontal weld seams (Courses)

2 - Vertical weld seams (Stations)

3 - Course height

To Define a Grid:

4 - Shell

5 - Roof

Click on the Define/Edit button. The Tank Grid Definition dialog opens, in place of the Vertical Tank Inspection dialog.

The cylinder, fitted in Step 2 of the Vertical Tank Inspection, is hidden.

Storage Tank Tools

Define Stations

In a tank, a Station is a vertical line which may correspond (or not) to a vertical weld seam.

Define the Initial Station

To Define the Initial Station:

1. Click icon. The cursor takes the following shape .

2. In 3D View , pick a point, over a vertical weld seam (or not). The 3D coordinates of the picked point are displayed in the Initial Station field.

Or

3. Enter the 3D coordinates of a point in the Initial Station field.

Enter to validate.

Note: You can cancel the initial Inspection Station by selecting Undo .


Define the Rest of the Stations

To Define the Rest of the Stations:

1. Enter a distance value in the Step field.

2. Press to validate.

A set of vertical (and blue) lines appears all around the tank. The longer one is the initial line (initial Inspection Station ).

The number of lines, which is always a multiple of 2, is obtained by subdividing the circumference of the tank by the Step value.

The value, you entered in the Step field, is automatically adjusted to a value to fit the subdivision and the multiple-of-two constraint.

Or

3. Enter a number in the Number of Stations field.

Enter to validate.

If the input number is not a multiple of 2; it will be changed by a value, greater and multiple of 2.

The Step value will change to take into account this new number.

Note: You can cancel the whole Station s except the initial one by selecting

Undo .

Caution: The minimum of Stations, you entered, should be at least 4. If you enter a number lower than 4, an error message appears.

Storage Tank Tools

Define Courses

In a tank, a Course is a circumferential ring which corresponds to a horizontal weld seam.


Add Courses

To Add Courses: the button. The cursor takes the following shape .

The Add Courses button takes the name of Done . the 3D View , pick a point, ideally over a horizontal weld seam.

A horizontal line in orange which symbolizes a horizontal weld seam is displayed as illustrated below.

Its position along the tank, which is displayed in the information box in the 3D

View , defines its order in regards to the others.

3. Repeat the step above to add other Courses . the button.

Note: You can cancel the addition of lines by selecting Undo .

Storage Tank Tools

Tip: You can leave the picking mode by pressing Esc .

Note: You can add a series of lines without having to leave the tool.


Remove Courses

To Remove Courses:

1. Click button. The cursor takes the following shape

. the 3D View , pick a line.

The picked line is removed.

Note: You can cancel the removal of lines by selecting Undo .


Note: You can only remove one course at a time.

Storage Tank Tools

Edit a Grid

This step enables to edit the grid previously defined, by moving either the

Station lines or the Course lines.


Shift a Station

To Shift a Station: the button. The cursor takes the following shape .

2. In 3D View , pick a Station . Its color turns to pink.

3. Pick a new position in a space delimited by the next Station and the previous Station . The selected Station is shifted horizontally to the picked position.

4. Click button.

Note: You can cancel the shift of the Station by selecting Undo .


Storage Tank Tools

Caution: You are not allowed to shift a Station to a position which may modify its order in regards with the rest of the Stations .


Shift a Course

To Shift a Course: the button. The cursor takes the following shape .

2. In 3D View , pick a Course. Its color turns to pink.

3. Pick a new position in a space delimited by the next Course and the previous Course . The selected Course is shifted vertically to the picked position.

Done .

Note: You can cancel the shift by selecting Undo .


Storage Tank Tools

Define a Set of Measurement Rules

This step enables to define a series of horizontal measurement rules, spaced at a regular distance between two consecutive Courses, and/or above the

Courses , and/or below the Courses .

4 - Height above a Course

5 - Height below a Course

1 - Course

2 - Course height

3 - Regular Interval

Note : If a measurement rule is out of a tank, it won't be taken into account in the computation of the result.

Caution: Be aware that all of the parameters input in this step are persistent.

You have to reset them manually.

Note: You can display (or hide) the measurement rules by checking (or unchecking) the Display Rules option.


Define Measurement Rules Spaced at Regular Distance Between Two

Courses

To Define Measurement Rules Spaced at Regular Distance Between Two

Courses:

1. Enter an integer value in the Regular Intervals field.

Enter to validate.

A set of measurement rules spaced at regular distance

Note: The Regular Intervals value should be at least 2.

Storage Tank Tools

Define a Unique (or a Series of) Measurement Rule(s) Above the Courses

To Define a Unique (or a Series of) Measurement Rules Above the Courses:

Step 4 , enter a distance value in the Above field.

2. Press . The input value is then displayed with the current unit of measurement and with a semi-colon.

A measurement rule above a Course

3. If required, enter a new value after the semi-colon.

4. Press again to validate.

A series of measurement rules above a course

Note: A value entered in the Above is always positive.


Define a Unique (or a Series of) Measurement Rule(s) Below the Courses

To Define a Unique (or a Series of) Measurement Rules Below the Courses:

Step 4 , enter a distance value in the Below field.

2. Press . The input value is then displayed with the current unit of measurement and with a semi-colon.

A measurement rule below a Course

3. If required, enter a new value after the semi-colon.

Enter again to validate.

A series of measurement rules below a course

Note: A value entered in the Below is always positive. If you input a negative value, the value will not be taken into account.

Storage Tank Tools

Apply the Grid and Compute the Inspection

The Apply button computes the distances between the fitted cylinder and the point cloud at the positions defined by intersecting the whole vertical lines

( Station lines) with the measurement rule lines. If no point has been found in a large area around an intersection position, an error message will be displayed and the computation will not be done.

After applying the grid, Step 4 in the Vertical Tank Inspection dialog becomes enabled.


Check the Verticality of a Tank

This step, when chosen, launches a sub-tool called Tank Vertically Check . It enables to inspect the vertically of a tank, by comparing its point cloud with the fitted model, along the Station lines and at the positions defined by intersecting these Station lines with the horizontal measurement rules defined Step 4 of the

Tank Grid Definition sub-tool. Note that a Station line has the naming illustrated below.

1 - Vertical measurement N

2 - Vertical measurement N + 1

3 - Vertical measurement N + 2

To Check the Roundness of a Tank:

Click on the Vertically button. The Tank Vertically Check dialog opens, in place of the Vertical Tank Inspection dialog.

Both the cylinder (fitted in Step 2 of the Vertical Tank Inspection) and the selected point cloud are hidden in the 3D View .

Storage Tank Tools

Filter Sections

The slicing of the selected point cloud along the Station lines, are called

Sections . All are selected after entering into the Tank Verticality Check subtool. The number of selected Stations is displayed in Step 1 . The measurements, made at the points by intersecting the Station lines with the measurement rule lines, are called Measurement Points .

By default, the first Section (in order) is the one selected (in Step 2 ) and displayed in the 3D View . The Apply Filter option is by default not chosen. But when you choose it, it enables to filter by only keeping the Sections for which some measurement points are not in the Tolerance the user has to define.

To Filter the Sections:

1. Check option. The Tolerance field becomes enabled.

2. Enter a distance value in the Tolerance field.

The measurement points that are out of the defined Tolerance are in red.

Those that are in the defined Tolerance are in blue.

Step 1 , the number of selected Selections is updated according to the defined Tolerance .

Step 2 , the number of Vertical Measurements is also updated.


1 - A measurement point out of the defined

Tolerance

2 - A measurement point in the defined

Tolerance

Caution: Be aware that the value put in the Tolerance parameter is persistent.

You have to reset it manually.

Storage Tank Tools

Analyze the Vertically from one Station Line

If the Step 1 has been skipped, all Sections are listed in Step 2 . If the Step 1 has been executed, only the Sections that are not in the defined Tolerance are listed here. By default, the first Section from the list is the selected one and is displayed in the 3D View .

1 - Point cloud

2 - Model (fitted cylinder)

3 - A section

4 - A measurement point

To Analyze the Verticality from One Station Line:

1. Click (or Display Previous Section ) to display the next (or previous) section in the 3D View . click (or Display First Section ) to display the last (or first) section in the 3D View .

3. Or key a number and press Enter .

4. If required, check the Display Cloud option.

5. If required, check the Display Reference option.

6. Zoom in or zoom out the displayed Section .

Tip :


You can use the Up (or Down ) Arrow key instead of Display Next Section

(or Display Previous Section ).

You can use the Home (or End ) key instead of Display First Section (or

Display Last Section )

Storage Tank Tools

Check the Roundness of a Tank

This step, when it is chosen, launches a sub-tool called Tank Roundness

Check . It enables to inspect the roundness of a tank, by comparing its point cloud with the fitted model at the positions defined by intersecting the Station lines with the horizontal measurement rules defined Step 4 of the Tank Grid

Definition sub-tool. Note that a horizontal measurement line has the naming illustrated below.

1 - Course N

2 - A measurement rule line between two

Courses (called Course N + 1/Regular Interval value)

3 - A measurement line between two Courses

(called Course N + 2/Regular Interval value)

4 - Course N+1

5 - A measurement line above a Course (called

Course N+1 + Height Below)

5 - A measurement line between two Courses is called Course N+1 + Height Above

To Check the Roundness of a Tank:

Click on the Roundness button. The Tank Roundness Check dialog opens, in place of the Vertical Tank Inspection dialog.

Both the cylinder (fitted in Step 2 of the Vertical Tank Inspection) and the selected point cloud are hidden in the 3D View .


The view is brought to Top , locked in 2D with the 2D Grid displayed.

Storage Tank Tools

Filter all Sections

The slicing of the selected point cloud along the measurement rule lines, are called Sections . All are selected after entering into the Tank Roundness Check sub-tool. The number of selected Stations is displayed in Step 1 . The measurements, made at the points by intersecting the Station lines with the measurement rule lines, are called Measurement Points .

By default, the higher Section (in elevation) is the one selected (in Step 2 ) and displayed in the 3D View . The Apply Filter option is by default not chosen. But when you choose it, it enables to filter by only keeping the Sections for which some measurement points are not in the Tolerance the user has to define.

To Filter the Sections:

1. Check option. The Tolerance field becomes enabled.

2. Enter a distance value in the Tolerance field.

The measurement points that are out of the defined Tolerance are in red.

Those that are in the defined Tolerance are in yellow.

Step 1 , the number of selected Selections is updated according to the defined Tolerance .

Step 2 , the number of Courses is also updated.


1 - A measurement point out of the defined 2 - A measurement point in the defined

Tolerance Tolerance

Caution: Be aware that the value put in the Tolerance parameter is persistent.

You have to reset it manually.

Storage Tank Tools

Analyze the Roundness from One Measurement Rule

Line

If the Step 1 has been skipped, all Sections are listed in Step 2 . If the Step 1 has been executed, only the Sections that are not in the defined Tolerance are listed here. By default, the first Section from the list is the selected one and is displayed in the 3D View .

1 - Point cloud

2 - Model (fitted cylinder)

3 - A section

4 - A measurement point

To Analyze the Roundness from One Measurement Rule Line:

Display Next Section (or Display Previous Section ) to display the next (or previous) section in the 3D View .

2. Or (or Display First Section ) to display the last (or first) section in the 3D View .

3. Or key a number and press Enter .

4. If required, check the Display Cloud option.

5. If required, check the Display Reference option.

6. Zoom in or zoom out the displayed Section .


Tip :

You can use the Up (or Down ) Arrow key instead of Display Next Section

(or Display Previous Section ).

You can use the Home (or End ) key instead of Display First Section (or

Display Last Section )

Create a Report

To Create a Report:: the button. The Vertical Tank Inspection Report dialog opens.

2. Navigate to the drive/folder where you want the report file to be stored in the Look In field.

3. Enter a name in the File Name field. The extension RTF is added automatically.

4. Click . A new Vertical Tank Inspection Report dialog.

Define the Pass/Fail Criteria.

Define the Conventions that will be used in the plots.

5. Click . The Vertical Tank Inspection Report dialog closes and the report opens of its own.

Pass/Fail Criteria

The Top Tolerance parameter corresponds to a tolerance applied to the top of the tank. If a measurement in the top part of the tank is greater than the value entered in the Top Tolerance field, it will be highlighted in the report.

The Height above Shell-to-Bottom Weld field allows the user to define an area with a tolerance different from the Top Tolerance . This area starts at the bottom of the tank ( Shell-to-Bottom Weld ) and ends at the elevation defined by the user.

The Bottom Tolerance is a tolerance used for the bottom of the tank in the report.

Storage Tank Tools

Conventions

The Clockwise and Counterclockwise options enable to set a direction around which the Stations will be incremented.

The Numbers from 0 option, when chosen, enables to start the numbering of

Stations at 0.

The Numbers from 1 option, when chosen, enables to start the numbering of

Stations at 1.

The Angles option, when chosen, enables to display the numbering of

Stations , as angular values (always in degrees).

The Display Point Cloud in Plots enables to display points in the plots.


Save the Inspection Results

After clicking Create , a folder, named Tank Inspection, is created in the

RealWorks database. This folder, rooted under the Models tree, is composed of a Cloud , a Cylinder and two sub-folders named Grid and Measurements .

The created cloud comes from the cleaning of the selected point cloud (see

Step 1 ). The created cylinder comes from the fitting of the cleaned cloud (see

Step 2 ). The Grid folder contains a set of polylines which corresponds to the

Courses and Stations (defined in the Tank Grid Definition sub-tool). The

Measurements folder contains a set of fitted polylines which results from inspecting the selected point cloud with its theorical model (see Tank Grid

Definition sub-tool).

Note: You can use the inspection results as input of the Vertical Tank

Inspection Tool .

C H A P T E R 1 4

Advanced Features

All the RealWorks family of products contain the advanced features described in the hereafter topics except for RealWorks Viewer which only contains the

Set as Home Frame feature.

1265

Set as Home Frame

Each project has a Home Frame under which all data reside. If needed, you can select one of the frames of the project and set it as the new Home Frame .

It is important to note that this operation will transform the coordinates of the whole database to this new frame. You can use this operation to orient, for example, a building scene so that its Z-axis is perpendicular to its ground plane, and its origin is on a specific corner of a building. The difference between this operation and that of setting Active frame is that in the latter case, there is no coordinate transformation.

To Set as Home Frame:

1. Select a coordinate frame from the List window. the menu, select Advanced . A sub-menu drops down.

3. Select .

Note: There is no Undo for this operation. So you should use it with care.


Equalize Point Cloud Luminance

You can equalize the intensity of all points of a project. The equalization augments the intensity dynamics to the whole range (0,255). You can see the results immediately if you are in the intensity displaying mode ( Gray Scale

Intensity or Color Coded Intensity ).

To Equalize Point Cloud Luminance:


2. In menu, select Advanced . A submenu drops down.

3. Select from the submenu. A message will prompt you to confirm (or cancel) the operation.


Note:

There is no Undo for this operation. So you should use it with care.

This operation can take a significant amount of time in the case of large datasets.

Advanced Features

Equalize Point Cloud Color

Generally speaking, data acquired by a 3D laser scanning system (scanner and embedded camera) contain a 3D point cloud and a collection of 2D images. Each point of the point cloud can contain not only its 3D coordinates, but also other attributes such as intensity or color. The intensity information is given by the scanner and the color information by the camera. Point color equalization merges both the intensity information and the color information inside a single project. You can see the result immediately if you are in the intensity displaying mode ( Gray Scale Intensity or True Color ).

To Equalize Point Cloud Color:

1. Select a project from the Project Tree . the menu, select Advanced . A submenu drops down.

3. Select . A message prompts you to confirm or cancel the operation.

Yes to continue.

Note:

There is no Undo for this operation. So you should use it with care.

This operation can take a significant amount of time in the case of large datasets.


Equalize Image Color

In the Station-Based mode, a scene is viewed from a station's point of view with overlapped images in the background (if not hidden). Each image has brightness characteristics different from its neighbor. This tool allows adjustment of the brightness of the images and blending overlapping regions if required.

To Equalize Image Color:

1. Select a set of images (or a project with images inside). the mode (if required). the menu, select Advanced . A submenu drops down.

4. Select from the submenu. The dialog below appears.

Advanced Features

Clicking s will adjust the brightness of the images and blend the overlapped regions.

No will only adjust the brightness of the images.

Note:

You can undo the operation if required.

You do not need to display (or open) the selected images to perform this operation.

The selected images need to belong to a station.


Color Points Using Station Images

This feature lets your to color all the points of a station using the associated images. The only prerequisite is that the images should be matched images. In any processing mode, you can select a project and the point coloring will be applied to all stations of the project. In Registration , the user can select a station (or a set of stations), the point coloring will be applied to the selected station(s). Note that there is no undo. Point coloring is permanent.

To Color Points using Station Images:

1. Select a project from the Project Tree (in any processing mode).

2. Or select a station (or a set of stations) from the Project Tree . the menu, select Advanced . A sub-menu drops down.

4. Select from the sub-menu. A dialog appears and prompts you to continue or to abort the action.

Advanced Features

Delete a Geometry

If an object in the Models Tree has both representations (geometric and cloud), you can delete its geometric representation.

To Delete a Geometry:

1. Select an object with both properties (cloud and geometric) from the

Project Tree . the menu, select Advanced . A sub-menu drops down.

3. Select from the sub-menu bar.

Note:

You can also right-click on an object with both properties (cloud and geometry) in the Models Tree (or in the 3D View ) to display the pop-up menu and select Delete Geometry .

You can also use the Del key.

C H A P T E R 1 5

Exporting Data

All the RealWorks family of products contain the export features described in the hereafter topics except for RealWorks Viewer.

Caution: For all export features, a dialog opens and prompts you to input a

File Name . Please, note that you cannot leave the File Name field empty. You have to enter a name. Otherwise, you cannot export.

Chapter 15 Exporting Data

The table below lists all of the available formats as well as the entities in

RealWorks that will be exported to a chosen format.

Chapter 15 Exporting Data

To Export a Selection as a File:

1. Select data to be exported from the Project Tree . the menu, select Export Selection . The Export Selection ' Name of Data to be exported ' dialog opens.


4. Select a type of file from the drop-down list.



Save . The Export as File dialog opens.

1279

Export a Selection as a File

The Export Selection feature is dedicated to the export of a selection from

RealWorks toward a file for which the format can come from a third party software, a competitor, etc. The table below lists all of the available formats.

The PDMS export is not present in the Viewer , Base , Advanced and Advanced

Modeler versions.


Google Earth (KMZ) Format

A KML (Keyhole Marked Language) file is a XML-based-language file from

Google Earth (originally called Earth Viewer and created by Keyhole Inc.).

Google Earth is a virtual globe program which maps the earth by superimposing images obtained from satellite imagery and aerial photography, etc. A KML file contains geo-referenced information (about points, lines and text) to display in Google Earth . A KMZ file is simply a zip compressed KML file with images. KMZ is the default Google Earth format. In RealWorks , meshes

(textured with images or not) and geometries (plane, cylinder, sphere, etc.) can be exported to Google Earth .

To Export as a KMZ Format File: the dialog, do one of the following:

In a basic Geodetic System, a location (or a point) on the Earth has as coordinates its longitude and latitude, both expressed in angles. A latitude is measured from the equator and a longitude from a meridian (the Greenwich meridian is used as reference). There are around a hundred Geodetic Systems in use around the world differing from country to country. A unified Geodetic

System (called WGS84, dating from 1984) is in use in Google Earth. In the

WGS84 coordinate system, the distance of one degree in longitude changes according to the latitude. This drawback disappears in the Universal

Transverse Mercator (UTM) system which is a grid-based method of specifying locations on the surface of the Earth. The surface of the Earth is divided between 80° S latitude and 84° N latitude into 60 zones, each 6° of longitude in width and centered over a meridian of longitude. Zones are numbered from 1 to 60.

Define your own conversion Parameters.

Convert UTM coordinates to WGS84 latitude and longitude.

Note:

You can also select a project with meshes (or geometries) inside.

A geometry is converted in a mesh when exporting.

Exporting Data

User Defined

If the selected mesh (or geometry) has been geo-referenced in a coordinate system different from the UTM coordinate system (for example the Lambert or the Trimble GX™ scanner), the Export as KMZ File dialog opens with the

"User Defined" option set as default. Exporting to the Google Earth format involves defining a " Reference Point " on the selected mesh/geometry (mainly a point on the ground) and giving its related latitude and longitude coordinates in the WGS84 coordinate system.

To Define your Own Conversion Parameters: the option.

2. Enter reference point coordinates in the Define Reference Point .

3. Or click on the Pick Reference Point icon. The Picking Parameters toolbar appears in 3D constraint mode and the cursor shape changes to a pointer.

4. Pick a point on displayed items in the 3D View (for example the ground).

Its coordinates in the current unit of measurement appear in the Define

Reference Point field.

5. Enter an angle value in Latitude field.


6. Click on the Latitude pull-down arrow.

7. Choose and South from the drop-down list.

8. Enter an angle value in the Longitude field.

9. Click on the Longitude pull-down arrow.

10. Choose between East and West from the drop list.

11. If required, add a description.

12. Click Export . The Export as KML File dialog closes.

Note: If the selected mesh (or geometry) hasn't been geo-referenced in any coordinate system, the user will have to orientate the scene by himself in

Google Earth .

Tip: You can use the Add Placemark tool in Google Earth to get the longitude and latitude coordinates of the Reference Point .

Exporting Data

UTM to WGS84 Latitude and Longitude

If the selected mesh (or geometry) is geo-referenced in the UTM coordinate system, the Export as KMZ File dialog opens with the "UTM to WGS84

Latitude/Longitude" option set by default. Exporting to the Google Earth format means converting the mesh (or geometry) coordinates expressed in the UTM coordinates to the WGS84 coordinates (latitude, longitude and height).

To Convert UTM Coordinates to WGS84 Latitude and Longitude: the option.

2. Click on the UTM Latitude Hemisphere pull-down arrow.

3. Choose and South from the drop-down list.

4. Enter a number in the UTM Zone Number field.

5. If required, add a description.

6. Click . The Export as KML File dialog closes.


BSF Format

You can export a project, a station (or a scan) or an object with point cloud inside from RealWorks to a BSF format file at once*. This station can be one created from a Trimble FX Controller file or not.

To Export as a BSF Format File: the dialog, click on the Export Frame pull-down arrow.

2. Select a frame to apply to the data from the drop-down list.

3. Click on the Unit pull-down arrow.

4. Select a unit among Meter , International Foot or U.S. Survey Foot .

5. Click . The Export to BSF dialog closes.

Note:

A file of BSF format has *.bsf

as extension.

A warning message appears if no cloud (or an empty cloud) has been selected.

(*) You can select several objects as input but only the first (of the selection) is exported.

PDMS Macro Format

You can export any entities created within RealWorks into a PDMS macro file like Box, Circular Torus, Cone, Cylinder, Eccentric Cone, Ellipsoid (with or without one or two bounds), Point, Pyramid, Rectangular Torus, Sphere (with or without one or two bounds), Plane and Extrusion..

To Export as a PDMS Macro Format File:

1. In dialog, click on the Export Frame pull-down arrow.

2. Select a frame to apply to the exported data from the drop-down list.


4. Select a unit* from the drop-down list.

Export . The PDMS Export dialog closes.

Note:

A file of PDMS Macro format carries the pdmsmac file extension.

(*) Only the Millimeter unit is available.

Exporting Data

E57 Format



To Export as an E57 Format File: the dialog, click on the Export Frame pull-down arrow.

2. Choose a frame to apply from the drop-down list.

3. Check an option among Export Intensity and Export RGB Color .

4. Click . The Export as E57 File dialog closes.

Note:

Only an object with a point cloud inside can be exported. If an object has sub-objects with no points inside, a warning message appears and warns the user that this (or these) sub-object(s) are not exported.

A file of E57 format carries the e57 file extension.

Caution: Data are exported to the E57 format as an irregular grid point sets, in the Cartesian coordinates (XYZ).

LAS Format

The LAS file format is a public file format for the interchange of 3-dimensional point cloud data between data users. It is binary-based.


To Export as a LAS Format File: the dialog, click on the Export Frame pull-down arrow.

2. Choose a frame to apply from the drop-down list.

3. To export color, check the Export RGB Color option.

4. Click . The Export as LAS File dialog closes.

Note:

Only an object with a point cloud inside can be exported. If an object has sub-objects with no points inside, a warning message is displayed and warns the user that this (or these) sub-object(s) are not exported.

A file of LAS format has *.las as extension.

Data and bounding box limits are exported in meter.

Warning: An error dialog opens if no cloud (or an empty cloud) is in selection.

Caution: The LAS file format has coordinate size limitations. When you export a georeferenced scene using the LAS format, be aware that its size may have an impact on the precision of the exported data. For a scene with a size smaller than 2000 Km, you will have a precision to the millimeter. For a scene with a size larger than 2000 Km, you will have a precision to the centimeter.

For a scene with a size larger than 20000 km, you will have a precision to the decimeter.

Warning: The dialog below appears if points to be exported are too far from the origin of the coordinates frame that will be applied. Precision of the data may be reduced if you choose Yes .

Note: RealWorks does export a selection as LAS (or LAZ ) format file, in version 1.2.

Exporting Data

LAZ format

The LAZ format is a compressed version of the LAS format. Exporting to the

LAZ format is similar to the LAS one. Refer to the LAS format topic for more information.

AutoCAD PCG format (AutoDesk Revit

MEP)

Before being able to be used in an AutoCAD drawing, points are first exported into a LAS format file which is an ASCII based format file. This file, which is a temporary file, is then converted as a PCG format file. This conversion step is called Indexing . Once completed, the PCG format file is attached to the drawing. This is similar to attaching an external reference (e.g. an image file) to the drawing.

To Export as a PCG Format File: the dialog, click on the Export Frame pull-down arrow.

2. Select a frame to apply to the data to export.

3. Check an option among the options below:

Export Intensity .

Export RGB Color .

4. Click . The File Indexing dialog opens.

5. Click .

Note:

You should have AutoDesk Revit MEP (Vers. 2013) installed on your computer.

Data and bounding box limits are exported in meter.


Alias/WaveFront (OBJ) Format

Alias/Wavefront is a provider of 2D/3D graphics technology for the film, video, games, interactive media, industrial design, automotive industry and visualization markets. Their .OBJ ASCII file format is widely accepted for exchanging graphical data between drafting applications. OBJ files contain solids which are made up of 3 or 4 sided faces. Only meshes can be exported to this format.

To Export as an Alias/WaveFront (OBJ) Format File:

1. In dialog, click on the Export Frame pull-down arrow.

2. Select a coordinates frame to apply from drop-down list.


4. Select a unit system to apply in the Unit field.

5. Click .

Note:

A file of Alias/WaveFront (OBJ) format carries the obj file extension.

Only a mesh can be exported. Trying to export anything else makes an error dialog appeared.

Exporting Data

MicroStation (DGN) Format

DGN for DesiGN is a file format of Bentley MicroStation®. Exporting to this format means exporting a selection from RealWorks to the MicroStation® format. You can only export one project at a time. MicroStation® includes the notion of layers which can be used as a tool for organizing and gathering information about a drawing. These layers can be considered as an electronic version of traditional layers. In addition to the layers, this format includes the notion of working units which are the real-world units that you work with in drawing or creating your models in a DGN file. The working units are set as

Master Units (the largest units in common use in a design, such as meters) and fractional Sub Units (the smallest convenient unit to use, such as centimeters or millimeters). The Sub Units cannot be larger than Master Units .

To Export as a DGN Format File:

1. Select data to be exported from the Models Tree .

2. In menu, select Export Selection . The Export dialog opens.


MicroStation Files (*.DGN) as file type.



7. Click . The Export as DGN File dialog opens.

Layer : This option allows you to define a number of layers.

Export Of : This option allows you to choose which kind of objects you want to export: Selected Clouds and Geometries , Selected

Geometries and Selected Clouds .

Export Frame : A project may have several coordinate frames. This option allows you to select which coordinate frame from the dropdown list you want to apply to the exported data.

Master Unit : This option allows you to select a unit system to the

Master unit.

Sub Unit : This option allows you to select a unit system to the Sub unit.

Positional Unit : This option allows you to enter a value for the

Positional unit.

8. Select the kind of objects to be exported in the Export of field.

9. Select the coordinates frame to be applied in the Export Frame field.

10. Select the unit system to be applied for the master unit in the Master Unit field.

11. Select the unit system to be applied for the sub unit in the Sub Unit field.

12. Enter a value for the positional unit in the Positional Unit field

13. Click Export .


Note: You can also select and export a scan/station of a project in the Models

(or Scans ) Tree .

Pointools Format

POD (Point Database) files are Bentley 's native point cloud format. No specific dialog appears when you export a selection to this format. A selection can be a cloud, a scan, a station or a project. Points, color, intensity and normal (if available) information (from the selection) are then exported.

Exporting Data

AutoCAD (DXF) Format

DXF for Drawing eXchange Format is an ASCII file format of an AutoCAD® drawing file. Exporting to the DXF format means to export a selection from

RealWorks to the AutoCAD® application. AutoCAD® includes the notion of layers which can be used as a tool for organizing and gathering information about a drawing. These layers can be considered as an electronic version of traditional layers. The selection hierarchy is preserved during the export; each group or lone object has its own layer. You can only export one project at a time; in this case every type of object (geometries and clouds) in the project can be exported, except frames, measurements, feature code sets and registration entities.

To Export as a DXF Format File:

1. In dialog, choose an option among those listed below.

Export Of : This option allows you to choose which kind of objects you want to export: Selected Clouds and Geometries , Selected

Geometries or Selected Clouds .



Cloud Rendering : This option allows you to select a rendering that will be applied to the exported point cloud.

Export Coplanar Polylines as 3D DXF Polylines : Coplanar polylines will be exported as 3D DXF polylines. That is to say that all circle arcs will be discretized in segments.

Export Coplanar Polylines in XY Plane : All nodes of the polyline(s) are exported in the XY plane.

Export . The Export as DXF File dialog closes.

Note:

You can also select and export a scan/station of a project in the Models

(or Scans ) Tree .

Selecting in the Export Of field will gray out the

Cloud Rendering field.

Selecting in the Export Of field will gray out both the

Export Coplanar Polylines as 3D DXF Polylines and Export Coplanar

Polylines in XY Plane options.


ASCII Format

ASCII is the acronym for American Standard Code for Information Interchange.

Exporting to this file format involves exporting a selection from RealWorks to the ASCII format. You can only export one project at a time; in this case only point clouds are exported. In such conditions, an ASCII file format is composed of a header (mainly comments) and a set of lines. Each line is composed of one point with coordinates (X, Y and Z), and where present, attributes like intensity, normal or color.

To Export as an ASCII Format File: the dialog, choose an option among those listed below.

Export Frame allows you to select which frame will be applied to the exported data.

Unit allows you to select the unit system that will be applied to the exported data.

Separator allows you to specify a separator to set between each value ( Semicolon , Comma , Tabulation and Space ).

Decimal Char allows you to specify the decimal char ( Point or

Comma ).

Coordinate System allows you to choose between Cartesian system

(X, Y and Z) and Global system (also called Geodetic Northing ,

Easting , and Elevation system ).

Decimal Places allows you to define the decimal places.

Export Intensity allows you to export data with intensity attributes.

Export Normal allows you to export data with normal attributes.

Export RGB color allows you to export data with RGB color attributes.

2. Click . The Export as ASCII File dialog closes.

Note: You can also select and export a scan/station of a project in the Models

(or Scans ) Tree .

Caution: A warning appears in the case there is no cloud or the clouds are empty in the selection.

Note: When the selection is the whole project, no matter the name you enter in the Export Selection dialog, an ASC format file is created for each station of the project. Each ASC file is named based on the station name. When the selection is a station/scan, a unique ASC format file is created and it has the name you entered in the Export Selection dialog.

Exporting Data

LandXML Format

Several companies, including Autodesk, teamed up to create a method for exchanging project information across different software packages and

LandXML is the result. LandXML is a generic, text-based file format used to save project data. It is similar to a DXF™ file, which is a generic file format for vector-based drawing information.

To Export as a LandXML Format File:

1. Select Mesh (or a Polyline )* from the Models Tree . the menu, select Export Selection . The Export Selection dialog opens.

3. Click on the File of Type pull-down arrow.

4. Select as file type.



Save . The Export Selection dialog closes.

Each is exported as a surface,

Each break-line (a 3D Polyline or a 2D Polyline with a Normal direction different from the Zaxis) is exported as a surface,

All ( Polylines with a Normal direction parallel to the Z -axis) are exported as a surface.

Note: (*) Selecting anything else will generate the following warning message

" Name of the selected item has not been exported".


Solids for AutoCAD



Product

AutoCAD® 2010

AutoCAD® 2009

AutoCAD® 2008

AutoCAD® 2007

AutoCAD® 2006


AutoCAD® 2005

AutoCAD® 2004

AutoCAD® 2002




In RealWorks , the user can export the primitives listed in the table below.

Primitive

Box

Composite Curve3

Special Case Export DXF1

Polygon Mesh

Export DWG

3D Solid

Circle Arc Full

Arc

Arc

Arc

Circle

Arc

Circular Torus

Cloud

Cloud 2D

Cone

Polygon Mesh

N Points

N Points

Polygon Mesh

3D Solid

N Points

N Points

3D Solid

Eccentric Cone

Ellipse Arc

Bounds

With Bounds

Circle with Thickness

Polygon Mesh

Polygon Mesh

3D Solid

Polyface Mesh

Polyface Mesh

Polyline Ellipse

Polygon Mesh Polyface Mesh Ellipsoid

Extrusion6 Closed

Open & Bound (DWG)

Inspection 1D

Inspection 2D

Mesh

Polyface Mesh

Polygon Mesh

N Lines

(LW)Polyline 4

Image & TIF image

Polyface Mesh (Max:

32767 vertices)

3D Solid

Polyface Mesh

N Lines

(LW)Polyline 4

Image & TIF image

Polyface Mesh (Max:

32767 faces)

Ortho-Image

Plane (6)

Point

Polyline

Pyramid

No Holes

With Holes

Image & TIF image Image & TIF image

Polyface Mesh

Polyface Mesh

Region

N Regions

Point Point

(LW)Polyline

4

Polygon Mesh

(LW)Polyline

4

Polyface Mesh

Exporting Data

Rectangular Torus

Segment

Polygon Mesh 3D Solid

Line Line

Volume

With Bounds

Polygon Mesh

Polygon Mesh

N (LW)Polyline

3D Solid

Polyface Mesh

4 N 4

Note:

1 Export in DXF version R14.

2 Possibility to export in DWG version R12, R13, R14, R15 (2000/2002),

R18 (2004/2005), R21 (2007) and R24 (2010).

3 DWG export case: ellipse arcs are exported as segments from start to end point.

4 LWPolyline by default, Polyline when exporting coplanar polyline as 3D

Polyline checked.

5 DWG export case: Less powerful than DXF export. Use the last R24 version for best result.

6 DWG export case: Full ellipses well managed, ellipse arcs are exported as segments.


AutoCAD (DWG) Format

DWG - for DraWinG - is a binary file format used by AutoDesk's AutoCAD software. It can contain 2D or 3D objects. Exporting to the DWG format means to export a selection from RealWorks to the AutoCAD application. AutoCAD includes the notion of layers which can be used as a tool for organizing and gathering information about a drawing. These layers can be considered as an electronic version of traditional layers. The selection hierarchy is preserved during the export; each group or lone object has its own layer. You can only export one project at a time; in this case every type of object (geometries and clouds) in the project can be exported, except frames, measurements, feature code sets and registration entities.

To Export to Solids for AutoCAD (DWG) Format:

1. Select data to be exported from the Models Tree . the menu, select Export Selection . The Export Selection ' Name of Data to be exported ' dialog opens.


Solids for AutoCAD Files (*.dwg) as file type.



7. Click . The Export as DWG File dialog opens.


Export Of : This option allows you to choose which kind of object you want to export: Selected Clouds and Geometries , Selected







8. Select the kind of object to be exported in the Export Of field.

9. Select the coordinate frame to be applied in the Export Frame field.

10. Select the unit system to be applied in the Unit field.

11. Select a rendering for point clouds.

Exporting Data

12. Check the option, if required.


14. Click Export . The Export as DWG File dialog closes.

Note:


(or Scans ) Tree.

Selected Geometries in the Export Of field will gray out the


Selected Geometries in the Export Of field will gray out both the




AutoCAD (DXF) Format

DXF - for Drawing eXchange Format - is an ASCII file format of an AutoCAD® drawing file. Exporting to the DXF format means to export a selection from

RealWorks to the AutoCAD application. AutoCAD includes the notion of layers which can be used as a tool for organizing and gathering information about a drawing. These layers can be considered as an electronic version of traditional layers. The selection hierarchy is preserved during the export; each group or lone object has its own layer. You can only export one project at a time; in this case every type of object (geometries and clouds) in the project can be exported, except frames, measurements, feature code sets and registration entities.

To Export to Solids for AutoCAD (DXF) Format:

1. Select data to be exported from the Models Tree . the menu, select Export Selection . The Export Selection ' Name of Data to be exported ' dialog opens.


Solids for AutoCAD Files (*.dxf) as file type.



7. Click . The Export as DWG File dialog opens.

Version: This option allows you to choose from the various versions of AutoCAD

Export Of : This option allows you to choose which kind of object you want to export: Selected Clouds and Geometries , Selected







8. Select the kind of object to be exported in the Export of field.

9. Select the coordinate frame to be applied in the Export Frame field.

10. Select the unit system to be applied in the Unit field.

11. Select a rendering for point clouds.

Exporting Data



14. Click Export . The Export as DXF File dialog closes.

Note:


(or Scans ) Tree .

Selected Geometries in the Export Of field will gray out the


Selected Geometries in the Export Of field will gray out both the




Export With Advanced Features

The features in the Advanced Exports menu are dedicated to the export of an object (or set of objects) created within RealWorks . The table below lists all the available formats as well as the entities of RealWorks that will be exported to a chosen format.

Exporting Data


The table below listed the type of export the user can have according to the license (of RealWorks ) he has.

Exporting Data

Export Object Properties

You can export an item (or a set of items) properties as a report in the RTF file format. These properties are those found in the Property window. Any selection

(or multi-selection) from the Project Tree except the WorkSpace node (also from the Project Tree ) swaps the Export Object Properties command to enabled.

To Export Object Properties:

1. Select a project (or group, station or other item) from the Project Tree .

2. From menu, select Advanced Exports Exports / Object Properties .

The Export dialog opens.



5. In panel, choose one of the following:

Selection : The selected item properties are exported. If there are sub-items under the selected item; all the sub-items properties are exported too. If there is no sub-item under the selected item, only its own properties are exported.

Projection of Selection: The properties of all items and subitems that belong the project the selection is from are exported.

All Project Trees : The properties of all items and subitems that belong to the Scans , Targets , Models and Images sub-trees are exported.

6. Check option to automatically open the report after exporting.

7. Click . The Export dialog closes.


Export Images

You can export a single image (or a set of images) to the JPEG format (with

JPG as extension).

To Export an Image:

1. Select an image (or a set of images) from the Images Tree . the menu, select Advanced Exports / Export Image . The Export

Image dialog opens.



5. Click .

If only one image has been selected, the Export Image dialog closes.

If a set of images has been selected, the Export Image dialog displays the next image to save and so on.

Tip: You can right-click on an image in the Images Tree and select Export

Image from the pop-up menu.

Exporting Data

Export Ortho-Images

Tiff (or Tif ) is the acronym for Tagged Image File Format. It is one of the most popular and flexible current public domain raster file format. Exporting an ortho-image involves saving it in a Tiff (or Tif) format. With the Tiff image, is created a file of the same name and with the TXT extension. This file contains the four corners for the Tiff image: Top Left , Top Right , Bottom Left and Bottom

Right . These corners are useful for locating an ortho-image in 3D.

To Export an Ortho-Image:

1. Select an ortho-image from the Images Tree . the menu, select Advanced Exports / Export Ortho-Image . The

Export Ortho-Image dialog opens. The Tag Image Format Files (*.TIF) type is default-set in the File of Type field.

3. Locate a drive/folder to store the ortho-image in the Look In field.


Save .

Note:

You can export an ortho-image as a 3D Tiff. To do this, from the File menu, select first Export Selection , then AutoCAD Files (*.dxf) as file’s type.

If a set of ortho-images has been selected, the export is done one by one from the first to the last. The user only needs to click Save for each orthoimage.

Tip: You can right-click on an ortho-image from the Images Tree and select

Export Ortho-Image from the pop-up menu.


Export Measurements

You can export a measurement (or a set of measurements) as a report in the

Excel format (*.CSV files). Only measurements from an active project (selected project) are exported. For a Point to Point Distance Measurement , its type, name, length, delta X, delta Y, delta Z, extremity 1 and extremity 2 values exported. For an Angular Measurement , its type, name and the angle value are exported. For a 3D Point Measurement , its type, name and X,Y,Z values. For an Orientation Measurement , its type, name and the center, azimuth angle and tilt angle values are exported.

To Export a Measurement:

1. Select a measurement from the Models Tree . the menu, select Advanced Exports / Export Measurements .

The Export Measurements dialog opens.

3. The type is default-set in the File of Type field.

4. Type a name in the File Name field.


Save . The Export Measurements dialog opens.

Export Frame: This option enables to select a frame that will be applied to the exported data.

Separator * : A separator can be a Semicolon , Comma or Tabulation .

Decimal Char: A decimal symbol can be either a Point or a Comma .

Options ** : There are four types of measurement to export: Export

Point to Point Distance Measurement , Export Angular Measurement ,

Export 3D point Measurement and Export Orientation Measurement .

Only one type can be selected at a time.

7. Select a frame to apply from the Export Frame field.

8. Select a separator to use from the Separator field.

9. Select a decimal char to apply from the Decimal Char field.

10. Check an option.

11. Click Export .

Note:

(*) The required Separator when exporting to the CSV format is a Comma .

If the user selects a Semicolon (or Tabulation ) Separator instead, a warning message appears and advices the user that the measurement(s) will be exported as a TXT format report.

(**) When you select a type of measurement from the Models Tree , only the option (from the Options panel) of the same type is enabled and the other options are dimmed. When you select a set of measurements that covers all types, the four options are enabled. You need to choose an option; otherwise the Export button remains dimmed.

Exporting Data

You cannot combine a Comma Separator with a Comma Decimal Char .


Export Feature Sets

Generally, a Feature Point is composed of three items: Point Number , Point

Coordinates and Point Feature Code . Name and description are optional.

Exporting a Feature Set from RealWorks involves exporting such set of information in an ASCII file format.

To Export a Feature Set:

1. Select a feature sets from the Models Tree. the menu, select Advanced Exports / Export Feature Sets . The

Feature Set ASCII Export dialog opens. The ASCII Files (*.ASC) type is default-set in the File of Type field.


4. Enter a name in the File Name field. The ASC extension is added automatically.

5. Click . The ASCII Feature Set Export dialog opens.

Export Frame: This option enables to select a frame that will be applied to the exported data.

Unit: This option enables to select the unit system that will be applied to the exported data.

Separator: A separator can be Semicolon , Comma and Tabulation .

Decimal Char : A decimal char can be either a Point or a Comma .

Feature Set Export Options: Options in that panel enables to express a Feature Set in either the Cartesian coordinate system or the Global coordinates system. If required, the user can add a description.

6. Select a coordinate frame to apply from the Export Frame field.

7. Select a unit system to use from the Unit field.

8. Select a separator to use from the Separator field.

9. Select a decimal char to apply from the Decimal Char field.

10. Check an option.

11. Click Export .

Note:

You can only export one Feature Set at a time. If you select a set of

Feature Sets , only the last (from the selection list) is exported.

Dash-Line Segments (or Continuous Segments ) that have been chosen to link each Feature Point in the Feature Set Tool are not exported.

You cannot combine a Comma Separator with a Comma Decimal Char .

Warning: A warning message appears if the selection (as input) is not a feature set and the export is aborted.

Exporting Data

Export TZF Images

With the Export TZF Images feature, you are able to export each TZF Scan as a Jpg image file. Each pixel that composed a T ZF Scan is exported.

To Export TZF Images:

1. Select a project (or a set of stations or a station)* or a TZF Scan . the menu, select Advanced Exports / Export TZF Images . The

Select New File Folder dialog opens.

3. Navigate to the drive/folder where you want the image files to be stored in the In field.

4. Select the folder** and click Ok . The Export TZF Images dialog opens.

5. Choose a layer to export between Luminance Only and Color Only . choose (all layers).

7. Click . The Export TZF Images dialog closes. each , a Jpg image file is created.

If a luminance layer is found and the Luminance Only (or Both

Luminance and Color ) option has been checked, the file is created with the name TZF_FileName_Intensity .

If a color layer is found and the Color Only (or Both Luminance and

Color ) option, the file is created with then name

TZF_File_Name_Color .

Note:

(*) A warning dialog opens if there is no TZF Scan within your selection.

(*) If the TZF format file(s) has (have) not been yet processed, the



Processing step.

Note: (**) In the case where the Jpg image files are not writable to the folder

(lack of space or lack of permissions), an Error message is then shown.


Convert to BSF Format File

This tool provides the user with the ability to convert a station* (or set of stations* or a project) created from files of TZS (or TZF ) format downloaded in

RealWorks to LaserGen file(s) (*.BSF). If the stations have been registered within RealWorks , the registration parameters will be taken into account when converting.

To Convert to BSF Format File:

1. Select a station (or a set of stations or a project) from the Project Tree .

2. From menu, select Advanced Exports / Convert to BSF .

If a station (or a set of stations) has been selected as input, the BSF

Conversion Using Registered Stations dialog opens.

If a project has been selected as input, a dialog opens and asks you if you want to process all stations or not. Click Yes.

The BSF

Conversion Using Registered Stations dialog opens.

Note:

The stations can be empty.

(*) If the TZF format file(s) has (have) not been yet processed, the



Processing step.

Filtering

The procedures hereafter are in option. When the user decides to not apply the filter (or the sampling); the whole scan data will be taken.

Exporting Data

Spatial Sampling


To Sample Spatially: the panel, check the Spatial Sampling option. The

Resolution field becomes enabled.



Filter by Range

The By Range allows you to define a distance (from the center of the FX instrument) beyond which no point will be taken into account. This filter is only applied to the scan data.

To Filter by Range: the option. The Max Distance field becomes editable.

2. Enter a value in the Max Distance field.


Filter by Zone

The By Zone option allows filtering by defining a bounding box. The Min Point and Max Point are the two extremities of a bounding box diagonal.

To Filter by Zone:

1. Check option. The Min Point and Max Point fields become editable.

2. Enter a 3D coordinates in the Min Point field.

3. Enter a 3D coordinates in the Max Point field.


Intensity Mapping

You can define the Output Intensity of points for each TZS (or TZF ) format file.

This means that all points will be scaled up (or down) to the Intensity defined by the user.

To Define the Output Intensity of Points:

1. Click on the Output Intensity Max pull-down arrow.

2. Choose a value from 256 to 8192 .

Output Files

The Output Files panel lets the user to choose between two methods for converting TZS (or TZF ) format files to BSF format files: By Volume or By

Stations . If required, the user can generate a preview and define a location where the conversion will be placed.

Exporting Data

By Volume

This feature allows you to split a single (or a set of) registered station(s) along the X , Y and Z axes of the current coordinate system into a set of cloud data.

Each corresponds to a BSF format file and as name: Cloud_Xn_Yn'_Zn'' . All will be put under the Scan Folder (defined in the Output Files panel). If the cloud data is empty; no BSF format file will be created.

To Convert the TZS (or TZF) Format Files into a Set of Cubes: the panel, check the By Volume option (if required). the panel, click on the pull-down arrow. between and Cube Size . the option has been selected: a) Enter a number value in the Number in X field. b) Or you can use the Up (or Down ) button to select a number value. c) Repeat the steps for the Number in Y and Number in Z fields. the option has been selected: a) Enter a length value in the Length in X field. b) Or you can use the Up (or Down ) button to select a length value. c) Repeat the steps for the Length in Y and Length in Z fields.

4. Enter a number value in the Minimum of Points in Cube for File Creation field.

5. Or use the Up (or Down ) button to select a number value.

6. Click .

The conversion is done from the first TZS (or TZF ) format file to the last. For each TZS (or TZF ) format file, there are two stages.

You can abort the conversion operation by pressing Esc , only when the first stage is in progress. In this case, the following dialog appears.


Stations dialog closes on its own (before the end of the conversion).

Note: If the Coordinate System in Preferences is " North, East, Elevation "; you will have N, E and El in place of X, Y and Z.

Exporting Data

By Station

Each TZS (or TZF ) format file will be converted into a unique BSF format file

(one per file). Each BSF format file will have as name its related TZS (or TZF ) file. All will be put under the Scan Folder (defined in the Output Files panel).

To convert a TZS Format File to a BSF Format File:

1. Check option. The Volume Properties panel becomes dimmed.

Convert .

The conversion is done from the first TZS (or TZF ) format file to the last. For each TZS (or TZF ) format file, there are two stages.

You can abort the conversion operation by pressing Esc , only when the first stage is in progress. In this case, the following dialog appears.

Trimble Scan Files to BSF Conversion Using Registered

Stations dialog closes of its own (before the end of the conversion).


Folder

The Default Folder is the folder where the TZS (or TZF ) files are located. The

Scan Folder is the folder where BSF files (once converted) will be put. By default, it has the same name as the project created within RealWorks .

To Define the Output Files Folder: the panel, click on the Default Folder button. The Save

In Folder dialog opens.

2. Locate BSF format files in the Save In field.

3. Select and open the folder by double-clicking.

4. Click . The Save In Folder dialog closes.

Scan Folder Name

The Scan Folder is the folder where the BSF format file will be put under. By default, its name is ProjectX where X is its order.

To Define the Scan Folder Name:

1. Keep the default name which is the project name.

2. Or enter a new name in the Scan Folder Name field.

Preview BSF Format File

You can generate a preview of the whole TZS (or TZF ) format files. This preview is a sample* and will have the same name as the Scan Folder and will be put under a folder named Preview .

To Generate a Preview BSF Format File: the panel, check the Generate a Preview BSF File option.

Note: (*) The Sampling parameter is set by default to 100 mm.

Exporting Data

Converting

Two folders ( CAD and Scans ) are created and rooted under the Default Folder

(the one defined in the Output Files panel) as well as a file named

Scan_Centers (with BWS as extension). This file is a list of all TZS (or TZF ) file centers. The preview and the BS F (respectively in Preview and Scan Folder ) are all put under the Scans folder.

Note: You cannot convert a station (or a set of stations or a project) that is not a Trimble Scan File with TZS (or TZF ) extension. If you attempt to so, the dialog below appears.


Convert to E57/PTX/PTS Format File

PTX and PTS are extensions for laser scanning files. Both are ASCII based.

To Convert to E57/PTX/PTS Format File:

1. Select a station (or a set of stations or a project)* (with TZF Scans within) from the Project Tree . the menu, select Advanced Exports / Convert to E57/PTX/PTS .

If a station (or a set of stations) has been selected as input, the

Convert to E57/PTX/PTS dialog opens.

If a project has been selected as input, a dialog opens and asks you if you want to process all stations of the selected project.

Click The Convert to E57/PTX/PTS dialog opens.

3. If required, apply a Sampling by Step to the data to export.

4. If required, specify a Folder where to store the file(s).

5. Choose an option between E57 , PTX and PTS .

Convert .

Note: (*) The stations can be empty.



Processing step.

Sampling by Step

In the Sampling by Step method, one point will be taken into account at each defined Step vertically and horizontally in the 2D Image Data .

To Sample by Step:

1. In field, check the Sampling by Step option. The

Step (in Pixels) field becomes enabled.

2. Enter a value in the Step (In Pixels) field.


Exporting Data

Folder

The Default Folder is the folder where the TZF format files are.

To Define the Output Files Folder: the panel, click on the Default Folder button. The Save In

Folder dialog opens.

2. Locate drive/folder to store the PTS (or PTX ) format files in the Save In field.

3. Select the folder and click Save . The Save In Folder dialog closes.

E57



To Convert to E57 Format: the panel, check the E57 option.

Note: An E57 format file is created for each TZF scan . The E57 format file is named according to the name of the TZF format file.

Note: Each TZF Scan is exported to the E57 format as a regular grid point sets.


PTS

A PTS format file contains a set of lines information. The Number of Points in the file is at the first line followed by as many lines as there are points. Each line corresponds to a Point with the X , Y , Z coordinates, intensity information

(from -2047 to +2048).

To Convert to PTS Format: the panel, check the PTS option.

Note:

The option applies the station registrations to point coordinates and then writes them.

The unit of measurement is in Meter .

PTS format file is created for each TZF scan . The PTS format file is named according to the name of the TZF format file.

PTX

A PTX format file also contains a set of lines information. The Number of

Columns and the Number of Points per Column in the file are respectively at the first and the second line followed by a series of sets of lines. The Number of Lines in a set corresponds to the Number of Points . The first set - which comes after the two first lines of the file - defines the first column, the next set the second column, and so on. Each line corresponds to a Point with the following information: x,y,z,i (from 0.0 to 1.0). If there is no scanning data

(because of sky e.g.), the Point on the column still exists but contains zero.

To Convert to PTX Format:

Note: the panel, check the PTX option.

The option writes the station registration information in the file header and keep point coordinates unchanged.

The unit of measurement is set to Meter .

A PTX format file is created for each TZF scan . The PTX format file is named according to the name of the TZF format file. If the TZF Scan is colored, the colors information are also exported into the PTX format file.

Exporting Data

Export Inspection Maps

Each inspection map is a plane which has two directions ( Vertical and

Horizontal ) whatever the shape ( Plane , Tunnel or Cylinder ) it has. The two directions are illustrated by the Red and Green axes. You can export an inspection map to the Tiff format or all of the slices done on the comparison surfaces to the DXF (or DWG ) format. Slices can be vertical (parallel to the

Green axis) or horizontal (parallel to the Red axis). Tiff is the acronym for

Tagged Image File Format. It is one of the most popular and flexible current public domain raster file formats. The DXF file format is an ASCII file format which describes CAD data defined by AutoDesk. This file format facilitates the exchange of CAD data between two different programs. The DWG file format is the binary file format from AutoCAD and AutoCAD LT.

Export an Inspection Map

Exporting an inspection map from RealWorks involves saving it in the Tiff format. A TXT format file is also created. This file will contain four corners ( Top

Left , Top Right , Bottom Left and Bottom Right) . These corners are useful for situating an inspection map in 3D.

To Export an Inspection Map:

1. Select an inspection map from the Project Tree .

2. From menu, select Advanced Exports / Export Inspection Map .

The Export Inspection Map dialog opens.



Save .

Tip: You can select an inspection map from the Project Tree (or from the 3D

View ) and select Export Inspection Map from the pop-up menu.

Note:

You cannot export an inspection map that is not already created in the database.

If a set of inspection maps has been selected, the export is done one by one, from the first to the last. The user only needs to click Save for each inspection map.


Export Horizontal Slices

The Horizontal Slices are obtained by slicing an inspection map along the Red axis (of its own frame) in case of a Plane (or a Tunnel ) and along the Green axis in case of a Tunnel . The slicing is done with a constant interval. These slices are the same than those obtained when multi-slicing in the Sections &

Shifts in the Inspection Map Analyzer tool. A single slice is a pair of Red

Section and Green section . A Red Section results from the slicing over the

Reference Surface . A Green Section is one from the Comparison Surface .

When you export the slices to DXF (or DWG ), the order is preserved. Each slice has its own layer (also called Level ). For a given slice, the difference of elevations between the Red Section and the Green Section is displayed with a value (in green), in the current unit of measurement. This difference can be displayed along the slice with a constant interval (value in gray) that the user has to define.

To Export the Horizontal Slices:

1. Select an inspection map from the Project Tree .

2. From menu, select Advanced Exports / Export Inspection Map

Horizontal Slices . The Export Horizontal Slices of Selection dialog opens.

3. Click on the Type of File pull down arrow.

4. Choose from a version of DWG (or DXF ) format.



Save . The Horizontal Slices Export Parameters dialog opens.

Horizontal Interval : This interval is a constant step used for displaying the difference in elevations between the Red Section and the Green

Section . This constant step is a distance value.

Vertical Interval : This interval is a constant step used for slicing horizontally the inspection map. It is the same as the Interval used in

Section & Shifts (in Inspection Map Analyzer Tool ) when multi-slicing.

This constant step is a distance value when the inspection map is a

Plane (or Tunnel ). It is an angle when the inspection map is a

Cylinder .

Amplification Factor : This factor is used for magnifying the differences in elevations when they are too small for viewing.

Reference Surface Title : This option enables to define a name for the

Reference Surface .

Comparison Surface Title : This option enables to define a name for the Comparison Surface .

Unit : This option enables to choose a unit of measurement.

8. In field, enter a distance value (or angular value) if the inspection map is a Plane / Tunnel (or Cylinder ). the field, enter a distance value.

Exporting Data

10. Give a value in the Amplification Factor field.

11. Enter a name in the Reference Surface Title field.

12. Enter a name in the Comparison Surface Title field.

13. Choose a unit of measurement from the Unit drop-down list.

14. Click Export . The Vertical Slices Export Parameters dialog closes.

Note:

The unit of measurement for a distance value is by-default set to Meter ; you do not have to enter “m” and you can change it when necessary (refer to the Preferences options for more details).

The unit of measurement for an angular value is by-default set to Degree ; you do not have to enter “°” and you can change it when necessary (refer to the Preferences options for more details).

Caution: In Sections & Shifts of the Inspection Map Analyzer Tool , you cannot slice an inspection map of tunnel shape horizontally while in the Export

Inspection Map Vertical Slices feature you can.


From a Plane Inspection Map

If the selected inspection map is a Plane ; a Horizontal Slice has the shape shown below:

Exporting Data

1 - The difference of elevations between the Reference

Surface and the Comparison

Surface at constant interval

2 - The Horizontal Interval parameter

3 - The Vertical Interval parameter (=between two consecutive slices)


From a Cylinder Inspection Map

If the inspection map is a Cylinder ; a Horizontal Slice has the shape shown below:

Exporting Data


1 - The Vertical Interval parameter (between two consecutive slices)


3 - The difference of elevations between the Reference and

Comparison surfaces at constant interval

From a Tunnel Inspection Map

If the inspection map is a Tunnel ; a Horizontal Slice has the shape shown below:


2 - The Vertical Interval parameter (=between two consecutive slices)



Exporting Data

Export Vertical Slices

The Vertical Slices are obtained by slicing an inspection map along the Green axis (of its own frame) in case of a Plane (or a Tunnel ) and along the Red axis in case of a Cylinder . The slicing is done with a constant interval. These slices are the same than those obtained when multi-slicing in Sections & Shifts in the

Inspection Map Analyzer tool. A slice is a pair of Red Section and Green

Section . A Red Section results from slicing over the Reference Surface.

The

Green Section is the one from the Comparison Surface . When you export the slices to DXF (or DWG ), the order is preserved. Each slice has its own layer

(also called Level ). For a given slice, the difference of elevations between the red and green sections is displayed with a value (in green) in the current unit of measurement. This difference can be displayed along the slice with a constant interval (value in gray) that the user has to define.

To Export Vertical Slices:

1. Select an inspection map from the Project Tree . the menu, select Advanced Exports / Export Inspection Map

Vertical Slices . The Export Vertical Slices of Selection dialog opens.

3. Click on the Type of File pull down arrow.

4. Choose and DXF format.



7. Click . The Vertical Slices Export Parameters dialog opens.

Horizontal Interval : This interval is a constant step used for displaying the difference in elevations between red and green sections. This constant step is a distance value when the inspection map is a Plane

(or Tunnel ). It is an angle when the inspection map is a Cylinder .

Vertical Interval : This interval is a constant step used for vertically slicing the inspection map. It is the same as the Interval used in

Section & Shifts when multi-slicing. The constant step is distance value.

Amplification Factor : This factor is used for magnifying the differences in elevations when they are too small for viewing.

Reference Surface Title : This option enables to define a name for the

Reference Surface .

Comparison Surface Title : This option enables to define a name for the Comparison Surface .

Unit : This option enables to choose a unit of measurement.

8. In field, enter a value (distance or angle). the field, enter a distance value.

10. Give a value in the Amplification Factor field.

11. Enter a name in the Reference Surface Title field.

12. Enter a name in the Comparison Surface Title field.


13. Choose a unit of measurement from the Unit drop-down list.

14. Click Export . The Vertical Slices Export Parameters dialog closes.

Note:

The unit of measurement for a distance value is set by default to Meter ; you do not have to enter “m” and you can change it when necessary (refer to the Preferences options for more details).

The unit of measurement for an angular value is set by default to Degree ; you do not have to enter “°” and you can change it when necessary (refer to the Preferences options for more details).

Exporting Data

From a Plane Inspection Map

If the selected inspection map is a Plane ; a Vertical Slice has the shape shown below:




2 - The Vertical Interval parameter

3 - The Horizontal Interval parameter (=between two consecutive slices)

From a Cylinder Inspection Map

If the selected inspection map is a Cylinder ; a Vertical Slice has the shape shown below:




3 - The Horizontal Interval parameter (= between two consecutive slices)

Exporting Data

From a Tunnel Inspection Map

If the selected inspection map is a Tunnel ; a Vertical Slice has the shape shown below:


2 - The Horizontal Interval parameter (=between two consecutive slices)




Collaborate and Share Data

You can share your data for collaboration purposes in a customizable and professional format. You can publish your project, and view it easily in Internet

Explorer. The published project will be viewed in a 2.5D view. You have the ability to take measurements, add annotations, and/or extract data from the published project.

The Publish feature is available with the following types of license: Advanced ,

Advanced Modeler , Advanced Plant and Advanced Tank , as illustrated below.

Exporting Data

Publish a Project

The input of the feature is a single project with at least one TZF format file within. Otherwise, the feature is grayed out. If the TZF format file has not yet been processed, the Processing TZF Scans dialog opens and prompts you to proceed to do so. The output of the feature, both a published project and an embedded version of Trimble Scan Explorer , can then be distributed via a media like a USB flash drive or DVD-Rom. To be able to view a published project with the embedded version of Trimble Scan Explorer , the user needs to have a 64-bit OS (Seven or 8) , Internet Explorer 8 (64 bits) or later and .Net

Framework 4 and Visual C++ Redistributable 2010 X86 .


Processing step.

To Publish a Project:

1. Select a project from the Project Tree . the menu, select Publish . The Publish 'Project_Name' dialog opens*.

3. Define the layout of a publication.

4. Add media in a publication.

5. Add links in a publication.

6. Reduce data size.

7. Enable data extraction.

Publish to start publishing.

Tip: You can abort the publication in progress by clicking Cancel .

Note: (*) If the selected project contains some TZF Scans for which the links to the TZF format file are broken, a warning dialog with all missing TZF files appears. Click OK to close it. The Publish 'Project_Name' dialog opens then.

Note: A RealWorks temporary project file is created during the publishing process. This project file is named according to the current project name followed by the word "Publisher". It will disappear once the publishing process terminated.


Define the Layout of a Publication

The default name in the Title field is the name of the published project. It's up to you to give a name other than this default one. The default (or defined) Title is the one which appears at the top left corner of the published page. A Logo is an image file that may have the following formats: bmp, jpg, png and gif. It also appears at the top left corner of the published page.

The Output folder is the folder where all the published files are located. The default path to the Output folder is C:\Users\User_Name\Documents. The default Background Color is yellow. The default Font Color is dark grey.

To Define the Layout of a Publication:

1. Click on the Page Configuration tab.


Define a Title,

Attach a Logo file,

Define an Output Folder,

Set a Background Color,

Set a Font Color.

Title

To Edit a Title:

Input a new name in the Title field.

Logo

To Add a Logo:

1. Click . The Open dialog opens.

2. Navigate to the drive/folder where the Logo file is located.


Open . The Open dialog closes. The path to the Logo file is displayed in the Logo line.

Tip: You can manually enter the path of a Logo file.

Exporting Data

Output Folder

To Define an Output Folder:

1. Click . The Browse For Folder dialog opens.

2. Locate a drive/folder to store the published files.

3. If required, create a new folder by clicking Make New Folder .

4. Click . The Browse For Folder dialog closes. The path to the defined folder is displayed in the Output line.

Tip: You can manually enter the path of the Output folder.

Note: The defined Output folder will not be taken into account if you do not publish your project (by clicking on the Publish button).

Background Color

There are nine Standard Colors : White , Gray , Black , Red , Green , Blue , Yellow ,

Orange , and Purple .

To Set a Background Color:

1. Click on the Background pull-down arrow.

2. Choose color from the Standard Colors panel.

Or

3. Click button. The Advanced Colors panel expands.

4. Define a color.


Font Color

There are nine Standard Colors : White , Gray , Black , Red , Green , Blue , Yellow ,

Orange , and Purple .

To Set a Font Color:

1. Click on the Font Color pull-down arrow.

2. Choose a color from the Standard Colors panel.

Or

3. Click . The Advanced Colors panel expands.

4. Define a color.

Include Media in a Publication

A Media item can be either an image or a video. An image file may have the following formats: jpg, jpeg, png and gif. A video file can be of the following formats: WebM , Avi, MP4 and flv .

WebM is a new open standard for compressing Video content. It is based on both the VP8 and Vorbis , respectively for the Video and for the Audio. Avi

(Audio Video Interleave) is a multimedia container format from Microsoft. MP4, an abbreviated term for MPEG-4 Part 14 or MPEG-4 AVC , is also a multimedia container format. FLV known as Flash Video , is a video file format used to deliver video over the Internet using Adobe Flash Player .

Note: There is no restriction to the number of Media item you can add.

Exporting Data

Add a Media File

To Add a Media File:


2. Navigate to the drive/folder where the Media file is located.

3. Click on the file to select it. Its name appears in the File Name field (in the

Open dialog).

Open . The Open dialog closes. selected 's name is displayed in the Title field.

Its appears in the File Path field.

Note: First click on the Media tab.

Tip:

You can manually enter the path of a Media to include when publishing.

You can also manually edit a Media 's name in the Title field.

Add Another Media File

To Add Another Media File:

1. Click . Another Media line is added to the previous one. becomes as illustrated below.


3. Navigate to the drive/folder where the Media file is located.



Note:

First click on the Media tab, if not done.

You cannot add another Media file unless the first Media has been added.


Remove a Media File

To Remove a Media File: the tab, click Subtract to remove the related line.

Note: You cannot remove a Media file if there is only one.

Add Links in a Publication

What is a Link ?. A Link can be either a Path or URL pointing to a document, a

Web page, etc.

Add a Link

To Add a Link:


2. Navigate to the drive/folder where the Link file is located.



Note: First click on the Links tab.

Tip:

You can manually enter the path of a Link to include when publishing.

You can also manually edit a Link 's name in the Title field.

Caution: If you add an application (.exe); it could be not worked if all dependencies (of the application) are not present.

Note: When a Link points to a document, the document is copied into the final published project.

Exporting Data

Add Another Link

To Add Another Media File:

1. Click . Another Link line is added to the previous one. becomes as illustrated below.

Open . The Open dialog opens.

3. Navigate to the drive/folder where the Link file is located.



Note:

First click on the Links tab, if not done.

You cannot add another Links unless the first Link has been added.

Remove a Link

To Remove a Media File: the tab, click Subtract to remove the related line.

Note: You cannot remove a Link if there is only one.


Reduce Data Size

There are three filters (called Large , Medium and Small ) for reducing the data size. For each TZF format file, Spatial Sampling (with a step of 6 mm) is applied to the set of points and a size reduction to the file itself. The File Size in the Publish dialog is the size of the project once the reduction is applied. The

Estimated Time is the time required to process the whole project.

To Reduce Data Size:

Drag to the slider up or down to choose a reduction level.

The information about the " File Size " and the " Estimated Time " are not available if for each TZF Scan (of the project), the link to the TZF format file is broken.

Enable Data Extraction

The Enable Extract option is by default unchecked. It activates removal of the

Extract Points feature from the Trimble Scan Explorer Web Viewer . This means that the user cannot extract any points from the published data.

Caution: You will be warned that your data will be published with extraction capabilities if the Enable Extract option is checked.

Note: If the Enable Extract option is kept unchecked, a TZF format file, once published in the Data / RWI folder, is locked. Its icon is grayed-out if you try to load it in RealWorks .

Exporting Data

View Published Data

Once you start publishing your project (by clicking Publish ), two progress bars appear, one for all the TZF format files and one for a TZF format file. Once the publication is completed, you may see the following texts: "Publish Succeeded" and "Nb. of files processed in minutes and seconds".

A main folder, named according to the name given in the Title field, is created under the default (or defined) Output Folder . The day and time information are added to the main folder (respectively in the Day-Month-Year and Hour-

Minute-Second format). Two sub-folders ( Bin and Data ) and an Html format file

(named Index ) are created under the main folder.

Note: The publication may be a success even if the links (from the TZF Scans to the TZF format files) are broken. You will see then the text "0 files

Processed".

Bin Folder

The Bin Folder is the folder used to embed Trimble Scan Explorer application files.

Data Folder

The Data folder is the folder where a published project is stored. By default, a published project shares the same name as the original project (project to publish) or the name defined by the user in Title field. A published project in the

Data folder is a replica of the project that has been published (from

RealWorks ). This means that there is a RWP file and a RWI folder within (the

Data folder). Each TZF format file from the project to publish is replicated in the published project in the RWI folder in the Data folder but with a size other than the original ones (due to the size reduction).

Caution: Only TZF Scans and images ( RWV ) are published.

Note: All the Point Clouds of a published project are not accessible. Only TZF

Scans and images are accessible. An error message appears if you try to open a published project. The message warns you that scan point file(s) is (or are) missing, points cannot be loaded and the project cannot be open.


View a Published Project

To view a published project within the embedded version of Trimble Scan

Explorer , just double-click on the Index file. Below is a sample of what the user should have.

Exporting Data

1 - Logo

2 - Title

3 - Embedded version of Trimble Scan Explorer

4 - Link(s)

5 - Video(s)

6 - Image(s)

Note: Scan Explorer is displayed as a webpage which requires running a script or ActiveX control. Please, allow the control to run by clicking the Allow

Blocked Content button. If you do have permission, you could turn off the prompt for Internet Explorer by following Tools , Internet Options , Security (tab),

Custom Level (button) and disable the Automatic prompting for ActiveX controls option.

Note: Windows may consider Trimble as an untrusted publisher and prevent

Scan Explorer from running on your computer by opening the Application Run -

Security Warning dialog. Please, do not take the warning into account and run

Scan Explorer by clicking the Run button in the dialog.

Tip: A Media once included is displayed as a thumbnail. Click on an embedded

Media to enlarge it.

Note: You need to have .Net Framework 4 and Visual C++ Redistributable

2010 X86 installed on your computer.

1347

License Agreements

AGREEMENT ("AGREEMENT") IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU

AND TRIMBLE NAVIGATION LIMITED and applies to the computer software provided as a stand-alone computer software product, or provided with the

Trimble product purchased by you (whether built into hardware circuitry as firmware, embedded in flash memory or a PCMCIA card, or stored on magnetic or other media), and includes any accompanying written materials, such as a user's guide or product manual, as well as any "online" or electronic documentation ("Software"). This Agreement will also apply to any Software error corrections, updates and upgrades subsequently furnished by Trimble, unless such are accompanied by different license terms and conditions which will govern their use. BY CLICKING "YES" OR "I ACCEPT" IN THE

ACCEPTANCE BOX, OR BY INSTALLING, COPYING OR OTHERWISE

USING THE SOFTWARE, YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF

THIS AGREEMENT.IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS

AGREEMENT, PROMPTLY RETURN THE UNUSED SOFTWARE AND ANY

ACCOMPANYING TRIMBLE PRODUCT TO THE PLACE FROM WHICH YOU

OBTAINED THEM FOR A REFUND. This Software is protected by copyright laws and international copyright treaties, as well as other intellectual property laws and treaties. The Software is licensed, not sold.

1 SOFTWARE PRODUCT LICENSE

1.1 License Grant. Subject to the terms and conditions of this

Agreement and your pre-payment of the applicable license fee(s), Trimble grants you a non-exclusive, right to use one copy of the Software in machinereadable form on any computer hardware and operating system for which it was intended, but solely for your internal business needs in connection with your use of Trimble products. You may authorize the personnel associated with your business to use the Software, but only one person at one time, on one computer at one time. You may also store or install a copy of the Software on a storage device, such as a network server, used only to install or run the

Software on your other computers over an internal network; but in such case you must acquire and dedicate a seat license for each separate computer on which the Software is installed or run from the storage device. A seat license for the Software may not be shared or used concurrently on different computers/devices. Use of the Software is limited to the total number of installation copies and seat licenses purchased by you.


1.2 Other Rights and Limitations. (1) You may not copy, modify, make derivative works of, rent, lease, sell, distribute or transfer the Software, in whole or in part, except as otherwise expressly authorized under this

Agreement, and you agree to use all commercially reasonable efforts to prevent its unauthorized use and disclosure. (2) The Software contains valuable trade secrets proprietary to Trimble and its suppliers. To the extent permitted by relevant law, you shall not, nor allow any third party to copy, decompile, disassemble or otherwise reverse engineer the Software, or attempt to do so, provided, however, that to the extent any applicable mandatory laws give you the right to perform any of the aforementioned activities without Trimble's consent in order to gain certain information about the Software for purposes specified in the respective statutes (e.g., interoperability), you hereby agree that, before exercising any such rights, you shall first request such information from Trimble in writing detailing the purpose for which you need the information. Only if and after Trimble, at its sole discretion, partly or completely denies your request, may you exercise such statutory rights. (3) The Software is licensed as a single product. You may not separate its component parts for use on more than one computer except as specifically authorized in this Agreement. (4) You may not rent, lease or lend the Software unless you are a reseller of Trimble products under separate written agreement with Trimble and authorized by Trimble to do so. (5) You may permanently transfer all of your rights under this Agreement, provided you retain no copies, you transfer all of the Software (including all component parts, the media and printed materials, any upgrades, and this Agreement) and the recipient agrees to the terms of this Agreement. If the Software portion is an upgrade, any transfer must include all prior versions of the Software. (6) You may not use the Software for performance, benchmark or comparison testing or analysis, or disclose to any third party or release any results thereof (all of which information shall be considered Trimble confidential information) without

Trimble's prior written consent. (7) You may not directly or indirectly export or re-export, or knowingly permit the export or re-export of the Software (or portions thereof) to any country, or to any person or entity subject to export restrictions of the United States, the countries of the European Union or other countries in contravention of such laws and without first obtaining appropriate license. (8) You agree to cooperate with Trimble to track the number of server computers, computers and other devices with access to the Software at your site(s) to ensure compliance with the license grant and installation restrictions in this Agreement. In the event the compliance check reveals that the number of installations at your site exceeds the actual number of licenses obtained by you, you agree to promptly reimburse Trimble three (3) times the then current applicable list price for the extra licenses that are required to be compliant, but that were not obtained, as liquidated damages and as a reasonable penalty.

1.3 Termination. You may terminate this Agreement by ceasing all use of the Software and destroying or returning all copies. Without prejudice as to any other rights, Trimble may terminate this Agreement without notice if you fail to comply with the terms and conditions of this Agreement. In such event, you must cease its use destroy all copies of the Software and of its component parts.

License Agreements

1.4 Copyright. All title and copyrights in and to the Software (including but not limited to any images, photographs, animations, video, audio, music, and text incorporated into the Software), the accompanying printed materials, and any copies of the Software are owned by Trimble and its suppliers. You shall not remove, cover or alter any of Trimble's patent, copyright or trademark notices placed upon, embedded in or displayed by the Software or on its packaging and related materials. You may, however, either (1) make one copy of the Software solely for backup or archival purposes, or (2) install the

Software on a single computer provided you keep the original solely for backup or archival purposes. You may not copy the accompanying printed materials.

1.5 U.S. Government Restricted Rights. The Software is provided with

"RESTRICTED RIGHTS." Use, duplication, or disclosure by the United States

Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in this Agreement, and as provided in DFARS 227.7202-1(a) and 227.7202-3(a) (1995), DFARS 252.227-

7013(c)(1)(ii) (OCT 1988), FAR 12.212(a) (1995), FAR 52.227-19, or FAR

52.227-14(ALT III), as applicable.

2 LIMITED WARRANTY.

2.1 Limited Warranty. Trimble warrants that the Software will perform substantially in accordance with the accompanying written materials (i.e., applicable user's guide or product manual) for a period of one (1) year from the date of purchase. This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights, you may have others, which vary from state/jurisdiction to state/jurisdiction. The above limited warranty does not apply to error corrections, updates or upgrades of the

Software after expiration of the limited warranty period, which are provided "AS

IS" and without warranty unless otherwise specified in writing by Trimble.

Because the Software is inherently complex and may not be completely free of nonconformities, defects or errors, you are advised to verify your work. Trimble does not warrant that the Software will operate error free or uninterrupted, will meet your needs or expectations, or that all nonconformities can or will be corrected.

2.2 Customer Remedies. Trimble's and its suppliers' entire liability, and your sole remedy, with respect to the Software shall be either, at Trimble's option, (a) repair or replacement of the Software, or (b) return of the license fee paid for any Software that does not meet Trimble's limited warranty. The foregoing limited warranty is void if failure of the Software has resulted from (1) accident, misuse, abuse, or misapplication; (2) alteration or modification of the

Software without Trimble's authorization; (3) interaction with software or hardware not supplied or supported by Trimble; (4) your improper, inadequate or unauthorized installation, maintenance or storage; or (f) if you violate the terms of this Agreement. Any replacement Software will be warranted for the remainder of the original warranty period or thirty (30) days, whichever is longer.


2.3 NO OTHER WARRANTIES. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT

PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, TRIMBLE AND ITS SUPPLIERS

DISCLAIM ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, TERMS, AND CONDITIONS, EITHER

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, BY STATUTE, COMMON LAW OR OTHERWISE,

INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES, TERMS, AND

CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NONINFRINGEMENT WITH REGARD TO THE

SOFTWARE, ITS SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND THE PROVISION OF OR

FAILURE TO PROVIDE SUPPORT SERVICES. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED

BY APPLICABLE LAW, IMPLIED WARRANTIES, TERMS AND CONDITIONS

ON THE SOFTWARE ARE LIMITED TO ONE (1) YEAR. Y0U MAY HAVE

OTHER LEGAL RIGHTS WHICH VARY FROM STATE/JURISDICTION TO

STATE/JURISDICTION.

2.4 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT

PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL TRIMBLE OR ITS

SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT OR

CONSEQUENTIAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES, HOWEVER CAUSED AND

REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY (INCLUDING, WITHOUT

LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS, BUSINESS

INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION, OR ANY OTHER

PECUNIARY LOSS), ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE

THE SOFTWARE, OR THE PROVISION OF OR FAILURE TO PROVIDE

SUPPORT SERVICES, EVEN IF TRIMBLE HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE

POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, AND NOTWITHSTANDING ANY

FAILURE OF ESSENTIAL PURPOSE OF ANY EXCLUSIVE REMEDY

PROVIDED IN THIS AGREEMENT.IN NO EVENT SHALL TRIMBLE'S TOTAL

LIABILITY IN CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENT OR THE

SOFTWARE, WHETHER BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, TORT

(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE, EXCEED

THE ACTUAL AMOUNT PAID TO TRIMBLE FOR USE OF THE SOFTWARE

GIVING RISE TO THE CLAIM. BECAUSE SOME STATES AND

JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF

LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, THE

ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.

2.5 PLEASE NOTE: THE ABOVE TRIMBLE LIMITED WARRANTY

PROVISIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO SOFTWARE PRODUCTS PURCHASED

IN THOSE JURISDICTIONS (SUCH AS COUNTRIES OF THE EUROPEAN

ECONOMIC COMMUNITY) IN WHICH PRODUCT WARRANTIES ARE

OBTAINED FROM THE LOCAL DISTRIBUTOR. IN SUCH CASE, PLEASE

CONTACT YOUR TRIMBLE DEALER FOR APPLICABLE WARRANTY

INFORMATION.

3 GENERAL.

License Agreements

3.1 This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State of

California and applicable United States Federal law without reference to

"conflict of laws" principles or provisions. The United Nations Convention on

Contracts for the International Sale of Goods will not apply to this Agreement.

Jurisdiction and venue of any dispute or court action arising from or related to this Agreement or the Software shall lie exclusively in or be transferred to the courts the County of Santa Clara, California, and/or the United States District

Court for the Northern District of California. You hereby consent and agree not to contest, such jurisdiction, venue and governing law.

3.2 Section 3.1 notwithstanding, if you acquired this product in Canada, this Agreement is governed by the laws of the Province of Ontario, Canada. In such case each of the parties to this Agreement irrevocably attorns to the jurisdiction of the courts of the Province of Ontario and further agrees to commence any litigation that may arise under this Agreement in the courts located in the Judicial District of York, Province of Ontario. If you acquired this product in the European Union, this Agreement is governed by the laws of The

Netherlands, excluding its rules governing conflicts of laws and excluding the

United Nations Convention on the International Sale of Goods. In such case each of the parties to this Agreement irrevocably attorns to the jurisdiction of the courts of The Netherlands and further agrees to commence any litigation that may arise under this Agreement in the courts of The Hague, The

Netherlands.

3.3 Trimble reserves all rights not expressly granted by this Agreement.

3.4 Official Language. The official language of this Agreement is

English. For purposes of interpretation, or in the event of a conflict between

English and versions of this Agreement in any other language, the English language version shall be controlling.

TRIMBLE NAVIGATION LIMITED

END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT

Valid as of April 6th, 2006.

1353

Legal Notices

Copyright and Trademarks

© 2014, Trimble Navigation Limited. All rights reserved.

The Globe & Triangle logo and Trimble are trademarks of Trimble Navigation

Limited.

Release Notice

This is the help for the 9.0 version of Trimble RealWorks .

Index

2

2D Grid • 77

2D Sections • 1157

2D-EasyLine Tool • 584

2D-Polyline Inspection Tool • 770

3

3D Axis Tool • 1125

3D Direction Tool • 1113

3D Inspection Analyzer Tool • 889

3D Inspection Tool • 885

3D Picking Tool • 1110

3D Plane Tool • 1136

3D Point • 922, 979, 1043, 1063, 1065

3D Point Tool • 1118

3D Radius Tool • 1129

3D Secant Tool • 1133

3D View • 75, 81

A

About Graphics Cards • 35

About Open Source Libraries and Licenses

• 40

About the Clipping Box • 390

Activate/Deactivate the Selection Mode •

1101

Active Group • 201

Add a Feature Code Library • 761

Add a Feature Point • 767

Add a Keyframe • 1189

Add a Lighting Direction • 265

Add a Link • 1349

Add a Media File • 1348

Add Another Link • 1350

Add Another Media File • 1348

Add Courses • 1240

Add Links in a Publication • 1349

Adjust an Image Matching • 717

Adjust Stations • 440

Adjust the Intensity Contrast and

Brightness • 260

Advanced Features • 1265

Advanced Options • 244

Alias/WaveFront (OBJ) Format • 1290

Align a Geometry (Z-Axis) Along a 2-Point-

Defined Axis • 1024

Align to a Global View • 290

Align to a Local View • 290

Align to a Standard View • 289

Align to a View • 285

Align to Join to two Secant Cylinders of

Same Radius • 921, 962

Align to Joint to an Existing Cylinder • 961

Aligning to Join to an Existing Cylinder •

1041

Aligning to Join to Two Secant cylinders of

Same Radius • 1042

Aligning to Join Two Existing Secant

Boxes of Same Section • 936, 975, 1048

Along a Direction • 395

Analyze the Roundness from One

Measurement Rule Line • 1261

Analyze the Vertically from one Station

Line • 1255

Angular Measurements • 338

Apply a New Texture • 620

Apply a Sampling by Step • 158

Apply a Sampling By Step • 401

Apply a Spatial Sampling • 159, 402

Apply an Adaptative Sampling • 159, 402

Apply Constraints • 1025

Apply Filters • 597

Apply the Bounds • 1103

Apply the Cutting Positions • 748, 752

Apply the Grid and Compute the

Inspection • 1251

Apply the Matching • 719


Apply the Modifications • 1231

Apply the Operation • 622

Apply the Result • 497

Apply Transformation • 517

Applying • 452

Applying and Grouping • 454

ASCII Files • 115

ASCII Format • 1294

Assign Coordinates to Picked Points • 524

Assign Coordinates to Targets • 522

AutoCAD (DWG) Format • 1298

AutoCAD (DXF) Format • 1293, 1300

AutoCAD Files • 125

AutoCAD PCG format (AutoDesk Revit

MEP) • 1289

Auto-Duplicate a Polyline • 694

Auto-Duplicate Horizontally a Polyline •

695

Auto-Duplicate Vertically a Polyline • 696

Auto-Extract a Black and White Flat Target

• 485

Auto-Extract a Point Target • 489

Auto-Extract a Point Target (Corner) • 492

Auto-Extract a Spherical Target • 481

Auto-Extract Targets and Register • 415

Auto-Match All • 451

Auto-Match Station • 451

Automatic Axis Definition • 516

Auto-Pair Targets • 437

Auto-Register Using Planes (Target-Less)

• 422

Auto-Split a 3D Inspection Cloud in a

Cluster of Clouds • 892

B

Background Color • 1346

Basic Tools • 323

Bin Folder • 1352

Blend the Intensity and Color Information •

261

Bottom Align all Planes • 649

Box • 938, 963, 997, 1051, 1063, 1065

Browse Iso-Curves • 854

Browse Keyframes • 1203

Browse Through Stations • 282

BSF Format • 1286

Build a Frame with Constraints • 380

Build a Frame without Constraints • 374

Build Polylines • 571

Bundle Adjustment • 527

By Interpolation • 566

By Offset • 565

By Station • 1317

By Volume • 1315

C

Calculate a Geometry • 940

Calculate the Contours • 577

Cancel the Extraction • 404

Capture the Screen • 182

Capture the Screen in High Resolution •

1207

Catenary Drawing Tool • 699

Center on Point • 287

Change a Color • 300

Change a Keyframe Position and

Orientation • 1194

Change a Name • 302

Change a Pipe Diameter • 1106

Change a Size • 78

Change Keyframe Direction • 1201

Change the 2D Section Position and

Orientation • 1159

Change the Clipping Box Position • 390

Change the Color of a Geometry • 256

Change the Color of a Point Cloud • 255

Change the Display Configuration of Sub-

Views • 76

Change the Manipulator Center Location •

508

Changing Dimensions • 633

Check a Projection Plane • 634

Check a Volume to Keep • 732

Check for a License Checkout Support •

54

Check for the Warranty Expiration Date •

58

Check the Adjustment • 444

Check the Current Loaded Points • 400

Check the Inspection • 789, 804

Check the Quality of the Registration • 509

Check the Registration Error • 509

Check the Roundness of a Tank • 1257

Check the Version Number of the OpenGL

Library • 39

Check the Verticality of a Tank • 1252

Check-out a Multi-User License • 56

Choose a Duplication Method • 1070

Choose a Geometry Type • 903

Choose a Reference Station • 457

Choose a Rendering Option • 640, 652

Choose a Sampling Method • 360

Choose a Section Type • 1156

Choose a Slider • 817

Choose a Station • 659

Choose a Type of Object to Extract • 821

Circular Arc • 924

Circular Torus • 918, 960, 995, 1038,

1063, 1065

Clean the Selected Point Cloud • 1233

Clipping Box Extraction Tool • 90, 387

Close all Projects • 181

Close an Inspection Map • 232

Close Projects • 181

Close the Selected Project • 181

Close the Tool • 404, 518

Close Trimble RealWorks • 94

Cloud Renderings • 87

Cloud-Based Modeler Tool • 898

Cloud-Based Registration Tool • 498

CMF Files • 133

Collaborate and Share Data • 1343

Color a Point Cloud Coded by Elevation •

263

Color Points • 719

Color Points Using Station Images • 1272

ColorBar • 237

Colored Meshes • 857

Compute Cross-Sections • 753

Cone • 994, 1061, 1064

Cone With Cone • 1062

Cone With Plane • 1062

Configure a Computer to Allow License

Checkout • 55

Connect a Plane to a Series of Planes •

1066

Connect to a Mobile Device • 146

Connect to a Series of Entities • 1065

Constrain Picking on a Line • 306

Constrain Picking on a Plane • 306

Constrain Picking on a Point • 307

Constrain to a Pair a Markers • 717

Constrain to Two Pairs of Markers • 718

Contact Trimble • 60

Continue a Polyline • 687

Index

Continue in Tracking Cylinders • 1170

Continue Tracking • 878

Contouring Tool • 573

Conventions • 1263

Convert a Geometry to a Mesh • 406

Convert to BSF Format File • 1312

Convert to E57/PTX/PTS Format File •

1320

Convert to the TZF Format • 104

Converting • 1319

Copy and Paste an Item • 296

Copy Original TZF Scan Files into Project •

165

Create 3D Points • 549

Create a 3D Inspection Cloud • 888

Create a 3D Point From a Target • 549

Create a 3D Points • 473

Create a Feature Set • 769

Create a Fitted Geometry • 884

Create a Geometry • 941

Create a Merged Mesh • 407

Create a Mesh • 606

Create a New ColorBar • 246

Create a New Group Node • 299

Create a Point Cloud from Topo Points •

548

Create a Polyline • 698

Create a Power Line • 701

Create a Rectified Image • 671

Create a Registration Report (Scan-

Based) • 552

Create a Registration Report (Target-

Based) • 551

Create a Report • 1262

Create a Single Ortho-Image • 657

Create a Topo Point • 547

Create a Video • 1205

Create all Ortho-Images • 657

Create an Ortho-Image • 643

Create Beams • 1160

Create Colored Meshes • 859

Create Iso-Curves • 856

Create Multi-Sections and Multi-1D

Inspections • 838

Create Ortho-Images • 656

Create Points • 547

Create Profiles • 879

Create Sampled Scans • 157

Create Scans from TZF Scans • 403


Create Sections and 1D Inspections • 837

Create Station Images from TZF Scan

Color • 166

Create the Built Frame • 386

Create the Contours • 582

Create the Extracted Cloud(s) • 893

Create the Extracted Cylinders • 1174

Create the Fitted Geometry • 483, 487,

490, 496

Create the Profile • 872

Create the Profile and the Cross-Sections •

759

Create the Results • 1219, 1225

Create the Segmentation Results • 359

Create Thumbnails • 163

Create/Edit Targets • 470

Creating 3D Points From Matched Targets

• 550

Creating a Polyline • 1081

Customize a Size • 78

Customize the Mouse Buttons • 267

Customize the User Interface • 90

Cut and Paste an Item • 294

Cutting Plane Tool • 557

Cylinder • 909, 956, 993, 1030, 1056, 1064

Cylinder Shape • 800

Cylinder With Circular Torus • 1058

Cylinder With Cone • 1058

Cylinder With Cylinder • 1057

Cylinder With Sphere • 1057

Cylinder-Based Projection • 777, 779, 793

D

Data Folder • 1352

Database • 80

Define a 3D Axis • 1078

Define a 3D Direction • 1074

Define a 3D Direction Using Precise

Methods • 1114

Define a 3D Direction Using Visual

Methods • 1116

Define a 3D Plane • 673, 1158

Define a 3D plane in the

Examiner/Walkthrough/Station-Based

Mode • 661

Define a Circle • 1070, 1075

Define a Cloud Rendering Setting • 259

Define a Color Range • 846

Define a Cutting Plane • 864

Define a Duration • 1204

Define a Feature Code • 763

Define a Grid • 1236

Define a Horizontal Face By Picking One

3D Point, Then Four Screen Points (Two

Horizontal Directions and Depth) • 969

Define a Horizontal Plane By Picking Two

Screen Points (Horizontal Direction) and

One 3D Point • 949, 1142

Define a Length • 1160

Define a Line • 1070, 1071

Define a Multiple Slice • 567

Define a Navigation Path • 1182

Define a Path • 750

Define a Plane • 721

Define a Plane (in all Navigation Modes

(Examiner, Walkthrough and Station-

Based)) • 945

Define a Plane By Picking Three Screen

Points (Horizontal and Steepest Slope

Directions) and One 3D Points • 951,

1144

Define a Plane in all Navigation Modes •

1138

Define a Plane in the Station-Based Mode

• 661, 946, 1139

Define a Polyline • 644, 1070, 1079

Define a Position • 728

Define a Profile • 866

Define a Projection • 792

Define a Projection Based a Cylinder • 602

Define a Projection Based on a Plane •

601

Define a Projection Based on the Screen

View • 604

Define a Projection Based the Station •

604

Define a Projection Plane • 625, 660

Define a Projection Surface • 777

Define a Section Position • 817

Define a Set of Measurement Rules • 1247

Define a Set of Points on the Cloud Data •

901, 1154, 1164

Define a Single Slice • 567

Define a Slice • 567

Define a Unique (or a Series of)

Measurement Rule(s) Above the

Courses • 1249

Define a Unique (or a Series of)

Measurement Rule(s) Below the

Courses • 1250

Define a Vertical Face By Picking One 3D

Point, Then Four Screen Points

(Horizontal Direction, Vertical Direction and Depth) • 971

Define a Vertical Plane by Picking Two

Screen Points (Horizontal Direction) and

One 3D Points • 947, 1140

Define a Width • 747

Define a Zone of Interest • 637, 647, 664

Define an Elevation Range • 574

Define an Interval Value • 576

Define an Offset Value • 729

Define Courses • 1239

Define Measurement Rules Spaced at

Regular Distance Between Two Courses

• 1248

Define no Projection • 604

Define Parameters • 1082

Define Principal Iso-Curves • 855

Define Regular Intervals • 239

Define Stations • 1237

Define the • 1082, 1083, 1084, 1085

Define the Body Parameters • 1222

Define the Color of a Level • 245

Define the Depth Parameter • 653

Define the Dipping Plate • 1221

Define the Height of the Dipping Plate •

1212

Define the Horizontal Axis by Picking Two

Points • 515

Define the Image Parameters • 651

Define the Initial Station • 1237

Define the Interval Between Two

Consecutive Sections • 1215, 1223

Define the Intervals • 245

Define the Layout of a Publication • 1345

Define the Normal Direction • 722

Define the Normal Z Direction • 939

Define the Orientation of a Plane • 559

Define the Parameters of the Body • 1214

Define the Parameters of the Sump • 1215,

1223

Define the Position of a Plane • 564

Define the Principal Contours • 580

Define the Rendering by Elevation Interval

• 185

Index

Define the Rendering by Elevation Origin •

185

Define the Rest of the Stations • 1238

Define the Start Position and the Start

Position • 745

Define the Thickness for Outside Scans •

1216, 1224

Define the Tolerance Parameter • 577

Define the Vector X Direction • 939

Define the Width of All Polylines • 184

Define Video Parameters • 1204

Defining a Grid Resolution • 729

Defining a Polyline • 929

Defining the Horizontal • 630

Delete a Bounding Polyline • 1100

Delete a Feature Code • 763

Delete a Feature Code Library • 762

Delete a Feature Point • 765

Delete a Geometry • 1273

Delete a Keyframe • 1193

Delete a Node • 685, 1098

Delete a Point (or Line) • 712

Delete a Polyline • 688

Delete a Single Polyline • 688

Delete a Target • 473

Delete all Keyframes • 1193

Delete all Polylines • 689

Delete an Element from a Mesh • 615

Delete an Existing ColorBar • 243

Delete an Item • 298

Delete and Connect Extremities • 1231

Delete Items • 594, 595

Delete Items and Prevent from Hole

Creation • 596

Delete Sections • 877

Delete the Displayed Cloud • 902, 1155,

1165

Delete the Extracted Cylinders • 1171

Detach a Multi-User License • 54

Detect Edges • 368

Determine a Resolution • 783, 795

Determine a Resolution in the

Plane/Cylinder-Based Projection • 783,

795

Determine a Resolution in the Tunnel-

Based Projection • 783, 795

Discontinuity-Based Sampling • 367

Display • 80

Display (or Hide) a Sub-View in Full • 77


Display (or Hide) all Station Marker Labels

• 223

Display (or Hide) all Station Markers • 221

Display (or Hide) Specific Station Makers •

224

Display (or Hide) the Network Visuals of a

Station • 226

Display (or Hide) the Network Visuals of all

Stations • 229

Display a Geometry • 215

Display a Point Cloud • 213

Display a Toolbar • 93

Display a TZF Scan • 234

Display a Window • 90

Display all Station Marker Labels • 223

Display all Station Markers • 222

Display an Image • 218

Display an Inspection Map • 232

Display Points in HD • 318

Display Specific Station Maker(s) • 226

Display the Clipping Box • 391

Display the Contours • 581

Display the Cross-Sections • 758

Display the Network Visuals of a Station •

227

Display the Network Visuals of all Stations

• 230

Display the Unbound Clouds and/or

Geometries • 399

Distance Measurements • 327

Dock a Window • 92

DotProduct Files • 140

Download Trimble RealWorks • 41

Download Trimble Update NetWork

License Utility • 42

Drag and Drop an Item • 293

Draw a 2D Section • 1159

Draw a Chain of Segments and/or Arcs •

677

Draw a Circle • 603, 682, 780

Draw a Circle by Defining its Center • 1076

Draw a Circular Fence • 356

Draw a Circular Polyline • 1096

Draw a Cylinder • 603, 780

Draw a Fence • 354

Draw a Fence (Lasso Only) • 355

Draw a Fence (Polygon and Lasso) • 355

Draw a Fence (Polygon Only) • 354

Draw a Line by Defining Two Points • 1072

Draw a New Polyline for Bounding • 1091

Draw a Path • 743, 752

Draw a Polygonal Polyline • 1092

Draw a Polyline • 646, 675

Draw a Polyline in a Plane Parallel to the

Screen View • 930

Draw a Polyline in a User-Defined Plane •

931

Draw a Rectangle • 680

Draw a Rectangular Fence • 356

Draw a Rectangular Polyline • 1094

Draw a Zone of Interest • 638, 665

Draw and Create a Path • 1199

Draw Polylines • 813

Duplicate Items • 1086

Duplicator Tool • 1070

E

E57 • 1321

E57 Files • 135

E57 Format • 1287

EasyPipe Tool • 1161

EasyProfile Tool • 873

Edit a Bounding Polyline • 1097

Edit a ColorBar • 238

Edit a Feature Point • 764

Edit a Grid • 1243

Edit a Mesh • 613

Edit a Polyline • 684

Edit a Section • 1229

Edit a Volume • 733

Edit an Existing ColorBar • 247

Edit an Inspection Map • 787, 803

Edit Keyframes • 1192

Edit Parameters • 564, 604, 637, 727, 781,

953, 955, 957, 959, 962, 973, 985, 988,

1124, 1128, 1129

Edit Planes • 650

Edit Polylines • 590

Edit Targets • 439

Edit the Cross-Sections • 759

Edit the Target Height • 474

Editing Data • 291

Editing Parameters • 977

Enable Data Extraction • 1351

Enforce the Use of the High Performance

Graphics Card • 36

Enhance a Mesh With Break Lines Using

Polyline(s) • 617

Enter a Trimble Oil, Gas and Chemical

License File • 50

Enter Manually an Angle • 1006

Equalize Image Color • 1270

Equalize Point Cloud Color • 1269

Equalize Point Cloud Luminance • 1268

Examiner • 269

Expand and Shrink the Project Tree • 207

Explore in the 3D View • 210

Explore in the Images Tree • 211

Exploring Data • 205

Export a Feature Code Library • 762

Export a Geometry to SketchUp • 1107

Export a Selection as a File • 1281

Export an Existing ColorBar • 243

Export an Inspection Map • 1323

Export as a DGN Format File • 1178

Export as a DWG Format File • 1176

Export as a DXF Format File • 1177

Export Feature Sets • 1310

Export Horizontal Slices • 1324

Export Images • 1306

Export Inspection Maps • 1323

Export Measurements • 1308

Export Object Properties • 1305

Export Ortho-Images • 1307

Export Pipe Center Lines • 1175

Export Sections • 827

Export the Results • 1220, 1226

Export to RMX Files • 533

Export to TZF Files • 532

Export TZF Images • 1311

Export Vertical Slices • 1334

Export With Advanced Features • 1302

Exporting Data • 1275

Extend (or Stretch) a Thumbnail • 704

Extend Between Two Other Geometries •

1064

Extend to One Other Geometry • 1056

Extract a Black and White Flat Target •

484

Extract a Point Target • 488

Extract a Point Target (Corner) • 491

Extract a Spherical Target • 480

Extract an Initial Cylinder by Picking • 1166

Extract Clouds From 3D Inspection Clouds

• 890

Index

Extract Colored Meshes • 858

Extract Iso-Curves • 852

Extract Points from a Specific Area • 401

Extract Targets • 480

Extract to a New Mesh • 616

Extrusion • 929, 978, 997, 1047, 1063,

1065

F

Feature Code Libraries • 760

Feature Codes • 762

Feature Points • 764

Feature Set Tool • 760

Fence a Set of Points • 881

Fence an Area • 482, 486, 494, 612, 735,

788, 804, 841

Fill Holes • 736

Fill Line Breaks • 598

Filter a 3D Inspection Cloud • 887

Filter all Sections • 1227, 1259

Filter an Area • 788, 804

Filter by Range • 160, 1313

Filter by Zone • 160, 1313

Filter From an Elevation Range • 734

Filter Sections • 1253

Filter the 2D Inspection Result • 773

Filter the Altitudes • 850

Filter the Inspection Result • 789

Filter the Scan Data • 159

Filtering • 1312

Find an Item in the Project Tree • 209

Finding the Best Cross Plane • 563, 724

Fit a Geometry to Point Cloud [From Scan

Items] • 472

Fit a Geometry to Point Cloud [From

Unfitted Items] • 475

Fit a Plane • 563, 724

Fit an Axis • 376

Fit the Selected Point Cloud With a Model

• 1235

Fit With a Geometry • 562, 723, 882

Fitting Tool • 880

Fix to an Axis • 912, 917, 1033, 1037,

1039

Flip an Edge • 618

Focus on Targets • 468

Folder • 1318, 1321

Font Color • 1347


Force Leved • 535

Force Unleved • 541

Frame Creation Tool • 372

From a Cylinder Inspection Map • 1329,

1339

From a Plane Inspection Map • 1326, 1336

From a Tunnel Inspection Map • 1332,

1341

From Station View • 446

From Target View • 449

From the Menu Bar • 301

From the Property Window • 300

G

General Preferences • 187

Generate a Key Plan from the Current

View • 412

Generate a key Plan from TZF Scans •

411

Generate Key Plans • 408

Generate Point Color-Coding by Height •

164

Generating Preview Scans • 432

Geometry • 215

Geometry Creator Tool • 942

Geometry Modifier Tool • 989, 1057, 1058,

1059, 1060, 1061, 1062

Georeferencing Tool • 519

Get all Points • 199

Get Familiar With the Working

Environment • 65

Get Remaining Points • 200

Getting Started with Trimble RealWorks •

61

Go to a Shooting Position • 288

Google Earth (KMZ) Format • 1282

Gray-Scale Intensity With Color Rendering

• 88

Gridded Data • 136

Group and Object Nodes • 202

Grouping • 453

H

HASP License Files • 51

HD Display Mode Inside a Tool • 319

HD Display Mode Outside a Tool • 321

HD Display Preferences • 185

Hide (or Show) a Thumbnail • 703

Hide (or Show) the 2D Grid • 77

Hide a Geometry • 216

Hide a Point Cloud • 214

Hide a Toolbar • 93

Hide a TZF Scan • 234

Hide a Window • 91

Hide all Except those Selected • 217

Hide all Items • 216

Hide all Station Marker Labels • 223

Hide all Station Markers • 222

Hide an Image • 219

Hide an Inspection Map • 232

Hide Specific Station Marker(s) • 225

Hide the Clipping Box • 391

Hide the Network Visuals of a station • 228

Hide the Network Visuals of all Stations •

230

Hide the Unbound Clouds and/or

Geometries • 400

Hide/Display the Input • 651

Hide/Display the Input Data • 579

Hide/Show a ColorBar • 237

Horizontal Slices from a Cylinder Map •

832

Horizontal Slices from a Plane Map • 828

Horizontal Slices from a Tunnel Map • 835

Horizontal Tank Calibration Tool • 1221

I

Image • 217

Image Matching Tool • 702

Image Rectification Tool • 658

Images • 110

Images Tab • 204

Images Tree • 171, 197

Import a ColorBar • 242

Import a Feature Code Library • 761

Import a Project File • 143

Import a Surveying Network ASCII Format

File • 123

Import an Image Into a Project • 152

Import FLS Files • 144

Import from TZF Files • 531

Import SteelWorks Catalogs • 1150

Improve an Image Matching • 716

Improvement Program Preferences • 189

In a Plane • 396

In the List Window • 202

In the WorkSpace Window • 202

Include Media in a Publication • 1347

Input a Value • 1212, 1214, 1221, 1222

Insert a Feature Point • 766

Insert a Node • 686

Inserting a Middle Node • 1100

Inspection Map • 231

Inspection Map Analyzer Tool • 806

Inspection Maps • 785, 797

Install Trimble RealWorks • 43

Installing Trimble RealWorks • 31

Intensity Mapping • 1314

Intensity-Based Sampling • 365

Intersect Tool • 1055

Iso-Curves • 851

IXF Files • 127

J

JobXML, JOB and RAW Files • 112

K

Keep In (or Out) • 357

Keep Only the Displayed Cloud • 902,

1155, 1165

Keep Positive Values Only • 241

L

LandXML Format • 1295

LAS and LAZ Files • 134

LAS Format • 1287

LAZ format • 1289

Legal Notices • 1361

License Agreements • 1355

License Files • 48

Line • 1063, 1065

List • 70

Load Data • 315

Load Existing Rectified Image Parameters

• 661

Load Keyframes from a File • 1191

Load Markers • 710

Locate a HASP License File • 52

Locate an Item in the Project Tree • 208

Lock a Center • 908, 1029

Lock a Center Line Radius • 919, 1040

Lock a Center on a Line • 908, 1030

Lock a Pipe Radius • 920, 1040

Index

Lock a Radius • 908, 912, 1029, 1033

Lock an Axis • 383

Lock on a Plane • 923, 925, 1043, 1044

Lock on Primitive • 307

Lock the Origin • 381

Lock the Origin and an Axis • 384

Lock to Line (or Axis) • 923, 1043

Logo • 1345

M

Main • 79

Make Horizontal • 1026

Make Parallel • 905, 910, 916, 927, 1027,

1031, 1036, 1038, 1045

Make Parallel to a Direction • 933

Make Parallel to a Plane • 919, 925

Make Perpendicular • 906, 911, 917, 928,

1028, 1032, 1037, 1039, 1046

Make Perpendicular to a Direction • 919,

925

Make Perpendicular to a Plane • 934

Make Perpendicular to Axis • 945

Make Secant to a Box (With Same

Section) • 939

Make Secant to a Cylinder • 913, 1034

Make Vertical • 1026, 1031, 1035, 1044,

1047

Making Parallel to a Direction • 1052

Making Secant to a Box (With Same

Section) • 1054

Manage SteelWorks Catalogs • 1150

Managing the Loading and HD Rendering of Points • 313

Manipulate a Label • 583

Manually Duplicate a Polyline • 697

Map With a Texture • 619

Match an Image • 714

Match an item With Another Item • 542

Match Stations • 544

Match Targets • 543

Matched Station Tab • 447

Matched Target Tab • 450

Matched Targets • 448

Maximize (or Minimize) a Thumbnail • 704

Measure a 3D Point • 345

Measure a Between-Geometry Angle • 344

Measure a Distance • 328


Measure a Distance Along a Vertical Axis •

331

Measure a Distance in a Horizontal Plane •

329

Measure a Distance to a Fitted Plane • 334

Measure a Fitted Cylinder Diameter • 336

Measure a Geometry Slope Angle • 343

Measure a Horizontal Angle • 340

Measure a Point-to-Geometry Distance •

337

Measure a Slope Angle • 342

Measure a Vertical Clearance Distance

(Downward) • 333

Measure a Vertical Clearance Distance

(Upward) • 332

Measure an Angle • 339

Measure an Orientation • 346

Measure an Orientation Using Three

Points • 348

Measure the Gap Between the Reference

Cloud and the Moving Cloud • 510

Measurement Tool • 325

Media Tools • 1179

Menu Bar • 67, 86

Merge Point Clouds • 303

Merge Several Projects In One • 168

Mesh Creation Tool • 599

Mesh Editing Tool • 607

MicroStation (DGN) Format • 1291

Model Automatically Polylines • 587

Model Manually Polylines • 589

Model the Extracted Cylinders • 1173

Modeling Tools • 897

Models Tab • 203

Models Tree • 169, 196

Modify a Projection Plane • 629

Modify a Projection Plane's Size • 662

Modify a Shape • 990

Modify a Zone of Interest • 667

Modify Built Elements • 876

Modify Feature Points • 765

Modify Manually a Section • 1229

Modify Markers • 710

Modify Stations • 535

Modify Target Matching • 542

Modify the Clipping Box Shape • 392

Modify the Instrument Height • 536

Modify the Path for Input TZF Scan Files •

161

Modify the Position of the Projection Plane

• 663

Modify the Position of the Target • 495

Modify the Selected Plane Bounds • 1089

Modify the Size of a Plane • 1146

Modify the Target Position • 479

Modify, Repair and Remove Trimble

RealWorks • 47

Move a Bounding Polyline • 1102

Move a Feature Point • 768

Move a Geometry • 999

Move a Geometry Along a User Defined

Vector • 1022

Move a Geometry by Picking Entities •

1008

Move a Geometry Using a 2-Point Defined

Vector • 1023

Move a Node • 686, 1099

Move a Point (or Line) • 711

Move a Polyline • 689

Move a Thumbnail • 704

Move a Toolbar • 93

Move the Circular Path Along a Direction •

1185

Move the Circular Path in a Plane • 1186

Move the Path Along a Direction • 1202

Move the Path in a Plane • 1203

Move the Profile • 867

Multi-Ortho-Projection Tool • 644

Multi-Select • 592

N

Name-Based Bundle Adjustment • 528

Navigate Through the Sections • 822

Navigate Under Permanent Constraints •

277

Navigate Under Temporary Constraints •

273

Navigate Within a Station • 283

Navigate without Constraints • 269

Navigating Through Data • 267

Navigation Constraint Tools • 78

Navigation Preferences • 186

Non-Gridded Data • 138

Not Participate in TSIP • 189

O

Oil, Gas & Chemical License Files • 48

Open a FLS Format File • 119

Open a Project File • 141

Open a Surveying Network ASCII Format

File • 122

Open an Image • 220

Open an Inspection Map • 232

Open an IQscan Format File • 120

Open the Tool • 326, 353, 360, 373, 388,

416, 423, 434, 456, 465, 498, 514, 520,

558, 573, 584, 599, 608, 624, 644, 658,

672, 699, 702, 720, 739, 760, 770, 776,

791, 807, 862, 873, 880, 885, 889, 898,

943, 989, 1055, 1070, 1088, 1161,

1181, 1211, 1221, 1227, 1232

Open Trimble RealColor • 149

Open Trimble Scan Explorer • 148

Open Trimble SketchUp • 150

Open Your First Project • 64

Options • 431

Organization of Data • 191

Orientation Measurements • 345

Orientation Tool • 513

Ortho-Projection Tool • 623

Output Files • 1314

Output Folder • 1346

Overlap the Reference Cloud and the

Moving Cloud • 511

Overwrite an Existing Texture • 622

P

Pan a Polyline • 690

Pan Along a Horizontal Axis Constraint •

278

Pan Along a Vertical Axis Constraint • 278

Pan Along an Axis of the Home Frame •

1000

Pan Along its Own Axes • 1002

Pan Along the Horizontal Direction

Constraint • 275

Pan Along the Vertical Direction Constraint

• 274

Pan in a Direction • 271, 281

Pan the Clipping Box • 394

Pan the Moving Cloud • 506

Pan the Profile • 869

Partial Deselect • 593

Partial Reselection Mode • 594

Participate in TSIP • 189

Index

Pass an Axis Through a Point • 911, 928,

1032, 1046

Pass Through a Point • 906, 1028, 1030

Pass Through an Axis • 1028

Pass/Fail Criteria • 1262

Path Mode • 1197

PDMS Macro Format • 1286

Performing Basic Operations • 95

Performing Operations on TZF Scans •

153

Pick a Clipping Box Position • 389

Pick a Color • 844

Pick a Cylinder to be Secant With • 1134

Pick a Feature Point • 764

Pick a Height • 1213, 1215, 1222, 1223

Pick a Pair of Lines • 709

Pick a Pair of Points • 707

Pick a Plane and a Segment • 982, 1121

Pick a Plane and Select Another Object •

1017

Pick a Plane, and then Pan • 1014

Pick a Point • 979, 1118

Pick a Point from Other Geometry, then

Rotate • 1013

Pick a Radial Entity • 1129

Pick a Triangle • 611

Pick a Vertex • 610

Pick an Axial Entity • 1125

Pick an Axial Geometry • 988

Pick an Axis and a Point • 1131

Pick an Axis from an Object • 781

Pick an Axis From an Object • 603

Pick an Axis from Other Geometry, then

Pan • 1009

Pick an Axis from Other Geometry, then

Rotate • 1011

Pick an Edge • 610

Pick an Element • 609

Pick an Entity With a Direction • 964

Pick an Entity with Center • 983, 1122

Pick an Entity with Direction • 1111

Pick an Entity With Direction • 945

Pick an Item • 304

Pick an Object Local Frame • 560, 725

Pick an Object's Local Frame • 379

Pick and Pan a Plane • 1015

Pick and Select a Plane • 1019

Pick Four Screen Points • 968

Pick in the 2D Constraint Mode • 307


Pick in the 3D Constraint Mode • 305

Pick Markers • 706

Pick Points • 375, 660, 811

Pick the Bottom Left Corner of a Box • 967

Pick the Low and High Elevations • 576

Pick the Origin • 517

Pick the Start Position and the End

Position • 746

Pick Three Pairs of Points • 502

Pick Three Planes • 980, 1119

Pick Three Points • 378, 561, 700, 726,

946, 957, 959

Pick Two Axial Entities • 985

Pick Two Planes • 987, 1127

Pick Two Points • 562, 725, 946, 955, 961,

986, 1126

Pick Two Points of a Diameter • 1130

Pick Two Points of a Radius • 1130

Pick Two Screen Points • 945

Picking a plane and selecting another object. • 1021

Picking Parameters • 89

Picking Three Points • 626

Plane • 904, 944, 1025, 1059, 1064

Plane Bounding Tool • 1087

Plane Parallel to the Screen View • 727

Plane Shape • 798

Plane With Circular Torus • 1059

Plane With Extruded Entity • 1060

Plane With Sphere • 1061

Plane-Based Projection • 778, 792

Plant Tools • 1149

Point Cloud • 212

Point Measurement • 345

Pointools Format • 1292

Points • 108

Polyline Drawing Tool • 672

Post-Process TZF Scans • 154

Preview a 3D Inspection Cloud • 886

Preview a Mesh • 605

Preview a Multiple Slice • 569

Preview a Rectified Image • 669

Preview a Single Ortho-Image • 654

Preview a Single Slice • 568

Preview a Video • 1204

Preview a Volume • 730

Preview an Image Matching • 715

Preview an Ortho-Image • 641

Preview BSF Format File • 1318

Preview the Contours • 578

Preview the Inspection • 784, 796

Preview the Profile and the Cross-Sections

• 754

Preview the Results • 1217, 1224

Print a Plot • 826

Print a Profile (or Cross-Sections) • 756

Print an Inspection Map • 787, 803

Print an Ortho-Image • 642, 656

Print Inspection Maps • 860

Print Preference • 188

Process Data • 316

Profile Matcher Tool • 861

Profile/Cross-Section Tool • 739

Project a 3D Point on a Plane • 984, 1123

Project an Image Matching • 718

Project Cloud • 198

Project Data • 193

Projecting a Box onto a Plane • 965, 1052

Projects With TZF Scan Files Inside the

RWI Folder • 176

Projects With TZF Scan Files Outside the

RWI Folder • 175

Property • 72

PTS • 1322

PTS Files • 140

PTX • 1322

PTX Files • 139

Publish a Project • 1344

Q

Quick Mode • 1183

R

Random Sampling • 362

RealWorks Files • 98

Rectangular Torus • 935, 974, 998, 1048,

1063, 1065

Redo an Operation • 180

Reduce Data Size • 1351

Reference Station • 420, 425

Refine a Measurement • 350

Refine a Mesh • 614

Refine Automatically the Registration • 504

Refine Interactively the Registration • 505

Refine Registration Using Scans • 455

Refine the Registration • 460

Re-Fit a Geometry to Point Cloud [From

Fitted Items] • 477

Refuse to Convert to the TZF Format • 103

Register for a Trimble RealWorks Oil, Gas

& Chemical License File • 49

Register Stations • 421, 426

Register Stations With Imported RMX Files

• 534

Registered Stations • 448

Registration Details • 445

Registration Report • 429

Regular Cone • 915, 958, 1035

Remove a Known Point • 540

Remove a Link • 1350

Remove a Media File • 1349

Remove an Existing Texture • 621

Remove Courses • 1242

Remove Peaks from a Mesh • 614

Remove SteelWorks Catalog List • 1150

Rename a Feature Code Library • 761

Rename a Target • 546

Render a Geometry • 253

Render a Point Cloud • 251

Render a Point Cloud With Gray-Scale

Intensity With Color • 257

Rendering Data • 250

Reorder Points (or Lines) • 713

Report the Volume and Surface

Information • 850

Re-Project TZF Scans • 155

Reset all Points (or Lines) • 713

Resize a Path • 1082

Resize a Zone of Interest • 639

Resize the Circular Path • 1187

Reverse the Path Direction • 1085, 1202

Reverse the Profile • 871

Reverse the Start Position and the End

Position • 747

Reverse Triangles • 615

RIEGL Scan Project Files • 128

Rotate 90° Around Vertical Axis • 636

Rotate a Geometry • 1004

Rotate a Polyline • 692

Rotate Around a Horizontal Axis Constraint

• 279

Rotate Around a Vertical Axis Constraint •

279

Rotate Around an Axis • 385

Index

Rotate Around the Center of the Screen •

270

Rotate Around the Horizontal Direction

Constraint • 274

Rotate Around the Vertical Direction

Constraint • 275

Rotate Counterclockwise 90° • 516, 635

Rotate the Clipping Box • 397

Rotate the Moving Cloud • 507

Rotate the Profile • 868

Rotate With Constraint Around an Axis

Perpendicular to the Screen • 276, 280

S

Sample the Scan Data • 158

Sampling by Step • 1320

Sampling Tool • 360

Save a Measurement • 350

Save a Project • 178

Save a Project As • 178

Save a Volume in a Report • 733

Save a Volume in the Database • 738

Save in RTF Format • 431

Save Markers • 714

Save Projects • 178

Save the 2D Inspection Result • 774

Save the Adjustment Result • 452

Save the Cutting Result(s) • 572

Save the Inspection • 790, 805

Save the Inspection Results • 1264

Save the Merged Project • 173

Save the Registration Result • 512

Save the Result • 526

Save the Results • 815

Saving Keyframes to a File • 1192

Saving Results • 598

Scale a Plot • 826

Scale the Profile • 870

Scale the Profile and the Cross-Sections •

757

Scan Creation • 419

Scan Folder Name • 1318

Scan-Based Sampling • 363

Scans • 107

Scans Tab • 203

Scans Tree • 168, 194

Segment • 926, 986, 996, 1044

Segmentation Tool • 89, 352


Select • 809, 816, 840

Select a Catalog File • 1156

Select a Frame Axis • 560, 602, 723

Select a Group of Segments • 749

Select a Method • 740

Select a Model for Inspection • 771

Select a New Cloud Data • 899, 1152,

1162

Select a Path • 741, 751, 1198

Select a Polyline • 645, 683, 932

Select a Projection Mode • 600

Select a Projection Plane • 655

Select a Reference • 1157

Select a Reference Frame • 374

Select a Reference Station • 435

Select a Section to Edit • 1228

Select a Station • 466, 521

Select a Subset of Stations for the

Refinement • 458

Select a Table • 1157

Select a TZF Scan • 467

Select an Element • 609

Select an Existing Polyline for Bounding •

1090

Select an Existing Profile • 874

Select an Image • 703

Select an Initial Cylinder for Tracking •

1167

Select Items • 591

Select Items from a Section • 1230

Select Markers • 705

Select the Reference Cloud and the

Moving Cloud • 499

Selecting a Polyline • 1080

Selection List • 73

Set a Density • 652

Set a Direction • 1200

Set a Displacement Mode • 269

Set a Display Mode • 769

Set a Projection Mode • 284

Set a Resolution • 639, 651

Set a Slider Position by Defining Values •

820

Set a Slider to a Position by Drag and

Drop • 818

Set a Slider to a Position by Picking • 819

Set a Thickness • 753, 771, 866

Set a Tolerance • 753

Set a TZF Scan as a Main Scan • 235

Set an Axial Entity Axis as Axis • 380

Set an Image Resolution • 668

Set as Home Frame • 1267

Set Coordinates • 559

Set From Frame • 780

Set Over a Known Point • 538

Set Preferences • 183

Set the Center of Rotation by Picking a

Point • 289

Set the Head Up Option • 268

Set the Interval Parameter • 747

Set the Isometric Mode • 285

Set the Low and High Elevation Values •

575

Set the Perspective Mode • 284

Set the Section Size • 875

Setting a Position • 632

Setting Corners • 627

Shift a Course • 1246

Shift a Project • 405

Shift a Station • 1244

Shortcut Keys • 87

SIMA ASCII Files • 124

Simplify the Modeled Polyline • 597

Smooth a Mesh • 614

Smooth Cells • 737

Smooth the Extracted Cylinders • 1172

Smooth the Path • 1202

Solids for AutoCAD • 1296

Spatial Sampling • 361, 1313

Specify Coordinates • 375

Sphere • 907, 954, 991, 1029, 1059, 1064

Split a Rectified Image • 670

Split an Ortho-Image • 642

Standard Selection Mode • 592

Standard Views • 88

Start and End Positions • 744

Start Page • 67, 68

Start the Tool • 1151

Start Tracking Cylinders • 1169

Start Trimble RealWorks • 63

Station • 221

Station Maker List • 74

Station Markers and Station Marker Labels

• 88

Station Registration Parameters • 530

Station-Based • 281

Stations • 106

SteelWorks Creator Tool • 1151

Step-by-Step Mode • 1188

Storage Tank Application • 45

Storage Tank Tools • 1209

Sub-Tools • 1109

Supported Formats in RealWorks • 97

Surface to Model Inspection Tool • 791

Surveying Network ASCII Files • 121

Swap a Local License for a Network

License and Vice Versa • 51

Swap the Axes • 827

Switch to an Existing ColorBar • 242

Switch to Other Side • 1068

Switch to the Cut/Fill ColorBar • 248

Switch to the Default ColorBar • 249

System Requirements • 33

T

Tank Calibration Check Tool • 1227

Target Analyzer Tool • 464

Target Types • 418

Target-Based Registration Tool • 433

Targets Tab • 204

Targets Tree • 170, 195

The • 740, 748

The License File is Close to the Expiration

Date • 58

The License File is Expired • 59

Three Sub-View Configuration • 76

Tilt (or Rotate) • 280

Title • 1345

Toolbars • 68, 79, 92

Tools [in Modeling] • 85

Tools [in OfficeSurvey] • 84

Tools [in Registration] • 83

Tools and Commands • 79

Tools in the Modeling Module • 895

Tools in the OfficeSurvey Module • 555

Tools in the Registration Module • 413

Top Align all Planes • 648

Topography-Based Sampling • 370

Trimble 3D Scanning Files • 97

Trimble RealWorks • 33

Trimble RealWorks Plant Tables • 44

Trimble Scan Explorer • 33

Trimble Scan Explorer - Web Viewer • 34

Trimble Survey Project Files • 105

Trimble TX5 and Other FLS Files • 118

Tunnel Shape • 802

Index

Tunnel-Based Projection • 782, 794

Twin Surface Inspection Tool • 775

Two Sub-View Configuration • 76

TZF Files • 99

TZF Scan • 233

TZS Files • 103

U

Unbound Clouds and Geometries • 399

Undo an Operation • 179

Undock a Window • 91

Units Preferences • 188

Un-match a Target • 545

Unmatched Station Tab • 448

Unmatched Target Tab • 451

Unmatched Targets • 448, 449

Unregistered Stations • 449

Update a Multi-User License • 57

Update the Network • 496

Update Trimble RealWorks • 46

Upgrade a Single-User License • 53

Use a Multi-User License • 53

Use a Single-User License • 53

Use Cartesian • 308

Use Constraints • 903

Use Polar • 308

Use the Current View as 3D Plane • 1158

Use the Fit Axis Mode • 382

Use the Highest Point Picking Mode • 309

Use the Lowest Point Picking Mode • 311

Use the Manipulator • 1005

Use the Pick Axis Mode • 382

Use the Standard Picking Mode • 304

Use the Surface Values • 848

Use the Three Point Pick Mode • 381

Use the Width of the Segment • 752

User Defined • 1283

User Interface • 66

Using Existing Parameters • 628

Using the Current Camera View • 627

UTM to WGS84 Latitude and Longitude •

1285

V

Validate a 3D Direction • 1117

Validate a 3D Point • 1124

Validate a Plane • 1147

Validate an 3D Axis • 1128


Validate the Bounds • 1105

Vertical Slices from a Cylinder Map • 834

Vertical Slices from a Plane Map • 830

Vertical Slices from a Tunnel Map • 836

Vertical Tank Calibration Tool • 1211

Vertical Tank Inspection Tool • 1232

Video Creator • 1181

View a Published Project • 1353

View Alignment • 82

View from a Projection Plane' Side • 634,

656

View Inwards/Outwards • 1184

View Manager • 76, 89

View Published Data • 1352

View the 2D Inspection Result • 772

View the Difference Plot • 824

View the Registration Report • 462

Viewer Preferences • 184

Visualize a TZF Scan Preview • 235

Visualize the Extracted Targets Within a

TZF Scan Preview • 236

Visualizing Data • 212

Volume Calculation Tool • 720

W

Walkthrough • 280

Walkthrough a Scene (or Objects) • 281

Welcome • 15

What's New in Trimble RealWorks • 19

When all Selected Stations are Registered

• 441

When all Stations are not Registered • 443

When Some of the Selected Stations are

Registered • 442

Window • 85

Windows • 68, 90

With Wizard • 116

Without Wizard • 117

Working Frame Tool • 85

WorkSpace • 69

Z

Z+F Import Filters • 131

Z+F Scan Files • 130

Zoom (Angle) • 272

Zoom (Distance) • 272

Zoom all • 286

Zoom In (or Out) • 272, 286

Zoom on Selection • 287